
aass_:L"D_L 
Book^ > A L 



OFjriOIAI^ UONAXION. 



INDIANA UNIVERSITY 

182O-I9O4 



"IT • SHALL • BE • THE • DUTY • OF • THE • GENERAL 
ASSEMBLY • AS • SOON • AS • CIRCUMSTANCES • WILL 
PERMIT • TO • PROVIDE • BY • LAW ■ FOR • A • GENERAL 
SYSTEM OF EDUCATION -ASCENDING IN -A- REGULAR 
GRADATION • FROM • TOWNSHIP • SCHOOLS • TO • A 
STATE . UNIVERSITY -WHEREIN • TUITION - SHALL ■ BE 
GRATIS - AND - EQUALLY - OPEN • TO • ALL." 

— Indiana State Constitution of 1816. 



NOV 19 1904 
D. of D, 



Indiana University 

I 820 -I 904 

Historical Sketch 

Development of the Course of Instruction 

Bibliography 




EDITED BY 

SAMUEL BANNISTER HARDING, Ph.D. 

Junior Professor of European History 



Bloomington, Indiana 

publisbcO bB tbe IHniversitg 
1904 






Wm. B. Burford 

Contractor for State Printing and Binding 

Indianapolis 



MGV 19 1904 
D. ofD, 



Pref 



ace 



Tlie authorities of Indiana University, after mature deliberation, decided 
not to make an exhibit at the Louisiana Purchase Exposition at St. Louis — 
partly for lack of sufficient space, and partly because of the great expense 
necessary to make an adequate showing. Instead, it was determined to pre- 
pare a book which should set forth in permanent form, for those interested, 
the salient features of the history and present status of the University. Out 
of this determination arose the present volume. 

In the first of the three parts into which the book is divided, are set forth 
the chief facts in the external history of the institution, — its incorporation 
in the fourth year after the admission of Indiana as a State into the Union, 
and the steps by which it passed successively from a Seminary to a College, 
from a College to a University in name, and ultimately to a University in 
fact. 

In the second part the attempt has been made to trace the development 
of the course of instruction, from the condition presented in the first cata- 
logue in 1831, to the curriculum as at present arranged. This development, 
it is believed, is typical especially for Western State Universities ; and it is 
hoped that the careful study which is here presented, may prove a real con- 
tribution to the history of education in America. 

The third part of the book is given up to a list of publications by the 
Faculty, alumni, and students of the University. One test — though by no 
means the sole one — of the efficiency of a University, is afforded by the 
quality and quantity of the publications put forth by its members. From 
the data here presented, it is believed that a fairly correct idea may be 
formed of the character of the intellectual discipline which has been here 
imparted at different stages of the University's history. 

The illustrations, aside from the charts — which show the development 
of the course of instruction, and the recent growth of the University in 
comparison with the total body of colleges of Liberal Arts in the United 
States — have been selected with a view to affording means of judging of 



Vll 



Indiana University 

the work of the University at the present time. In addition, therefore, to 
the ordinary views of bnihlings, laboratories, and the Kke, considerable space 
is devoted to representations of instruments devised for carrying on special 
lines of work, and to reproductions of photographs and drawings illustrative 
of results attained by some representative researches in various Departments 
of the University. 

Many persons have assisted in the preparation of this volume. The gen- 
eral plan of the work, which was outlined with reference to a possible exhibit 
at St. Louis, was submitted to Professor Samuel B. Harding and has been 
carried out entirely under his editorial supervision. The plan for a study of 
the University curriculum, which had been developed by a number of pre- 
liminary studies, was proposed to Assistant Professor Lewis C. Carson of 
the Department of Philosophy, and has been carried out by him with pains- 
taking thoroughness. The historical sketch with which the volume opens was 
compiled by Professor William A. Rawles of the Department of Economics 
and Social Science. Mr. W. A. Alexander of the Library staff has aided 
much in the compilation of the bibliography; Professor John A. Miller of 
the Department of Mechanics and Astronomy, and Professor John A. Berg- 
strom of the Department of Education, have superintended the preparation 
of the charts ; Associate Professor Alfred M. Brooks of the Fine Arts Depart- 
ment has rendered aid in the selection of the illustrations ; and the proof of 
large portions of the bibliographical section has been read by Professor Carl 
H. Eigenmanu of the Department of Zoology, Assistant Professor Edgar 
E. Cumings of the Department of Geology, and Associate Professor Carl 

Osthaus of the Department of German. 

W1LT.1AM 1^0 WE Bryan, 

President of the Unirersitij. 
Bloomington, Indiana, July 14, 1904. 



Vlll 



Table of Contents 



Preface 



Page 
vii 



PART I. 



-HISTORICAL SKETCH 

By William A. Rawles, Ph.D., Junior Professor of Political Econoray 



PART n.— DEVELOPMENT OF THE COURSE OF INSTRUCTION 

By Lewis Clinton Carson, Ph.D., Assistant Professor of Philosophy 

I. Introductory 35 

II. Departments of Liberal Arts 

1. The General Development to 1887 36 

2. Special Studies 67 

3. The Major Subject System 72 

Jr. Departments as now Constituted 76 

III. Relation of the University to the School System of the State 

L Former Preparatory Department 149 

2. CoMjVhssioned High School System 162 

IV. Graduate School 161 

V. School of Law 167 

VI. School of Medicine 176 

VII. Summer Session 180 

VIII. Biological Station 183 

IX. Departments now Discontinued 

1. Agricultural Department 188 

2. Normal Department and Model Schools .... 189 
8. Engineering .......... 191 

4. Military Department ........ 192 



PART III.— BIBLIOGRAPHY 

I. Publications by Present Members of the Faculty 
n. Publications by Former Members of the Faculty 
III. Publications by Alumni and Students . . 



197 
225 
251 



IX 



List of Illustrations 



Maxwell Hall 

David H. Maxwell, M.D. 

President Andrew Wylie 

The Old College 

Owen Hall 

Wylie Hall 

KiRKWOOD Hall 

Science Hall 

Men's Gymnasium 

Students' Building 

Charts — Development of the Course of Instruction 
Number of Instructors, Coiu-ses, and Hours 
Comparative Increase since 1890 in Number 
Comparative Increase since 1890 in Number 
Comparative Increase since 1890 in Number 
Ratio of Students to Instructors 

Greek — A Recitation Room 

Library — General Reading Room 
Cataloguing Room 

Walks in the Campus 

History" — Seminary Room 

Economics — Hand Grist-mill 

Philosophy" — Main Lecture Room 
Neurological Laboratory 
Preparation Room in Neurology 
Psychological Laboratory 

Education — Pedagogical Museum 
Pendulum Chronoscope 
Tachistoscope 
Apparatus for Combined Intervals 
Apparatus for Experiments upon Memory 
A New Form of Ergograph 

Mathematics — Seminary Room 



of Instruction 
of Undergraduates 
of Graduate Students 
of Members of Faculty 



PAGE 

Frontispiece 
3 
7 

14 
22 
24 
26 
28 
29 
facing 30 
48-50 
57 



68 
70 
71 
74 
76 
78 
79 
82-83 
85 
87 



90 
91 

92-93 
94 
95 
96 
97 

98-99 
100 



XI 



Indiana University 

PAGE 

Astronomy — Kirkwood Observatory 101 

Twelve- inch Refractiug Telescope 102 

Fifteen-iuch Reflecting Telescope 103 

Photographs of the Moon . • 104-105 

Drawings of Siinspots ......... 106 

Nebula of Orion 107 

Comet O, 1903 108-109 

Physics — Lecture Room . . . . . . . . ■ - .110 

Elementary Laboratory . . , . . . . . .111 

Modifiecl Wehnelt Interrupter ........ 112 

Brashear Mounting for Rowland Grating . . . . .113 

Apparatus for the Study of N-Rays 114 

Chemistry — Lecture Room .......... 115 

Laboratory for Organic and Pliysiological Chemistry . . .116 
Laboratory for Qualitative Analysis . . . . . .116 

Apparatus for Measurement of Single Potential Differences . . 117 
Laboratory for Electro-Chemistry ....... 118 

Laboratory for Bacteriology . . . . . . . .118 

Rotating Cathode for Rajnd Quantitative Analysis by Electrolysis . 119 
Iodoform from Acetone by Electrolysis . . . . . . 120 

Differentiation of Bacillus Typhi Abdominalis and Bacillus Coli 

Communis ........... 121 

Geology — Research Laboratories . . . . . . ■ . . 122-123 

Geological Museum .......... 124 

Mineralogical Laboratory ......... 124 

Lectiire Room . . . . . . . . . . . 125 

Zoology — Elementary Laboratory ......... 126 

Office and Private Laboratory ........ 127 

Models to Illustrate Lectures ........ 128 

Embryological Laboratory ........ 128 

A Cuban Blind-fish with Unborn Young ...... 129 

Ablystoma Opacum . . . . . . . . . .129 

South American Fresh-water Fishes .."... 130 

Aberrant Spelerpes Maculicanda ....... 131 

Leptocephalus of the American Eel ....... 131 

Leptocephalus ........... 131 

Differentiation of the Eyes in the Blind-fishes of North America . 132 

Cave Farm near Mitchell, Ind. 133 

Pliotographs of Bird-life .134 

xii 



List of Illustrations 



Botany — Laboratory for Plant Physiology .... 

Photomicrograpli of a Vascular Bundle of Sweet Clover 

Division of the Hereditary Substance in Reproductive Cells of 
Higher Plants .... 

Fecundation of the Egg-cell in the Lily 
Anatomy — Private Laboratory 

Anatomical Laboratory 
Physiology — Laboratory .... 

Fine Arts — Lecture and Drawing Room 
School of Law — Law Library 

Moot Court Room .... 
Biological Station — View of Winona Lake, Ind 

Lecture Room ..... 



PAGE 

135 
136 



137-140 
. 141 
. 142 
. 143 
. 144 
146-147 
171-172 
. 173 
. 183 
. 184 



Xlll 



l^ietorfcal ^feettl) 



"In an ideal University, as I conceive it, a man should 

BE able to obtain INSTRUCTION IN ALL FORMS OF KNOWLEDGE, 

AND Discipline in the use of all the Methods by which 
Knowledge is obtained. In such an University, the force 
OF living Exajiple should fire the Student with a noble 
Ambition to emulate the learning of Learned Men, and to 
follow in the footsteps of the Explorers of new fields 
OF Knowledge. And the very air he breathes should be 
charged with that Enthusiasm for Truth, that Fanaticism 
OF Veracity, which is a greater possession than much 
Learning; a nobler gift than the power of increasing 
Knowledge ; by so much greater and nobler than these, as 
the Moral Nature of man is greater than the Intellec- 
tual; FOR Veracity is the heart of Morality." — Huxley. 



HISTORICAL SKETCH 



The Congress of the Confederation expressed its deep-seated faith in Acts of the 

United Stati 
Government. 



education in three separate acts. The Ordinance of 1785 reserved the six- United states 



teenth section of every township of public land "for the maintenance of 
public schools within the said township;" the Ordinance of 1787 declared 
that "Religion, morality and knowledge being necessary to good government \ 
and the happiness of mankind, schools and the means of education shall ;| 
be forever encouraged;" and ten days later (July 23, 1787) Congress granted I 
to the Ohio Company two entire townships of land for the support of a uni- 
versity. Thus was inaugurated a policy, the continuation of which made pos- 
sible the early establishment of an institution of higher education in Indiana. 
The first action of the Federal Congress affecting immediately the founding 
of a university in Indiana was an act, approved March 26, 1801: — four 
years after the Territory of Indiana was organized —— providing for the sale 
of public lands ; among other provisions, it reserved one entire township 
of land, "to be located by the Secretary of Treasury, for the use of a 
seminary of learning" in Indiana Territory. In 1806, Albert Gallatin des- 
ignated for that purpose a township in what is now Gibson County. There- 
upon the territorial Legislature promptly proceeded to incorporate a uni- 
versity at Vincennes. The institution did not prosper, and when Indiana 
was admitted as a State its existence was ignored. 

The enabling act of Congress authorizing the formation of a state gov- 
ernment for Indiana contained among other items the grant of an entire 
township to be designated by the President of the United States, in addition 
to the one previously given, the title to which was to be vested in the 
Legislature of the State for the use of a seminary of learning. 

(2) 



Indiana University 

Action of the The convention wliieli framed the Constitntion under which Indiana was 

Constitutional rj jj,ii(-j-g(;] j^g r^ State accepted the grants of Conaress by a solemn ordinance, 

Convention _ ^ '^ . . 

(1816). passed on the twen t_v -ninth day of June, 1816, which contains these words: 

"That we do, for dursclves and our posterity, agree, determine, declare 
and ordain that we will and do hereby accept the propositions of the Con- 
gress of the United States as made and contained in their act" of April 
19, 1810; "and we do, moreover, for unrselvcs and (inr ])()st('rity, hereby 
declare and ordain that this ordinance and every ])art thereof, shall 
forever be and remain irrevocable and inviolate, wdthont the consent of 
the United States." The State of Indiana is therefore pledged by this 
ordinance to maintain inviolate the fund derived from this source, and 
woidd seem bound to cherish and sustain the institution founded with this 
endowment, in such a manner that the noble purpose for which this generous 
gift was made may not be tliAvarted, but may be realized to its fullest possi- 
bilities. 

This same convention, as a further indorsement of the broad plan, de- 
clared in the Constitution (Article IX, section 2) that "it shall be the duty 
of the General Assembly, as soon as circumstances will permit, to provide 
by law for a general system of education, ascending in a regular gradation 
from township schools to a state university, wherein tuition shall be gratis, 
and equally open t(» all." 

The circumstances of time and place being considered, these are notable 
words. In that day it was the accepted theory of education that elementary 
instruction might properly be undertaken by the State, but that higher etlu- 
cation' should be left to the control of religious denominations or to indi- 
vidual l>enevolence, IsT'd other State in the Union had then incorporated 
into its constitution a declaration in favor of a university open to all 
alike and with free tuition. When, furthermore, the social and material 
environment is remembered, this broad conception of education seems the 
more remarkable. At that time barely one-fourth of the land wnthin the 
State had been purchased from the Indians and thrown open to settlement. 
There were but thirteen counties represented in the constitutional conven- 
tion. Settlements Avere few and far apart. The only means of communi- 
cation were the uncertain Indian trails, the rough roads, and the waters 
of rivers and creeks. Even the Ohio River could boast of only two or 



Historical Sketch 

three small steamboats. Tlie" population of the State, all told, did not conditions of 
exceed 65,000. Accordinii' to the accounts of this early period, the people *^^ *^™^- 
were for the most part illiterate, impoverished and disheartened. But there 
were among them men whose minds, though lacking the graces and refine- 
ments of the highest culture, had a rude strength combined with acuteness 
and insight; they were the leaven of the lump. The members of that conr_] 
vention were honest, simple-hearted, unpretentious men, firm in their con^ 
sciousness of the rights of the common people, clear in their sense of equity ^ 




DAVID H. MAXWELL, M.D. 
Foster-father of the University. 

and justice,, and blessed with that , savi ng quality caUed^Timon-sensa They \ 
believed that education would most surely quicken that unresponsive mass, 
stimulate the people to greater activity, and inspire them with higher ideals. 
In that conviction and with prophetic hope they acted. It is a signilicant 
fact that the same man who drafted the clause of the Constitution excluding 
slavery from this State (Dr. David H. Maxwell) is also properly regarded 
as the "founder of Indiana University" — an institution dedicated to intel- 
lectual freedom, whose seal appropriately bears the motto Lux et Veritas. 



1820) 



Indiana University 

STATE SEMINARY, 1820-1828 

The township selected for the support of a university lay in what is now 
Monroe County, and was later named Perrj^ Township — the present seat 
of Indiana University. It w^as stipulated in the Constitution that no lands 
intended for school purposes should be sold prior to 1820. In the first 
Act establishing month of that year an act to establish a State Seminary was passed and 
a state seminary j-gceived executive approval on January 20, 1820 — the date now recognized 
by the University as Foundation Day. This act named as a Board of Trus- 
tees Charles Dewey, Jonathan Lindley, David H. Maxwell, John M. Jenkins, 
Jonathan Nichols and William Lowe. 

Throughout its history Indiana University has been fortunate in having 
as trustees men who were devoted to the highest interests of the institution 
and to the cause of education in general. Foremost on this honorable roll 
should stand the name of Dr. David H. Maxwell. "During the Seminary 
period, while the institution was struggling for establishment, from 1820 
to 1825 especially, he was not only the presiding officer of the board, but 
was also its executive officer and corresponding secretary, having the erection 
of new buildings under his supervision, carrying on a heavy correspondence 
with prominent men throughout the State in behalf of the institution, while 
having to contend with a disaffected element at home. Solely on behalf 
of the Seminary he solicited election to the Legislature, and from 1821 
to 1826 he was a member of either the lower house (where he was once 
Speaker) or of the senate, and at all times he was especially interested in 
w^atching jealously the affairs of the new Seminary. In the establishment 
of institutions it seems that the life and services of some one man are para- 
mount and essential. In the establishment of the Indiana Seminary Dr. 
David H. Maxwell was the essential man."^ 

In accordance with the provisions of the law of 1820, the Board of 
Trustees selected for the Seminary a site in the reserved township. The 
location of the Seminary upon its own lands would, it was believed, greatly 
enhance the value of the property and would ultimately increase the revenues 
of the institution. Two years later the Legislature passed an act authorizing 
the sale of the Seminary township in Gibson County and directing the appli- 



ijames Albert Woodburn, Higher Education in Indiana (Washington, 1891), p. 77. 

4 



Historical Sketch 

cation of the proceeds to the sup}x>rt of tlie State Seminary. In justification 
of this apparent confiscation of the property of Vincennes University it 
was alleged that the trustees of that institution had illegally sold a portion 
of their land and had permitted their organization to lapse. By the decisions 
of the Supreme Court of the United States in 1852, and of the Supreme 
Court of Indiana in 1854, these funds were restored to Vincennes University. 
In 1826 the General Assembly increased the number of members of the 
Board of Trustees of Indiana Seminary to nine, and one year later empow- 
ered the Board to sell all the Seminary lands with the exception of the three 
sections contiguous to that section on which the buildings of the Seminary 
were located. 

The Seminary meantime was opened in 182-1 under the direction of The Seminary 
Eev. Baynard K. Hall, an alumnus of Union College and Princeton Theo- "^p^"^*^ ' 
logical Seminary. Professor Hall was for three years the only instructor, 
and the only subjects taught were Latin and Greek. The number of students 
during the first three years Avas, respectively, 13, 15, and 21. In his 
sketch of the Indiana Seminary the late Judge David D. Banta places 
the following estimate upon the services of Professor Hall: "The choice 
[of Principal] could hardly have fallen upon a worthier man. He was 
an excellent classical scholar and a persuasive and sometimes eloquent 
preacher. As a teacher, he was enthusiastic, faithful and painstaking."^ 
He entered into the pioneer life of the day with sympathy, but saw its 
rude and often ludicrous side. Under the pseudonym "Robert Carlton" 
he published in later life (1846) an entertaining account of his experiences, 
entitled 'The ISTew Purchase, or Early Years in the Par West.' 

In 1828 it was deemed advisable to appoint another instructor to teach 
mathematics and such of the natural sciences as were considered of ''suffi- 
cient importance to engage the attention of aspiring youth." John H. Har- 
ney, an alumnus of Miami University, was selected to fill this position. 
The election of Professor Harney elicited from local politicians and other 
dissatisfied persons a protest to the General Assembly, in which were alleged 
extravagance and careless and sectarian management. Dr. David H. Max- 
well, the president of the Board of Trustees, reported to the Legislature 
that the salary of Professor Hall was $250 per year, and that the only 

iTheophilus A. Wylie, Indiana UniversUy (1890), p. 4-3. 

5 



Indiana University 

subjects taught were Latin and Greek. This evidence, together with other 
statements, seemed to satisfy the Legishiture of the economy of management, 
for it took no action against the Seminary. 

Even before the manifestation of dissatisfaction just nieiiti(iue(], the 
General Assembly had appointed (January 26, 1827) a Board of Visitors 
consisting of the Governor, the Lieutenant-Governor, the Judges of the Su- 
preme Court, and nineteen other distinguished men. They were required 
to visit the school, inspect its records and accounts, examine the students 
and report to the General Assembly, embodying in their report "any recom- 
mendations they may think proper to make of such measures within the com- 
petency of the Legislature as maj tend to sustain, foster and improve the 
Seminary aforesaid." In November of the same year the Board of Visitors 
made its first visit. It reported that "there was but one opinion among 
the visitors — that more ability to teach was exhibited by the professors 
and apparent proficiency by the scholars than ever before witnessed on a 
similar occasion," 

Upon tliis favorable report and the specific recommendations of the Board 
of Visitors, the President of the Board of Trustees and Governor Kay, 
the General Assembly proceeded, by an act approved January 24, 1828, 
to raise the Seminary to the rank of a college. From the Seminary period 
"no records remain of classes ; no records even of names of students in attend- 
ance. But the few old men yet living who were students during Seminary 
times all speak in glowing terms of the activity of the professors and the 
application of the students."^ 

INDIANA COLLEGE, 1828-1838 

Act establishing By the act of January 24, 1828, the "Indiana College" was established 

the Indiana Col- f^^, ^^le education of youth in the "American, learned and foreign languages, 

lege ( 1)S''8) 

the useful arts, sciences and literature." The new institution was given 
authority to confer "such degrees in the liberal arts and sciences as are 
usually granted and conferred in other colleges in America." The Board 
of Trustees was increased to fifteen members, and they were empowered 
to fill vacancies in their own number. Provision was made for a Board 

1 Judge D. D. Banta, in Theophilus A. Wylie's Indinna University ( 1S90), pp. 45-6. 

6 



Historical Sketch 

of Visitors consisting" of five persons. Freedom of religions opinions was 
gnaranteed to professors and stndents, and the teaching of sectarian prin- 
ciples was forbidden. 

For the responsible work of organi.zing and developing the new college Dr. Andrew 

the Board of Trnstees chose Eev. Andrew Wylie, D.l)., at that time Wyiie elected 

' President 

President of Washington College, Washington, Pennsylvania. At the age (i.s29). 

of twenty-one Mr. Wylie was gradnated from Jefferson College, Canonsburg, 




ANDREW WYLIE, D.D. 
President of tlie University, 1S2!)-51. 

Pennsylvania, and immediately appointed a tntor in his alma mater. About 
a year later he was elected President of that institution; and in 1817 he 
was made President of Washington College. In these positions he displayed 
marked abilities as an administrator and a teacher. 

The effect of Dr. Wy lie's election to the presidency of Indiana Univer- 
sity, together with the change in the rank of the institution, was soon appar- 



of the Faculty. 



Indiana University 

eiit in an enlarged faculty, an expanded enrricrduni, added l)iiil(lings and 
an increased number of students. Dr. Wylie, in addition to his duties as 
President, gave instruction in moral and mental philosophy, political econ- 
other members omy and polite literature. Rev. Baynard R. Hall, the former Principal 
of the Seminary, was retained as professor of ancient languages ; while 
Professor John H. Harney occupied the chair of mathematics, natural and 
mechanical philosophy, and chemistry, ^Ir. W. H. Stockwell was super- 
intendent of the Preparatory Department, which was established in 1829 
because the secondary schools of the State were inadequate to prepare stu- 
dents for entrance to the College. 

When the first College catalogue was published in 1831, there were 60 
students in attendance. In the following year, owing to the existence 
of some trouble in the Faculty and among the students, Professors Hall 
and Harney resigned, and the number of students fell off, l)ut recovered 
quickly in the next year. To fill the vacancies in the Faculty, Ebenezer ]S^. 
Elliott, a graduate of Miami University, was appointed professor of natural 
philosophy and chemistry, and Beaumont Parks, a graduate of Dartmouth 
College, professor of languages. In 1836 Professor Elliott resigned to accept 
the presidency of Mississippi College. The following appointments were then 
made : James F. Dodds, an alumnus of Indiana College, as professor of 
mathematics ; Augustus W. Ruter, an alumnus of Augusta College, Ky., as 
professor of Greek and French ; William R. Harding, a graduate of Trinity 
College, Dublin, as principal of the Preparatory Department; and (in 1S37) 
Theophilus A. Wylie, a graduate of the University of Pennsylvania, as 
professor of natural philosophy and chemistry. 

The character of the students of that period is thus described by Dr. 
T. A. Wylie, whose connection with the institution was long and intimate: 
"IMany of the students were young men brought up on farius, and used 
to hard work. They came to Bloomington, generally on their own resources, 
depending ou money they had earned or borrowed. It was not unusual for 
students to attend to their studies for a year and then absent themselves 
for the same length of time in order to earn money by teaching or otherwise, 
and to return to complete their college course. Out of this kind of material 
have many of the graduates been made, who have done honor to their alma 
nmter and their country." 



the Indiana Uni- 
versity (183.S). 



Historical Sketch 

In 1836 a new and more commodions bnilding was completed for the 
College. It has been described as resembling ^'an old-fashioned ISTew Eng- 
land cotton mill," bnt it at least furnished additional space for actual work. 

INDIANA UNIVERSITY, 1838-1904 

The importance of the College, the growth of the State, and the need 
for instruction in the professions of law and medicine induced the General 
Assembly in 1838 to enlarge the scope of the institution and to transform 
it into a university. By an act of February 25, 1838, Indiana College Act establishing 
became the Indiana University, with authority to grant additional degrees 
in law and medicine. The Board of Trustees was to consist of the Governor 
cf the State and twenty-one other members ; but three years later the number 
was again reduced to nine. 

Dr. Wylie continued as President of the enlarged institution, and exhib- 
ited during his administration still greater power as an executive. But 
for two or three years the University did not make much progress. In 
1839 the Faculty consisted of three members, including the President; 
and in the following year there w^ere but 64 students. The year 1840 proved 
a turning point in the University's history. In that year was erected 
another building adapted to the use of the Department of !N"atural Philoso- 
phy and Chemistry. Lieutenant Jacob Ammen, a graduate of AVest Point 
and at that time professor of mathematics in Jeiferson College, Mississippi, 
was appointed professor of mathematics in Indiana University; and John 
I. Morrison, an alumnus of Miami University, was made professor of 
languages. Professor Ammen organized a Military De]iartment, which, how- 
ever, was discontinued soon after his resignation in 1843. By that year 
the number of students had increased to 115. Upon the resignation of 
Professors Ammen and Morrison in 1843 their places were filled respectively 
by the appointment of Professors Alfred Ryors and Daniel Read, both of 
Ohio University. 

After several ineffectual attempts a Law School was established in 1842 
by the election of Judge David McDonald as professor of law. LTnder 
Judge McDonald and his successors the law school prospered for many 
years, and added materially to the number of students in attendance. During 
the last ten years of Dr. Wylie's administration the University enjoyed 

9 



Indiana University 



Death of Pres- 
ident Wylie 

(1851). 



a high degree of pros]X'vifv. The Faculty and the Board of Trustees 
acted in harmony ; outside interference ceased ; and the institution com- 
manded more and more the respect and confidence of the public. 

Dr. Wylie's long and successful administration ended with his death 
on November 11, 1851, from an attack of pneumonia. His place in the 
history of the institution is thus summed up : 

"Dr. Wylie's services to Indiana in the capacity of first president of 
her University, are not easily estimated. As a class-room instructor he disci- 
plined the minds and molded the characters of young men for useful service 
in the State. By his personal power he attached every student who had 
received the benefit of his tuition, to the welfare of the University. As 
a public educator and lecturer, and as a man among the people, he performed 
an enormous amount of labor in making known to the citizens of the State, 
and of other States as well, the advantages of higher education. He thus 
popularized the University and gave it strength in its appeals for legislative 
support."^ That he had great magnetic force is shown by the fact that 
when he came to Indiana College he was followed by many young men 
from Pennsylvania and Virginia who had come under his influence while 
he was teaching in the East ; during his entire presidency there was a 
large attendance at the University of men from the South, even from the 
Gulf States. Dr. Theophilus Parvin, formerly professor in Jefferson Med- 
ical College of Philadelphia, and a pupil of Dr. Wylie, assures us "that 
the students of Dr. Wylie are guilty of no blind idolatry, or no idolatry 
at all, when they declare that in ability he was one of the first men in 
all the country." It is interesting to have estimates of his character from 
his co-workers in the Faculty. Judge David McDonald, professor of law, 
in speaking of him, used the following language: "Andrew Wylie was 
a man of truth. He was so not merely because of his views of policy, 
but because he loved the truth. In thought, in word, in action, he was 
truthful; and no man during a long life ever pursued the truth with more 
unwearied search through all the fields of learning and science." Professor 
T. A. Wylie gives the following estimate: "He had many strong friends, 
and there were also some bitterly opposed to him. Those intimately ac- 
quainted with him will not find it difiicult to account for this trait of 

ij. A. Woodburn, Higher Education in Indiana, p. 80. 
^.•^ 10 



Historical Sketch 

character. He was tolei'ant and patient to a fanlt of everything but mean- 
ness and duplicity. A ])erson in whom he had no confidence he would 
keep at arm's length, and although policy might dictate an opposite course 
he would hardly treat one thus regarded with common courtesy. He would 
never, to use his own expression, 'throw a sop to Cerberus.' On the other 
hand, to those in whom he liad confidence, no one was more affable. There 
was sometimes, however, an apparent want of civility, a brusque manner." 
This w^as due, our authority informs us, to his habit of so concentrating 
his thought upon the subject in mind that he scarcely noticed any one or 
anything else. 

Such was the character of the man who shaped the University during 
its formative period and touched the lives of young men as if with a magic 
wand, arousing within them asjiirations for scholarship, truth and service. 
The list of alumni of this period is illumined wdtli the names of James S. Some Aiuinni of 
Rollins, founder of the University of Missouri and prominent in the politics ^^^^ period. 
of that State ; James Wilson Dunn, lawyer, business man, Lieutenant-Colonel 
of volunteers ; William McKee Dunn, lawyer, Congressman, brevet Briga- 
dier-General and Judge Advocate General of the United States Army ; An- 
drew Wylie, Justice of the Supreme Court of the District of Columbia, I860- 
188-i; James Darwin Maxwell, physician and member of the Board of 
Trustees of Indiana Ihiiversity, 1860-1892 ; Parker Campbell, banker, sugar 
planter, and Major in the Confederate Army ; John S. Watts, Chief Justice 
of the Territory of jSTew Mexico ; William Mitchell Daily, President of 
Indiana University, 1853-1859; Addison Locke Roache, Judge of the 
Supreme Court of Indiana; Joseph A. Wright, Governor of Indiana, 1849- 
1857, United States Senator from Indiana, and Minister to Prussia; George 
Grover Wright, Chief Justice of the Supreme Court of Iowa, United States 
Senator from Iowa, 1871-1877; Richard Taylor Allison, lawyer. Paymaster 
in the United States I*^avy under Commodore Perry in his expedition to 
Japan in 1854, and later Paymaster in the Marine Corps of the Confederate 
States ; William Alexander Parsons Martin, missionary, diplomatist, Pres- 
ident of the Imperial College, Pekin, author and translator, and mandarin 
of the third rank ; Russell Bigelow Abbott, President of Albert Lea College, 
Minnesota ; Theophilus Parvin, professor in Jefferson Medical College, Phil- 
adelphia, and a noted medical author; Michael Steele Bright, law^yer and 

11 



Indiana University 

banker; John Ilenrv Wise, Depnty Collector of tlio ])()rt df Saii Fvinieiseo, 
wool and commission merchant ; George I). Wise, lawyer and statesman ; 
Obadiah Jennings Wise, editor of the Richmond ( Va.) Enqnirer, Captain in 
the Confederate Army; John James Wise, physician and Captain in the 
Confederate Army. To this list might be added the names of many others, 
who won distinction in law, medicine, edncation or bnsiness, or in hnmbler 
walks spent their lives in the service of their fellow-men, trne to their 
yonthfnl ideals. 

The Constitution of Indiana adopted in 1S51 does not expressly refer 
to Indiana University as a State institution, l)ut it does declare that ''all 
trust funds held by the State shall remain inviolate, and be faithfully 
and exclusively applied to the purpose for which the trust was created." 
At the first session of the General Assembly under the authority of the 
new Constitution, the University was explicitly "recognized as the Uni- 
versity of the State." (Act of June 17, 1852.) In 1852 the Federal 
Government made an additional grant of 4,106 acres for the use of the 
University ; this yielded in time about $10,000, but the proceeds were not 
immediately available. 

The vacanc^^ caused by the death of President Wylie in jSTovember, 1851, 
M'as not immediately filled by the Board of Trustees, and for that school year 
Professor Daniel Read and later Professor Theophilns A. Wylie acted as 
President. The permanent position was first tendered to i)r. John H. La- 
throp, Chancellor of Wisconsin University, and upon his declination a sim- 
ilar offer was made to the eminent educator, Henry Barnard of Connecticut. 
Owing to a carriage accident Dr. Barnard was compelled to decline the invi- 
tation, and Rev. Alfred Ryors. D.D., ^\dio had been professor of mathematics 
in 1814-48, and was now President of Ohio University, was elected to the 
office. 
Presidency of Ur. Ryors began his administration under inauspicious conditions. The 

Dr. Alfred Ryors University was involved for a number of years in the suit with Vincennes 
University over the Seminary lands in Gibson County, which terminated 
adversely to Indiana University. The decision of the Supreme Court of the 
United States threatened to curtail the revenues of the institution, and 
the number of students declined. Still more discouraging and annoying 
to President Ryors was the presence of a disaffected and intriguing element 

12 



Historical Sketch 

in the Faculty and Board of Trustees. So great was the disappointment 
of Dr. Ryors that within six months after his coming he tendered his 
resignation, but upon the earnest request of the President of the Board 
he withdrew it. The situation, however, did not improve, and at the end 
of his first year he again presented his resignation, which was then accepted. 
Dr. Ryors was a man of fine attainments and had been very successful 
both as a disciplinarian and as an instructor, in the position of President 
of Ohio University. His presidency of Indiana University Avas too brief 
and was begun under circumstances too unfavorable to leave the permanent 
impression wdiich was properly anticipated from a man of his talents. 

The only important change made during his administration was the 
establishment of a ^Normal Department under the management of Professor 
Read, which was discontinued after Professor Read's resignation in 1856. 

Rev. William Mitchell Daily, D.D., an alumnus of the class of 1830, Presidency of 
was next' chosen President, which position he filled from 1853 to 1859. ' qoko_5q> 
Under his presidency the University progressed favorably, until a disastrous 
fire in April, 1854, completely destroyed the main building, the University 
library of 1,200 volumes, and the furnishings and libraries of the students' 
literary societies. This was a severe blow to the institution ; but the loss 
of material equipment was more than compensated for by the zeal and 
loyalty of the students, alumni. Faculty, Board of Trustees, and citizens 
of Bloomington. The Board of Trustees within three weeks appointed 
a building committee. The people of Bloomington and Monroe County 
subscribed $10,000. A sale of scholarships was authorized by the Board, and 
the subscriptions were made convertible into scholarships which entitled 
the holders to free tuition. Money was borrowed, and a new building was 
ready for use in 1855. The nucleus of a new library was acquired through 
liberal donations of books from Mr. Henry W. Derb}^, a bookseller and 
publisher of Cincinnati, and from Mr. W. H. Jones, of Ft. Wayne. 

In 1856 the Federal Government donated to the University about 22,000 
acres of land in this and in other States to make up the loss occasioned by 
the decision of the United States Supreme Court in respect to the Gibson 
County lands. Thus the financial basis of the University was made more 
solid, and the material equipment enlarged and modernized. At the same 
time the inner life of the institution was enriched by the coming of two 

13 



*-,v '•.•-;, 


— - 2 o 




1 L~ * 

o £ ."1 




0; HH 



w 


M 


s 


sL* 


ft 


o 


w 






J 


M 


m 


>-) 


O 




u 


OJ 


X3 


^ 


<1) 












o 


O 










-d 


OJ 








^ 




3 






-d 



Historical Sketch 

men wlio for nearly thirty years gave their services and the inspiration 
of their lives to the University. In 1854 Elisha Ballantine, of Ohio Uni- 
versity, came to Indiana University as professor of mathematics ; two years 
later, npon the resignation of Professor Read, he was transferred to the 
professorship of languages. At the same time Daniel Kirkwood, then Pres- 
ident of Newark College, Delaware, was made professor of mathematics. 

In the resignation of Professor Daniel Read, to accept the professorship 
of ancient languages in Wisconsin University, Indiana University suffered 
a loss. Dr. Read was an excellent scholar, a superior teacher and a man 
of practical affairs. His energy and diplomacy were of great value during 
the dark days of the early fifties. He was a member of the Constitutional 
convention of 1850-51, and took an active part in the deliberations of that 
body, especially upon all questions relating to education. 

Dr. Daily was untiring in his efforts in behalf of the University. He 
was much liked by the students on account of his kindly disposition and 
his interest in their welfare. But because of some untoward circum- 
stances, resulting in a trial in an ecclesiastical court, in which charges 
were brought against Dr. Daily, and a popular clamor excited, which he 
feared might be injurious to tlie University, he handed in his resignation 
January 27, 1859, which was accepted. During the remainder of the college 
year Professor T. A. Wylie again served as temporary President. 

In til is period another change should be noted in the law governing 
the number and appointment of Trustees. In 1855 the number of mem- 
bers of the Board was reduced to eight— the present number — and the power 
to fill vacancies in their body, which they had had from 1838, was taken 
away and vested in the State Board of Education. 

In 1859 Dr. Lathrop was again offered the presidency of Indiana Uni- Presidency of 
versity, and this time accepted, although he occupied the office but one ^^- '^*'^" ^" ^^' 

„^. .... thropi 1859-60 ». 

year. \\ ith the exception of an increase m the number of professors 

and tutors no important changes were made during that time. In 1860 

Dr. Lathrop resigned to accept a professorship in Missouri University, 

of which institution he had been the first President, from 1840 to 1849. 

Dr. Cyrus ISTutt was elected President in 1860, and at once took up 

the duties of the office. His formal inauguration occurred on June 7, 

1861, at which time Governor Oliver P. J\Iorton delivered the address 

of investiture. 

15 



Indiana University 

Presidency of The outbreak of the Civil War inevitably reacted disastrously on the 

Dr. cyms Xutt growth of the University in President Xutt's administration, as is seen 
in the record of attendance. In ISGO the number of students enrolled, 
exclusive of those in the law and preparatory departments, was 99; in 
1861 it rose to 112; in 1863 it fell to 67. After the close of the war, 
the ground lost was steadilj^ recovered, and by 1869 the number of students 
had risen to 182. 

One of the first questions to occupy the attention of President IsTutt 
and the Board of Trustees was the disposition to be made of Indiana's 
portion of the public lands granted to the several States, by an act of Con- 
gress of July 2, 1862, for the establishment of ''Colleges for the benefit of 
agriculture and the mechanic arts." Indiana received as her share of this 
donation the land scrip of 390,000 acres, from which was realized by sale 
and by careful management of the proceeds about $340,000. Three prop- 
ositions for the use of this trust fund were considered by the Legislature : 
(1) the endowment of agricultural departments in some five of the leading- 
colleges of the State, including a central institution of research at Indi- 
anapolis; (2) the founding of a separate agricultural college; (3) the 
establishment of an Indiana State Agricultural College in connection with 
Indiana University. Dr. Nutt and the friends of the University labored 
zealously for the adoption of the third plan. The claim of Indiana Uni- 
versity would probably have been stronger if the Board of Trustees had 
previously established an agricultural department, which they had authority 
to do under an act passed by the Legislature in 1852. All arguments, 
however, were overpowered by the generous gift of $150,000 by John Purdue 
of Lafayette, and donations of $50,000 by Tippecanoe County and 100 
acres of land by the town of West Lafayette, conditioned upon the location 
of the institution at West Lafayette. 

However, at about this time Indiana University received an indorsement 
from the State Legislature which was full of significance. Prior to 1867 
the University had received no money from the treasury of the State. 
In that year an important innovation was made. The General Assembly, 
recognizing that the "endowment fund of the State University" was "no 
longer sufficient to meet the growing wants of education and make said 
University efficient and useful," and believing that "it should be the pride 

16 



Historical Sketch 

of every citizen of Indiana to ])lace the State University in the highest 
condition of nsefnhiess, and make it the crowning glory of onr present great 
common school system," appropriated $8,000 to the nse of the University, 
and in 1873 increased the amonnt of the annnal appropriation to $15,000. 

The most important innovation during this period was the admission Admission of 
of women to all the rights and privileges of the Universitv on equal terms ^^'**™^" to the 

_ -r T ■ University 

With men. Hon. Isaac Jenkmson, then a member and now President of (iscs). 
the Board of Trustees, had advocated this change for several years, but for 
some time he had stood alone. In the year 18G7 Miss Sarah Parke ^[or- 
rison, without any knowledge of the discussion upon the subject within 
the Board of Trustees, presented a petition to that body requesting that 
the privilege of attendance at the University be granted to women. This 
brought the question to a focus, and bv a vote of four to three the petition 
was granted. Miss ]\[orrison entered the University the next fall, and 
was graduated with the class of 1869. To Mr. Jenkinson is due the 
credit for this advanced step. At that time no other State University 
had adopted the system of co-education ; although Oberlin University and 
two other institutions of collegiate rank were committed to such a policy, 
Indiana University was, among the State Universities, the pioneer in this 
movement. 

In 1868 the Military Department of the University was revived under 
the control of Major-General Eli Long, who began his work in 1869. In 
the following year he was recalled by the War Department, and Colonel 
James Thompson was appointed professor of military science and engi- 
neering. For two or three years considerable interest was shown in military 
training; but on account of the time required and the inconvenience to 
many students their zeal declined and greater emphasis was put upon 
the civil engineering. In 1875 the military training was discontinued, 
but Colonel Thompson remained as professor of civil engineering. An 
effort at this time to secure the construction of a gymnasium proved unsuc- 
cessful. 

For some time the University had felt the need of a Medical Department, 
but because the University was in a small town it was deemed inadvisable 
to establish a department at Bloomington. In 1871 an arrangement Avas 
made with the Indiana Medical College by which that school became the 

(3) lY 



Indiana University 

Medical Department of Indiana University ; and for a few years it was 
recognized in the annual catalogues as a part of tlie University. The 
connection, however, was not close, and in 1877 it was completely severed. 
Commissioned Of scarcely less importance than the admission of women to the Uni- 

high school versity was the attempt made in 1873 to establish a more intimate connec- 
(1873). " tion between the University and the High Schools of the State. The framers 
of the first Constitution had as their ideal a system of education extending 
from the graded schools to the University; this had been only partially 
realized. There existed a hiatus between the common schools and the 
University, because of the narrow field of the Preparatory Department 
and the small number of High Schools that were capable of doing work of a 
high grade, especially in Greek. In 1873 the State Board of Education and 
a convention of school superintendents and teachers recommended to the 
Board of Trustees that an increased amount of mathematics and science 
be accepted as an equivalent for the Greek required for admission, and 
that the High Schools prepare students for admission to the University. 
The Board acceded to this request, fixed the minimum standard for 
admission, and agreed to admit to the University, without further exami- 
nation, all applicants bearing certificates of a satisfactory examination 
in the required subjects from certain High Schools, to be thereafter desig- 
nated by the State Board of Education. As soon as the arrangement went 
into effect, twenty-one High Schools were chosen and commissioned by 
the State Board of Education to prepare students for admission to the 
Freshman class. Wliile the number of commissioned High Schools did 
not increase very rapidly, a standard was set to which the better High 
Schools tried to conform. It was not until the presidenc}^ of Dr. David 
Starr Jordan that the importance of this relation was fully appreciated 
and the unification made more perfect. 

During this period the Faculty was enlarged, and there were several 
changes in its personnel. The most notable of these was the appointment 
in 1863 of Colonel Richard Owen as professor of natural philosophy and 
chemistry. In 1864 he was transferred to the chair of physics and chem- 
istry, and in 1868 to the professorship of natural science and chemistry. 

This increase in the number of instructors, and the growth in the attend- 
ance, reaching 182 in 1869, caused a demand for better equipment and 

18 



Dr. Lemuel Moss 



Historical Sketch 

accommodations. From the beginning of tlie annnal appropriations by the 
State in 1867, considerable smns of money were spent upon apparatns and 
materials for nse in the departments of physics, chemistry and natnral 
science. In 1870 the extensive cabinet of the distinguished geologist, David 
Dale Owen, of Xew Harmony, was purchased by the University. In order 
to utilize this valuable collection advantageously and to afford adequate 
accommodations for the library, the law school and the scientific departments, 
it was determined to erect a new building, which was completed in 187-1. 

After fifteen years' service. Dr. jSTutt resigned June 30, 1875. During 
his administration many important changes were made, but in most cases 
they originated with, and their details were worked out by, the Board 
of Trustees. 

In September, 1875, Dr. Lemuel Moss, who had a few months before Presidency of 
resigned the presidency of the old Chicago University, was elected Presi- 
dent, and at once assumed, under favorable auspices, the duties of the 
ofiice. 

In the next year the relation between the Indiana Medical College 
and the University was terminated, and in 1877 the Law School was 
discontinued after an honorable existence of thirty-five years. Inasmuch as 
tuition was free, according to a ruling of the Board, the funds of the Uni- 
versity did not justify so large an expenditure of money as was needed to 
maintain these schools with high standards. 

The administration of Dr. Moss saw a further expansion of the college 
course. The course leading to the degree of Bachelor of Science had existed 
as early as 1854; in 1867 this course was enlarged. In 1878 an additional 
course leading to the degree of Bachelor of Letters was introduced, which 
permitted the substitution of Urench or German in place of the Greek 
in the classical course. 

Another innovation of this period was the introduction of courses of 
special lectures given by the most eminent scholars in science and letters. 
Among these special lecturers were Professor George U. Barker, M.D., 
LL.D., of the University of Pennsylvania ; President James B. Angell 
of the University of Michigan; Richard A. Proctor, B.A., of Cambridge, 
England ; and Professor William T. Harris, LL.D., now Commissioner 
of Education^ Washington, D. C. 

10 



Removal of the 
University to a 
new site (1885). 



Indiana University 

TliG people of tlie State showed their iiu-reasiiig confidence in the Uni- 
versity by the provision made in 1883 for the first permanent endowment 
of the institution ont of State funds. For this purpose the Legishature 
in 1883 authorized an annual levy of a tax of five mills on each one hundred 
dollars' worth of taxable property in the State, to be continued for thirteen 
years. From the operation of this law there was realized a fund of $358,333, 
the interest on which amounts to $21,500 annually. 

In the summer of 1883 the University again sufl:'ered a severe loss from 
fire. Science Hall, with practically all of its contents — the library of 
13,000 volumes, the apparatus of the pliysical and chemical departments, 
the museum, and the private collections of Dr. David Starr Jordan, then 
professor of biology — was totally destroyed. The calamity at first seemed 
overwhelming. But the President, the Faculty, the Board of Trustees, and 
the loyal friends of the University turned their faces resolutely towards 
the future. It was a crisis of great import. The momentous question was 
whether the University should be continued on the old site, with its narrow 
limits and the annoyances from the noise of the railroad, or whether a 
new site should be selected which would afford relief from the existing 
vexations and give wide opportunity for future growth. xVfter careful delib- 
eration the Board of Trustees determined upon removal, an<l a beautiful 
tract of land known as Dunn's woods, lying on the east edge of the town, 
was purchased. With $20,000 insurance money, and the liberal donation 
of $50,000 from Monroe Count}^, the erection of buildings was begun in 
April, 1884, the cornerstone being laid June 10th in that year. 

Until the new buildings were ready for occupation, the regular work 
of the University was continued in the one building still remaining on 
the old site. JSTotwithstanding the difficulties occasioned by the cramped quar- 
ters and the inadequate equipment of the library and the laboratories, 
the students were enthusiastic and patient, and the attendance in the Collegi- 
ate Department during the first year after the fire was only 2-1 less than that 
of the previous year, and in the second year but 10 less; while in the next 
year it was even 35 more than in the last year preceding the fire. 

On ISTovember 8, 1884, the resignation of Dr. Moss was announced. 
Eev. Elisha Ballantine, formerly professor of Greek, was made temporary 
president, serving until January 1, 1885. Dr. Moss was a man of great 



20 



Historical Sketch 

intellect and power, and an eloqnent preacher. As a teacher he made a 
deep impression upon his students. While the University made progress 
under his administration, it was still essentially a college with the old ideals 
and methods. 

The usefulness of the old forms and methods should not, however, 
be misunderstood. That the range of subjects was restricted, that the equip- 
ment of laboratories was meager, that the opportunities for investigation 
were lacking, must be admitted. But it must not be inferred that the 
efforts at this time were fruitless. In spite of all difficulties the young 
men and women who were graduated during the days of the College 
acquired a discipline and a culture which made it possible for them to 
enter upon careers crowned with success and honor. In some part, at least, 
the want of a variety of courses was compensated for by the close and 
often intimate relation between the student and the teacher. The contact 
with such men as Professors Wylie, Owen, Ballantine and Kirkwood was 
a liberalizing and inspiring influence which wrought in the minds and 
hearts of the youth subtle and abiding changes. 

ISTevertheless it must be admitted that Indiana University had not kept 
pace with the younger universities of neighboring States. There was needed 
an infusion of new and vigorous blood — a rejuvenation which would put 
the institution in touch with the modern moveiuent in higher education — 
a need fully supplied in the administration next following, that of David 
Starr Jordan. 

On January 1, 1885, Dr. David Starr Jordan, professor of biology in Presidency of 
the University, entered upon his duties as President, in succession to Dr. f./\.j. j^ " ^^ „ 
Moss. His administration was the beginning of a new epoch in the history (1885-91). 
of the University, in which it was raised to the level of other State Univer- 
sities and to an honorable rank among the leading institutions of the country. 
The chief means by which this was accomplished was the "reorganization 
of the curriculum to the form in which it now stands, a form which har- 
monizes individuality with thorough work, and secures an education at 
once broad and of specific content." 

Dr. Jordan's conception of a university is stated clearly in his own 
words: "The highest function of the real university is that of instruction 
by investigation. The essential quality of the university is the presence 

21 



Historical Sketch 



in its Faculty of men qualified to do university work. It matters not how 
many or how few the subjects taught, or what may be the material equip- 
ment of the teacher, the school in which study and investigation go hand 
in hand is in its degree a university." It was this ideal which determined 
the course of his entire policy in the modification of the curriculum and 
in the selection of his staff of instructors. It was his plan to choose as 
professors young men fresh from the best schools where opportunities for 
graduate work of the best type were offered. He believed that these men, 
imbued with the spirit of investigation, would instil into their own students 
the desire for research work. His expectations were amply realized. 

Many changes in the personnel of the Faculty were made during his 
administration. This was due in part to the fact that as the success of 
the young teachers became known they were called to more responsible and 
more lucrative positions elsewhere. But their places here were in turn 
filled by men of the same stamp. 

Second in importance only to the reorganization of the curriculum was The Preparatory 
the service of Dr. Jordan in articulating more closely the University and j;^^^^"*";'"^^,,^^ 
the High Schools of the State, and in popularizing the University without 
lowering its standard. In the belief that the High Schools had attained 
such a position that they could offer the secondary instruction necessary 
for admission to the University, the Preparatory Department was abolished 
in 1890. The number of commissioned High Schools was increased rapidly, 
and the quality of their instruction was improved. In this way the influence 
of Dr. Jordan touched not only the University but the High Schools and even 
the common schools of the State. 

In 1885 the buildings on the new campus — Owen Hall, Wylie Hall and a 
frame chapel building now called Mitchell Hall — were ready for occupation. 
In 1890 was erected the present Maxwell Hall, used for the library and the 
administration offices. Under Dr. Jordan's care the equipment of the chem- 
ical, physical and zoological laboratories was increased in quantity and im- 
proved in quality. 

In 1889, after a discontinuance of thirteen years, the Indiana University The School of 
School of Law was re-established with Judge David Demaree Banta as Dean. (^Jgg^y'^'' 
Since that time it has made continuous progress by increasing the require- 
ments for admission and by extending the length of the course to three years. 

23 



Historical Sketch 

In 1801 an important change was made in the method of selecting part 
of the Board of Trnstees. Three members since that time have been elected 
by the alnmni of the Universit}^ residing in Indiana. Each member serves 
for a term of three 3'ears, one retiring annnally. This arrangement has 
proved to be quite satisfactory and assists in keeping alive the interest of 
the alnmni in their alma mater. 

In 1891 Dr. Jordan resigned to take the presidency of a new university 
planned by Senator Leland Stanford at Palo Alto, California. His loss to 
Indiana University was a severe blow. As a teacher Dr. Jordan was thor- 
ough and inspiring. His success in arousing in young men a thirst for 
knowledge obtained by original investigation is shown by the long list of his 
students who have achieved scientific distinction. As an executive he was 
original and positive in his convictions ; to many, his advanced conceptions 
seemed radical. But he comprehended as no one else did at the time, the 
future possibilities of Indiana University; and time has only confirmed the 
wisdom and saneness of his views. It is not extravagant to say that the 
present position and tendency of the University are due to the influence of 
Dr. Jordan more than to that of any other one man. 

The immediate successor of Dr. Jordan was John Merle Coulter, pro- Presidency of 

fessor of botany at Wabash Colleo-e, whose doctorate of philosophy was con- r>i'- J<Jh» ^^ • C'oui- 
. . . ^ ter (1891-!):^). 

fenced by Indiana University in 1884. Imbued with the same spirit. Presi- 
dent Coulter continued Dr. Jordan's policy ; his presidency Avas too short for 
him to work out any individual policy of his own. With diplomatic skill he 
harmonized some differences which had arisen within the Faculty. His 
influence tended to allay an unwarranted alarm in some quarters lest the 
spirit of scientific inquiry at the University might have a detrimental effect 
on the religious belief of the young people. It was in the first year of his 
administration that a branch of the Young lien's Christian Association was 
ostablished in the University, superseding an older, less defined organization 
composed of men and women students known as the Christian Association. 
In this movement Dr. Coulter took an active interest, not only in the local 
branch but in the State Association as well. In 1893 Dr. Coulter resigned to 
take the presidency of Lake Forest University, and shortly after (1896) 
accepted the professorship of botany in the University of Chicago. 



25 



Historical Sketch 

Dr. Joseph Swain, who succeeded Dr. Coulter in 1893, was the second Presidency of 
President of the University who had completed within its walls his under- ^yc^"!ic)o?M''''''' 
graduate course. lie entered the ITniversity in the same year (18V9) in 
which Dr. Jordan hegan his work as professor of biology, and soon came 
under his influence. After graduating in 1883, he held an instructorship at 
the University in mathematics and zoology for two years, and in 1885 re- 
ceived the degree of Master of Science. The following year he studied mathe- 
matics and astronomy at Edinburgh University, Scotland, and in 1886 he 
returned to his alma mater as professor of mathematics. Dr. Jordan was 
so impressed with the soundness of his opinions and the wisdom of his advice 
that he chose him among the first of the members of the new faculty of 
Stanford University in 1891 and made him professor of mathematics. 
During the period of organizing that institution he was one of the most 
confidential advisers of President Jordan. In this close association he 
acquired an intimate knowledge of the details of university administration, 
and upon the resignation of President Coulter in 1893, Professor Swain was 
elected President of Indiana University. 

Dr. Swain's educational policy was along the lines marked out by Presi- 
dent Jordan, l^ew courses were added to the curriculum and other men of 
the same type as the old were added to the corps of instructors. There was 
a leveling up of the departments — especially those dealing with the human- 
ities, which to some seemed in danger of being overshadowed by the rapid 
development of the scientific departments. 

The maintenance of old standards and the realization of new ideals 
increased expenditures. In the field of university finance President Swain 
rendered preeminent service to the University and the cause of higher educa- 
tion in Indiana. In addition to special appropriations for the erection of 
three new buildings — Kirkwood Hall, a larger heating plant, and Science 
Hall — the Legislature, largely through his influence, was induced to provide 
a more permanent financial support for the University. In 1895 an act was 
passed imposing an annual tax equivalent to one-fifteenth of a mill upon 
each dollar of taxable property within the State for the use of the University 
— a rate subsequently raised (in 1903) to one-tenth of a mill. The increased 
revenue was expended with strict economy. The growth of the institution in 



27 



Historical Sketch 



the estimation of the public is attested by the rapid increase in the attend 
ance, whicli rose in this period from 638 in 1894, to 1,285 in 1902. 

In 1900 a step was taken which has made the University more fully than Abolition of 
ever before a school for the people. Although tuition was free, it had long 
been customary to charge a small fee of five dollars per term for contingent 
purposes. At the ISTovember meeting of the Board of Trustees in 1900, all 
contingent fees, excepting those in the School of Law, were abolished from 
and after January 1, 1901. This however did not do away with "reasonable 



Contingent Fees 
1900). 




MEN'S GYMNASIUM (Erected iSiXJ) 

charges for the use of the gymnasimn, library, and equipment and supplies 
for the laboratories." 

Equally with President Coulter, Dr. Swain cnconraged tlie work of the 
Young Men's and Young Women's Christian Associations and was largely 
instrumental in making the organizations here the leading branches of the 
college associations in Indiana. Mainly through the interest and energy of 



29 



Indiana University 

liis wife, Mrs. Frances ]\Iorgan Swain, there was raised from students, 
alumni, and friends of the University, in the hist years of President Swain's 
administration, a sum which, with an equal amount given b}^ Mr. John D. 
Rockefeller, secures the erection of a Students' Building to cost approxi- 
mately $100,000. The building, which is now in process of construction, 
will contain the women's gymnasium, rooms for the Young Men's and Young 
Women's Christian Associations, and a small auditorium ; and it will become 
a center for the student life of the University. 

In 1902 Dr. Swain resigned to accept the presidency of Swarthmore 
College, Swarthmore, Pennsylvania, in response to an urgent call from those 
of his own faith — the Society of Friends. His most distinctive services 
to the University were in enriching its material resources and equipment, 
in defending it against unreasonable attacks, and in perfecting its organi- 
zation. 
Presidency of Di". William Lowe Bryan, who is now President of the University, was 

Dr. Wiiham graduated from Indiana University in 18S4; he was instructor in Greek in 
from !!>()'_'. ' the University from January to June in 1885, and associate professor of phi- 
losophy from 1885 to 1887. During the year 1886-87 he was a student at the 
University of Berlin; and during the year 1891-92, he studied at Clark 
University, from which institution he received the degree of Doctor of Phi- 
losophy in 1892. From 1887 until his election to the presidency in 1902, he 
was professor of philosophy in the University. As Vice-President, under Dr. 
Swain, he was closely associated with the administration of the University; 
and, becanse of his peculiar fitness on account of natural ability, tempera- 
ment and special training, the Board of Trustees, the Faculty, the students, 
the alumni and all other friends of the University, with unanimity turned to 
him as the logical successor to the presidency. His formal installation took 
place in connection with the celebration of Foundation Day, January 20, 
1903 — a celebration made doubly memorable by the dedication at the same 
time of the new Science Hall. 

In the two years of the present administration, the prosperity of the 
University has continued unimpaired, and it is believed that the efficiency and 
usefulness of the institution are at as high a level of excellence as ever before 
in its history. President Bryan has expressed one of the chief objects of his 
administration, as follows : 

30 




^ 


3 


s 


C3 


cS 


> 


n', 


^ 


c 


O 

o 




xi 







o 


»j 


C' 


« 


•^ 









XJ 


^ 


D 


-ti 


0) 


'^ 


r^ 




ci 




















ki 


, 1 


•« 


^ 


u< 


^.^ 
















cS 




n 


(1) 






9, 


t< 




£ 


o 


OJ 




o 


1 




»J 
















cj 








TJ 


r 




od 


03 


ft 


!-• 


Si 


CO 


ft 


O 

o 

CO 


o 
o 


0) 



^ Cg ;_, .^ 



g S X! .2:; 



5 o 






OJ 


c 


ii 


is 
o 


3 


^j 


K« 


o 




tU 


m 






J3 



,:2 I' 

to f-( 



cs o x: 



5 §5^ 



•^ G !=i S M 
o ./ ° S a- S 



g _ CO 
ID S ^ 

s ^ 



- S o 



P fi ^ 



o 


c 


OJ 


-a 


Qj 


c 


P 




ft 


^ 


t>> 


ffi 


-a 


O 






o 


£ 




O 








<v 




0) 












"^ 


to 


t> 


0/ 


c 


^ 


- 




o 


0) 


t* 


c 




? 






fl 




^ 


o 


o 

0) 


Cfl 




^ 


0; 


fl 


>> 

£ 


o 


a 

o 




o 




o 


-c 


m 


3 


o 






n 


T) 












-a 
c 

D 


i^ 






C 




^ 


73 


P 


to 

0) 


a; 
XJ 


ja 


t-. 


o 




Oi 


s 


;-. 




o 


IE 


X! 


.2P 


5>C 

c 


1-5 


CJ 


is 


a 

3 


6J3 


■? 


ctt 










r/.' 


> 






■w 




'rl 


;j 


« 




:; 


a 



St c 0) 



x: c 

&H .2 



*« H 3 f^ S 



Historical Sketch 

"For eighteen years the chief feature of our curriculum has been the 
major subject. The major subject has meant some one department of learn- 
ing — chemistry, Greek, or the like — in wliich the candidate for graduation 
spends one third or one fourth of all his time and in which he has therefore a 
chance to gain the beginnings of mastery. 

"]^ow I believe in vastly widening the meaning of the major subject. It 
has meant as I have said a department of learning. I wish to see it mean 
also any group of subjects leading to a learned occupation. I wish to see men 
given the degree of A.B. in law, medicine, architecture, commerce, journal- 
ism or any such profession. Second, I wish to see the major subject mean 
also any group of subjects leading to one of the fine arts. Our whole system 
of education is one-sided through the almost total neglect of the arts. I hope 
soon to see the time when all the great arts will be adequately represented in 
that free public school system which rises 'in regular gradation from the 
township schools to the State University.' 

"Toward the accomplishment of these ideals, there has been no rash or 
sweeping change but, as the official announcements of the University show in 
detail, a rapid and substantial progress." 

In reviewing the history of the four-score years of the institution, many Summary: the 
vicissitudes are noted. "During the first generation of its historv the Indi- ^ '"^'ersity and 

_ " ~ "^ the people. 

ana University endured a continuous struggle. It had to contend against the 
reluctance of the State to give to it a vigorous and liberal financial support; 
its lands were unfortunately, or unwisely, managed, and by their too early sale 
it never realized from its land endo^^vment an income of more than $8,000 ; 
it was troubled by uncertainty and confusion and subsequent litigation con- 
cerning this endowment; it was hampered (in the early history of the State) 
by the antagonisms of religious sects, whose adverse influence was seen some- 
times in the management of the institution, but more often in unkind and 
uncalled for opposition to its management and interests ; it suffered two disas- 
ters by fire ; it had to resist an unreasonable, but common, feeling of suspi- 
cion, among many of the masses, toward higher education by the State ; — all 
these causes, with some minor ones, have operated to make the growth of 
the University slow and difficult."^ 



1 Woodburn, Higher Education in Indiana, p. 84. 

31 



Indiana University 

As the material resources of the State have been developed ; as the people 
have acquired that competency which brings leisure and opportunity for 
culture and refinement ; as men have become more tolerant in their religious 
beliefs ; as the conviction has grown wider and deeper that trained leaders- 
are indispensable in a democracy, the State has become more generous in its 
support of higher education and made it possible to carry out the ideals of the 
founders of the University and to accomplish its real functions as conceived 
by its recent presidents. It bids fair to do its full share in the education of 
the youth and in the endeavor to attain the ideal democracy. The spirit of 
its administration is set forth in these words, from President Bryan's inau- 
gural address : 

''What the people need and demand is that their children shall have a 
chance — as good a chance as any other children in the world — to make the 
most of themselves, to rise in any and every occupation, including those 
occupations which require the most thorough training. What the people 
want is open paths from every corner of the State, through the schools, to the 
highest and best things which men can achieve. To make such paths, to make 
them open to the poorest and lead to the highest,, is the mission of democ- 
racy." 



32 



II 
DeijeloptTient of tl)e Couris^e of instruction 



(4) 



"That youthful Community (the University) will consti- 
tute A Whole, it will embody a specific Idea, it will 
represent a Doctrine, it will administer a code of Conduct, 

AND IT WILL furnish PRINCIPLES OF THOUGHT AND ACTION. It 
WILL (HVE BIRTH TO A LIVING TEACHING, WHICH IN COURSE OF 
TIME WILL TAKE THE SHAPE OF A SELF-PERPETUATING TRADITION, 

OR A Genius Loci as it is sometimes called; which haunts the 

HOME where it HAS BEEN BORN AND WHICH IMBUES AND FORMS 
MORE OR LESS AND ONE BY ONE EVERY INDIVIDUAL WHO IS SUC- 
CESSIVELY BROUGHT UNDER ITS SHADOW." — CARDINAL NeWMAN. 



INTRODUCTORY 



This history of the development of the course of instruction at Indiana Sources of 
University is derived chiefly from the published annual catalogues, of which '" '^'^ ''^"' 
the first appeared under the date of August 17, 1831, in the third year of the 
existence of the institution as a college and the eleventh from its foundation 
as the State Seminary. With the exception of these catalogues, the official 
records of the early and middle periods of the institution were nearly all lost 
in the fires of 1854 and 1883. 

Throughout the following pages and in the accompanying tables, an 
academic year is uniformly referred to by mentioning only the later of the 
two calendar years into which the academic year extends, — thus 1850 stands 
for the academic year 1849-50. 

For convenience of reference a list of the presidents of Indiana Uni- List of Presi- 
versity from the time of its foundation as a college is here given, with the u^j .gj-gif . 
dates of their administrations. 

1. Andrew Wylie, D.D 1828-1851 

2. Alfred Ryors, D.D 18.52-1853 

.3. William Mitchell Daily, D.D., LL.D 1853-1S58 

4. John Hiram Lathrop, LL.D 1859-18G0 

5. Cyrus Nutt. D.D.. LL.D 1860-1875 

G. Lemuel Moss. Ph.D.. D.D 1875-1884 

7. David Starr .Tordan, Ph.D., LL.D 1884-1891 

8. John Merle Coulter, Ph.D., LL.D 1891-1893 

9. Joseph Swain, M.S., LL.D 1893-1902 

10. William Lowe Bryan, Ph.D from 1902 

35 



DEPARTMENTS OF LIBERAL ARTS 



GENERAL DEVELOPMENT TO 1887 

Rise of the 111 the early days of the University, there was no snbtli vision of the 

"Departments cnrricnhim into separate courses of study or separate departments. The 
of Liberal Arts." ^ . . J i i 

Preparatory Department, it is true, existed at least from 1830, but this was 

never an integral part of the "College proper," as the main institution came 
to be called. A Law School was established in 1842, Normal and Agricul- 
tural Departments were organized in 1852, a Department of Military 
Science was added in 1868, and a Medical Department in 1871. The 
broadening of the course of instruction by the addition of these various 
departments gradually emphasized the need of some distinctive name for the 
"College" itself. It is not until 1870, however, that we find the use of the 
expression "Department of Literature, Science, and the Arts." In the cata- 
logue of the next year no distinctive name is employed, but from 1872, with 
the introduction of the course in medicine, the term "Collegiate Department" 
appears. In 1894 the appointment of a Dean of the Depirtments of Liberal 
Arts fixed the official usage for all the sub-departments included in the 
College proper. 
Tiiree periods in On the lines of educational policy, the history of the course of instruc- 

tion in the Collegiate Department of Indiana University may be divided into 
three rather clearly defined periods. From 1831, when our earliest records 
begin, through 1840, the course of instruction was formed with reference to 
having the student pursue "one principal study at a time." This was the 
rule, though exceptions were admitted "to suit the convenience of the stu- 
dent." 1 



the course of 
instruction 



iCatalogue for 1840. 

36 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

From the middle of President Wylie's administration, beginning with the 
year 1841, a change of policy appears. The new plan may be considered as 
announced in the following statement, which appears in the University cata- 
logue for ISll and for several years thereafter: 

The object of the course of instruction iiiveu to tlie underiirndnates in this Insti- 
tution is to commence a tliorough course, and continue the same, so far as the time 
of the students' residence at the University will permit. The course prescribed em- 
braces those subjects only which ouyht to be understood l)y everyone who aims at 
a liberal education. The principles of science and literature are the common basis 
of all high intellectual attainments. They supply that furniture, and discipline, and 
elevation to the mind, which are the best aids in the study of any profession. The 
student, in further prosecution of his professional career, may enter a school of Law, 
or Medicine, or Theology. With these the undergraduate course is not intended to 
interfere. The object is, not to teach what is peculiar to any one of the professions, 
but to lay a foundation which is common to all. 

The following extract from the catalogue of a few years later also serves 
to define the new policy of the institution : 

It is the design of the Faculty of the University to maintain the highest standard 
of education which the state of the country will admit. It is an evil incident to a 
new state of society, that young men. from the want of means, from haste to enter 
professional life, and other causes, take only a partial course of study. But whatever 
studies the student undertakes, he is required to pursue in a rigorously accurate and 
thorough manner. None are permitted to graduate unless they have completed the 
prescribed course, Avhich is as extensive as is usual in our oldest and best established 
American colleges. 

In other words, while in the first decade of the recorded history of the 
ITniversity, emphasis was laid on one chief subject and on having that done 
well, in the second ])eriod the sttident was expected to divide his attention 
between several subjects of more or less coordinate rank. This second tend- 
ency is res]3onsible for the introduction into the curriculum of many new lines 
of work, and so perhaps forms the natural stage of transition from a period 
of too great specialization to the period in which specialization is combined 
with lireadth of interest. 

37 



Indiana University 

Tlio third period in the development of the University's educational 
policy was not definitely inano'urated until 1887. An account of its intro- 
duction and character will he found on a subsequent ])ai;e, in its appropriate 
place. 

Number of In the early history of the University the academic year was divided into 

^^^■'"^- two sessions, the first commencing with the first of November and ending 

with the last of April, the second commencing with the first of June and end- 
ing with the last of Septend^er. There were thus two vacation periods, com- 
prising respectively the month of Alay and the month <d" October. Later the 
two sessions were so shifted as to bring the vacations in A])ril and in October 
respectively. The three-term plan was introduced in IS;")!), or possibly the 
year before,^ and has continued until the present time. The divisions of the 
year Avere practically as at present, except that the ''summer term'' so-called, 
corresponding to our "spring term," was separated from the wdnter term by a 
vacation period of about a month, thus bringing Commencement about the 
middle of August instead of, as at present, in the latter part of June. 

Just how manv recitations a day students were required to attend during 



XunilHT ami 



length of reei- ||j^, early period of the University's existence it is impossible to make out ; 
periof N. ^^^^ fi-oi^-i the year 1841 we read in the catalogues the following rule: "Each 
of the four classes attends three recitations or lectures in a day." This is 
practicallv equivalent to the present requirement in number of periods, but 
we have no means of determining what was the length of the recitation 
period at that time. From 1878 the number of lecture or recitation periods 
a week was raised from fifteen to twenty, and we read: "Every student is 
required to attend four recitations or lectures a day, unless specially ex- 
cused." In the first year of President Jordan's administration (1885) the 
nund)er of periods was reduced once more to fifteen; l)iit by a c:n-re3ponding 
lengthening of the period itself it was estimated not only that w) time would 
be lost, but that as a matter of fact some time would be gained. It was 
thought, also, that more could be accomplished in three studdes a day with 
a relatively longer period than in four wdth the slnu-ter ]>('i-iod. In the 
two years 1898 and 1899, in order to make rooui on Tuesdays and Fridays 
for a chapel hour, the recitation period on those days was shortened in the 

iThe University catalogue for 1840 is missing. 

38 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

iiioniiiig- to forty-five ininutps, while on the other days of the week it remained 
fifty-five minutes in length. From 1900 the period has been fixed uniformly 
at fifty minutes, with ten-minute intermissions. AVith the gradual introduc- 
tion of fractional courses, moreover, it was found impractical^le to insist on 
the student dividing his work so as to bring exactly three recitation periods 
into each day, consequently since 189.5 the regular amount of work has been 
specified as fifteen hours a week, the student being left to distribute those 
hours as he thinks best. 

In the College proper, as distinguished from the Preparatory and other first Period 
Departments, one uniform course of instruction of fonr years leading to the '^f the Course 
degree of Bachelor of Arts was originally prescril.ed for all stndents who "^SH^;™" 
were candidates for graduation. In the earliest form in which it appears in 
the University catah gne, namely in 1831, the second, year of President 
Wylie's administration, this course was as follows: 

Fkesiiman Class— 

Greek Testamejit, .AIiii<,ra, Majora Isl vol.. :Ma.j()ra 2(1 vo). commenced. Com- 
positions in p]ng-lisli and Latin, (ivevk Tlieses. 

S0PII():\t0RE ("LASS — 

Ma.iora tinished. the Iliad. Colburn's Algebra. Cambridge Mathematics. 
Compositions and themes, as in tlie Freshman Class. 

Junior Class— 

Mathematics finished. Mechanics. Astronomy. Physics. Mathematical and 
I*hyslcal Geography. Dissertations, and themes and compositions, as before. 

Senior Class— 

Moral and INIental I'liilosophy, Evidences of Christianity in connection with 
Natnral Religion. Rhetoric, with a review of select ijortions of the Greelv. Latin 
and English Classics, Logic, rolitical Economy. Constitntion of the [^nited States. 
Dissertations, and composition, in English and Latin. 

At the end of the first decade already referred to as marking a distinct 
period in the educational policy of the University, namely in 1840, the 
course of instruction was as follows : 

39 



Indiana University 

Freshman Class— 

First H<'.ssi(tii. (>vi(l (three lirst licxiks and tlnrieeiitli), Mryil, Horace, Klietor- 
ieal Keadiiiii' and Deelaiiialioii. 

Second Hrssioii. Greek Testament. Collectanea, Gra^ca JNIinora, ^Nlajora com- 
menced. Rhetorical Reading and Declamation. These are continued throughout 
the Course. 

>S(>pno>ro)!E Class — 

First Session. Grreca ^Nlajcra finished, the Iliad. Cicero de Oratore. 
Second Session. Algebra (Davies' Bourdon), Geometry (Davies' Legendre). 

Juxioi; Class— 

First Session. With the Professor of [Mathematics. Plane and Spherical 
Trigonometry. Surveying, Analytical Geometry. Differential and Integral Cal- 
culus (Davies). 

With the I'rofessor of Natural Philosophy and Chemistry. Heat. Electricity. 
Galvanism, Electro-Magnetism (Tui'uer's Chemistry), Statics and Dynamics 
(Cambridge Mechanics). 

Second Session. Hydrostatics and Hydrodynamics (Caml)ridge Meclianics), 
Optics (Bache's Brewster). Inorganic and Organic Cliemistry (Turner), Astron- 
omy (Herschel). 

The instructions in tlie departments of Natui'al Pliilosoiihy and Chemistry 
are conveyed in part by Lectures, with experimental illustrations, but principally 
by the study of approved text-books. 

The Senior Class 

Spends tlie whole year under the immediate dii'ection of tlie President in the 
following Studies: 

Rhetoric, by lectures, with critical reference to select portions of the Greek, 
Latin and English Classics, Blair and Campbell used as text-books; Logic 
(Whately); ]\Iental and Moral Philosophy; Political Ec(uiomy: Evidences of 
Christianity; Constitution of the I'nited States. On .-ill tlnse sul),ie<-ts Lectures 
are given. Dissertations and Syllabuses are required, and a course of reading 
pointed out. 



Second Period 
OF THE Course 
OF Instruction 
(1IS40-S()). 



The year 1S41 marks the beginning of tlie ])ori(i(l in the history of the 
University when, instead of emphasizing "one prinei|)al study at a time," the 
stndent was expected to pursue several distinct lines of work of coordinate 
rank. From this time nntil the end of President Wylie's administration the 
course of instruction shows comparatively little develo])ment. Two speci- 

40 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

mens are subjoined, the first remaining practically nnehangod from ls41 
tlirongli IS-io, and the second from 1S46 throngh ls4S: 

Freshman Class— 

First Session. Horace's Odes and Epodes; Jacob's Greek Reader; Fiske's Course of study, 
Classical Manual, Part I; Grammatical Exercises and Written Translations; 1 ^-10-45. 
Algebra. 

Second Session. Horace's Satires and Epistles; Xenoplion's Anabasis; Fiske's 
Classical Manual, Part II; Grammatical Exercises and Written Translations; 
Davies" Legendre's Geometry and Trigonometry. 

Sophomore Class— 

First Session. Folsom's Livy; Homer's Iliad, commenced; Classical Manual, 
Parts III and IV; Antlion's Greek Prosody, with Scanning; Davies' Surveying 
and Analytical Geometry. 

Second Session. Virgil's Georgics and Cicero de OfHciis; Homer's Iliad, tin- 
ished; Classical Manual. Part V. with Ancient Geography; Greek Prosody, with 
Scanning; Davies' Differential and Integral Calculus. 

Junior Class— 

First Session. Cicero de Oratore; Xeuophon's Memorabilia of Socrates; 
Davies' Descriptive Geometry; Cambridge Mechanics. Statics and Dynamics; 
Turnei''s Chemistry; Heat and Electricity; Blair's and Campbell's Rhetoric, with 
Lectures. 

Second Session. Juvenal and Persius, or Cicero de Senectute and Cicero de 
Amicitia; ^F^schine.s and Demosthenes de Corona; Candiridge Mechanics, com- 
pleted; Inorganic Chemistry; Whately's Logic; Lectures ))y the President. 

Senior Class — 

First Sessio)!. Tacitus — History; Longinus; Optics, Bache's BrcAA-ster; ;Moral 
Philosophy and Evidences of Christianity, with Lectures by tlie President. 

Second Session. Tacitus— Manners of the Germans, and Agricola; Woolsey's 
Greek Plays; Gummere's Astronomy; Chemistry completed; Say's I'olitical Econ- 
omy; Reid's and Stewart's Mental Philosophy, witii Lectures; and Constitution 
of the United States. 
Declamations, Essays, and lilietorical Reading. Ijy the Classes, on every Saturday 
during tlie whole course. 

The conrse of instruct ion as it existed from 1846 to 1848, inclusive, was 
as follows : 

41 



Indiana University 



Course of study, Freshman Class — 

1846-48. 

First Ses^tiDii. Fulsdin's Li\y: (JiM'ca .Majorn : Kiskc's Classieal Manual. I'ait 

I; Gvauimatical Exercises and Wi'itten Translatiims; Pierce's Algebra. 

SccoikI tScssioit. Horace— Odes and Kiindes; Gfnvca ^lajora: Fiske's Classical 

Manual, . Part II; Gi'aniinatical Fxei'cists and Written Ti'anslations; Davies' 

Legendre's Geometry. 

SoriioMORp; Class — 

First Scssio)!. Horace— Satires and Ei)istles; Gra'ca ;Ma.iora: Classical ^Manual. 
I'arts III and IV; Antlion's Greek Prosody, and Scanning; Pierce's Trigonometry 
and Surveying, and Analytical Geometry. 

.S'ccoHf/ Session. Plays of Terence; Homer's Iliad, or Odyssey; Classical 
^lanual. Part V, with Ancient Geography; Greek Prosody, with Scanning; 
Pierce's Differential and lutegi'al Calcidus. 

Junior Class — 

First Seh-sion. Tacitus— History, and Manners of the Germans; Greek Drama 
— Euripides; Integral Calculus, completed; Cambridge ^lechanics. Statics and 
Dynamics; Chemistry; Heat and Electricity; Blair's and Campbell's Kln'toric, 
with Lectures. 

St'cond Session. Juvenal; Greek Drama— Sophocles; Cambridge Mechanics, 
completed; Inorganic Chemistry; "Wliately's Logic; Lectures by the Presiilent. 

Senior Class — 

First Sessio)i. Cicero— De Oratore; Pindar— tlie Olympic and Pythian Od:s; 
Optics, Bache's Brewster; iNIoral Philosophy, and Evidences of Christianity, with 
Lectures by the President. 

Second Session. Captivi or iNIiles (iloriosus of Plautus; Prometheus Yinctus 
of 3^schylus; Astronomy, (iunnnere; ChemisTi-y. (-(unpleted; Say's I'olitical Econ- 
omy; Reid's and Stewart's ^Mental Philosophy, with Lectures; and the Cons itu- 
tiou of the United States. 



The following- course of study, taken from the catalogue for 1850, repi-e- 
sents the closing years of President Wvlie's administration and shows an 
early stage of the three-term system : 



42 



Departments of Liberal Arts 



FRESilMAX ClASS- 



First Term. Livy (Folsom); Gra-ca Mnjora; Fiske's Classical Manual. Part Course of study 
I: Jioni'don's AIi;vl:ra (Davits); Graiuinatieal Exercises and Written Translations. 

^Secant] Term. Horace— Odes; Grueca Majoi'a; Fiske's Classical Manual, Part 
II: Algebra, conipkted; L4eonietry (Davies and Legendre); Grammatical Exer- 
cises and Written Translations. 

Third Term. Horace, continued; Grax-a Majora; Classical Manual, Part II; 
Geometry. comi)leted. 

SoPHOMor.E Class — 

First Term. Horace— Eijistles. and Art of Poetry; Grseca Majora; Classical 
:ManuaI. Parts III and IV; Plane and Splierical Trigonometry (Davies' Legendre). 

Second Term. Plays of Terence; Homer's Iliad, or Odyssey; Classical Manual, 
Parts IT and V; Greek Prosody, and Scanning; Surveying and Analytical 
Geometry. 

Third Term. Plays of Terence; Homer's Iliad, or Odyssey; Classical Manual, 
Part V: Analytical Geometry, completed. 

Junior Class — 

First Term. Tacitus— Histoi-y, and Manners of the Germans; Greek Drama- 
Euripides; Cambridge Mechanics— Statics and Dynamics; Turnei"'s Chemistry; 
Integral and Differential Calculus (Davies); Rhetoric— Blair, Campbell, and 
Lectures. 

Second Term. Descriptive Geometry (Davies); Greek Drama— Sophocles; Cam- 
lu'idge Mechanics, completed; Logic— Whately and Lectures; Moral I*liilosophy. 

Third Term. Juvenal; Political Economy; Inorganic Chemistry; Mental Phi- 
losophy. 

Sexior Class — 

Fiist Term. Mental Pliilosopliy, continued; Political Economy, Lectures 
(Say); Cicero— De Oratore; Pindar— Olympic and Pythian Odes; Evidences of 
Christianity. 

Second Term. Optics (Bache's Brev\'ster); Moral Science, reviewed; Plautus— 
Captivi, or Miles Gloriosus; Prometheus Yinctus. 

Third Term. Astronomy (Gummere); Chemistry, completed; Reviews and 
catechetical examinations on the main branches of the course; Declamations, 
Essays, Dissertations, and Rhetorical Reading and by the Senior Class. Original 
or Extemporaneous Speaking. 

43 



Indiana University 

Under President Ryors, who held office for one year only (1853), the 
conrse of instrnction followed closely that laid down in the hiter years of his 
predecessor. 
Beginning of the From 1845 a considerahlc body of undergradnates had l»!'en i^ronped 

together in the catalogue as "Scientific and Irregidar/' In 1854, the first 
year of President Daily's administration, there appears for the first time a 
list of studies which ''constitutes the conrse necessary to be completed in 
order to receive the degree of Bachelor of Science." This degree was hrst 
granted in that year ; but the course of instrnction leading to the degree of 
Bachelor of Science was not graded until 1860. From this time on, however, 
it appears as a three-year course, and it is probable that before this time it 
had covered the same period. 

The following courses of instruction for 1850 are representative of the 
work under the administration of President Daily, fur both the regular and 
the scientific students : 



REGULAR COURSE 



Regular Course Freshman Cla>ss— 
in ]S5(^,. 



First Term. Uivy; GriTpca ^rajora; Grecian and Roman Antiquities (Bojessen); 
Algebra (Davies' Botirdon); Latin, Greek, and English Composition; Eloc-ution. 

Second Term. Livy; Grpeca Majora; Grecian and Roman Antiquities; Algebra, 
completed; Geometry (Davies' Legendre) commenced; Latin, Gi'eek, and English 
Composition; Elocution. 

Third Term. Horace— Odes; Gra^ca Majora: Geometry (Davies' Legendre) 
completed; History; Latin, Greek, and English Conu)ositi(ni; Elocution. 

SornoMORE Class — 

First Term. Horace— Satires and Epistles; Grseca Majora; Application of Al- 
gebra to Geometry; Plane and Spherical Trigonometry (Davies); ^Mensuration 
(Davies); Descriptive Geometry (Davies) commenced; History; Elocution; Latin, 
Greek, and English Composition. 

Second Term. Horace, finished; Gra?ca iNIajora; Descriptive Geometry; Sur- 
veying (Daviesi: Analytical Geometry (Davies). commenced; English Litera- 
ture; Latin. Greek, and English Composition; Elocution. 

Third Term. Terence; Homer's Iliad or Odyssey; Analytical Geometry: 
Rhetoric (Blair); Latin, Greek, and English Composition; Elocution. 

■ 44 



Departments of Liberal Arts 



Juxion Class— 

First Tnnii. Rhetoric (Campbell); Elements of Criticism; Chemistry (Silli- 
man); Tacitus; Greek Drama; Analytical Geometry, completed; Calculus (Daviesl. 
commenced; Exercises in English Composition and Di'clamation. 

tiecoinl Tern). Mental Philosophy (Reid); Mechanics (Bartlett). commenced; 
Agricultural Chemistry; Juvenal; Greek Drama; Calculus; Exercises in English 
Composition and Declamation. 

Thiril Term. Mechanics, completed; Logic (Whately); Evidences of Chris- 
tianity; Juvenal; Greek Drama; Calcidus, finished; English Composition and 
Declamation. 

Senior Class — 

First Term. Geology; Physiology; Political Economy (Say); Moral Philosophy 
(Stewart), commenced; Cicero— De Oratore; Pindar; Civil Engineering; English 
Composition and Declamation. 

Seeond Term. Moral Philosophy, completed; International Law (Kent); Acous- 
tics and Optics (Bartlett); Selections from the Latin and Greek Classics; German 
Language and Literature (optional); Hebrew Language and Literature (optional); 
English Composition and Declamation. 

Third Term. Astronomy; Constitution of the United States (Story); Butler's 
Analogy; Selections from the Latin and Greek Classics; French Language and 
Literature (optional); Hebrew Language and Literature (optional); English Com- 
position and Declamation. 

SCIENTIFIC COURSE 

Tlie following studies constitute the course necessary to be completed in order to 
graduation to the degree of Bachelor of Science: 

Mitchell's Ancient and Modern Geographies; Butler's English Grammar; Scientific Course 
Ray's Arithmetic; Algebra (Davies' First Lessons); Wilson's American History; m 1«''56. 
English Composition and Declamation; Algebra (Davies' Bourdon); Geometry 
(Davies' Legendre); Application of Algebra to Geometry; Plane and Spherical 
Trigonometry (Daviesl; Descriptive Geometry (Davies); History; Analytical Ge- 
ometry (Davies); English Literature; Rhetoric; Elements of Criticism; Chemistry 
(Smiman); Calculus (Davies); Mental Philosophy (Reid); Geology (Hitchcock); 
Agricultural Chemistry; Physiology; Mechanics (Bartlett); Logic (Whately); 
Evidences of Christianity; Political Economy (Say); :Moral Philosophy; Survey- 
ing (Davies); Civil Engineering; International Law; Acoustics and Optics (Bart- 
lett); Astronomy; Constitution of the United States; Butler's Analogy. 

45 



Indiana University 

President Lathrop's administration covered only the one year 1860. 
From this year through 1867 the Scientiiie Course comprised sinqdy the 
Reo'uhir Course except the classics, and was designed to cover three years. 
The following is the complete course as announced in 1860: 



The course in Feesiiman Class 
1800. 



First Term. Xenopliou— History; Salliist: Greek Grammar; Algel)ni; Ge- 
ometry. 

sSecoinl Term. Xenoplion; Horace— Odes: Grammar: Algebra: Geometry; 
Trigonometry. 

Third Term. Herodotus; Horace— Odes; Granjmar; General History; Naviga- 
tion; Surveying; Latin, (ireek and English Composition, and Elocution, thi'ough- 
out the year, 

SopiioiioRE Class— 

F/r.s/ Term. Anal.vtical Geometry: Histoi-y of the T'nited States: Plato, or 
Xenophon's Memorabilia; Greek Syntax; Horace— Satires; Antiquities. 

Seroiid Term. Calculus: English Analysis: Demosthenes, or Tliucydides: 
Horace — Epistles: Antiiiuities; Syntax. 

Third Term. INIeclianics; English Composition; Homer's Iliad: Livy, or 
Terence: Antiquities; Syntax; Composition and Elocution throughout the year. 

Junior Class— 

First Term. ^lental Philosophy; Chemistry: Sophocles; Tacitus. 
Second Term. Logic: Chemistry; Physiology; Eurii)ides; Juvenal. 
Third Term. Rhetoric: Acoustics; Optics; Descriptive Geometry: Elocution 
and Composition tlirougiiout the year. 

Senior Class— 

First Term. Criticism; Ethics; Astronomy. 

Second Term. Geology: Civil Polity: Constitutional and International Law; 
Christian Evidences. 

Third Term. Political Economy; English Literature: Longinus, or Pindar; 
Cicero— De Oratore: Composition and Elocution each term. 

The course of instruction for the year 1865, which follows, differs from 
that just given in some respects, and may be taken as representative of the 
period from 1861 through 1867, which fell in the first half of the administra- 
tion of President Xtitt : 

46 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

REGULAR COURSE 

Feeshman Class— 

First Trnii. I. ivy: Grseca Majora, Vol. I: Crecian and Roman Antiquities; The course in 
Latin and Greelv Composition; Algebra (Kjbinson's Second Part); Introduction ^ "•• 
to Englisn Composition (Quackenbos). 

Second Term. Odes of Horace; Grseca Majora; Grecian and Roman Antiqui- 
ties; Algebra (Robinson), completed; Geometry (Robinson), commenced; English 
Composition (Quackenbos). 

Third Term. Horace's Odes; Grteca Majora; Geometry (Robinson), completed; 
History of the United States. 

Sophomore Class— 

First Term. Horace's Satires and Ei)istles; Grpeca Majora; Plane and Spher- 
ical Trigonometry (Robinson); Surveying begun (Robinson); English Composition. 

Second Term. Horace, finished; Grreca ^Nlajora; Surveying and Navigation 
(Robinson); Descriptive Geometry. 

Third Term. Terence; Homer's Iliad or Odyssey: Analytical Geometry (Rob- 
inson); General History. 

Junior Class— 

First Term. Mental Philosophy (Haven); Chemistry (Stoeckhardt): Tacitus; 
Greek Drama: Calculus (Robinson), commenced. 

Second Term. Logic (Coppee); Juvenal; Greek Drama; Calculus (Robinson), 
completed; Organic Chemistry (Stoeckhardt); Physiology. 

Third Term. Juvenal; Greek Drama; Natural Philosophy (Snell's Olmsted); 
.Tisthetics (Moftatt), and Lectures: C'vil Polity. Lectures. 

Senior Class— 

First Term. Political Economy (^yaylandl: Natural Philosophy (Snell's Olm- 
sted); Cicero— De Oratore; Pindar; Elements of Criticism (Kames). 

Second Term. Ethics (Lectures); Astronomy (Olmsted): Evidences of Chris- 
tianity (Lectures); Selections from the Latin and Greek Classics. 

Third Term. Constitutional and International Law: Geology (Dana's Text- 
Books); English Literature (Shaw). 

Weekly exercise in Elocution and Composition throughout the Course. 

SCIENTIFIC COURSE 
The Scientific Course is the same as the above, without the Ancient Languages. 

47. 



Indiana University 



Admission of 
Women to the 
University 

(1867). 




Latin 

Romance Laoouages 

German 

2 3 = 2 Teachers. 5 Courses 




^..499 

hours 



...400 

hour5 



..300 

hour5 



.. 200 

hours 



.. 100 

hours 



DEVELOPMENT OF THE COURSE OF INSTRUCTION - 1 

A change of far-reacliing importance was made in the policy of the 
institntion in 1867, when women were admitted to equal privileges with men. 
Indiana University was the first State University to adopt this ]iolicy, 
and among institutions of collegiate rank was preceded in the estahlishiiient 
of co-education only by Oberlin, Antioch and Fort Wayne Colleoes. The 
change at Indiana University is described by the late Professor Theophilu-i 



48 



Departments of Liberal Arts 



ESIXDEnc^ 



^^^Mistory-f Political 
Science 

ESSHlf^ine Arts 




ESSS3 Economics ^^^ Social 
Science 

[ .:: :,.:i PhiiQsophy 
PedaQogy 

^•^ = ^Teachers,5 Courses 
^Part of teachinq done by C^eek Professor 



--600 

hours 



■ooo 
hours 



400 

hours 



300 

hours 



--200 

hour5 



--I00 

hours 



DEVELOPMENT OF THE COURSE OF INSTRUCTION - II 

A. Wylie, in his 'Indiana University, Its History from 18:^0 to 1890/ as 
follows : 

In the preceding year, Mr. [Isaac] Jenkinson, then of Allen Connty, a member of 
the Board of Trnstees, offered a resolntion to admit females to the same studies 



(5) 



49 



ti^2il:2in^themdilics 



^^^3 Astronomy and 
Mechanics 

1^^ Physics 

^^^^ Chemistry 

CIIjIlIIIIII Geology and 
Geography 

^y^^"^ Zooloc^y 



] Botany 



2.:4=2 Tsachers, 4Gourses 




2:9 



3-I3 



.620 
nours 
000 

hours 



.700 

hours 



...600 

houra 



.;: :i 



500 

hout^ 



.400 

hours 



...^300 

hours 



\\L..zoo 
hours 



...100 
hours 



DEVELOPMENT OF THE COURSE OF INSTRUCTION - III 



Departments of Liberal Arts 



and the same standing as the males. For some time before this, the snbject "The 
co-edueation of the sexes." had been agitated in various educational conventions, and 
Mr. Jenkinson was a strong advocate in its favor. Co-operating with others like- 
minded, he had been instrumental in opening the Fort Wayne Female College to 
males. The other members of the University Board were not prepared for the inno- 
vation: no member l)ut himself approved of the resolution presented. At a subse- 
quent meeting, Judge Khoads offered a siibstitute for this resolution of Mr. Jenkinson, 
proposing to admit females to partial rights and privileges, but this was not agreed 
to by the Board. The original resolution was then pressed, and about the same time 
a ]ietition was presented by ;\[iss Sarah r[arke] Morrison, asking that the law of the 
University should be so changed that females, with regard to their studies and 
privileges, should be put on the same footing as the males. This request of Miss 
Morrison, coming when the (piestion was before rhe Board, had, without doubt, influ- 
ence in the Board's deciding in favor of Mr. Jenkinson's resolution. The motion, 
hoAA'ever, was carried only by a majority of one— four in favor, three against it. 
Miss Morrison, who knew nothing of the agitation of this question by the Board, 
received a reply to her petition that the laws of the University witli regard to this 
matter required no change, and that its doors, with all its rights and privileges, 
were open to females. Miss Morrison then entered the Sophomore Class at the be- 
giiming of the next year, 1SG8-9; and about nine weeks after, a number of young 
ladies entered the Freshman Class; and before the end of the second term there were 
twelve female students.^ 

In 1868 the Scientific Course was lengthened to four years and given a Coordination of 



separate schedule of study. This was in accordance with a notice given in 
the catalogue of the preceding year : "The . . . course of study may be 
modified by the Board of Trustees at their coming session, since the Legis- 
lature, at their last session, have, by an appropriation of eight thousand 
dollars per annum, greatly increased the resources of the University. Some 
new chairs will likely be established, and the corps of instructors enlarged, 
and the facilities for education multiplied." 

The regular course also at this time received the designation "classical," 
by which term the course in languages continued to be known until the defi- 
nite introduction in 1887 of the "major subject" system. During the ten 
years ending with 1877, the Scientific Course and the Classical Course stood 
side by side as parallel and of coordinate rank. As representing this period, 

iTheophilus A. Wylie, Indiana University: Its History from 1820 to 1S90 (Indianapolis, 1890), 
pp. 74-75. 

51 



Scientific and 
Classical Courses 

(1S6S). 



Indiana University 

two tables of eoiirses are siil)j<iiii<'<l, one for the year 1870^ and the other for 
the year 1875: 

CLASSICAL COURSE 



Classical Course Fkesiiman Class— 
in 1S70. 



First Term. Greek— Xenopliou's Anabasis (Boisel; Greek Grammar and Com- 
position (Hadley's Grammar). Latin— Livy, Latin Composition. Mathematics- 
Algebra (Ray). 

8eco7id Term. Greeli — Xenoplion's CyropiPtlia. or Isoerates" Orations; Greek 
History (Smith). Latin— Cicero or Ovid: Roman Antiquities. :Mathematics— Alge- 
bra, completed; Geometry (Ray), commenced. 

Third Term. Greek— Herodotus; Greek Antiquities and Literature (Bojessen). 
Latin— Odes of Horace; Roman Antiquities and Literature (Bojessen). Mathe- 
matics—Geometry, completed. Physiology. 

Sophomore Class— 

First Term. Greek— Homer's Iliad (Boise). Latin— Horace's Satires and Epis- 
tles. Mathematics— Plane and Spherical Trigonometry (Loomis); Surveying com- 
menced. English Composition (Quackenbos). 

Seeejnd Term. Greek— Plato's Crito and PhiT-do. Latin— Cicero. Mathematics 
—Surveying and Navigation completed; Analytical Geometry (Loomis) begun. 
English Composition (Quackenbos). 

Third Term. Greek— Demosthenes. Latin— Cicero. Mathematics— Analytical 
Geometry completed. English Synonyms and Sentential Analysis. 

Junior Class— 

First Term. Mental Philosophy (Haven), and Lectures. Greek— Theocritus, 
Bion, or Moschus. Latin— Tacitus or Juvenal. Chemistry— Inorganic (Stoeck- 
hardt's). Mathematics — Calculus (Loomis). 

tiecond Term. Logic (Coppee). Greek— Sophocles' CEdipus Tyrannus. Latin- 
Juvenal or Pliny. Natural Philosophy— Mechanics (Olmsted) begun. Chem- 
istry—Organic (Stoeckhardt). 

Third Term. Constitutional Law and Civil Polity, with Lectures. Greek- 
Euripides' Medea. Latin— Plautus or Terence. Natural Philosophy— Mechanics 
completed. Hydrostatics and Pneumatics. 



Departments of Liberal Arts 



Sexior Class — 

First Term. Moral Science (Wayland) with Lectures. Criticism— Karnes' 
Elements. Greek— Pindar. Natural Philosophy— Acoustics, Optics. Electricity. 

Second Term. Political Economy (Perry) and Lectures. Evidences of Chris- 
tianity (Lectures). Latin— Selections from the Latin Classics. Astronomy 
(Loomis). 

Third Ter)ii. International Law (Halleck). Astronomy completed. Geology 
(Dana). English Literature. 

SCIENTIFIC COURSE 

Feeshman Class — 

First Term. Mathematics— Algebra (Ray). Latin- Livy. History. Scientific Course 

Second Term. ^Mathematics- Geometry (Ray) begun. Latin— Cicero or Ovid, i" IJ^TO. 

History. 

Third Term. Mathematics — Geometry completed. Latin— Odes of Horace. 

Classical Antiquities. Physiology. History. 

SoPHOMOEE Class — 

Fiist Term. Trigonometry— Plane and Spherical (Loomis). Latin, or Modern 
Languages. Botany and Physical Geography. English Composition (Quack- 
enbos). 

Second Term. Mathematics— Surveying and Navigation (Loomis). Analytical 
Geometry (Loomis) commenced. Latin or Modern Languages. Zoology. Eng- 
lish Composition (Quackenbos). 

Third Term. Mathematics — Analytical Geometry completed. Latin or 
Modern Languages. English Synonyms and Sentential Analysis. 

Junior Class— 

First Term. Mental Philosophy (Haven) and Lectures. Mathematics— Cal- 
culus (Loomis), Descriptive Geometry (Davies). Chemistry — Inorganic (Stoeck- 
hardt). 

Second Term. Logic (Coppee). Mathematics— Calculus (Loomis). Natural 
Philosophy — Mechanics commenced. Chemistry — Organic (Stoeckhardt). 

Third Term. Constitutional Law and Civil Polity, with Lectures. Practical 
Surveying and Civil Engineering. Natural Philosophy— Mechanics completed. 
Hydrostatics and Pneumatics. 

53 



Indiana University 

Senior Class— 

First Term. ^Moral Science (AVayland), with Lectures. Criticism — Karnes' 
Elements. Natural Philosophy— Acoustics. Optics and Electricity (Olmsted). 

Second Tcnii. Political Economy (Perry), with Lectiu-es. Evidences of 
Christianity (Lectures). Astronomy (Loomis) commenced. 

Third Term. International Law (Halleclo. Englisli Literature. Geology 
(Dana). Astronomy completed. 

Weelcly exercises in all classes, in Elocution and Composition, througliout tlie 
course. 

The second pair of cdtirse.^ mentioned above, those for 1875, represents 
the work as iriven in the htst vear of the administration of President !N"ntt : 



CLASSICAL COURSE 



Classical Course Freshman Class — 
in ls7."). 



First Term. Ureelv — Grammar (Hadley); Boise's First Lessons. Latin- 
Cicero's Orations, and Latin Composition. Mathematics— Algebra (reviewed). 
Geometry (Loomis) beginning at the fifth l)Ook. Outline History. Weekly 
Lectures in Physiology and Laws of Health. 

Second Term. Greelv— Gi'ammar, Lessons. Anabasis (Boise's First Three 
Books) begun. Latin— Cicero's Orations, and Latin Composition. Mathematics— 
(Jeometry, and Plane Trigonometry (Loomis). Outline History. 

Third Term, (ri-eek— Grammar, Lessons, Anabasis (two books completed). 
Mathematics— Splierical Trigonometry, Surveying and Navigation. Outline His- 
tory. Latin— Ovid (Allen and Greenough): Roman Antiquities. 

Sophomore Class— 

Fir.S!t Term. Greek— Herodotus (Boise and Freeman's Selections), Grammar, 
Greek Prose Composition (.Tones). Latin— Horace's Odes, Prosody. Mathematics 
—Analytical Geometry (Loomisi. English—Rlietoric (Hart). 

Second Term. Greek— Odyssey in Selections. Syntax, Composition. Latin— 
De Amicitia. Chemistry— Organic. English— Rhetoric (Hart). 

Third Term. (Jreek— Thucydides in Selecticuis, Syntax. Composition. Latin- 
Horace's Satires and Epistles, Prosody. Chemistry— Organic. Englisli— Writing 
and Analysis of Style. 



54 



Departments of Liberal Arts 



Junior Class— 

First Term. Xeiiophoii and Plato in Selections. Syntax, Composition. Elo- 
cution. Mental I'liilosophy (Porter) and Lectures. Lucretius, Calculus, Analy- 
tical Chemistry, l>rawing, or German. 

Second Term. Greek— Demosthenes in Selections (Boise), Exercises in Syn- 
tax. Natural Philosophy— Mechanics. Mental I*hilosophy tinished, and Logic. 
Tacitus, Calculus, Analytical Chemistry, Drawing, or German, 

Third Term. Greek— Alcestis of Euripides (Woolsey), Exercises in Syntax 
(Boise). Constitutional Law and Civil Polity (Andrews). Natural Philosophy 
—Hydrostatics, I'neumatics, Acoustics aud Magnetism. Mineralogy and Litho- 
logical Geology. 

Senior Class— 

First Term. Moral Science (Haven) and Lectures. Natural Philosophy- 
Optics, Heat and Electricity. Geology— Stratigraphical. Greek, German, 
French, or Oratory. 

Second Term. Political Economy (Perry) and Lectures. Evidences of Chris- 
tianity (Lectures). Astronomy (Loomis). Geology (Paleontology), Greek, French, 
or German. 

Third Term. International Law (Halleck), or Social Science. Astronomy 
completed. Latin, Greek, French, or Dynamical Geology. English Literature 
and Criticism. 

SCIENTIFIC COURSE 

Frkshman Class — 

First Term. Mathematics — Algebra (reviewed); Geometry (Loomis, begin- Scientific Course 
ning at fit'th bookl. Latin— Cicero's Orations, and Latin Composition. German — '" iXr.^. 
Grammar and Composition; Otto's Grammar commenced. Outline History. 
Weekly Lectures on Physiology and Laws of Health. 

Second Term. Mathematics— Geometry completed. Plane Trigonometry 
(Loomis). Latin— Cicero's Orations, and Latin Composition. German— Grammar 
and Composition; Grammar and Preparatory Course of Reading. Outline His- 
tory. 

Third Term. ^Mathematics — Spherical Trigonometry, Surveying and Naviga- 
tion (Loomis). German— Syntax, Selections and Composition, Latin— Ovid 
(Allen and Greenough). Outline History. 



Indiana University 



Sophomore Class— 

First Term. Mathematics -Analytical (Jeoiiietry (Loomis). GL'rmau— Selec- 
tions from German Literature. En.i;lisli— Itlietoric (Hart). Physical Geography. 

Second Term. Mathematics— Analytical Geometry; Differential Calcnlus. 
English— Rhetoric (Hart). German— Scientific Selections; or French. Chemistry 
—Inorganic (Eliot and Storer's ^Nlaniiali. 

Third Term. Chemistry— Organic. English— Writing and Analysis of Style. 
German— Scientific Selections. Analytical Chemistry (Fresenius). 

Junior Class— 

First Term. Mental Philosophy (Poi'ter) and Lectures. Mathematics— Inte- 
gral Calcnlus. Zoology. Analytical Chemistry, Descriptive Geometry, Drawing, 
or Elocution. 

Second Term. Mental Philosophy, completed. Logic. Civil Engineering 
(Mahan, revised by AVood). Natural Philosophy— Mechanics. 

Third Term. Constitutional Law and Civil Polity. Natural Philosophy- 
Hydrostatics, Pneumatics, Acoustics and Magnetism. Civil Engineering 
(Mahan, revised l)y Wood). Mineralogy and Lithoiogical Geology. 

Senior Class— 

First Term. Moral Science (Haven) with Lectures. Natural Pliilosophy— 
Heat, Optics and Electricity. Stratigraphical Geology. Oratory; or History of 
Civilization. 

Second Term. Political Economy (Perry), with Lectures. Evidences of Chris- 
tianity (Lectures). Astronomy (Loomis). Geology— Paleontology. 

Third Term. International Law (Halleck); or Social Science. Astronomy, 
completed. English Literature and Criticism. Geology— Dynamical. 

Two lines of The third period in the development of the educational policy of the Uni- 

transition tu the yg^gj^y jg one, as lias been stated, in which specialization is combined with a 

Third Period of .7 ? ? i ^ -,..-, , . , . 

the Course of considerable breadth of interest. The student is expected fairly early m his 
Instruction. college course to select as his major subject the work of some one Department, 

and from the other Departments to elect a sufficient amount of work to make 
up the prescribed number of hours of credit for graduation. 

This last change in the general educational policy of the University seems 
to have worked itself out along two distinct lines which finally contributed to 
a single result. There was first the gradual ditt'erentiation of the course of 
instruction itself into several different courses, representing emphasis upon 

56 



Departments of Liberal Arts 




(1) Further dif- 
ferentiation of 
the curriculum. 



NUMBER OF INSTRUCTORS, COURSES, 
AND HOURS OF INSTRUCTION 



different lines of work to suit the 
choice of the student ; and secondly, 
the introduction and development of 
the elective system. It is interesting, 
therefore, to find that in the same 
year in which the course of instruc- 
tion itself begins to be differentiated 
beyond the twofold division already 
noticed, we find also the first system- 
atic introduction of elective studies. 
This was in 1878, the third year 
of the administration of President 
Moss. 

For a period of eight years, begin- 
ning with 1878 and ending with the 
first year under President Jordan, 
we find three parallel courses of in- 
struction. In 1871 German and 
French had ceased to be special stud- 
ies and were incorporated in the 
regular course. The Classical Course The three-course 
was differentiated, therefore, into epoch (isys-so). 
"The Course in Ancient Classics," 
leading to the degree of Bachelor of 
Arts (B.A. ), and "The Course in 
Modern Classics," which led to the 
degree of Bachelor of Letters (B.L.). 
The Scientific Course continued to 
be an independent course, leading to 
the degree of Bachelor of Science 
(B.S.). In the Junior and Senior 
years, moreover, a considerable range 
of "electives" was allowed, as is 
shown in the following table of 
courses for the year 1880, which fair- 
ly represents this period : 



57 



Indiana University 

A. THE COURSE IN ANX'IENT CLASSICS 

The furriculuiu Freshman Class— 

in isfso. Fiist Term. Greek— Goodwin's Gramiiuir, First Lessons. Latin— Cicero's 

\n) Ancient 

Classics Course Orations, and Latin Composition. Matlieniatics— Geometry (Loomis), beginning 

at tlie fiftli boolv. Ontline History. Weekly Lessons in Elementary Ethics. 

Second Term. Greek — (Tramniar, Lessons, Anabasis. Latin — Cicero's Ora- 
tions, and Latin Composition. Mathematics— Plane Trigonometry (Loomis). 
Ontline History. Weekly Lessons in Elements of Mental Philosophy. 

Third Term. Greek — Anabasis, Prose Composition. Latin — Ovid (Allen and 
Greenough), Roman Antiquities. Mathematics— Spherical Trigonometry, Survey- 
ing and Navigation. Outline History. Weekly literarj' exercises. 

Sophomore Class— 

First Term. Greek — Extracts from Xenophon's ^Memorabilia, and from 
Plato's Apology, Crito, and Phoedo; Prose Composition. Latin— Horace's Odes; 
Prosody. Mathematics— Analytical Geometry (Loomis). Physiology. AVeekly 
literary exercises. 

Second Term. Greek— Iliad, Composition. Latin— Quintilian. English- 
Rhetoric (Hart). Chemistry— Inorganic. 

Third Term. Greek — Iliad, Composition, Essays on Epic Poetry. Latin — 
Horace's Satires and Epistles, Prosody. English— Rhetoric (Hart). Chemistry- 
Organic. 

Junior Class— 

First Term. Psychology— Porter's Elements. Greek— Demosthenes; Essays 
on the Orators. English— Writing and Analysis of Style. Electives— German, 
Latin, Analytical Chemistry, Zoology, Elocution. 

Second Term. Logic— Gilmore's Outlines. Greek— Thucydides; Historical 
Essays. Natural Philosophy— Mechanics. Electives— German, Latin, Biology. 

Thii-d Term. Moral Science (Calderwood). Greek— Sophocles or Aristophanes; 
Essays on the Drama. Electives— German, Latin, Botany, Political History, 
Zocilogy. 

Senior Class — 

First Term. History of Philosopliy. Natural I'hilosophy— Optics, Heat, and 
Electricity. Electives— French, Greek, Latin, Political History, Geology. 

Second Term. Political Economy (I'erry's Introduction); Lectures. English 
Classics. Astronomy (Loomis). Electives— Greek, Latin, Political History, Ora- 
tory. 

58 



Departments of Liberal Arts 



Third Term. Social Science. Astronomy (Loomis). History of tlie Englisli 
Language. Electives— Greeli, Latin, Political History. 



B. THE COURSE IN MODERN CLASSICS 



Freshman Class- 



First Term. Mathematics— Geometry (Loomis, beginning at fifth book). The curricuUim 
Latin— Cicero's Orations, and Latin Composition. French— Grammar and Com- ^" l-'^'^O: 
position. Outline History. A\ eekly lessons m Elementary Ethics. CI ssv C 

Second Term. Mathematics— Plane Trigonometry (Loomis). Latin— Cicero's 
Orations, and Latin Composition. French- Grammar and Composition; pre- 
paratory Course of Reading. Outline History. Weekly lessons in Elements of 
Mental Philosophy. 

Third Term. Mathematics— Spherical Trigonometry, Surveying and Naviga- 
tion. French— Syntax, Selections and Composition. Latin— Ovid (Allen and 
Greenough). Outline History. Weekly Literary Exercises. 

Sophomore Class— 

First Term. Mathematics— Analytical Geometry (Loomis). German— Gram- 
mar and Composition. *Latin— Horace's Odes; Prosody. Physiology. Weekly 
Literary Exercises. 

Second Term. English— Rhetoric (Hart). German— Composition; Reading. 
Chemistry— Inorganic (Eliot and Storer's Manual). * Latin— Quintilian. 

Third Term. Chemistry— Organic. English— Rhetoric (Hart). German- 
Selections: Syntax; Composition. *Latiii— Horace's Satires and Epistles; 
Prosody. 

Junior Class— 

First Term. Psychology— Porter's Elements. German— Selections. English 
—Writing, and Analysis of Style. Electives— Latin, Mathematics, Analytical 
Chemistry, Zoology, Elocution. 

Second Term. Logic— Gilmore's Outlines. German— Scientific Selections. 
Natural Philosophy. Electives— Latin, Drawing, Analytical Chemistry, Biology. 

Third Term. Moral Science (Calderwood). German. Electives— Latin. Botany, 
English, Political History, Zoology. 



*During the Sophomore year, the student in this Course may, if he prefer, substitute (for the 
Latin) the Greek of the Freshman year. 

59 



Indiana University 

Sexior Class — 

First Term. History of Philosopliy. Natural I'liilosopliy. Electives— Latin, 
Gerniau, Political History, Geology. 

Second Term. Political Economy (Perry's Introduction), \Yitli Lectures. 
English Classics. Astronomy (Loomis). Electives— Latin, German, Political His- 
tory, Paleontology. 

Third Term. Social Science. Astronomy, completed. History of the English 
Language. Electives — Latin. German, Political History, Comparative Anatomy. 

C. THE COURSE IN SCIENCE 

The currieuluni FREsmrAX Class— 

"^ ^^^ ■ First Term. Mathematics— Geometry (Loomis. beginning at fifth book). 

(c) Scientific 

Course. Latin— Cicero's Orations, and Latin Composition. French or Greek. Outline 

History. Weekly Lessons in Elementary Ethics. 

Second Term. Mathematics— Plane Trigonometry (Loomis). Latin- Cicero's 
Orations, and Latin Composition. French or Greek. Outline History. Weekly 
Lessons in Elements of Mental Philosophy. 

Third Term. Mathematics. Spherical Trigonometry, Surveying and Naviga- 
tion. French or Greek. Latin— Ovid (Allen and Greenough). Outline History. 
Weekly Literary Exercises. 

Sophomore Class — 

First Term. Mathematics— Analytical Geometry (Loomis). German or Greek. 
* Latin— Horace's Odes; Prosody. Physiology. 

Second Term. English— Rhetoric (Hart). German or Greek. Chemistry— In- 
organic (Eliot and Storer's Manual). *Latin— Quintilian. 

Third Term. Chemistry— Organic. English— Rhetoric (Hart). German or 
Greek. *Latin— Horace's Satires and Epistles; Prosody. 

JuxiOR Class— 

First Term. Psychology— Porter's Elements. English— Writing, and Analysis 
of Style. Electives— Physics. Descriptive Geometry, Analytical Chemistry, 
Zoology, Elocution. 

Second Term. liOgic— Gilmore's Outlines. Natural I'hilosophy. Electives— 
Physics. Drawing. Analytical Chemistry, Biology. 

Third Term. Moral Science (Calderwood). Zoology. Electives— Botany. Civil 
Engineering. Analytical Chemistry. Mineralogy. 



*If the student in this Course is takina; the Modern Languages instead of Greek, he may now, 
if he prefer, substitute (for tlie Latin of the Sophomore year) the Greek of the Freshman. 

no 



Departments of Liberal Arts 



Senior Class— 

First Term. History of Philosophy. Natural Philosophy. Geology. Elec- 
tiA^es — French. Analytical Chemistry, Political History 

Secomi Tcnit. Political Economy (Perry's Iiitrodnctioni. with Lectures. Eng- 
lish Classics. Astronomy (Loomis). Eloctives— Analytical Chemistry. Paleon- 
tology. Political History. 

Third Term. Social Science. Astronomy, completed. History of the English 
Language. Electives — Analytical Chemistry, Comparative Anatomy, Political 
History, 



In 1886 a farther step was taken towards the definite introdnction of the Differentiation 

into eight 
Courses (issC)). 



major snbject system by the differentiation of the conrse of instruction into '" " ^'^^* 



eight distinct conrses, divided into three groups as foUows : 

A. Classical or Language Courses, leading to the Degree of A.B. 

I. Course in Ancient Classics. 
II. Course in Modern Classics. 

B. Courses iu History, Philosophy and English Literature, leading to the Degree 

of Ph.B. 

III. Course in English Literature. 

IV. Course in History and Political Science. 
V. Course in Philosophy. 

C. Courses in Science, leading to the Degree of B.S. 

VI. Course iu Mathematics and Physics. 
VII. Course in Biology and Geology. 
VIII. Course in Chemistry. 

The germ of the elective system — the second factor in the growth of tlie (2) The Elective 
cnrricnlnm to its present form — appeared in 1868, when students were '^^*'^'"- 
allowed an option between ]\Iodern Languages and Latin. With more or 
less variation, such options continued to be permitted until 1875. In this 
year the range of options was considerably wudened in the Junior and Senior 
years. The following tables show the development of this optional or narrow 
elective system from 1875 through 1884. In the first part of this period two, 
and in the second part three, courses of instruction were offered. The num- 
bers in parentheses refer respectively to the year (Freshman, Sophomore, 
Junior or Senior,) and term of the course; the subjects named are those 
offered as electives for students of that year and term. 

61 



Indiana University 

1875-1877 

I. CLASSICAL COXJRSE 

PJlections per- 1875. (Ill, 1). Lucretius, Calculus, Analytical Chemistry, Drawing, or German. 

niitted, 1S75-77 (jjj^ 2). Tacitus, Calculus, Analytical Chemistry, Drawing, or German. 

(IV, 1). Greek, German, French, or Oratory. 

(IV, 2). Geology, (Paleontology,) Greek, French, or German. 

(IV, 3). Latin, Greek, French, or Dynamical Geology. 
1876. Same as for 1875. 

lcS77. (Ill, 2). Tacitus, Calculus, Analytical Chemistry, or German. 

(IV, 1). Greek, German, French, or Oratory. 

(IV, 2). Geology, (Paleontology,) Greek, Frencli, or German. 

(IV, 3). Latin, Greek, French, or Dynamical Geology. 

II. SCIENTIFIC COURSE 

1875. (in, 1). Analytical Chemistry, Descriptive Geometry, Drawing, or Elocution. 
(IV, 1). Oratory, or History of Civilization. 

1876. Same as for 1875. 

1877. (in, 1). Analytical Cliemistry, Descriptive Geometry, or Elocution. 
(IV, 1). Oratory, or History of Civilization. 

(IV, 3). International Law (Woolsey), Social Science, or Constitution of the 
United States. 

1878-1884 

I. THE COURSE IN ANCIENT CLASSICS 

German, Latin, Analytical Cliemistry, Zoology, Elocution. 

German, Latin, Englisli. 

German, Latin, Botany, Political History. 

French, Greek, Latin, English, Political History. 

Greek, Latin, Political History, Oratory. 

Greek, Latin, Political History. 

1879. Same as for 1878, with the omission of English, which was made a part of the 
prescribed work. 

1880. Same as for 1878, except as follows: 
(in, 2). For English substitute Biology. 
(Ill, 3). Add Zoology. 
(IV, 1). Substitute Geology for English. 

(32 



Elections per- 


1878. 


(HI, 


1). 


mitted, 1S78-S4: 
(a) In Ancient 
Classics Course. 




(III, 
(III, 


2). 
3). 






(IV, 


1). 






(IV, 


2). 






(IV, 


3). 



Departments of Liberal Arts 



1881. (Ill, 1). German, Latin (Pliny's Letters), Analytical Chemistry, Zoology, Eng- 

lish Language. (English forms also a part of the prescribed work. ) 
III, 2). German, Latin (Livy), Biology. 

(Ill, 3). German, Latin (Mostellaria of Plautus), Botany, Political History. 
(IV, 1). French, Greek, Latin, Political History, Comparative Anatomy. 
(IV, 2). Greek, Latin, Political History, Anglo-Saxon. 
(IV, 3). Greek, Latin, Political History, Philosopliy of English Literature. 

1882. Same as for 1881, except as follows: 

(III, 3). For Botany substitute Physiology. 

1883. Same as for 1882, except as follows: 

(in, 1). For Latin (Pliny's Letters) substitute Latin (Cicero's Letters). 
(HI, 2). For Latin (LiA-y) substitute Latin (De Natura Deorum), and add Eng- 
lish Classics. 

1884. Same as for 1883, except as follows: 
(III, 1). Add Physics. 

(Ill, 3). Add Physics. 

(TV, 1). For elective studies substitute prescribed Greek. 

(IV, 2). Add History of Pliilosophy. 

n. THE COURSE IN MODERN CLASSICS 

1878. (in, 1). Latin, Mathematics, Analytical Chemistry, Zoology. Elocution. Elections per- 
(in, 2). Latin, Drawing, Analytical Chemistry, English. mitted, 1878-84: 
(III, 3). Latin, Botany, English, Political History. Classics Course. 
(IV, 1). Latin, German, Political History. 

(IV, 2). Latin, German, Political History, Geology. 
(IV, 8). Latin, German, Political History, Geology. 
During the Sophomore year, moreover, the student was permitted, if he chose, 

to substitute for the Latin the Greek of the Freshman year. This option 

was allowed through 1884. 

1879. Same as for 1878, with the omission of English in III, 2. The English in this 

course was not added to the prescribed studies. 

1880. Same as for 1879, except as follows: 
(III, 2). Add Biology. 

(in, 3). Add Zoology. 

(IV, 1). Add Geology. 

(IV, 2). For Geology substitute Paleontology. 

(IV, 3). For Geology substitute Comparative Anatomy. 

63 



Indiana University 



1881. (Ill, 1). Latin, Mathematics, Analytical Chemistry, Zoology, Englisli Language. 
(Ill, 2). Latin, Drawing, Analytical Chemistry, Biology. 

(Ill, 3). Latin, Botany, English, Political History. 

(IV, 1). Latin, German, Political History, Comparative Anatomy. 

(IV, 2). Latin, German, Political History, Anglo-Saxon 

(IV, 3). Latin, German, Political History, Philosophy of English Literature. 

1882. Same as for 1881. 

1883. Same as for 1881, except as follows: 
(in, 2). Add English Classics. 

1884. Same as for 1883, except as follows : 
(III, 1). Add Physics. 

(in, 3). Add Physics. 

(IV, 2). Add History of Pliilosophy. 

III. THE COURSE IN SCIENCE 



Elections per- 
mitted, 1S7H-84: 
(c) In Scientific 
Course. 



(I, 


1, 2, 3). 


(11, 


1, 2, 3). 




(in, 1). 




(Ill, 2). 




(Ill, 3). 




(IV, 1). 




(IV, 2). 




(IV, 3). 



1878. (I, 1, 2, 3). French or Greek. 
German or Greek. 
German or Greek, Physics, Descriptive Geometry, Analytical 

Chemistry, Zoology, Elocution. 
German or Greek, Physics, Drawing, Analytical Chemistry. 
German or Greek, Botany, Surveying, Analytical Chemistry, 

Geology. 
French, Analytical Chemistry, Political History. 
Analytical Chemistry, Geology, Political History. 
Analytical Chemistry, Geology, Political History. 
If the student in this course took Modern Languages instead of Greek, he was 
permitted also to substitute for the Latin of the Sophomore year the Greek 
of the Freshman year. This option was allowed through 1883. 

1879. Same as for 1878. 

1880. Same as for 1878, except as follows : 

(III, 1, 2, 3). Omit the option, German or Greek. 
Add Biology. 
For Surveying substitute Civil Engineering; for Geology substitute 

Mineralogy. 
For Geology substitute Paleontology. 
For Geology substitute Comparative Anatomy. 



(in, 2). 
(Ill, 3). 

(IV, 2). 
(IV, 3). 



G4 



Departments of Liberal Arts 



1881. (I, 1, 2, 3). Frencli or Greek. 
(II, 1, 2, 3). German or Greek. 

(Ill, 1). Physics, Descriptive Geometry, Zoology, English Language. 

(Ill, 2). Drawing, Analytical Chemistry, Biology. 

(Ill, 3). Civil Engineering, Analytical Chemistry, Mineralogy. 

(IV, 1). French, Analytical Chemistry, Political History, English Classics. 

(IV, 2). Analytical Chemistry, Paleontology, Political History, Anglo- 
Saxon. 

(IV, 3). Analytical Chemistry, Comparative Anatomy, Political History, 
Philosophy of English Literature. 

1882. Same as for 1881. 

1883. Same as for 1881, except as follows: 

(I, 1, 2, 3). For French or Greek substitute German or Greek. 
(Ill, 2). Add English Classics. 

1884. Same as for 1883, except as follows: 

(in, 3). Add Physics. 

In the year 1885 the elective plan was modified somewhat and the range Extension of 
of elective stndies very considerably increased. This widening of the range jj^^j^Z!^ ^^ 
of electives "was another step from the old option scheme to the completely 
developed elective system which was instituted in the following year. Ac- 
cording to the plan adopted in 1885, a list of elective studies was offered, 
from which in the Junior and Senior years a student in any one of the three 
courses might select any two subjects he chose. The other one of the three 
subjects required to make up his full work was prescribed for him. The list 
of electives thus offered is ap]iended below. The studies marked with an 
asterisk (*) extended through two or three terms each, and students electing 
any one of these received no credit for the work until the whole was finished. 



First Term 
Greek 

Greek Philosophy 
Latin 

English Orations 
English Language 
Comparative Study of the 

English Drama 
French (beginning)* 
French Classics 

(6) 



Second Term 
Greek 

Greek Philosophy 
Latin 

American Orations 
English Language 
Comparative Study of Epic 

Poetry 
French (beginning)* 
French Classics 

65 



Third Term 
Greek 

Greek Philosophy 
Latin 

English Classics 
English Language 
Comparative Study of 

Lyric Poetry 
French (beginning)* 
French Classics 



Indiana University 



Completion of 
development of 
the Elective sys- 
tem, lss(;-s7. 



First Term 
German (beginniug) * 
German Classics 
Spanish; Italian 
Sanscrit * 

Romanic Philology 
Political History of the 

United States 
Special History 
Psychology; Ethics 
Philosophy 
Calculus 
Quaternions 
Physics (Elementary)* 
Physics (Special)* 
Chemistry (Elementary)* 
Chemistry (Qualitative 

Analysis) 
Chemistry (Quantitative 

Analysis) 
Geology (Special) 
Paleontology 
Botany (Special) 
Biology 

Comparative Anatomy 
Zoology (Special) 



Second Term 

German (beginning)* 

German Classics 

Sanscrit * 

Esthetics 

Special History 

Sociology; Political Econ- 
omy 

History of Philosophy 

Philosophy 

Engineering * 

Physics (Elementary)* 

Physics (Special) 

Chemistry (Elementary)* 

Cliemistry (Qualitative 
Analysis) 

Chemistry (Quantitative 
Analysis) 

Mineralogy 

Geology (Elementary)* 

Geology (Special) 

Paleontology 

Botany (Special) 

Biology 

Comparative Anatomy 

Zoology (Special) 



Third Term 
German (beginning)* 
German Classics 
Anglo-Saxon 
Norse 
Sanscrit * 
Special History 
International Law 
Logic; Rhetoric 
Philosophy of Rhetoric 
Engineering * 
Surveying 
Physics (Special) 
Chemistry (Qualitative 

Analysis) 
Chemistry (Quantitative 

Analysis) 
Meteorology 
Physiology 

Geology (Elementary)* 
Geology (Special) 
Paleontology 
Botany (Elementary) 
Botany (Special) 
Comparative Anatomy 
Special Zoology 
Biology 



Altlioiigii, as lias been said, the major subject system was not fnlly ma- 
tured until 1S87, the elective feature of the system was complete in 1886, in 
so far, namely, that w^hen the student was permitted to make an election at 
all, lie was allowed to choose from the entire range of subjects offered for 
instruction. All that was then needed to bring the major subject system to 
its present form was to remove the restriction wdiich permitted students to 
take elective studies only in their Junior and Senior years, in conjunction 
with other studies prescribed for those years. The student is now expected to 
choose his elective work with the advice of the head of the Department in 
which he has elected his major subject, in order that it may bear some useful 



66 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

relation to liis other work ; and he is advised to leave this general elective 
work to the latter part of his course, as ^'he will then know better what to 
choose and be better prepared for the work he may elect;" but with the 
exception of these general directions he is allowed a range of freedom as wide 
as possible in shaping his own course and in making his work center about 
some one selected line of study. Under the new system the student is re- 
quired to complete as much work for graduation as under the old, but within 
the course itself greater flexibility is made possible, both in the kind of stud- 
ies pursued and in the relations of various subjects to one another in the 
matter of their sequence.^ 

The more narrow use of the term "department" to designate all the 
courses of instruction offered within some one general field, as a subdivision 
of the general "Collegiate Department," did not become fixed until 1875. It 
is only, however, since 1887 that the organization of instruction in the liberal 
arts has been strictly on the departmental plan. 

SPECIAL STUDIES 

From the time of the earliest recorded history of Indiana University 
until the final development of the departmental system, certain subjects out- 
side the regular curriculum are indicated in the University catalogues, which 
may be taken by the student as special studies. In some cases students select- 
ing such subjects were required to have completed certain preliminary work, 
and in other cases no such requirement was made. 

In the first catalogue of the University, for 1831, it is announced that Hebrew and 

"To such as may wish it, and who have completed the Latin Course, Hebrew ^"'•^'^^'^ "^'^^^ 

, ^ ^ . ' Special Studies, 

and French will be taught." Whether these two subjects were offered contin- in issi. 
uously through the first ten years of the University's history, it is impossible 
now to make out.^ It is probable that instruction was given at least in 
French, in which case French has been offered continuously throughout the 
history of the University; it appears certainly from 1837. ISTo further notice 

iThe results of the elective system in Indiana University were set forth by Professor Richard 
G. Boone in two papers in the Educational Eeview (New York) for June and September, 1892, 
under the title, 'Results Under an Elective System.' 

2The University catalogues in this period are missing for the years 1832, 1833, 1834, 1836; 
and the catalogues that remain are not clear in their specifications regarding extra subjects. 

67 



Indiana University 




COMPARATIVE INCREASE SINCE 1890 IN THE NUMBER OF UNDERGRADUATE 

STUDENTS ENROLLED 



Departments of Liberal Arts, Indiana University 
Colleges of Liberal Arts in the United States 



The standard of comparison is the enrollment for 1890. To construct the curve, the ex- 
cess of enrollment for a given year over the enrollment for 1890 was found, and the ratio of 
this to the standard gave the ordinate for that year. 

Number of Undergraduate Students enrolled in the Departments 2S90 1902 

of Liberal Arts, Indiana University 309 1,139 

Number of Undergraduate Students enrolled in the Colleges of Lib- 
eral Arts in the United States 45,574 88,979 



68 



Departments of Liberal Arts 



is made of Hebrew, however, until 1841, from wliicli time it stands as an 
extra or special study until 1855, after which it disappears from the pages of 
the catalogue. 

From 1841, also, dates separate instruction in civil engineering and book- 
keeping. The full announcement is as follows : "In addition to the regular 
course of instruction here given, such as desire it may receive instruction in 
Hebrew, French, Civil Engineering, and Bookkeeping. And to those who 
wish to accomplish themselves in Civil Engineering, an opportunity is 
offered, during the summer session, of exercising under the direction of the 
Professor, in practical operations with the theodolite, compass and level, and 
in making maps and draughts for bridges, railroads and other public works." 
In the catalogue for 1850 the announcement of special studies includes only 
Hebrew and French. The next year, however, the announcement of all four 
subjects is made again, and so continues up to and including the year 1853. 
After this year instruction in bookkeeping seems to have been discontinued 
altogether. At the same time, in accordance with a provision made by the 
Board of Trustees in 1852, the work in engineering assumed a more impor- 
tant position in connection with the Departments of Mathematics and 
Chemistry. 

In 1854 German was introduced as a separate study, together with 
French and Hebrew, without any extra expense to the student. Whether a 
separate fee had been charged before this time for instruction in the special 
subjects does not clearly appear from the catalogues, but probably not. 
German, French and Hebrew were offered as special studies through 1863, 
■after which Spanish was substituted for Hebrew. 

In 1868 the Scientific Course was lengthened to four years and placed 
upon an independent basis. In this year, in addition to being offered as 
■special studies, "Modern Languages" were made an alternative with Latin in 
the second year of the Scientific Course, and so continued through 1870. 
Probably there was not much call for the Spanish, however, for it is plain 
that during this time classes were formed only in German and French. The 
•option here noted between Latin and modern languages is the first germ of 
what later developed into the elective system. Beginning with the year 1871, 
German and French are regularly incorporated in the course of instruction 
and cease to be considered special studies. 



Engineering and 
bookkeeping 
added, in 1841 ; 



German, in 
1854 ; and Span- 
ish, in 18l>3. 



69 



Indiana University 



-AGO? 




COMPARATIVE INCREASE SINCE 1890 IN THE NUMBER OF GRADUATE 
STUDENTS ENROLLED 



Departments of Liberal Arts, Indiana University 
Colleges of Liberal Arts in the United States 



The standard of comparison is the enrollment for 1890. To construct the curve, the ex- 
cess of enrollment for a given year over the enrollment for 1890 was found, and the ratio of 
this to the standard gave the ordinate for that year. ^^^^ 

Number of Graduate Students enrolled in Indiana University 12 

Number of Graduate Students enrolled in the Colleges of Liberal 

Arts in the United States 2,176 6,265 

70 



1902 
73 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

It is worthy of note, in this connection, that in 1881 instruction, not 
announced as part of any regular course, was given in Italian ; after this year 
also work in Spanish or Italian was offered as an elective whenever a suffi- 
cient number of students applied for it. From 1885, with the introduction End of the 
of a wider rauffe of electives, the courses of instruction tended to become more *^p^"^^ ^!",^!5.^ 

, , , , system (I880). 

flexible, and special studies ceased, in any formal way, to stand outside the 
regular courses. 




COMPARATIVE INCREASE SINCE 1890 IN THE NUMBER OF MEMBERS OF THE 

FACULTY 



Departments of Liberal Arts, Indiana University 
Colleges of Liberal Arts in the United States 



The standard of comparison is the number of members for 1890. To construct the curve, 
the excess of membership for a given year over the membership for 1890 was found, and the 
ratio of this to the standard gave the ordinate for that year. 

Number in the Faculty of Indiana University, Departments of Lib- iSQO 1902 

eral Arts 2.5 62 

Number in the Faculties of Colleges and Departments of Liberal 

Arts in the United States 4,509 9,511 



71 



Indiana University 



The Third 
Period of the 
Course of In- 
struction (since 

1,S,S6). 



Adoption of the 
Major Subject 
system. 



The Course as 
outlined in 1889. 



THE MAJOR SUBJECT SYSTEM 

The major subject system of iiistvnetioii, which was the outcome of the 
foregoing lines of development, was fully worked out in 1887. By that date, 
the University was organized on the departmental basis; the degree of 
Bachelor of Arts (A.B.) had become the only degree offered in the Depart- 
ments of Liberal Arts ; and the plan of laying down a ^'course of instruction," 
with specifications for each of the four undergraduate years, was abandoned 
for a system of "prescribed" and "elective studies" with a "major subject" 
or "specialty," — the whole constituting the University "requirements for 
graduation." 

This last feature of the plan resulted immediately from a report to the 
Faculty by the Catalogue Committee, under the chairmanship of Professor 
Hans C. G. von Jagemann, which was adopted Februarv 11), 1887. It laid 
down, under the four heads "General," "Special," "Collateral," and "Elec- 
tive," the amount of work required of every candidate for graduation ; and 
added : "The above general plan for the course of study is to go into effect 
immediately. All questions concerning the adjustment of the present stu- 
dents to the new course are referred, in the case of each student, to the 
professor or professors concerned in the adjustment." 

The following account of the new plan, taken from the University cata- 
logue for 1889, may be regarded as representative for the first years of the 
major subject system : 

Every candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Arts must complete the following 
work : 



General — 

English, one year, daily. Mathematics, one year, daily. Physical Science 
(Astronomy, Botany, Chemistry, Geology, Physics, Zoology or Physiological Psy- 
chology), three terms, daily. Ancient or Modern Languages, one language two 
years, or two languages one year each, daily. English Prose Composition and 
Rhetoric, three times a week throughout the Sophomore year. 

Special— 

Every student must select for a specialty the required work in some one 
department, extending over three or four years. 



72 



Departments of Liberal Arts 



Collateral — 

The head of each department may lay out, in connection with his course, 
worlv in related subjects; such required collateral work not to exceed six terms 
of daily recitations, and to be especially arranged for each student. 

Elective— 

The remainder of the student's work, six terms of daily recitations, he may 
himself elect from any department in the University. 

During the Freshman year, any three of the required general studies should be Explanation 
taken. The selection of a specialty is made at the beginning of the Sophomore year. 
The order in which the I'equired general and collateral studies shall be taken may 
vary with the conditions in the case of each student. He is to be guided in this 
matter by the advice of the President, and, when he has chosen his specialty, by the 
professor in whose department he desires to work. A student may change his 
specialty at the end of a term, provided he have the consent of the professor in charge 
of the department which he leaves, and also of the one whose department he wishes 
to enter. No student will be graduated who has not finished all the work required 
for graduation in some one department, no matter how much work he may have done 
in other departments. 

A student may choose his specialty in any one of the sixteen departments now 
organized. Each department offers a four years' course leading to the degree of 
Bachelor of Arts. All the courses demand the same preparation for admission, all 
require four years for completion, and all oblige the student to follow some special 
line of study during three or four years. In each course three daily recitations or 
lectures of one hour each are required weekly, two hours of laboratory work being 
regarded as the equivalent of one hour of recitations or of lectures. 

In the arrangement of the courses of studj% several principles have been recog- 
nized. The beginnings of any study are easy compared with the difficulties the stu- 
dent meets after going beyond the mere elements of his subject, hence a better 
mental training can be obtained from the continued study of one subject during 
several years than from the study of various subjects for a short period each. The 
thorough study of any subject is conducive to good mental discipline, therefore all 
the departments should be placed on the same footing. Moreover, as no two minds 
are alike, and as different minds require different discipline, the student should be 
granted great freedom in the choice of studies, after the completion of certain sub- 
jects necessary to all culture, and the continued study of a specialty, necessary to 
efficient mental discipline. The educational value of the element of personal choice, 
on the part of the student, is also fully recognized. "One of the most important 

Y3 



Indiana University 



Success of the 
Major Subject 
system. 



functions of the school is to place the individual on his feet, to give him the ability 
of self-direction." To this end no method is more etfective than a well-guarded 
elective system. 

This plan, in its general ontline, is still in force, with one change of 
detail, and several changes in terminology. The "Collateral" work has been 
abolished so as to increase the amount of the "Elective" work; and the terms 
"General" and "Special" (or "specialty") are now replaced by "Prescribed 
Work" and "JNIajor Subject." 

The course of instruction as now established is designed to secure a funda- 
mental uniformity in the Avork of all students, and at the same time be 



RATIO OF STUDENTS TO INSTRUCTORS 



Departments of Liberal Arts, Indiana University 
Colleges of Liberal Arts in the United States 



flexible and adaptable to the needs of individuals. An equal amount of 
preparation for admission is required of all students ; all must take a group 
of similar prescribed studies, amounting to about one-third of the student's 
course ; all must follow some special line of study during three or four years ; 
and all students meeting the University requirements, receive the degree of 
Bachelor of Arts. This curriculum, with its stress on the major subject, has 
now been in operation for eighteen years. Its success has been generally rec- 
ognized by educators, and may be attributed to three causes : the major 
requirement, which gives to the student's work continuity and consistency; 



74 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

the flexibility, wliieli permits each student to arrange his work as may best 
meet his needs and requirements as he sees them ; the responsibility thrown 
npon the student in thus allowing him free choice of a third of his work and 
a large measure of freedom even in his prescribed studies, since compara- 
tively few courses are specifically prescribed. 

From the adoption of the curriculum in 1887 it has been possible for the Recent changes 

student to arrano-e certain special courses, such as the old Premedical Course "^ the conception 
'^ i ' _ of Major Subject, 

(see p. 178), which gave the student second-year standing when he entered a and of Depart- 

medical school. In recent years, however, there has been a tendency toward '"^"t- 
a greater variety in combination. This tendency has received official recogni- 
tion, so that the term "major subject" has now a someAvhat broader meaning. 
The major subject may, as hitherto, consist of three or four years of continu- 
ous work in some one department of the University ; but it may also consist of 
the same amount of work in one of the Schools of the University, or in cer- 
tain correlated groups of courses chosen from the two or more departments, 
and leading to a definite end, as for example a vocation in life. 

With this change in the conception of "major subject," has come a change 
in the use of the term "department." The term still represents an instruc- 
tional and administrative unit in the University organization, but in the case 
of some departments (for example, Fine Arts), the instruction offered does 
not constitute a major subject group of studies ; conversely, as has just been 
stated, certain major subjects, as now recognized, fall not in one but in two or 
more departments. Such cases, however, are exceptions ; and the general 
rule still is, that each department offers instruction which may be chosen by 
students as a major subject. 



Indiana University 

DEPARTMENTS AS NOW CONSTITUTED 

A list of the Departments of Liberal Arts, as organized in tlie University 
at the present time, together with a brief description of the aims, methods 
and facilities for work in each, is given below. 




DEPARTMENT OF GREEK -A Recitation Room 



1. Department 
of (jreek. 



The courses in Greek are designed to meet the needs of two classes of 
students : first and primarily, those who desire a knowledge of the Greek 
language and literature ; secondly, those whose time is too limited for this, 
but who wish to know something of the language and literature as supple- 
mentary to their other studies. 



76 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

To fulfill tlie first purpose, graded courses are offered whieli lead the 
student from the elements of the language, through Xenoplion's Anabasis and 
Hellenica, Homer's Iliad and Odyssev, the lyric, dramatic and bucolic poets, 
the historians and orators, the philosophers, the Greek Testament and Church 
Fathers, to the Graduate Seminary, which is designed for those who are 
specialists in Greek, and intend to become teachers of the subject. In all of 
the more advanced classes regular lectures are given on the literature and 
antiquities. 

To meet the requirements of the second class of students, courses are pro- 
vided in Greek words in English, and in Greek literature in English. The 
former is a brief course in Greek, designed to facilitate the understanding of 
scientific and philosophical terms and other English words of Greek origin. 
The latter is conducted by means of lectures on the history' of Greek litera- 
ture from Homer to Theocritus, with special reference to the needs of the 
general student. Reading of the best available English translations, and 
constant attention to works in modern literature which were inspired by 
Greek models^ are features of this work. 

The Department is well equipped for doing thorough and scholarly work. 
The library consists of about two thousand well selected books covering the 
entire fields of philology, literature and art, and advanced students are 
allowed the privilege of admission to the book-stacks for purposes of research. 
The Department owns one of Walger's famous models of the Athenian Acrop- 
olis, besides numerous plaster easts and busts, the number of which is being 
increased from year to year. Besides several large and particularly fine 
Braun photographs, the number of smaller photographs of landscapes, sites, 
architectural remains and ancient works of art, is now upwards of six 
hundred. The Department also owns a stereopticon and has about five hun- 
dred slides illustrative of the various phases of Greek life, landscape, 
and art. 

The purpose underlying the work in Latin is, in general, to give the 2. Department 
student an accurate knowledge of the civilization of Rome and its relation to °^ i^atm. 
the civilization of our own time. A knowledge of the Latin language is the 
first essential in this investigation, and claims, of course, a large share of the 
student's time, because the sources can be appreciated fully only by those who 

T7 



Indiana University 

can deal with them directly. A small part only of the students of Latin take 
the full work offered in the Department, but the courses are arranged with 
the idea of making even the earliest work of interest and practical value to 
the student. The six years' work is divided into three parts of two years 
each: (1) the foundation courses; (2) the intermediate courses; (3) the 
special courses. 




UNIVERSITY LIBRARY — A I'ortion of the (tEneral Reading Room 

The foundation courses form the preliminary work of students who make 
Latin their major subject, or the full work of those who take Latin merely 
to satisfy the language requirement for graduation. As the latter class of 
students far outnund^ers the former, the effort is made to give them a first- 
hand knowledge of the best portion of the best authors in connection with the 

I o 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

language drill wliicli is believed to be a valuable means of training the mental 
faculties. Three hours a week are devoted for two years to the reading of 
one of the longer orations of Cicero, a book of Livy, a play of Terence, 
selected odes of Horace, selected letters of Pliny, the Agricola or Germania 
of Tacitus. The remaining two hours are devoted in the first year to discip- 
linary drill upon the Latin sentence — one hour to the systematic study of the 




UNIVERSITY LIBRARY - Catalugui-ng Room 



new Latin syntax, one hour to composition based upon the prose authors read. 
In the second year the composition is continued for one hour a week, the 
second hour being given to a study of the private life of the Romans. 

The intermediate courses complete the work of those who make Latin 
their major subject, and are planned to give the student the general survey 



79 



Indiana University 

of Latin literature that is necessary for the special courses which are to 
follow, together with an elementary knowledge of the subjects of paleography, 
criticism, epigraphy and the philology of the Latin tongue. To this end, a 
choice is offered each year of a three-hour course in prose and poetry, and in 
alternate years of the authors of the Republic and the Empire. Fixed 
courses, regularly repeated, are given in the history of literature, the history 
of the language, the use of manuscripts, and the reading of inscriptions. 
Students are taught the use of a library, and are made familiar with the 
primary and secondary sources of knoAvledge. Those who complete these 
courses are recommended with confidence for positions as teachers of Latin 
in secondary schools. 

The special courses are offered to graduate students only, and to those 
who expect to make the study of Latin their life work. The effort is made 
to acquaint the student with the present position of the several disciplines of 
philology, to familiarize him with modern methods of research, and to fit him 
to undertake intelligently investigations of his own. The University is now 
well supplied with the material for the study of the language and life of 
Rome, and the courses offered aim to utilize this equipment. 



3. Department 
of Romance Lan- 
guages. 



Courses are offered in this Department in French, Spanish, and Italian. 
In French the work for the first two years is prescribed ; it is entirely lin- 
guistic, the study of literature being deferred until the third and fourth years. 
After two years of training the student is allowed to choose his courses. 
During the first year much attention is given to pronunciation. Oral drill is 
insisted upon, but conversation is not emphasized. The aim of the second 
year's work is to give the student a fair reading knowledge of the language. 
The study of grammar is continued and a course in translation is offered 
which contains the largest possible variety of literary French. The courses in 
literature are so arranged as to cover the seventeenth and eighteenth cen- 
turies and the greater part of the nineteenth. The purpose of the work in 
these courses is primarily to enable the student to distinguish and to enjoy the 
best that is in French literature, and secondarily to give him knowledge of 
the history of the literature. In pursuance of the first object a large number 
of literary masterpieces are read in whole or in part, and the best criticism 
dealing with them is studied. The other end is attained through lectures and 



80 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

frequent references to Avorks contained in the library. C<iur.ses in advanced 
composition, sight reading and Old French are also oftered. In Spanish and 
Italian two courses are olfered in each. In the course in advanced Spanish 
various authors are read. Tlie advanced course in Italian is devoted to the 
study of Dante. 

The elementary courses in Gernum are intended to give the stuchmt a 4. Department 
command of the language, more as an approach to the literature than for tlie 
sake of conversational ability. This practical control of the language being 
taken for granted, the iwn'v advanced courses are intended to interpret the 
language, the literature, and the general culture of Germany to the student, 
so that he may be led to a sympathetic appreciation of the German spirit and 
what this spirit has contributed to modern civilization. 

The study of the literature is made central, at least during the under- 
graduate course. To emphasize the various ini])ortant aspects of this study, 
the courses offered are organized on three ditl'erent bases — historical, Ijio- 
graphical, and critical. Under the first head, a cycle of courses is intended 
to afford both a rapid survey of the entire history of German literature, and 
a somewhat more detailed examination of important periods or movements, — 
in each case, with the reading and discussion of representative works that will 
illustrate the leading topics of the historical treatment. Under the second 
head, a series of courses treat as a unit the life-work of a few of the greatest 
individual authors. Under the third head, the purpose is to give the student 
an introduction to the methods and principles of criticism and literary 
research. In all these courses, the attempt is made to relate the literature 
studied to the other great national literatures, ancient and modern, with 
which a comparison may most profitably be made. 

Parallel with the courses in literature, language courses are offered 
throughout the undergraduate [jcriod, intended to give the student greater 
facility in writing and speaking the language, and a better knowledge of the 
formal structure and idiomatic usage of modern German. The more strictly 
philological study of German — the history of the language and the study of 
its older historic forms — is considered as essentially graduate work. The 
philological courses in Gennanic Languages, formerly divided between the 
Lepartments of English and German, are now given by a single instructor in 

(7) 81 



Indiana University 

the Department of Englisli. A short Teachers' Course is given, for the 
discussion of books and methods for the teacliing- of German, and of the 
relation of German to the other subjects of instruction in secoiuhirv schools. 
The University Library contains a good collection of books for the study 
of German philology and literature, and a list of twenty-six literary and 
philological periodicals, pertaining altogether or in part to this Department. 
Five instructors devote their entire time to the toachino- of the German lan- 




5. Department 
of English. 



A WALK IN THE UNIVERSITY CAMPUS 

guage and literature; and most of the time of a sixth instructor is given to 
the courses in Germanic Philology. 

The work of the Department of English falls into three natural divi- 
sions — language, rhetoric, and literature. 

An elementary knowledge of English philology is regarded as essential 
to the student who would master the spirit of our language and literature. 

82 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

Each student, therefore, who makes a special studv of English is required 
to take at least one linguistic course, Old English. Courses in Gothic, Old 
English poetry, Middle English, the history of the language. Old High 
German, and an introduction to the science of language based on the com- 
parative philology of Greek and Latin, are also offered ; and courses in 
Old Xorse, Middle High German, and Old Saxon are listed in this Depart- 
ment, though not at present offered. 




A WALK IN THE UNIVERSITY CAMPUS 



In rhetoric, or composition, the object is to teach the student to express 
himself effectively. The regular work begins with a course in narration, 
description, and exposition. This is required of all students who make 
English their major subject. Students who distinguish themselves in this 
class may be admitted into an advanced course, which has as its specific 
purpose to stimulate original production on the part of those who appear 



Indiana University 

to liave some literary instinct. Under the head of rhetoric comes also a 
course in the theory of teaching,' composition and literature. This course 
is open to all students wlio liave tauglit English or who intend to teach 
it, and the discussion of ])rol)lcnis and the exchange of views and (■xi)iM-iences 
have proved valuahh' to the Tniversity in l»i"inging it into cdosev contact 
with the high schools of the State. CVmrses in public si)caking — (h'bate 
and the more formal address — are offered. The University does not stri-ve 
to produce "orators/' but encourages its students to learn to express them- 
selves in piddic easily and unostentatiously. 

In literature, the Department offers courses covering the nioi'e important 
epochs and authors. An elementary course in Milton, Shakespeare and 
modern novels leads the student to the study of drama, poetry and fiction. 
Accompanying this are elementary courses in American literature, in Ten- 
nyson, Browning, and Matthew Arnold, in Shakespeare, and in ( haucer, 
Spenser, and Milton. The critical study of poetry begins in the second 
year. Wordsworth, Coleridge, Byron, Shelley, and Keats are read. English 
prose style — Macaulay, J)e Quincey, Carlyle, ISTewman, Arnold — is made 
the main study of the third year. Courses in eighteenth century literature, 
in textual criticism, and in metrics, rank with the work of this year. The 
fourth year's work deals with Elizabethan and pre-Shakespearean drama. 
A literary seminary for the encouragement of original research is open 
to graduate students. 

The aim of the Department is to give to its students an elementary 
knowledge of the development of the language, a ])roficiency in the art of 
expression, and a genuine appreciation of literatui'e. These things can not 
be attained ^\■itllout carefnl and sympathetic study. Especially in the study 
of literature the student must bring his intellect to beiir on what he reads. 
When literature is understood, the love of it will follow. 

The Department hopes to send out young men and women of literary 
insight, syni])athy, and judgment; to whom all that is good in literature 
old and new will constantly a])poal, and in whom the forces that make 
toward true culture will find defenders discriminating, ardent, and modest. 



84 



Departments of Liberal Arts 



The first year's work of the Department of History and Political Science <>. Department 

of History and 
Political Science. 



consists of a term of daily work each in Greek, Roman, and medieval history, " '^ ^'^ ^""■^ 



hased on snch text-books as those of Bury and Shnckl)urg'li for Greece and 
Rome, and sn])])leniented hy lectures, collateral readinc,', and map-drawing. 
For those who are not special students of history, but wish to complete 
the survey of general history, a five-hour course is given in the history 
of modern Europe in the Spring term. 




l>Kl'Ai. lAil-.M OK HISTUKY AX]» P()L1TI( AL SCIENCE - Skminaky 1;oo.m 

After the first year's work, the student taking history as his major subject 
may pursue either advanced courses in European history, courses in Ameri- 
can hist(»ry, or courses in political science. In European history the ad- 
vanced work consists of the following: a course in modern Europe (three 

85 



Indiana University 

hours a week tliroughoiit the year) ; a course in the Renaissance and Reform- 
ation (two hours a week throuiihont the year) ; a course in the political and 
constitutional history of England (three hours a week throughout the year) ; 
and a brief course in the institutions of medieval France. In American 
liistor}' a course in colonial history to 1750 is offered, and a general lecture 
course covering the period 1700-1S76, togetlier with a course on American 
diplomatic history, 1776-1870. In political science there are courses in 
American government and American party machinery ; in European politics ; 
in international hiAv ; and in the historj- of political ideas, and the theory of 
the state. 

Seniors in the Department are required to take a course in historical 
method, and to carry on, for at least two terms, research work in one of the 
Seminaries of the Department — in which also graduate research work may 
be done. There are three Seminaries in history: one in English history, 
devoted mainly to the study of subjects connected with modern England; a 
Seminary in modern European historj^, in wdiich the topics are for the pres- 
ent dra^^^l mainly from the French Revolution, and from the history of 
diplomacy and international law ; and a Seminary in xAmerican constitu- 
tional and political history. The aims of the Department are not merely to 
teach the facts of history and government, but to inculcate the spirit of 
criticism and habits of independent thought and work ; and in no way, it is 
believed, can this be done so well as by early introducing the student to 
research work among the sources, under the guidance of trained instructors. 

7. Department The work of the Department of Economics and Social Science covers the 

of Economics and ^}^j.gQ closely related fields of political economy, sociology, and commerce. 
Social Science. ' . . • i • -I^ 

The course for students taking their major subject m this Department covers 

four years, the first year's work being taken in the Department of His- 
tory and Political Science. In this first year the student is encouraged to 
acquire as thorough a basis of historical and political facts as possible which 
may serve as a preparation for the later work in theory. In the Sophomore 
year he takes up general political economy, which is the foundation course for 
all succeeding work in the Dej^artment. 

From this point, although all ''major" students are expected to take most 
of the courses offered, it is possible to concentrate the interest on the field 

86 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

which is particularly congenial. In tlio line of political economy the sequence 
of courses is usually commercial geoi>,Ta])hy, economic history, tinance and 
financial history, advanced economic and sncinl theory, and research work in 
the seminary. The latter is required of all students who grachiate in the 
Department. 



"% 




DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS AND SOCIAL SCIENCE- A Hand Grist-Mill (Part of 
A Collection of Indiana Antiquities) 

In sociology the foundation course, belonging also in the Sophomore 
year, is anthropology. Here are grouped three lines of study — ethnology, 
primitive technology, and social origins. This is followed by one year de- 
voted to social pathology, where the work is again divided into three groups — 
charities, criminology and social problems. In the Senior year the work i- 
the same as that in political economy. 

87 



Indiana University 

For students who expect to enter business as a career a special curriculum 
is provided. The purpose is to otou]i together tlic courses oflfered hy tliis and 
other Departments so as to ])r()\ide a line of work which, while its cuhure 
value is thought to be equal to that of the ordinary college course, will give a 
practical training for business life. These general courses are supplemented 
bv certain semi-technical courses designed particularly to meet the needs of 
such students. Of this nature is the work in commercial law, business organ- 
ization and management, transportation, accounting and insurance. To stu- 
dents who complete the commercial course, a special certificate, in addition to 
the ordinary diploma, is given. 

The DeiKirtment at present provides one year of graduate study. While 
the graduate student is expected to take certain regular courses, the chief 
stress is laid on research. The Department is well supplied with materials 
for advanced work on state and local finance, industrial organization, munic- 
ipal ])roblems and charitable and correctional agencies. 

The purjwse of the Department's work is to prepare students for law, 
journalism, business and the public service. In the earlier imdergraduate 
years the student is not encouraged to a narrow specialization. In the Senior 
year, however, it is believed that he nuiy, with ])rofit, devote most of his time 
to work in this field. 

s. Department The first year of work in tlic Department of Philosophy consists of 

1 ohDp i\ . courses in ]isychology, logic and ethics. These offer the student a general 
introduction to the fields of psychology and philosophy. The second year 
is devoted to experimental psychology and a lal)oratory study of the nervous 
system. The psychological laboratory occupies four large and fourteen small 
rooms of special construction. Among the rooms designed for special uses 
are a large dark-room for experiments on vision, equipped with large iris- 
diaphragm, are light, and heliostat attachments ; a sound-proof room for 
the study of minimal auditory sensations ; three small double rooms pro- 
viding convenient isolation of subjects during experiments on reactiou-time, 
circulation, etc. The laboratory is su]^]ilied throughout with water, gas, 
and electric light and jxiwer, and has ap])aratus for botli ])ractice and research 
courses. An aviary, an incul)ator and l)rooder, quarters for small animals, 
artificial nests for ants, etc., and other facilities for the study of compara- 




DKPART.MKXT OF PHILO.-^OPHY- Maix Lectcre Room 




DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY- Main Ruom of Xeuroljgical Laboratory 



Indiana University 



tive psychology are also included. The workshop of the psychological lab- 
oratory is equipped with two photographic dark-iMoms; an electric motor; 
a Reed lathe, with screw-cntting and gear-cutting attachments, and the nec- 
essary tools lV)r work in wood and metal ; it is nsed both for repairing old 
and constructing new ap])aratus. The laboratory of neurology contains a 
large number of charts, a series of models of the nervous system, including 




DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY- Preparation Room in Neurology 

Auzoux models of brain, eye, and ear ; Ziegier models of the embryology of 
the human brain ; a series of human and animal brains ; dissecting outfits ; 
microtomes, microscopes, and other appliances necessary to the study of 
the structure and functions of the nervous system. 

During the third and fourth years the student may choose between 
courses in philosoplw and those in psychology. The courses in philosophy 
include the history of philosophy (which covers two years), an introduction 

90 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

to philosophy, the ])liilosnphY of evolution, the phih)so]ihy of religion, and 
advanced ethics. The lines of advanced psvchology include hvpnotism and 
suggestion, mental pathology, advanced comparative psycholcgv, the psychol- 
ogy of religion and systematic psychology. During the past year a Philoso- 
phy Club, open to Ser.iors and graduates in the Department, lias held fort- 
nightly m.eetings for the informal discussion of the philosophical and ethical 
significance of Emerson. 




DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY -A Room in the Psychological Laboratory 

The Department seeks to develop the spirit of investigation in psychology 
and in general philosophy, and a considerable number of graduate stu- 
dents are engaged in research. Studies chiefly in experimental, social and 
comparative psychology, mental hygiene, and the psychology of religion have 
been successfully completed or are now in progress. Some of these studies 



91 



Indiana University 

have already been published in tlie Psj/choloi/icdl I'cricii'. thi- Aincriraii 
JoiniKiJ of Psi/r]iolf)(ii/ ami other s'-iciititic jnni-iials. 

9. Departnu'iit The Work of this De])artnieiit iiatni'ally falls into foiii' divisions: (1) 

of Education. conrses designed to give a general introductory survey <ti the elementary 

faets of edneation, {2) those designed to train the student by an extensive 

coni])arativ(' study of edncatioiud faets, (:]) those for the development of 




PEDAGOGICAL MUSEUM — Collection of School Work from Different Cities in Indiana 

habits of investigation, and finally, (4) those to aid the student in becoming 
acqnainted with the practical routine of work of the high school teacher, 
snpervisor, or su])erintendent — the classes of men the Department seeks 
to train. 

The introductory courses may comprise either a year's work of one period 
a day devoted to elementary psychology, logic, and ethics; or a year's work 

92 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

in elementary pedagogy, in ■\vbicli is given an introdnctorv view of the 
general pnrpnses and methods of education. ]\[any of the stndcnts who 
enter the Department have already had the ecpuvalont of the introdnctorv 




PEDA(iOGICAL MUSEUM — Collection of Text-Books, Models, Illustrative Materials and 
School Work from Schools in Germany 



93 



Indiana University 



courses, cither tlimnali ]irivato roadiiig and experience or Ly study at other 
institutions. 

A comparative study of ])ast and present educational conditions and 
ideals is regarded as an essential part of the training of an educator. Three 
hours a week for two years are given specifically to this work, besides which 
an historical treatment is given to many of the topics dealt with in other 
courses. The work is conducted not sini])ly with a view to acquainting 





PENDULUM CHKONOSCOPE 
Designed by Professor J. A. Bergstrom, and described in the Psychologic xl Eeview for 

September, lOOO. 

New features consist in the mode of carrying and clamping the index, the silent escapement, 
and a system of movable keys which provide for intervals varying from about to'si! of a second 
to 2 or more seconds. The apparatus is of special service in giving the time of exposure in the 
tachistoscope, in experiments upon the perception of time or the direction of attention to simul- 
taneous events, and as a chronoscope for measuring short intervals of time with a very high 
degree of accuracy. 

94 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

the student with the leading facts of past educational theory and practice 
or with modern school organization, purpose and method, but more espe- 
cially to the end of developing a sense for educational values and of making 
possible the balance of judgment and the ingenuity and fertility in expedi- 
ents that alone come from a study of well organized series of educational 
facts. 




TACHISTOSCOPE 
Designed by Professor J. A. Bergstrom. 

For exposing to view colors, pictures, numbers, letters, phrases, sentences, and the like, for 
a very short and (as far as may be) for a definitely adjustable interval, with a view to ascertain- 
ing the degree of completeness of perception and recognition or the extent of the mental span 
under such conditions. 

The principle of construction is that of producing a cone of light which at the apex passes 
through a small hole in the inclosing metal cone; on emerging it enlarges, and, after reflection 
from a mirror, illuminates a considerable surface on which are placed the objects to be studied. 
Noteworthy features are the relative simplicity of structure, the use of direct illumination instead 
of projection, the mode of securing adaptation of the eye, and the small noiseless electric shutter 
which makes its use in connection with the chronoscope especially convenient. 

95 



Indiana University 

The importance for educational theory of studies in modern ])sychology 
is recognized not only by the continned use of its modes (}f iiirer])retation 
in all sid)j(H'ts, l)nt hv sjyecinl courses re(|iiii'inii' two years of work of one 
period a day in social and educational ])s_vchol<»ii_v. In ad'lition, courses 
in various other jihases of normal, ahnornial and experimental ])sycholo2;y^ 




APPARATUS FOR COMBINED INTERVALS 
Designed by Professor J. A. Bergstroni. 

Consists essentially ot two large pendulums (whose periods may be varied l)y ebanging the 
bobs), which are kept in constant oscillation by electrical means; and a small pendulum, which 
may be held at either extremity of its swing by electromagnets whose magnetization depends 
upon the movements of either of the large pendulums. The apparatus is used chiefly to regulate 
the duration of impressions and the interval between them in experiments upon memory. 

and in neurology, are offered bv the closely related Department of Philoso- 
phy. Moreover, many of the problems which have occupied educational 
seminaries and research students have come from this field. 

Facilities for observation and practice, furnished l)y conrses in grade 
supervision and school administration, lia\e been linnted largely to the schools 

96 



Departments of Liberal Arts 



of Bloomington. Efforts to extend the work to other cities in the State have 
been only partially successful. The Department has no practice school 
of its own. 




APPARATUS FOR EXPERIMENTS UPON MEMORY 
Designed by Professor J. A. Bergstrom. 

A light drum is Ivept under a certain pressure towards rotation by a weight, but is allowed 
to move only step-fashion by the cogs and an escapement, which in turn is regulated by the appa- 
ratus represented on the opposite page. Around the drum is fastened a paper bearing letters, 
syllables, words, or other characters, one of the series being brought into view for a certain time 
at each step of rotation. This apparatus is especially convenient for the study of the influence, 
upon retention and recollection, of changes in the elementary factors of duration of impressions, 
of intervals between them singly, or between series of impressions. 

A pedagogical mnseum was begun seven or eight years ago, and at 
present contains a large collection of American text-books and books for 
collateral reading. The intention is to make it as far as practicable inter- 
national. An exhibit of text-books, charts, specimens, manuals, training 



(8) 



97 



Indiana University 



models, and samples of written work and art work prepared by Dr. Liidwig 
Kotelmann of Hambnrg is the best of the foreign exhibits ; those from. 
France, England and Svreden are relatively small. The miisenm contains 
also a large collection of samples of work done in the schools of a nnmber 
of cities of Indiana, inclnding not merely specimens of art work, bnt products 
of manual training, relief map work, and composition, also music lessons 
recorded phonographicallv. 




A NEW FORM OF ERGOGRAPH (Front View) 
Designed by Professor J. A. Bergstrom. Described in the Commenaorative Number of the 
American Journal of Psychology, September, 1903. 
For the study of neuro-muscular work and fatigue, and the Itineesthetic sensations of the 
fingers; and for experiments upon the Weber law for the discrimination of differences of re- 
sistance. It differs from other apparatus for this purpose : ( 1 ) in the greater degree of isolation of 
the muscle, especially through the introduction of the principle of suspension, and experiments 
with flexors of the last phalanges; (2) in its general adjustability; (3) in the higher degree of ac- 
curacy, attained through its special form of finger clamp and its mode of adjusting the phalanx to 
the lever; (4) in the possibility of employing different kinds of loads, including the uniform load 
attained by means of a compensating spring; (5) in its improved registration devices. 

98 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

One year's work in this Department, consisting of college algebra, plane lo. Department 

1 I'lx- X 1 ^ J.- ^ ^ ■ •Tij; nOf Mathematics, 

and spherical trigonometry and analytical geometry, is prescribed lor all 

candidates for the A.B. degree. For students who take mathematics as their 

major subject the Freshman year's work is the same as the required work 

just mentioned. For the Sophomore year the work consists of calculus 

throughout the year, three hours a week ; theory of equations, one term, two 

hours a week ; and advanced conies, two terms, two hours a week. In 

the Junior year are given advanced calculus throughout the year, three 

hours a week, and solid oeomotrv and theorv of surfaces throuohout the 




EKGOGKA.PH (Back View) 

year, two hours a week. For the Senior year the work varies, but always 
includes at least six hours in diiferential equations and two hours seminary 
work. The remaining part of the work is selected from courses in the theory 
of numbers, theory of functions, group theory, substitution theory, modern 
geometry, and projective geometry. 

For students preparing for engineering, courses are given in descriptive 
geometry and surveyiug. The Department owns a surveyiir's compass, plane 
table, two transits, two Y-levels, a solar compass, leveling rods, chains and 
steel tapes. For the work in drawing and platting there is a well-lighted 



99 



Indiana University 

room furnished with drawing tables. A number of graduate courses are 
offered. The facilities for work of this grade are good. The mathematical 
lilu-arv contains the following works: 'Acta Mathematica/ 'American Jour- 
nal of ]\rathematics/ 'The American Mathematical Monthly/ 'The Analyst,' 
'Annals of Mathematics,' 'Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society/ 




DEPAKTMP:NT of mathematics- seminary Room 

'Bulletin of the 'New York Mathematical Society/ 'Bulletin of the French 
Mathematical Society/ 'Cambridge and Dublin ]\Iathematical Journal/ 
'Crelle's Journal fiir Mathematik/ 'Liouville's Journal de Mathematique/ 
'The Mathematical Monthly/ 'Mathematische Annalen,' 'Mathesis/ 'Proceed- 
ings of the Edinburgh ^Mathematical Society/ 'Proceedings of the London 



100 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

Mathematical Society/ 'The Quarterly Journal of Mathematics,' and 'The 
Messenger of Mathematics.' The collected works of Ahel, Cauchy, Cayley, 
Clifford, Gauss, Jacobi, Lagrange, Mobius, Riemann, Schwartz, Smith, and 
Steiner, and a full line of the leading- English, French, and German texts are 
also in the library of the Department. 




KlKKWOOl) OJIf^KKA'ATuKY (Erpxted I'.HH)) 



Two elementary courses in astronomy, the one a text-book course, the H- Department 



other a series of lectures upon astronomical topics of current general interest, 
are given each year in this Department. The more advanced and technical 
courses that are offered are intended to familiarize the student with astro- 
nomical instruments, with methods of computation and to give him a math- 
ematical basis for research in i^ravitational astronomv. These courses 



of Astronomy 
and Mechanics. 



101 




twp:lve-ixch refracting telescope of kirkwood observatory 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

include practical and spherical astronomv, theoretical astronomy, celestial 
photography, and celestial mechanics. 




FIFTEEX-IXCH REFLECTING TELESCOPE 
Designed by Assistant Professor W. A. Cogshall, and built by the Department of Astronomy. 



103 




THE MOON (Seven Days Old) 

Photographed by the Department of Astronomy. Made with the iL'-inch Refracting 

Telescope, and enlarged. 




THE MOON (Eight Days Old) 

Photographed by the Department of Astronomy. Made with the 12-inch Refracting 

Telescope, and enlarged. 



Indiana University 

Eacli stiidont who chooses astronomy as his major subject undertakes 
in his Senior vcar, either conjointly with or under the direction of an in- 
structor, some problem of astronomical research. These problems are usu- 
ally a continuation of some piece of work suggested while he is pursuing 
some of the nl)ove named courses and are selected according to the taste and 




Ura-Wh. L-.j E.C. 5 I i f Ker - 



DRAWINGS OF SUNSPOTS (Student's Work) 

ability of the individual. The major part of the work at this time is done 
with micrometer, or in celestial photography. Most of the accompanying 
illustrations are from photographs made by students working in this way. 

The introductory courses in mechanics are intended as a preparation 
for the more advanced courses in either theoretical and celestial mechanics, 

106 




NEBULA OF ORION (Made with H-Inch Portrait Lens) 
Photographed by the Department of Astronomy. 




NKBL'LA OF ORION (Made with 15-Ixch Reflector) 
Photographed by the Department of Astronomy. 



Indiana University 



- , .. / 


'/ 




/ 


f 


/ 


/ / 


• 


/ / 


/ / 


, ' .' . 


./ 


/ 






V- ' 

■■'//'. 


> 






V 






'•■■#■.■■' 


/ 


' 





or ill a])])li('(l mechanics in which 
s^^ecific engiiicerini^ problems are 
considered. AVhile the primary 
]nir])ose in all cases is to develop 
the princi])le and trnths of me- 
chanics, it is eqnally necessary 
that the stndent acquire facility in 
applying" mathematical form to 
the investigation of physical phe- 
nomena, and that he should know 
when the condition of his problem 
warrants the use of mathematical 
formula already learned. 

Kirkwood Observatory, which 
is occupied by the Department, 
contains a library and computing 
room : a lecture room ; a dark- 
room ; a transit-room in which is a 
Bamberg universal instrument, a 
Howard sidereal clock, a sidereal 
chronometer, and a chronograph ; 
a dome-room twenty-six feet in di- 
ameter ; and a room of the same 
size immediately below it. In the 
dome is the refractor, a cut of 
which is found on page 102, one 
of the finest specimens of Amer- 
ican instrument making. The 12- 
incli objective is by Brashear, and 
is of high optical excellence, giv- 
ing upon a black field stellar im- 
ages without distortion or wings 
of any kind. The mounting is by 
Warner and Swasey of Cleveland, 
Ohio. The instrument has a focal 



COMET (' 19U;5 (JiLY 24, li)():!i 
Photographed by the Department of Astronomy. 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

length of about sixteen feet, and is supplied with eyepieces giving mag- 
nifying powers of from 130 to nearly 1,000 diameters, and with a polarizing 
helioscope, diagonal eyepiece, and an electrically illuminated micrometer; 
there are also both coarse and fine circles in right ascension and declination, 
the fine ones being provided with reading microscopes and electrical illu- 
mination. 




COMET C (BORELLY) l<tU3 
Photographed by the Department of Astronomy, July I'l, 1903. 

The Department has now in use, in a separate building, a reflecting 
telescope of fifteen inches aperture, designed mainly for photographic work. 
The optical parts are by Petitdidier, of Chicago ; the mounting was designed 
and constructed by the Department. A cut of this instrument is shown 

109 



12. Department 
of Physics. 



Indiana University 

on pag'e 103. There is in eonrse of construction a mounting to carry a Brown 
4-inch refractor, and a portrait lens of five inches aperture. 

Tlie work of the Physics Department is arranged to meet the needs 
of four classes of students. (1) For those who desire a general knowledge 
of the subject of physics, as a part of a liberal education, the development 
and substantiation of fundamental theories takes precedence over the minutiic 




DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS - Lecture Room 

of the subject. (2) For teachers and those preparing to teach physics 
in the high school, the work includes more laboratory practice, besides a 
special course in the manipulation of physical apparatus, and another in 
shop practice. In the former of these two courses the student generates 
oxygen gas, mani])ulates ( x-liydrogen, acetylene and electric stereopticons, 

110 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

projects interference fringes and vibrating strings, demonstrates the oscilla- 
tory character of the Leyden jar discharge, reverses the D-line, etc. In all 
he repeats some fifty of the more ditficnlt lectnre demonstrations. In 
the latter conrse he is taught soldering, tempering, In-azing, case-hardening, 
simple glass-blowing, wood and metal turning, screw-cutting, and such other 
operations as may be required in the repair or manufacture of physical 




DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS -A Room of the Elementary Laboratory 

apparatus. (3) For students of engineering, the Department offers special 
work in advanced electricity, a year's work in dynamo-electric machinery, 
courses in mechanical drawing and thermodynamics, and a more extended 
course in shop work than is offered for teachers. (4) For advanced 
students, the Department offers text courses in advanced mathematical 



111 



Indiana University 

electricitv and light, and facilities for research work along almost any line in 
physics. The Department is already fairly well equipped with accurate 
standards and delicate instruments, and special pieces may be provided when 
needed in any research. A well equipped shop and the services of a mechani- 
cian are at the disposal of research students. Investigations are now in 




DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS -A Modified Wehnelt Intereupter 
Designed by Professor A. L. Foley and Mr. R. E. Nyswander. 

progress in the laboratories along the following lines : the spectrum of 
radium ; the ^-rays and other radiations ; the effect of radiation upon elec- 
trolytic resistance; the electromotive force in electrolytes in a variable 
magnetic field. 



112 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

Besides a innnl)t'v of rooms for special purposes, the Department of 
Physics occupies two research hiboratories, and live rooms are used for 
elementary laboratories, one devoted to general practice, and four small 
rooms for work in sound and light. The lecture room has an elevated 
floor and is seated Avith taldet-arm opera chairs. It is provided with auto- 




DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS -A Brasheae Mounting for a Rowland Grating 
Constructed in the Department. 

matic blinds, screens and Idackboards, all under the immediate control 
of the lecturer. The lecture table is built in three sections, and the plumb- 
ing and wiring are arranged so that one, two, or three sections may be 
used at a time. At the table the lecturer has battery and dynamo currents 
(alternating and direct), rheostats, illuminated dial voltmeters and amme- 

(9) 113 



Indiana University 

ters, electric motors, calcium and electric lanterns, low and high resistance 
projecting galvanometers, water, steam, gas, oxygen, acetylene, compressed 
air, exhaust cocks, and permanent connections to a standard clock. All the 
laboratories are supplied with water, gas and electricity. The floors are 
of concrete. There are fifteen large masonry piers and more than three 
hundred lineal feet of six-inch stone wall shelves. All the developing rooms 




DEPARTMENT UF PHYSICS- Apparatis for the Study of N-Kays 



have both gas and electric ruby lights, tile shelves, and lockers. Ten rooms 
are provided with blinds for making them light tight. There are two 
shop-rooms, equipped with forges, wood and metal-working lathes, screw- 
cutting lathes, power-saws, a trimmer, sliaper, grinder, miller, and other 
wood- and metal-working tools. In the powerhouse of the University are 

114 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

two engines, one of twenty and one of forty horse-power, and an alternator 
and direct current generator of thirty kilowatts capacity. A one-hnndred- 
twenty-five horse-power engine and an eighty kilowatt generator are being 
added to the equipment. 

The work of the Department of Chemistry is arranged to meet the needs 13. Department 
of students preparing to become professional chemists, chemical electro-chem- ° ^™'^ ^^' 
ical mining or sanitary engineers, and physicians ; as well as of students in 
other Departments of the University — such as Physics, Geology, Zoolog}% 




DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY -Lecture Room 

Botany, and Law (medical jurisprudence) — who wish to acquire a knowl- 
edge of general chemistry, or to emphasize particular or more advanced 
lines of chemical work. For students who take chemistry as a major subject, 
the Department offers prescribed and elective undergraduate courses Avhicli 
cover a period of four years, and consist of lectures, recitations, and labora- 
tory seminary and research work. In the laboratories each student works 

independentlv of the others. 

115 




DEPART.MENT OF CHEMI^^TRY-Lahoratory for Organic and Physiological Chemistry 




DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY -Laboratory for (iuALiTATivE Analysis 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

The general policy of the Department is : ( 1 ) To give the stndent com- 
prehensive training in tlie fundamentals of general, theoretical, and ana- 
lytical chemistry, both inorganic and organic, in certain prescribed courses 
covering eight terms of University work. (2) To permit election of the 
remainder of the undergraduate work, and specialization within the Depart- 
ment according to the desire and purpose of the student. Special attenti(»n 




DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY — Apparatus for the Measurement of Single Potential 

Differences 
Constructed by a student in Physical Chemistry. 

lias been given, in the past nine years, to organic, physiological, bacterio- 
logical, electro- and technical analytical chemistry, and toxicology ; arrange- 
Tnents have now been completed for the exjiansion of the courses in physical 
•and advanced inorganic chemistry. (3) To encourage research work in the 
phases of the subject undertaken. It is insisted, however, that the student 




DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY -Laboratory for Electro-Chemistry 




DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY -Laboratory for Bacteriology 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

must first have a knowledge of cliemistiy as a science, and liave attained a 
high degree of accuracy in his work, before undertaking original investiga- 
tions, which usually are not begun before the fourth year. The investi- 
gation is of some limited problem, usually emanating from the researches 
conducted by the instructors in the various divisions of the Department. 




DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY — Rotating Cathode for Rapid Quantitative Analysis 

BY Electrolysis 

Many of the themes have to do with the study of analogy between sulphur, 
selenium, and tellurium, in combination with organic radicals ; with problems 
in applied electro-chemistry, e.g. the production of chlorofonn, bromoform, 
and iodoform from acetone by electrolysis (see cut, next page) ; with the 
study of the salts of berberine ; with clinical methods of urine analysis, e.g. an 



119 



Indiana University 

exact method for the (letermiiuitioii of allniiiicn; with hacteriological proh- 
lems, e.g. a study of pathogenic veasts ; with the distrihiitioii of bacteria in 
lake water; with the differentiation of l)acillns coli and hacillns tyi)hi in 
casein-sngar-agars (see cnt, (i])])(isit(') ; witli fat-])V()dii('ing haeteria, etc. 




DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY — Iodoform from Acetone by Electrolysis, using Two 
Cathodes and a Rotating Anode 

Method and apparatus devised hi the Indiana University Laboratory for Electro-Chemistry, 1904 

The resnlts of these investigations, when sufficiently meritorious, are pub- 
lished in various chemical journals, as contributions from the Chemical 
Department of Indiana University. Fourteen such articles have appeared ; 



120 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

and one electro-metallurgical process, worked out in this series of investiga- 
tions, lias been patented (U. S. patent 742,830). 

The graduate work of the Department follows in ])art the lines above 
described, and in part is end)odied in separate graduate courses, consisting of 
laboratory lecture and seminary work. 

The Department has general, special, and ])rivate laboratories adequately 
equipped to accommodate one hundred and sixjy students. Special labora- 
tories are provided for organic and physiological chemistry, toxicology, food 
analysis, assaying and electric-furnace work, physical and electro-chemistry, 




DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTKY — Differentiation of Bacillus Typhi Abdominalis and 
Bacillus Coli Communis by use of Casein Agaks 

Method devised in the Indiana University Bacteriological Laboratory, 1904. 



1. Casein-lactose-agar. 

2. Casein-glycerine-agar. 

3 and 6. Casein-mannit-agar. 



4. Casein-dextrose-agar. 

5. Casein-lsevulose-agar. 
7. Casein-nialtose-agar. 



A = bacillus typhi ; B = bacillus coli. Cultures 46 hours at 37° centigrade. 

spectrum gas and water analysis, and bacteriology. The general equipment 
for graduate work, including library facilities, has been materially increased 
during the past year. 

In the period of nine years from 1896 to 1U04, the degree of A.B. in 
Chemistry has been conferred upon three women and ninety-four men. Of 



121 



Indiana University 

these ninety-seven graduates, forty-four have pursued or are pursuing the 
study of medicine, thirteen have received the degree of A.M. in Chemistry 
after one year of graduate study at Indiana University, four have received 
this degree elsewhere, and eight have received or are now candidates for the 
degree of Ph.D. — one each at Goettingen (Germany), Johns Hopkins, Yale 
and Chicago and two each at Wisconsin and Cornell, 




DETAliTMENT OV (;K()LO(tV - Uksearch Laboratory 



14. Department 
of Geology. 



The courses in geological science are designed to meet the needs as 
well of those who pursue the subject as a part of a liberal education, 
as of those who intend to become professional geologists. A five-hour course 
in geology, extending through the entire year, and a five-hour course in 
elementary physiography, given in the Spring term, are open to all students 

123 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

who have sufficient preparation in ])hysics and clieniistry, and ordinarily 
constitutes the entire work of the first of the two groups of students mentioned 
above. These courses serve also as an introduction to the science and a 
foundation for the work of the future specialist. Besides these general 
courses, there is a special course in field geology given in the fall and 




DEPARTMENT OF GEOJ.OCiV - Research Laboratory 

spring, in which attention is paid to the methods of the professional geologist 
in areal and topographic mapping, stratigraphy and the collection of fossils. 

The courses in mineralogy, economic geology, advanced physiography and 
paleontology are largely professional and not designed for elementary stu- 
dents. Two terms are given to economic geology, one to non-metallic and 
one to metallic products ; field and laboratory work constitute an important 



123 




DEPAPiTMENT OF GEOLOGY-A Corner of the Geological Museum 
In the foreground are several relief maps made by members of the Department. 




DEPARTMENT OF GEOLOGY- Mineralogical Laboratory 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

part of this course. PalcontoLjo-y riins tliroughout the year, consisting 
entirely of laboratory work. The chief Avork of adyaneed students consists 
in the inyestigation of some definite prnbleni or prol)lenis with a yiew 
to publication of the results when of suificient merit. 




DEPARTMENT UF GEOLOGY -A Corner of the Luture Koo.m 

Several Zittel charts illustrating groups of fossils are shown, and other charts and maps 
made by members of the Department and by students. To the left are shown cases for topo- 
graphic sheets and geologic folios. 

The Department is supplied with commodious quarters. It has a de- 
]iartmental library, besides extensive collections of fossils, minerals, rock 
specimens, products treated in economic geology — such as petroleum, coal, 
clays, cements, ores, etc. — and a large series of maps, charts, and plaster 
models. Many of the latter have been made by students and members of 

125 



Indiana University 

the Department. Tlie Zittel charts in partieuhu" are of great use in pale- 
ontology and historical geology. This series is being extended by the addi- 
tion of charts and a series of lantern slides to illustrate the modern pale- 
obiological side of paleontology. An extensive series of maps, made by a 
member of the Department, illustrates the areal distribution of the several 




T)EPART:srp:XT of ZOOLOGY— Elementary Laboratory 



geological systems and the hy])otlietical land and water areas of past geo- 
logical periods. The plaster models represent topographic types and regions 
of peculiar or characteristic structure, such as the Appalachian structure 
of Pennsylvania and Tennessee. The whole range of geology is illustrated 
by a large and rapidly increasing collection of lantern slides. A series 

126 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

now in preparation is designed to illustrate Indiana geology and physical 
geography. 

The general policy of the Department of Zoology is to give students 15. Department 
the solution of original problems at the earliest moment possible, usually ° ""^ ^^^" 
at the end of their second year in tlie Department. The first courses open 




DEPARTMENT OE ZOOLOGY - Office and Private Laboratory 

to students are: (1) a course in general zoology extending through the 
year and devoted to the examination of a series of invertebrates and ver- 
tebrates in the laboratory, for their structure, and to the examination of 
biological problems illustrated by living animals, chiefly as they are found 
in their native habitat; (2) a course of general lectures extending through 

127 




DEPAKTMEXT OF ZOOLOGY-Models to Illustrate Lectures 




DEPARTMENT OF ZOOLOGY- A Corner in the Embryological Laboratory 



Departments of Liberal Arts 



two terms on tlie evolution of organisms and the laws and theories of 
hereditary transmission of characters. 

The second group of courses open to students are: (1) courses dealing 
with the minute structure and embryology of vertebrates, and leading to 





A CUBAN BLIND-FISH (Lucifuga) 

Itself without visible eyes, but containing unborn young with well-developed eyes. Prepared by 
Professor C. H. Eigenmann, of the Department of Zoology. 

the study of medicine or the investigation of anatomical problems; or (2) 
courses dealing with the species of vertebrates, chiefly fishes. 

For the course in elementary zoology and embryolosv the equipment 




(10) 



ABLYSTOMA OPACUM 
From a water-color drawing by a student of the Department of Zoology. 

129 




SOUTH AMERICAN FKESH-WATP:K FISHES 
Mylosoma albiscopus Cope (representing a new genus), Myleopsis levis Eigenmann and 
McAtee (representing a new genus), and Myletes tiete Eigenmann and Norris. 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

of the Department is equal to tliat of the hest institutions in the country, 
and comprises charts, models, illustrative specimens, and a varied and prim- 




^p^ 



'Wntin,'...'' 



.ABERRANT.. SPELERPES MACULICANDA (Dorsal and Side Views) 
From a_drawing by Mr. C. H. Kennedy, a student in the Department of Zoology. 

itive environment. During the third year each student works at the solu- 
tion of some special problem. AVliile the work of no two advanced students 
is alike, their problems usually radiate from the investigations being prose- 




LEPTOCEPHALUS OF THE AMERICAN EEL 

From]|[a^drawing by Mr. C. H. Kennedy. The specimen represented is the first recognized 
larva of the American Eel. 




LEPTOCEPHALUS 

From a drawing by Mr. C. H. Kennedy. The specimen represented was remarkable for 
its transparency and for the fact that the spots on the tw'o sides alternate in such a way that they 
appear as a single regularly arranged series. 

cuted by the instructors in the Department. The results of such investiga- 
tions are published as 'Contributions from Zoological Laboratory of Indi- 
ana University.' 

131 





o 


t^ 


^^ 


s 






'^ 


£ 




o 



< J 



& '3 



<1 


^ i^ 


;-! 


u 


.2 ^ 


ft 




03 fl 
ft -|i 

o a 


H 


>= .2 


S-l 



■5 be 
fl O 



H 


j; 




-< 


Oj 


;^ 




ft 


N 


:^, 


ft 


si 


w 




















OJ 




-H 


!K 


r/1 




03 


03 



■SO 






Departments of Liberal Arts 

Two cliief lines of work have been pursued by the Department: (1) 
Systematic zoology. The work along this line has dealt very largely with 
fishes, particularly those of the fresh Avaters of tropical America, including 
the region from the south of Mexico to central Argentina. A number of 
shorter papers have been published or are in preparation, and the greater 




THE CAVE FARM NEAR MITCHELL, IND. — Outlet of the Underground River 

part of the work of compiling a general treatise is completed. For the 
work on the taxonomy of fishes, but two other universities possess library 
or museum facilities greater than those of Indiana University. For the 
work on tropical American fishes the facilities are exceeded only by Harvard 
with her matchless collection of Brazilian fishes. The University has several 
thousand species of fishes represented by perhaps 60,000 specimens. Dur- 



133 
















t>> 3 



5 r-- S 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

ing the past year collections have been received from Cuba, Paraguay 
(through Prof. J. S. Anisits), the Hawaiian Islands (through the Bureau of 
Fisheries), and from Japan (through President David Starr Jordan). 

(2) The second line of research work is on the problem of heredity, 
which has been approached from various directions, (a) The Department 
has issued several papers on the structure and history of the hereditary 
(sex) cells in the vertebrate, Cvmatogaster. (h) A statistical inquiry into 




DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY -Laboratory for Plant Physiology 



the variation in successive years of the same species in the same miit of 
environment was started in 1895. To further this work a Biological Station 
was established at Turkey Lake and later transferred to Winona Lake 
(see page 183). While a large amount of material has been gathered and 
a number of papers published, this phase of the subject has been at least 
temporarily overshadowed by the line of investigation next described, (c) 
An inquiry into the process, method, and rate of ontogenic and phylogenic 

135 



Indiana University 

modification of the sense organs in the cave animals of North America, 
particularly of the eyes of blind fishes. An important aid to this work 
was the recent acquisition by the University of a tract of about 180 acres 
of primitive woodland, containing numerous dry and wet caves and an 
underground stream which can be traversed for over a mile. The situation 
is ideal for transplanting cave animals into the light and epigean forms 
into the dark. Six papers on this subject have been published, and another 




DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY — Photomicrograph of a Vascular Bundle of Sweet Clover 

(Melelotus alba) 

Prepared by Mr. H. H. Ratcliff, a second-year student in the Department. The cut iUustrates a 

method in histology. 

one on the eyes of the Cuban blind fishes is being prepared by Professor 
C. H. Eigenmann, Avith the aid of a grant from the Carnegie Institution. 
(d) The Department has begun a series of experiments to test certain 
features of Mendel's law of heredity. 



136 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

The Department of Botany lias three laboratories, devoted respectively 16. Department 
to elementary botany, histolos^y and physiology, and morphology and cytol- ° ^ ^^^' 
ogy. The morphological laboratory is well equipped with modern apparatus 
and accessories for the highest grade of cytological and morphological work. 

D 



B 












DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY— Division of the Hereditary Substance in Reproductive 

Cells in Higher Plants. I 

A-PoUen mother-cell with nucleus in the resting condition ( Podophyllum peltatum). 
B-The nucleus at the beginning of mitosis. C, D-Nuclei showing the chromatin thread or 
spirem split lengthwise (Lilium martagon). 

The physiological laboratory is provided with the usual apparatus necessary 
for physiological practicum as well as several pieces designed for special 
work, ]N"ew additions are made to this equipment yearly. For research 
in plant physiology special apparatus is purchased as needed, or is designed 

13Y 



Indiana University 

and constructed by instructor and student. In addition to the customary 
equipment the elementary laboratory is provided with a Zeiss projection 



_- H 

G 



\ 

■ \ 



DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY — Division of the Hereditary Substance in Reproductive 

Cells in Higher Plants. II 
E— Pt)llen inotlu'r-cell ; the spirem has segmented into the chromosomes, a few of which only 
are shown ; n, nucleolus. F, G— The mitotic spindle of the first mitosis ; the chromosomes are 
arranged in the equatorial plate. H— Metakinesis; the daughter chromosomes are separating, and 
each is seen to be split again lengthwise. 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

apparatus for the projection upon the screen of both microscopic prepa- 
rations and stereopticon views. 

K 



:m 



/:f 



DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY— Division of the Hkreditary Substance in Reproductive 
Cells in Higher Plants. Ill 

I-The anaphase ; the pairs of grand-daughter chromosomes resulting from the second J 
longitudinal splitting are passing to the poles of the spindle. J, K— Formation of the daughter 
nuclei. L— The result of the first division (Podophyllum). M-Daughter nucleus ready for the 
second division. 



Indiana University 

The work of the department consists of three years of undergraduate 
instruction, and graduate work leadino- to the decrees of A.M. and Ph.D. 



^ 



C- 




P 



^ 



^'^\ 
>.>-^ 



Q . 



'>e 



R 



\ r 



DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY — Division of the Hereditary Substance in Reproductive 

Cells of Higher Plants. IV 

N to R— Successive steps in the second division in the pollen mother-cell (Podophyllum). 



140 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

Of tlie undergraduate work the first year (elementary course) is devoted 
to a general survey of tlie plant kingdom in tlie study of selected types 
from the great group of plants, supplemented by simple physiological ex- 
periments, with instruction also in the adaptation of plants to their environ- 
ment. This course is designed not only as a preliminary to the advanced 
work but especially for students desiring a general knowledge of plant life. 

The undergraduate work beyond the first year is in the nature of ad- 
vanced pradicum, but its methods are the same as in original investigation. 



B .;3^v. 






DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY - Fecundation of the Egg-Cell in the Lily 

A— Male and female nuclei in contact (Lilium martagon). B— Fusion of the sexual nuciei 
in the egg-cell (Lillum candidum). 

The student may select any of several courses, but his second year's work 
is, as a rule, histology and practice in plant physiology, and the third 
year some line of special luorphology or embryology. 

Candidates for advanced degrees are assigned or permitted to select prob- 
lems for research along some line of morphology, cytology or physiology, 
the results of which are embodied in a thesis. During recent years the 
research work of the Department, carried on by instructors and graduate 

141 



Indiana University 

students, has been along the line of cytology and embryology, dealing espe- 
cially with problems of fecundation and the physical basis of heredity. 
The accompanying figures (pp. 136-141) will illustrate the nature and char- 
acter of the work referred to. 




DEPARTMENT OF ANATOMY— Pkiv ate Laboratory and Preparation Room in Histology J 



17. Department 
of Anatomy, 



The Department of Anatomy was established in the fall of 1903. Its 
work is planned especially for students enrolled in the new School of Medi- 
cine, but the courses which it offers may also be chosen as electives or as a 
major subject by students in the Departments of Liberal Arts. The equip- 
ment, which is entirely adequate for the number of students in attendance, is 

14^ 




DEPARTMENT OF ANATOMY- Laboratory 

The room is over seventy feet long, and is excellently lighted from the ends and from five 
large double windows at the side. During the Fall and Winter terms the room is used for dis- 
section; in the Spring term it is used for a course in histology. 





^ 


1^ 


MPerai 


^PpjPB ^BS^yPf^^5^i*^ii|W|^^y^jBP "^^^3^1 


1. 1 






ti>r. ^ 


s 


) 



DEPARTMENT OF ANATOMY- A Corner of the Dissecting Room, Where Books, Models, 
Etc, are Kept for Student Reference 



Indiana University 

similar to that of tlie best medical schools. The study-room collection will, 
when completed, contain models, longitudinal and transverse sections of the 
body, dissections of every portion of the body to show superficial and deep 
structures, to all of which the student may have access at any time for aid in 
his work. The dissecting room is a large, airy, well-lighted room. The 
floor has been specially prepared so as to be easily cleaned. Twenty-five 




DEPARTMENT OF PHYSIOLOGY -Laboratory 

Bausch and Lomb microscopes of high grade are provided for the work in 
histology. Thirteen courses are offered at present in this Department. 

18. Department The work in physiology has hitherto been given in the Department of 

of Physiology. Zoology. For the coming year ( 1904-1905) the work will be modified and 

enlarged, and for the first time grouped into an independent Department of 

144 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

Physiology. Five courses are announced^ of which two are introductory and 
elementary and intended for the general student, and three are more ad- 
vanced and intended for students in the School of Medicine, for teachers of 
science, and for others desiring a more thorough training in physiology. The 
Department is providing a well-equipped laboratory for experimental work 
in physiology. It is supplied with manikin and other models and charts, 
kymographs, inductoria, sphygmographs, cardiographs, plethysmographs, 
stethoscopes, manometers, tambours, hannometers, haimocytometers, peri- 
meters, ophthalmoscopes, artificial eyes, etc., necessary for the performance of 
the important experiments in physiology and for special work. A sufiicient 
number of sets of these instruments is provided, so that the students working 
in groups of two can perform all of tlie more important experiments for 
themselves, the endeavor being to place the work upon a thoroughly experi- 
mental basis. The Department now takes about a dozen of the more im- 
portant English, German and French 2)hysiological journals, and possesses 
many of the standard works in pliysiology. 

Instruction in this subject was added to the University curriculum in i!>. Department 
1896, and facilities for the work have since been steadily increased; but "^ '"*^ ^ ^" 
the work in fine arts has not as yet been constituted a study in which a 
major subject may be chosen. Accompanying cuts give views of the drawing 
and lecture room of the Department. In point of equipment, the aim has 
been to increase yearly the number of photographs, now amounting to sev- 
eral thousand, of subjects in architecture, sculpture, and painting. These 
photographs are used to illustrate the lectures and are always accessible 
to students. To the same end casts, charts and models are added from 
time to time, and the University Library has purchased, besides the com- 
moner books of reference, a considerable number of valuable works, old 
and new, relating to the fine arts, and especially to architecture. It has 
not been forgotten also that a University Department of Fine Arts should 
have its museum — no matter how small in the beginning — of really fine 
things ; because, in the pursuit of these studies, the purpose of which is 
to aw^aken appreciation and to develop critical power, original, even though 
slight works of masters, cannot fail to inspire the student, whose time 
must be devoted mainly to reading and hearing about, and examining repro- 

(11) 145 



Indiana University 

diictions of, the works of masters. Among the material of this sort owned 
by Indiana University may be mentioned a fine early drawing by J. M. 
Turner ; two drawings, one of them a water color, by Samuel Prout ; a 
typical piece of color drawing by the English William Hunt ; two drawings, 
one very characteristic, by John Ruskin ; together with others l)y living 




DEPARTMENT OF FIXE ARTS - A Part of the Lecture and Drawing Room 



artists of repute. The collection contains wood and metal engravings, and 
etchings by Albert Diirer, Marc Antonio Raimondi, Hollar, Richard Earlom, 
Prout, Harding and John Lewis, Hogarth, and many others. In addition 
to these, all of them original works of first-rate quality, there are a number 
of the peerless landscapes from Turner's 'Liber Studiorum ;' these represent 
the rare etchings for this work, and several states of the completed mezzo- 
tints. 

14G 



Departments of Liberal Arts 

The teaching in the Department consists of lectures and recitations, 
accompanied with instruction about the use of lead, ink and water colors ; 
its aim is to lead students to an appreciation and understanding of the 
works of the greatest masters of architecture, sculpture and painting, rather 
than to train them technically for the practice of any one of these arts. 




DEPARTMENT OF FIXE AKTS — A>;other Part of the Lecture and Drawing Room 



Separate gymnasiums, and separate courses in physical training, under Physical 
competent instructors, are proyided for both men and women students. 
Both gjminasiums are supplied with baths and lockers. The women's gym- 
nasium is equipped with Sw^edish apparatus ; the men's with the usual 
apparatus and appliances. In both gymnasiums regular class work is given, 
supplementing such athletic sports as tennis and basketball for the women; 

147 



Indiana University 

tennis, basketball, football, baseball, and track traininc; for the men. For 
both the men and the women courses in physioh:)gy and hygiene are given 
■ — for the men by the director of the men's gymnasium, and for the women 
by a ])racticing woman physician. Physical examinations are given both 
men and women, and exercises prescribed according to individual needs. 
The director of the women's gymnasium gives, in the Spring term, a course 
in theory and practice for women who wish to direct physical training 
in the public schools. Physical training in the University is not compulsory ; 
but a small amount of credit is given those students who take regnlar class 
Avork, and comply with certain other requirements. 



148 



RELATION OF THE UNIVERSITY TO THE 
SCHOOL SYSTEM OF THE STATE 

FORMER PREPARATORY DEPARTMENT 

A Preparatory Department was maintained in connection with the reg- Early attempts 
iilar Collegiate Department from the first, and was not reallv discontinued ^" abolish Pre- 

. . , . ' . . paratory Depart- 

until after 1890. This curtaibnent of the course of instruction in the nient (isGO-TSi. 
University was the final outcome of a long process of adjustment between 
the University and the high schools of the State. In 1869 an effort was 
made by the Board of Trustees to abolish this Department, in the belief 
that "it is no part of the legitimate business of the University to furnish 
instruction in the branches usually taught in the common schools." There 
seems to have remained, however, a considerable demand for instruction 
in work lower than the Freshman grade. In the same year with the state- 
ment that the Preparatory Department as such had been discontinued, we 
find the enrollment of a so-called "sub-Freshman class;" and in 1872 the 
following announcement appeared : "It is no part of the legitimate business 
of the University to furnish instruction in the branches usually taught 
in the common schools, but opportunity is afforded to those deficient in 
Latin, Greek and algebra to bring up those studies in a sub-Freshman 
class." The next year, however, sees a complete retreat from the position 
taken in 1869, and it is announced that "Arrangements will be made for 
a Preparatory Department in connection with the University, in which 
students will be fitted to enter the Freshman class, and those deficient in 
sub-Freshman branches will have an opportunity of reviewing them under 
the instructions of able and thorough teachers." 

149 



Indiana University 



Bloom ingt on 
High School as 
Preparatory De- 
partment ( 1874- 

85). 



Revival of Pre- 
paratory Depart- 
ment (1885); its 
abolition (1890). 



Admission to 
Preparatory De- 
partment. 



In 1874, accordingly, provision was made ''for a Preparatory Depart- 
ment for the University, in connection Avith the High School at Blooming- 
ton," and not only were the principal of the High School, with his assistants, 
counted as members of the University Faculty, but at least in the later 
period of this arrangement the principal and the first assistant were ap- 
pointed and paid by the University Board of Trustees. 

In the first year of President Jordan's administration (1885) plans 
were made for separating the Preparatory Department from the Bloom- 
ington High School ; and in the next year the following announcement 
appears : "The connection which formerly existed between the Preparatory 
Department and the Bloomington High School was dissolved at the end of 
the last year. The work of the Preparatory School is now carried on in 
the former main building of the University, which gives to all of its classes 
an abundance of room." The growth of the Department from this time 
seems to have been "steady and rapid ;" and this new arrangement continued 
until 1890, after which date the Department went out of existence. 

The requirements for admission to the Preparatory Department, so far 
as requirements were made at all, did not vary much at different times. 
Prom 1850^ "It is required that the applicant be able to read and write." 
From 1855, "All candidates for admission into the Preparatory Department 
must be at least twelve years of age. They will be examined, and must 
prove themselves able to write a legible hand, to spell with correctness 
English words in common use, and to read plain English prose with ease 
and intelligibleness." 

In 1866 the age requirement was reduced to eleven years. But with 
this exception the admission requirement remained the same until the De- 
partment was temporarily discontinued in 1869. After its re-establishment 
the maximum requirement was "a good knowledge of the 'Common Branches' 
■ — arithmetic, geography, English grammar, reading, writing and spelling, 
with the history of the United States. Each applicant must be at least 
fourteen years old and should have accomplished the equivalent of the first 
year of the High School. Unless admitted on a school certificate of profi- 
ciency, or a teacher's license, he will be examined on the above mentioned 
subjects." 



150 



Relation to School System 

The first catalogue of the University (1831) announces "courses of Course of study 
instruction" in tlie Preparatory Department as follows : "English grammar, i^^i-e?. 
arithmetic, geography, Ross's Latin grammar, Viri Romoe, Ceesar (Mairs' 
Introduction), Compositions in English." Between the Preparatory De- 
partment and the Freshman class there appears also in this same catalogue 
a so-called "First Class," which seems to have been intermediary between 
the two. The course of instruction in the "First Class" was as follows : 
"Sallust, Cicero's De Officiis, Cicero's Select Orations, Ovid, Virgil, Horace, 
Juvenal, Cicero's De Oratore, Valpy's Greek Grammar, Compositions, Latin 
themes." 

In the middle period of the Department's existence — say, for example, 
in 1867, just before the Board of Trustees decided upon abolishing prepar- 
atory instruction — the Preparatory Department was represented by the fol- 
lowing course : "Ancient and modern geography, Butler's English gram- 
mar, arithmetic (Ray's), algebra, Latin grammar. Smith's Principia Latina, 
Greek grammar and exercises (Harkness'), Cornelius ISTepos, Virgil, Latin 
and Greek exercises, English composition and declamation." 

The Preparatory Department seems at first to have included work 
for one year only, but from 1855 the students are divided into two classes 
for two years of study. From 1862, moreover, students pursuing a "Pre- 
paratory Scientific" course are distinguished from those pursuing the "Regu- 
lar Preparatory" course. 

After the re-establishment of the Preparatory Department in connection course of study 
with the Bloomington High School, the course covered two full years, the "'■^ *^^ *""^ 

f . . ^/ , -_ ^ J ^,,jg„ abolished 

same instruction being given to all students. For 1890, the last year of (isiio). 

the Department's existence, the following course of instruction was an- 
nounced : 

Junior Year — ! , 

Fall Term. Latin Grammar; Algebra; English— (1) American Poets. (2) Analy- 
sis of Sentences. 

Winter Term. Latin Grammar; Algebra; English— (1 ) American Prose, (2) 
Principles and rules of Composition, with essay writing. 

Spring Term. Latin— Cresar; Algebra; English— (1) Victorian Literature, (2) 
Figures and Essays. 

151 



Indiana University 



Seniok Year— 

Fall Term. Latin— Cicero; Geometry; General History. 

Winter Tertn. Latin— Cicero, Latin Composition; Geometry; General History. 

Spriiw Term. Latin Composition; Physiology; General History. 



COMMISSIONED HIGH SCHOOL SYSTEM 

Rise of the Com- The maintenance of a Preparatory Department of the University is a 

missioned High ^^,-|j-^ggg ^q ^j^g unsatisfactory reLation which long existed between the Uni- 

School System. '-' m r^ i i • j- ^ • 

versity and the school system of the State. The final adjustment of this 
relation gave rise to the system of Commissioned High Schools. In the 
annual report of the University for the academic year 1874 (which includes 
the University catalogue) we read the following: "The want of a proper 
adjustment of the High School and Collegiate courses of study has been 
long and deeply felt. This want of unity has been, for years, the subject 
of earnest and protracted discussions in State Teachers' and Collegiate 
Associations, in State Institutes, Educational Conventions and the State 
Board of Education. The much desired union has at length been reached ; 
and the method by which it has been attained will be explained by the 
following documents, together with the reasons of the change in the cur- 
riculum of the University. The authorities of the University rejoice in 
this happy adjustment of the whole course of instruction in the educational 
system of Indiana, by which the student can pass without interruption 
or delay through all the grades, from the Primary through the Interme- 
diate, High School, Collegiate and University courses of instruction, and 
thus thoroughly equip himself for life's duties. The hearty support and 
active cooperation of teachers, principals of High Schools, County Super- 
intendents and all the friends of education in these new arrangements 
are earnestly desired." 

The first of the documents referred to is the following, adopted May 
5, 1873, at a meeting held in Indianapolis: 

Resolved. That the State Board of Edncation recommend the Trustees and Faculty 
Kecommenaa- 

tion of State of the Indiana University, in order to unite the High Schools of the State and the 

Board of Educa- University more closely together, to so modify the Preparatory course of study, as 
tion (1873). 

152 



Relation to School System 

to admit students to the Freshman clarss without the knowledge of Greeli, putting 
in the place thereof an equivalent in the increased amount of Mathematics and 
Science. 

A second document consists of the record of a meeting ''of the Super- 
intendents and Principals of schools having an enrollment of four hundred 
or more pupils," held in the city of Indianapolis, May 7 of the same year, 
"for the consideration of matters pertaining to the welfare of the schools," 
at wdiich the following resolutions were unanimously adopted: 

Resolved, That we, the members of the Convention of Superintendents of the High Resolutions of 

. ,, X, 1 £ i-- „ Superintendents 

Schools of the State, respectfully represent that we fully approve the plan of uniting ^^^^^ principals 

the High Schools with the University by the method proposed, viz., that the High (is73). 
Schools shall prepare pupils in Orthography, Arithmetic, English Grammar, Geog- 
raphy, Physiology, United States History, Algebra, Geometry, Latin Grammar, Ctesar 
and Virgil, which shall admit them to the Freshman class Avithout the necessity of 
preparing them in the study of Greek; and that the study of the advanced Mathe- 
matics be considered an equivalent for the additional amount of Greek now required 
for admission. 

Resolved, That Mr. Gow present the above resolution to the Trustees of the 
University, at their meeting in June, as the expression of our views. 

When these resolutions were presented to the Faculty and Trustees of 
the University, the following action was taken by the Board of Trustees : 

Ordered by the Board of Trustees of Indiana University, that the minimum stand- Action of the 
ard of admission to the Freshman class in the University, shall be a creditaljle exam- 
ination in Orthography, Reading, Geography, English Grammar, United States 
History, Composition, Word Analysis, Physiology, Algebra, Geometry, Latin Gram- 
mar, Latin Prose Composition, Caesar and Virgil, or their equivalents. 

Second, in order to bring the University into closer connection with the High 
Schools of the State, we recommend the following plan, viz., a certificate from cer- 
tain High Schools (the schools to be hereafter named by the State Board of Edu- 
cation) of a satisfactory examination sustained in the Preparatory Course, will entitle 
the bearer to admittance to our Freshman class. And no one will be admitted 
as a student in the University (except those admitted to select studies), without 
such certificate from the authorities of the High Schools, the High School of Bloom- 
ington being named among the number. 

153 



Trustees. 



Indiana University 



Effects of the 
omission of 
(ireelv from en- 
trance require- 
ments. 



Dr. Wylie, in his History of Indiana University (p. 78), says: "The 
part of this arrangement that Greek should not be required for entrance into 
the Freshman class was quite an innovation, and was regarded l)y many 
scholars and literary institutions throughout the State with great disfavor, 
and as lowering the college standard and a step downward and backward. 'No 
evil seems, however, to have resulted from it ; the professor of Greek, the 
late Professor Ballantine, found that in a year after the change had been 
made he had the scholars as far advanced as under the old arrangement. 
This may be ascribed to the better and more uniform training in elementary 
instruction under the Professor himself than the pupil had under different 
instructors, some better and some worse, and each having his own peculiar- 
ities." 

In the University catalogue for the year 1875 there appears the following 
report of the Faculty to the State Board of Education, showing the results of 
the recent changes — a report which deserves to be quoted in full : 



Report of the 
Faculty to State 
Board of P^duca- 
tion (187")). 



The want of a proper adjustment of the High Schools of the State to the Colleges 
had been long and deeply felt. After much discussion in State, Collegiate and High 
School Associations, upon the recommendation of the Convention of Superintendents 
of Public Schools, held in the City of Indianapolis in the spring of 1873, the State 
Board of Education recommended and the Trustees of Indiana State Uaiversity 
adopted a moditication in the Collegiate course of study. This change was made 
for the purpose of uniting, harmonizing and completing the school system of Indiana. 
Middle education is the problem of the age. Where shall students be prepared for 
college? This is the real question. It is proposed to make the High Schools the 
middle schools of Indiana, and thus filling the vacuum before existing between the 
district schools and the University. To perfect this union, it was determined that 
the study of Greek should be commenced in the Freshman year, and continued 
through the four years of the college course, thus making the whole amount of 
Greek equal to that of both the preparatory and collegiate Greek taught in the best 
institutions In the land. To compensate for this preparatory Greek, transferred to 
the collegiate course, Higher Algebra, Geometry, Sentential Analysis and Physiology 
were placed in the preparatory course, and made requisites for admission to the 
University. This change, while it abates nothing from the extent of thoroughness 
of the usual curriculum, both preparatory and collegiate, is of the greatest impor- 
tance, as it unites together and harmonizes all the sections of the public schools of 



154 



Relation to School System 

the State into one complete system. The student can now pass directly from the 
primary, through the intermediate grades and High Schools, to the University, with- 
out delay or interruption. He is not now required, after completing his High School 
course, to spend, as heretofore, two years in some preparatory school or academy, in 
order to bring up his Greek, and fit himself for the Freshman class. 

As this modification aimed to make the High Schools of the State preparatory "Initiatory 
schools for the Stale University, it was also provided that the work done in the exammations; 
High Schools, which had attained the proper grade, should be recognized and credited 
by the University. Hence, applicants presenting certificates from the Superintendents 
of those High Schools, which are commissioned by the State Board of Education, 
certifying that they had completed the preparatory studies, should be admitted to 
the Freshman class, without further examination. All applicants not thus furnished 
with certificates were to be examined by the Superintendent and Principal of the 
High School of Bloomington. 

These examinations are conducted in writing, and are very thorough. They em- 
brace ten questions upon each of the studies in the preparatory course; and a high 
grade in each is required for admission. 

The time has been too short, only eighteen months having elapsed since its adop- "Results; 
tion, to test fully the wisdom and feasibility of the present plan. Thus far, however, 
the results have been favorable. In 1873, one hundred and nine applied for admis- 
sion to the University; of whom fifty passed satisfactory examinations, and were 
admitted on the certificate of the Superintendent and Principal of the High School 
of Bloomington. Fifty-nine, having failed to pass satisfactory examinations, were 
rejected. In 1874, there were fewer rejections; as the terms of admission and the 
high grade of scholarship required, had become more generally known. 

Of the twenty-one High Schools commissioned by the State Board of Education 
to prepare and examine students for the State University, only a very few have 
sent students. Greensbm-g has sent three; Evansville, two; New Albany, two; Peru, 
one, and Bloomington, twenty-six. The larger part of these twenty-six had come 
from other sections of the State to Bloomington, to prepare for college. All the 
others, who have been admitted to the Freshman class, have been examined by the 
Superintendent and Principal of the High School of Bloomington. 

The effect upon the High Schools of the State has been very beneficial. They 
have been inspired with greater zeal and energy in the work of education, and the 
standard of scholarship has been elevated. The most of the High Schools which 
have not already been commissioned to prepare students for the University, are 
striving to reach that grade which will entitle thera to that honor. The failure to 
send students to the University was not for the w^ant of a disposition to do so, 

155 



Indiana University 



"The effect upon 
the standard of 
scholarship in 
the University; 



"Classical 
Course : 



"The nunilH'r of 
students." 



on the part of the officers of the High Schools. These have generally regarded it 
an honor to receive a commission from the State Board, and liave cordially coop- 
erated to make the plan a snccess. 

The grade of scholarship of the students of the University lias been greatly ad- 
vanced. In accuracy, thoroughness, comprehensiveness, and maturity of mind and 
culture, the Freshman class is nearly equal to the Sophomore of former years; and 
the same may be said of the higher classes. It is gratifying to every lover of sound 
learning, to witness the vigor of thought and breadth of information, with which they 
grapple with subjects presented for tlieir investigation. Their command of the 
English language and its resources is also of a higli order. 

Since the change has been made by which Greek is begun in the Freshman year, 
the number of students taking the classical course has greatly increased. Formerly 
one-half of the Freshman class were scientific; now nine-tenths are classical. Such, 
according to present indications, will continue to be the result of the present arrange- 
ments. Instead of lowering the standard of education, the present plan has greatly 
elevated it; and instead of the ancient classics being dishonored and ignored, they 
are now better taught, made popidar, and greatly honored. Nor do we deem it too 
much to say, that classical education has been greatly benefited by the recent arrange- 
ments. 

While there has been no diminution in the number of students, but on the contrary, 
a steady increase, jet the number in attendance is less by one hundred per cent, 
probably, than it would have been under the old regime, several causes having com- 
bined to produce this result: 

1. The complete separation of the preparatory from the collegiate department 
has diminished the aggregate number of students. No student, in the preparatory 
department, is permitted to recite in any of the college classes, and no student in 
the select course in college is allowed to recite in classes belonging to the preparatory 
department. This complete isolation of the two departments cuts off a considerable 
number of irregulars, who desire to recite in preparatory and collegiate studies at 
the same time. This was allowed in this University some years ago, and is still in 
vogue in most of the colleges in the West. 

2. This arrangement tends to diminish numbers, in the second place, since the 
preparatory students do not meet in the University chapel for prayers each morning 
with the students of the collegiate and professional grade; nor do the two departments 
intermingle, as they do in most Western institutions, in which students of the pre- 
paratory course mingle indiscriminately with those of collegiate grade, and recite to 
the same professors. Many prefer institutions where such irregularity prevails. 



1.56 



Relation to School System 



3. The rigidness of the initiatory examinations, and the thoroughness of scholar- 
ship required for admission to the University tends also to lessen the number of stu- 
dents. Tlie sifting process is now applied at the door of admission to the University, 
instead of being postponed, and too charitably applied, during the collegiate course. 
The custom of most of the colleges in the State has been to admit students upon an 
oral and very superficial examination, leaving their subsequent standing to be deter- 
mined by their success in their studies. This course of necessity produces irregu- 
larity, lowers the grade of scholarship, and leads to many difficulties. 

The State University now admits only those who pass satisfactory examinations, 
and are up in all their studies. 1'his arrangement, while it has introduced order, 
regularity and system, and elevated tlie standard of scholarship, has diminished the 
number, which otherwise would have attended the University. Nearly one hundred 
applicants for admission to the Freshman class in the last two years have been 
reiected. 

4. The elevation of the standard of scholarship leads some to prefer other insti- 
tutions where college honors are more easily won. The grade of recitations requisite 
for graduation from one class to another higher, is seventy per cent, on the general 
average, and in no one study must the student fall below fifty per cent. A student 
who fails to reach this standard falls back into the next lower class. Some who have 
thus failed, have gone to other colleges, rather than to go back into the lower classes, 
as they could there go on with their class, and graduate a year sooner than at the 
State University. As, therefore, it might have been reasonably expected, the number 
of students in attendance is probably one hundred per cent, less than it would have 
been, had the old order and regulations continued. But what is lost in quantity is 
more than made up in quality. Yet there has been no decrease in the niimber of 
students, as has been incorrectly stated, but on the contrary, the increase has been 
regular, as the catalogues of the last five years will show: 

In the year lSTO-1, aggregate number 301 

In the year 1871-2, aggregate number 358 

In the year 1872-3, aggregate number 308 

In the year 1873-4, aggregate number 371 

In the year 1874-.5, thus far in the year 389 

The number of students at Bloomington, not counting those of the Medical Depart- 
ment, is as follows: 



15' 



Indiana University 



1870-1 (including Normal Class) 301 

1871-2 (Normal Class abolislied) 268 

1872-3, aggregate number 264 

1873-4, aggregate number 268 

1874-5, aggregate number 282 

It is the aim of the Faculty and Trustees to do work of the highest grade and 
order, making thorough scholars and elevating the standard of scholarship, and when 
this is secured, numbers will not be wanting; but the popular sentiment has, from 
the beginning, judged the merits of institutions of learning by the size of the crowd 
that attends them, not taking into account discipline, thoroughness of scholarship, 
and training; as if it were the sole business of a college to gain numbers and to 
graduate a crowd instead of scholars. 

The present plan we believe to be working well for the interests of education in 
Indiana, and, if it were comprehended, it would not only be approved, but highly 
commended by the people. It rests with the educators and friends of education in 
Indiana, whether the new measures adopted by the University will soon become 
what it aspires to be, the head and crown of the public school system; a University 
not only in name, but in reality, ranking among the very first in the land, an honor 
to the State, and a source of pride to all her citizens. 

Cyrus Nutt, President, 

T. A. Wylie, Professor of Natural Philosophy. 

R. Owen, Professor of Natural Science. 

D. KiRKWooD, Professor of Mathematics. 

E. Ballaktine, Professor of Greek. 

J. Thompson, Professor of Civil Engineering. 

A. Atwater, Professor of Latin. 

G. W. Hoss. Professor of English Literature. 

S. P. Morrison, Assistant Professor of English Literature. 

T. C. Van Ntivs, Professor of Chemistry. 

This report was accompanied hy the following circnhir of the Faculty: 

To the Superintendents of the Public Scho-ols, and County ISu}jerintendents: 

Circular of the The founders of this Commonwealth, in the original Constitution of Indiana, 

Faculty, 1875. provided for a system of Free Public Schools, to include in regular gradation the 

district and intermediate schools and a State University. The same wise and liberal 

158 



Relation to School System 



provision is sanctioned in tlie present Constitution, wliile tlie laws of the State recog- 
nize the institution at Bloomington, Monroe County, as the State University. 

Although the State University and the graded schools by the above constitutional 
and legislative provisions form one and the same system of public instruction, they 
have not. until recently, harmoniously cooperated. A plan for adjusting the University 
course of study to that of the High Schools was very maturely considered by the State 
Board of Education, by a convention of superintendents of public schools, and by the 
Trustees and Faculty of the State University; and, as the result, the classical course 
was enlarged to include all pi"eparatory Greek, and the mathematical and scientific 
courses correspondingly diminished; the preparatory Latin and the excluded mathe- 
matics and science being incorporated in the High School course, which is as follows, 
viz.: Orthography, arithmetic, geography, English grammar, algebra (both elementary 
and higher), geometry (four books), physiology, history of the United States, Latin 
grammar, Latin reader, Latin prose composition, two books of Caesar, and two books 
of Virgil, or their equivalents in Latin. 

All High Schools in the State which are prepared to teach the above named 
branches and possess the other qualifications prescribed by the State Board of Educa- 
tion are entitled to a commission to prepare students for the State University, and 
to grant certificates of proficiency in the above studies, which shall entitle the holder 
to admission to the Freshman class of the University without further examination. 
This commission also authorizes the superintendent to examine any person who may 
apply, and to grant a certificate, if the applicant is foimd thoroughly proficient in all 
the studies of the Preparatoi-y Course. The trouble and expense of a journey to 
Bloomington may thereby be in some cases avoided. 

It is earnestly requested that notice be given throughout the section of the State 
in the vicinity of each designated High School, at what time applications may be made 
for examination, and that the President of the UniA^ersity be duly notified of the 
results of these examinations. 

This system may not be wholly satisfactory to all of the friends of the public 
schools in Indiana, but it cei'tainly has great merit; and shall it not be faithfully sus- 
tained and its provisions executed, until an opportune moment for its amendment 
shall arrive? 

The State University, chief public school of the State, may not be free from 
defects, but it is progressive, and it will seek to know the demands of popular educa- 
tion in Indiana and to meet and satisfy these fully, expecting in return to be cor- 
dially sustained and liberally supported. Cyrus Nutt, 

A. Atwateb, Secretary. President of the Faculty. 

Bloomington, Indiana, April 15, 1875. 

159 



Indiana University 



Number of Com- The following table sliows the development of the system of Commis- 

inissiono 
Schools. 



sioned High Schools in Indiana from its inception in 1874: until the present 



time: 



No. of No. of 

Year. Schools. I'edr. Schools. 

1874 21 1881J 100 

1875 27 1890 107 

187C. 17 1801 108 

1877 -.28 1892 110 

1878 29 1893 107 

1879 30 1894 112 

1880 33 1895 118 

1881 21 1896 123 

1882 33 1897 130 

1883 38 1898 143 

1884 34 1899 15G 

1885 41 1900 158 

1880 83 1901 177 

1887 85 1902 170 

1888 99 1903 191 



160 



GRADUATE SCHOOL 



The first advanced decrees for work done in course in Indiana Univer- Requirements 



sity were granted in 1882. In the catalogue for that year we find the 
announcement of the first definite scheme for graduate degrees, as follows : 1882. 



for advanced 
degrees in 



FOR MASTERS' DEGREES 

1. Any graduate of this University, as Bachelor of Arts, Letters, or Science, who 
subsequently completes a course of study of not less than two years in any reputable 
professional scliool of Theology, Law, Medicine, Literature, Music, Advanced Science, 
or the Mechanic Arts, on presenting to the Faculty of this University satisfactory 
evidence that he has thus completed any of the professional courses named, and that 
he has niaintatned a good character, may receive from the University the Master's 
Degree of the same name as the Bachelor's Degree he has already received. 

2. Any graduate of this University, or of any similar and equal institution, who 
does not pursue a professional course as above described, may receive from this 
University a Master's Degree, corresponding to his Bachelor's Degree, at the expira- 
tion of three years from the date of graduation; provided, he gives evidence of good 
character and completes a course of study fairly equivalent to any of the professional 
courses above named under the direction of the Faculty of this University, either in 
residence at the University or in private, or partly in residence and partly in private. 
The satisfactoriness of the work to be determined by an examination of each candi- 
date by the Faculty of this University, and by the presentation on his part of a credit- 
able thesis on some theme prescribed by this Faculty. Provided, further, that the 
three years herein required may be reduced to two, if the entire time is spent by the 
candidate in residence at this University, or under the immediate direction of its 
Faculty. 

(12) 161 



Indiana University 



Modifications of 
ttiese require- 
ments, 1885-87. 



FOR DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF FHILOSOPHY 

The degree of Doctor of Philosophy may l)e received l)y the graduate of this 
University, or of any other institution of lilve character and equal rank, five years 
after graduation; provided, the cajididate, m addition to the requirements for the 
Master's Degree, as above recited, shall still further pursue studies under the direc- 
tion of the Faculty of this University, pass satisfactory examinations in the same, 
present in print a satisfactory thesis upon some prescribed or accepted subject, em- 
bodying original work, and maintain a good character. Provided, further, that the 
five years herein required may be reduced to three, if the entire time is spent in 
residence at this University, or under the immediate direction of its Faculty. 

In 1885 and 1886 it was furtlier required that "A copy of eacli thesis 
presented for a Master's degree must be deposited in the University Li- 
brary." In 1885, it was stipulated that "The degree of Doctor of Philosophy 
will not be given as an honorary degree, and it Avill be given to no one who 
has not obtained prominence as a special student in some department of 
learning." In 1886 the time requirement for the degree of Doctor of 
Philosophy was altogether omitted, and the last part of the stipulation 
just mentioned was modified so as to read as follows: "It will, farther, 
not be given as a result of any examinations or of any course of study 
alone, but only on evidence of original work actually done, by some person 
who has achieved prominence as a special student in some department of 
learning," 

It appears that at first not all the departments of the University were 
prepared to offer instruction of a graduate character. In the catalogue 
for 1885 we read: "Students holding a degree from Indiana University, 
or from any college having similar requirements, may select for themselves 
a course of advanced work, in any one or more departments of the Uni- 
versity which may be able to provide for them. Facilities for such advanced 
work are offered in most departments of the University, especially in the 
Departments of Mathematics, Chemistry and Biology." 

In the following year the latter part of this announcement was modified 
to read as follows: "Special courses, leading to the Master's degree (M.A., 
M.S.), will be arranged to meet the needs of each individual student. 
The advantages offered in the University for special advanced or original 



162 



Graduate School 

work are now very great, and it is the aim of those in control of the affairs 
of the University to make it the center of such work in the State in all 
departments within its scope." In 1887 the following explanation also was 
added : "As a rule, no degree of anj^ sort will be given by the University 
to any person who has not, at some time, been a matriculated student in 
residence at the University. It is not desired to create at the University 
an 'examining board' to certify to the value of work done elsewhere." 
As thus modified and enlarged, this announcement regarding the character 
of the graduate instruction appears also in the catalogues for 1888 and 
1889. Since 1886 the degree of Master of Science has not been granted. 

In 1887, in the same year in which the degree of Bachelor of Arts Requirements 
was made the only baccalaureate degree conferred by the University, the ^g^rees in 1887. 
requirements for the graduate degrees were newly defined as follows : 

MASTER OP ARTS 

Any graduate of this University, or of any similar institution, may receive from 
this University the degree of Master of Arts (A.M.) upon the completion of a course 
of advanced study, of not less than one year, in residence at the University, under the 
direction of the Faculty, the value of the work to be determined by an examination 
of each candidate, and by the presentation of a satisfactory thesis on some theme 
prescribed or accepted by the Faculty; but graduates of this University may, in 
special cases, be excused from residence though not from examination at the Uni- 
versity. 

Any graduate of this University of three years' standing, who has completed the 
course of study in a reputable professional school, on presenting to the Faculty of 
this University a creditable non-professional thesis, with satisfactory evidence that 
he has maintained a good character, may receive from this University the degree of 
Master of Arts. 

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY 

The degree of Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) may be received by the graduate of 
this University, or of any other institution of similar character and rank, upon the 
completion of an advanced course of study of not less than three years, at least one 
of which must be spent in residence at this University, the value of the work done 
to be shown by a final examination and by the presentation of a satisfactory thesis in 
print upon some prescribed or accepted subject embodying original work. 

163 



Indiana University 

Subsequent The requirement regarding evidence of good character was omitted after 

modifications. i occ 

In 1890 it was provided that the work for the Master's degree be done 
not under the direction of the Faculty, as hitherto, but "under the direction 
and supervision of the professor in charge of the Department in whicli 
studies are carried on," and the work for the Doctor's degree had also 
to be done "under the direction and supervision of the appropriate member 
of the Faculty." This provision was only in line with the increasing 
tendency in the University at this time toward specialization. In the same 
year the rule that candidates for the Master's degree might in some cases 
be excused from residence, providing they were graduates of the University, 
was guarded bj' the additional provision that "graduates from other institu- 
tions will in no case be thus excused." 

The more definite influence of the major subject system upon the plan 
of graduate instruction began to be felt in 1891. The Master's degree 
now required "the successful completion of three full courses of study 
occupying at least one year of three daily recitations, or the equivalent 
thereof, in residence at the University, such courses to be chosen under the 
advice of the head of the Department in which the major part of the 
work is to be done, and to be subject to the approval of the general 
Faculty." 

In 1893 provision was made, moreover, that "If at any time during 
the year an undergraduate has completed the requirements for graduation, 
a written statement to this effect is given him by the President of the 
University, and his work for the remainder of the year may be counted 
toward his higher degree." 

The number of graduate students registered and the degrees granted 
in successive years have been as follows : 



104 



Graduate School 



JVumber of Graduate 
Sf 14 dents 



Number of Degrees 
Conferred 



Year 
1880-1881 

1881-1882 

1882-1883 

1883-1884 

1884-1885 

1885-188(3 

1886-1887 

1887-1888 

1888-1889 

1889-1890 12 

1890-1891 19 

1891-1892 28 

1892-189:3 22 

1893-1894 47 

1894-1895 49 

1895-1896 G2 

1896-1897 65 

1897-1898 84 

1898-1899 77 

1899-1900 69 

1900-1901 69 

1901-1902 82 

1902-1903 82 



In Jtesideuce In Absence 
1 



M.S. 

3 
2 
1 
3 
3 



19 
29 
17 
24 
23 



A.M. 



4 
10 
5 
6 
7 
14 
16 
17 
16 
11 
15 
14 
13 
14 
15 
11 
21 
18 
19 



Ph.D. 



Numbers of 
graduate stu- 
dents and de- 
grees, 1880- 
1903. 



Totals 12 



250 



14 



A Committee on Advanced Degrees was first appointed in 1894. Re- Organization of 
cently (March, 1904), in order to emphasize the facilities offered by the g^^o^^^ipo^ 
University for work of an advanced nature, a Graduate School has been 
organized. The requirements for the degree of Master of Arts and of 
Doctor of Philosophy are thus set forth in the catalogue for 1904: 

MASTER OF ARTS 

The degree of Master of Arts may be conferred upon graduates of this University, 
or of any other institution of the same standing, upon the completion in residence of 
fifteen hoiu's per term, carried during at least one entire college year. Thirty of the 



165 



Indiana University 



Present require- total of forty-live hours must be iu one departtueut, or In closely allied departments. 



nients for ad- 
vanced degrees. 



Fifteen hours must be distinctly graduate in character. 

The Master's degree may be conferred upon graduates of this University upon the 
completion in absence of fifteen hours per term, or their equivalent, carried during at 
least two full years under the direction of the Faculty, liours of private work done 
in absence being estimated at one-half the credit value of work done at the University. 

Professional studies are not accepted for tliis degree, but research work on pro- 
fessional subjects may be accepted at the option of the professor in charge of the 
major subject. 

A thesis may be required at the option of the professor in charge of the major 
sul)ject. 

DOCTOR OF nilLOSOPHY. 

The degree of Doctor of Pliilosophy may be conferred upon graduates of this Uni- 
versity, or of any institution of similar character and rank, upon the completion of 
an advanced course of study of not less tlian three years. In exceptional cases, on 
the recommendation of the professor in charge of the major subject and with the 
concurrence of tlie Committee on Advanced Degrees, part of this time may be spent 
in study at other universities. 

Tlie course of study for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy must be pursued 
under the direction of a committee consisting of the heads of the Departments in 
which the work is done, and its value shall be determined by a final examination and 
by the presentation of a satisfactory thesis embodying original work upon some pre- 
scribed or accepted subject. In each case a detailed statement, which must be 
endorsed by the professor in charge of the major work, must be submitted to the 
Committee on Advanced Degrees not later than May 10th of the year in which the 
candidate presents himself for examination. 

The thesis of every candidate for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy must be pre- 
sented to the Committee on Advanced Degrees on or before the first day of June of 
the year in which he proposes to take the degree. The thesis must be endorsed by 
the head of the Department as being in its final form and ready for the press. Ex- 
aminations of each candidate for this degree will be conducted before a committee 
consisting of all the instructors under whom graduate work has been taken. If 
the candidate is recommended for the degree, five printed copies of the thesis shall 
be deposited in tlie library before the degree is conferred. 

Formal application for the degree of Master of Arts must be filed with the Dean 
at least three months before the time when the degree is to be given. Formal appli- 
cation for tlie degree of Doctor of Philosophy must be on file at least one year before 
the candidate is admitted to examination. 

166 



SCHOOL OF LAW 



A School of Law has existed at two distinct periods at Indiana Uni- 
versity, from 1842 to 1877, and from 1880 nntil the present time. Dr. 
Wylie says: "The organization of the Law School was agitated in 1835, steps toward 

if not sooner, early in the administration of the first President of the organization of 
, . a Law School,, 

University. The earliest attempt to organize it as a Department of the 1835-41. 

University mnst have been some time between 1835 and 1837. A loose 

scrap of paper containing a note which the writer prcjbably intended ta 

transfer to the minutes has escaped destruction, on which is the following: 

"Resolved, That in the opinion of the Board, a professorship of kiw should be estab- 
lished, to be connected with the college. 

"That the law term should consist of four months, from December 1st to 
March 31st. 

"That the salary of the professor shall be $300, to be paid as other salaries of the 
oollege officers, and that he also be entitled to dispose of lecture tickets for his owrt 
benefit, the price of which shall not exceed .$10 per term. 

"Resolved, That the Board now proceed to the election of said professor. 

"Mr. Foster (who was a trnstee from 1835 to 1838) was appointed! 
teller, and on counting the votes it appeared that Isaac Blackford was; 
unanimously elected professor. There is no further trace of Judge Black- 
ford's professorship. From some notes which had been taken from the 
old record book of the College, destroyed in the fire of 1883, mention 
is made of Charles Lewis having been chosen professor of law, September 
20, 1837. We have no further notice of Mr. Lewis. 

"At the first meeting of the board, after the College had been made 
a University, the following appeared on record in its proceedings under 

167 



Indiana University 

date of September 25, 1838 : ^On motion of Mr. [ Johu] Law the Board pro- 
ceeded to the election of a professor of law. The resnlt of the election was 
that the Hon. Miles G. Eggleston was unanimously elected.' Mr. Eggleston 
declined, owing to circumstances over which he had no control. Appli- 
cation was then made to several distinguished jurists, but no one was found 
willing to accept. The matter was then dropped till 1841, when Gen. 
Tilghman A. Howard was elected, and a very urgent letter was sent by 
the Board requesting his acceptance. General Howard, however, declined 
this earnest request. About a year after this the names of several dis- 
tinguished jurists were presented to the Board. Of this number David 
McDonald, who was a resident of Bloomington and a Judge of the Circuit 
Court, was duly elected, and on the following day his letter of acceptance 
was received."^ 
Its first an- We read in the first announcement of the Law School, in the catalogue 

nouncement, f ^^g^g that "In establishing this Department, the design of the Board 
1842. o 1 7 o 
- of Trustees is (to use their own language), 'Xothing less than the building 

up of a Law School, that shall be inferior to none west of the Mountains; 
one in which the student will be so trained that he shall never, in the- 
attorney, forget the scholar and the gentleman'. It will be the object of 
the Professor to furnish a complete course of legal education to gentlemen 
intending for the bar in any of the United States. Persons applying for 
:admission as students will not be examined touching their literary attain- 
■ments. But no one will be admitted who does not produce satisfactory 
■testimonials of his good moral character. The sessions will, in all respects, 
loe the same as in other branches of the LTniversity. The course of study 
"will occupy four sessions [at this time there were two sessions each year]. 
The students will be divided into two classes — Junior and Senior. Such, 
however, as have elsewhere made sufficient progress in the study of law, 
may, if they prefer, be at once admitted to the Senior Class. And gentle- 
men not wishing to study municipal law as a profession, may enter the 
Junior Class for instruction in that part of the course which relates to 
international, constitutional and commercial law." 

Instruction in this Department was in general given by means of reci- 
tations on prescribed text-books, and by lectures. A moot court was held. 



iWylie, Indiana University (1890), pp. 88-89. 

168 



School of Law 

also, in which the sti;dents of both classes were exercised in the preparation 
of pleadings, rules of practice, forms of record entries, and discussion of 
legal questions. At first this moot court was held every Saturday, but 
from 1874 it was convened four times a week. 

The changes from time to time in the course of instruction in the Changes in the 
Law Department may be seen in the following table of text-books, showing course of mstruc- 

^ . . . > 8 t-ion. 1842-76. 

the time during which each of these books was in regular use '} 

JUNIOR CLASS 

Blackstune's Commentaries, 1S42-S, 1850-1, 1853-76. 

Stoiy's Commentaries on tlie Constitution, 1842-5. 

Chitty on Contracts, 1842-8. 

Stephen on Pleading, 1842-8, 1850-1, 1853-76. 

Kent's Commentaries, 1842-8, 1850-1, 1853-61, 1871-6. 

Smith on Contracts, 18.50-1, 18.53-61. 

Parsons on Mercantile Law, 1862. 

Smith or Parsons on Contracts, 1863-5. 

Metcalf on Contracts, 1869-70. 

Parsons on Contracts, 1871-76. 

SENIOR CLASS 

Kent's Commentaries, 1842-8, 1850-1, 1853-61. 

Chitty on Bills, 1842-8. 

Chitty on Pleading, 1842-8, 18.50-1, 1853-4. 

Starkie's Evidence, 1842-4. 

Story's Equity Pleading, 1842. 

Mitford's Equity Pleading, 1843-8, 1850-1, 1853-61. 

Greenleaf's Evidence, 1845-8. 1850-1, 18.53-76. 

Adams's Equity, 1855-65. 

Indiana Revised Statutes of 18.52 (selections with reference to practice in the 

State Courts, in Civil and Criminal cases), 1855-61. 
Williams on Real Property, 1862-70. 
Bicknell's Practice and the Code, l«71-6. 
Washburn on Real Property, 1871-6. 
Story's Equity, 1871-6. 



iThe University catalogue for 1849 is missing; in the catalogue for 1852 no list of text- 
books is given; also in the catalogue for 1877, which contains the announcement of the suspen- 
sion of the Law Department in that year, no such list is given. 

169 



Indiana University 



Suspension of 
the Law School, 
1877-89; its re- 
vival in 1889. 



Development 
since 1889. 



Students were also recommended to procure certain books in addition 
to the text-books, as follows: 

Williams on Personal Property, 1873-5. 
Sedgwick on Statutory Construction, 1873-6. 
May on Insurance, 1874-6. 
Cooley on Constitutional Limitations, 1874-6. 
Benjamin on Personal Property, 1876. 

In 1877 the Law Department of the University closed its doors because 
of legislative action cutting dovni the salaries of professors to such a point 
that competent men could no longer be secured. Tor twelve years the De- 
partment was out of existence; but at a meeting in ]\[arch, 1889, the Board 
of Trustees made provision for its reestablishment in the next academic 
year with a two years' course. Regular instruction was contemplated in 
the following subjects : "The first, or Junior year, is devoted to the study 
of the law of real and personal property, contracts, negotiable instruments, 
criminal law, the law of bailments, and domestic relations. The second, or 
Senior year, is devoted to the study of equity jurisprudence, pleading evi- 
dence, the law of torts, constitutional law, federal jurisprudence and practice, 
and pleading and practice under codes." 

During the first year of the reopening of the Law Department, instruc- 
tion was given during the Fall and Winter terms only, but thereafter the 
terms were made to correspond to the three terms in other Departments 
of the LTniversity. Beginning with 1901 the course in law has covered 
three years instead of two. In 1903 a fourth term of ten weeks was added, 
beginning the day after Commencement and ending early in the month of 
September. This is designed to "enable those who are compelled to remain 
out of the School during the Fall and Winter terms to make up a portion 
of their work missed during those terms." 

The Law Department has undergone a steady development since its 
reorganization, so that it now constitutes a School of Law, with three pro- 
fessors, one associate professor, and three non-resident lecturers, besides 
numbering on its Faculty eight professors from other Departments of 
the University, representing regular instruction in history and political 
science, Roman law, economics and social science, medical jurisprudence, 
and debating and public speaking. In place, moreover, of the original 



170 



School of Law 

weekly moot court, there are now two regular practice courts, the Third 
Year Practice Court (Indiana University Circuit Court), which meets once 
a week, and the University Supreme Court, which convenes as often as 
may be required by the business before it, the members of the Faculty 
of the School of Law acting as judges. Appeals are taken and writs of 
error prosecuted from the Third Year Practice Court. Besides these two 




SCHOOL OF LAW — A Corner of the Law Library 



regular practice courts, club courts also are organized for the discussion 
of legal questions by the students of each class. 

Aj)plicants for admission to the School of Law must be at least eighteen Kequirements 
years of age; and since 1899 the requirement of scholarship for admission, ^r admission, 
except in the case of special students, has been the same as for admission 
to the Departments of Liberal Arts. Before tliat time the applicant was 

171 



Indiana University 



Combined rour4»e 
jn Arts aAcJ I^tiw.. 



required to satisfy the Faeultv by standing an examination that he was 
prepared profitably to undertake the work of the J)e})artnient, special em- 
phasis beilig laid on his ability to use good English. 

With the beginning of the academic year 1905, there will be offered 
to students in the Departments of Liberal Arts a combined course with law 




SCHOOL OP^ LAW -Another Part of the Law Library 

as special major subject, leading to the degree of A.B. at the end of 
four years. The course contemplates the completion of two full years of 
academic work before the commencement of the law studies. During the 
third and fourth years the student taking the combined course will be re- 
quired to ,do ten hour^ a week work in law, and five hours in prescribed 



172 



School of Law 

and elective subjects in the Departments of Liberal Arts. The A.B. degree? 
with law as the major subject will admit the holder to the third-year class 
of the School of Law, and enable him to complete the law course, with 
the degree LL.B., in one year. Students of the University whose major 
subject is other than that of law, are permitted after the completion of 




SCHOOL OP" LAW -Moot Court Room 

their Freshman year to take one year of law on the A.B. course. They 
are thus enabled, after graduation, to complete the law course in two years. 

The subjects offered in the Law Department in the first year of its course of in- 
reorganization in 1889 have already been mentioned. The following table f,''"^"''"' ^^^^^ 

^ .... 1903. 

shows the development of the course of instruction in this Department from 
1890 to the present time. In this table the larger figures indicate the 



173 



Indiana University 

imiuber of lioiirs per week, and tlie index tiii'ures show tlie terms of the year — 
whether first, secoud or third — in which the respective subjects were offered. 
Hyphenated figures (e.g. 1-3) indicate that the subject was offered through- 
out the three terms. 

SUBJECTS OFFERED IN LAW DEPARTMENT 





'90 


'91 


'92 


•93 


'94 


•95 


-'96 


•97 " 


•98 


'99 


1900 


'01 


'02 


'03 


Agency 














23 


6' 


5' 


22 


52 


52 


62 


53 


Bankruptcy 




























13 


Bills and Notes 


53 


5'' 


53 








13 


53 


63 


53 


63 


62 


62 


43 


Blackstone 


52-3 


























21-2 


Carriers and Bailments . . 














62 


62 


52 


52 


21 


21-2 


62 


42 


Code Pleading \ 
and Practice j 


51 


51-3 


51-3 


61 


511^ 


6iP 


3112 


21 


21 


32 


61 


61 


61 


51 


Common Law Procediire 


51 


51 








13 


21 


62 


53 


63 


63 


53 


63 


52 


Constitutional Law 


51 


5> 


51 




2^ 


23 


23 


22 


22 


43 


42-3 


32-3 


63 


53 


Contracts 


52-3 


51-3 


51-3 


51^3 


51-3 


51-3 


61 


51 


61 


51 


31 


31-2 


61 


51 


Criminal Law \ 
and Procedure J 


53 


53 


53 


33 


33 


33 


33 


63 


53 


63 


61 


61 


6' 


61 


Damages 




























23 


Elementary Law 


51 


61 


51 


61 


51 


51 


61 


31 


31 


31 


31 


3> 


31 




Equity Jurisprudence . . . 


51 


51 


51 


5' 


61 


51 


51 


51 


61 


6' 


5 '32 


6132 


62 


61 


Equity Pleading 1 
and Practice J 














11 3 


32 


32 


31 


22 


22 


22 


32 


Evidence, I 


52 


52 


52 


42 


42 


42 


42 


62 


62 


52 


5132 


6132 


31-2 


52 


Evidence, II 




























53 


Federal Procedure 
























11 


11 


11 


Guaranty and Suretyship 














23 








23 


23 


23 


23 


History of English Law 


























61 


53 


Indiana University 1 
Circuit Court J — 


















11-3 


11-3 


11-3 


11-3 


11-3 


11-S 


Indiana Pleading "1 
and Practice J 






















11-3 


11-3 


11 3 


31-8 


Indiana Probate Law .... 
























21-3 


21-3 


21-3 


International Law 


52 


52 


52 






23 


23 


23 


23 


23 


23 


23 


23 


23 


Insurance 
















22 


22 


22 


32 

22 


32 

22 


32 

53 


32 


Judgments 




Justice Practice 






















11 


11 


12 


11 



174 



School of Law 



SUBJECTS OFFERED IN LAW DEPARTMENT— Continued 





'90 


'91 


'92 


'93 


'94 


'95 


'96 


'97 


'98 


'99 


1900 


'01 


'02 


'03 


Legal Ethics 


53 




























Medical Jurisprudence.. 
























11 


11 


11 


Moot Court, I 






11-3 


11-3 


11-3 


11-3 


11-3 


11-3 


11-3 


11-3 


11-3 


11-3 


11-3 


11-3 


Moot Court, II 






•• 


.. 












11-3 


11-3 


H-3 


11-3 


11-3 


Mortgages 




























4» 




















21 


21 


21 


21 


21 


31 


Parliamentary Law 






















11-3 


11 


11 


31 


Partnership 




















22 


22 


22 


22 


22 


Patent Law and \ 
Trade Marks J 
























13 


13 


p 


Persons and Do- \ 
mestic Relations J 


53 


63 


32 


23 


2^ 


23 


23 


21 


21 


21 


31 


31 


33 


22 


Personal Property 




52-3 


2^63 


52 


62 


52 


62 


32 


32 


31 


31 


21 


31 


22 


Private Corporations — 


5-^ 


63 


5' 


63 


53 


63 


53 


63 


53 


63 


61-2 


51-2 


61 


6* 


Public Corporations 
















52 


52 


42 


63 


63 


62 


63 






























63 




52 


62 


52 


62 


62 


52 


62 


61 


51 


61 


51-3 


52-3 


61 


61 


Roman Law 




























11 


Sales of Personal \ 
Property j 
















62 


62 


62 


53 


63 


63 


6» 


Torts 


53 


53 


63 




33 


33 


33 


53 


53 


53 


61 


61 


61 


61 


Trusts 
















33 


33 


33 


63 


63 


5' 


53 


University Su-I 
preme Court j 


















11-3 


11-3 


H-3 


11-3 


11-3 


11-8 


Wills and Adminis- \ 
tration of Estates J — 


52 


6» 


62 


12 


12-3 


12-3 


12-3 


23 


23 


12 


43 


53 


53 


63 



175 



SCHOOL OF MEDICINE 



Movement to 
establish a 
School of Medi- 
cine, 1870. 



Indiana Medical 
College made the 
Medical Depart- 
ment of Indiana 
University, 
J871. 



In the annual reports of the Board of Trustees for 1870 and 1871, 
mention is made, among the wants of the University, of another profes- 
sional department, that of Medicine, in which tuition shall be free for 
all. "Then Indiana, with her excellent common schools, her Graded and 
High Schools, her l^ormal College at Terre Haute, her Agricultural and 
Mechanical College at Lafayette, and her State University, embracing the 
College of Sciences and Arts, the College of Law, the College of Medicine, 
and that of Military Science, would have her system of education complete, 
and equal to that of any other State in the Union. Then no young men 
or women need leave their own State in order to secure the best liberal 
and professional educations in any vocation they may select. Indiana owes 
this to herself and her sons and daughters. Her children should not be 
dependent upon other commonwealths for what she, herself, is abundantly 
able to furnish." 

At a meeting of the Board in 1871, the Indiana Medical College, located 
at Indianapolis, was made the Medical Department of Indiana University, 
and the annual announcement of this college was incorporated for the first 
time in the University catalogue for 1872. Instruction was offered in 
surgery, obstetrics, diseases of women and children, principles and practice 
of medicine, pathology and clinical medicine, chemistry and toxicology, 
physiology, diseases of the eye, ear and nasal passage, materia medica 
and therapeutics, medical jurisprudence, descriptive and surgical anatomy. 
Lectureships were also established on the special branches of diseases of 
the nervous system, on comparative anatomy and medical botany, and on. 
medical jurisprudence, 

1Y6 



School of Medicine 

In the study of anatomy an abundance of material foi' dissection was 
furnished at cost. Clinics were held twice each week at the City Hospital 
at Indianapolis. The Bohhs Free Dispensary also, which was under the 
control of the Faculty and located in the College buildine;, furnished a 
great number and variety of interesting cases. The City Dispensary, at 
which the greater portion of the medical charity of the city is furnished, 
Avas located conveniently near and was under the superintendency of a mem- 
ber of the Faculty of this Department. At least one hour each day was 
•devoted to clinical instruction. 

The requirements for graduation in this Department were as follows : 

Candidates for graduation nuist furnish proof of good moral character, that they 
have studied tlie science for three years under the instruction of a competent pre- 
ceptor, and that they have attended two full courses of lectures in a medical college 
of good reputation, the last of which must have been in this Department. On such 
proof, and after satisfactory examination in the several l)ranches of study, the candi- 
date will be entitled to the degree of Doctor of Medicine. 

Four years of reputable practice considered equivalent to attendance upon a first 
course of lectures. 

The connection, however, of the Indiana Medical College with the The connection 
University was little more than nominal and of no particular advantage -.^^^^^ '""'^ ' 
to either side. From 1870 tuition had been free in all departments of 
the University. On this account the Board of Trustees seemed to feel 
in the case of the Medical Department, as in that of the Law Department 
a year later, that to undertake to continue its maintenance would require 
an expenditure beyond the means at their disposal. Accordingly in 1876, 
after continuing for five years, the connection of the Indiana Medical 
College with the University Avas terminated by mutual consent. The grad- 
uates of the Department during this period have not been accounted alumni 
of the University. 

In 1891 a Medical Preparatory Course was established under the general Medical Prepara- 
direction of the professors of chemistry and zoology. This course of four °^J, f^J^ff' 

^ ■" ^^ lo91— 190z. 

years, leading to the degree of A.Bw, was provided for students who ex- 
pected afterwards to take up the study of medicine. The major study 
contained work from both these Departments, and as collateral work courses 

(13) 177 



Indiana University 



Indiana Univer- 
sity School of 
Medicine estab- 
lished, 1903. 



Combined course 
in Arts and Med- 
cine. 



in botany and physics were also required. Students completing this course 
were enabled to enter with advanced standing in the three years' course 
of most medical colleges. 

The Premedical Course, as thus planned, was continued through 1895. 
From 1896 until 1902 this course was under the direction of the Depart- 
ment of Chemistry, and embodied simply certain suggestions for a 
scheme of study which met the University requirements for graduation, 
with chemistry as the major subject, and at the same time formed a suit- 
able preparation for students who intended later to study medicine. The 
plan of grouping together certain studies with zoology or chemistry as 
a major subject, although it enabled graduates of the University to get 
one year of credit in reputable medical colleges for undergraduate work, 
yet failed to meet the needs of an increasing body of students who looked 
forward to Medicine as a career. Consequently, in the fall of 1903, a 
Department of Anatomy was established, and a substantial increase was 
made in the equipment for the work in physiolog}^ The situation, how- 
ever, was not relieved. It was found that a large number of students were 
intending to study medicine in medical colleges outside the State. Accord- 
ingly in November, 1903, in accordance with the charter rights of the Uni- 
versity, a College of Medicine was organized, to be known as the Indiana 
University School of Medicine. In tlie fall of 1904 the full work of 
the first two years will be offered. Only the first two years of the medical 
course are provided for at present. The School of Medicine as thus planned 
will be represented by Departments of Anatomy, Physiology, and Chemistry, 
and will include also work in other departments of the University in neu- 
rology and embryology. 

A cond)ined course in Arts and Medicine is now provided for, which is an 
integral part of the University curriculum. Requirements for admission to 
this course are the same as to any other Department of the University, and 
are practically identical with the minimum entrance requirements demanded 
by the Association of American Medical Colleges. 

Following is given a tabular conspectus of the combined course leading 
to the collegiate degree of Bachelor of Arts in Medicine, and giving the 
student who completes it third-year standing in any medical school of the 
State and in manv medical schools outside the State: 



178 



Fall Term 

English 2 hrs. 

German 6 lirs. 

Physics 3 hrs. 



School of Medicine 

FIRST YEAR 

Winter Term 

English 4 hrs. 

German 6 hrs. 

Physics 3 hrs. 



Spring Term 

English 4 hrs. 

German 5 hrs. 

Physics 3 hrs. 



Trigonometry 5 hrs. Elective 3 hrs. Elective 3 hrs. 



Zoology 5 hrs. 

General Chemistry . . 5 hrs. 

French 3 hrs. 

Elective 2 hrs. 



Anatomy . .' 10 hrs. 

Organic Chemistry. 5 hrs. 



SECOND YEAR 

Zoology 5 hrs. 

Qualitative Analysis 5 hrs. 

French 3 hrs. 

Elective 2 hrs. 

THIRD YEAR 

Anatomy 10 hrs. 

Physiological Chem- 
istry 5 hrs. 



Botany 5 hrs. 

Qualitative Analysis 5 hrs. 

French 3 lu-s. 

Hypnotism and Sug- 
gestion 3 hrs. 



Histology 10 hrs. 

Physiological Cheni- 
istry 5 lirs. 



Anatomy 5 lu-s. 

Physiology 5 hrs 

Toxicology 3 lirs. 

Neurology 2 hrs. 



FOURTH YEAR 

Physiology 5 hrs. 

Bacteriology 3 hrs. 

Neurology 2 hrs. 

Embryology 5 hrs. 



Surgical Anatomy . . 5 hrs. 

Physiology 5 hrs. 

Bacteriology 5 hrs. 



For the electives provided for during the first two years, the student is recom- 
mended to take courses in anthropology, drawing, general biology, French, Greek, 
history, hygiene, philosophy, and laboratory work in physics. 



179 



SUMMER SESSION 



A Summer 
School organized, 
1890; made a 
Summer Session, 
1900. 



Purpose of the 
Summer Session. 



The Indiana University Summer School was organized in the summer 
of 1890 for the purposes of extending to those who are occupied during 
the school year the advantages of advanced instruction in certain Depart- 
ments, aided by the libraries, laboratories and other facilities for study 
connected with the University. The policy of the University in presenting 
thorough courses of study in each Department instead of multiplying short 
unrelated courses, was followed in this school. In the Summer School 
the instruction was given by members of the University Faculty, the build- 
ings and apparatus of the University were at the disposal of the school, 
credit was given for the work done, and a general supervision over the 
school was maintained by the University authorities. Nevertheless, the 
Summer School remained a private venture, the instructors being rei;p.u- 
nerated solely from the fees paid. Subsequently, in 1900 the University 
assumed full control of this work, and the Summer School gave place to 
the Summer Session. The instruction now given in the Summer Session 
is an integral part of the University work. Under the new arrangement 
it has been found possible to offer a greater number and variety of courses, 
and the instruction is given for the most part by the heads of the respective 
Departments. 

The purpose of the Summer Session remains the same as that of the 
Summer School. It is the aim of the Session to present thorough courses 
which in quality of instruction and grade of work done are equivalent to 
those offered in the regular University terms. Some of the courses of 
instruction have been specially arranged for the purpose of aiding those 



180 



Su 



mmer session 



who teach, or wish to prepare tliemselves to teach, in high schools, academies 
and other schools. Methods of teaching are treated incidentally also in other 
courses. Since 1899 the session has been six weeks in length. 

The development of the course of instruction in the Summer Session Courses of in 
may be seen from the following table : 



struction in the 
Summer Session. 



NUMBER OF COURSES OFFERED IN EACH SUBJECT IN SUMMER SESSIONS 

Departments. '90 

Greek 

Latin 

Romance Languages 

Germanic Languages 

English 4 

History anil Political Science 

Economics and Social Science 

Philosophy 

Pedagogy (now Education) 

Mathematics 7 

Mechanics and Astronomy 1 

Physics 3 

Chemistry 3 

Geology 

Zoology 3 

Botany 

Nature Study 

The School of Law began in 1897 to offer work in connection with the Work in the 
Summer School in the form of such special courses as were applied for. ^"^^oo^ '^^ ^-^^^ • 
In 1900 summer instruction in this Department became regularly organized 
as a part of the course of the Summer Session. The general plan followed 
was to give instruction in law in any course offered in the regular University 
session, providing a sufficient number of students applied for it. The 
following table shows the scope of the work offered in the successive years 

181 



'91 


'92 


'93 


'94 


'95 


'96 


'97 


'98 


'99 


1900 
1 


'01 
2 


'02 


'Oi 








1 


4 


3 


3 


3 


3 


3 


3 


3 


4 


•• 










2 


4 


5 


2 


2 


3 


3 


3 








2 


4 


3 


3 


5 


4 


4 


5 


4 


4 


4 


4 


3 


5 


7 


5 


6 


6 


5 


6 


6 


6 


6 








3 


3 


3 


3 


4 

1 


3 


4 
3 


4 

3 


5 
3 


4 

3 






I 


1 




1 




1 


1 


5 


3 


4 


4 










3 


2 


3 


3 


3 


3 


5 


4 


5 


6 


7 


4 


3 


7 


8 


6 


8 


8 


6 


8 


8 


8 


1 


1 








.. 










4 


4 


5 


5 


5 




1 


1 


2 


2 


3 


5 


3 


4 


4 


6 


4 


4 




1 


2 


3 


6 


4 


4 


3 


3 


3 


7 












1 


1 




1 


2 


4 


4 


4 


4 


4 


1 


1 


2 


2 


3 


3 














3 


1 


1 




5 


4 


3 




1 
1 


3 


1 


3 
3 



Indiana University 

from 1900 through 190:? ; each course was given daily throughout the term 
of six weeks: 

Elementary Law, 1900. 

Domestic Relations, 1900. 

Criminal Law, 1900-1902. 

Personal Property, 19(X). 

Insurance, 1900. 

Agency, 1900. 

Partnership, 1900. 

Bills and Notes, 1900, 1901. 

Pleading and Practice, 1900-1902. 

Contracts. 1901, 1902. 

Equity, 1901, 1902. 

Evidence, 1901. 

Torts, 1901. 

Summer term Beginning with the year 1903, there has been a Summer term of ten 

weeks in the School of Law, in which there are offered such courses as 
are given in the other terms of the School. In the Summer Session of 
1903 the following courses were offered, the number in parenthesis indi- 
cating the number of hours a week : 

First Year Courses— 

Criminal Law and Procedure (5). 
Elementary Law: Blackstone (5). 
Common Law Pleading (5). 

Second and Third Tear Co^irses — 
Equity Jurisprudence (5). 
Code Pleading (5). 
Personal Injuries (5). 
Criminal Evidence (5). 
Third Year Practice Court (2). 



of the School 
of Law. 



182 



BIOLOGICAL STATION 



The Indiana University Biological Station arose ont of a desire to 
afford stndents in connection with the Department of Zoology the advantage 
of field work, dnring the summer months, at an inland biological observatory. 



Jk^, 



inl ^SLi 



INDIANA UNIVERSITY BIOLOGICAL STATION- Winona Lake, Indiana 

In N^ovember, 1894, the Trnstees of the University indorsed plans snb- 
mitted to them for a biological station, and authorized the use, for this 
purpose, of the apparatus of the zoological laboratories. This important 
step was taken in the adoption of the following recommendation : ''That 
Dr. Eigenmann be permitted to use the zoological apparatus for a summer 
school of zoology either at or away from the University, he being responsible 
to the University for such apparatus." Subsequent steps are described as 



Organization of 
the Biological 
Station. 



183 



Indiana University 

follows, in an article in Science for December 22, ISOO, l)y Professor 0. 
H. Eigenmann, the founder of the Station : 
Its purpose. ''The Biological Station of Indiana University was planned with a 

well-defined object in view, the stndy of the variation of the nonmigratory 
vertebrates in some unit of environment. The Station was to be located 
on a lake which would present circumscril)0(l boundaries within which the 
conditions were supposed to be nearly uniform at any time and from season 
fo season. Here large nund^ers of the nonmii>i"atorv vertebrates were to 




BK )LO(iICAL STATKJN - Lecture Koum 

be collected, their characteristics tabulated and compared wath similar series 
from other lakes. We were, in short, to conduct a statistical inquiry into 
evolution. For the work in hand many of the lakes were available. Our 
location was therefore determined by the finding of an old boathouse suit- 
able for a laboratory on the shore of Turkey Lake. For the first year the 
Trustees of the University granted the use of apparatus of the Zoological 
Department, provided the Station would in no way be an expense to the 
University- After the first year the Trustees provided generously for the 
permanent equipment of the Station. To help defray expenses a niimber 

184 



Biological Station 

of courses of instruction were offered for a few students. It was expected 
that there would be about ten in the party the first year, but there were 
nineteen." 

The work of the first summer resulted in a hydrographic map of the 
lake, a meteorological report, a description of the physical features of the 
lake, and reports on the characteristics of its inhabitants. These lines of 
-work were continued in subsequent years. 

In 1899 the Biological Station removed to Winona Lake. In readiness Removed to 

■for its first year in this location, two buildings were erected on the lake- ^Vf'f'"^ ^^^' 
'' ' ^ 1899. 

front by the Winona Assembly and Summer School, and were presented 
to the Station. These buildings are each 25x45 feet, and two stories high. 
An artesian well, situated between the laboratories, furnishes a supply of 
5,000 gallons of water a day. The Station owns boats, nets, sounding and 
temperature apparatus, glassware, etc. Microscopes and other apparatus 
needed are moved to the Station from the University at the opening of 
<eacli summer session. The laboratories will accommodate a hundred stu- 
•dents, and the attendance is restricted to this number. 

At the Biological Station the following courses have been offered, in courses of in- 
the years indicated: 



bourses in Zoology — 

General Zoology, 1895-1903. 
The Lake Fauna, 1895-190.3. 

Embryology (including Segmentation, Morphogenesis, Histogenesis, and Hist- 
ology), 1895-1903. 
Special Investigation, 189-5-1902. 
General Problems in Biology-, 1898, 1899. 1901-1903. 

<Courses in Neurology- 
Neurology, 1901-1903. 

Gross Anatomy of the Nervous System, 1901-1903. 
Advanced Neurology, 1903. 

^Courses in Botany— 

Elementary Botany, 1897-1903. 
General Botany, 1898, 1899. 
Advanced Botany, 1902, 1903. 
Microscopic Botany, 1898. 

185 



st ruction at the 
Biological Sta- 
tion. 



Indiana University 



Courses in Botany (continued)— 

Morphology of Algae, 1899, 1900. 

Comparative IMorphology of Archegoniates, 1899, 

Vegetable Histology, 1899, 1900. 

Research, 1899, 1900. 

Advanced Work in Ecology. 1901. 

Laboratory and Field Work on riant Relations, 1901. 

Lectures on Plant Relations. 1901. 

Relations of Plants to Insects, 1901. 

Courses in Bacteriology- 
General Bacteriology, 1899, 1900. 
. Bacteriology— Laboratory Practice, 3899, 1900. 
Advanced Bacteriology, 1899, 1900. 
Lectures— Selected Topics, 1899, 1900. 
Research, 1899, 1900. 

A course of ten lectures by Prof. C. F. Hodge, of Clark University, 
on the point of view of Nature Study was given in 1902. 



186 



DEPARTMENTS NOW DISCONTINUED 



After the death of President Wylie in 1S51, the Board of Trustees 
of the University was entirely reorganized. At one of their first meetings, 
namely, on April 14, of the next year, the new Board made provision for 
the adoption of each of the following measures, "as calculated to render 
the University more useful and more popular:" 

1. A coui"se of Agricultural Chemistry, to be commenced at such seasons of the Kesolutions of 

year as may be acreed upon as most convenient and suitable. At this time of excite- ^^^^ BoarcJ of 

Trustees 1852. 
ment and inquiry as to improvements in agriculture, it Avill be wise in this University 

to take the lead in establishing a course of instruction which lies at the very basis 

of all agricultural improvement. 

2. A Normal Seminary consisting of departments for males and for females. 
There is no measure in regard to the State UniA^ersity more urgently required by 
public opinion than this. Through this department the common school system of the 
State will be brought into connection and sympathy with the University. 

3. Theoretical and practical engineering, as connected with the Mathematical 
Department. The numerous public works now in process of construction render civil 
engineering a most important branch of University education, and it can not be 
doubted that instruction by an able and accomplished mathematician, in this im- 
portant branch, together with practical illustrations in the field, would meet one of 
the present demands of public education in Indiana, and add a new class of valuable 
students to the University. 

4. The adoption of regular graduation for that class of students who take what 
is denominated a Scientific course. It has been subject of complaint, that proper 
provision has not been made by our colleges to encourage that class of students who 
do not complete a full course of classical reading. In order to induce that class to 

187 



Indiana University 



continue in the University until they shall have completed a prescribed course in 
Mathematics and Philosophy, it is recommended that a Diploma be conferred upon 
them, on the completion of a course of studies, to be prescribed by the Faculty, and 
that the same formalities be observed as in the conferring of the regular degrees now 
known in the University. 



AGRICULTURAL DEPARTMENT 

The Agricultural 111 accordance with the terms of these provisions, in the year 1853 there 

DepHrtment, ^^ established an Afirricultural Department of the University. This De- 

IS.i^.'J-t^P. ... . . 

partment continued in existence for six years. The work of instruction 
embraced "Natural philosophy and chemistry, both organic and inorganic, 
including an account of nutrition, growth, and respiration, in the vegetable 
and animal economy, and analysis of soils and manures, ores, marls, etc., 
as connected with agriculture. The course also includes Geology." 

In 1862, under acts of Congress, public lands were appropriated to the 
several States for the endowment of agricultural colleges. By an act, ap- 
proved March 6, 1865, the General Assembly of Indiana accepted and 
claimed the benefits of the provisions of the acts of Congress and obligated 
itself to establish such an institution as was therein contemplated. 

During this time the friends of the University were making a strong 
effort to have the Agricultural College located at Bloomington in connection 
with the University, and land and apparatus to the value of $400,000 were 
pledged to the State by the citizens of Monroe County. During the summer 
of 1864, President ISTutt delivered an urgent address in support of this 
plan in fifteen counties of central and southern Indiana.^ By an act of 
the General Assembly, liowever, ap]iroved May 6, 1869, the State accepted 
donations made by Mr. John Purdue and other citizens of Tippecanoe 
County, and the college contemplated and thus provided for was located 
in Tippecanoe County under the name and style of "Purdue University," 
where it has remained as the State school of agriculture and mechanic arts. 
Thus was definitely defeated any hope of maintaining a distinct Agricultural 
Department in connection with the State University. 

iFor the text of this address, see the University catalogue for 1866. 

188 



Departments Now Discontinued 



NORMAL DEPARTMENT AND MODEL SCHOOLS 



In accordance witli the provisions of the Board of Trustees already Normal Depart- 



referred to, the announcement was made in the catalogue for 1852 of the 
proposed establishment of a "Normal Department in connection with the 
University, with a male and female Model School as schools of practice." 
From the catalogue for 1S57 the following description of the work is 
extracted : 

This Department is designed to prepare yonna: men for the profession of teaching. 
Through it, the University designs to afford its aid in carrying forward the great 
scheme of public education, thus making itself an ally of the general school system of 
the State. 

Lectures are given embracing the following subjects: Education, its nature and 
design; physical education; intellectual education; moral education; sesthetical edu- 
cation; the history of education; an examination of the powers of the mind, especially 
with reference to receiving and communicating knowledge; schoolhouse architecture, 
including school furniture, grounds, etc.; organization and classification of schools; 
graded schools; the proper incentives for the school; rewards and punishments; 
modes of teaching different subjects; the office of teacher, his duties to himself, his 
school, and the public; duty of the State in reference to educating its citizens; the 
educational policy of Indiana. 

It is intended, in this course of lectures, to present, as nearly as may be, the whole 
duty of the teacher, and to point out such modes of school discipline and management 
as shall assist the young teacher in preparing for his great work. The members of 
this Department are also required to write on various topics connected with education, 
and to discuss, in form of debate, such subjects as may be assigned b.y the Professor. 

As auxiliary to the training of the Normal Class, the Board of Trustees have 
fitted up a room in one of the college buildings, and established a model school, under 
a teacher who has been trained in a Normal School, in order to present to the eye of 
the learner a common school, as nearly perfect as possible, in its order, arrangement, 
and modes of teaching; and also as a school of practice, in which to exercise and test 
the young teacher's ability and tact. 

The course of lectures on the theory and practice of teaching commences on the 
first day of May, and continues during the Summer term of the University. The stu- 
dent designing to qualify himself for teaching is, however, permitted to pursue any 
of the studies of the literary or scientific course, and may with iirofit enter the Uni- 
versity at the opening of any terra, as may suit his convenience. 

189 



ment estab- 
lished, 1853. 



Indiana University 

In addition to the course of lectures on didactics, the student must pass an ex- 
amination on the following subjects, in order to entitle him to a diploma from the 
University, as a qualified professional teacher, viz.: reading, writing, linear drawing, 
mental and written arithmetic, boolvlceeping. geography, with outline maps and the 
use of the globes, English gi-ammar and composition, algel)ra, geometry, mensuration, 
surveying, natural philosophy, chemisiry. human physiology, history (United States 
and general), history of English literature. Constitution of the United States and of 
Indiana, and vocal music. 



Suspended in 
1856. 



Its revival 
in 1865. 



"The resolution of the Board to establish a separate Female Department 
of the ISTormal School was rescinded in August, 1853. ISTot long after, 
a resolution was passed to make the Monroe County Female Seminary, 
then under the care of Mrs. E. J. McFerson, its accomplished Principal, 
the Female ISTormal Seminary of the University. This resolution was 
never carried into effect. After the resig-nation of Professor Read in 1856 
the Normal Department was discontinued, and in the following year the 
model school. The model school was hard to manage. The pay of the 
teachers was insufficient ; hence it was impossible to retain competent in- 
structors. It had a change of teachers nearly every year of its existence."^ 

If we may judge from its history, this Department seems not to have had 
a very successful career. In 1865 an attempt was made to revive it, and in 
the catalogue for that year we find the following announcement : 

The Normal Department of Indiana University has been recently reorganized, 
under the charge of Mr, D. E. Hunter, Superintendent of the Graded Schools of 
Bloomington, aided by members of the Faculty. Mr. Hunter, from long experience 
in conducting common and graded schools, is eminently qualified for this Depart- 
ment. It is intended to form a Normal class at the beginning of each term of the 
University, to which, for a small fee, the students, and other persons of both sexes. 
who desire to prepare themselves thoroughly for the practice of the noble and useful 
profession of teaching, will be admitted. 

It is the design of this Department to furnish teachers, who shall achieve the 
highest degree of success in their profession, and that the University may thus con- 
tribute its aid in carrying forward the great school system of the State. 

There will also be held in connection with this Department, a Normal Institute, 
beginning on the first Monday of August and continuing three weeks. 



»Wylie, Indiana University (1890), pp. 60-61. 

190 



Departments Now Discontinued 

ISTo students were enrolled, however, and the Xormal Department does 
not again come to life imtil 1869. It is worth noting that at this time 
the instruction in the theory and practice of teaching was put into the hands 
of the former Superintendent of Public Instruction for the State, Prof. 
G. W. Hoss, A.M. Several students were enrolled in this and the following 
year, after which the Department seems completely to have passed out of Final discontin- 
existence, except in so far as its place was taken in later years by the p^gs^g^nt^^Tpart-"^ 
present Department of Education. The establishing of the State Kormal ment of Educa- 
School at Terre Haute, in 1865, was doubtless a factor in putting an end to *'^"- 
the attempt to maintain a Normal Department in connection with the State 
University. 

ENGINEERING 

The third of the provisions named above was for instruction in Engi- Early work in 
T • • 1 • 1 • , • X- ^ o r o ^ 1 o - o • Engineering 

neering. Instruction m this subject was given trom Ibo-J to Ibob m con- /jg^^.ggj^ 

nection with the Departments of Mathematics and Chemistry. Civil engi- 
neering had been oifered as a special study, however, from the year 1841. 
Mechanical instruction of this sort then shared for a time the same fate 
as did the work in agriculture. In this earlier period of its existence, the 
"School of Theoretical and Practical Engineering" proposed, "besides the 
collegiate course in mathematics and natural philosophy, to afford instruction 
in the theory of roads, railroads, canals, and bridges, the laws of heat and 
steam, theory and construction of the steam engine, and topographical sur- 
veying." 

The work in engineering was revived in 1870 in connection with instruc- Department of 
tion in military science. In this year it was announced that "a class in 
Civil Engineering, recently formed, is acquiring information likely to be Engineerin 
of important service, as well as in great demand, while our prosperous State (i^70-74). 
continues her work of internal improvement." From 1870 to 1874 we 
have a distinct "Department of Military Science and Civil Engineering." 
The engineering feature of this Department included instruction "in prac- 
tical surveying, in mechanical drawing, in the theory and the construction 
of bridges, railroads, turnpikes, etc., and in architectural mechanics." 

"It so happened," says Professor Wylie, "that many of the students 
of the military class, who lived at a considerable distance from the College, 

191 



Military Science 
and Civil 



Continuance of 
engineering in 
present Depart- 
ments. 



Indiana University 

found it very inconvenient to attend tlie drill, and obtained permission 
to withdraw. While the military ardor was thus weakened, the zeal of 
the students took a new direction ; the class of civil engineering was- 
enlarged, and soon the military feature of Colonel Thompson's professorship 
became less and less prominent, while engineering, mechanical drawing, the 
construction of bridges, practical surveying, etc., became more and more 
popular."^ 

Accordingly, the military features of this Department entirely disap- 
peared, and from 1874 to 1876 instruction was given only in civil engi- 
neering, in which scientific students were required to attend daily recita- 
tions. From this time on, both the theoretical and the practical work of 
this Department has been undertaken by the Department of Mathematics, 
in conjunction later with the Department of Mechanics and Astronomy,, 
and the Department of Physics. As was the case with the work in agricul- 
ture, the founding of Purdue University as a State school, in 1869, was. 
doubtless an important contributory factor in the decline of engineering as- 
a separate department. 



MILITARY DEPARTMENT 



Military exer- 
cises, 1841-42. 



Instruction in military science was given at three different periods'. 
in the history of the University, namely, in 1841 and 1842, again ini 
1861, and again from 1869 to 1874. In the first and third of these periods, 
military instruction was auxiliary to the work in civil engineering. During- 
the earliest period we find, under the heading of "Military Exercises," the 
following announcement : 

At such seasons as the weather permits, a portion of the students are instructecfi 
by the Professor of Civil Engineering [Lieutenant (later General) Jacob Ammenl 
(himself a graduate, and formerly an Assistant Professor at AVest Point) in Military 
Exercises. The hour of drill is after recitation hours [every afternoon in the week 
except Saturday and Sunday] and attendance, on the part of the students, is volun- 
tary. Arms have been furnished by the Government, 

After the resignation of Lieutenant Ammen in 1842, the military exer- 
cises were soon discontinued. But in the first vear of President ilutt'a 



iWylie, Indiana University (1890), pp. 78-79. 

192 



Departments Now Discontinued 

administration (1861), there was organized among the students of the Uni- 
versity a company known as the "University Cadets." The following account 
is given of the purpose and scope of this organization : "As appropriate 
physical exercise is essential to health, and some knowledge of military tactics 
is not only desirable, but necessary for the complete education of young men, 
the students of the University have the opportunity of regular Military 
Drill, under competent instructors, in a company composed of students, 
called the University Cadets." This organization does not seem to have 
lasted beyond this one year. 

In 1869 a distinct Military Department was organized, and arrangements Military Depart- 
were made for instruction in "Military Science, also for drill in the school ™^"^' 1*^69-/4. 
of the soldier — company and battalion." In this Department, "tactics, out- 
post duty, military engineering, and the science of war" were also to be 
taught. Arms and accoutrements for infantry and artillery drill were 
obtained, and Major-General Eli Long was detailed by the President of the 
United States as Military Professor in the University. After a few months 
General Long, much to the regret of the Faculty, was relieved froiu duty 
by the War Department. The Trustees, however, secured for the next year 
the services of Colonel James Thompson, formerly an instructor at West 
Point, who, as professor of military science and civil engineering, carried 
on this Department until 1871-, after which year the military features 
were discontinued. 



(14) 193 



Ill 



Bibliograpi)? 



a95) 



'For Books are not absolutely Dead things; but doe contain 
A Potencie of Life in theji to be as Active as that Soule 
WAS whose Progeny they are ; nay, they do preserve as in 
A vioLL the Purest Efficacie and Extraction of that Living 
Intellect that bred them. I know they are as Lively, and as 
vigorously Productive, as those fabulous Dragons Teeth; 
and being Sown up and down, may chance to spring up 
Armed Men. And yet on the other hand, unless Warinesse 

BE US'D, as good almost KILL A MaN AS KILL A GOOD BoOK; 

WHO kills a Man kills a reasonable Creature, Gods Image; 

BUT HEE WHO DESTROYES A GOOD BoOK, KILLS REASON IT SELFE, 

KILLS THE Image of God as it were in the eye. Many a 
Man lives a burden to the Earth; but a good Booke is 

THE PRETIOUS LiFE-BLOOD OF A MASTER SPIRIT, IMBALM'D AND 
TREASUR'D UP ON PURPOSE TO A LIFE BEYOND LIFE." — MiLTON. 



PUBLICATIONS OF PRESENT FACULTY 



***The following list of the publications of the present members of the Faculty of 
the University is fairly complete, except for newspaper articles, which have been ex- 
cluded. So far as possible, the entries have been arranged in chronological order of 
publication. 

All degrees received by members of the Faculty from this University are given with 
the year in which conferred. The omission of the date in connection with a degree 
indicates that it was conferi'ed by some other institution. 



Robert Judson Aley, A.B. (1S88), A.M. 
(1890), Ph.D. Professor of Mathemat- 
ics. 

1. A practical education. In Univer- 
sity Press, I, p. 5. (Dec, 1888.) 

2. Science in the Schools. In Univer- 
sity Press, II, pp. 18-19. (March, 1889.) 

3. Mathematics in the preparatory 
schools. In Proc. Indiana Col. Asso., 1889, 
pp. 46-50. (Dec, 1889.) 

4. Scales of notation. In University 
Press, III, pp. 2-3. (Dec, 1890.) 

5. Prepai'ation for teaching. In Uni- 
versity Press, III, p. 18. (March, 1891.) 

6. Modern synthetic geometry versus 
Euclid. In Science, XX, pp. 297-298. (Dec, 
1892.) 

7. Some old arithmetics. In The Stu- 
dent, A Journal of Education, III. (Feb., 
March, April, 1893.) 

8. Bibliography of the history of ge- 
ometry, also a list of mathematical periodi- 
cals, /u Am. Math. Mo., I, pp. 42-47. (Feb., 
1894.) 

9. Daniel Kirkwood : biography and 
bibliography, /n Am. Math. Mo., I, pp. 141- 
149. (May, 1894.) 



10. Indiana University and her presi- 
dent. In Indiana Sch. Jour., XXXIX, pp. 
320-323. (June, 1894.) 

11. Review of Robert Harris's 'Plane 
geometrical drawing.' In Inland Educator, 

I, p. 2GG. (Nov., 1895.) 

12. Review of J. A. McLellan and John 
Dewey's 'The psychology of number." In 
Inland Educator, I, pp. 320-321. (Dec, 
1895.) 

13. High school mathematical teaching 
and text-books. In Inland Educator, I, pp. 
334-338. (Jan., 1S9G.) 

14. Review of George C. Edward's 'Ele- 
ments of geometry.' In Inland Educator, 

II, p. 54. (Feb., 1896.) 

15. Review of W. W. Beman and D. 
E. Smith's 'Plane and solid geometry.* I71 
Inland Educator, II, pp. 55-56. (Feb., 
1896.) 

16. Review of W. W. R. Ball's 'A 
primer of the history of mathematics.' In 
Inland Educator, II, p. 117. (March, 1896.) 

17. Daniel Kirkwood. In Indiana Sch. 
Jour., XLI, pp. 170-177. (March, 1896.) 

18. Review of Levi L. Conant's 'The 
number concept.' In Inland Educator, II, 
pp. 174-175. (April, 1896.) 



19T 



Indiana University 



\_Aley 



19. Ueview of A. E. Ilornbrook's 'Con- 
crete geometry.' In Educ. Rev., XI, pp. 505- 
506. (May, 1S9G.) 

20. Review of II. A. Wood's 'Short cuts 
in arithmetic' In Inhmd Educator, II, p. 
234. (June, 1896.) 

21. Sketch of Judge D. D. Banta. In 
Inland Educator, II, pp. 267-268. (June, 
1896. ) 

22. Review of Frank H. Hall's 'The 
Werner arithmetic for third and fourth 
grades.' In Inland Educator, II, p. 349. 
(July, 1896.) 

23. Review of E. S. Crawley's 'Ele- 
ments of plane and spherical trigonometry.' 
In Inland Educator, III, p. 227. (Nov., 
1896.) 

24. Review of Arthur Lefevre's 'Num- 
ber and its algebra.' In Inland Educator, 
III, p. 227. (Nov., 1896.) 

25. Review of Florian Cojori's 'A his- 
tory of elementary mathematics.' In Inland 
Educator, IV, p. 54. (Feb., 1897.) 

26. A device for extracting the square 
root of certain surd quantities. In Am. 
Math. Mo., IV, pp. 204-208. (Sept., 1897.) 

27. Contributions to the geometry of the 
triangle. Philadelphia, 1897. Pp. 32, 1 
plate. 

28. Note on Charles Smith's definition 
of multiplication. In Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1897, p. 103. 

29. Collinear sets of three points con- 
nected with the triangle. In Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1897, pp. 103-111. 

30. Counting. In Indiana Sch. .lour., 
XLII, pp. 783-785. (Dec, 1897.) 

31. Note on Angel's method of inscrib- 
ing regular polygons. In Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1898, pp. 92-93. 

32. Concurrent sets of three lines con- 
nected with the triangle. In Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1898, pp. 93-100. 

33. A new triangle and some of its 



properties. In I'roc Indiana Acad. Sci. for 
1898, pp. 89-91. 

34. Review of Samuel E. Ilarwood's 
'Notes on method in arithmetic' In Inland 
Educator, V, p. .301. (Jan. 1898.) 

35. The elective system. //; Jour, of 
Education, XLVII, pp. 4-5. (Jan. 6, 1898.) 

36. The high school curriculum. In 
Inland Educator, VI, pp. 14-18. (Feb., 
1898. ) 

37. Review of 'SI. A. Bailey's 'Compre- 
hensive arithmetic' In Inland Educator, 
VI, p. 32. (Feb., 1898.) 

38. History of arithmetic In Inland 
Educator, VI, pp. 79-80. (March, 1898.) 

39. Reasons for failure in arithmetic. 
In Inland Educator, VI, p. 127. (April, 
1898.) 

40. Algebra and geometry as a help to 
arithmetic. //( Inland Educator, VI, pp. 
168-169. (May, 1898.) 

41. Review of Fletcher Durell's 'The 
new school algebra.' In Inland Educator, 
VI, pp. 169-170. (May, 1898.) 

42. Review of W. W. Speer's arithme- 
tics. In Inland Educator, VI, p. 210. 
(June, 1898.) 

4.3. No royal road to mathematics. In 
Inland Educator, VI, p. 254. (July, 1898.) 

44. Liliwati and the hour-glass. In In- 
land Educator, VI, pp. 254, 255. (July, 
1898.) 

45. Christopher Dock. In Inland Edu- 
cator, VII, pp. 4-8, 58-61. (August, Sept., 
1898. ) 

46. The history of arithmetic. In In- 
land Educator, VII, pp. 20-21, 72-73, 124- 
125. 169, 226-227, 269-270; VIII, pp. 28- 
29, 84, 132-133, 183, 226-227, 279; IX, pp. 
26, 78-79, 126, 170-171, 216, 269; X, pp. 
23, 82, 131, 183, 219, 267. In Educator- 
Journal. I, pp. 34-35. (August, 1898, to 
Sept., 1900.) 

47. Review of A. Jones's 'The science- 



19S 



Jley^ 



Bibliography: Present Faculty 



of arithmetic' In Inland Educator, VII, 
p. 73. (Sept., 1S9S.) 

48. Some suggestions on arithmetic. In 
Inhuid Educator, VII, pp. 71-72. (Sept., 
1898. ) 

40. Compound numbers. /;( Inkmd Ed- 
ucator, VII, p. 12G. (Oct., 1898.) 

50. Review of J. B. Showalter's 'Solu- 
tion book.' In Inland Educator, VII, p. 170. 
(Nov., 1898.) 

51. Fourth institute arithmetic. In In- 
land Educator, VII, pp. 169-170. (Nov., 
1898. ) 

52. Review of G. E. Fi.sher and I. J. 
Schwatt's 'Text-book of algebra witli exer- 
cises.' In Inland Educator, VII, p. 227. 
(Dec, 1898.) 

53. Percentage. In Inland Educator, 
VII, p. '227. (Dec, 1898.) 

54. Review of E. C. Hewett's 'The 
Rand-McNally arithmetics.' In Inland Ed- 
ucator, VII, pp. 227-228. (Dec, 1898.) 

55. A proposed notation for the geom- 
etry of the triangle. In Proc Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1899, pp. 80-87. 

50. Some circles connected with the tri- 
angle. //( I'roc Indiana Acad. Sci. for 
1899, pp. 88-89. 

57. The point P and some of its proper- 
ties. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1899, 
pp. 90-93. 

58. Squaring the circle. /;; Inland Ed- 
ucator, VII, pp. 271-272. (Jan., 1899.) 

59. Review of .J. H. "Walsh's arithme- 
tics. In Inland Educator, VII, pp. 270-271. 
(Jan., 1899.) 

60. Review of Augustus De Morgan's 
'Study and difficulties of mathematics.' In 
Inland Educator, VIII, p. 29. (Feb., 1899.) 

61. Review of Henry Goldman's 'The 
arithmachinist.' In Inland Educator, VIII, 
p. 85. (March, 1899.) 

62. The difference between arithmetic 
and algebra. In Inland Educator, VIII, 
pp. 84-85. (March, 1899.) 

63. Review of Hermann Schubert's 'Es- 



says and recreations.' In Inland Educator, 

VIII, p. 133. (April, 1899.) 

64. The equation in arithmetic In In- 
land Educator, VIII, p. 183. (May, 1889.) 

65. Some large numbers. In Inland 
Educator, VIII, p. 184. (May, 1899.) 

66. The order of signs in arithmetic 
In Inland Educator, VIII, p. 228. (June, 
1899.) 

67. Apparatus in rural schools. //( In- 
diana Sell. Jour., XLIV, pp. 331-334. (June, 
1899.) 

68. Review of J. "W. Cook and N. Crop- 
sey's 'The Indiana arithmetics.' In Inland 
Educator, IX. pp. 27, 79-80, 127, 171-172. 
(August to Nov., 1899.) 

69. Review of John Graham's 'The 
farmer's and mechanic's assistant and com- 
panion ; or a new system of decimal arith- 
metic' /;/ Inland Educator, IX, p. 79. 
(Sept., 1899.) 

70. Preparation for teaching arithme- 
tic //* Inland Educator, IX, pp. 126-127. 
(Oct., 1899.) 

71. Short cuts. In Inland Educator, 

IX, 217, pp. 269-270. ; X, 23-24, 8'2-83, 131- 
132, 183-184, 2'22, 270. (Dec, 1899, to 
July, 1900.) 

72. Some properties of the symmedean 
point. In I'roc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1900, 
pp. 85-88. 

73. Note on McGinnis's universal solu- 
tion. In Proc Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1900, 
pp. 88-90. 

74. The beginning of the century. In 
Inland Educator, X, p. 24. (Feb., 1900.) 

75. How to make mathematics interest- 
ing. //( Inland Educator, X, pp. 84-85. 
(March, 1900.) 

76. Review of D. E. Smith's 'The 
teaching of elementary mathematics.' In 
Inland Educator, X, p. 222. (June, 1900.) 

77. Review of Karl Fink's 'A brief his- 
tory of mathematics.' In Inland Educator, 

X, p. 271. (July, 1900.) 

78. Review of J. T. Fairchild's 'Solu- 



199 



Indiana University 



\_Aley 



tion book.' In Educator- Journal, I, p. 36. 
(August, 1900.) 

79. Review of W. W. Rupert's 'Famous 
geometrical theorems and problems.' In Ed- 
ucator- Journal, I, p. 37. (August, 1900.) 

SO. Review of John S. Mackay's 'Arith- 
metic' In Educator- Journal, I, pp. 79-80. 
(Sept., 1900.) 

81. Review of John F. Downey's 
'Higher algebra.' In Educator-Journal, I, 
pp. 79-80. (Sept., 1900.) 

82. Augustus DeMogan. In Educator- 
Journal, I, p. 78. (Sept., 1900.) 

83. Explanation in arithmetic work. 
In Educator-Journal, I, pp. 78-79. (Sept., 
1900.) 

84. John J. Sylvester. In Educator- 
Journal, I, pp. 125-126. (Oct., 1900.) 

85. Definitions in mathematics. In Ed- 
ucator-Journal, I, pp. 1-26-127. (Oct., 1900.) 

86. Joseph L. Lagrange. In Educator- 
Journal, I, p. 176. (Nov., 1900.) 

87. Problem solving. /;). Educator- 
Journal, I, pp. 177-178. (Nov., 1900.) 

88. Graphical representation. In Edu- 
cator-Journal, I, pp. 219-220. (Dec, 1900.) 

89. Sir Isaac Newton. In Educator- 
Journal, I, pp. 219-220. (Jan., 1901.) 

90. Karl Frederick Gauss. In Educa- 
tor-Journal, I, pp. 274-276. (Feb., 1901.) 

91. Rene DesCartes. In Educator- 
Journal, I, pp. 380-381. (March, 1901.) 

92. Incommensurable number. In Ed- 
ucator-Journal, I, p. 424. (April, 1901.) 

93. Benjamin Pierce. In Educator- 
Journal, I, pp. 479-480. 

94. Arthur Caley. In Euucator-Jour- 
nal, I, pp. 525-526. (June, 1901.) 

95. William Chauvenet. In Educator- 
Journal, II, p. 20. (Sept., 1901.) 

96. Counting. In Educator-Journal, II, 
pp. 21-22. (Sept., 1901.) 

97. George Bruce Halsted. In Educa- 
tor-Journal, II, p. 80. (Oct., 1901.) 



98. Greater accuracy. In Educator- 
Journal, II, p. 80. (Oct., 1901.) 

99. I'roof of the elementary rules by 
casting out the 9's. In Educator-Journal, 
II, pp. 126-127. (Nov., 1901.) 

J 00. Graphs, an appendix to Wells's 'Es- 
sentials of algebra.' Boston, 1901. Pp. 359- 
367. 

101. Graphs, a monograph. Boston, 
1902. Pp. iv, 21. 

102. Arithmetic. In Educator-Journal, 
II, p. 175. (Dec, 1901.) 

103. More thought. In Educator-Jour- 
nal, II, pp. 175-176. (Dec, 1901.) 

104. Review of Arthur F. Griffith's 'The 
easy and speedy reckoner.' In Educaror- 
Journal, II, p. 176. (Dec, 1901.) 

105. Review of T. Sundara Row's 'Geo- 
metric exercises in paper folding.' In Edu- 
cator-Journal, II, p. 178. (Dec, 1901.) 

106. Some obsolete arithmetical subjects. 
In Educator-Journal, II, p. 234. (Jan., 
1902.) 

107. Review of E. S. Loomis's 'How to 
attack an exercise in geometry.' In Edu- 
cator-Journal, II, p. 280. (Feb., 1902.) 

108. Review of Frank H. Hall's 'How to 
teach arithmetic' In Educator-Journal, II, 
pp. 280-281. (Feb., 1902.) 

109. Better results in arithmetic. In 
Educator-Journal, II, pp. 331-332. (March, 
1902.) 

110. Some curiosities of the digits. In 
Educator- Journal, II, p. 332. (March, 
1902.) 

111. Review of Egbert More's 'The tri- 
section of an angle.' In Educatoi*- Journal, 
II, p. 402. (April, 1902.) 

112. Abridged multiplication. In Edu- 
cator-Journal, II, p. 402. (April. 1902.) 

113. Preparation for teaching high school 
mathematics. In Educator-Journal, II, pp. 
448-4.50. (May, 1902.) 

114. A peculiar number. In Educator-. 
Journal, II, p. 451. (May, 1902.) 



200 



Beede ] 



Bibliography: Present Faculty 



IIG. Greatest common divisor. In Edu- 
cator-Journal, II, p. 497-498. (June, 1902.) 

117. How to make a table of .squares. In 
Educator-Journal, III, p. 17. (Sept., 1902.) 

118. Division and partition. In Educa- 
tor-Journal, III, p. 72. (Oct., 1902.) 

119. Review of W. P. Morgan's 'Teach- 
er's manual for the Indiana advanced arith- 
metic' In Educator- Journal, III, p. 72. 
(Oct., 1902.) 

120. Review of David Hilbert's 'The 
foundations of geometry.' In Educator- 
Journal, III, p. 73. (Oct., 1902.) 

121. The metric system. In Educator- 
Journal, III, p. 113. (Nov., 1902.) 

122. Circulating decimals. In Educator- 
Journal, III pp. 162, 214-215. (Dec, 1902, 
and Jan., 1903.) 

123. Ratio and proportion. In Educa- 
tor-Journal, III, p. 214. (Jan., 1903.) 

124. Involution. In Educator-Journal, 
III, pp. 392-.393. (May, 1903.) 

125. Review of W. E. Chancellor's 
'Graded arithmetics.' In Educator-Journal, 
III, p. 431. (June, 1903.) 

12G. Review of O. L. Kelso's 'Arithme- 
tic for high schools.' In Educator-Journal, 

III, p. 431. (June, 1903.) 

127. Factoring. In Educator-.Journal, 

IV, p. 76. (Oct., 1903.) 

128. Counting. In Educator-.Journal, 
IV, pp. 76-77. (Oct., 1903.) 

129. "Ways of paying a bill in a distant 
city. In Educator-Journal, IV, pp. 127-128. 

(Nov., 1903.) 

130. The new elementary arithmetic Re- 
vision. (Joint author with O. L. Kelso.) 
New York, 1903. Pp. x, 276. 

131. The new advanced arithmetic Re- 
vision. (Joint author with O. L. Kelso.) 
New York, 1903. Pp. xiii, 327-334. 

132. Editorials. In Educator-Journal, 3 
to 4 pages in each issue, beginning with 
Vol. IV, Sept., 1903. 

133. The essentials of algebra. (Joint 



author with D. A. Rothrock. ) New York, 
1904. 



Frakk Marion Andrews, A.B. (1894), 
A.M. (1895), B.A.M., Ph.D. Assi-stant 
Profe.s.sor of Botany. 

1. Development of the embryo sac of 
Jeffersonia diphylla. In Bot. Gaz. XX. 

2. Karyokinesis in Magnolia and Liri- 
odendron with special reference to the be- 
liavior of the chromosomes. In Beihefte z. 
Botan. Centralblatt, XI, pp. 734-742. 

3. Ueber die Wirkung der Centrifugal- 
kraft auf Pflanzen. In .Jahrb. f. wissens. 
Botanik, XXXVIII, pp. 1-40. 



Joshua William Beede, Ph.D. Instructor 
in Geology. 

1. The McPherson Equus beds. (Joint 
author with E. Haworth.) In Univ. Geol. 
Surv. Kansas, II, pp. 287-296; 1 plate, 1 
map. (1897.) 

2. The stratigraphy of Shawnee coun- 
ty (Kansas). //( Trans. Kan.sas Acad. Sci. 
XV, pp. 27-34. (1898.) 

3. McPherson Equus beds. Revised. 
In Trans. Kansas Acad. Sci. XV, pp. 104- 
110. 1 plate, 1 map. (1898.) 

4. Notes on Kansas physiography. In 
Trans. Kansas Acad. Sci., XV, pp. 114-120 ; 
4 plates. (1898.) 

5. New corals from the Kansas car- 
boniferous. In Kansas Univ. Quart., VII, 
pp. 180-181: 1 plate (1898.) 

6. Variation of external appearance 
and internal characters of Spirifer camera- 
tus Morton. In Kansas Univ. Quart., VII, 
pp. 103-105; 2 plates. (April, 1898.) 

7. Notes on Campophjdlum torquium 
Owen, and a new variety of Monopteria 
gibbosa Meek and Worthen. In Kansas 



201 



Indiana University 



[ Beede 



Univ. Quart., VII, pp. IST-IDU. 1 plate 
(July, 1S9S.) 

8. I'reliaiiuary notice on the correla- 
tion of the Meek and Marcou section at Ne- 
braska City, Nebraska, with the Kansas coal 
measures. In Kansas Univ. Quart., VII, 
pp. 231-233. (Oct., 180S.) 

9. Description of some new forms of 
Pseuclomonotis from the upper coal meas- 
ures of Kansas. In Kansas Univ. Quart., 
VIII, pp. 79-84. 2 plates. (April, 1899.) 

10. New fossils from the Kansas coal 
measures. In Kansas Univ. Quart., VIII, 
pp. 123-130. 2 plates. (July, 1899.) 

11. New and little known Pelecypods 
from the coal measures. (Joint author with 
Austin F. Rogers.) In Kansas Univ. Quart., 
VIII, pp. 131-134; 1 plate. (July, 1899.) 

12. On the correlation of the coal meas- 
ures of Kansas and Nebraska. In Trans. 
Kansas Acad. ScL, XVI, pp. 70-84. (1899.) 

13. The coal in western Atchison coun- 
ty. In A. C. H. S. Bull.. VI, pp. 9-10. 
(1899.) 

14. Two new crinoids from the Kansas 
carboniferous. In Kansas Univ. Quart., X, 
pp. 21-24; 1 plate. (Jan., 1900.) 

15. Carboniferous invertebrates, Fora- 
minifera to Pelecypods. In Univ. Geol. 
Surv. Kansas, VI, pp. 1-187 ; 22 plates. 
(1900.) 

16. Reconnaissance in the Blue valley 
Permian. In Kansas Univ. Quart., IX, pp. 
191-202; 1 map. (1900.) 

17. The age of the Kansas-Oklahoma 
red-beds. In Amer. Geol., XXVIII, pp. 40- 
47. (1901.) 

18. Permian Fauna of central United 
States, Part I. In Trans. Kansas Acad. 
Sci., XVII, pp. 185-190; 2 plates. (1901.) 

19. New fossils from the upper carbon- 
iferous of Kansas. In Kansas Univ. Sci. 
Bull., XI, pp. 147-153; 1 plate. (Sept., 
1902.) 

20. Invertebrate paleontology of the red- 



beds. In Adv. Bull. Geol. Surv. Oklahoma 
Territory, I, pp. 1-11; 1 plate. (April, 
1902. ) 

21. Fauna of the Shawnee formation, 
Wabaunsee formation and the Cottonwood 
limestone, hi Kansas Univ. Sci. Bull., I, 
pp. 163-181. (Sept., 1902.) 

22. Cottonwood Falls folio, geological 
atlas of the United States. (Joint author 
with Charles S. Prosser.) In U. S. Geol. 
Surv. (In press.) 

23. Kansas coal-measures faunal stud- 
ies ; lower coal measures. (Joint author 
with Austin F. Rogers.) In Kansas Univ. 
Sci. Bull. (In press.) 



JoHiST Andrew Bergstrom, Ph.D., Professor 
of Pedagogy. 

1. Review of Mettier's 'Aural vertigo 
(INIeniere's disease).' (Jour. Nerv. Ment. 
Dis. 1891, XVI, p. 19.) In Am. Jour. 
Psych., V, p. 102. (Oct., 1892.) 

2. Experiments upon physiological 
memory by means of the interference of asso- 
ciations. In Am. Jour. Psych., V, pp. 356- 
369. (April, 1893.) 

3. Review of Schumann's 'Ueber die 
Unterschiedsempfindlichkeit fiir kleine Zeit- 
grossen.' (Zeitschrift f. Psych, u. Phys. der 
Sinnesorgane, II, p. 294.) In Am. Jour. 
Psych., V, p. 102. (1893.) 

4. Review of Epstein's 'Die logischen 
Principien der Zeitmessung.' In Am. Jour. 
Psych., V, p. 102. (1893.) 

5. Review of J. J. Van Biervliet's 'La 
memoire.' In Am. Jour. Psych., VI, p. 308. 
(1894.) 

6. An experimental study of some of 
the conditions of mental activity. In Am. 
Jour. Psych., VI, pp. 247-274. (Jan., 1894.) 

7. The relation of the interference to 
the practice effect of an association. In 
Am. Jour. Psych., VI, pp. 433-442. (June, 
1894.) 



202 



Broiun] 



Bibliography: Present Faculty 



8. Review of Fridtjuv Berg's 'Peda- 
gogiska biblioteket i Stockholm,' and of N. 
G. W. Lagerstedt's "Katalog ofver pedagog- 
Lska biblioteket i Stockholm.' In Fed. Sem. 
Ill, p. 163. (1894.) 

9. Review of N. G. W. Lagerstedt's 
'Atgarder mot ufveran-strJinguiug vid de 
h()gre skolorna i Tysklaud.' {In Verdandi, 
1894.) In Fed. Sem., Ill, p. 1G3. (1894.) 

10. Review of G. E. Miiller and F. 
Schumann's 'Experimentelle Beitriige zur 
Untersuchung des Gedachtni.sses,' (Zeitschr. 
f. Fsych. n. Phys. d. Sinne.sorgane, VI, p. 
299.) In Am. Jour. Fsych., IV, p. 299. 

(Jan., 1894.) 

11. Review of Emil Krsepelin's 'Ueber 
die Beeinflus.sung einfacher psychischer Vor- 
giinge durch einige Arzneimittel.' In Am. 
Jour. Psych., VI, p. 301. (1894.) 

12. Review of Dr. Emanuel Rosen- 
baum's 'Warum miisseu wir schlafen? Eine 
neue Theorie des Scblafes.' In Am. Jour. 
Psych., VI, p. 307. (1894.) 

13. School hygiene. Translation of Dr. 
Ludwig Kotelmann's 'Ueber Schulgesund- 
heitspflege. (Joint author with Edward 
Conradi.) Syracuse, N. Y. 1899. Pp. 391. 

14. Review of Nicholas Alechsieif's 
'Reactiouszeiteu bei Durchgaugsbeobachtun- 
gen.' (Phil. Stud., XVI, p. 60.) In Psych. 
Rev., VII, p. 520. (1900.) 

15. A type of pendulum chrouoscope 
and attention apparatus. In Psych. Rev., 
XII, pp. 483-489. (Sept., 1900.) 

16. A magnet registration key. In 
Psych. Rev., VII, pp. 612-614. (Nov., 
1900.) 

17. A new type of ergograph, with a 
discussion of ergographic experimentation. 
In Am. Jour. Psych., XIV, pp. 246-276. 
(1903.) 



1. On pheuolphthalein and methylor- 
ange as indicators. In Journal of Franklin 
Institute. (April, 1893.) 

2. The atomic w'eight of palladium. 
(Joint author with Edward II. Keiser.) In 
Am. Chem. Jour., 1894. 

3. The action of magnesium on ali- 
phatic alcohols and a new method of pre- 
paring allylene. //; Journal of Franklin 
Institute, 1895. 

4. The pol.ybasic acids of mesitylene. 
Bryn IMawr Monographs, No. 1. (1901.) 



Alfred Max.sfield Brooks, A.M. Associ- 
ate Professor of the History of Art. 

1. Decoration of school rooms. /// In- 
land Educator, IX, pp. 272-274 ( .Jan., 
1900) ; also in Indiana Sch. Jour., XLV, 
pp. 29-32. (Jan., 1900.) 

2. Architecture : Greek, Roman, By- 
zantine, Romanesque and Gothic. In I'rog- 
ress. No. 3, pp. 155-189. (1901.) 

3. The study of art in universities. 
/;; Education, XXI, pp. 364-371. (Feb., 
1901.) 

4. On the teaching of art in univer- 
sities. In Proc. Western Drawing Teachers' 
Asso. for 1903. 

5. Review of Charles Holroyd's 'Mi- 
chael Angelo Buonarroti.' In Dial, 1904. 

6. Review of William Baj'ue's 'Sir 
David Wilkie.' In Dial, 1904. 

7. Review of Arthur B. Chamberlain's 
'Thomas Gainsborough.' In Dial, 1904. 



Mary Bidwell Breed, Ph.D. Assistant Pro- 
fessor of Chemistry, and Dean of 
Women. 



Oliver W. Brown, A.M. (1896). Assistant 
Professor of Chemistry. 

1. Solubility and boiling point. In 
Jour. Phys. Chem., I, p. 784. (1897.) 

2. Distribution of mercuric chloride 
between toluene and water. In Jour. Phys. 
Chem., II, p. 51. (1898.) 



203 



Indiana University 



[5; 



3. Preparation of potassium persele- 
iiatp. (Joint author with L. M. Dennis.) 
In Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc, XXIII. p. 358. 
(1001.) 

4. Efficiency of the uicliel-platiug tanlc. 
Ill Trans. Amer. Electrochem. Soc, IV, pp. 
83-99. (1903.) 



Elmer Burkitt Bryan, A.B. (1893). Pro- 
fessor of Educational and Social Psy- 
chology. 

1. School hygiene. In Indiana Sch. 
Jour., XLIV, pp. 393-396. (July, 1899.) 

2. School diseases. In Indiana Sch. 
Jour., XLIV, pp. 465-469. (August, 1899.) 

3. The hygiene of instruction. In In- 
diana Sch. Jour., XLIV, pp. 533-536. (Sept., 
1899.) 

4. The care of the senses. In Indiana 
Sch. Jour.. XLIV, pp. 593-594. (Oct., 
1899.) 

5. Child life. In Indiana Sch. Jour., 
XLIV, p. 649. (Nov., 1899.) 

6. Nascent stages and' arrested devel- 
opment. In Pedagogical Seminary, VII, pp. 
357-396. (Oct., 1900.) 

7. The Philippine situation. In Edu- 
cator-Journal, IV, pp. 215-217. (Jan., 
1904.) 



William Lowe Bryan, A.B. (1884), A.M. 
(1880), Ph.D. President of the Uni- 
versity. 

1. Psychology at Indiana University. 
In Am. Jour, of Psych., Ill, pp. 283-284. 
(April, 1890.) 

2. On the development of voluntary 
motor ability. In Am. Jour, of Psych., V, 
pp. 125-204. (Nov., 1892.) 

3. Auditory and visual memory in 
school children. In Proc. Internat. Educ. 
Asso. for 1893, pp. 779-781. 



4. Child .study, systematic and unsys- 
tematic. In I'roc. N. E. A. for 1895, pp. 
412-418. 

5. On the methods and results of child 
study. Article in Johnson's Encyclopa?dia. 

6. Science and education. In Proc. N. 
E. A. for 1895, pp. 161-165. 

7. Scientific and non-scientific methods 
of child study. In Proc. N. E. A. for 1896, 
pp. 856-800. 

8. Studies on the physiology and psy- 
chology of the telegraphic language. (With 
Noble Harter.) In Psych. Rev. IV, pp. 27- 
53. (Jan., 1897.) 

9. Hygiene of motor development. In 
Proc. N. E. A. for 1897, pp. 279-280. 

10. Report of special committee on the 
organization of a committee on school hy- 
giene. In Proc. N. E. A. for 1897, pp. 327- 
328. 

11. Plato the teacher; being selections 
from the Apology, Euthydemus, Protagoras, 
Symposium, Phsedrus, Republic, and Phisedo 
of Plato. Edited with introduction and 
notes. (Joint author with Mrs. Charlotte 
Lowe Bryan.) New York, 1897. Pp. xli, 
454. 

12. The Republic of Plato. With 
studies for teachers. (Joint author with 
Mrs. Charlotte Lowe Bryan.) New York, 
1S9S. Pp. 313. 

13. Studies on the telegraphic lan- 
guage. The acquisition of a hierarchy of 
habits. (.Toint author with Noble Harter.) 
In Psych. Rev. VI. pp. 345-375. (July, 
1899.) 

14. Science in the daily press. (Joint 
author with Ernest H. Lindley.) In Sci- 
ence, N. S., XI, p. 74. (1900.) 

15. An arithmetical prodigy. (Joi'-it 
author with E. H. Lindley.) In Proc. Am. 
Psych. Assoc, for 1900. In Psych. Rev., 
VII, p. 135. (1900.) 

16. The case of Arthur Griffith, arith- 
metical prodigy. (Joint author with E. H. 



204 



Cu 



■] 



Bibliography: Present Faculty 



Lindley. ) /m Compte rendu du Cougres In- 
ternational de Psychologie tenu a Paris, 
1900, p. 178. 

17. Theory and practice. President's 
address, American Psychological Associa- 
tion, St. Louis meeting, December, 1903. In 
Psych. Rev., XI, pp. 71-82. (March, 1904.) 



Lewis Nathaniel Chase, Ph.D. Av'-'sistant 
Professor of English. 

1. The English heroic play : a critical 
description of the rhymed tragedy of the 
Restoration. New York, 1903. Pp. vii, 250. 



AViLBUR Adelman Cogshall, A.m. (1903). 
Assistant Professor of Astronomy. 

1. November meteors. In Pop. As- 
tron., VII, pp. 71-74. (Jan., 1899.) 

2. Double-star measures. In Astro. 
Jour., XX, pp. 173-178. 

3. Double-star measures. In Astro. 
Jour., XXI. 

4. Double-star measures. In Astro. 
Jour., XXII, pp. 1-9. 

5. Double-star measures. (Joint au- 
thor with John A. Miller. In Astro. Jour., 
XXIII, pp. 167-169. (Sept., 1903.) 

6. Double-star measures. (Joint au- 
thor with .John A. Miller.) In Astro. Jour., 
XXIY, pp. 15-16. (1904.) 

7. Double-stars discovered at Lowell 
Observatory. In Astro. Jour. (In press.) 

8. Double-star measures. (Joint au- 
thor with J. A. Miller.) In Astronomische 
Nachrichten, CLXI. (In press.) 



Edgar Roscoe Cumings, Ph.D. A.ssistant 
Professor of Geology. 

1. Sections and thickness of the Lower 
Silurian formation,? on West Canada creek 
and in the Mohawk valley. (Joint author 



with C. S. Prosser.) In 15th Ann. Rep. 
State Geol. New York, pp. 619-659; 13 
plates and 3 text-figures. (1897.) 

2. Lower Silurian system of eastern 
Montgomery county, New York. In Bull. 
New York State Museum, No. 34, VII, pp. 
419-468; 4 plates; 4 maps. (1900.) 

3. On the Waldron fauna at Tarr Hole, 
Indiana. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 
1899, pp. 174-176. (1900.) 

4. The stream gradients of the lower 
Mohawk valley. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 
for 1899, pp. 176-178. (1900.) 

5. Notes on the Ordovician rocks of 
southern Indiana. In Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1900, pp. 200-215. (1901.) 

6. Some developmental stages of Ortho- 
thetes minutus n. sp. In Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1900, pp. 216-218. (1901.) 

7. Orthothetes minutus n. sp. from the 
Salem limestone of Harrodsbvirg, Indiana. 
In Am. Geol., XXVII, pp. 147-149 ; 1 plate. 
(March, 1901.) 

8. The use of Bedford as a fcrmational 
name. In Jour, of Geol., IX, pp. 2.32-233. 
(1901.) 

9. A section of the upper Ordovician 
at Vevay, Indiana. In Am. Geol., XXVIII, 
pp. 361-381 ; 2 plates. (Dec, 1901.) 

10. A revision of the bryozoan genera 
Dekayia Dekayella and Heterotrypa of the 
Cincinnati group. In Am. Geol., XXIX, pp. 
197-217: 4 plates. (April, 1902.) 

11. A quantitative study of variation in 
the fo.ssil brachiopod Platystrophia lynx. 

(Joint author with Abram V. Mauck.) In 
Am. Jour. Sci., XIV, pp. 9-16; 2 plates; 
1 textfigure. (July, 1902.) 

12. The morphogenesis of Platystrophia. 
A study of the evolution of a Paleozoic 
brachiopod. In Am. Jour. Sci., XV, pp. 
1-48,121-136: 27 text-figures. (.Jan., Feb., 
1903.) 

13. Review of E. J. Conklin's 'The em- 
bryology of a brachiopod, Terebratulina sep- 



20J 



Indiana University 



{^Cumings 



tentrionalis, Couthouy.' In Am. Nat., Carl H. Eigenmann, A.B. (]8S(J), A.^NI. 



XXXVII, No. 434, pp. 121-122. (Feb., 
1903.) 

14. Review of E. S. Morse's 'Observa- 
tion.s on living Brachiopoda.' In Am. Nat., 
XXXVII, No. 434, pp. 122-123. (Feb., 
1903.) 

15. Review of Naohide Yatsu's 'On the 
development of Lingula anatina.' In Am. 
Nat.. XXXVII. No. 434, pp. 123-124. (Feb., 
1903. ) 

10. Review of Naohide Yatsu's 'Notes 
on the histology of Lingula anatina Brug- 
uiere.' In Am. Nat., XXXVII, No. 434, p. 
124. ( Feb., 1903. ) 

17. Development of some Paleozoic 
Bryozoa. In Am. Jour. Sci., XVII, pp. 
49-78; 83 textfigures. (Jan., 1904.) 



Louis Sherman Davis, A.B. (1891), A.M. 
(1892), Ph.D. Associate Professor of 

Chemistry. 

1. Ueber die Alkaloide der Samen von 
Lupinus Augustifalius und Lupinus Albus. 
In Archiv d. Pharm., pp. 85. (1897.) 

2. The qualitative analysis of inor- 
ganic bodies. (.Joint author with Robert E. 
Lyons.) Anderson, Ind., 1897. Pp. 210. 

3. A manual of toxicological analysis. 
(Joint author with R. E. Lyons. I Ander- 
son. Ind.. 1899. Pn. 112. 

4. The qualitative analysis of inorganic 
bodies. Revised edition. (Joint author 
with R. E. Lyons.) Anderson, Ind., 1900. 
Pt). 151. 

5. A manual of general chemistry. 
Chicago, 1904. Pp. 400; 92 plates. 



Schuyler Colfax Davisson, A.B. (1890), 
A.M. (1892), D. Sc. Associate Pro- 
fessor of Mathematics. 

1. Die geodiitische Linie der Mannig- 
faltigkeit ds-^dx--l-sin-x . dy'-+dz-. Tubingen, 
1900. Pp. 2G. 



(1887), Ph.D. (1889). Professor of 
Zoology and Director of Biological Sta- 
tion. 

1. A review of the American Eleotridi- 
uje. (Joint author with Morton W. For- 
dice. In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. for 
1885, VIII, pp. 55-80. 

2. Notes on skeletons of Etheostomati- 
na^. ( .Joint author with David Starr Jor- 
dan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1885, 
VIII, pp. 08-72. 

3. A catalogue of the fi.shes of Bean 
Blossom creek, Monroe county, Indiana. 
(Joint author with M. W. Fordice. ) In 
Proc. Acad. Nat Sci., Phila. for 1880, pp. 
233-252. 

4. A review of the genera and species 
of Diodontidos found in American waters. 
In Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci.. Ill, pp. 297-311. 
(1885.) 

5. A review of the American Gasteros- 
teidfp. In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadel- 
l)hia for 1880, pp. 233-252. 

0. A review of the Gobiida^ of North 
America. (Joint author with I). S. Jordan.) 
In I'roc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1880, IX, pp. 
477-518. 

7. Folk-lore of a (Jerman village. //( 
Current, V, No. 124. ( 1880. 1 

8. A review of the Chaetodontid* of 
North America. (.Joint author with Jennie 
E. Horning.) In Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci. Ill, 
pp. 1-18. ( 1887. I 

9. Notes on the si)ecitic names of cer- 
tain North American fishes. In I*roc. Acad. 
Nat. Sci., Phila. for 1887, pp. 295-290. 

10. A review of the North American 
species of the genera Lagodon, Archosargus, 
and Diplodus. (Joint author with Elizabeth 
G. Hughes.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
1887. X, pp. 05-74. 

11. Description of a new species of 
Ophichthys (Ophichthys retropinnis) , from 
Pensacola. Fla. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for 1887, X, p. lie. 



206 



Eigenmann'l 



Bibliography: Present Faculty 



12. Notes on a collection of fishes sent 
by Mr. C. C. Leslie from Charleston, S. C. 
(Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1887, X, pp. 269-270. 

18 A list of the American Gobiidse and 
Callionymidse, with notes on the specimens 
contained in the Museum of Comparative 
Zoology, at Cambridge, Mass. (Joint author 
with Rosa Smith Eigenmann. ) //(. Proc. 
California Acad. Sci., 2d ser., I, pp. 51-78. 
(Jan. 25, 1888.) 

14. South American Nematognathi. 
(Joint author with R. S. Eigenmann.) In 
Am. Nat. XXIII, pp. (347-049. (July, 
1888.) 

15. Preliminary notes on South Ameri- 
can Nematognathi. I. (.Joint author with 
R. S. Eigenmann.) In Proc. California 
Acad. Sci., 2d ser., I, pp. 119-172. (July 
18, 1888.) 

IG. Notes on some California fishes, 
with descriptions of two new species. (Joint 
author with R. S. Eigenmann.) In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1888, XI, pp. 4G3-466. 

17. Cypriuodon californiensis, Girard. 
(Joint author with R. S. Eigenmann.) In 
W. Am. Sci., V, pp. 3-4. (Sept., 1888.) 

18. Description of a new species of 
Cyprinodon. (.Joint author with R. S. 
Eigenmann.) In California Acad. Sci., 2d 
ser., I, p. 270. (Jan. 8, 1889.) 

19. On the development of California 
food fishes. /;( Am. Nat. XXIII, pp. 107- 
110. (March. 1889.) 

20. Preliminary descriptions of new 
species and genera of Characinidse. (Joint 
author with R. S. Eigenmann.) In W. Am. 
Sci., VI, pp. 7-8. (April, 1889.) 

21. Description of new Nematognathoid 
fishes from Brazil. (.Joint author with R. S. 
Eigenmann.) In W. Am. Sci., VI, pp. 8-10. 
(April, 1889. J 

. 22. Preliminary notes on South Ameri- 
can Nematognathi. II. ( Joint author with 



R. S. Eigenmann.) In Proc. California 
Acad. Sci., 2d ser., II, pp. 28-56. (Aug. 18, 
1889. ) 

23. On the phosphorescent spots of 
Porichthys margaritatus. (.Joint author 
with R. S. Eigenmann.) In W. Am. Sci., 
VI, pp. .32-34. (May, 1889.) 

24. Contributions from the San Diego 
Biological Laboratory. I. (Joint author 
with R. S. Eigenmann.) In W. Am. Sci., 
VI, pp. 44-47. (June, 1889.) 

25. Contributions from the San Diego 
biological laboratory. II. On the genesis of 
the color-cells of fishes. In W. Am. Sci., VI 
pp. 4.5-46. (July, 1889.) 

26. Notes from the San Diego biological 
laboratory. I. The fishes of Cortez Banks. 
(.Joint autlior with R. S. Eigenmann.) In 
W. Am. Sci., VI, pp. 123-132. (Oct., 1889, 
issued Nov. 9, 1889.) 

27. A review of the Scisenldse of Amer- 
ica and Europe. (.Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) In Ann. Rep. Comm. Fish and 
Fisheries for 1886, pp. 343-451, 4 plates. 
(1889.) 

28. Notes from the San Diego biological 
laboratory. II. (.Joint author with R. S. 
Eigenmann.) In W. Am. Sci., VI, pp. 147- 
151. (Nov., 1889.) 

29. A review of the Erythrininoe. 
(.Joint author with R. S. Eigenmann.) In 
Proc. California Acad. Sci., 2d ser., II, pp. 
100-116: 1 plate. ( Nov. 8, 1889. ) 

30. A revision of the edentulous genera 
of Curimatinae. (.Joint author with R. S. 
Eigenmann.) In Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., IV, 
pp. 1-32. (Nov., 1889.) 

31. On the genus Clevelandia. In Am. 
Nat, XXIII, pp. 916-918. (Oct., 1889.) 

32. The development of Micrometrus ag- 
gregatus, one of the viviparous surf-perches. 
In Am. Nat. XXIII. pp. 92.3-927. (Oct.. 
1889.) 

33. Additions to the fauna of San Diego. 



207 



Indiana University 



\_Eigenmann 



(Joint author with K. S. Eigenmann.) /*( 
Proc. California Acad. Sti., 2d ser., Ill, pp. 
1-24. (March 24, 1S90.) 

;!4. The evolution of the eatfiishe.s. In 
Zoe, I, pp. 10-15. (1800.) 

35. De.scription of a fossil species of 
Sebastodes. Zii, Zoe, I, p. 10. (1800.) 

36. On the egg membranes and micropyle 
of some osseus fishes. In Bull. Mus. Oomp. 
Zool., XIX, pp. 120-154, 3 plates. (March, 
1890.) 

37. The barracuda. In Zoe, I, pp. 55- 
5G. (1890.) 

38. The Point Loma blind fish and its 
relatives. In Zoe, I, pp. 65-72. 2 plates. 

39. Charles Harvey Bollman. In W. 
Am. Sci., VII, pp. 5-6. (1890.) 

40. The coloration of fishes. //( W. Am. 
Sci., p. 35. (1890.) 

41. The food fishes of California fresh 
waters. In Rep. State Board Fish Comm. 
California for 1890, pp. 53-65. 

42. A revision of the South American 
Nematognathi or Catfishes. (Joint author 
with R. S. Eigenmann.) In Occasional 
papers California Acad. Sci., I, pp. 1-508, 
figures, map. (July, 1800.) 

43. Descriptions of new species of Se- 
bastodes. (Joint author with R. S. Eigen- 
mann.) In Proc. California Acad. Sci., 2d 
ser.. Ill, pp. 36-38. (May 28, 1800.) 

44. A review of the genera and .species 
of Serranidfe found in the waters of Amer- 
ica and Europe. (Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., VIII, 
pp. 329-441; 20 plates. (1800.) 

45. On the precocious segregation of the 
sex cells in Micrometrus aggregatus Gibbons. 
In Jour. Morph.. V, pp. 480-402 ; 1 plate. 
(1891.) 

46. A catalogue of the fresh-water 
fishes of South America. (Joint author with 
R. S. Eigenmann.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., XIV, pp. 1-18. (1891.) 

47. On the genesis of the chromato- 



phores in fishes. In Am. Nat., XXV, pp. 
112-118; 4 plate.s. (Feb., 1891.) 

48. The spawning season of San Diego 
fishes. In Am. Nat., XXV. (June, 1891.) 

40. Cottus beldingi, sp. nuv. (Joint 
author with R. S. Eigenmann.) /// Am. 
Nat., XXV, pp. 1132-1133. (Dec, 1801.) 

50. A new Diodout. In Am. Nat., XXV, 
p. 1133. (Dec, 1801.) 

51. A catalogue of the fishes of the Pa- 
cific coast of America north of Cerros Island. 
(Joint author with R. S. Eigenmann.) In 
Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., VI, pp. 349-358. 
(June, 1892.) 

52. The fishes of San Diego. In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1892, XV, pp. 123-178 ; 
9 plates. 

53. Branchiostoma elongatum Sunde- 
vall, at San Diego. In Am. Nat. XXVI, p. 
70. (Jan., 1892.) 

54. On the presence of an operculum m 
the Aspredinidse. In Am. Nat., XXVI, p. 
70. (Jan., 1892.) Abstract in Proc. Indi- 
ana Acad. Sci. for 1891, p. 175. 

55. The Percopsidse on the Pacific slope. 
In Science for 1892, p. 233. 

56. Recent additions to the fauna of 
California. (Joint author with R. S. Eigen- 
mann.) Abstract in Indiana Acad. Sci. for 
1801. pp. 1.50-161. (1892.) 

57. New fishes from Western Canada. 
(Joint author with R. S. Eigenmann.) In 
Am. Nat., XXVI. pp. 961-964. (Nov., 
1892.) 

58. The continuity of the germ plasm in 
vertebrates. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 
1891, pp. 169-172. (1802.) 

59. The eyes of blind fishes. Abstract 
in Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1891, p. 175. 
(1802.) 

60. Biological stations. In Proc. Indi- 
ana Acad. Sci. for 1801, pp. 172-175. 
(1892.) 

61. Preliminary description of new 
fishes from the Northwest. (Joint author 



208 



Eigenmann'\ 



Bibliography: Present Faculty 



with R. S. Eigenmann.) /;; Am. Nat.. 
XXVII, pp. l.-.l-ir.-l. (Feb.. ISOH. I 

62. On the occurreiKe of tne spiny box- 
fish (genus Chiloraycterus) on the coast of 
California. In I'roc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
1892, XV, p. 48."); 1 plate. (1892.) 

()3. Catalogue of the fresh-water fishes 
of Central America and Southern Mexico. 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1893, XVI, pp. 
53-60. (1803.) 

64. I'reliminary note on the relation- 
ship of the species usually united under the 
generic name Sebastodes. (Joint author 
with C. H. Beeson. I In Am. Nat.. XXVII, 
pp. 668-671. (July. 189:;. I 

65. Early stages in the development of 
Cymatogaster. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 
for 1892, pp. 58-62. (1893.) 

66. Explorations in Western Canada. 
Abstract in Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1892, p. 
56. (1893.) 

67. Local variations. Abstract ('*( Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1892. p. 81. (1893.) 

68. A revision of the American Cichli- 
dfe. (Joint author with William L. Bray.) 
In Ann. New York Acad. Sci., VII, pp. 607- 
624. (Jan., 1894.) 

69. Notes on some South American 
fishes. In Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., VII, pp. 
625-637. (Feb., 1894.) 

70. On the viviparous fishes of the 
Pacific coast of North America. In Bull. 
U. S. Fisn Comm. for 1892. pp. 381-478 ; 27 
plates. (1894.) 

71. Results of explorations in Western 
Canada and Northwestern United States. 
In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1894, pp. 101- 
132: 4 plates. (July 7, 1894.) 

72. Biological .survey of Indiana : Zool- 
ogy. //( Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1893, pp. 
67-76. (Aug.. 1894.) 

73. The effect of environment on the 
mass of local species. /;; Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1893, pp. 226-229. (Aug.. 
1894.) 



74. A revision of the fishes of the sub- 
family Sebastina? of the Pacific coast of 
America. (Joint author with C. H. 
Beeson.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.. XVII, 
pp. 375-404. (1894.) 

75. The fishes of Indiana. Report of 
the Indiana State Biological Survey. ( Joint 
author with C. H. Beeson.) /(( Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 189"!. pp. 7()-108. 
( 1894. ) 

76. The fishes of Indiana. Reprinted 
from Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1893. In 
Rep. Indiana State Fish Comm. for 1894, pp. 
40-64. 

77. Names and locations of Indiana 
streams. In Kep. State Fish Comm. Indiana 
for 1894, pp. 65-79. 

78. Leuciscus balteatus (Richardson). 
A study in variation. In Am. Nat.. XXIX, 
pp. 10-25: 5 plates. (Jan., 1895.) Also, in 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1894. pp. 87-99. 
(Oct., 1895.) 

79. Development of sexual organs in 
Cymatogaster. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 
for 1894. p. 138. (Oct.. 1895.) 

80. A new biological station and its 
aim. /(( Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1894, 
pp. 34-35. (Oct., 1895.) 

81. First report of the Indiana Univer- 
sity biological station. In Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1895, pp. 203-296. Plates. 
(Feb., 1896.) Editor, and author of papers 
on 'Turkey lake as a unit of environment.' 
•Plankton,' 'The fishes,' 'The Testudinata,' 
'The study of variation.' 

82. The bearing of the origin and dif- 
ferentiation of the sex cells in Cymatogaster 
on the idea of the continuity of the germ 
plasma. In Am. Nat., XXX. pp. 265-271. 
(April. 1896.) 

83. Sex-differentiation in the viviparous 
teleost Cymatogaster. In Archiv f. Ent- 
wickelungsmechanik. IV, pp. 125-179 ; 6 
plates. (April. 1896.) Abstract (/( Trans. 
Am. Micro. Soc. XVII. pp. 172-173. 



(15) 



209 



Indiana University 



[ Eige 



83«. SteiiKlarlmcriii. In Am. Nat. 
XXXI, pp. 158-15!). 

84. Viviparous fishes. //( ()\(>rlanil 
Monthly. ( 181)8. ) 

84rt. Tlie Amblyopsidii'. the blind fish of 
America. /;( Kep. Briti.sh As.soc for 18!)7. 
pp. 6S5-(i8(;. (ISOS.) 

85. The ori.L;in of cave faunas. Abstract 
in Indiana Acad. Sci. for ISitT, pp. 22!»-2;iO. 
(18!t8. ) 

8G. The Amblyop-sidiP and eyes of blind 
fishes. Abstract in Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 
for 18!>7. pp. 2::0-2;n. (1808.) 

87. A new blind fish. Abstract \u Indi- 
ana Acad. Sci. for 1S!)7. p. 281. ( 18".)S. I 

88. A case of convergence. /;; Science, 
N. S., IX, No. 217. 280-2S2. (Feb.. 1899.1 : 
also VI Troc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1N!)8. pji. 
247-257. ( 1899. ) 

89. Biological stations. /// Indiana 
Woman for April, 1898. 

90. The Indiana Uiiiversity Biologic'al 
Station. //( Science. X. S.. IX, p)). 925-929. 
(Dec. 22, 1899.) Also In Inland Educator 
for 1909. p]). (n-((5. Figures. 

91. rians for the new buildings of the 
Biological Station. In Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1898, pp. 55-58. ( 189!). i 

92. Explorations in tlie caves of Mis- 
souri and Kentucky. In Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1898. pp. 58-(n. (1899.) 

9o. Th(> l)lind fishes of X(n'th America. 
/,■( I'op. Sci. Mo.. LVI, pp. 47;!-48(>. (Feb., 
1899. ) 

94. The eyes of the blind vertebrates of 
North America. I. The eyes of the Ambly- 
opsidte. Archiv f. Entwickeluugsmechauik. 
VIII, pp. 545-()17 : 5 plates. (March, 1899. ) 

95. Xotes on the blind fishes. /;( 
Science, X. S.. IX, p. ."uO. (March 10, 
1899.) 

9C>. I'reliminary notes upon the arrange- 
ment of rods and cones in the retina of fishes. 
(Joint author with George Ilansell.) In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci for 18!)8, p. 289. 
<1S99.) 



!)7. Degeneration in tlie eyes of tlie 
Aniblyopsidte. ils jilnii. pi-(i( ess and causes. 
/// Proc. Indiana .Vcad. Sci. for 1898, pj). 
28!t-241. (189!). I 

■!)8. The ear and the jiearing of the blind 
fishes. (Joint author with Albert ('. Yoder.) 
In I'roc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 18!)8, pp. 
242-247: 2 plates. (1S!»9. ) 

!)9. Chologaster agassizii and its eyes. 
Abstract //( Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 
J898. J,. 251. (1,S9!). ) 

100. The eye of Tyidilomolge from the 
artesian wells of San Marcos, Texas. Ab- 
stract (■/( Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1898, 
p. 251. (1S9<). ) 

101. The eye.s of Typhlotriton .spelaeus. 
(Joint author with W. A. Denn.v. ) Ab- 
stract in I'roc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1898, 



•>r^r>-^: 



(189!).) 



102. The blind rat of ilammoth cave. 
(Joint author witli James Kollin Slonaker.) 
In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 18!,)8, pp. 
258-257. Figi'.res. ( l,s:)9. i 

102(/. Cave animals, their character, ori- 
gin and their evidence for or against the 
tiansmi.s.sion of acquired character.s. In Sci- 
ence, N. S. X. p. SS!. (Dec. 15. 1S99. ) 

108. The IJind fislu's. In Biol. Lectures 
:\Iarine Biol. Lab. of Woods Hole for 18!)9. 
Pl>. n8-12(i. (1!)00.) 

1(M. The mosaic of single and twin cones 
in the retina of fishes, i Joint author with 
(leorge Daniel Shafer.) In Am. Nat., 
XXXIV. pp. 10-118: 1 plate. (Feb., 1!)00.) 

105. Degeneration in the eye.s of the 
cold-blooded vertebrates of the North Amer- 
ican caves. /;( Science, N. S., XI. pp. 4!)2- 
508. Figures. (March 80. 190O. ) 

10(>. The structure of blind fishes. In 
Pop. Sci. :M().. LVIl, pp. 4!)-5S. (May, 
1900.) 

107. '^riie eyes of blind vertebrates of 
North America. II. The eyes of Typhlo- 
molge rathbuni Ste.ineger. In Trans. Am. 
:\Iicr. Soc. XXI. PI). 49-C)0: 2 plates. 
(?ilay, 1900.) 



210 



Eigenmann~\ 



Bibliography: Present Faculty 



108. Causes of degeneration in blind 
fishes. In Pop. Sci. Mo., LVII, pp. 397-407. 
(August, 1900.) 

109. Some cases of saltatory variation. 
(Joint author with Ulysses Cox.) In 
Science, N. S., XII, p. 300. (Aug. 24, 
1900.) 

110. A contribution to the fauna of the 
caves of Texas. In Science, N. S., XII, p. 

301. (Aug. 24, 1900.) 

111. Sobre alguns peixes de Sao Paulo, 
Brazil. (.Joint author with Allen A. Nor- 
ris.) In Revista do Museu Paulista, IV, 
pp. 349-362. (1900.) 

112. Degeneration in the eyes of the cold- 
blooded vertebrates of the North American 
caves. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1899, 
pp. 31-46. Illustrations. (1900.) 

113. Conwrgent evolution as illustrated 
by the blind lizard Rhineura. In Science, 
N. S., XII, p. 302. (Aug., 1900.) 

114. The development of the eyes in the 
blind-fish Amblyopsis. /;/ Science, N. S., 
XII, p. 302. (Aug. 24. 1900.) 

11.5. The eyes of the cave salamander 
Typhlotriton. In Science. N. S., XII, p. 

302. (Aug. 24, 1900.) 

116. The development of the Conger eel. 
In Science, X. S., XII, pp. 401-402. ( Sept. 
14. 1900.) 

117. The eyes of the blind vertebrates 
of North America. III. The structure and 
ontogenic degeneration of the eyes of the 
Missouri cave salamander. (.Joint author 
with Winfield Augustus Denny.) In Biol. 
Bull. II, pp. 33-40 ; 1 plate. (Oct., 1900.) 

118. Description of a new cave sala- 
mander, Spelerpe.s stejnegeri, from the caves 
of Southwestern ilissouri. In Trans. Am. 
Mic. Soc, XXII. pp. 189-192; 2 plates. 
(1900.) Abstract //( Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1900, pp. 167. (1901.) 

119. Some cases of saltatory variation. 
(Joint author with U. S. Cox.) In Am. 
Nat., XXXV, pp. 33-38. (Jan., 1901. ) 



120. Bergiaria. (Joint author with 
Allen A. Xorris.) In Com. Mus. Nac. 
Buenos Aires, I., p. 272. (March 18, 1901.) 

121. Unilateral coloration with a bilater- 
al effect. (Joint author with Clarence Ken- 
nedy.) In Science, XIII, pp. 828-830. 
(1901.) 

122. Description of a new oceanic fish 
found off southern New England. In Bull. 
U. S. Fish Com., XXI, p. 35. (1901.) Ab- 
stract in Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1900, 
p. 166. (1901.) 

123. The Ggg and development of the 
Conger eel. In Bull. U. S. Fish Com., XXI, 
pp. 37-44. Illustrations. (1901.) Abstract 
in Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 3900, pp. 
165-166. O901.) 

124. Investigations into Hie history of 
the young Squeteague. In Bull. U. S. Fish 
Comm., XXI, pp. 45-51. Illustrations. 
(1901.1 Abstract in Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1900, p. 106. (1901.) 

125. The Leptocephalns of the American 
eel and other American Leptocephali. 
( Joint author with Clarence Hamilton Ken- 
nedy.) /*( Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., XXI, 
pp. 81-92. Illustrations. (1901.) Abstract 
in Science, N. S. XIV, p. 631. (Oct. 2.5, 
1901.) 

126. The mounting of the remains of 
Megalonyx jeffersoni from Henderson. Ky. 
In I'roc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1900, p. 166. 
(1901.) 

i27. The solution of the eel question. In 
Trans. Am. Mier. Soc, XXIII, pp. 5-18; 4 
plates. (May. 19(»2.) 

128. The physical basis of heredity. Tn 
Pop. Sci. Mo.. LXI, pp. 32-44. Illustrations. 
(May, 1902.1 

128f/. The blind fi.sh of Cuba. In Sci- 
ence. N. S. XVI, p. 347. (Aug. 29, 1902.) 

129. The Carnegie institution. In Sci- 
ence. N. S., XVI, pp. 792-793. (Nov. 14, 
1902.) 

l;;0. The eyes of the blind vertebrates of 



211 



Indiana University 



\_Eigeni 



?s()i-rh .Vinerii-a. IV. The eyes of Kliiueura 
fiovidana. /'( Proe. Washington Acad. Sci., 
IV, pp. 533-r)38: 3 plates. (Sept., 1002.) 
Abstracts in I'roc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 
1901, p. 107 (1902), and in Science, N. S. 
XIV, p. 631. (Oct. 25. 1901.) 

131. The liistory of the eye of Amblyop- 
sis. Abstracts in Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 
for 1901, pp. 101-106 (1902) ; in Science. 
N. S. XIV, p. 631 (Oct. 25, 1901) ; and in 
Science, N. S. XV, pp. 523-524 (April 4, 
1902.) 

132. Zoological miscellany. In Proc. In- 
diana Acad. Sci. for 1901, pp. 107-113. 
(1902.) 

133. The solntion of the eel problem. In 
World Today, IV, pp. 478-482. (April. 
1903.) 

134. In search of blind fishes in Cuba. 
In World Today, V, pp. 1129-1136. Illustra- 
tions. (Sept., 1903.) 

135. Auf der Suche nach blinden Fischen 
in Cuba. /// Die Umschau. ^"11. pp. 36.5- 
367. ( .May 2. 1903. ) 

13(>. ^'ariation notes. (.Joint autlior 
with C. II. Kennedy.) //; Biul. Bull., W . 
pp. 227-230. (April. 1903.) 

137. lieport on the freshwater fishes of 
Western Cuba. /(( Bull. U. S. B'ish Comm. 
for 1902. pp. 211-236: 4 plates. (.Inly, 
1903. ) 

138. The water supply of Havana, Cuba. 
/)(. Science. N. S., XVIII, pp. 281-282. 
(Aug. 28. 1893); and in Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1902. pp. 65-67. (1903.) 

i;^9. On a collection of fishes from Para- 
guay with a synopsis of the American gen- 
era of Cichlids. (Joint author with C. II. 
Kennedy.) In Proc. Acad. Sci., Phila. for 
1903, pp. 497-.537. (Sept., 1903.) 

140. Some new genera of South Ameri- 
can fresh-water fishes and new names for 
some old genera. In Smithson. Misc. Colls.. 
XLV, pp. 144-148. (Dec, 1903.) 

141. The eyes of the blind vertebrates of 
North America. V. The historv of the eve 



of Amblyopsis from tlie beginning of its de- 
veloijmcnt: to its disintegration in old age. 
In E. L. .Mark nnniNcrsary volume, pp. 167- 
204: plates xii-xv. (1904.1 Abstract in 
I'roc. Indiana Atad. Sd. for 1901. ])p. 101- 
105. 



.\rtiiur Lf.k Foley, A.B. (1890 i. A.M. 
( 1891 ) . Ph.D. Professor of i'hysics. 

1. The surface tension of liquids. In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1895, pp. 67-75. 

2. Surface tension of liquids. In 
Phys. Kev., III. No. 5. pp. 381-380. 
CMarch-April, 1896.) 

3. Arc spectra. In Electrical Eng., 
XXIV. (Sept. 16, 1897.) 

4. Arc spectra. In Proc. A. A. A. S., 
XLVI, pp. 93-94. (1897.) 

5. Arc spectra. In IMiys. Rev., V. No. 
8. pp. 129-1.51: 5 plates. (Sept.. 1897.) 

6. Variations in the siiettrum of the 
open and closed electric arc. In Proc. Indi- 
ana Acad. Sci. for 1897, pp. 95-9 T. 

7. Electrolytic nature of the electric 
arc. /(( I'roc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1897. 
pp. 100-103. 

8. The sjiectrum of cyanogen. In 
I'roc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1S97, pp. 97- 
100. 

0. X-ray transparency. //( I'roc. In- 
diana Acad. Sci. for 1898. pp. 74-75. 

10. Diamond fiuorescence. In I'roc. In- 
diana Acad. Sci. for 1899, pp. 94-95. 

11. Iteview of Cojori's 'History of 
physics.' In Phys. Rev., XIII. No. 5. pp. 
315-316. (May-June, 1899.) 

12. Diamond-glass fluorescence. In 
Science. XIII, pp. 732-734. (1901.) 

l.">. A method of measuring the absolute 
dilation of mercury. In Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1900. p. 99. 

14. An improved Wehnelt interrupter. 
/;( I'roc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1900. pp. 
97-98. 



212 



Hepburn'\ 



Bibliography : Present Faculty 



1."). A modified Wehnelt interrupter. In 
Elec. World and Eng'.. XXXIX, pp. a73-374. 
(March 1. 1902.) 

10. On the ii.se of nickel in the core of 
a Marconi magnetic detector. In I'roc. In- 
diana Acad. Sci. for 1903. 

17. A remarkable distribution of carbon 
on the bulb of a 'Hylo' incandescent lamp. 
/)( I'roc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1903. 

18. On the use of manganese dioxide in 
the generation of oxygen from potassium- 
chlorate. (Joint author with R. K. Kamsey.) 
In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1903. 

19. On the use of nickel in the core of a 
Marconi magnetic detector. In Phys. Rev., 
XVIII, pp. 349-354. (May, 1904.) 

20. A remarkable distribution of the 
carbon deposit on the bulb of a 'Hylo' in- 
candescent lamp. In Science for 1904. 

21. A peculiar deposit of carbon on the 
bulb of a 'Hylo' lamp. In Elec. World and 
Eng. for 1904. 

22. .V modified magnetic detector. In 
. Elect. AVorld and Eng. for 1904. ( In press. ) 



Samuel Baa'nister Harding, A.B. (1890), 
Ph.D. Junior Professor of European 
History. 

1. American history, 1781-1829. (Syl- 
labus of the university extension department 
of the University of the State of New York.) 
Albany, X. Y., 1892. Pp. 01. 

2. The 'minimum' principle in the 
tariff of 1828, and its recent revival. In 
Annals Am. Acad. Pol. and Soe. Sci., VI, 
July, pp. lOOllG. (1895.) Published sep- 
arately as No. 153 of the publications of Am. 
Acad, of Pol. and Soc. Sci. 

3. Party struggles over the first Penn- 
sylvania constitution. In Ann. Rep. Am. 
Hist. Asso. for 1894, pp. 371-402. (1895.) 

4. The contest over the ratification of 
the federal constitution in the state of 



Massachusetts. (Harvard historical studies, 
No. 2.) New York, 1896. I'p. vi, 194. 

5. Review of Edward Channing and 
Albert B. Hart's "Guide to the study of 
American history.' In Inland P]ducator, 
III, pp. 315-317. (Jan., 1897.) 

6. Greek gods, heroes, and men ; a 
primer of the mythology and history of the 
Greeks. (Joint author with Mrs. Caroline 
H. Harding.) Chicago, 1897. Pp. vi. 195; 
illustrated. 

7. The city of the seven hills ; a book 
of stories from the history of ancient Rome. 
(Joint author with Mrs. Caroline H. Hard- 
ing.) Chicago, 1898. Pp. 274; illustrated. 
Revised edition, 1902, pp. 268. 

8. The story of the IMiddle Ages. Chi- 
cago, 1901. Pp. 224 ; illustrated. 

9. Missouri party struggles in the Civil 
War period. In Ann. Rep. Am. Hist. Asso. 
for 1900, I, pp. 85-103. (1901.) 

10. Review of Lewis Einstein's 'The 
Italian Renaissance in England.' In Am. 
Hist. Rev., VIII, pp. 124-126. (Oct., 1902.) 

11. Review of George M. Wrong's 'The 
British nation ; a history.' In Am. Hist. 
Rev., IX, pp. 348-350. (Jan.. 1904.) 

1'2. Essentials in mediaeval and modern 
history. (In consultation with Albert Bush- 
nell Hart.) New York, 1904. Pp. about 
.jOO : illustrations and maps. (In press.) 

13. Life of George R. Smith, founder of 
Sedalia. JNIo. Privately printed, 1904. Pp. 
about 400 ; illustrated. (In pre.ss. ) 



Charles M. Hepburn, A.M., LL.B. Pro- 
fessor of Law. 

1. The historical development of code 
pleading in America and England. Cincin- 
nati, 1897. Pp. xvi, 318. 

2. A selection of cases and statutes on 
the principles of code pleading. With notes. 
Cincinnati; 1899. Pp. xxxvi, 651. 



213 



Indiana University 



\_Hershey 



Amos Shartle Hershey, Ph.D. Associate 
Professor of European History and 
Politics. 

1. Die Koutrolle liber die Gesetzgebung 
in den Vereingten Staaten von Nord Amer- 
ika. Heidelberg, 1894. Pp. 72. 

2. The recognition of Cuban belliger- 
ency. In Ann. Am. Acad. Pol. and Soc. Sci., 
YII, pp. 450-461. (May, 1890.) Published 
separately as No. 175 of the publications of 
the Am. Acad. Pol. and Soc. Sci. 

3. Intervention and the recognition of 
Cuban independence. In Ann. Am. Acad. 
Pol. and Soc. Sci., XI, pp. 353-381. (May, 
1898.) Published separately as No. 228 of 
the publications of the Am. Acad. Pol. and 
Soc. Sci. 

4. Higher education in Indiana. In 
Normal Vidette, VII, pp. 113-119; illus- 
trated. (April, 1900.) 

5. The Venezuelan affair in the light 
of international law. In Am. Law Reg., 
N. S., XLII, pp. 249-268. (May, 1903.) 

6. The importance of dates and maps 
in the teaching and study of history, or the 
location of events in time and space. In 
Educator- Journal, IV, pp. 113-118. (Nov., 
1903. ) 

7. The Panama question. In Green 
Bag. XVI. pp. 265-267. (April, 1904.) 

8. Some questions in international law 
arising from the Russo-Japanese war : I. 
I'ailure to declare war and violation of Ko- 
rean neutrality. In Green Bag, XVI. 
(May, 1904.) 

9. Some questions in international law 
arising from the Russo-Japanese war: II. 
The Hay note and Chinese neutrality. In 
Green Bag. XVI. (June, 1904.) 



.l^lschylus. In ladiaua University Bulletin. 
March, 1888. 

2. I'he study of man through language 
anil lilcraturc. //( I'roc Indiana Coll. Asso. 
for 1SS9. 

3. A catalogue of the fishes of Greece, 
with notes on the names now in use and 
those employed by classical authors. (Joint 
author with David Starr Jordan.) In Proc. 
Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, August 17, 
1892. 



Horace Addison Hoffman. A.B. (1881), 
A.M. Professor of Greek. 

1. The religious and ethical views of 



Harold Whetstone Johnston, L.H.D. 
Professor of Latin. 

1. The Roman commonwealth. Chi- 
cago, 1891. Pp. 25. 

2. M. Tulli Ciceronis orationes et epis- 
tolae selectae. Selected orations and letters 
of Cicero with historical introduction, an 
outline of the Roman constitution, notes, ex- 
cursuses, vocabulary, and index. Chicago, 
1892. Pp. 814. 

3. Revision of C, M. Lowe and J. T. 
Ewing's 'Caesar's Gallic war.' Chicago, 
1894. Pp. 542. 

4. Latin manuscripts. Chicago, 1897. 
Pp. 130; illustrated. 

5. A collection of examples illustrat- 
ing the metrical licenses of Vergil. Chicago, 
1898. Pp. 54. 

6. The teaching of Vergil. Chicago, 
1898. Pp. Kk 

7. Review of Macmillan's 'Latin dic- 
tionary.' In School Rev., VI, pp. 136-7. 
(Feb., 1898.) 

8. Cicero's orations and letters. (Joint 
author with F. W. Sanford, A.M.) Chi- 
cago. 1899. Pp. 797. 

9. Review of Gudeman's 'Latin liter- 
ature of the Empire.' In School Review, 
VIII. pp. 179-180. (March, 1899.) 

10. The teaching of second-year Latin, 
with prefatory note by W. G. Hale. Chicago, 
1901. Pp. 16. 



214 



Lindley\ 



Bibliography : Present Faculty 



11. The Rooian name. Chicago, lUUl. 
Pp. IG. 

12. The teaching of Latin in the second 
year. 7/i School Review, X. pp- G9-TG. 
(Jan., 1902.) 

13. The private life of the Itoman.s. 
Chicago, 1903. Pp. 344; ilhr;trated. 

14. Caesar's Gallic war. (Joint anthor 
with F. W. Sanford, A.M.) Boston. 1904. 



Hermann nnd Dorothea.' In Jonr. Ger, 

I'hii.. III. pp. :!S()-;:s3. (1901. i 



Albert Frederick Kuersteiner, Ph.D. 
Professor of Romance Languages. 

1. Review of J. A. Perez Bonalde's 
'El Kuerbo por Edgar Allan Poe, Traduk- 
zion direkta del Ingles.' In Le Maitre Pho- 
netique, X, pp. 146-147. (Aug., 1895.) 

2. Note sur I'e muet. In Le Maitre 
Phonetique, X, pp. 154-155. (Sept., 1895.) 

3. Apuntes sobre la pronunciacion cas- 
tellana. In Le Maitre Phonetique, XI, pp. 
217-221. (Dec, 189G.) 

4. Review of B. Roettger's 'Die Alt- 
franziisischen Lautgesetze in Tabellen.' In 
Le Maitre Phonetique, XII, pp. 84-85. 
(March, 1897.) 

5. Review of Peter E. Traub's 'The 
Spanish verb, with an introduction on Span- 
ish pronunciation.' //; Mod. Lang. Notes, 
XVIII, pp. 18-2-184. (June, 1903.) 



Eugene Leser, Ph.D. Assistant Professor 
of German. 

1. Fehler und Lticken in der Li Ser- 
mon saint Bernart beuanuteu Predigtsamm- 
lung. Nebst einem lexicalischen Anhange. 
Sondershausen, 1887. Pp. 119. 

2. Parler frangais comme une vache 
cspiKjnoJc. In Mod. Lang. Notes, IX, p. 
224. 

3. Modern French gene ^ Old French 
;/chtnc (from geJiir.) In Mod. Lang. Notes, 
X. pp. 1G8-169. 

4. Review of J. T. Hatfield's 'Goethe's 



Erne,st Hiram Lindley, A.B. (1893), A.M. 
( 1894) . Ph.D. Professor of Psychology 
and I'hilosophy. 

1. Review of Theodore Kaes's (a) 'Bei- 
triige zur Kenutni.ss des Reichtums der 
Grosshirnrinde des Menschen an markhal- 
tigen Nervenfa-sern' ; (b) 'Ueber deu Mark- 
fa.sergehalt der Grosshirnrinde eines ly^ jiihr- 
igen miinnlichen Kindes' ; (c) 'Ueber Gross- 
hirnrindeumasse und iiber Anordnung der 
Markfasersysteme in der Itinde des Men- 
.schen, zugleich ein Beitrag zur Frage : Un 
terscheidet sich die Riude des Kulturmen- 
schen von den niedereu Racen in Bezug auf 
Kaliber, Reichtum und Anordnung der 
markhaltigen Nervenf asern '.•" In Am. Jour. 
Psych., VII, pp. 281-284. (Jan., 1896.) 

2. A preliminary study of some of the 
motor phenomena of mental effort. //* Am. 
Jour. Psych., VII. pp. 491-517. (July, 
1896.) 

3. Some mental automatism.s. (Joint 
author with G. E. Partridge.) In Ped. Sem., 
V, pp. 41-60. (July, 1897.1 

4. A study of puzzles, with special ref- 
erence to the psychology of mental adapta- 
tion. In Am. Jour. Psych., VIII, pp. 431- 
493. (July, 1897.) 

5. Ueber Arbeit und Ruhe. In Psy- 
chologische Arbeiten, herausg. von E. Krsepe- 
lin. Heidelberg, III, 3 Heft, pp. 481-534. 

(>. Child study in Germany. In Indi- 
ana Sch. Jour., XLIV, pp. 159-1(30. (March, 
1899.) 

7. Science in the daily press. (Joint 
author with William L. Bryan. ) In Science, 
N. S. XI. p. 74. (1900.) 

S. An arithmetical prodigy. (Joint 
author with W. L. Bryan.) In Proc. Am. 
I'sych. Asso., New Haven, 1900. In Psych. 
Rev.. VII, p. 135. (1900.) 



215 



Indiana University 



l^Lindley 



U. The case of Arthur (irilKtli, arith- 
metical prodigy. (Joint author with W. L. 
Bryan.) In Comte rendu du IVc Congre.s 
International de Psychologie tenu a Paris, 
1900, p. 178. 

10. Review of J. H. Leuba's (a) 'The 
state of death' (Am. Jour. Psych., XIV, pp. 
133-145) ; (b) 'Introduction to a psychologi- 
cal study of religion' (Monist, XI, pp. 195- 
225) ; (c) 'The contents of religious con- 
sciousness' (Monist, XI, pp. 536-573) ; (d) 
'Religion, its impulses and its ends' (Monist. 
1902-03). /)( Am. Jour. Religious Psych, 
and Educ. I. (May. 1904.) 



RoBEiiT Edward Lyons, A.B. (1889), A.M. 
(1890), Ph.D. Professor of Chemistry. 

1. A method for the estimation of al- 
bumin in urine. (Joint author with T. C. 
Van Niiys.) /*; Am. Chem. Jour. XII, pp. 
1-17. (1890.) 

2. Carbon di-oxide in the urine. (Joint 
author with T. C. Van Niiys.) In Am. 
Chem. Jour.. XIV, pp. 14-20. (1892.) 

3. Die Phenylverbiudungen von Schwe- 
fel, Selen und Tellur. Heidelberg, 1894. 
Pp. 40. 

4. Ueber Diphenylselenide und einige 
Derivate desselben. (Joint author with F. 
Krafft. I In Ber. d. Deutsch. Chem. Ges., 
XXVII. pp. 17G0-17G8. (1894.) 

5. TJeber Diphenyltellurid und ein 
Verfahren zur Darstellung von Sulphideu, 
Seleniden und Telluriden. (Joint author 
with F. Krafft.) In Ber. d. Deutsch. Chem. 
-Ges. XXVII, pp. 1768-1773. (1894.) 

6. The effect of grape sugar upon the 
composition of certain fat producing bac- 
teria. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1895, 
pp. 85-88. 

7. Ueber Diphenylselenon, CuH^ . SeO^. 
C.Hg. (Joint author with F. Krafft.) In 
Ber. d. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. XXIX, pp. 424- 
429. (1896.) 



8. The qualitative analysis of inor- 
ganic bodies. (Joint author with L. S. 
Davis.) Anderson, Ind., 1897. Pp. 210. 

9. Analyses of certain Indiana shales 
and fire clays. (Assisted by O. W. Browui.) 
In Ann. Rep. State Geologist for 1898, pp. 
68, 69, 114, 115, 130, 134. 

10. A manual toxicological analysis. 
(Joint author with L. S. Davis.) Ander- 
son, Ind., 1899. Pp. 112, and color plate. 

11. The qualitative analysis of inorganic 
bodies. (Joint author with L. S. Davis.) 
Anderson, Ind., 1900. Second edition, pp. 
151. 

12. Analyses of certain Indiana mineral 
waters. In Ann. Rep. of State Geologist 
for 1901, pp. 70, 70, 83. 

13. The quantitative determination of 
selenium in organic compounds. (Joint au- 
thor with F. L. Shinn. ) In Jour. Am. Chem. 
Soc, XXIV, pp. 1085-1094 (1902) ; also in 
Zeits. f. anal. Chem., XLII, pp. 659-661. 
(1902.) 

14. Review of William Dodge Frost's 
"Laboratory guide in elementary bacteriol- 
ogy.' Second edition. In Jour. Am. Chem. 
Soc, XXIV, pp. 595-596. (1902.) 

15. Analyses of certain Indiana coals. 
(Assisted by F. C. Mathers.) In Ann. Rep. 
of State Geologist for 1903. 

16. Analyses of certain Indiana lime- 
stones and limes. (Assisted by F. C. Math- 
ers.) I)\ Annual Report of State Geolo- 
gist, 1903. 

17. Review of R. II. Aders Plimmer's 
'Chemical changes and products resulting 
from fermentations.' In .lour. Am. Chem. 
Soc, XXVI, pp. 113. (1904.) 



Vernon Freeman Marsters, A.M. Pro- 
fessor of Geology. 

1. Triassic traps of Nova Scotia, with 
notes on other intrusives of Pictou and An- 



216 



Moenkhaus^ 



Bibliography : Present Faculty 



tigonish counties, Nova Scotia. In Am. 
Geol., V, pp. 140-145. (1890.) 

2. On certain camptonite dilie.s neai- 
Whitehall, Washington county, N. Y. 
(Joint author with J. F. Kemp.) In Am. 
Geol., IV, pp. 97-102. (1889.) 

3. The trap dike.s of the Lake Cham- 
plain region. (Joint author with J. F. 
Kemp.) In Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv., No. 107, 
pp. 11-62. (1893.) 

4. Geologic literature of Indiana 
stratigraphic and economic. (.Joint author 
with E. ]M. Kindle. ) In Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1893. (1894.) 

5. Camptonites and other intru.sive.s of 
Lake Memphramagog. In Am. Geol., XVI, 
pp. 25-39; 1 map. (1895.) 

6. Aids in teaching physical geogra- 
phy. /)( Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1899, 
pp. 54-60; 1 pi. (1900.) 

7. Topography and geography of Bean 
Blossom vallej% Monroe county, Indiana. In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1901, pp. 222- 
2.37: 4 figures, plates. (1902.) 



John Anthony Millek, A.B. (1890), Ph. 
D. Professor of ]Mechanics and Astron- 
omy. 



0. The per.seids of 1898. In Pop. As- 
tron., VII, p. 406; 1 plate. (Sept., 1899.) 

7. Kirkwood observatory. In Pub. 
Ast. Soc. of the Pacific, XIII, pp. 139-140; 
1 plate. 

8. Meteor showers. //( Inland Edu- 
cator, IX, pp. 116-121. (Oct., 1899.) 

9. The leonids of 1900. In Proc. In- 
diana Acad. Sci. for 1900, pp. 73-74. 

10. The Kirkwood observatory of Indi- 
ana University. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 
for 1901, pp. 85-87. 

11. Inorganic nature study: the sky. 
In Teachers' Journal, III, pp. 20-21, 75-77, 
121-124, 235-241. 273-276, 384-416. 14 
plates. 

12. I'hotogi'aphic observations of comet 
c 1902. /;/ Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 
1902, p. SO. 

13. Double-star measures. In Astro. 
Jour., XXIII, pp. 167-169. (Sept., 1903.) 

14. Double-star measures. //(- Astro. 
Jour., XXIV, pp. 1.5-16. (1904.) 

15. Measures of new double stars, se- 
lected from the Leipzig A. G. catalogue. In 
Astronomische Nachrichten, CLXI. (1904.) 

16. Concerning certain elliptic func- 
tions of square rank. In Am. .Jour. Math., 
XXVI. (In press.) 



1. A trigonometry for beginners. New 
York, 1896. Pp. vii, 147 ; 67 plates. 

2. An infinite system of forms satis- 
fying the requirements of Hilbert's law. In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1897, pp. 80-84. 

3. The leonids of 1898. In Proc. In- 
diana Acad. Sci. for 1898, pp. 151-153. 1 
plate. 

4. A linear relation between certain 
of Klein's X-fuuctions and Sigma-functions 
of lower division value. In Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1898, pp. 154-157. 

5. Meteor showers. //( Inland Edu- 
cator, VII, pp. 147-151; 2 plates. (Nov., 
1898.) 



William J. Moenkhaus, A.B. (1894), 
A.M. (1895), Ph.D. Associate Pro- 
fessor of Physiology. 

1. Variation in the color-pattern of 
Etheostoma caprodes. (Abstract.) In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1893, pp. 231- 
232. 

2. Some cases of mimicry in fishes. In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1894, p. 86. 

3. Variation of North American 
fishes. I. The variation of Etheostoma 
caprodes Rafinesque. In Am. Nat., XXVIII, 
pp. 641-658; 4 plates. (August, 1894.) 



21Y 



Indiana University 



[ Moenkhaus 



4. Notes on a collection of fishes from 
Dubois county, Indiana. In Troc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1895, pp. 15U-162. 

5. Variation of North American 
fishes. II. The variation of Etheostoma 
capi'odes Rafiuesque in Turkey lake and 
Tippecanoe lake. //) Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1895, pp. 27S-29G ; 9 figures. 

6. Material for the study of the vari- 
ation of Etheostoma caprodes Rafinesque and 
Etheostoma nigrum Rafinesque in Turkey 
lake and Tippecanoe lake. In Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1897, pp. 207-228 ; 6 figures. 

7. Contribuigao para o conhecimento 
das aranhas de S. I'aulo. In Revista do 
Museu Paulista, III, pp. 77-112. 1 plate. 
(1898.) 

8. The spinning of the egg-sac in Ly- 
cosa. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1901, 
pp. 113-114. 

9. Experiments in the hybridization of 
fishes. (Abstract.) In I'roc. Indiana. Acad. 
Sci. for 1901, p. 114. 

10. An aberrant Etheostoma. In I'roc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1901, pp. 115-110. 

11. The individuality of the maternal 
and paternal chromosomes in the hybrid be- 
tween Fundulus heteroclitus and Menidia 
notata. (Abstract.) In Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1902, p. 111. 

12. An extra pair of appendages modi- 
fied for copulatory purposes in Cambarus 
viridis. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 
1902, pp. 111-112 ; 2 figures. 

13. Description of a new darter from 
Tippecanoe Lake. In Bull. U. S. Fish 
Com., XXII, pp. 397-398; 1 figure. (Au- 
gust, 1903.) 

14. The development of the hybrids be- 
tween Fundulus heteroclitus and Menidia 
notata with especial reference to the beha- 
vior of the maternal and paternal chromo- 
somes. In Amer. Jour. Anat., III. pp. 29- 
67; 4 plates. (1904.) 



EnwAiii) Payson ^iloirrox, A.M., Assistant 

Pi-ofessor uf En.ulisli. 

1. A lesson in English from a recent 
novel. In Inland Educator, II, pp. 150-152. 
(April. IS'.k;. ) 

2. Shakespeare in the .seventeenth cen- 
tury. /(( .Tour. Ger. I'hil., I, pp. 31-44. 
(1897.) 

3. Review of ]Myra Reynolds's ' The 
treatment of nature in English poetry from 
Pope to Wordsworth.' In Jour. Ger. Phil., 
I, pp. 262-263. (1897.) 

4. Review of Francis Turner Pal- 
grave's 'Landscape in i)oetry from Homer 
to Tenny.son.' In Mod. Lang. Notes, XII, 
pp. 414-417. (Nov., 1897.) 

5. Review of Oscar Kuhns's 'The 
treatment of nature in Dante's Divina 
Commedia." /// Mod. Lang. Notes. XII, p. 
495-498. (Dec. 1897.) 

6. Goldsmith's 'Vicar of Wakefield.' 
Chicago. 1898. Pp. xxv. 254. 

7. Shakespeare's 'Julius Cissar.' Chi- 
cago, 1900. Pp. xxvi, 131. 

8. Ruskin's 'Pathetic fallacy,' and 
Keats's treatment of nature. In Poet Lore, 
XII. 58-70. (Jan.-March, 1900.) 

9. A method of teaching metrics. In 
Mod. Lang. Notes, XV, pp. 193-202. (April, 
1900. ) 

10. Review of Mark Harvey Liddell's 
'An introduction to the scientific study of 
poetry.' In Mod. Lang. Notes, XVII, pp. 
431-434. (Nov., 1902.) 

11. Chaucer's Identical rhymes. In 
:Mod. Lang. Notes, XVIII, pp. 73-74. 
(March. 1903.) 

12. Shakespeare's 'Twelfth Night.' New 
York. 1903. Pp. xiii, 179. 

13. Review of Raymond Macdonald 
Alden's 'English verse.' In Mod. Lang. 
Notes, XVIII. pp. 174-176. (June, 1903.) 

14. Review of Joseph Bickersteth 
Mayor's 'A handbook of modern English 
metre.' In Mod. Lang. Notes. (In pre.ss.) 



218 



Mottier ] 



Bibliography : Present Faculty 



Charles Alfred Mosemiller, A.B. (1890), 
Assistant Professor of Romance Lan- 
guages. 

1. Concerning the etj'mology of the 
French word son (=bran). In Mod. Lang. 
Notes, XVIII, p. 224. (Nov., 1903.) 

2. The origin of the French word 
canncljcrfje. In Mod. Lang. Notes. XIX, pp. 
46-47. (Feb., 1904.) 



David Myers Mottier, A.B. (1891), A.M. 
(1892), Ph.D., Professor of Botany. 

1. Notes on the apical growth of liver- 
worts. In Bot. Gaz., XVI, p. 141. 1 plate. 
(1891.) 

2. On the archegouium and the apical 
growth of the stem in Tsuga canadensis and 
Pinus sylvestris. In Bot. Gaz., XVII, p. 
141; 1 plate. (1892.) 

3. On the development of the embryo- 
sac of Arisaema triphyllum. In Bot. Gaz., 
XVII, p. 258; 1 plate. (1892.) 

4. The phylogeny of ferns. A review 
of J. Bretland Farmer's 'On the embry- 
ogeny of Augiopteris evecta Hofifm.' (Ann. 
Bot., VI, p. 265.) In Bot. Gaz., XVIII, p. 
106. (1893.) 

5. On the embryo-sac and embryo of 
Senecio aureus. /;/ Bot. Gaz., XVIII, pp. 
245-253; 2 plates. (1893.) 

6. Development of the embryo-sac of 
Acer I'ubrum. In Bot. Gaz., XVIII, pp. 
375-377; 1 plate. (1893.) 

7. Contributions to the life-history of 
Notothylas. In Ann. Bot., VIII, pp. 391- 
402; 3 plates. (1894.) 

8. Contributions to the embryology of 
the Ranunculacese. In Bot. Gaz., XX, pp. 
241-248, 296-304; 4 plates. (1895.) 

9. Beitriige zur Kenntniss der Kern- 
theilung in den Pollenmutterzellen einiger 



Dikotylen und Monokotylen. In Jahrb. fiir 
wiss. Bot., XXX, pp. 169-204; 6 plates. 
(1897.) 

10. Ueber das Verbal ten der Kerne bei 
der Entwickelung des Embryosacks und die 
Vorgjinge bei der Befruchtung. hi Jahrb. 
fiir wi.ss. Bot., XXXI, pp. 125-158; 3 
plates. (1897.) 

11. Ueber den zweiten Theilungsschritt 
in Pollenmutterzellen. (Joint author with 
Edouard Strasburger.) In Ber. der Deutsch. 
Bot. Gesellschaft, XV, pp. 327-332 ; 1 plate. 
(1897.) 

12. Ueber die Chromosomenzahl bei der 
Entwickelung der PollenkJlrner von Allium. 
Ill Ber. der Deutsch. Bot. Gesellschaft, XV, 
p. 474. (1897.) 

13. Das Centrosom bei Dictyota. In 
Ber. der Deutsch. Bot. Gesellschaft, XVI, 
pp. 123-128. (1898.) 

14. The centrosome in cells of the 
gametophyte of INIarchantia. In Proc. Indi- 
ana Acad. Sci. for 1898. 

15. Endosperm haustoria of Lilium can- 
didum. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 
1898. 

16. Nuclear division in vegetative cells. 
In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1898. 

17. The effect of centrifugal force upon 
the cell. In Ann. Bot., XIII, pp. 325-361; 
1 plate. (1899.) 

18. Nuclear and cell division in Dicty- 
ota dichotoma. In Ann. Bot., XIV, pp. 163- 
192; 2 plate-s. (1900.) 

19. A practical laboratory guide for the 
first year in botany. Bloomington, Ind., 
1902. 

20. The behavior of the chromosomes in 
the spore mother-cells of higher plants and 
the homology of the pollen and embryo-sac 
mother cells. In Bot. Gaz., XXXV, pp. 
250-282; 4 plates. (1903.) 

21. The development of the spermato- 
zoid of Chara. In Ann. Bot, XVIII ; 1 
plate. (1904.) 

22. Further studies on anomalous di- 



219 



Indiana University 



\_Mottier 



cotyledonous plants. In Vvoc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1!»04. 

23. Fecundation in plants. Washing- 
ton, 1904. 



Burton Dorr Myers, M.D. Associate Pro- 
fessor of Anatomy. 

1. The Chiasma of the toad (Bufo len- 
tiginosus) and of some other vertebrates. 
In Zeitschrift f. Morphologie u. Anthropol- 
ogie, III, pp. 183-207; 2 plates. (1901.) 

2. Beitrag zur Kenntniss des Chias- 
mas und der Commissuren am Bodeu des 
dritten Ventrikels. In Archiv f. Anat. u. 
Physiologie for 1902, Anatomische Abth., 
pp. 32 ; 15 plates. 

3. Fixation of tissues by injection. In 
Jour. App. Micr. for Nov., 1903. 

4. Review of Gerrish's 'Text-book of 
anatomy.' In Johns Hopkins Bull, for 
April, 1903. 

5. Review of Karl Camillo Schneider's 
'Lehrbuch der vergleichenden Histologie der 
Thiere.' In Science, Sept. 25, 1903. 



John Sciiolte Nollen, Ph.D. Professor 
of German. 

1. Gojthes Gotz von Berlichingen auf 
der Biihne. Leipzig, 1893. Pp. 134. 

2. Review of Elias J. MacEwan's 
translation of Freytag's 'Technique of the 
drama.' In Dial, XVIII, pp. 77-79. (Feb., 
1895.) Also In Mod. Lang. Notes, X, pp. 
76-77. (Feb., 1895.) 

3. Review of Louis P. Betz's 'Heine 
in Frankreich.' In Mod. Lang. Notes, X, 
pp. 441-443. (Nov., 1895.) 

4. Ileinrich von Kleist's 'Prinz Fried- 
rich von Ilomburg.' Boston, 1899. Pp. 
Ixxii, 172. 

5. Review of A. B. Faust's 'Heine's 
prose.' In Mod. Lang. Notes, XV, pp. 103- 
408. (Feb., 1900.) 



6. Notes on the modern drama : Ibsen 
and Hauptmaun. In Faculty Corner, Grin- 
nell, pp. 47-G4. (1901.) 

7. Heine and Wilhelm Miiller. In 
Mod. Lang. Notes, XVII, pp. 207-218, 2G1- 
276. (April, May, 1902.) 

8. Kritisches und Prinzipielles zu 
Wolffs 'Jugendlustspielen von Heinrich von 
Kleist.' In Jour. Ger. Phil., IV, pp. 483- 
519. (1902.) 

9. Review of R. M. Meyer's 'Grundriss 
der neueren deutschen Litteraturgeschichte.' 
In Mod. Lang. Notes, XVII, pp. 391-395. 
(June, 1902.) 

10. College and university in the middle 
west. In Iowa College Circulars, II, pp. 1- 

10. (Oct., 1902.) 

11. Elective studies and courses in sec- 
ondary schools. In Iowa College Circulars, 

11, pp. 47-59. (Dec, 1902.) 

12. Review of Edward Stockton Meyer's 
'Franz Grillparzer's Der Traum em Leben.' 
In Mod. Lang. Notes, XVIII, pp. 122-124. 
(April, 1903.) 

13. A chronology and practical bibliog- 
raphy of modern German literature. Chi- 
cago, 1903. Pp. 118. 

14. Outline history of modern German 
literature, introductory to the texts of the 
'Lake' German series. Chicago, ly03. Pp. 
122. 

15. German poems, 1800-1850. Chicago, 
1904. 

16. Review of John G. Robertson's 'A 
history of German literature.' In Mod. 
Lang. Notes, XlXr pp. 17-20. (Jan., 1904.) 

17. Schiller's poems. New York, 1904. 



Carl Wiliielm Ferdinand Osthaus, A.M. 
(1890), A.ssociate Professor of German. 

1. Review of Hager's 'Freytag's Aus 
dem Staat Friedrichs des Grossen.' In 
Mod. Lang. Notes, V, pp. 301-303. (May, 
1890.) 



220 



Rothrock'\ 



Bibliography : Present Faculty 



2. Gerstiicker's 'Germelshausen.' With 
ititroiliution and English notes. Boston, 
1S;»1. Pp. vii, 56. 

3. Eichendorff's 'Au.s dem Leben eines 
Taugenichts.' With introduction and Eng- 
lish note.s. Boston, 1892. Pp. ix, 170. 

4. Review of Carruth's 'Schiller's Wil- 
hclni Tell.' In Jour. (J.n-. Phil.. II. pp. 125- 
120. (1898.) 

5. Ein litterari.scher Vandali.sinus? 
(Erwiderung ). In IVdagogische ^Nlonats- 
hefte. I. pp. 8-10. (March, 1900.) 

0. Abridged editions of modern Ger- 
man authors. Reviews of nine different 
novels. In Jour. Ger. Phil., IV, pp. 248- 
259. (1902.) 

7. Where empire and republic meet. 
In Western Camera Notes, IV pp. 221-225 ; 
5 plates. (Sept., 1903.) 

8. Revision of Mary A. Frost's edition 
of Scheffel's 'Trompeter von Siikkingen." 
with introduction and notes. Xew York, 
1904. 



Roy Henderson I'euiunc, A.B. (1894), 
A.;M. (1896). Instructor in German. 

1. An English criticism of Schiller's 



'Robbers.' In Germ. Amer. Ann. N. 
pp. 304-315. (June, 1903.) 



S., I, 



RoLLA Roy Ramsey, A.B. (1895), A.M. 
(1898), Ph.D. Assistant Professor of 
Physics. 

1. A jjhotograpliic study of electrolytic 
cells. In Phys. Rev., IV, pp. 189-190; 1 
plate. (1899.) 

2. Eine photographische Untermahung 
elektrolytercher Tellen. In Physikalische 
Zeitschrift, I, p. 269. (1900.) 

3. The effect of gravity and pressure 
on electrolytic cells. In Phys. Rev., XIII, 
pp. 1-30: 17 plates, 9 table.s. (1901.) 



4. Die Wirkung von Sclnvcre und 
Druck auf die elektrolyteschen ^'organge. 
In I'hysikalische Zeitschrift. ili. pp. 177- 
182: 4 tables. (1902.) 

5. The change of volume in chalk and 
cadmium cells and its relation to change of 
electromotive force due to pressure. In 
Phys. Rev.. XVI. pp. 105-111 : 1 plate, 3 
tables. (1903.) 



William A Rawles. A.B. (18841, A.M. 
(1895), Ph.D. Junior I'rofessor of Po- 
litical Economy. 

1. The government of the people of 
the State of Indiana. Philadelphia, 1897. 
Pp. vi, 172. 12 plates. 

2. Ceutralizing tendencies in the ad- 
ministration of Indiana. Xew York, 1903. 
Pp. 336. 



(iEOiicE Loris Reixiiard, LL.D. I'rofessor 
of Law and Dean of the School of Law. 

1. Indiana criminal law. Cincinnati, 
1879. l*p. xxii, 523. 

2. .ludicial opinions and decisions as 
judge of Indiana Appellate court. In Indi- 
ana App. Ct. Rep., I-XVII. (1891-1897.) 

3. Agency. A treatise on the law of 
principal and agent. Indianapolis, 1903. 
Pp. cxi, iu)(\. 

4. The right to practice law. In 
Proc. Indiana State Bar A.sso. for 1902, 
pp. 129-151. 

5. American law schools and the teach- 
ing of law. //( (ireen Bag. XV. (March, 
1904. ) 



Daviu Aadrew Rothrock, A.B. (1892), 
A.M. (1893), Ph.D. Associate Profes- 
sor of ^Mathematics. 

1. Invariants of the finite continuous 
groups of the plane. In Am. ]Math. Mo., 
V, pp. 249-264. (Nov., 1898.) 



221 



Indiana University 



[_Rothrock 



2. roiiit invariants oi the Lie groups. 
111. I'l-oc. Indiana Afad. Sci. for 1898, pp. 
ll'J-13r). 

3. Differential invariants derived from 
point invariants. //; Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1898, pp. 135-147. 

4. An algebra for high schools. (Joint 
author with R. J. Aley.) New York, 1904. 
(In press.) 



Martin Wright Sampson, A.M. 
of English. 



Professor 



1. ^lilton's lyric and dramatic poems. 
New York, 1901. Pp. 1, 34."). 

2. Web.ster's 'Duchess of ^lalfy,' and 
'The white devil.' Boston, 1904. 

3. About 2.50 to 300 reviews and 
articles //( Critic, Dial, Anglia, Outlook, 
Nation, ^Modern Language Quarterly, Jour- 
nal of Germanic Philology, etc. 



GuiDO Hermann Stempel, A.M. Asso- 
ciate Professor of Comparative Philol- 
ogy. 

1. Sein und haben. /;; (iermania. III, 
pp. 132-135. (June 1, 1891.) 

2. Review of Charles F. Johnson's 
'English words.' In School and College, I, 
pp. 255-2.5(). (April, 1892.) 

3. Review of Emil Trechmann's 'A 
short liistorical grammar of the (ierman 
language, translated and adapted from Pro- 
fessor Behaghel's Deutsche Sprache.' In 
Academy. YII, pp. 308-309. (June. 1892.) 

4. Wilhelm jNIiiller. In (iermania, VI, 
14-18. (May, 1894.) 

5. Review of Charles Sears Baldwin's 
'The inflections and syntax of the Morte 
d'Arthur.' //; Dial. XVIII, p. 25. (Jan. 
1, 1895.) 

(i. Review of Francis P.. Gummere's 
'Old English ballads.' //( Dial. XVIII, p. 
87. (Feb. 1. 1895.) 



7. Review of Alfred M. Williams's 
'Studies in folk-song and popular poetry.' 
In Dial, XVIII, pp. 182-183. (March IG, 
1895.) 

8. Review of Oliver Farrar Emerson's 
'The history of the English language.' In 
School Rev., Ill, pp. 229-233. (April, 
1895.) 

9. Review of Edward S. Joynes's 
'Schiller's Maria Stuart.' In Educ. Rev., 
X, pp. 499-500. (Dec, 1895.) 

10. Review of Walter W. Skeat's 'The 
student's Chaucer.' In School Rev., V. 
(Oct., 1897.) 

11. Review of Hermann B. Boisen's 
'Preparatory book of German prose.' In 
Alumnus, I, No. 2, pp. 32-33. (Nov.. 1898.) 

12. Review of Caroline H. Harding and 
Samuel B. Harding's 'Greek gods, heroes, 
and men.' In Alumnus, I, No. 2, p. 33. 
(Nov., 1898.) 

13. Review of Carl Osthaus's 'Eichen- 
dorff's Aus dem Leben eines Taugenichts.' 
In Alumnus, I, No. 2, p. 34. (Nov.. 1898.) 

14. Review of Caroline H. Harding and 
Samuel B. Harding's 'The city of the seven 
hills.' /(( Alumnus, I, No. 3, pp. 35-36. 
(Feb.. 1898.) 

15. Review of Harold W. .Tohnston's 
'Latin manuscripts.' In Alumiuis, I, No. 3, 
pp. 36-37. (Feb., 1898.) 

16. Review of Edward P. jNIorton's 
'Goldsmith's The Vicar of Wakefield.' In 
Alumnus. I. No. 4, pp. 24-25. (May. 1899.) 

17. Questions, etc., and a bibliography. 
Contributed to ]Marsh and Royster's 'Teach- 
ers' manual for the study of English class- 
ics.' Chicago, 1902. I'p. 95. 

18. The Yale bicentennial and compara- 
tive philology. Review of Haniis Oertel's 
'Lectures on the study of language' ; E. 
AVashburu Hopkins's 'India old and new,' 
and 'The great epic of India' : E. P. Mor- 
ris's 'On principles and methods in Latin 
syntax.' In Dial, XXXIII, pp. 9'2-94. (Aug. 
10, 1902.) 



222 



JVoodburn ] 



Bibliography : Present Faculty 



riEiSRY TiiEW Stepiiexsox, B.S., A.B. 
Assistant Professor of English. 

1. The Elizabethan play-house. In 
Inland Educator, X, pp. 158-104; 2 plates. 

(May, 1900.) 

2. Patroon Van Volkeuberg : A tale 
of old Manliattan in the year sixteen hun- 
dred and ninety-nine. Indianapolis, 1000. 
Pp. 380. Illustrated. 

3. The fickle wheel : A tale of Eliza- 
bethan London. Indianapolis. 1001. Pp. 
380. Illustrated. 

4. Elizabethan London : A topograph- 
ical description. (In press.) 

5. Elizabethan manners and customs. 
(In preparation.) 



Ulysses (iuANT Weatiierly, Ph.D. Pro- 
fessor of Economics and Social Science. 

1. I>ouis VI, the founder of the French 
monarchy. Hamilton, N. Y.. ISOl. Pp. 27. 

2. A miniature European state : 
Lieclitenstein. /;; Cornell Magazine, VI, 
pp. 205-208. CMarch, 1804.) 

3. Comparative politics. Albany, N. Y., 
1895. Pp. 30. 

4. Review of Herbert Tattle's 'His- 
tory of Prussia under Frederick the Great, 
1750-1757.' /)) Xva. Hist. Rev., II, pp. 145- 
148. 

5. Tlie relation of liistory and geog- 
raphy. //( Indiana Sch. Jour., XLII, pp. 
220-251. (April, 1807.) 

0. Recent books on historical method. 
h> Inland Educator, V, pp. 247-240. (Dec, 
1807.) 

7. Review of (Georges Pariset's 'L'etat 
et les cglises en Prusse sous i^'rcderic Guil- 
laume I. 1715-1740.' //; Am. Hist. Rev., 
Ill, pp. :!52-3.5.5. (Jan.. 1808.1 

8. History in the high school, hi In- 
land Educator, VI, pp. 2()l-2<;2. (July, 
1808.) 



0. Review of Godefroy Cavaiguac's 'I>a 
formation de la Prusse contemporaine, 1808- 
1813.' In. Am. Hist. Rev., IV, pp. 149-151. 
(Oct., 1898.) 

10. Stein's German policy at the Con- 
gress of Vienna. In Ann. Rep. Am. Hist. 
Asso. for 1900, I, pp. 521-534. (1901.) 

11. Why charities ought to be organized. 
In Indiana Bull. Char, and Corr., June, 
1902, pp. 91-92. 



James Albert AVoodburn, A.B. (1876), 
xV.M. (1885) , Ph.D. Professor of Amer- 
ican History and Politics. 

1. The race problem in the South. In 
Indiana Student. (Nov., 1885.) 

2. (Jovernment by the people. //; In- 
diana Student. (Nov., 1886.) 

3. The Johns Hopkins University. In 
Indiana Student. (Jan., 1887.) 

4. Needed changes in the school law of 
Indiana. //( Indiana Sch. Jour. (Feb., 
1888.) 

5. The slave trade. A series of articles 
on tlie recent slave trade of the Moham- 
medans in Central Africa. In United Pres- 
b.vterian. (Jan., Feb., 1888.) 

6. Review of Sir Henry Elaine's 'Lec- 
tures on international law delivered before 
tlie University of Cambridge.' In Christian 
Union. (June 27. 1889.) 

7. The study of history : an article 
on the study of history in America sug- 
gested by the proceedings of the 6th annual 
session of the American Historical Associa- 
tion at Washington, D. C, Dec, 1889. In 
Christian Union. (Jan. 0, 1890.) 

8. The speaker and the quorum. An 
essay on the notable decision of Hon. 
Thomas B. Reed, Speaker of the House of 
Representatives, Feb., 1800. In Indiana 
Student. (March, 1800.) 

0. Chautau(]ua ; the growth of its sum- 
mer school. In Christian Union. (Aug. 21, 
1800.) 



223 



Indiana University 



^Woodburn 



10. History of higher education in In- 
diana. Washington, ISiJl. Bureau of Edu- 
catiun, Circuhirs of Information, No. 1. Pp. 
2(»(). 

n. States made from colonies. In 
("hautauquan. (Dec, 1891.) 

12. States made from territories. In 
Chautauquan. (Feb., 1892.) 

13. Causes of the American Revolution. 
In Johns Hop. Univ. Studies, X, pp. 557- 
()1G. (Dec, 1892.) 

14. Select orations of Burke and Web- 
ster, with introduction and notes. (Joint 
author with C. W. Hodgiu.) Boston, 1892. 
Pp. 583. 

15. The historical significance of the 
Missouri Compromise. In Ann. Kept. Am. 
Hist. Asso. for 1893, pp. 251-297. 

IG. The study of politics in American 
college.s. In Am. Jour, of Pol. ( ^lay, 
1894. ) 

17. American political oration.s, re-ed- 
ited with historical notes. 4 vols. New 
York, 1896. 

18. The tariit' in legislation. In Chau- 
tauquan. (April, 1890. ) 

19. The Monroe doctrine and some of 
its applications. In Chautauquan. (Feb., 
1896.) 

20. To what extent may undergraduate 
students of history be trained in the use of 
the sources. //* Ann. Rep. Am. Hist. Asso. 
for 1897, pp. 45-49. 

21. France in the American Itevolution. 
In Chautauquan. (June, 1897.) 

22. The American Revolution, 1763- 
1783, being the chapters and passages re- 
lating to America from Lecky's history of 



England in the 18th century. Edited with 
bibliographical and historical notes. New 
York, 1898. Pp. xviii. 518. 

23. The making of the Constitution : a 
syllabus for ^Madison's .Tournal. Chicago, 
1898. Pp. 41. 

24. Washington's foreign policy and the 
Philippines, /h Independent. L. (Oct. 27, 
1898.) 

25. Uur plighted word and the Philip- 
pines. In Independent, L, pp. 1381-1383. 
(Nov. 17. 1898.) 

26. The American republic and its gov- 
ernment : an analysis of the government of 
the PTnited States with a consideration of its 
fundamental principles and of its relations 
to the States and Territories. New York, 
1902. Pp. iv, 410. 

27. Political parties and party problems 
in the United States : a sketch of American 
party hi.story and of the development and 
operations of party machinery, together 
with a consideration of certain party prob- 
lems in their relation to political morality. 
New York, 1902. Pp. ix, 314. 

28. Party politics in Indiana during the 
Civil War. In Ann. Rep. Am. Hist. A.ssoc. 
for 1902, I, pp. 225-251. 

29. Review of U. B. Phillip's 'Georgia 
and state rights.' In Am. Hist. Rev.. VIII, 
pp. 785-786. (July, 1903.) 

30. Review of Lecky's 'Leaders of pub- 
lic opinion in Ireland.' In Am. Hist. Rev., 
IX. pp. 375-377. (Jan.. 1904.1 

.'tl. Review of William Henry Smith's 
'A political history of slavery." I\i Am. Hist. 
Rev.. IX. pp. ::85-3S9. (Jan.. 1904. 1 



224 



PUBLICATIONS OF FORMER FACULTY 



***In the following' list the attempt has been made to gather together the publica- 
tions of former members of the Faculty up to the times when their connections with 
Indiana University ceased. The list is made as complete as the difficulty of the task and 
the time at the disposal of the compilers will permit; but it is realized that there must 
be many omissions, both of names of authors and of titles of publications, which the list 
as planned should include. 



Edwin George Baldwin, 
in Latin, 1898-1899. 



^I.A. Instructor Sanford Bell, Assistant Professor of Ped- 
agogy, 1898-1900. See Alumni list. 



1. The laws of 
text and translation. 
1899. Pp. 8. 



the twelve tables : 
Bloomington, Ind. 



Elisha Ballantine, D.D., LL.D. Pro- 
fessor of Mathematics, 1854-1856 ; Pro- 
fessor of Greek, 1856-1863; 1867-1878. 
Acting President, 1884 ; Vice President, 
1884-1886. Died March 31, 1886, at 
Bloomington, Ind. 

1. Christ, His own witness ; or the 
words of Jesus concerning Himself. New 
York, 1877. 

2. Old age ; two discourses delivered at 
Bloomington, Ind. Bloomington, Ind., 1879. 
Pp. 22. 



David Demaree Banta, Dean of the School 
of Law, 1890-96. Sec Alumni list. 



Earl Barnes, Professor of European 
History, 1889-90. Sec Alumni list. 



Charles Henry Beeson, Tutor in Latin, 
1894-95; Instructor in Latin, 1895-96. 
See Alumni list. 



George Augustus Bicknell, A.B., LL.B., 
LL.D. (1864). Professor of Law, 1861- 
70. 

1. Commentary on bankrupt law. 
New York, 1841. 

2. About 2.50 judicial decisions, as 
judge of the Second (Indiana) .Judicial 
Circuit (1852-76). 

3. Bicknell's civil practice. Pp. 
2d edition. 1871. 

4. Bicknell's criminal -practice. 
500, 2d edition. 1871. 



700, 
Pp. 



Ernest Ludlow Bogart, A.M., Ph.D. 
Assistant Professor of Economics and 
Social Science, 1898-1900. Now Pro- 
fessor of Economics and Sociology, 
Oberlin College, Oberlin, Ohio. 

1. Financial procedure in the State 
legislatures. In Ann. Am. Acad. Soc. Pol. 
Sci., VIII, pp. 2.36-253. (Sept., 1896.) 

2. Geschichte der Volkspartei in den 
Vereinigten Staaten von Nord-Amerika. In 
Jahrbiicher fiir Nationalokonomie und Sta- 
tistik, LXVII, pp. .577-624. (Oct., 1896.) 

3. Die Finanzverhaltnisse der Einzel- 
staaten in den Vereinigten Staaten von 
Nord-Amerika. .Jena, 1897. Pp. xiii, 157. 



(16) 



225 



Indiana University 



\_Bogart 



4. Die Geschichte der Nationalschuld 
der ^'ereinigten Staaten von Nord-Amerika. 
In Jahrbiicher fiir Nationaliikoiiomie und 
Statistik, LXX, pp. GG-8S. (Jan., 1898.) 

5. Housing of the working people in 
Youkers. In Economic Studies of Am. Econ. 
Assoc, III, pp. 37.3-;:!47. (Oct.. 1808.) 

6. Public employment bureaus in the 
United States and (Germany. In Quart. 
Jour. Econ.. XIV, pp. 341-o77. (May, 
1900.) 

7. Ten or twelve review articles in 
Political Science Quarterly, Annals of the 
American Academy, and Jahrbiicher fiir 
Nationalokonomie. 



Richard Gause BooiXE, Ph.D. Professor of 
Pedagogics, 188G-189.J. Now editor of 
'Education.' 

1. Education in the United States. 
New York, 1889. I'p. xii, 402. 

2. History of education in Indiana. 
New York, 1892. Pp. xi, 454. 

3. Results under an elective system. 
In Educ. Rev., IV, 53-73, 142-156; 16 
tables. (June, Sept., 1892.) 



John Casper Branner, I'rofessor of Geol- 
ogy, 1885-91. /S'ee Alumni list. 



James Ray McCorkle Bryant, Professor 
of Law, 1856-1861. Died Feb. 25, 1866. 
1. A baccalaureate address to the grad- 
uating class of the Law Department of In- 
diana University, March 24, 1858. Bloom- 
ington, Ind., 1858. Pp. 19. 

Douglas Houghton Campbell, Ph.D. 
Professor of Botany, 1888-1891. Now 
Profesor of Botany, Leland Stanford 
Junior University, Stanford University, 
Cal. 
1. The Botanical Institute at Tiibin- 

gen. In Bot. Gaz. for Jan., 1888. 



2. The staining of the living nuclei. 
In Untersuchungen aus dem Bot. Inst, zu 
Tubingen. (1888.) 

3. A meeting of the (ierman Botanical 
Society. In Bot. Gaz. for .Tune, 1888. 

4. The paraffin imbedding process in 
botany. In Bot. Gaz. for .June, 1888. 

5. The systematic position of the 
Rhizocarpe*. /// Bull. Tor. Bot. Club for 
Oct., 188S. 

6. Report of the Cleveland meetings of 
the Botanical Club of the A. A. A. S. In 
Torrey Bull, for Oct., 1888. 

7. The development of Pilularia glob- 
ulifera. In Ann. of Bot., II, No. 3. (1888.) 

8. Einige Notizen iiber die Keimung 
von ^larsilia segyptaca. In Berichte der 
Deut. Bot. Gesell. for Dec. 1888. 

9. On the affinities of the Filicineae. 
In Bot. Gaz. for Jan.. 1890. 

10. Studies in cell-division. /*/ Bull. 
Tor. Bot. Club for March. 1890. 

n. Elements of structural and sys- 
tematic botany. New Y'ork, 1890. 

12. Contributions to the life-history of 
Isoetes. /;/ Ann. Bot., V. pp. 231-2.58 ; 6 
plates. (1891.) 

13. Notes on the apical growth in the 
roots of Osmunda and Botrychium. In Bot. 
Gaz., XVI, pp. 37-42 : 1 plate. (1891.) 

John Rogers Commons, A.M. Professor of 
Economics and Social Science, Indiana 
University. 1892-1895. Now Assistant 
Secretary, National Civic Federation, 
New York City. 

1. The Christian minister and sociol- 
ogy. //( Lend a Hand, VIII, p. 117. (Feb., 
1892. ) 

2. I'roportional representation. In 
Ann. Am. Acad. Pol. Sci., II, pp. 700-707. 
(March, 1892.) 

3. Natural monopolies and protection. 
In Quar. Jour. Econ., VI, pp. 479-484. 
(July, 1892.) 



226 



Griggs ] 



Bibliography : Former Faculty 



4. How to abolish the gerrymander. 
In Rev. of Rev., VI, p. 541. (Dec, 1892.) 

.5. The church and poverty in cities. 
In Charities Rev., II, pp. 347-356. (May, 
1893.) 

G. The distribution of wealth. New 
York. 1893. Pp. x, 2.58. 

7. Social reform and the church. New 
York, 1894. Pp. x, 176. 

8. State supervision for cities. In 
Ann. Am. Acad. Pol. Sci., V, pp. 865-881. 
(May, 1895.) 

9. Progressive individualism. In Am. 
Mag. Civics, VI, pp. 561-574. (June, 1895.) 

10. Taxation in Chicago and Philadel- 
phia. In Jour. Pol. Econ., Ill, pp. 434-460. 
(Sept.. 1895.) 



Ind., vol. 1 (1902), pp. 207; vol. II (in 
press ) . 



John Merle Coulter, President of the Uni- 
versity and Professor of Botany, 1891- 
93. See Alnmni list. 



Richard Heath Dabney, Ph.D. Professor 
of History, 1886-89. 

1. The causes of the French revolu- 
tion. New York, 1888. Pp. x, 297. 



William Mitchell Daily, D.D., LL.D. 
President of the University, 1853-59. 
8ee Aluumi list. 



George Flavel Daneorth, Ph.B. Libra- 
rian, 1898-1903. Bloomingtou, Ind. 

1. Catalogue of the Barnes reference 
library, Cornell University. Ithaca, N. Y., 
1897. 

2. United States catalog, books in 
print, 1899. Bloomington, Ind., 1900. Pp. 
1112. 

3. Quarterly bibliography of books re- 
viewed in leading periodicals. Bloomington, 



Fletcher Bascom Dresslar, Instructor in 
Psychology, Sept-Dec, 1892. See 
Alumni list. 



Frank Drew, In.structor in Philosophy, 
1895-96. See Alumni list. 



Frank Albert Fetter, Professor of Eco- 
nomics and Social Science, 1895-98. 
See Alumni list. 



Samuel Garner, Professor of Romance 
Languages, 1882-1887. Now Professor 
of Romance Languages, U. S. Naval 
Academy, Annapolis, Md. 

1. Review of Julius Siede's 'Syntak- 
tische Eigentiimlichkeiten der Umgangs- 
sprache weniger gebildeter Pariser.' In 
Mod. Lang. Notes, I, pp. 73-75. (1886.) 

2. A much needed reform. In Mod. 
Lang. Notes, I, pp. 52-53. (1886.) 

3. Report on Romania. In Am. Jour. 
PhiloL, VII, No. 1. (1886.) 

4. The gerundial construction in the 
Romanic languages. In Mod. Lang. Notes, 
II, pp. 109-117. (1887.) 



Charles Henry Gilbert, Professor of 
Zoology, 1888-1891. See Alumni list. 



Oliver Edmunds Glenn, Instructor in 
INIathematics, 1902-1903. See Alumni 
list. 



Edward Howard Griggs, Instructor in 
English, 1889-90 ; Associate Professor of 
English, 1890-91 ; Professor of General 
Literature, 1891-93. See Alumni list. 



22^ 



Indiana University 



iHall 



Baynard Rush Hall, Principal of Indiana 
Seminary, 1824-1828; Professor of An- 
cient Languages, 1828-1831. Died Jan. 
23, 1863, at Brooklyn, N. Y. 

1. Righteousness the safe-guard and 
glory of a nation ; a sermon preached in the 
Representative Hall, at Indianapolis, Indi- 
ana, December 31, 182G. Pp. 23. 

2. Something for everybody. New 
York, 1846. Pp. viii, 223. 

3. The new purchase ; or early years 
in the far West. 1st ed., New York, 1843. 
Vol. I, pp. 300; vol. II, pp. 316. 2d ed., 
New Albany, Ind., 1855. Pp. v, 471. 



Launcelot Minor Harris, Ph.D. Instruc- 
tor in English, 1893-94 ; Assistant Pro- 
fessor of English, 1894-96. Now Pro- 
fessor of English, College of Charles- 
ton. Charleston, S. C. 



1. The Creoles of New Orleans. 
Southern Collegian for 1896. 



In 



Martin Luther Hoffman, Instructor in 
Mathematics, 1896-97. See Alumni list. 



Walter Raleigh Houghton, Principal of 
the Preparatory Department, 1873-84. 
See Alumni li.st. 



Joseph Henry Howard, Assistant Pro- 
fessor of Latin, 1894-1901. See Alumni 
list. 



George Maxwell Howe, Instructor in 
German, 1893-95. See Alumni list. 



Ernest Wilson Huffcut, LL.B., Professor 
of Law, 1890-92. Now Dean of the 
School of Law, Cornell University, 
Ithaca, N. Y. 

1. English in the preparatoi-y schools. 
(Monographs on education.) Boston, 1892. 
Pp. 28. 



Jerejiiah Whipple Jenks, Ph.D. Profes- 
sor of Economics and Social Science, 
1889-1891. Now Professor of Political 
Economy and Politics, Cornell Univer- 
sity, Ithaca, N. Y. 



1. 
state. 

1889. ) 



Road legislation for the American 
In Monog. Am. Econ. A.ssoc. (May, 



2. The development of the whiskey 
trust. In Pol. Sci. Quart, for June, 1889. 

3. The economic outlook : review of 
David A. Wells's 'Recent economic changes.' 
In Dial for Dec, 1889. 

4. Trusts and the people. In States- 
man for Dec, 1889. 

5. Review of Y'eijiro Ono's 'The in- 
dustrial transition in Japan' (jMonograph 
of Am. Econ. Asso. ). In Pol. Sci. Quart, 
for 1890. 

6. The needs of the farmer. In West- 
ern Home and Farm for Dec, 1890. 

7. Review of Theodora Hertzka's 
'Freiland.' In Pol. Sci. Quart, for Dec, 
1890. 

S. Schoolbook legislation. In Pol. Sci. 
Quart, for March, 1891. 

9. Die Trusts in den Vereinigten 
Staaten von Amerika. In Jahrb. f. Nation- 
alok. u. Stat, for Jan., 1891. 

10. Review of J. N. Keynes's 'The scope 
and method of economic science.' In Pol. 
Sci. Quart, for June, 1891. 

11. Land transfer reform. In Ann. Am. 
Acad. Pol. Soc Sci. for June, 1891. 

12. The university extension movement 
in Indiana. In Book Notes for May, 1891. 



Hans Carl Gunther von Jagemann, 
Ph.D. Professor of Germanic Lan- 
guages and Philology, 1885-1889. Now 
Professor of Germanic Philology, Har- 
vard University, Cambridge, Mass. 

1. On the relation of the Anglo-Nor- 
man vowel system to the Norman words in 



228 



Jordan ] 



Bibliography : Former Faculty 



English. In Trans. Am. Philol. Asso., XV, 
pp. 66-87. (1884.) 

2. On the genitive in old French. In 
Proc. Mod. Lang. Asso., I. (1884.) 

3. On the genitive in old French. In 
Trans. JNIod. Lang. Asso. of Am., I, pp. 64- 
83. (1884-1885.) 

4. On the use of English in teaching 
foreign languages. //; Trans. ^lod. Lang. 
Asso. of Am., I, pp. 216-226. (1884-1885.) 

5. On the etymology of inveigle. In 
Mod. Lang. Notes, I, pp. 18. (1886.) 

6. Review of E. Courtonne's 'Langue 
Internationale Neo-Latine.' In Mod. Lang. 
Notes, 1, pp. 38-39. (1886.) 

7. Review of E. Pillissier's 'French 
roots and their families.' In Mod. Lang. 
Notes, I, p. 125. (1886.) 

8. Review of R. Kleiupaul's 'Men- 
schen und Volkernamen.' In Science, VII, 
pp. 403-404. (1886.) 

9. Review of Jean Roemer's 'Origin of 
the English people and the English lan- 
guage.' In Dial for Feb., 1887 ; also in 
Mod. Lang. Notes for March, 1888. 

10. Review of Balg's 'Comparative 
glossary of the Gothic language.' In Mod. 
Lang. Notes for April, 1888. 

11. Fouque's Undine ; a new edition, 
with notes and vocabulary. New York, 
1889. 



Daat:d Starr Jordan, LL.D. Professor of 
Biology. 1879-1885; President of the 
University, 1885-1891. Now President 
of Leland Stanford Junior University, 
Stanford University, Cal. 

1. The colors of vegetation. In Am. 
Nat,, VII, pp. 65-70. (1873.) 

2. Hoof-rot in sheep. /;( Prairie 
Farmer, 1873. 

3. A popular key to the birds, reptiles, 
batrachians, and fishes of the Northern 
United States, east of the Mississippi River. 



(Joint author with Balfour H. Van Vleck.) 
Appleton, Wis. Pp. 100. (1874.) 

4. The flora of Penikese island. In 
Am. Nat, VIII, pp. 193-187. (1874.) 

5. A key to the higher algae of the 
Atlantic coast between Newfoundland and 
Florida. In Am. Nat., VIII, pp. 398-403, 
479-493. (1874.) 

6. The Sisco of lake Tippecanoe. In 
Am. Nat., IX, pp. 135-138. (1875.) 

7. The Sisco of lake Tippecanoe and 
its relatives. In Rep. Geol. Surv. Indiana 
for 1876. 

8. A synopsis of the fishes to be looked 
for in Indiana. In Rep. Geol. Surv. Indi- 
ana for 1876. 

9. The genus Pomoxys Rafinesque. 
(Joint author with Herbert Edson Cope- 
land.) In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadel- 
phia, XXVIII, pp. 68-71. (1876.) 

10. Concerning the fishes of the Ich- 
thyologia Ohiensis. In Bull. Buffalo Soc. 
Nat. Hist, 1876, pp. 91-97. (1876.) 

11. Manual of the vertebrates of the 
Northern United States, including the dis- 
trict east of the Mississippi river and north 
of North Carolina and Tennessee, exclusive 
of marine species. Chicago, 1876. 

12. Johnny darters. (Joint author 
with H. E. Copelaud.) In Am. Nat., X, 
pp. 335-341. (1876.) 

13. The sand-darter. (Joint author 
with H. E. Copeland.) In Am. Nat., XI, 
pp. 86-88. (1877.) 

14. List of fishes of Indiana. (Joint 
author with Charles Henry Gilbert.) In 
Indiana Farmer, Jan. 17, 1877. 

15. A story of a stone. In St. Nich- 
olas, Feb. 1877. 

16. Check-list of the fishes of the fresh 
waters of North America. (Joint author 
with H. E. Copeland.) In Bull. Buffalo 
Soc. Nat Hist., II, pp. 33-i64. (1877.) 

17. On the fishes of Northern Indiana. 
In Proc. Acad. Nat Sci. Philadelphia, 
XXIX, pp. 42-82. (1877.) 



229 



Indiana University 



\_ J or dan 



18. On the genera of North American 
fresh-water fishes. (Joint author with C. H. 
Gilbert.) In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila- 
delphia, XXIX, pp. 83-104. (1877.) 

19. A partial synopsis of the fishes of 
Upper Georgia. In Ann. Lye. Nat. Hist., 
New York, XI, pp. 307-377. (1877.) 

20. Contributions to North American 
ichthyology, I. Review of Rafine-sque's 
'Memoirs on North American fishe.s.' In 
Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., IX, p. 53. (1877.) 

21. Contributions to North American 
ichthyology, II. A. Notes on Cottidse, 
Etheostomatidse, Percidse, Centrarchidse, 
etc., with revisions of genera and descrip- 
tions of new or little known species. B. 
Synopsis of the Siluridae of the United 
States. In Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., X. p. 116. 
(1877.) 

22. On Lagochila, a new genus of 
catostomoid fishes. (Joint author with 
Alembert Winthrop Brayton. ) //) Proc. 
Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., XXIX, pp. 280-283. 
(1877.) 

23. On the distribution of fresh-water 
fishes. In Am. Nat., XI, pp. G07-G13. 
(1877.) ^ 

24. On the distribution of fresh-water 
fishes of the United States. In Ann. N. Y. 
Acad. Sci., I, pp. 92-120. (1878.) 

25. A catalogue of the fishes of Illi- 
nois. In Illinois Lab. Nat. Hist., II. 
(1878.) 

26. Catalogue of the fishes of Indiana. 
In 27th Ann. Rep. Indiana State Board of 
Agr. for 1877, XIX. (1878.) 

27. Manual of the vertebrates of the 
Northern United States, including the dis- 
trict east of the Mississippi river and north 
of North Carolina and Tennessee, exclusive 
of marine species. Second edition, revised 
and enlarged. Chicago, 1878. Pp. 407. 

28. Contributions to North American 
ichthyology, based primarily on the collec- 
tions of the U. S. Nat. Mus. III. (Joint 
author with A. W. Brayton.) A. On the 



distribution of the fishes of the Alleghany 
region of South Carolina, Georgia, and 
Tennessee, with descriptions of new or little 
known species. B. A synopsis of the fam- 
ily Catostomida?. In Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
XII, p. 237. (1878.) 

29. Notes on a collection of fishes from 
Clackamas river, Oregon. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus.. I. pp. 69-119. (1878.) 

30. Notes on a collection of fishes from 
the Rio Grande at Brownsville, Texas. In 
Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. Ter., I^^ pp. 397- 
406. (1878.) 

31. A catalogue of the fishes of the 
fresh waters of North America. //( Bull. 
U. S. Geol. Surv. Ter., IV, pp. 407-442. 
(1878.) 

32. Notes on a collection of fishes from 
the Rio Grande at Brownsville, Texas, con- 
tinued. In Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. Ter., IV, 
pp. 663-667. 

33. Report on the collection of fishes 
made by Dr. Elliott Cones, U. S. A., in 
Dakota and ^Montana, during the seasons 
of 1873 and 1874. In Bull. U. S. Geol. 
Surv., IV, pp. 777-799. (1878.) 

34. Report on the fishes collected during 
the years 1875, 1876, and 1877, in California 
and Nevada. (.Joint author with Henry W. 
Ilenshaw.) In Rep. Geol. Surv. W. 100th 
Mer., for 1878. Appendix K, pp. 187-200. 

35. Notes on the fishes of Beaufort 
Harbor, North Carolina. (Joint author 
with C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., I, 36.5-388. (1879.) 

36. Notes on certain typical specimens 
of American fishes in the British INIuseum 
and in the Museum d'Histoire Naturelle at 
Paris. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., II, pp. 
218-226. (1880.) 

37. Description of new species of North 
American fislies. In Proc. U. S. Nat. ^lus., 
II, pp. 235-241. (1880.) 

38. Notes on a collection of fishes ob- 
tained in the streams of Guanajuato, and in 
Chapala lake, Mexico, by Prof. A. Duges. 



230 



Jordan^ 



Bibliography : Former Faculty 



/(( Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., II, pp. 298-301. 
(ISSO.) 

3!). Manual of the vertebrates of the 
Northern United State.s, including the dis- 
trict ea.st of the JMississippi river and north 
of North Carolina and Tennessee, exclusive 
of marine species. Third edition, revised 
and enlarged. Chicago, ISSO, p. 40G. 

40. Notes on a collection of fishes from 
East Florida, obtained by Dr. J. A. Hen- 
shall. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 
17-21. (1880.) 

41. Notes on a collection of fishes from 
St. John's river, Florida, obtained by Mr. 
A. H. Curtiss. In Proc. U. S. Nat. :Mus.. 
Ill, p. 22. (ISSO.) 

42. Notes on a collection of fishes from 
San Diego, California. (Joint author with 
C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
III. pp. 23-34. (1880.) 

43. Description of a new flounder 
(Xystreurys liolepis) from Santa Catalina 
island, California. (Joint author with 
C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
Ill, pp. 34-36. (1880.) 

44. Description of a new ray ( Platy- 
rhina triseriata) from the coast of Califor 
nia. (Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 36-38. 
(1880.) 

45. Description of a new .species of 
rock cod (Sebastichthys serriceps) from 
the coast of California. (Joint author with 
C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. ]Mus., 
Ill, pp. 38-40. (1880.) 

46. On the occurrence of Cephaloscyl- 
lium laticeps (Diimeril) Gill on the coast 
of California. (Joint author with C. H. 
Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, 
pp. 40-42. (1880.) 

. 47. On the oil shark of Southern Cali- 
fornia (Galeorhinus galeus) . (Joint author 
with C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., Ill, pp. 42-43. (1880.) 

48. Description of a new flounder 
(Pleuronichthys verticalis) from the coast 



of California, with notes on other specie!?. 

(Joint author with C. II. Gilbert.) In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 49-51. 

(1880.) 

49. Notes on sharks from the coast of 
California. (Joint author with C. H. Gil- 
bert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 
51-.52. ( ISSO. ) 

50. On the generic relations of Platy- 
rhina exasperata. (Joint author with C. H. 
Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, p. 
53. (1880.) 

51. Description of a new species of 
Sebastichthys (Sebastichthys miniatus) 
from Monterey Bay, California. (Joint 
author with C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 70-73. (1880.) 

.52. Description of a new species of rock- 
fish (Sebastichthys carnatus) from the 
coa.st of California. (Joint author with 
C. 11. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
III. pp. 73-75. (1880.) 

53. Description of a new species of ray 
(liaia stellulata) from Monterey, California. 
(Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., pp. 133-135. 
(1880.) 

54. Description of new species of 
Xiphister and Apodichthys, from Monterey, 
California. (Joint author with C. H. Gil- 
bert.) In I'roc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 
135-140. (1880.) 

55. Description of two new species of 
Sebastichthys (Sebastichthys entomelas 
and Sebastichthys rhodochloris) from Mon- 
terey Bay, California. (Joint author with 
C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
Ill, pp. 142-14(1 (1880.) 

56. Description of a new Agonoid fish 
( Brachyopsis xyosternus) from Monterey 
Bay, California. (Joint author with G. H. 
Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill 
pp. 152-154. (1880.) 

57. Description of a new flounder 
(Ilippoglossoides exilis) from the coast of 
California. (Joint author with C. H. Gil' 



231 



Indiana University 



\_Jordan 



bert.) Ill I'roc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 
154-156. (1880.) 

58. Description of a uew species of ray 
(Raia rliina) from the coast of California. 
(Joint autlior with C. H. Gilbert.) In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 251-253. 
(1880.) 

59. Description of two new species of 
fishes (Ascelichthys rhodorns and Scytalina 
cerdale) from Neah Bay, Washington terri- 
tory. (Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 264-208. 
(1880.) 

60. Description of two new species of 
Scopeloid fishes (Sudis ringens and Mycto- 
phum crenulare) from Santa Barbara Chan- 
nel, California. (Joint author with C. H. 
Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., III. 
pp. 273-276. (1880.) 

61. Description of two new species of 
flounders (Parophrys ischyrus and Hippo- 
glossoides elassodon) from Puget Sound. 
(Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 276-280. (1880.) 

62. Description of seven new species of 
Sebastoid fishes from the coast of California. 
(Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 287-298. 
(1880.) 

63. Description of a new Embiotocoid 
(Abeona aurora) from Monterey, California, 
with notes on a related species. (Joint 
author with C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 299-301. (1880.) 

64. Description of a new flounder 
(Platysomatichthys stomias) from the coast 
of California. (Joint author with C. H. 
Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, 
pp. 301-303. (1880.) 

65. Description of a new Embiotocoid 
fish (Cymatogaster rosaceus) from the coast 
of California. (Joint author with C. H. 
Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, 
pp. 303-305. (1880.) 

66. Description of a new species of 
deep-water fish (Icichthys lockingtoni) from 



the coast of California. (Joint author with 
C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
Ill, pp. 305-30S. (1880.) 

(>7. Description of a new Embiotocoid 
fish (Ditrema atripes) from the coast of 
California. (Joint author with C. H. Gil- 
bert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 
320-322. (1880.) 

OS. Description of a new Scorpsenoid 
fish ( Sebastichthys maliger) from the coast 
of California. (Joint author with C. II. 
Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 
322-324. (1880.) 

69. Notes on a forgotten paper of Dr. 
Ayres, and its bearing on the nomenclature 
of the Cyprinoid fishes of the San Francisco 
markets. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 
325-327. (1880.) 

70. Notes on Sema and Dacentrus. /;) 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, p. 327. (1880.) 

71. Description of a new Scorpsenoid 
fish ( Sebastichthys proriger) from Mon- 
terey Bay, California. (Joint author with 
C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
Ill, pp. .327-329. (1880.) 

72. Description of a new Agonoid 
(Agonus vulsus) from the coast of Califor- 
nia. (Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 330-332. 
(1880.) 

73. Description of a new species of 
Hemirhamphus (Hemirhamphus rosa?) from 
the coast of California. (Joint author with 
C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
Ill, pp. 335-336. (1880.) 

74. Description of a new species of 
Notidanoid shark (Hexanchus corinus) from 
the Pacific coast of the United States. 
(Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 352-355. 
(1880.) 

75. Scientific names of the black bass. 
In Forest and Stream, Nov. 28, 1880. p. 
340. (Reprinted in Henshall's 'Book of the 
black bass.) 

76. Description of a new species of 



232 



Jordan ] 



Bibliography : Former Faculty 



Nemichthys (Nemichthys avocetta) from 
Puget Sound. (Joiut author with C. H. 
Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, 
409-410. (1881.) 

77. Description of a new species of 
Paralepis (Paralepis coruscans) from the 
Straits of Juan de Fuca. (Joint author 
with C. H. Gilbert.) /;) Proo. L. S. Nat. 
Mus., pp. 411-41.3. (1S81.) 

78. List of the fishes of the Pacific coast 
of the United States, with a table showing 
the distribution of the species. (Joint 
author with C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 452-458. (1881.) 

79. On the generic relations of Belone 
exilis Grd. (Joint author with C. H. Gil- 
bert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, p. 
459. (1881.) 

80. Notes on a collection of fishes from 
Utah Lake. (Joint author with C. H. Gil- 
bert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 
459-465. (1881.) 

81. Description of a new s^pecies of rock 
fish ( Sebastichthys chrysomelas) from the 
■coast of California. (Joint author with 
C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
Ill, p. 465. (1881.) 

82. Description of a new species of 
Caranax (Caranas beani) from Beaufort, 
North Carolina. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
Ill, pp. 486-488. (1881.) 

83. Observations on the salmon of the 
Pacific. (Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) 
In Am. Nat., XV, pp. 177-186. (1881.) 

84. Check-list of duplicates of fishes 
from the Pacific coast of North America, 
distributed by the Smithsonian Institution in 
behalf of the U. S. Nat. Mus. (Joint author 
with Piei-re Louis Jouy.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., IV, pp. 1-18. (1881.) 

85. Notes on the fishes of the Pacific 
coast of the United States. (Joiut author 
with C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., IV, p. 29-70. (1881.) 

86. Description of Sebastichthys mys- 
tinus. (Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) 



In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., IV, pp. 70-72. 
(1881.) 

87. Description of a new species of Pty- 
chochilus (Ptychochilus harfordi) from Sac- 
ramento river. (Joint author with C. H. 
Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., IV, pp. 
72-73. (1881.) 

88. Note on Raia inornata. (Joint 
author with C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., IV, pp. 73-74. (1881.) 

89. Story of a salmon. In Pop. Sci. 
Mo., XIX, pp. 1-6. (188l.) 

90. On the movements of plants. Re- 
view of Darwin's 'Power of movement in 
plants.' In Dial, March, 1881. 

91. Notes on a collection of fishes made 
by Lieut. Henry E. Nichols, U. S. N., on the 
west coast of Mexico, with descriptions of 
new species. (Joint author with C. H. Gil- 
bert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., IV, pp. 
225-233. (1881.) 

92. List of fishes collected by Lieut. 
Henry E. Nichols, U. S. N., in the Gulf of 
California, and on the west coast of Lower 
California, with descriptions of four new 
species. (Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) 
//( Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., IV, pp. 273-279. 
(1882.) 

93. Description of thirty-three new spe- 
cies of fishes from Mazatlan, Mexico. (Joint 
author with C. H. Gilbert.) //( Proc. U. S. 
Nat. jNIus., IV, pp. 338-365. (1882.) 

94. Description of a new species «^f 
Pomadasj's from Mazatlan, with a key to the 
species known to inhabit the Pacific coasts 
of tropical America. (.Joint author with C. 
H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., IV, 
pp. 383-388. ( 1882. ) 

95. Description of a new species of 
Xenichthys (Xenichthys xenurus) from the 
west coast of Central America. (Joint 
author with C. H. Gilbert.) In I'roc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., IV, p. 454. (1882.) 

96. Descriptions of five new species of 
fishes from Mazatlan, Mexico. (Joint 



233 



Indiana University 



^Jordan 



uuthur with C. II. Gilbert.) In I'roc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., IV, pp. 458-4G3. (1SS2.) 

97. Ascent of the Matterhorn. In Our 
Continent, Nov. 2, 1882. 

98. Description of four new species of 
sharks from Mazatlan, Mexico. (Joint 
autlior with C. H. Gilbert.) In Froc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., V, pp. 102-110. (1882.) 

90. Description of a new shark (Car- 
charias lamiella) from San Diego, Cali- 
fornia. (Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) 
/;/ Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.. V, pp. 110-111. 
(1882.) 

100. Bull-trout and I'ompano. In Forest 
and Stream. April 20, 1882. 

101. Darwin. /(( Dial, May 2. 1882. 

102. Review of Huxley's 'Science and 
culture.- In Dial, May 9. 1882. 

103. Descriptions of nineteen new species 
of fishes from the Bay of Panama. (Joint 
author with C. H. Gilbert.) In Bull. U. S. 
Fish Comm., I, pp. 306-335. (1882.) 

104. Some ichthyological terms. In 
Forest and Stream, Aug. 20, 1882. 

105. The . air we breathe. Ueview of 
Tyndall's "Floating matter in the air.' In 
Dial, Sept., 1882, pp. 90-93. 

106. Description of a new Cyprinodont 
(Zygouectes inurus) from southern Illinois, 
(Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus., V, pp. 143-144. (1882.) 

107. Description of a new species of 
Uranidea (Uranidea poUicaris) from Lake 
Michigan. (Joint author with C. H. Gil- 
bert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., V, pp. 222- 
223. (1882.) 

108. Notes on fishes observed about Pen- 
sacola, Florida, and Galveston, Texas, with 
description of new species. (Joint author 
with C. II. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., V, pp. 241-307. (1882.) 

109. Description of a new species of 
Blenny ( Isesthes gilberti ) from Santa Bar- 
bara, California. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
V, pp. 349-351. (1882.) 

110. Description of a new species of Con- 



don (Condon serrifer) from Boca Soledad, 
Lower California. (.Toint author with C. H. 
Gilbert.) /;( I'roc. U. S. Nat. Mus., V, pp. 
351-352. (1882.) 

111. Catalogue of the fishes collected by 
^Ir. .Tohn Xantus at Cape San Lucas, which 
are now in the United States National Mu- 
seum, with descriptions of eight new species. 
(Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mns.. V, pp. 353-371. (1882.) 

112. List of fishes collected by Mr. John 
Xantus at Colima, Mexico. (Joint author 
with C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
:Mus.. V. pp. 371-372. (1882.) 

113. List of fishe.s collected at Panama 
by Capt. .John ^I. Dow, now in the United 
States National Museum. (.Joint author 
with C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., V, pp. 37.3-378. (1882.) 

114. List of a collection of fishes made 
by ^Ir. L. Belding, near Cape Sau Lucas, 
Lower California. (Joint author with C. H. 
Gilbert.) /;( Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.. V. pp. 
.878-381. (1882.) 

115. List of fishes collected at Panama 
by Itev. ^Ir. Powell, now preserved in the 
United States National Museum. (Joint 
author with C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus.. V. pp. 381-382. (1882.) 

116. Descriptions of two new species of 
fishes ( Seba.stichthys umbro.sus and Cithar- 
ichthys stigmams) collected at Santa Bar- 
bara, California, by Andrea Larco. In Proc. 
v. S. Nat. Mus.. V. pp. 410-412. (1882.) 

117. The Gasper-Gou. In Forest and 
Stream, Oct. 5, 1882, p. 192. 

118. A review of the Siluroid fishes 
found on the Pacific coast of tropical Amer- 
ica, with descriptions of three new species. 
(Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) In Bull. 
U. S. Fish Comm., II, pp. 34-54. (1882.) 

119. List of fishes collected at Mazatlan, 
Mexico, by C. H. Gilbert. (Joint author 
with C. H. Gilbert.) In Bull. U. S. Fish 
Coram.. II, pp. 105-108. (1882.) 

120. List of fishes collected at Panama 



234 



Jordan^ 



Bibliography : Former Faculty 



by C. II. (lilhert. (Joint author with C. 
H. Gilbert.) //; Bull. U. S. Fish Coram., 
II, pp. 109-111. (1882.) 

121. Description of a new .species of 
Goby (Gobio.soma ios) from Vancouver's is- 
land. (Joint author with C. II. Gilbert.) 
In rroc. U. S. Nat. Mus., V, pp. 4:i7-438. 
(1882.) 

122. The blue-back trout (Salvelinus 
oquassa). /// Forest and Stream, Dec, 
1882, p. 389. 

123. Dr. Henshall's scientific nomencla- 
ture again. In Am. Angler, Dec. 16, 1882, 
p. 391. 

124. The nomenclature of our birds. Re- 
view of the Coues check-list. In Dial, Dec, 
1882, pp. 165-167. 

125. Report on the fishes of Ohio. In 
Rep. Geol. Surv. Ohio, sec. IV, vol. IV, pp. 
735-1002. (1882.) 

126. On certain neglected generic names 
of Lacepede. (Joint author with C. H. Gil- 
bert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., V, pp. 
570-576. (1883.) 

127. On the synonymy of the genus 
Bothus Rafinesque. (Joint author with C. 
H. Gilbert.) /;; Proc U. S. Nat. Mus., V, 
pp. 576-577. (1883.) 

128. Description of a new species of Ar- 
tedius (Artedius fenestralis) from Puget 
Sound. (Joint author with C. H. (jilbert. ) 
In I'roc U. S. Nat. Mus., V, pp. 577-579. 
(1883.) 

129. Description of a new species of Uro- 
lophus (U. asterias) from Mazatlan and 
Panama. (Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., V, pp. 579-580. 
(1883.) 

130. Notes on a collection of fishes from 
Charleston, South Carolina, with descrip- 
tions of three new species. (Joint author 
with C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., V, pp. 580-620. (1883.) 

131. List of fishes now in the museum 
of Yale College, collected by Prof. Frank 
H. Bradley at Panama, with descriptions 



of three new .species. (Joint author wirh 
C. II. Gilbert.) In Proc U. S. Nat. Mus., 
V, pp. 620-632. (1883.) 

132. Description of two new species of 
fishes (^Myrophis vafer and Chloroscombrus 
orqueta) from Panama. (Joint author with 
C. H. Gilbert. ) In Proc. U. S. Nat. IMus., 
V, pp. 645-047. (1883.) 

133. Description of a new eel ( Sidera 
castanea) from Mazatlan, Mexico. (Joint 
author with C. H. Gilbert.) /(( Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., V, pp. 647-648. (1883.) 

134. On the nomenclature of the genus 
Ophiehthys. (Joint author with C. H. Gil- 
bert. ) III Proc. U. S. Nat. ]Mus., V, pp. 
648-651. (1883.) 

135. Striped bass or rock-fisli. In For- 
est and Stream, Jan. 4, 1883, p. 450. 

136. New methods of anatomical dissec- 
tion. Review of Wilder and Gage's 'Ana- 
tomical technology as applied to the do- 
mestic cat.' In Dial, Jan., 1883, pp. 202- 
203. 

137. Contributions to North American 
ichthyology, based primarily on the collec- 
tions of the U. S. National Museum. IV. 
A synopsis of the fishes of North America. 
(Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) In Bull. 
U. S. Nat. :Mus., XVI, p. 1145. (1883.) 

138. Notes on the nomenclature of cer- 
tain North American fishes. (Joint author 
with C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus.. VI, pp. 110-111. (1883.) 

139. Description of two new species of 
fishes (Aprion ariommus and Ophidium 
beani) from Pensacola, Florida. (Joint au- 
thor with C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., VI, pp. 142-144. (1883.) 

140. A review of the American Carangi- 
nfe. (Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VI, pp. 198-207. 
(1883.) 

141. Note on the genera of Petromyzon- 
tida>. (Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) 
In Proc U. S. Nat. Mus., VI, p. 208. 
(1883.) 



235 



Indiana University 



\_ J or dan 



142. Description of a new Mura;uoid eel 
(Sidera clilevastes ) from the Galapagos is- 
lands. (Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) 
In rroc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VI, pp. 208-210. 
(1883.) 

143. Desci-iption of a new species of 
Rhinobatus ( Rhinobatus glaucostigma ) 
from Mazatlan, Mexico. (Joint author with 
O. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
VI, pp. 210-211. (1883.) 

144. List of fishes collected in the Clear 
Fork of the Cumberland, Whitley county, 
Kentucky, with descriptions of three new 
species. (Joint author with Joseph Swain.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VI, pp. 248-251. 
(1883.) 

145. Notes on American fishes, preserved 
in the museums of London, Paris, Berlin, 
and Copenhagen. In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 
Phila., XXXV, pp. 281-293. (1883.) 

146. Review of Boulenger's 'Catalogue 
of Batrachia gradientia in the British Mu- 
seum.' In Science, II, pp. 810. (1883.) 

147. Sketch of Felipe Poey. /*( Pop. Sci. 
Mo., XXV, pp. 547-552. (1884. 1 

148. Some gossip about Darwin. In 
Am. Nat., XVIII, p. 108. (1884.) 

149. The beginning of life. Review of 
G. Hilton Scribner's 'Where did life be- 
gin?' In Science, III, p. 264. (1884.) 

150. Review of Yarrow's check-list of 
North American reptilia and batrachia. In 
Science, III, p. 264. (1884.) 

151. The fishes of the Florida Keys 



In 



Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., IV, pp. 77-80. 
(1884.) 

152. Proposed propagation of catfish as 
a food-fish. In Bull. U. S. Fisa Comm., 
IV, p. 292. (1884.) 

153. Notes on fishes improperly included 
in the fauna of the United States. In 
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., XXXVI, pp. 
99-103. (1884.) 

154. A review of the species of the genus 
Calamus. (Joint author with C. H. Gil- 



bert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, pp. 
14-24. (1884.) 

155. Descriptions of ten new species of 
fishes from Key West, Florida. (Joint au- 
thor with C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., VII, pp. 24-32. (1884.) 

150. Note on Caranx ruber and Caranx 
bartholomsei. (Joint author with C. H. Gil- 
bert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, pp. 
32-33. (1884.) 

157. Notes on a collection of fishes from 
Pensacola, Florida, obtained by Silas 
Stearns, with descriptions of two new spe- 
cies (Exocoetus volador and Gnathypops 
mystacinus.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
VII, pp. 33-40. (1884.) 

158. Notes on iElurichthys eydouxii and 
Porichthys porosissimus. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., VII, pp. 40-41. (1884.) 

159. List of fishes from Egmont Key, 
Florida, in the museum of Yale College, with 
description of two new species. In Proc. 
Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., XXXVI, pp. 42-46. 
(1884.) 

160. The Canadian sea trout ( Salvelinus 
fontinalis immaculatus) . In Am. Field, 
July, 1884. 

161. The rainbow trout (Salmo gaird- 
neri irideus). In Forest and Stream, July, 
1884. 

162. Note on Calamus prorideus, a new 
species of Calamus. (Joint author with C. 
H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
VII, p. 150. (1884.) 

163. Descriptions of Scaroid fishes from 
Havana and Key West, including five new 
species. (Joint author with J. Swain.) In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, pp. 81-102. 
(1884.) 

164. List of fishes collected at Key West, 
Florida, with notes and descriptions. In 
Proc. II. S. Nat. Mus., VII. pp. 81-102. 
(1884.) 

165. An identification of the figures of 
fishes in Catesby's 'Natural history of Caro- 
lina, Florida, and the Bahama islands.' In 



236 



Jordan ] 



Bibliography: Former Faculty 



Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, pp. 190-199. 
(1884.) 

166. Notes on fishes collected by D. S. 
Jordan at Cedar Keys, Florida. (Joint au- 
thor with J. Swain.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., VII, pp. 230-234. (1884.) 

167. List of fi.shes observed in the St. 
John's river at Jacksonville, Florida. 

(Joint author with Seth Eugene Meek.) In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, pp. 23.5-237. 

(1884.) 

168. Notes on fishes collected at Guay- 
mas, Mexico, by Mr. H. V. Emeric, with 
a description of Gobiosoma histrio, a new • 
species. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, pp. 
260-261. (1884.) 

169. A review of the American species 
of marine Mugilidse. (Joint author with 
J. Swain.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, 
pp. 261-275. (1884.) 

170. A review of the species of the genus 
Hsemulon. (Joint author with J. Swain.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, pp. 281-317. 

(1884.) 

171. List of fishes collected in the vicin- 
ity of New Orleans by Dr. R. W. Shufeldt, 
U. S. A. /;( Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, 
pp. 318-322. (1884.) 

172. List of fishes collected in lake Jes- 
sup and Indiana river, Florida, by Mr. 
R. E. Earll, with descriptions of two new 
species. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, 
pp. 322-324. (1884.) 

173. A review of the American species 
of Epinephelus and related genera. (Joint 
author with J. Swain.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., VII, pp. 358-410. (1884.) 

174. A review of the species Lutjaninae 
and Hoplopagrinae found in American wa- 
ters. (Joint author with J. Swain.) In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, pp. 427-474. 
(1884.) 

175. Description of four new species of 
Cyprinidre in the United States National 
Museum. (Joint author with S. E. Meek.) 



In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, pp. 474- 
477. (1884.) 

176. Description of four new species t)t 
PcBcilichthys in the United States National 
Museum. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, 
pp. 477-480. (1884.) 

177. Description of Scisena sclera, a new 
species of Scirena from Mazatlan and Pan- 
ama. (Joint author with C. H. Gilbert.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, p. 480. 
(1884.) 

178. Description of Zygonectes zonifer, 
a new species of Zygonectes from Nashville, 
Georgia. (Joint author with S. E. Meek.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mu.s.. VII, p. 482. 
(1885.) 

179. Description of three new species of 
fishes (Prionotus stearnsi, Prionotus oph- 
ryas, and Anthias vivanus) collected at Pen- 
sacola by Mr. Silas Stearns. (Joint au- 
thor with J. Swain.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., VII, pp. 541-545. (1885.) 

180. Supplementary notes on North 
American fishes. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
VII, pp. 545-.548. (1885.) 

181. Description of a new species of Hy- 
bognathus (Hybognathus hayi) from Mis- 
sissippi. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, 
pp. 548-550. (1885.) 

182. List of fishes collected in Iowa and 
Missouri in August, 1884, with descriptions 
of three new species. (Joint author with 
S. E. Meek.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
VIIL pp. 1-17. (1885.) 

183. A review of the American species of 
flying fishes (Exoccetus). (Joint author 
with S. E. Meek.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., VIII, 44-67. (1885.) 

184. Notes on skeletons of Etheostomat- 
inse. (Joint author with C H. Eigenmann.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VIII. pp. 68-72. 
(1885.) r\ 

185. Note on the scientific name of the 
yellow perch, the striped bass, and other 
North American fishes. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., VIII, pp. 72-73. (1885.) 



23Y 



Indiana University 



[Jordan 



186. Note on Mr. Garmaii's paper on the 
American salmon and trout. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mns., VIII, pp. 81-83. (1885.) 

187. Identification of the species of Cy- 
prinida? and Catostomidae, described by Dr. 
Charles Girard in Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 
I'hila., 1S.jG. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
VIII, pp. 118-127. (1885.) 

188. On the Etheostoma variatum jf 
Kirtland. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VIII, 
pp. 1G3-1G5. (1885.) 

189. Note on Epinephelus nigritus. In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VIII. pp. 208-209. 
(1885.) 

190. A catalogue of the fishes known to 
inhabit tne waters of North America north 
of the Tropic of Cancer, with notes on the 
species discovered in 1883 and 1884. Wash- 
ington : Government Printing Office, Oct., 
1885. (Also in Rep. U. S. Fish Comm., 
XIII, pp. 789-973.) (1885.) 

191. A list of the fishes known from the 
Pacific coast of tropical America, from the 
Tropic of Cancer to Panama. In Proc. U. 
S. Nat. Mus., VIII, pp. 361-394. (1885.) 

192. Note on some Linnsean names of 
American fishes. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
VIII, pp. .394-.396. (1885.) 

193. The habits and the value for food 
of the American channel catfish (Ictalurus 
punctatus, Kafinesque.) In Bull. II. S. Fish 
Comm., V, p. 34. (1885.) 

194. Notes on fishes observed in Lake 
Superior. In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., V, 
pp. 191-192. (1885.) 

195. The mountain or salmon trout of 
Oregon. In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm.. V, p. 
310. (1885.) 

196. The fisheries and fishery industries 
of the United States. Prepared through the 
cooperation of the Commissioner of Fisher- 
ies and the Superintendent of the Tenth 
Census, by George Brown Goode, Assistant 
Director of the U. S. National Museum, and 
a staff of associates. Section 1, Natural 
history of useful aquatic animals, with an 



atlas of 227 plates. Washington : Govern- 
ment I'rinting Oflice, 1884 (Feb., 1885). 
Pp. 895. (Discussions of fresh-water 
fishes, chiefly by David S. Jordan ; of Pa- 
cific coast fishes, in collaboration with C. 
H. Gilbert.) 

197. A manual of the vertebrates of the 
eastern United States, including the region 
eaiit of the Mississippi river and north of 
the northern boundary of North Carolina 
and Tennessee, exclusive of marine species. 
Fourth edition, revised and enlarged. Chi- 
cago, 1885. 
■ 198. The standard natural history. III, 
110-173. (Part relating to soft-rayed 
fishes.) Boston, 1885. 

199. List of fishes collected in Arkansas, 
Indian Territory, and Texas, in September, 
1884, with notes and descriptions. (Joint 
author with C. H. Gilbert.) In I'roc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., IX, pp. 1-25. (1886.) 

200. Notes on fishes collected at Beau- 
fort, North Carolina, with a revised list of 
the species known from that locality. In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., IX, pp. 25-30. 
(1886.) 

201. List of fishes collected at Havana, 
Cuba, in December, 1883, with notes and 
descriptions. In Proc. V. S. Nat. Mus., IX, 
pp. 31-55. (1886.) 

202. A review of the genera and species 
of Julidina; found in American waters. 
(Joint author with Elizabeth G. Hughes.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., IX, pp. 56-70. 
(1886.) 

203. Notes on some fishes collected at 
Pensacola, by Mr. Silas Stearns, with de- 
scriptions of one new species (Chsetodon 
aya). In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., IX, pp. 
225-229. (1886.) 

204. A review of the American species 
of Tetraodontidae. (Joint author with 
Charles L. Edwards.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., IX, pp. 230-247. (1886.) 

205. Rafinesque. In Pop. Sci. Mo., 
XXIX, pp. 212-221. (1886.) 



238 



Jordan~\ 



Bibliography: Former Faculty 



206. A review of the American species 
of the genus Prionotiis. (Joint author 
with Elizabeth G. Hughes.) li\ I'roc. U. S. 
Nat. :Mus.. IX. pp. 327-338. (1S8G.) 

207. A review of the American species 
of Belonidsp. ( Joint author with W. For- 
dice. ) In Proc. V. S. Nat. Mus., IX. pp. 
339-361. (1886.) 

208. A review of Seeley's 'The fresh- 
water fishes of Europe.' In Dial. June, 
1886, pp. 34-3."). 

208(7. The duty of the scholar toward.s 
the community, being the baccalaureate ad- 
dress delivered to the graduating class of 
1886 of Indiana University. Kichmond, Ind.. 
18S6. I'p. 10. 

209. A review of the 'A. O. U. code and 
oheck-list of North American birds.' In 
Auk. July. 1886. pp. 393-308. 

210. Descrii)tion of six new species of 
fishes from the (Julf of ^lexico, with notes 
on other species. (Joint author with B. W. 
Evermann.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., IX, 
pp. 466-476. (1886.) 

211. A review of the Gobiidfe of North 
America. (Joint author with C. H. Eigen- 
mann.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., IX, pp. 
466-476. (1886.) 

212. Notes on typical specimens of 
fi.shes de.scribed by Cuvier and Valenciennes, 
and preserved in the Musee d'Histoire Nat- 
urelle in Paris. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
IX. pp. 525-546. (1886.) 

213. Ulrich von Hutten. In Current, 
Dec. 4 and 11, 1886. 

214. The origin of the httest. A review 
•of Professor E. D. Cope's 'Origin of the 
fittest.' In Dial, March, 1887. 

215. Thoreau and John Brown. In Cur- 
rent, April, 1887. 

216. A preliminary list ot the fishes of 
the West Indies. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
IX, pp. 554-608. (1887.) 

217. Note on Polynemus californiensis of 
Thominot. //( Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., X. 
p. 3;i2. (1887.) 



218. The food-fishes of Indiana. (Joint 
author with B. W. Evermann.) In Rep. 
Dept. Agr. Indiana for 1886. (1887.) 

219. A. review of the flounders and soles 
( Pleuronectidie ) of America and Europe. 
(Joint author with David Kopp Goss.) //; 
Rep. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1886, pp. 225- 
342; pi. i-ix. (1887.) 

220. A review of the scisenoid fishes of 
America and Europe. (Joint author with 
C. IT. Eigenmann.) //; Rep. U. S. Fish 
Comm. for 1886, pp. 343-351 ; pi. i-iv. 
(1887.) 

221. Science sketches. Chicago. 1887. 
Pp. 261. 

222. The dispersion of fresh-water fishe.s. 
In 'Science sketches,' pp. 82-132. (1887.) 

223. Darwin. /;( 'Science sketches,' pp. 
ia-195. (1887.) 

224. The evolution of the college curric- 
ulum. In 'Science sketches,' pp. 228-260. 
(1887.) 

225. Notes on a collection of fishes sent 
by Mr. Charles C. Leslie from Charleston. 
S. C. (Joint author with C. H. Eigen- 
mann. I In I'roc. U. S. Nat. Mus., X, pp. 
269-270. (1887.) 

226. Description of a new species of 
Thalassophryne (Thalassophryne dowi ) 
from Punta Arenas and Panama. (Joint 
author with C. H. Gilbert.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., X, p. 388. (1887.) 

227. Note on the 'Analysis de la Na- 
ture' of Rafinesque. In Proc. U. h. Nat. 
Mus., X, pp. 480-481. (1887.) 

228. Description of a new species of Cal- 
lionymus (Callionymus bairdi) from the 
Gulf of Mexico. //( Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
X, pp. 501-502. (1887.) 

229. Description of a new species of Xy- 
richthys (Xyrichthus jessise) from the Gulf 
of Mexico. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., X, p. 
698. ( 1887. ) 

2.30. Description of two new species of 
fishes from South America ( Mycteroperca 
xenarcha : Cristiceps eigenmanni). In 



239 



Indiana University 



\_ Jordan 



Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. riiila.. XXXIX, pp. 
3S7-3SS. ( 1887. ) 

231. Note on Achirus lorentzi. In Proc. 
Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., XXXIX, pp. 389- 
391. (1887.) 

232. The fisheries aud fishery interests 
of the United States. By George Brown 
Goode and a staff of associates. Section 
II. A geographical review of the fishery 
industries and fishing communities for the 
year 1880. Pp. 787. Washington, 1887 
(issued January, 1888). (Part on fisheries 
of California, Oregon and Washington, by 
Jordan and Gilbert.) 

233. Description of a new species of Eth- 
eostoma (E. longimana) from James river, 
Virginia. In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 
XL, p. 179. (1888.) 

234. On the generic name of the tunny. 
In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., XL, p. 180. 
(1888.) 

235. The octroi at Issoir : a city made 
rich by taxation. In Pop. Sci. Mo., 
XXXIII, pp. 433-45G. (Reprinted in 'Sci- 
ence sketches,' 2d ed., pp. 181-223, as "The 
fate of Iceodorum. ) ( 1888. ) 

236. Science sketches. Second edition. 
Chicago, 1888. Pp. 276. 

237. Silas Stearns. In Forest and 
Stream, Sept. 27, 1888. 

238. A manual of the vertebrate animals 
of the northern United States, including 
the district north and east of the Ozark 
mountains, south of the Laureutian hills, 
north of the southern boundary of Virginia, 
and east of the Missouri river, inclusive 
of marine species. Fifth edition, entirely 
rewritten and much enlarged. Chicago, 
1888. Pp. 375. 

239. Darwinism : A brief account of the 
Darwinian theory of the origin of species. 
Chicago, 1888. Pp. 63. 

240. On the occurrence of the Great 
Lake trout (Salvelinus namaycush) in the 
waters of British Columbia. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., XI, p. 58. (1888.) 



241. The Spanish missions in California. 
In Cornell Review, Oct., 1888. 

242. Li.st of fishes collected by Alphonse 
Forrer about Mazatlan, with descriptions 
of two new species. //( Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., XI, pp. 329-334. (1888.) 

243. Descriptions of fourteen species of 
fresh-water fishes collected by the U. S. Fish 
Commission in the summer of 1888. In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XI, pp. 351-363 ; pi. 
xliii-xlv. (1888.) 

244. List of fishes now in the United 
States National Museum, collected in Nic- 
aragua by Dr. Louis F. H. Birt. In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus., XI, pp. 411-416. (1888.) 

245. List of fishes collected at Green 
Turtle Cay in the Bahamas by Charles L. 
Edwards, with descriptions of three new 
species. (Joint author with Charles Har- 
vey Bollman.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
XI, pp. 549-553. (1889.) 

246. Studies of insect life. A review 
of Sir John Lubbock's 'The senses, instincts, 
and intelligence of animals.' In Dial, March, 
1889. 

247. Description of new species of fish 
collected at the Galapagos islands and along 
the coast of the United States of Colombia, 
1887-1888. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XII, 
pp. 149-183. (1889.) 

248. A catalogue of fishes collected at 
Port Castries, Saint Lucia, by the steamer 
Albatross. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIT, 
pp. 645-652. (1889.) 

249. Report of explorations made by the 
U. S. Fish Commission during the summer 
of 1889, in Colorado and Utah, with an ac- 
count of the fishes found in each river 
basin examined. In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 
IX, pp. 1-40. (1889.) 

250. Report of an exploration of the 
waters of the Yellowstone Park made under 
the direction of the U. S. Fish Commission. 
hi Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., IX, pp. 41-68. 
( 1889. ) 

251. Description of the yellow-finnefl 



240 



Karsten ] 



Bibliography: Former Faculty 



trout of Twin Lakes, Colorado (,8almo my- 
kiss macdonaldi) . (Joint autlior witli B. 
W. Evermann.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 

XII. pp. 453-4.J4. (1SS9.) 

252. A review of the flounders and soles 
( Pleuronectidae I of America and Europe. 
(Joint author with D. K. Goss. I In Rep. 
U. S. Fish Comm. for ISSG. XIV. pp. 22.5- 
342: plates. (ISSU.I 

253. A review of the species of Seranida? 
found in the waters of America and Europe. 
(Joint author with C. H. Eigenmann.) //( 
Rep. r. S. Fish Comm. for 18SG. XIV, 
pp. 343-351 : 4 i)lates. ( 1SS9. ) 

254. Report of explorations made dur- 
ing- the summer and autumn of 1888, in the 
Alleghany region of Mrginia, North Caro- 
lina, and Tennessee, and in western Indi- 
ana, with an account of the fishes found 
in each of the river basins of those regions. 
In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., VIII, pp. 07- 
173. plates xiii-xv. (1880.1 

255. A list of fishes collected in the har- 
bor of Bahia, Brazil, by the U. 8. Fish 
Commission steamer Albatross. In Proc. U. 
S. Nat. Mus., XIII, pp. 313-336. (1800.) 

256. Description of a new darter (Ethe- 
ostoma tippecanoe) from the Tippecanoe 
river. Indiana. (Joint author with B. W. 
Evermann.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 

XIII, pp. 3-4. 

257. List of fishes collected in the waters 
of southern Florida by Dr. James A. Ilen- 
shall. under the direction of the U. S. Fish 
Commis.sion. /)( Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. for 
1800. VIII. pp. 371-370. (1800.) 

258. Notes on fishes of the genera Agosia. 
Algansea. and Zophendum. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., XIII, pp. 287-288. (1800.) 

250. Science in the high school. /(( Pop. 
Sci. Mo., XXVI, pp. 721-727. (1800.) 

260. Ph'olution and the distribution of 
animals. In Pop. Sci. Mo., XVII, pp. 313- 
322, .50.5-513. (1800.) 

261. The fishes of the Yellowstone Park. 
In Zoe, I, pp. 38-40. (1800.) 



2()2. On the fishes described in Mliller's 
supplemental volume to the Systema NaturtE 
of Linnjpus. In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 
Phila., XLII, pp. 48-50. (1800.) 

263. Relations of temperature to verte- 
brae among fishes. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., XIV, pp. 107-120. (1800.) 

264. The colors of letters. //( Pop. Sci. 
Mo.. XXXIX, pp. 367-373. (1801.) 

265. The story of a strange land. In 
Pop. Sci. Mo., XL, p. 447. (1801.) 

2(>6. The Sunapee trout (Salvelinus al- 
piuus aureolus). In Forest and Stream, 
Jan., 1801. 

2(57. A review of the Labroid fishes of 
America and Europe. In Rep. U. S. Fish 
Comm. for 1887. XV. 500-600. (1801.) 



GusTAF E Karsten, Ph.D. Professor of 
Romance Languages, 1886-1800 ; Pro- 
fessor of Germanic Languages, 1800- 
1003. Now Instructor in German, Cor- 
nell University, Ithaca, N. Y. 

1. Speech unities and their roll in 
sound change. Paper read before the Mod. 
Lang. Asso. of Am. at Philadelphia, Dec. 
30, 1887. 

2. Final / in French -soif, hief, etc. In 
Mod. Lang. Not&s, III, pp. 85-88. (1888.) 

3. Dantesca. Osservazioni .su alquanti 
passaggi della Divina Commedia. In Mod. 
Lang. Notes, III, pp. 110-12.3. (1888.) 

4. The origin of the sufBx re in 
French. In Mod. Lang. Notes, III, pp. 187- 
188. (1888.) 

.5. Review of Neumann's 'Die roman- 
ische I'hilologie' : Korting's 'Encyclopsedie 
und Methodologie der romanischeu Philol- 
ogie' ; Gr()ber's 'Grundriss der romanischen 
I'hilologie.' //; Mod. Lang. Notes, III, No. 
5. (1888.) 

6. Review of the chief scientific works 
on Romance philology published in America. 
/;' Litteraturblatt f. german. und roman. 
Pliilol. for 1888. No. 6. 



(17) 



241 



Indiana University 



l^Karsten 



7. The third annual Neuphilologeutag 
at Dresden, Germany. In Mod. Lang. Notes, 
III, 241-244. (1888.) 

8. Secretary's report on the work done 
in the Phonetic Section of Mod. Lang. Asso. 
of Am. In Tran.s. Mod. Lang. Asso. Am. 
for 1889. 

!J. The origin and etymology of the 
name America. In Mod. Lang. Notes for 
1889. 

10. Kevie\Y of J. Ferrette's 'Ecriture 
fonetique.' //; Vietor's Pnonetische Studien, 
Marburg, Germany, for 1889. 

11. Review of R. J. Lloyd's 'Phonetic 
attraction.' In Phonetische Studien for 
1889. 

12. The Journal of Germanic Philology 
(editor). Bloomiugton, Ind. Vols. I-V. 
(1897-1902.) 

13. Fauststudien. In Philologische 
Studien, 1896. 

14. On the Hildebrandslied. In .Tour. 
Ger. Phil.. I. No. 1. (1897.) 



Cyeus Ambrose King, Instructor in Bot- 
any, 1900-1902. See Alumni list. 



John Sterling Kingsley, Professor of 
Zoology, 1887-1889. Now Professor of 
Biology, Tufts College, Mass. 

1. The development of the compound 
eye of Crangon. //; Jour, of Morph., I, pp. 
49-69; 1 plate. (1887.) 

2. The embryology of Crangon. In 
Bull. Essex Inst., NVIII, pp. GO; 2 plates. 
(1887.) 

3. Editor of the 'Standard natural his- 
tory.' 6 vols. 



Daniel Kirkwood, LL.D. Professor of 
Mathematics, 1856-1886. Died 1895 at 
Riverside, Cal. 

1. A new analogy in the periods and 



rotation of planets. In Aoi. Jour. Sci. and 
Arts, 2d ser.. IX. pp. 359-397. (1850.) 

2. Law of rotation of ijlanets. In Am. 
Jour. Sci. and Arts. 2d ser., XI, iip. 394- 
398. (1851.) 

3. On Saturn's rings. /;; Am. Jour. 
Sci. and Arts, 2d ser., Xil. pp. 109-110. 
(18.51.) 

4. On certain analogies in the solar 
system. In Am. Jouv. Sci. and Arts, '2d ser., 
XIV, i)p. 210-219. (18.52.) 

5. The lunar world. In Southern 
Presbyterian Review, Oct., 1854. 

6. An aurora of 1859. //( Am. Jour. 
Sci. and Arts. 2d ser., XXVIII, pp. 300-389. 
(1859.) 

7. Pr<>i)Ositio)is relating to a particu- 
lar curve. In Runkle's Math. Mo., I. 
(1859.) 

8. Distances and magnitudes of the 
fixed stars. In Literary Record, I. (1859.) 

9. On the nebular hypothesis. In Am. 
Jour. Sci. and Arts, 2d ser.. XXX, pp. 161- 
181. (1860.) 

10. Instances of nearly connnensurable 
periods in the solar system. In Runkle's 
Math. Mo.. II. (1860.) 

11. The asteroids. In I^iterary Record. 
II. (1860.) 

12. The meteors of July l.'>. 1846. In 
Literary Record, II. (1860.) 

13. The new planets. In New Eng- 
lander. XVIII. (18(10.) 

14. November meteors, 1860. In Am. 
Jour. Sci. and Arts, 2d ser., XXXI, p. 169. 
(1861.) 

15. Astronomical discoveries. In Liter- 
ary Record. III. (1861.) 

16. On the probable existence of undis- 
covered planets. /;/ Literary Record. III. 
(1861.) 

17. Solar phenomena. In New Eng- 
lander. XIX. ( 1861. ) 

18. Articles contributed to Indiana 
School Journal as mathematical editor from 
1859 to 1863. 



242 



Kirkwood] 



Bibliography: Former Faculty 



19. Orbits of binary stars. In Am. 
Jour. Sci. and Arts, 2d ser., XXXYII, p. 
233. (1864.) 

20. Harmonies of the solar system. In 
Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 2d ser.. XXXVIII, 
pp. 1-18. (18G4.) 

21. Planetary distances. In Am. Jour. 
Sci. and Arts, 2d ser., XXXIX. pp. 5.J-59. 
(1865.) 

22. On the theory of meteors. In Proc. 
A. A. A. S. for 186G, pp. 8-14. 

23. The November meteors. In Iowa 
Instructor and School Journal, VII. 

24. The aurora borealis of Feb. 20. 
18GG. In Iowa Instructor and School 
Journal, VII. 

25. ^Meteoric astronomy. Philadelphia, 
1867. 

26. Asteroids and minor planets. In 
Indiana Sch. Jour., XII. (1867.) 

27. Meteor of July, 1867. In Am. Jour. 
Sci. and Arts, 2d ser., XLIV, p. 288. 
(1867.) 

28. The meteors of Xov. 12, 1867. In 
Mo. Notices Royal Ast. Soc, XXVIII, p. 33. 
(1868.) 

29. Meteors of November 12-14, 1868. 
In Proc. Am. Philos. Soc, X. 

30. Comets of 1812 and 1845. In Am. 
Jour. Sci. and Arts, 2d ser., XLVIII, pp. 
255-258. (1869.) 

31. Periods of meteoric rings. In Am. 
Jour. Sci. and Arts, 2d ser., XLIX, p. 429. 
(1869.) 

32. On the nebular hypothesis and the 
approximate commensurability of the plan- 
etary periods. In Mo. Notices Royal Ast. 
Soc, XXIX, pp. 96-102. (1869.) 

33. The meteors of Nov. 13-14. In :Mo. 
Notices Royal Ast. Soc, XXIX, pp. 62-63. 
(1869.) 

34. On certain harmonies of the solar 
system. In Danville Quart. Rev. (1869.) 

35. On comets and meteors. In Proc. 
Am. Philos. Soc, XI, pp. 215-220. (1869.) 



36. Asteroids between Jupiter and Mars. 
In Proc. Am. Philos. Soc, XL (1869.) 

37. Periodicity of sun-spots. In Proc. 
Am. Philos. Soc, XI, pp. 94-102. (1869.) 

3S. Periodicity of certain planetary 
rings. In, Proc. Am. Philos. Soc, XI. 
( 1869. ) 

39. On comets and meteors, 1st paper. 
In Scientific Opinion, March 23, 1870. 

40. On comets and meteors, 2d paper. 
In Scientific Opinion, March 30, 1870. 

41. Mass of asteroids between Mars and 
Jupiter. //( Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 3d 
ser.. I, p. 71. (1871.) 

42. Sun-spots of 1843. /;(- Am. Jour. 
Sci. and Arts, 3d ser., I. p. 275. (1871.) 

43. Testimony of the spectroscope on 
nebular hypothesis. In Am. Jour. Sci. and 
Arts, 3d ser., II, pp. 155-156. (1871.) 

44. On the formation and primitive 
structure of the solar system. In Proc. Am. 
Philos. Soc, XII, pp. 163-167. (1871.) 

45. Sidereal systems. In Our JNIonthly, 
III. (1871.) 

46. Astro-meterology. In Pop. Sci Mo., 
I, pp. 335-339. (1872.) 

47. Mean motions of Jupiter, Saturn. 
Franus, and Neptune. //( Amer. .Jour. Sci. 
and Arts, 3d .ser.. Ill, pp. 208-209. (1872.) 

48. Meteors of April 30-May 1. In 
Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 3d ser., IV, pp. 52- 
53. (1872.) 

49. Certain relations between the mean 
motions of the perihelia of Jupiter, Saturn, 
Uranus, and Neptune. In Am. Jour. Sci. 
and Arts, 3d ser., IV, pp. 225-226. (1872.) 

50. The antiquity of man. In Scien- 
tific American. (1872.) 

51. On the disintegration of comets. In 
Nature, VI. p. 148. (June 20, 1872.) 

52. Meteors of April 30-May 1. In 
Nature, VI. (August 8, 1872.) 

53. On some remarkable relations 
between the mean motions of Jupiter, Sat- 
urn. Uranus and Neptune. In Proc. Am. 
Philos. Soc. XII. pp. 435-436. (1872.) 



243 



Indiana University 



\_Kirkivood 



54. Changes in celestial scenery. //( 
Our Monthly. IV. (1872. 1 

.">."). Total eclipses of the sun. In Our 
Monthly. IV. (1872.) 

.jt>. Comets and meteors. rhila(l('l])liia. 
1873. Tp. 07. 

r>7. Meteors of November 14th. In Am. 
Jour. Nci. and Arts, 3d ser., ^'I. |). 392. 
(1873.) 

.~)8. Biela's comet. In Nature. VIII, 
pp. 4-5. (May 1, 1873.) 

59. On the meteors of Janury 2d. In 
Proc. Am. Philos. Soc, XIII. pp. 501-502. 
(1873.) 

(U). Solution of a problem. In Analyst, 
I. (1874.) 

(^>1. On the relative positions of the as- 
teroidal orbits. In Analyst, I. (1874.) 

62. Distribution of the asteroids. In 
Proc. A. A. A. S. for 1875, pp. 74-77. 

Go. Relations between the motions of 
some of the minor planets. In Mo. Not. 
Royal Ast. Soc, XXXV. pp. G2-G3. (1875.) 

64. Meteors of Nov. 14. In Nature, 
XII, pp. 85-86. (June 3, 1875.) 

(55. Reminiscences of William Lenhart, 
Esq. /)( Analyst. II. (1875.) 

6(^. Mars and its satellites. In Pop. 
Sci. Mo., XI. p. 706-709. (Oct.. 1877. ( 

G7. The meteors of Dec. 21, 187(>. In 
Indiana Sch. Jour., XXII. pi>. 75-76. 
(1877.) 

68. Satellite.s of Mars and the nebular 
hypothesis. //; Am. .Tour. Sci. and Arts, 3d 
ser., XIV, pp. 327-328. (1877.) 

(j9. On eight meteoric fireballs seen in 
the United States from July, 1876, to Feb., 
1877. In Proc. Am. Philos. Soc, XVI, pp. 
590-596. (1877.) 

70. Ages of the sun and fixed stars. //) 
Proc. Am. Philos. Soc. XVI. pp. (322-625. 
(1877.1 

71. The eclipse of July 29. 1878. In 
Indiana Sch. Jour., XXIII. (1878.) 

72. November meteors. In Am. .Tour. 
Sci. and Arts, 3d ser.. XV. p. 76. (1878.) 



7.!. Solar and sidereal heat. In Am. 
Jour. Sci. and Arts, 3d ser.. X\'. i)p. 291- 
293. (1878.1 

74. The meteors of August 11. 1.S7S. In 
Analyst. V. (1878.) 

75. Aerolitic epoch of Nov. 12-13. //; 
Proc An'i. Philos. Soc, XVII, pp. 339-341. 
( 1878. ) 

76. Cosmogony of LaPlace. //; I'roc 
Am. Philos. Soc, XVIII, pp. 324-326. 
(1879.) 

77. ^leteoric fireballs seen in U. S. dur- 
ing the year ending March 31, 1879. In 
Proc. Am. Philos. Soc, XVIII, pp. 239-246. 
( 1879. ) 

78. The great southern comet of 1880. 
In Indiana Sch. Jour., XXV, p. 449. 
( 1880. ) 

7! I. On the variation in the length of the 
day. /// Analyst. VII. (1880.) 

80. On the origin of planets. In Proc 
Am. Philos. Soc. XIX, p. 15. (1880.) 

81. The meteors of Nov. 13-15. In Pop. 
Sci. Mo., XVIII, pp. 542-544. (Feb., 1881.) 

82. November meteors. In Indiana Sch. 
.Tour., XXVI, p. .543. (1881.) 

83. ()n the limit of planetary stability. 
/;( Analyst. VIII. (1881.) 

84. Astronomical panics. In Pop. Sci. 
Mo.. XXI. pp. 182-186. (June. 1882.) 

'S'y The August meteors. In Sidereal 
:Messenger. I. pp. 141-143. (Oct., 1882.) 

S(\. The relative ages of planets, comets 
and meteors. /;; Science, II, p. 12. (1883.) 

87. Some facts in the early history of 
Indiana University. In Indiana Sch. Jour. 
XXVIII. pp. .503-.J04. (188a.) 

88. A large meteor. In Sidereal INIes- 
senger. II. (1883.) 

89. The zone of asteroids and the rings 
of Saturn. In Proc. Am. Philos. Soc, 
XXI. pp. 2(j3-26(>. (1883.1 

90. The comet of 1812 and 1883. In 
Pop. Sci. Mo., XXIV. pp. 488-491. (Feb., 
1884.) 



244 



Kiriwoo(^] 



Bibliography: Former Faculty 



01. On tempoi-ary stars. //( Science. 
IV, p. 291. (1884.) 

92. Note on a meteor. In Si<lereal Me.s- 
senger. II. (1884.) 

93. Temporary .star.s. In I'roc. A. A. A. 
S. for 1884, p. 78. 

94. The limit of stability of uebulou.s 
planets. In Proc. Am. Philos. Soc. XXII. 
pp. 104-113. (1884.) 

93. New telescopes and their prospec- 
tive relations. In Indiana Sch. .Jour.. XXX, 
pp. 495-497. (1885.) 

96. The limits of stability of the solar 
system. In Sidereal JNIessenger, IV, pp. 05- 
78. (April, 1885.) 

97. Recently discovered asteroids. In 
Sidereal Messenger, IV, pp. 114-llG. (May, 
1885. ) 

98. The comet of 18GG and the meteors 
of Nov. 14. /)) Sidereal Messenger, IV, pp. 
228-230. (Oct.. 1885.) 

99. Commensiirability of motions. In 
Sidereal ^lessenger, IV, pp. 257-2.59. (Nov., 
1885. ) 

100. The comet of 18G6 and the meteor.s 
of Nov. 14. /(( Proc. Am. I'hilos. Soc, 
XXII, pp. 424-428. (1885.) 

101. Appleton's Annual American Ency- 
clopBedia. Articles on astronomy, from be- 
ginning to 1885. 

102. The comets of 1812-1, and 184G-IV. 
In Sidereal ^Messenger, V, pp. 13-14. (.Ian.. 
1886. ) 

103. The Biela meteors. //( Sidereal 
Messenger, V, p. 29. (Jan., 1886.) 

104. About comets. In Indiana Sch. 
Jour., XXXII, pp. 459-460. (1887.) 

105. Origin of comets. //( Am. Jour. 
Sci. and Arts, 3d ser., XXXIII. p. .50. 
(1887.) 

106. Note on the origin of comets. In 
Sidereal Messenger, VI, pp. 77-78. (Feb., 
1887. ) 

107. Distribution of the minor planets. 
In Sidereal Messenger. VI, p. IHk (March, 
1887.) 



108. The eccentricities and inclinations 
of the asteroidal orbits. In Sidereal Mes- 
senger, VI, pp. 169-170. (May, 1887.) 

109. The relation of aerolites to shooting 
stars. In Sidereal Messenger, VI, pp. 248- 
2.50. ( Sept.. 1887. ) 

110. Relation of aerolites to shooting 
stars. In Proc. Am. Philos. Soc, XXIV, 
pp. 111-112. (1887.) 

111. Biela's comet and the large meteors 
of Nov. 27-30. In Proc. Am. Philos. Soc, 
XXIV, pp. 242-24.3. (1887.) 

112. The asteroids. Philadelphia, 1888. 
I'p. GO. 

113. Notes on the progress of astronomy. 
In Sidereal Messenger, All. pp, 29-30. 
(Jan., 1888.) 

114. The relation of the short period 
comets to the zone of asteroids. In Sidereal 
Messenger, VII, p. 9.5. (Feb., 1888.) 

11.5. On the inclination of asteroids. //( 
Sidereal Messenger, VII. pp. 177-i79. (^lay, 
1888.) 

116. Note on 279th asteroid. //( Side- 
real Messenger. VIII, pp. 83-84. (Feb., 
1889.) 

117. On the inclination of the asteroids. 
In Sidereal ^Messenger, VIII, pp. 305-307. 
(Aug., 1889.) 

118. Notes on the densities of the planets. 
In Proc. Ast. Soc Pacific, II, pp. 1-3. (Jan., 
1890.) 

119. On the similarity of certain orbits 
in the zone of asteroids. In Proc Ast. Soc. 
Pacific, II, pp. 48-49. (Feb., 1890.) 

120. On the possible existence of fire- 
balls and the meteors in the stream of the 
Bielids. In Proc Am. Philos. Soc, XXVII. 

121. On the inclination of the asteroids. 
In Proc Am. Philos. Soc, XXVII. 

122. The origin of gaps in the zone of 
asteroids. //( Sidereal Messenger, X, pp. 
194-19(5. (April. 1891.) 

123. Groups of asteroids. /;; Sidereal 
Messenger, XI, pp. 78.5-789. (Oct., 1892.) 



245 



Indiana University 



[ Kirkiuood 



VIA. The imitiial relations between the 
orbits of certain asteroids. /;( Troc. Am. 
Philos. Soc, XXX, pp. 2(59-270. (1892.) 

12."). The development of the solar sys- 
tem, hi Sidereal Messenger, p. 94. (June, 
1893.) 

120. Holme's comet ; its probable relation 
to the zone of asteroids. In Sidereal Mes- 
senger, XII, pp. 182-183. (Feb., 1893.) 

127. The Leonids, or meteors of Nov. 13. 
In Sidereal INIessenger, XII, pp. 380-390. 
(May. 1893.) 

128. Relations between the mean motions 
of Jupiter, Saturn, and certain minor plan- 
ets. In Sidereal Messenger, XII, pp. 302- 
303. (April. 1893.) 

129. Tuttle's comet and the Perseids or 
August meteors. In Sidereal ]*Iessenger, 
XII, pp. 789-792. (Nov., 1893.) 



Charles Tobias Knipp. Instructor in Phys- 
ics, 1893-1900 ; Assistant Professor, 
1900-1903. Sec Alumni list. 



John Hiuam Latiirop, LL.D. President of 
the University, 1859-00. Died, 1800, at 
Columbia, Mo. 

1. Inaugural address, as fourth presi- 
dent of Indiana University. Indianapolis, 
1801. Pp. 32. 



Thomas McCabe, Ph.D., Professor of Ger- 
manic Languages and Literature, 1889- 
1890. Died Feb. 22, 1891, at Bryn 
Mawr, Pa. 

1. The Geste of Auberi le Bourgoing. 
In Trans. Mod. Lang. Asso. for 1889, IV, 
No. 1. 

2. Review of Super's 'Preparatory 
French reader.' In ^lod. Lang. Notes, IV, 
pp. 20-27. (1889.) 



3. Arseue Darmesteter ; an obituary. 
/;( :Mod. Lang. Notes, IV, p. 95. (1889.) 

4. Review of Grober's 'Grundriss der 
Romanischen Philologie.' In Nation, for 
INIay 9, 1889. 

.5. Review of C. Fontaine's 'Les Po- 
etes fraugais du XlXme siecle.' In Mod. 
Lang. Notes, V, p. 108. (1890.) 



David McDonald, Professor of Law, 
1852. 



1841- 



1. Address on the study of law, deliv- 
ered in the chapel of Indiana University, 
Dec. 5. 1842. P.loomington, Ind., 1843. Pp. 
22. 

2. Treatise on the justices of the peace 
and constables in Indiana. Cincinnati, 1857. 
Pp. 1003. 

3. Many judicial opinions, in Reports 
for the U. S. courts for the 7th circuit. 



John Ernst ^Matzke, Ph.D. Professor of 
Romance Languages, 1890-1891. Now 
Professor of Romanic Languages, Le- 
laud Stanford Junior University, Stan- 
ford University. Cal. 

1. The historical Hernani. In INIod. 
Lang. Notes, VI, pp. 37-41. (1891.) 

2. Some remarks on the development of 
ct in the Romance languages. In Mod. 
Lang. Notes, VI, pp. 130-139. (1891.) 

3. Study of the versification and rimes 
in Hugo's Hernani. In jMod. Lang. Notes, 
VI, pp. 108-171. (1891.) 

4. Victor Hugo's Hernani, with intro- 
duction and English notes. Boston, 1891. 
Pp. 228. 



Hamilton Byron Moore, Instructor in 
English, 1898-1901 : Assistant Profes- 
sor, 1901-1903. See Alumni list. 



246 



ogg^ 



Bibliography: Former Faculty 



Saiiati Parke INIohrisox. Adjunct Professoi 
of English Literature, 1873-75. See 
Alumni list. 



John Flesher Newsom, Instructor in Ge- 
ology, 1894-96 ; Assistant Professor, 
1890-99. See Alumni list. 



Cyrus Nutt, D.D., LL.D. President of the 
University, 18G0-1875. Died Aug. 24, 
1875, at Bloomingtou, Ind. 

1. Baccalaureate sermon to the grad- 
uating class of the Indiana State University, 
June 23, 1801. Indianapolis, 1861. Pp. 25. 

2. Baccalaureate sermon to the grad- 
uating class of Indiana University, 1862. 
Cincinnati, 1862. 

3. Baccalaureate sermon to the grad- 
uating class of Indiana University, 1863. 
Cincinnati, 1863. 

4. Prayer gauge ; a sermon. Cincin- 
nati, 1874. Pp. 19. 



Richard Owen, LL.D. Professor of Nat- 
ural Philosophy and Chemistry, 1863- 
1867 : Professor of Natural Science and 
Chemistry, 1867-1879. Died March 25. 
1890, at New Harmony, Ind. 

1. Report on geological survey of 
Wisconsin, Iowa, and Minnesota. (Joint 
author with David Dale Owen.) Philadel- 
phia, 1852. Pp. xxxviii, 638. 

2. Key to the geology of the globe. 
Boston, 1857. Pp. 256. 

3. Report on a geological reconnais- 
sance of Indiana, made during the years 
1859, and 1860, under the direction of the 
late David Dale Owen. Indianapolis, 1862. 
Pp. xvi, 368. 

4. On quatenery rock salt deposits in 



In 

for 



Louisiana. In Trans. St. Louis Acad. Sci., 
II, pp. 250-252. (1868.) 

5. Remarks on E. W. Hilgard's 'Geo- 
logical history of the Gulf of Mexico.' In 
Am. Nat., V, pp. 522-523. (1871.) 

6. Contribution to physiographic and 
dynamical geology, involving the discussion 
of terrestrial magnetism. In Proc. A. A. 
A. S., XX, pp. 208-210. (1S72.) 

7. Arkansas geological formations. 
Macfarlane's Geological R. R. Guide 
1879, p. 206. 

8. The law of land-forming on our 
globe. In Proc. A. A. A. S., XXIX, pp. 
437-440. (1881.) 

9. On the unification of geological no- 
menclature. In Science, II. pp. 438-440. 
(1881.) 

10. Resume d'un rapport sur I'unifica- 
tion de la nomenclature geologique. In Con- 
gres G§ol. Internat., Compte Rendu, 2d ses- 
sion, pp. 623-626. Boulogne, 1882. 

11. Contribution to .seismology. (Ab- 
stract.) In Proc. A. A. A. S.. XXXI, pp. 
329-336. ( 1883. ) 

12. Law of fracture or fi.ssuring, ap- 
plied to inorganic and organic matter. In 
Proc. A. A. A. S., XXXI, pp. 337-844. 
(1883.) 

13. The earth's orographic framework ; 
its seismology and geology. In Proc. A. A. 
A. S., XXXII, pp. 253-256. (1884.) 

14. The continental type, or normal oro- 
graphy and geology of continents. In Proc. 
A. A. A. S., XXXII, pp. 256-260. (1884.) 

15. British earthquakes and their seis- 
mic relations. (Abstract.) In Proc. A. A. 
A. S., XXXIII, pp. 438-443. (1885.) 

16. Arkansas (in part). In Macfar- 
lane's Geol. R. R. Guide, 2d edition, for 
1890, pp. 406-407. 



Frederick Austin Ogg, Instructor in His- 
tory, 1902-1903. See Alumni list. 



247 



liuliaiKi University [Pierce 

( ;i:()i;(;i; Jamks Pikkce, Assislant ri-ofcssdi- li. Sinking funds. In Puli. Am. lOcou. 

of IJolany. ISDC.-IS'.IT. Now Asso.ijilc Assn.. N'll.p. KlC. (IS'f'J.J 

Prof(>s.s(>r <if ri.nit I'liysiolouy. LcIjuhI ."1. A new cninni i)f f.-ix-.-itioii. In I'ol. 

Stanfor.l .liiuior riiivn-sity. Sliuifui-d Sri. (^>ii,nl .. \' I I . |)|i. r.sr)-."i;t7. (!»("<•.. 1.s;»2. I 
Vnivoi'sii \ . ( ',\l. 



1. (\MMaiii cliaimrs in llic pilli crlls, 
pn-liminary ... Ih,. formal ion of .aviti.s In •'-"^VAia. Kakxkst Uvuy. Tutor in Greek, 



IS'.IT-'.IS: 'I'ulor in P'rcnrh. 1S!>S-!)!.) : lu- 
slruclor in I'^itucIi, I'.KIl-l'.MI'J. See 
Ainnnii list. 



tlie slcnis ol' m'as.scs. /// I'roc. Indiana 
Acad. S<i. for IS'.h;. 

-. 'I'iii' microscopic examination of cer- 
tain drinl^in^A' waters. (.loinl anihor wiili 

l'\ M. An<!re\vs and A. ('. l>ifi'. i In I'roc. 

Indiana .\cad. Sci. for IS'.iC. 1Iai:i!V I'i.kic iiki; Sccrrr. Tutor in Latin, 

."!. Kevicw of I'\ W. I\eel)ie"s paper. IS'.l'.l. .\d\v Associate Instructor in 

•Observations on Die Lorantl:acea' (d' fey- Lat in, rniveisily 1 fisli Sciiooi, Chicago. 

Ion." /(( r.ot. (Jnz.. .Vnniist, IS'.XI. 

1. Kevi.sion <d' .1. 1>. S. Kigg.s's 'In 
Lalinum." Chicago. IS'.C.i. 
.,7ami;s 1' ronTKU. Instruct.u- in I'.sychcdogy, 
1!KU»-1'.H>3. See Alumni list. 



EitlMEST William IlKXTCiKi;, Instructor in 
Mathematics, l,Sl»8-i;»(M». Sc .Mumiu 
list. 



.Ta.mks Iv. Slonakeu. Ph.D. Instructor in 
ZoiHogy. IS'.HMS!)!). Now A.ssi.stant 
I'rofessor of Phy.siology, Leland Stan- 
ford .Tuuior Cnivensity, Stanford Uni- 
ver.sit \-. Cal. 



IlEiMuntT (iiLSON Ueddu-K. Instructor in 1- .\ comparal ive study of the point of 

Chemistry, lS'.»T-lS!>i). ,S(f .Munnii list. acute vision in the vertebrates. /;; Am. Nat., 

X.X.X. |)p 24-:;l'. I.lan.. ISItC.) 

'2. \ compai-alive study of the area of 

llUFT's ByraM PiciiAitDSDN, I'li.I>. Pro- acute visicm in tlie vertebrates. In Jour, of 

fessor of Greek, 1S80-1S82. Recently Morpii., X II I . p|.. 44.-.-.-.()2. (May. 1897.) 

director of American School of Cla.s- ;;. The fovea. In Proc. Indiana Acad. 

vsical Studies, .Vtliens, Greece. Xew ts,^.;. f,„- ISKC, j.p. 304-310. 

Voi'k City. 4. .V method of jireserving the eye for 

,, , , sectioning, or for demonstrating the area of 

:i. Andersonville. //( .New Lnghuider. .,.,,,. 

acute \ision. //( .lour. Aiii.lied iMicroscopy,. 
n881 ) 
^'^'^^•^ I. p. IS. (Feb., ISOC.) 

.">. The e.ve of the Mammoth Cave rat. 

IOdwaiu) Ai.swoinii Uoss, Professor of Eco- /„ j.,.,,,. iiuliana Acad. Sci. for 1898, pp. 

nomics, lSitl-1802. Now Professor of •J.",."»-ii.".7. 

Sociology, University of Nebraska. I.iiu- 

c-oln, Nel). 

1. Turning toward Nirvana. I n \vena. William Wesley Spangleu. Librarian, 

I\', pp. 7:j(;-743. ( Nov., 1801.) 1880-1893. Sec Alumni list. 

248 



Wylie^ 



Bibliography : Former Faculty 



Edgau Howard Sturtevant, Tutor in 
Latin, 1895-98; InsU-uctor, 1901-1902. 
See Aliimui list. 



.Joseph Swaix, Instructor in Zoology and 
Mathematics, 1883-85 ; Professor of 
Mathematics, 1886-91 ; President of the 
University, 1893-1902. See Alumni list. 



Frederick Wilson Truscott, Instructor in 
German, 1891-93. See Alumni list. 



Albert Brennus Ulrey, Instructor in 
Zoiilogy, 1892. Sec Alumni list. 



AxtTiiUR BuHNiiAii Woodford, I'h.D. Asso- 
ciate I'rofessor of Social Science and 
Economics and Instructor in History, 
1885-1886 : Professor of Social Science 
and Economics, 1886-1889. Now In- 
structor, Hopkins (Irammar Scluxil, 
New Haven, Conn. 

1. Recent economic discussion. Re- 
view of books and pamphlets by Denslow, 
Ely. Ingram and others. //) Dial, Nov., 
1888. 

2. Review of Karl Marx's 'Capital.' 
In Dial, March, 1889. 

3. Review of INIarshall's 'Principles of 
economics,' Vol. I. In Dial, Oct., 1891. 



Thomas Carlton Van Nuys, M.D. Pro- 
fessor of Chemistry, 1874-1895. 

1. Analysis of water from the deep 
wells in Indianapolis. In Rep. Indiana 

iBoard of Health for 1883. 

2. Apparatus for the estimation of car- 
,bonic acid in the air. In Amer. Chem. Jour., 

VIII, pp. 190, 315. (1886.) 

3. Estimation of carbonic acid in the 
air. (Joint author with B. F. Adams, Jr.) 
In Amer. Chem. Jour., IX, p. 64. (1887.) 

4. Chemical analysis of healthy and 
-diseased urine. Philadelphia, 1888. Pp. 
188 ; 39 cuts. 

5. A method for tlie estimation of al- 
bumin in urine. (Joint author with R. E. 
Lyons.) //( Amer. Chem. Jour., XII, pp. 

.336-352. (1890.) 

6. Suggestions to teachers of science or 
mathematics in the high school. In Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci., 1891, p. (>. 

7. Carbon di-oxide in the urine. 
(Joint author with R. E. Lyons.) In Amer. 

-Chem. Jour., XIV, p. 14. (1892.) 

8. Analysis of certain Indiana mineral 
-waters. In Rep. State Geol. of Indiana for 
1901, pp. 71, 80, 93, 151. 



Andrew Wylie, D.D. President of the Uni- 
versity, 1829-1851. Died Nov. 11, 1851, 
at Bloomington, Ind. 

1. An English grammar, ^^^^shington. 
Pa., 1817. 

2. Religion and .state, not church and 
state : a .sormon delivered July 4, 1830, at 
Bloomington, Ind. Bloomington, Ind., 1830. 
Pp. 16. 

3. A discourse delivered before the In- 
diana Historical Society. Indianapolis, 
1831. Pp. 26. 

4. An addre.s.s delivered at Blooming- 
ton, Oct. 29, 1829. Indianapolis. 1833. Pp. 
30. 

5. An addres.s delivered to the gradu- 
ates in Indiana College. Bloomington, Ind., 
1833. 

6. Baccalaureate delivered at the fifth 
commencement of Indiana College, Sei^tem- 
ber 24, 1834. Bloomington, Ind., 1834. Pp. 
11. 

7. An eulogy on Lafayette. Cincin- 
nati, 1835. Pp. 32. 

8. The propriety of retaining Greek 
and Roman classics in their place as a part 
of study necessary in the course of a liberal 



249 



Indiana University 



[ Yodet 



education. An address delivered at Craw- 
fordsville. Ind., July, 1838. Bloomington, 
Ind., 1838. 

9. Address to the citizens of Monroe 
county and to the members of the County 
Lyceum. Bloomington, Ind., 1840. Pp. 26. 

10. Sectarianism is here.sy. Blooming- 
ton, Ind., 1840. Pp. 132. 

11. Baccalaureate, addressed to the .sen- 
ior class of Indiana University, at the late 
commencement, September, 1841. Blooming- 
ton, Ind., 1841. Pp. 24. 

12. Baccalaureate, addressed to the .sen- 
ior class, on the day of commencement, 
1843. Bloomington, Ind., 1843. Pp. 19. 

13. Baccalaureate, addressed to the sen- 
ior class of Indiana University, at the late 
commencement, September, 184.5. Blooming- 
ton, Ind., 1845. Pp. 18. 

14. Baccalaureate, addre.ssed to the sen- 
ior class of 1S4G, of Indiana University. 
Bloomington, Ind., 1846. Pp. 22. 

15. Baccalaureate, addre.ssed to the sen- 
ior class of Indiana University, at the late 
commencement. September, 1847. Blooming- 
ton, Ind., 1847. Pp. 22. 



16. Baccalaureate, addressed to the sen- 
ior class of Indiana University, at the late 
commencement, August, 1850. Blooming- 
ton, Ind., 1850. Pp. 23. 

17. The individual ; a baccalaureate de- 
livered to the class of seniors at the com- 
mencement of the Indiana University, Aug. 
13, 1851. Indianapolis, 1851. Pp. 24. 

18. Numerous sermons and translations 
from Plato. In Equator. 



Theophilus Adam Wylie, LL.D. Profes- 
sor of Natural Philosophy, 1837-18.52 ; 
1854-1886; Emeritus Professor of Nat- 
ural Philosophy, 1886-95. Oied June 
9, 1895, at Bloomington, Ind. 

1. Baccalaureate discourse to the grad- 
uating class of Indiana University, 1859. 
Indianapolis, 1859. Pp. 30. 

2. Andrevsr Wylie, D.D., first President 
of Indiana University. In Indiana Sch. 
Jour., XIII, pp. 175-186. (May, 1868.) 



Peter A. Yoder, Instructor in Chemistry, 
1894-96. Hec Alumni list. 



250 



PUBLICATIONS OF ALUMNI 



***The list which follows is intended to include all books, pamphlets and articles 
(other than newspaper articles) published by alumni and students of Indiana University; 
but persons connected with the University only by the receipt of an honorary degree have 
been omitted from this list. Degrees conferred by this University are indicated by add- 
ing the year in which conferred ; where the year is not given, it is to be understood that 
the degree was taken elsewhere. 



Benjamin Franklin Adams, Jr., 
(1883). Bloomingtou, lud. 



A.B. 



1. Analy.sis of oGlitic limestone (buff 
and blue) from Dunn & Dunn's quarry. In 
Rep. Indiana Geol. Surv. for 1881, pp. 
32-33. 

2. Estimation of carbonic acid in the 
air. (Joint author with T. C. Van Niiys.) 
In Am. Chem. Jour., IX, p. 64. 



RoDEKT JuDSON Aley, A.B. (1888), 
(1800), Ph.D. See Faculty list. 



A.M. 



Frank Marion Andrews. A.B. (1894), 
A.M. (1895), Ph.D. See Faculty list. 



Charle.s Ellsworth Atkinson, A.B. 
(1897). Kokomo, Ind. 

1. Why study music? In College 
Index for 1892. 

2. Christ in his sanctum sanctorum. 
1903. Pp. 18 : 1 plate. 

3. Spirit life. In Christ. Advoc. for 
1904. 

4. Upon what rests the stability of 
truth? Pp. 100. (In press.) 



Samuel Weir Axtell, LL.B. 
Hoopeston, 111. 



(1874). 



1. The secret told, a text-book of 
psychic healing. Hoopeston, III. Pp. 250. 

2. Know thyself, from a mental science- 
standpoint. Hoopeston, 111. Pp. 70. 

Orlan Franklin Baker, LL.B. (1864). 
Died Sept. 9, 1888, at Vincenne.s, Ind. 

1. The primitive dwellers : a history 
of the population, aboriginal and colonial. 

2. Annals of Vincennes. 



David Demaeee Banta, B.S. (1855) ; 
LL.B. (1857) ; LL.D. Dean of the 
School of Law, Indiana University,. 
1890-1896. Died April 9, 1896, at 
Bloomington, Ind. 

1. A historical sketch of Johnson coun- 
ty, Indiana. Chicago, 1881. Pp. 170. 

2. Making a neighborhood ; an ad- 
dress delivered at the Shiloh reunion, Ma.\- 
26, 1887. Franklin, Ind. Pp. 49. 

3. The Indiana Seminary. In T. A. 
Wylie's 'Indiana University, its history from 
1820 to 1900,' pp. 5-37. 

4. A history of the Presbyteriam 
church of Franklin, Ind. 



251 



Indiana University 



\_Banta 



-George Banta, A.B. 
Wis. 



(.1870). Meuasha, 



1. Flying leaves : being a collection of 
poems, stories, articles, etc., of various mem- 
bers of tne Banta and Pleasants families. 
Menasha, Wis. Pp. 300. 



Earl Barnes, A.B. (1890), M.S. Pro- 
fessor of European History, Indiana 
University, 1889-1890. Now editor and 
lecturer, Philadelphia, Pa. 

1. Studies in education. First series. 
Stanford University, 1896-1897. Pp. 400. 

2. Sheldon's studies in American his- 
tory. (Joint author with Mary Sheldon 
Barnes.) Boston, 1898 (Revised edition). 
Pp. X, 433. 

3. Studies in education. Second series. 
Philadelphia, 1902. Pp. 400. 



Fred Henry Batman, A.B. (1901). Chi- 
cago. 

1. Pneumococcal bronchiolitis (capil- 
lary bronchitis). (Joint author with C. P. 
ClarK.) In Jour, of Infectious Diseases, I, 
pp. 229-235. (March 19, 1904.) 



Charles Orville Bechtol, A.B. 
M.D. Huntington, Ind. 



(1898), 



1. An easily detachable plaster-of-paris 
<'ast. In Jour. Am. Med. Asso., Sept. 5. 
1903. 



Charles Henry Beeson, A.B. (1893), 
A.M. (1895). Tutor in Latin, Indiana 
University, 1894-95 ; Instructor in 
Latin, 1895-90. Now teacher of Latin. 
High School, Peoria, 111. 

1. Second Latin book (Intercollegiate 



Latin .serie.s. ) (.loint author with Frank J. 
Miller.) Chicago, 1902. Pp. 044. 

2. Second Latin book. (Text edition.) 
(Joint author with Frank J. ^liller.) Chi- 
cago, 1902. Pp. 178. 



Sanford Bell, A.B. (1899). A.M. (1900). 
Assistant Professor of Pedagogy, Indi- 
ana University, 1898-1900. Now Pro- 
fessor of Education, University of Colo- 
rado, Boulder, Colo. 

1. ^Methods of observing children. In 
Child-Study Mo., Ill, pp. 578-584. (April, 
1898.) 

2. A study of the teacher's influence. 
/;) Ped. Sem., VII, pp. 492.525. (Dec, 
1900. ) 

3. An educational object-lesson. In 
Ped. Sem., IX, pp. 237-247. (June, 1902.) 

4. A preliminary study of the emotion 
of love between the sexes. In Am. Jour. 
Psych., XIII, pp. 325-354. (July, 1902.) 

5. The significance of activity in child 
life. In Independent, LIV, pp. 911-914. 
(April IG, 1903.) 

0. An introductory study in the psy- 
chology of foods. In Am. Jour. Psych., 
1904. 



Lee Fent Bennett, A.B. (1898). Profes- 
sor of Geology and Mineralogy, North- 
ern Indiana Normal School, Valparaiso, 
Ind. 

1. Four comparative cross sections of 
the Knobstone group in Indiana. In Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1897. pp. 258-2G2 ; 
1 plate. 

2. Notes on the eastern escarpment of 
the Knobstone formation in Indiana. In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1898, pp. 283- 
287 : 1 plate. 

3. Head-waters of Salt creek in Porter 
county, Ind. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 
for 1899, pp. 164-166 ; 1 plate. 



252 



B latch ley ^ 



Bibliography : Alumni 



4. Rocks and minerals. Valparaiso. 
1903. Pp. S3. 



Willis Stanley Blatciiley, A.B. (1887), 
A.M. (1891). State Geologist of Indi- 
ana, Indianapolis. 

1. On the American species of the 
genus Umbra. In Proc. Phila. Acad. Sci. 
for 1885, pp. 12-13. 

2. A review of the species of the genus 
Pimephales. In I'roc. Phila. Acad. Sci. for 
1885, pp. 63-71. 

.3. On the genus Aphredoderus. In 
Proc. Phila. Acad. Sci. for 1885, pp. 13G- 
137. 

4. A gnatcatcher's strategy. //(- Au- 
dubon Magazine, March, 1888. 

5. Some Indiana Acrididse. In 
Canadian Ent.. XXIII, pp. 74-81, 98-100 
(1891) ; XXIV, pp. 28-34 (1892) ; XXVI, 
pp. 217-222. 241-245 (1894* : XXX, pp. 
54-64 (1898). 

G. Notes on the batrachians and rep- 
tiles of Vigo county, Ind. I. In Jour. Cin- 
cinnati Soc. Nat. Hist., XIV, pp. 23-35. 
(1891.) 

7. Entomologizing in Mexico. In Ent. 
News, pp. 111-114, 131-134. (1892.) 

8. Cnicus discolor as an insect trap. 
In Canadian Ent., pp. 310-311. (1892.) 

9. The Gryllidae of Indiana. In Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1892, pp. 126-144. 

10. A catalogue of the butterflies known 
to occur in Indiana. In 17th Ann. Rep. 
Indiana Dept. Geol. and Nat. Hist, for 1893, 
pp. 365-408. 

11. Some new Locustidte from Indiana. 
In Canadian Ent., XV, pp. 89-93. (1893.) 

12. On a collection of batrachians and 
reptiles from INIount Orizaba. Mexico, with 
descriptions of two new species. In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus., XVI. pp. 37-42. (1893.) 

13. The Locastidse of Indiana. In Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1893, pp. 92-153. 



14. The P>lattid;e of Indiana. In Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1893, pp. 153-165. 

15. Notes on the winter insect fauna of 
Vigo county. Indiana. In Psyche. June. 

1895, pp. 247-250; August, 1895, pp. 267- 
270: Sept., 1895, pp. 279-283; Feb.. 1896,, 
pp. 336-340 ; ]\Iay, 1896, pp. 379-381 ; July^ 

1896, pp. 399-401 ; Oct., 1896, pp. 434-437 ; 
Dec. 1896, pp. 4.55-458. 

16. A jireliminary reiiort on the clays 
and clay industries of the coal bearing coun- 
ties of Indiana. In 20th Ann. Rep. Indiana 
Dept. Geol. and Nat. Res. for 1895. pp. 23- 
185. 4 plates. (1896.) 

17. Insects in general and the Orthop- 
tera of Indiana in particular. //( Trans. 
Indiana Hort. Soc. for 1896. pp. 1-23. 

18. How plants and animals spend the- 
winter. //( I'op. Sci. Mo.. LI. pp. 496-507. 
(Feb.. 1897.) 

19. The natural resources of Indiana. 
In 21st Ann. Rep. Indiana Dept. Geol. and 
Nat. Res. for 1896, p. 1-25. (1897.) 

20. The petroleum industry in Indiana.. 
7n 21st Ann. Rep. Indiana Dept. Geol. and 
Nat. Res. for 1896. pp. 27-96. 1 plate. 1 map.. 
(1897.) 

21. Indiana caves and their fauna. In 
21st Ann. Rep. Indiana Dept. Geol. and Nat. 
Res. for 1896. pp. 122-212. 9 plates. (1897.) 

22. A catalogue of the uncultivated 
ferns and fern allies and the flowering plants 
of Vigo county, Indiana. In 21st Ann. Rep. 
Indiana Dei)t. Geol. and Nat. Res. for 1896,. 
pp. 577-708. (1897.) 

23. Notes on some phanerogams new or 
rare to the State. In Proc. Indiana Acad.. 
Sci. for 1897, pp. 130-143. 

24. Review of Samuel II. Scudder's 
'Revision of the Melanopli.' In Canadian 
Ent., March, 1898. 

25. Two new Alelanopli from Les 
Cheneaux Islands, jMichigan. In Psyche,. 
April. 1898. pp. 195-197. 

2(!. The geology of Lake and Porter 
counties, Indiana. In 22d Ann. Rep. IndL- 



!53 



Indiana University 



iBlatchUy 



•ana Uept. Geol. and Nat. Res. for 1SU7, pp. 
25-104, 1 map. (1898.) 

27. The clays and clay industries of 
northwestern Indiana. In 22d Ann. IJop. 
Indiana Dopt. Geol. and Nat. Res. for 1897, 
pp. 10G-153, 1 plate. (1898.) 

28. The petroleum industry in Indiana 
in 1897. In 22d Ann. Rep. Indiana Dept. 
Geol. and Nat. Res. for 1897, pp. 15.5-181. 
(1898.) 

2!). (iloaninjis from nature. Indianap- 
olis, 1899. Pp. 348. Illustrated. 

30. The natural resources of Indiana. 
In 24th Ann. Rep. Indiana Dept. Geol. and 
Nat. Res. for 1899, pp. 3-40. (1900.) 

81. Notes on the batrachians and rep- 
tiles of Vigo county, Indiana. II. In 24th 
Ann. Rep. Indiana Geol. and Nat. Res. for 
1900, pp. 537-552. 

32. On the species of Nemobius kno\Yn 
to occur in Indiana. In I'syclie. IX, pp. 
^1-54. ( 1900. ) 

33. Portland cement ; its history, uses, 
composition, process of manufacture, meth- 
ods of testing, etc. In 25th Ann. Rep. In- 
diana Dept. Geol. and Nat. Res. for 1900, 
pp. l-MO, 4 plates. (1901.) 

34. The lakes of northern Indiana and 
their associated marl deposits. (Joint au- 
thor with Geo. H. Ashley.) In 25th Ann. 
Iicp Indiana Dept. Geol. and Nat. Res. foi- 
1900, pp. 31-121. Illustrated. (1901.) 

35. Oolite and orditic stone for Port- 
land cement manufacture. //( 25th Ann. 
Rep. Indiana Dept. Geol. and Nat. Res. for 
1900, pp. 322-330, 1 plate. (1901.) 

36. The petroleum industry in Indiana 
In 1900. In 25th Ann. Rep. Indiana Dept. 
•Geol. and Nat. Res. for 1900, pp. 481-.527. 

(1901.) 

.">7. On a small collection of liatrachians 
and reptiles, with descriptions of two new 
•species. In 25th Ann. Rep. Indiana Dept. 
Geol. and Nat. Res. for 1900, pp. 759-763. 
■< 1901. ) 



38. What the teacher of science can do 
to make the teaching of science in second- 
ary schools more pojnilar. In Proc. Nat. 
Educ. Assoc, for 1901, jip. 777-784. 

39. A nature-wooing at Ormond by the 
sea. Indianapolis, 1902. Pp. 245. Illus- 
trated. 

40. The mineral waters of Indiana. 
In 26th Ann. Rep. Indiana Dept. Geol. and 
Nat. Res. for 1901. jip. 1-158, 19 plates. 
(1902.) 

41. The petroleum industry in Indiana 
in 1901. //( 2Gth Ann. Rep. Indiana Dept. 
Geol. and Nat. Res. for 1901. pp. 303-331. 
(1902.) 

42. Gold and diamonds in Indiana. In 
27th Ann. Rep. Indiana Dept. Geol. and Nat. 
Res. for 1902, pp. 11-47, 4 plates, 2 maps. 
( 1903. ) 

43. The orthoptera of Indiana. //; 
27th Ann. Rep. Indiana Dept. Geol. and 
Nat. Res. for 1902, pp. 123-471. Illustrated. 
(1903.) 

44. The petroleum industry in Indiana 
in 1903. In 27th Ann. Rep. Indiana Dept. 
Geol. and Nat. Res. for 1902, pp. 571 -.576. 
(1903.) 

4.5. On some mollusca known to occur 
in Indiana. A supplementary iiaper to 
(Jail's catalogue. (Joint autlior witli L. E. 
Daniels.) 7h 27th Ann. Rep. Indiana Dept. 
Geol. and Nat. Res. for 1902. pp. 517-628. 
Illustrated. (1903.) 

46. The jietroleum industry in Indiana 
in 1903. /// 2Sth Ann. Rep. Indiana Dept. 
(ieol. and Xat. Res. for 1!Mt3. pp. 7S-209. 
( 1904. ) 

47. The lime industi-y in Indiana in 
IDo;;. //( 2Srh .\nu. Reji. Indiana Dept. 
(Jeol. and Nat. Res.. 1903. pii. 211-257. 
(1904.) 

48. The Indiana of Nature: its evolu- 
tion. /// Proc. Indiana Acnd. Sci. for 190.3. 
(In press.) 



254 



Bollman^ 



Bibliography: Alumni 



Eugene William Hoiiaxnoiv, A.B. (18U0), 
A.M. (3892). Pi-esidont State Normal 
School, Dululli, Minn. 

1. I'lalo and education. In Indiana 
Sch. Jour., XXX n. pp. mVi-TA-l. (July, 
1880.) 

2. I'ocnlinr and t'xccptional cliildren. 
/;* IVd. Som.. W. pp. :',-r,ll. (Oct., 181)(>. ) 

."'. The ()nl.\- child in a laniily. In I'cd. 
Sem., V, pp. 475-4!)6. (April, 1898.) 

4. The undue emiihasis of method. In 
Indiana Scli. Jour., XL1\'. pp. 111). (Jan., 
1899. ) 



Makie Boisex. >S'cc Mr.s. Morton C. Brad- 
ley. 



CiiAKLES IIauvky Boll.ma.n. A.B. (1889). 
Died July V.>,, 1889, at Waycross, Ga. 

1. Notes on a collection of fishes from 
the Allegheny river. (.Foint autiior with B. 
W. Evermaiui. ) In ^aw York Acad. Sci. 
for 188G, pp. 335-340. 

2. A list of fishes observed in the vi- 
cinity of Brookville, Franklin county, Indi- 
ana. In Bull. Brookville Soc. Nat. Hist, 
for 188G, pp. 1-11. 

3. Preliminary descriptions of ten new 
North American Myriapods. In Am. Nat., 
XXI, pp. 81-82. (Jan., 1887.) 

4. Notes on North American Litho- 
biida' and Scutigeridae, with description of 
new species. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
1887, pp. 255-266. 

5. Descriptions of new genera and 
species of ]Myriai)ods. In lOnt. Amer., II, 
pp. 225-228. (1SS7.) 

(). Notes on North American Julidai. 
In Ann. New York Acad. Sci. for 1887, 
pp. 25-44. 

7. Some new species of Myriapods. In 
Ann. New York Acad. Sci. for 1887. 

8. List of Myriapods of Bloomington, 
Ind. In Ann. New York Acad. Sci. for 1887. 



!>. Notes on a collection of fishes from 
Mil' Escambia river, with description of a 
new species of Zygonectes. /;/ Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for 1886. (1887.) 

lit. New North American Myriapods. 
hi Ent. Amer., Ill, pp. 81-83. (1887.) 

1 1. New genus and species of Polydes- 
niidie. /// I'hiloniologica Am(>ricana, III, ])]). 
4r.-ir.. (.lune, 1887.) 

12. Notes upon a colled ion of Myria- 
poda from IO:ist Tennessee. //( Ann. New 
York Acad. Xa(. Sci. for 1888, pp. 106-112. 

13. A preliminary list of the Myriapoda 
of Arkansas. In Ent. Amer., IV, pp. 1-8. 
(1888.) 

14. List of (ishes collected at (Jreen Tur- 
tle Cay in the Bahamas, by Charles L. Ed- 
wards, (.loinl author with David Starr Jor- 
dan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1888, pp. 
549-553. 

1.5. D(»scri|)tii)n of a new species of in- 
sect, Fontaria pulchella, from Strawberry 
Plains, Jefi'erson county, Tenn. In Proc. U. 
S. Xa(. .Mus. for 1888, p. 316. 

ir>. Notes on a collection of Myriapoda 
from Ciil)a. /;( Proc. II. S. Nat. Mus. for 
1888, i)p. 3:!5-338. 

17. Notes on a collection of Myriapoda 
from flossy Creek, Tenn., with a descrip- 
tion of a new species. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
.Mus. for 1888, pp. 339-342. 

18. Notes upon some Myriapods belong- 
ing to the U. S. National Museum. In 
Proc. U. S. Nnt. Mus. for 1888, pp. 403-410. 

19. Scientific results of explorations by 
the IT. S. Fish Commission Steamer Alba- 
tross. Xo. IV. Descriptions of a new species 
of fishes collected at the (Jalapagos Islands 
and along the coast of the United States 
of Colombia, 1887-1888. In Proc. D. S. Nat. 
Mus. for 1889, p. 149. 

20. Notes on a collection of Myriapods 
from the P.ernnida islands. In Proc. Acad. 
Nat. Sci. IMiiladelphia for 1889, pp. 127-129. 

21. A report upon the fishes of Kala- 



255 



Indiana University 



[ Bollnian' 



mazoo, Calhoun and Antrim oonnties. Mich- 
igan. In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. for IS'.K). 
22. The Myriapoda of North America. 
/;( Bull. r. S. Nat. ^Ins. No. 4(1. Wash- 
ington, l8!»o. I'p. 210. (Edited by L. M. 
Underwood. ) 



Lewis Bollman, A.B. (1831), LL.B. 
(1S4G). Died Sept. 3, 1888. at Bloom- 
ington, Ind. 

1. The State University of Indiana : 
the causes of its want of prosperity consid- 
ered. Indianapolis, 1882. I'p. 37. 



Marie (Boisex) Bradley (Mrs. Morton C. 
Bradley I, A.B. (liXXM. A.M. (1000). 
New York City. 

1. Editor of "The Arbutus' (Senior 
class annual, Indiana I'niversity I. Bloom- 
iugton, Ind., 1!)00. I'p. 288. 



Edith Clementine Bramiiall, A.B. 
(1895), Ph.D. Professor of History, 
Rockford College, Kockford, HI. 

1. The origin of the temporal privi- 
leges of crusaders. //; Am. Jour. Theol., 
V, pp. 27!t-292. (April, 1001.) 

2. The early Christian persecutions. 
(Joint author with D. C. Munro. ) //(. Univ. 
Penn. Translations and Reprints, IV, No. 1. 

3. Review of Ed. Heyck's 'Die Kreusc- 
ziige und das heilige Land.' In Am. Jour. 
Theol., V. (Oct., 1001.) 



John Casper Branner. Pli.D. (1885), 
LL.D. Professor of Geology, Indiana 
University, 1885-91. Now Professor of 
Geology, Leland Stanford Junior Uni- 
versity, Stanford University, Cal. 

1. The course and growth of the fibro- 



vascular bundles in palms. In Proc. Am. 
Phil. Soc. for 1884, NXI. pj.. 4.")0-483. 12 
tigures, 

2. The pororoca or bore of the Ama- 
zon. In Science, IV, pp. 488-492. (Nov. 
28, 1884. ) Published as separate, with ad- 
ditional notes. Boston, 1885. 4 figures. 

3. Rock inscriptions in Brazil. In 
Am. Nat., XVIII, pp. 1187-1192. 2 figures,. 
3 plates. (Dec, 1884.) The separates con- 
tain also pp. 1102a and 1102b. 

4. I'reliminary report of observations 
upon insects injurious to cotton, orange, and 
sugar-cane in Brazil. In U. S. Dept. of 
Agr., Division of Entomology, Bulletin No. 
4, pp. G3-(W. (1884.) The same report 
reprinted as a separate, Boston, 1884. 

5. The Batrachichthys. In Science; 
III, p. 37G. 1 figure. (March 28, 1884.) 

G. Flexible sandstone. In Am. Nat.,- 
XVIII, p. 927. (Sept., 1884.) 

7. Inscripcoes em rochedos do Brazil. 
Translated by Dr. Joao Baptista Regueira 
Costa and published by the Instituto Archeo- 
logico e Geographico Pernambucano. 4 
plates. Pernambuco, Brazil, 1885. 

8. Glaciation of the Lackawanna val- 
ley. In Proc. A. A. A. S. for 1885. XXXIV,. 
l)p. 212-214. Abstract in Science, VI, pp'. 
221-222. (1885.) 

9. The reputation of the lantern-fiy. 
In Am. Nat., XIX. pp. 835-838. 1 plate- 
(Sept.. 188.5.) 

10. A (iitiranaboia. /;/ Liberal Mineiro.. 
Ouro I'reto. Brazil. (Dec. 19, 1S85.) 

11. Cotton in tlie Empire of Brazil ; tlie' 
antiquity, methods and extent of its culti- 
vation, together with statistics of exporta- 
tion and home consumption. Dept. of Agr- 
Special Report No. 8. Pp. 70. (1885.) 

12. Cotton caterpillars in Brazil. Ap- 
pendix V, pp. 49-54, Fourth Rep. U. S. En- 
tomological Comm. on cotton worm and boll 
worm. (1885.) 

13. Glaciation of the Wyoming and" 
Lackawanna vallevs. In Proc. Am. I'hil.. 



256 



Branner'\ 



Bibliography : Alumni 



Soc. for 1SS6, XXIII, pp. 337-357, 2 maps. 
Abstract in Science, VIII, p. 422. (1886.) 

14. Geographical and geological explora- 
tion in Brazil. In Am. Nat., XX, pp. 687- 
690. (August, 1886.) 

15. Notes upon a native Brazilian lan- 
guage. In Proc. A. A. A. S. for 1886, 
XXXV, pp. 329-330. (1886.) 

16. The thickness of the ice in north- 
eastern Pennsylvania during the glacial 
epoch. In Am. Jour, of Sci., CXXXII, pp. 
362-366. (Nov., 1886.) 

17. Geological map of Indiana, colored 
according to the scheme of the Interna- 
tional Congress of Geologists, 2 ft.x4 ft. In- 
dianapolis, 1886. 

18. The railways of Bi-azil. In Rail- 
way Age, XII, pp. 470-473. (July 8, 1887.) 
Reprinted with notes and additions. 26 pp., 
2 maps. Chicago, 1887. 

19. Annual report of the geological sur- 
vey of Arkansas for 1887. Pp. 15. (1887.) 

20. Additional notes on the lantern-fly 
of Brazil. In Trans. New York Acad. Sci. 
for 1887, VII, pp. 66-68. 

21. Notes on the glacial strise observed 
in the Lackawanna-Wyoming region. In 
Lackawanna Inst. Hist, and Sci., I, pp. 19- 
27. Scrantou, Pa., 1887. 

22. Topographical map in ten-foot con- 
tours of a portion of the Lackawanna valley 
between Scranton and Carbondale, Lacka- 
wanna county, in the Northern Anthracite 
coal field ; scale 1600'=1". Preliminary to- 
pographical map, Lackawanna valley sheets 
Nos. I and II. In Ann. Rep., 2d Geol. 
Surv. Pennsylvania for 1886. (1887.) 

23. The so-called gold and silver mines 
of Arkansas ; an oflicial report to Governor 
S. P. Hughes. In Engineering and Mining 
Journal, N. Y., August 18, 1888. 

24. Notes on the fauna of the islands of 
Fernando de Noronha. In Am. Nat., XXII, 
pp. 861-871, 2 figures. (Oct., 1888.) 

25. Notes on the Botoctidus and their 



ornaments. In Proc. Am. Phil. Soc. for 
1888, XXVI, pp. 171-173 ; 10 figures. 

26. The Cretaceous and Tertiary geol- 
ogy of the Sergipe-Alagoas basin of Brazil. 
In Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. for 1888, XVI, 
pp. 369-434, 5 plates, 10 figures. 

27. On the manufacture of Portland 
cement. In Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Arkansas 
for 1888, II, chap, xxix, pp. 291-302. 

28. Introduction to 'The Neozoic geol- 
ogy of Southwestern Arkansas.' In Ann. 
Rep. Geol. Surv. Arkansas for 1888, II, 
pp. xi-xiv. 

29. Administrative report and introduc- 
tion to 'Geology of Western Central Arkan- 
sas.' In Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Arkansas for 
1888, I, pp. xv-xxxi. 

30. Preface to 'Geology of the coal re- 
gions.' In Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Arkansas 
for 1888, III, pp. vii-x. 

31. Glaciation ; its relation to the Lack- 
awanna-Wyoming valley. In Lackawanna 
Inst. Hist, and Sci., I, pp. 3-18; 4 plates. 
Scranton, Pa., 1888. 

32. Arkansas gold and silver mines ; an 
official report to Governor S. P. Hughes in 
reply to certain charges. In Engineering 
and Mining Jour., XLVI, pp. 325-327. (Oct. 
20, 1888.) 

33. Arkansas state weather service. 
Appendix V to the Ann. Rep. Chief Signal 
Officer, 1888, pp. 72-75. (1889.) 

34. The geology of Fernando de Nor- 
onha. In Am. Jour. Sci., XXXVII, pp. 
145-161, map, 7 figures. (Feb., 1889.) 

35. The convict island of Brazil — Fer- 
nando de Noronha. In Pop. Sci. Mo., 
XXXV, pp. 33-40. (May, 1889.) 

36. The age and correlation of the Me- 
sozoic rocks of the Sergipe-Alogoas basin of 
Brazil. In Proc. A. A. A. S. for 1889, 
XXXVII, pp. 187-lSS. 

37. The age of the crystalline rocks ef 
Arkansas. In Proc. A. A. A. S. for 1889, 
XXXVII, p. 188. 



(18) 



257 



Indiana University 



i'Brc 



38. The peridotite of Pike county, 
Arkansas. (Joint author with R. N. 
Brackett.) In Am. Jour. Sci., CXXXVIII, 
pp. 50-56; 1 figure, 1 plate. (1889.) Re- 
printed in Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Arkansas 
for 1890, vol. II, pp. 378-391; 1 figure, 1 
plate. Abstract in Proc. A. A. A. S. for 
1889, XXXVII, pp. 188-189 ; also in Neues 
Jahi-buch f. Mineralogie for 1893, pp. 500- 
501. 

39. Analyses of Fort Smith clay shales. 
In Brick, Tile and Pottery Gazette, X, p. 
114. (June, 1889.) 

40. Building stones of Arkansas. In 
Stone, II, pp. 92-93. (Oct., 1889.) 

41. Geology of Arkansas. Abstract of 
a lecture delivered at Pine Bluff, Arkansas. 
In JMinutes State Teachers' Asso. Arkansas 
for 1889, pp. 34-38. 

42. Professor Hartt in Brazil. In Cor- 
nell Mag., Ithaca, N. Y., II, pp. 186-192. 
(Feb., 1890.) 

43. The training of a geologist. In Am. 
Geologist, V, pp. 147-160. (March, 1890.) 

44. The seolian sandstone of Fernando 
de Noronha. In Am. Jour. Sci., CXXXIX, 
pp. 247-257, 8 figures. (April, 1890.) 

45. Geologia de Fernando de Noronha. 
No. 36 of the Revista do Institute Archae- 
ologico e Geographico Pernambucano. Per- 
nambuco, Brazil, 1890. Pp. 21 ; 1 map, 7 
plates. 

46. The relation of the state and na- 
tional geological survey to each other, and io 
the geologists of the country. In Am. Geol., 
VI, pp. 295-309. (Nov., 1890.) In Science, 
XVI, pp. 120-123. (August, 1890.) Also in 
Proc. A. A. A. S. for 1891, XXXIX, pp. 
219-237. 

47. The pororoca or bore of the Amazon. 
In Pop. Sci. Mo., XXXVIII, pp. 208-215. 
(Dec, 1890.) 

48. A preliminary report upon the 
bauxite deposits of Arkansas, with loca- 
tions and analyses. In Bien. Rep. State 



Comm. Mines, Uivs. and Agr. for 1893-94, 
pp. 119-126 ; also in Bien. Rep. of the same 
for 1895-96, pp. 105-112. 

49. Bauxite in Arkansas. In Am. Geol.. 
VII, pp. 181-183. (March, 1891.) In 
Science, XVII, p. 171. (March 27, 1891) ; 
also in Engineering and Alining Jour., LI, 
p. 114. (1891.) 

50. Introduction to 'The geology of 
Washington county' (Arkansas). In Ann. 
Rep. Geol. Surv. Arkansas for 1888, IV, 
pp. xi-xiv. 

51. A list of the plants of Arkansas. 
(Joint author with F. V. Coville.) In 

Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Arkan.sa.s for 1888, 
IV, pp. 152-242. 

52. Preface to 'The geology of Crowley's 
Ridge.' In Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Arkansas 
for 1889, II, pp. xi-xix. 

53. Preface to 'Manganese ; its uses, 
ores and deposits.' In Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. 
Arkansas for 1890, I, pp. xxiii-xxvii. 

54. Preface to 'The igneous rocks of 
Arkansas.' In Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Ar- 
kansas, II, pp. xi-xv. (1891.) 

55. Analyses of Hot Springs waters. In 
Rep. Supt. Hot Springs Reserv. to Sec. of 
Interior, pp. 9-16. (1891.) 

56. David Starr Jordan, LL.D. A bi- 
ographical notice. In Delta Upsilon Quart., 
IX, pp. 19.5-108. (May, 1901.) 

57. The mineral waters of Arkansas. 
In Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Arkansas for 1891, 
I, pp. 144, map. 

58. The cotton industry in Brazil. In 
Pop. Sci. Mo., XL, pp. 666-674. (1892.) 

59. The training of a geologist. San 
Francisco, 1892. 3d ed. 19 pp. 

60. Preface to 'Whetstones and the No- 
vaculites of Arkansas.' In Ann. Rep. Geol. 
Surv. Arkansas for 1890, III, pp. xv-xviii. 

61. Preface to 'The iron deposits of Ar- 
kansas.' In Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Arkansas 
for 1892, I, p. xi. 

62. The lip and ear ornaments of the 



258 



'B 



ranner 



Bibliography : Alumni 



Botociicliis, In Pop. Sci. Mo., XLIII, pp. 
753-757, 5 figures. (Oct., 1893.) 

63. The supposed glaciatiou of Brazil. 
In Jour. Geology, I, pp. 753-772, illus. 
(1893.) 

G4. Preface to 'Marbles aud other lime- 
stones.' In Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Arkansas 
for 1890, IV, pp. xvii-xxi. 

65. Obsei'vations upon the erosion in the 
hydrographic basin of the Arkansas river 
above Little Rock. In Wilder Quarter- 
Century Book, pp. 325-337. Ithaca, N. Y. 
1893. Also separate, Ithaca, N. Y., 1893. 

66. The coal fields of Arkansas. In 
Mineral Resources of the U. S. for 1892, pp. 
303-306, 1 figure. (1893.) 

(!7. Proverbs from the Portugese. //( 
the Overland Monthly, 2d ser., XXI, pp. 
501-503. (May, 1893.) 

68. Elevations in the State of Arkansas. 
In Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Arkansas for 1891, 
II, pp. 77-152, 2 figures. (1894.) 

69. Observations upon the erosion in the 
hydrographic basin of the Arkansas river 
above Little Rock. In Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. 
Arkansas for 1891, II, pp. 153-166. (1894.) 

70. Magnetic observations and meridian 
monuments established in Arkansas. In 
Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Arkansas for 1891, 
II. pp. 167-176, 10 figures. (1894.) 

71. Introduction to Sampson's 'Prelim- 
inary list of the Mollusca of Arkansas.' In 
Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Arkansas for 1891,^ 
II, pp. 179-180. (1894.) 

72. Introduction to Meek's 'Catalogue of 
the fishes of Arkansas.' In Ann. Rep. Geol. 
Surv. Arkansas for 1891, II, pp. 216-220. 
(1894.) 

73. Bibliography of the geology of Ar- 
kansas. In Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Arkansas 
for 1891, II, pp. 319-340. (1894.) 

74. Introduction to and translation of 
the political constitutions of Brazil. In The 
Convention Manual of the Sixth New York 
State Constitutional Convention, 1894. Part 
2, III, pp. 57-138. 

259 



75. Preface to 'The Tertiary geology of 
Southern Arkansas.' In Ann. Rep. Geol. 
Surv. Arkansas for 1892, II, pp. xiii-xiv. 
(1894.) 

76. Report on road making materials in 
Arkansas. In U. S. Dept. Agr., Ofiice of 
Road Inquiry, Bulletin No. 4. (1894) ; 
also in 4th Bien. Rep. Bureau of Mines, 
Mfr.s. and Agr. (of Arkansas) for 1895-96, 
pp. 90-101. Also in 5th Bien. Rep. of that 
bureau for 1897-98, pp. 131-141. 

77. The geological survey of Arkansas. 
In Jour. Geology, II, pp. 826-836. (1894.) 

78. Os gres eolios de Fernando de Nor- 
onha. In Instituto Archeologico e Geograph- 
ico Pernambucano, 8 figures. Pernambuco, 
Brazil, 1894. 

79. Syllabus of lectures on economic 
geology. (Joint author with John F. New- 
som.) Palo Alto, 1895. Pp. 282. 

80. Great mountain railways. (.loint 
author with John H. Means.) In Chautau- 
quan, July, 1895, pp. 426-433. 

81. Report upon the condition of the 
geological survey of Arkansas. Appendix 
to Bien. Mess, of Gov. Wm. M. Fishback to 
General Assembly of Arkansas, pp. 26-33 
(1895). 

82. Decomposition of rocks in Brazil. 
In Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., VII. pp. 2.55-314; 5 
plates, 6 figures. (1895-96.) 

83. Thickne.ss of the Paleozoic sediments 
in Arkansas. /(( Am. Jour. Sci., II, pp. 
229-236, 8 figures. (Sept., 1896.) 

84. The phasphate deposits of Arkansas. 
In Trans. Am. Inst. Mining Engineers for 
1896, XXVI, pp. 580-598, map. (1896.) 

85. Bibliography of clays and the ce- 
ramic arts, hi Bull. 143 U. S. Geol. Surv., 
114 pp., 2961 titles. (1896.) 

86. Review of F. H. King's 'The soil.' 
In Jour. Geol., IV, p. 243. (1896.) 

87. The decomposition of rocks in 
Brazil. In Jour. Geol., IV, pp. 630-631. 
(1896.) 



Indiana University 



■B; 



88. On the size of geological publica- 
tions. In Jonr. Geol., IV, pp. 214-217. 
(1896.) 

89. A supposta glaciagao do Brazil. In 
Revista Brazileira, VI, pp. 49-55, lOG-113. 
(April, 189G.) 

90. The study of science. (Part of a 
lecture delivered at the Mount Tamalpais 
Military Academy.) In Overland Monthly, 
Oct., 1896. 

91. Abstract of F. Katzer's 'Oldest 
fossiliferous beds of the Amazon region.' 
In Jour. Geol., IV, pp. 975-976. (1896.) 

92. Review of the proceedings of the 
Indiana Academy of Sciences, geological sub- 
jects. In Jour. Geol., IV, p. 981. (1896.) 

93. Geological map of Arkansas. Scale 
80 mi.=l". (1896.) 

94. Note on 'O fim da creagao, pelo 
Visconde do Rio Grande.' In Revista 
Brazileira, August 1897, pp. 254-255, Rio de 
Janeiro. Brazil; also in Aunuario do Rio 
Grande do Sul, 1898, pp. 261-265, Porto 
Alegre (Brazil), 1897. 

95. Bacteria and the decomposition of 
rocks. In Am. Jour. Sci., CLIII, pp. 438- 
442 (1897), and as separate; abstract in 
Neues Jahr. f. Mineralogie, II, Referate, 84. 
(1899.) 

96. The cement materials of southwest 
Arkansas. In Trans. American Inst. Mining 
Engineers for 1897, XXVII, pp. 42-63, 6 
figures. Also separate, 22 pp., map, and 
illustrations. 

97. Reply to criticism of R. T. Hill on 
'The cement materials of southwest Ar- 
kansas.' In Trans. Am. Inst. Mining En- 
gineers for 1897, XXVII, pp. 945-946. 

98. The bauxite deposits of Arkansas. 
In Jour. Geol., V, pp. 263-289, 2 plates, 2 
figures. (April-May, 1897.) Also as sepa- 
rate with 10 pp. additional matter, Chicago, 
1897. 

99. The Red River and Clinton mono- 
clines. (Joint author with J. F. Newsom.) 



In Am. Geologist, XX, pp. 1-13, 1 map, 3 
figures. (July, 1897.) 

100. Protection for American colleges. 
In Nation, May 27, 1897, p. 395. 

101. The introduction of new terms in 
geology. In Science, V, pp. 912-913; VI, 
pp. 133-134. (June 11 and July 23, 1897.) 

102. Mineral wealth of Arkansas. In 
Engineering and Mining Jour., August 7, 
1897, p. 153. 

103. Geology in its relations to topog- 
raphy. In Proc. Am. Soc. Civil Engineers 
for 1897, XXIII, No. 8, pp. 473-495, 1 plate, 
16 figures. 

104. Introduction to Ashley's 'Geology of 
the Paleozoic area of Arkansas south of 
the Novaculite region.' In Proc. Am. Phil. 
Soc. for 1897, XXXVI, pp. 217-220. 

105. The former extension of the Ap- 
palachians across Mississippi, Louisiana, 
and Texas. In Am. Jour. Sci., CLIV, pp. 
357-371, 2 figures. (November, 1897.) Ab- 
stract in Rep. British Asso. for Advanc. Sci- 
ence, Toronto meeting, 1897, pp. 643-644 ; 
in Annales de Geographie, 7me Annee, pp. 
245-246 (Sept. 15, 1898) ; in Nature LVII, 
p. 70 (Nov. IS, 1897) ; also in Jour. Geol., 
V, pp. 759-760 (Oct.-Nov., 1897.) 

106. Review of T. C. Hopkin and C. E. 
Siebenthal's 'The Bedford Oolitic limestone 
of Indiana,' published in 21st Ann. Rep. 
State Geologist Indiana. In Jour. Geol., V, 
pp. 529-531. (July- August, 1897.) 

107. Reviews of the 'Unpublished reports 
of the CommLssao Geologica do Brazil,' pub- 
lished in the Boletim do Museu Paraense. 
In Jour. Geol., V, pp. 756-757. (Oct.-Nov., 
1897.) 

108. Review of Katzer's 'Devonian fauna 
of the Rio Maecurti,' published in the Bole- 
tim do Museu Paraense. In Jour. Geol., 
V, pp. 757-758. (1897.) 

109. Geology in its relations to topog- 
raphy (with discussion). In Proc. Am. 
Soc. Civil Engineers, XXXIX, pp. 53-95, 18 
plate.s. (June, 1898.) 



260 



S; 



Bibliography : Alumni 



110. On the origin of certain siliceous 
rocks. (Joint author with O. A. Derby.) 
In- Jour. GeoL, VI, pp. 366-371. (May- 
June, 1898.) Abstract in Neues Jahrb. f. 
Mineralogie, I, p. 408. (1900.) 

111. A geologist's impression (of the 
Grand Canyon of the Colorado, and Black 
Crater, Flagstaff, Arizona). In. Land of 
Sunshine Mag., IX, pp. 149-152, illustrated. 
(August, 1898.) 

112. The Spanish University of Sala- 
manca. In Maryville Coll. Monthly for 
1898, Maryville, Teuu. 

113. Syllabus of elementary geology. 
Stanford University, 1898. Pp. 300; 69 
plates. 

114. Review of J. Geikie's 'Earth sculp- 
ture.' In Science, N. S., VIII, pp. 957-959. 
(1898.) 

115. Some old French place names in the 
state of Arkansas. In Mod. Lang. Notes, 
XIV, No. 2, pp. 65-80. (Feb., 1899.) 

116. The recent ascent of Itambe. In 
Nat'l Geog. Mag., X, p. 183. (1899.) 

117. Notes upon the Sao Paulo sheet of 
the Commissao Geographica e Geologica de 
Sao Paulo. In Revista Brazileira, Rio de 
Janeiro, 1899 ; republished in the Cidade de 
Santos, Santos, Brazil, January 10, 1900. 

118. The Sao Paulo sheet of the topo- 
graphic survey of the Sao Paulo, Brazil. In 
Jour. Geol., VII, pp. 788-789. (1899.) 

119. The manganese deposits of Bahia 
and Minas, Brazil. In Trans. Am. Inst. 
Mining Engineers, XXIX, pp. 756-770, 5 
figures. (Sept., 1899.) 

120. The stone reef at the mouth of Rio 
Grande do Norte. (Joint author with C. E. 
Gilman.) In Am. Geol., XXIV, pp. 342- 
344, 2 figures. (Dec, 1899.) 

121. A recife de pedra na foz do Rio 
Grande do Norte. (Joint author with C. E. 
Gilman.) Traduzido por Dr. Alfredo de 
Carvalho. In Revista do Rio Grande do 
Norte, 1900, Nos. 1, 2, Natal, pp. 267-271. 
(Jan. and Feb., 1900.) 



122. Note upon John M. Clarke's 'The 
Upper Silurian fauna of the Rio Trombetas, 
State of Para, Brazil,' and 'Devonian mol- 
lusca of the State of Para, Brazil,' published 
in Archivos do Museu Nacional, X, pp. 1-48, 
49-174. In Journal of Geology, VII, pp. 
813-814. (Dec, 1899.) 

123. Gold in Brazil. In Mineral Indus- 
try, VIII, p. 281. (1900.) 

124. Diamonds in Brazil. In Mineral 
Industry, VIII, pp. 221-222. (1900.) 

125. Ants as geologic agents in the 
tropics. In Jour. Geol., VIII, pp. 151-153, 
3 figures. (Feb.-March, 1900.) 

126. The oil-bearing shales of the coast 
of Brazil. /;( Trans. Am. Inst. Mining En- 
gineers for 1900, vol. XXX, pp. 537-554. 
Illustrated, map. Review in Neues Jahrb. f. 
Mineralogie, II, pp. 267-268. (1901.) Ab- 
stract in Engineering and Mining Jour., 
LXX, pp. 308-309. (Sept. 15, 1900.) 

127. Syllabus of economic geology. 
(Joint author with J. F. Newsom. ) Stan- 
ford University, 1900. 2d ed. Pp. viii, 
368, 141 figures. 

128. Review of G. D. Harris and A. C. 
Veatcli's 'A preliminary report on the geol- 
ogy of Louisiana.' In Jour. Geol., VIII, pp. 
177-179. (April-May, 1900.) 

129. Two characteristic geologic sections 
on the northeast coast of Brazil. In Proc. 
Washington Acad. Science for 1900, II, pp. 
185-201 ; 3 plates, 5 figures. 

130. Beach cusps. In Jour. Geol. VIII, 
pp. 481-484, 3 figures. (Sept.-Oct., 1900.) 

131. The zinc and lead region of North 
Arkansas. In Ann. Rep. Geol. Survey Ar- 
kansas, vol. V. Little Rock, Dec, 1900. 
Pp. xiv, .395 ; 38 plates, 92 figures, atlas of 
7 sheets. 

132. Review of F. W. Simonds's 'A rec- 
ord of the geology of Texas, etc' In Jour. 
Geol., IX, p. 91. (1901.) 

133. Review of Henri Carpentier's 'Geol- 
ogie et mineralogie appliquees. (Paris, 



261 



Indiana University 



["B; 



1900.) Jn Jour. Geol., IX, pp. 19S-199. 
(Feb.-March, 1901.) 

134. Os recifes de gres do Rio Formcso, 
Brazil. In Revista do Institute Archeolog- 
ico e Geographico Peruambucano, No. 54, 
pp. 131-13G. Illustrated. (190L) 

135. The origin of travertine falls. In 
Science, XIV, pp. 184-185. (August, 1901.) 

loG. The zinc and lead deposits of North 
Arkansas. /;* Trans. Am. Inst. Mining En- 
gineers, vol. XXXI, pp. 5T2-G03 ; 27 illus- 
trations. Republished in Lead and Zinc 
News of St. Louis, Mo., II, Nov. 4, 1901. pp. 
4-6, Nov. 11, 1901, pp. 4-6, Nov. 18, 1901, 
pp. 4-G, Nov. 2o, 1901, pp. 4-5. Abstract in 
Engineering and Mining Jour., Nov. 30, 
1901, pp. 718-719. 1 figure. 

137. Editorial upon giant ripples. In 
Jour. Geol., IX, pp. 535-536. (Sept.-Oct.. 
1901.) 

138. Apontamentos sobre a fauna das 11- 
has de Fernando de Noronha. Ptiblicacao do 
Lastituto Archeologico e Geographico Per- 
nambucano. Pernambuco, 1901. Pp. 14 ; 
2 figures. 

139. Depressions and elevations of the 
southern archipelagoes of Chile. Transla- 
tion (with introduction) of a paper by 
Francisco Vidal Gormaz in the Revista 
Nueva of Santiago de Chile, 1901. Trans- 
lation and introduction. In Scottish Geog. 
Mag., XVIII, pp. 14-24, 1 map. (Jan., 
1902.) 

140. Notes upon the surface geology of 
Rio Grande do Sul, Brazil. By James E. 
Mills. Edited from his letters. In Am. 
Geol., XXIX, pp. 126-127. (Feb., 1902.) 

141. The occuri-ence of fossil remains of 
mammals in the interior of the States of 
Pernambuco and Alagoas, Brazil. In Am. 
Jour. Sci., CLXIII, pp. 1.33-137, 1 map, 1 
plate. (Feb., 1902.) 

142. Geology of the northeast coast of 
Brazil. In Bull. Geol. Soc. America, Roch- 
ester, XIII. pp. 41-98; 16 figures, 9 plates. 



143. The palm trees of Brazil. In Pop. 
Sei. .Mo., LX, pp. 386-412 ; 25 figures. 

144. Discussion of Eric Hedburg's paper 
on 'The Missouri and Arkansas zinc region.' 
In Trans. Am. Inst. Mining Engineers, 
XXXI, pp. 1013-1014. 

145. The phosphate rocks of Arkansas. 
(Joint author with J. F. Newsom.) In 
Bull. 74, Arkansas Agr. Exper. Station, 
pp. .59-123; 23 figures, 15 analyses. (Sept., 
1902. ) 

146. Syllabus of a course of lectures on 
elementary geology. 2d ed. Stanford Uni- 
versity, 1902. Pp. 370. 109 figures, 25 
plates. 

147. The Carnegie institution. In Sei. 
ence, Oct. 3, 1902. N. S., XVI, pp. 527- 
528. 

148. Bibliography of the geology, miner- 
alogy, and paleontology of Brazil. (1288 
titles.) Published by the Bibliotheca Na- 
cional de Rio Janeiro, Brazil. (1902.) 

149. Geologia elementar. (An elemen- 
tary treatise on geology for the use of Bra- 
zilian students. Published in Portuguese.) 
Rio de Janeiro, 1902. Pp. 2.56 ; 264 figures, 
15 plates. 

1.50. Biographical notice of .James E. 
Mills. In Bull, of the Geol. Soc. of Am., 
XIV. (1904.) (In press.) 



jAiiES Ronald Branson, A.B. (1903), In- 
dianapolis, Ind. 

1. I^ditor of 'The Arbutus' (Senior 
cla.ss annual. Indiana University). Bloom- 
ington, Ind., 1903. Pp. 287. 



William L Bray, A.B. (1893), Ph.D. As- 
sociate Professor in charge of School 
of Botany, University of Texas, Austin, 
Tex. 

1. Revision of the South American 
Cichlidre. (.Joint author with C. H. Eigen- 



262 



Brooks ] 



Bibliography : Alumni 



manu.) In Ann. New York Acad. 8ci., VII, 
pp. m~i-().)l. (Jan., 1SU4.) 

2. Synopsis of North American Ama- 
ranthacese. (Joint author with E. B. 
Uline.) In Bot. Gaz., XIX, pp. 207-272, 
313-320; XX, pp. 155-161; 337-344, 440- 
453, (July, August, 1894; April, Augu.st, 
Oct., 1895.) 

3. The geographical distribution of tin; 
Frankeniacese considered in connection witli 
their general relationship. In Jahrb. f. sys- 
tem., Phlanzengeschichte u. Pflanzeugeo- 
graphie, XXIV, pp. 395-418. (1897.) 

4. On the relation of the flora of the 
Lower Sanoran zone in North America to 
that of the arid zones of Chili and Argen- 
tine. In Bot. Gaz., XXVI, pp. 121-147, 
(August, 1S98.) 

5. Texas as a field for botanical study. 
In the Univ. of Texas Record, I, pp. 153- 
171. (April, 1899.) 

G. The relation of plant phy.siology to 
the other sciences. Translation of an ad- 
dress bj' Dr. Julius Wiesner. In Ann. Rep. 
Smithson. Inst, for 1898, pp. 427-444. 
( 1900. ) 

7. The relation of the North Ameri- 
can flora to that of South America. In 
Science, XII, pp. 709-716. (Nov., 1900.) 

8. Botany in the high school. In Bul- 
letin No. 1 of Committee of Affiliated 
Schools, Univ. of Texas, pp. 55-61. (Feb., 
1901.) 

9. Destruction of timber by the Gal- 
veston storm. In Forester, ^TI, pp. 53-56, 
(March, 1901.) 

10. Texas forests and the problem of 
forest management for the long-leaf pine 
lands. In Forester, VII, pp. 131-138. 
(June, 1901.) 

11. The ecological relation of the veg- 
etation of Western Texas. In Bot. Gaz.. 
XXXII, pp. 99-123, 195-217, 262-291; 24 
text figures, (Aug., Sept., Oct., 1901.) 

12. Forest management by the Kirby 



Lumber Company. In University of Texas 
Record, V, pp. 36-45. (April, 1903.) 

13. The tissues of some plants of the 
Sotol region. In Bull. Tor. Bot. Club, XXX, 
pp. 621-633, 10 text figures. (Nov., 1903.) 

14. Forest conditions and forest re- 
sources in Texas. In Bull. U. S. Dept. 
Agriculture, Bureau of Forestry. Numerous 
maps and plates. (In press.) 

15. Relation of the timber covering the 
Edwards plateau in Texas to water supply. 
(A report now in hands of editor of 
Bureau of Forestry, U. S. Dept. Agricul- 
ture. ) 10 plates. 

16. The vegetation of the Sotol country. 
(Bulletin of University of Texas.) (1904.) 

Oliver W Beown, A.M. (1896). aS'cc Fac- 
ulty list. 

Elmer Burritt Bryan, A.B. (1893). ,S'ee 
Faculty list. 



William Lowe Bryan, A.B. (1884), A.M. 
(1886), Ph.D. See Faculty list. 

Robert Clarkson Brooks, A.B. (1896), 
Ph.D. Instructor in Economics, Cor- 
nell University, Ithaca, N. Y. 

1. The ]Merchants' Municipal Commit- 
tee of Boston. In ^Municipal Affairs, I, pp. 
1-508. (Sept., 1897.) 

2. Review of W. T. Stead's 'Satan's 
invisible world displayed.' In Municipal Af- 
fairs, II, pp. 304-306. (June, 1898.) 

3. Review of Gustav Herzfeld's 'Gross 
New York, eine Studie zur Einverleibungs- 
frage.' //( Municipal Affairs. Ill, pp. 3.51- 
3.52. (June, 1899.) 

4. The three-cla.ss election system in 
Prussian cities. In Municipal Affairs, III, 
pp. 396-4.3.3. (Sept., 1899.) 

5. Review of 'A municipal program.' 
(H. E. Deming and others, editors). In Mu- 



26^ 



Indiana University 



[ Brooks 



nicipal Affairs, IV, pp. 235-238. (March, 
1900.) 

6. Political clubs iu Prussian cities. 
In Municipal Affairs, IV, VV- 375-384. 
(June, 1900.) 

7. A bibliography of municipal admin- 
istration and city conditions. New York, 
1897. Pp. ix, 224. Second edition, revised 
and enlarged. New York, 1901. Pp. 346. 

8. Tran.slation of Karl Biicher's 'Die 
wirtschaftlichen Aufgaben der modernen 
Stadtgemeinde.' In Municipal Affairs, VI, 
pp. 167-179. (June, 1902.) 

9. Review of Charles Zeublin's 'Amer- 
ican municipal progress.' In Charities, X, 
pp. 185-186. (Feb., 1903.) 

10. Review of S. N. Patten's 'Theory 
of prosperity.' In Philos. Rev. XII, pp. 
689-690. (Dec, 1903.) 



Percy Bentley Burket, A.B. (1884), A.M. 
(1887). Professor of Modern Lan- 
guages, Iowa College, Grinnell, Iowa. 

1. French-English and English-French 
dictionary. (Joint author with A. J. Ed- 
gren.) New York, 1901. Pp. xvi, 1252. 

2. La Familia de Alvareda. New York, 
1901. Pp. iv, 196 (30 pages of notes.) 

3. Spanish grammar. Chicago, 1902. 
Pp. iii. 135. 

4. Review of M. M. Ramsey's 'Lo Es- 
encial del Lenguaje Castellano.' In Mod. 
Lang. Notes, Dec, 1902. 



Bessie Bushing. 
Ridgeley. 



See Mrs. Douglas Clay 



Amos William Butler, A.B. (1894), A.M. 
(1900). Secretary Indiana State Board 
of Charities, Indianapolis. 

1. The birds of Franklin county, Ind. 
In Atlas of Franklin County, Indiana, etc. 
(Chicago, 1882), pp. 11-12. 

2. Ornithological notes from Brook- 



ville, Ind. In Jour. Cin. Soc. Nat. Hist., 
V, pp. 192-193. (1882.) 

3. Local weather lore. In Am. Meteor. 
Jour., I, pp. 313-317. (Dec, 1884.) Ab- 
stract in Proc A. A. A. S., XXXIII, pp. 
609-013. (1884.) 

4. Hibernation of the lower verte- 
brates. In Am. Nat., XIX, pp. 37-40. 
(1885.) Abstract in Proc. A. A. A. S., 

XXXIII, pp. 54.3-545. (1885.) 

5. The habits of some Arvicoliuifi. 
(Joint author with Edgar R. Quick.) In 
Am. Nat., XIX, pp. 113-118. (Feb., 1885.) 
Abstract in Proc. A. A. A. S., XXXIII, 
pp. 539-542. (1884.) 

6. The sacrificial stone of San Juan 
Teotihuacan. In American Antiquarian, pp. 
149-152. (May, 1885.) Abstract in Proc. 
A. A. A. S., XXXIII, pp. 601-603. (1884.) 

7. Observations on faunal changes. In 
Bull. No. 1, Brookville Society of Nat. Hist., 
1SS5, pp. 5-13. Reprinted in Ornithologist 
and Oologist, X, p. 32. (1885.) 

8. Land and fresh-water mollusca ob- 
served in Franklin county. (.Toint author 
with D. R. Moore.) In Bull. No. 1, Brook- 
ville Soc. of Nat. Hist., 1885, pp. 41-44. 

9. Observations on the muskrat. In 
Am. Nat., XIX, pp. 1044-1055. (Nov., 
18.55.) Abstract in Proc. A. A. A. S., 

XXXIV, pp. 324-329. (1885.) 

10. The remains at San Juan Teotihua- 
can. Abstract in Proc. A. A. A. S., XXXIV, 
pp. 418-420. (1885.) 

11. A list of the birds observed in 
Franklin county, Indiana. In Bull. No. 2, 
Brookville Soc. of Nat. Hist., pp. 12-39. 
(1886.) 

12. ]\Ieadow mice in Southeastern Indi- 
ana. In Hoosier Naturalist, I, pp. 144-145. 
(April, May, 1886.) 

13. The periodical Cicada in Southeast- 
ern Indiana. In Bull. No. 12, U. S. Dept. 
Agriculture, pp. 24-31. (1886.) Abstract 
in Proc. A. A. A. S., XXXIV, pp. 328-329. 
(1885.) 



264 



Butler^ 



Bibliography: Alumni 



14. The cerulean warbler. In Ornithol- 
ogist and Oolosist, IX, pp. 27-28. (1884.) 

15. Zoological miscellany. In Jour. 
Gin. Soc. Nat. Hist., pp. 261-26G. (Jan., 
1887.) 

IG. Zoological miscellany — some notes 
on Indiana amphibians and reptiles. In 
Jour. Gin. Soc. Nat. Hist., pp. 147-150. 
(Oct., 1887.) 

17. Zoological miscellany. In Jour. Ciii. 
Soc. Nat. Hist., pp. 214-216. (Jan., 1888.) 

18. Notes on the range of the protho- 
notary warbler in Indiana. In Ornitholo- 
gist and 0(>logist, XIII, pp. 33-34. (March, 
1888.) 

19. On a new subspecies of Ammo- 
dramus sandwichensis from Mexico. In 
Auk, V, pp. 264-266. (July, 1888.) 

20. A catalogue of the birds of Indi- 
ana. In Proc. Indiana Hort. Soc, appendix 
G, pp. 1-135. (1890.) 

21. Our birds and what they do for the 
farmer. In Rep. State Board of Agn'c. In- 
diana for 1890, pp. 113-125. 

22. Notes on the range and habits of 
the Carolina parakeet. In Auk, IX, pp. 
49-56. (Jan., 1892.) 

23. Our smaller mammals and their re- 
lation to horticulture. In Trans. Indiana 
Hort. Soc. for 1891, pp. 117-123. 

24. Gontributions to Indiana Herpetol- 
ogy. No. 3. In Jour. Gin. Soc. Nat. Hist, 
for 1892, pp. 169-179. (1892.) 

25. Some notes concerning the evening 
grosbeak. In Auk, IX, pp. 238-247. (July, 
1892.) 

26. On Indiana shrews. In Proc. Indi- 
ana Acad. Sci. for 1891, pp. 161-163. 

27. Notes on Indiana birds. In Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1891, pp. 164-166. 

28. Further notes on the evening gros- 
beak. In Auk, I, pp. 155-157. (April, 
1893.) 

29. The range of the crossbills in the 
Ohio valley, with notes on their unusual 
occurrence in summer. In Proc. Indiana 



Acad. Sci. for 1892, pp. 63-72 ; in Am. Nat, 
XXVIII, pp. 136-146 (Feb., 1894 ) ; in Pa- 
pers presented to the World's Gongress of 
Ornithology (1893), Ghicago, 1896, pp. 
47-58. 

30. The fruit lands of southeastern In- 
diana. In Trans. Indiana Hort. Soc. for 
1893, pp. 56-61. 

31. Bibliography of Indiana ornithology. 
In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1893, pp. 
108-116. 

32. Notes on Indiana birds. In Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1893, pp. 116-120. 

33. Bibliography of Indiana mammals. 
(Joint author with B. W. Evermann.) In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1893, pp. 120- 
124. 

34. Preliminary list of Indiana mam- 
mals. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1893, 
pp. 124-139. 

35. Notes on the birds of 1894. In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1894, pp. 73- 
80. 

36. The mammals of Indiana. In Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1894, pp. 81-86. 

37. An orchard talk. In Trans. Indi- 
ana Hort. Soc. for 1895, pp. 149-152. 

38. With the birds of Winona. In In- 
diana Synod, II, pp. 78-80. (Dec, 1895.) 

39. Notes on the birds of 1894. In 
Ocilogist, pp. 73-80. (1895.) 

40. Indiana — a century of changes in 
the aspects of nature (President's address.) 
In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1895, pp. 
31-42 ; in Inland Educator, II, pp. 313-318. 
(July, 1896.) Reprint in Studies in Indi- 
ana Geography, Terre Haute, 1897, pp. 72- 
81. 

41. Additional notes on Indiana birds. 
In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1895, pp. 
162-168. 

42. From wilderness to civilization. In 
Proc. Indiana Hort. Soc. for 1896, pp. 19- 
29. 

43. The bobolink (Dolichonyx oryziv- 



265 



Indiana University 



iButlet 



oriis) in Indiana. In Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1896, pp. 227-243. 

44. Some additions to the Indiana bird 
list, with other notes. In Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 189G, pp. 244-240. 

45. Some Indiana crow roosts. In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1897, pp. 175- 
178. 

4G. Notes on Indiana heronries. In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1897, pp. 201- 
202. 

47. The recent occurrence of tlie raven 
in Indiana. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 
for 1897, pp. 201-202. 

48. The birds of Indiana. In 22d Rep. 
Indiana State Geologist for 1897, pp. 515- 
1187. 

49. Brunnich's murre (Uria lomvia), 
an addition to the birds of Indiana. In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1897, pp. 180- 
183. 

50. The unusual occurrence of Brun- 
nich's murre (Uria lomvia) far inland, with 
notes on other rare birds. In Auk, XIV, 
pp. 197-200. (April, 1897.) 

51. Bird life in Indiana. In Trans. 
Indiana Ilort. Soc. for 1898, pp. 30-38. 

52. Life in the forest — Mammals. In 
Nature and Art, I, Chicago, pp. 53-57. 
(Feb., 1898.) 

53. State care of dependent children in 
Indiana. In Ohio Bull, of Char, and Cor., 
June, 1899, pp. 5-9 ; in Indiana Bull. Char, 
and Cor., June, 1899, pp. 8-12. 

54. The value of horticulture to our 
public institutions. In Trans. Indiana 
Hort. Soc. for 1899, pp. 119-124 ; in Indiana 
Bull, of Char, and Cor., March, 1900, pp. 
10-16. 

55. Notes on Indiana birds. In Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1899, pp. 149-151. 

56. Development of the reformatory idea 
in Indiana. Read before the Local Council 
of Women, Indianapolis, 1899. Printed for 
general distribution by the Indiana Reform- 



atory, pp. 12. Republished in Ohio Bull. 
Char, and Cor., March, 1900, pp. 21-30. 

57. Advantages and disadvantages of 
the present system of public care of the 
poor. Read before Indiana Trustees' Asso- 
ciation, Dec. 27, 1899. In Indiana Bull. 
Char, and Cor., March, 1900, pp. 2-10. 

58. Facts about the operation of the 
new poor relief laws. In Proc. Sixth An- 
nual Meeting Indiana State Board of Com- 
merce, Feb., 1900, pp. 1-26 ; in Bull. No. 10, 
Indiana Bureau of Statistics, March, 1900, 
pp. 8-14 ; in Eighth biennial report Indiana 
Bureau of Statistics, 1900, pp. 289-297. 

59. The condition and needs of our 
jails. From Proc. Indiana State Conference 
of Char, and Cor., 1899. In Indiana Bull. 
Char, and Cor., June, 1900, pp. 20-25. 

60. Saving the children. In Proc. Nat. 
Conf. Char, and Cor. for 1901, pp. 204-213. 

61. A notable factor of social degenera- 
tion. Vice-presidential address. Section of 
Anthropology. In Proc. A. A. A. S., for 

1901, L, pp. 337-353. Reprinted for gen- 
eral distribution in Euglaud by the Lanca- 
shire and Cheshire Society for the Perma- 
nent Care of the Feeble-minded, pp. 10. 
Also in Science, N. S., XIV, pp. 444-453. 
(Sept. 20, 1901) ; and in Indiana Bull. Char, 
and Cor., Dec, 1901, pp. 17-27. 

62. State visitation of children. In 
Proc. Illinois Conf. of Char., 1901, pp. 14-19. 

63. Education and crime. In Ad. and 
Proc. Nat. Edu. Asso., Detroit, Mich., 1901, 
pp. 560-564 ; also in Ann. Rep. Supt. of 
Pub. Inst., for 1901, p. 13-20. 

64. State supervision and administration 
— the experience in Indiana. In Proc. Nat. 
Conf. Char, and Cor. for 1902, pp. 144-146. 

65. The prevention of crime. In Proc. 
Minnesota State Conf. Char, and Cor. for 

1902, pp. 61-68. 

66. Report of committee on discharged 
prisoners. In Proc. Nat. Pris. Asso., 1902, 
pp. 283-323. Reprinted for general distri- 



266 



Callahan ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



bution by the Indiana Boys' School, 1903, 
pp. 44. 

07. County and municipal corrections. 
In Proc. Nat. Conf. Char, and Cor. for 1903, 
pp. 392-400 ; extract in Indiana Bull. Char, 
and Cor., Dec, 1903, pp. 4-7. 

68. Child problems and their treatment. 
From Proc. Ohio State Conf. Char, and Cor. 
for 1903. In Ohio Bull. Char, and Cor., 
XIX. pp. 7.5-81. (Dec, 1903.) 

09. Conditions affecting the distribution 
of birds in Indiana. (Contributions from 
the Zoological Laboratory, Indiana Univer- 
sity, No. 37.) In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 
for 1903. 

70. Ethnology. Article in Encyclopedia 
Americana, VII. (1904.) 

71. The success of an Indiana experi- 
ment. In Ann. Am. Acad. Pol. Soc Sci., 
XXIII. pp. 202-204. (March, 1904.) 



Richard Ellsworth Call, A.B. (1890), 
A.M. (1891). Curator, Children's Mu- 
seum, Brooklyn Institute of Arts, 
Brooklyn. 

1. On the quaternary and recent Mol- 
lusca of the Great Basin, with descriptions 
of new forms. /;;. U. S. Geol. Surv. Bull. 
II, pp. 3.55-420. (1884.) 

2. jNIemoranda on a collection of fishes 
from the Ozark region of Missouri. In 
Proc Davenport Acad. Nat. Sci., V, p. 73. 
(1887.) 

3. Description of new Unios from the 
Ozark region of Missouri. /;; I'roc U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for 1889, X, pp. 498-500, 2 plates. 

4. On a new Post-Pleiocene Limnseid 
from California. In Am. Geol., I, p. 146. 
(1888.) In Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. for 1889, 
p. 17. 

5. On the gross anatomy of Campe- 
loma. In Am. Nat., for 1889. In Proc 
Iowa Acad. Sci. for 1889, p. 16. 

6. On the ferns of the Ozark region 



of Missouri. In Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. for 
1889, pp. 15-16. 

7. The parvus group of Unionida>. In 
Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. for 1889, pp. 45-51. 

8. The geology of Crowley's Ridge, Ar- 
kansas. In Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. for 1889, 
pp. 52-53. 

9. The chemistry of soils. In North- 
west, VII. No. 404, p. 11 ; VI, No. 410, p. 7. 

10. The geology of eastern Arkansas. 
In Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. for 1889, pp. 87-95. 

11. The life and writings of Rafinesque. 
(Publications Filson Club, Louisville, Ky., 
vol. X.) Louisville. 1895. Pp. 227. 

12. Sketch of the life, the ichthyologic 
work, and the ichthyologic bibliography of 
Rafinesque. In Rafinesque-Schmaltz's 'Icli- 
thyologia Ohiensis' (Cleveland, 1899). Pp. 
175. 



James Morton Callahan, A.B. (1894), 
A.M. (1895), Ph.D. Professor of His- 
tory and Political Science, University 
of West Virginia, Morgantown, W. Va. 

1. Outlines of physiology. Chicago, 

1890. Pp. 50. 

2. Outlines of civil government. Chi- 
cago, 1890. Pp. 48. 

3. Outlines of United States history 
(with notes). Chicago, 1891. Pp. 00. 

4. Outlines of geography. Chicago, 

1891. Pp. 51. 

5. Outlines and experiments in bot- 
any. Chicago, 1892. Pp. 53. 

6. Outlines and experimental work in 
physiology. Boston, 1892. Pp. 121. 

7. A guide to actual work in practical 
physiology. Chicago, 1893. Pp. 108. 

8. The agreement of 1817 — Reduction 
of naval forces on the American lakes. In 
Ann. Rep. Am. Hi.st. Assoc, for 1895, pp. 
3e9-.392. (1890.) 

9. The northern lake frontier during 
the Civil War. In Ann. Rep. Am. Hist. As- 
soc for 1896, I, pp. 337-3.59. (1897.) 



26Y 



Indiana University 



[ Callahan 



10. Cuba and Anglo-American relations. 
In Ann. Rep. Am. Hist. Assoc, for 1897, I, 
pp. 195-215. (1898.) 

11. Review of Jesse Macy's 'The Eng- 
lish constitution.' In Citizen for July 1898. 

12. The neutrality of the American 
Lakes, and Anglo-American i-elations. Bal- 
timore, 1898. Pp. 199. 

13. Diplomatic relations of the Confed- 
erate State.s with England (18G1-1865). In 
Ann. Rep. Am. Hist. A.ssoc. for 1898, pp. 
267-283. (1899.) 

14. Cuba and international relations. 
Baltimore, 1899. Pp. 503. 

15. American relations in the Pacific 
and the Far East. Baltimore, 1901. Pp. 
177. 

16. Great heroes and leaders. New 
York, 1901. Pp. 250. 

17. Central America and the American 
foreign policy. Washington, 1902. Pp. 25. 

18. Confederate archives. In South At- 
lantic Quarterly for 1903, pp. 14. 

19. The American expansion policy. 
Baltimore, 1904. Pp. 350. 

20. Introduction to American foreign 
policy. I. The Monroe Doctrine and inter- 
American relations. 1904. Pp. 300. 

21. The United States and Canada : A 
study in international history. Pp. 275. 



John Wesley Carr, A.B. (1885), A.M. 

(1890). Superintendent of Schools, 
Anderson, lud. 

1. The province of the supervisor. In 
Proc. Nat. Edu. Asso. for 1897, pp. 235-236. 

2. Course of study for pupils who can 
not complete high school work. In Proc. 
Nat. Edu. Asso. for 1899, pp. 378-379. 

3. Response to address of welcome at 
Charleston, S. C. In Proc. Nat. Edu. Asso. 
for 1900, pp. 52-54. 

4. Does Indiana need additional Nor- 
mal School facilities? (In conjunction with 
R. A. Ogg and C. M. McDaniel.) In Rep. 



Indiana Town and City Superintendents' 
Asso. for 1902. 

5. Best methods of electing school 
boards. In Proc. Nat. Edu. Asso. for 1903, 
pp. 159-161. 

6. The school curriculum. In Proc. 
Nat. Edu. Asso. for 1903, p. 263. 

7. Educational progress in Indiana. In 
Proc. Nat. Edu. Asso. for 1903, pp. 798-800. 

8. Teaching of religion in the public 
schools. In Proc. Nat. Educ. Assoc, for 
1903, p. 361. 

9. Percentage of boys leaving high 
school. In Proc. Nat. Educ. Assoc, for 1903, 
p. 798. 

10. ]\Ioral and religious training of chil- 
dren in the public schools. In Proc. Reli- 
gious Edu. Asso. for 1903. 

11. Moral instruction in the Anderson 
public schools. In Proc. Religious Edu. 
Asso. for 1904. 

12. Course of instruction in morals. In 
New York Sch. Jour. 

13. A permanent teaching profession. 
In New York Sch. Jour. 



William Davis Chambers, A.B. (1898). 
Teacher, Muncie, Ind. 

1. ]Mid-winter science. In Educator- 
Journal, III, p. 294. (Jan., 1903.) 

2. jNIid-winter science — iron and steel. 
In Educator-.Journal, III, pp. 344-345. 
(April, 1903.) 



Oscar Chrisman, A.B. (1888), A.M. 
(1893), Ph.D. Professor of Paidology, 
Ohio University, Athens, Ohio. 

1. The hearing of children. In Ped. 
Sem., II, pp. 397-441. (Dec, 1893.) 

2. Secret language of children. In 
Science, XXII, pp. 303-305 : XXIII, pp. 18- 
19. (Dec. 1, 1893, and Jan. 12, 1894.) 

3. Child-study, a new department of 
education. In Forum, XVI, pp. 728-736. 
(Feb., 1894.) 



268 



Chrisman ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



4. The science of the child. In South 
Dakota Educator, VII, pp. 11-12. 

5. Vertical writing. In Texas Sch. 
Jour, for 3S94. 

0. Contribution to a symposium on 
child-study. In Interstate Sch. Rev. for 
June, 1894, p. 225. 

7. One year with a little girl, in 
Edu. Rev., IX, pp. 52-71. (Jan., 1895.) 

8. Paidologie, Entwurf zu einer Wis- 
senschaft des Kindes. Inaugural Disserta- 
tion der philosophischen Fakultiit der Uni- 
versitiit Jena zur Erlangung der Doktor- 
wiirde. Jena, 1896. Pp. 96. 

9. Children's secret language. In 
Child-Study Mo., II, pp. 202-210. (Sept., 
1896.) 

10. How a story affected a child. In 
Child-Study Mo., II, pp. 650-661. (April, 
1897.) 

11. The hearing of school children. In 
North-Western Mo., VIII, pp. 31-35. (July 
1S97.) 

12. Child-.study in Texas. In Child- 
Study Mo., Ill, pp. 287-289. (Nov., 1897.) 
(Rep. Child-Study Section Texas State 
Teachers' Asso., held at Waco, June 29-July 
2, 1897.) 

13. Motor control : Its place in the 
physical and psychical life of the child. In 
State Normal Mo., X, pp. 3-4. (Oct., 1897.) 

14. The secret language of children. In 
North-Western Mo., VIII, pp. 187-193, 375- 
379, 649-651. (Oct., 1897, Jan. and June, 
1898.) 

1.5. Exceptionals. In State Normal 
Mo., X, pp. 51-52. (Jan., 1898.) 

16. Religious ideas of a child. In 
Child-Study Mo., Ill, pp. 516-.52S. (.Jan., 
1898.) 

17. Results of child-study. /((- Educa- 
tion, XVIII, pp. 323-332. (Feb., 1898.) 

18. How to use the library. In West- 
ern College Mag., XIX, pp. 502-505. 
(March, 1898.) 

19. Paidology, the science of the child. 



In Educ. Rev., XV, pp. 269-284. (March. 
1S9S. ) 

20. The secret language of childhood. 
In Century, LVI, pp. 54-58. (May, 1898.) 

21. Religious periods of child-growth. 
In Educ. Rev., XVI, pp. 40-48. (June, 
1898.) 

22. Review of Nathan Oppenheim's 'De- 
velopment of the child.' In Educ. Rev., 
XVI, pp. 279-282. (Oct., 1898.) 

23. Child and parent. In North-West- 
ern Mo., IX, pp. 135-138, 180-183. (Nov. 
and Dec. 1898.) 

24. Opening remarks as president of the 
Kansas Society for Child-Study. In Child- 
Study Mo., IV, pp. 451-452. (Feb., 1899.) 

25. Editorial for the Child-Study De- 
partment. In North-Western Mo., IX, pp. 
275-276. (Feb., 1899.) 

26. The pubescent period. In Educa- 
tion, XIX, pp. 342-347. (Feb., 1899.) 

27. Child and teacher. In Jour. Ped., 
XII, pp. 112-125. (May, 1899.) 

28. Courses of study for Normal 
Schools. /)) Arena, XXII, pp. 56-60. (July, 
1899.) 

29. Outline in Paidology — the child 
among ancient peoples. Arranged for the 
'Study Outlines for Clubs,' prepared by 
the Educational Committee of the National 
Congress of Mothers, 1900. 

30. Review of Stuart H. Rowe's 'The 
physical nature of the child and how to 
.'^tudy it.' In Educ. Rev., XIX, pp. 87-89. 

(Jan., 1900.) 

31. Evokition and definition of Paidol- 
ogy. In Paidology, I, pp. 2-20. (July, 
1900. ) 

32. The science of the child. In Quart. 
Rep. Nat. Cong, of Mothers, I, pp. 35-46. 
(Sept., 1900.) 

33. Review of Milicent Washburn 
Shinn's 'Notes on the development of a 
child.' In Educ. Rev., II, pp. 192-184. 
(Sept., 1900.) 

34. One child's disposition toward the 



269 



Indiana University 



lChi 



opposite sex. In I'aidology, I, pp. lOG-112. 
(Oct., 1900.) 

35. Bibliography of Paidology. In 
Paidology, I, pp. 20G-226. (Jan., 1901.) 

3G. Education of the home-womau. In 
Paidology, I, pp. 303-333. (April, 1901.) 

37. Editor of 'Paidology, the Science 
of the Child.' A magazine devoted to the 
scientific and practical study of children. 
Published quarterly. A^olume I, 1900-1901. 

38. Education for the home. In Arena, 
XXX, pp. 401-409. (Oct., 1903.) 

39. The department of Paidology in 
Ohio University. /;/ Jour. Childhood and 
Adolescence, III, pp. 50-56. (Jan., 1904.) 



Wilbur Adelmajn^ Cogsiiall, A.M. (1903). 
(S'cc Faculty list. 



Charles Patton Clark, A.B. (1901). 
Student, Rush Medical College, Chicago. 

1. Pneumococcal Bronchiolitis (capil- 
lary bronchitis). (.Joint author with F. H. 
Batman.) In Jour, of Infectious Diseases, 
I, pp. 229-235. (March 19, 1904.) 



Howard Walton Clark, A.B. (189G), A.M. 
(1902). Preparator in Zoology, Field 
Columbian Museum, Chicago. 

1. The flora of Eagle Lake and vicin- 
ity. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1901, 
pp. 12S-192. 7 plates. 



Hairy Evatj Coblentz, A.B. (1894), A.M. 
Teacher of English, South Division 
High School, Milwaukee. 

1. The blank verse of Matthew Ar- 
nold's 'Sohrab and Rustum.' In Poet-Lore 
VII, pp. 497-505. (Oct., 1895.) 

2. A Rime-Index to the parent cycle of 
the York mystery plays and of a portion of 
tlip Woodkirk 'Conspiracio et Captio.' In 
I'ul). ]Mod. Lang. Asso., X, pp. 487-557. 

3. Irving's Life of Goldsmith. Edited 
with notes and questions. Boston, 1904. 
Pp. xxix, 29G. 



Edward Conradi, A.B. (1897), A.M. 
(1898). Fellow in Clark University, 
Worcester, Mass. 

1. School hygiene. Translation of Dr. 
Ludwig Kotelmann's 'Ueber Schulgesund- 
heitspflege.' (Joint author with J. A. 
Bergstrom.) Syracuse, N. Y., 1899. Pp. 
391. 

2. Children's interests in words, slang, 
stories, etc. In Ped. Sem., X. pp. 359-404. 

James B. Cook, A.B. (1890). Died July 
19, 1895, at Brookville. Ind. 



1. The sugar trust. In Statesman for 



1890. 



John Merle Coulter, Ph.D. (1884). Pres- 
ident of Indiana University and Profes- 
sor of Botany, 1891-93. Now head of 
the Department of Botany and Profe.s- 
sor of Morphology, University of Chi- 
cago. 

1. Botany of the U. S. Geological Sur- 
vey of ^Montana, Idaho, Wyoming, and Utah. 
Pp. 747-792. (April, 1873.) 

2. Suyopsis of the flora of Colorado. 
(Joint author with T. C. Porter.) In the 
U. S. Geological and Geographical Survey of 
Territories. Misc. publication No. 4. 180 
pages. Washington. (March, 1874.) 

3. A partial list of the flora of Jeffer- 
son county, Indiana. In Geological Survey 
of Indiana for 1874. pp. 230-273. (Dec, 
1874.) 

4. Relations of the scientific to the 
practical in botany. In Trans. Indiana 
Ilort. Soc. for 1881, pp. 29-39. (Dec. 1880.) 

5. Catalogue of the plants of Indiana. 
(Joint author with C. R. Barnes.) Craw- 

ford.5ville, Indiana, 1881. Pp. 38. 

G. The native flora of Indiana. /;;. 



270 



Coulter ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



Trans. Indiana Hort. Soc. for 1SS2, pp. TO- 
TS. (Dec, 1881.) 

T. Development of a dandelion flower. 
//( Am. Nat., XVII, pp. 1211-121T. (Dec, 
1883.) 

8. Some les.son.s in botany. The seed ; 
germination, or the seed in action ; the root. 
In Indiana Farmer. (1884.) 

9. Manual of the botany of the Rocky 
Mountain region. New York, 1885. Pp. 
xvi, 4.52. 

10. Pollen spores of Tradescantia vir- 
ginica. (Joint author witn J. N. Rose.) In 
Bot. Gaz., XI, pp. 10-14. (Jan., 1886.) 

11. Sketch of Edmond Boissier. In Bot. 
Gaz., XI, pp. 39-40. (Feb., 1886.) 

12. Revision of North American Hyp- 
pericacete. In Bot. Gaz., XI. pp. T8-88, 
106-112. (April, May, 1886.) 

13. Primula cusickiaua Gray. In Bot. 
Gaz., XI, p. 91. (April, 1886.) 

14. Synopsis of North American pines. 
(Joint author with J. N. Rose.) In Bot. 
Gaz., XI, pp. 256-262, 302-309. (Oct., Nov., 
1886.) 

15. Some notes on Hypericum. In Bot. 
Gaz.. XI, pp. 2T5-2T6. (Oct., 1886.) 

16. Notes on Umbelliferai of the East- 
ern United States. (Joint author with J. N. 
Rose.) In Bot. Gaz., XII. (18ST.) 

IT. Some western plants. In Bot. Gaz., 
XII, p. 2.52. (Oct., 188T.) 

18. Evolution in the plant kingdom. In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 188T, pp. 322- 
335. 

19. Revision of North American Um- 
belliferse. (Joint author with J. N. Rose.) 
Washington, 1888. Pp. 144. 9 plates. 

20. Continuity of protoplasm. In Bot. 
Gaz., XIY, pp. 82-83. (March, 1889.) 

21. Some notes on Hypericum. In Bot. 
Gaz., XIY, p. 200. (August, 1889.) 

22. Notes on North American Umbel- 
liferse. (Joint author with J. N. Rose.) 
In Bot. Gaz., XIY. pp. 2T4-284 (Nov., 
1889) ; XY, pp. 2.59-261 (Oct.. 1890). 



23. Manual of the botany of the North- 
ern United States. (Joint author with Asa 
Gray and Sereno ^^'atson.) New York, 
1889. Pp. TOO. 25 plates. 

24. A new genus of Umbelliferae. 
(Joint author with J. N. Rose.) In Bot 
Gaz., XY, pp. 15-16. (Jan., 1890.) 

25. A revision of North American Cor- 
nacete. (.Joint author with W. H. Evans.) 
In Bot. Gaz., XY, pp. 30-39, 86-9T. (Feb., 
April, 1890.) 

26. Sketch of Charles C. Parry. In Bot. 
Gaz., XY, pp. 66-68. (March, 1890.) 

2T. Penicillium and corrosive sublimate. 
In Bot. Gaz., XY, pp. 69-TO. (March, 
1890.) 

28. Geographical distribution of North 
American Umbelliferae. In Proc. A. A. A. 
S., XXXIX, pp. 292-298. (August, 1890.) 

29. Pithecolobium texense. In Bot. 
Gaz., XY, pp. 269-2T0. (Oct., 1890.) 

30. Actinella texana. (Joint author 
with J. N. Rose.) In Bot. Gaz., XYI, pp. 
2T-28. (Jan., 1891.) 

31. New or noteworthy Compositte 
from Guatemala. In Bot. Gaz., XYI, pp. 
95-102. (April, 1891.) 

32. Some new Solanacese from Guate- 
mala. /;; Bot. Gaz.. XYI, pp. 144-145. 
(May, 1891.) 

33. Practical education. Indianapolis, 
1891. Pp. 16. 

34. The future of systematic botany. 
In Proc. A. A. A. S., XL, pp. .3-14 
(August, 1891.) 

35. The future of systematic botany. 
In Bot. Gaz., XYI, pp. 243-254. (Sept., 
1891.) 

36. Botany and horticulture. In Trans. 
Indiana Hort. Soc for 1891, pp. 30-33. 
(Dec, 1891.) 

3T. Sketch of Sereno Watson. In Bot. 
Gaz., XYII, pp. 13T-141. (May, 1892.) 

38. Some new North American plants. 
(Joint author with E. M. Fisher.) In Bot. 
Gaz., XYII. pp. 348-3.53. (Nov., 1892.) 



271 



Indiana University 



[ Coulter 



39. Sullivantia hapemaui. In Bot. 
Gaz.. XVII, p. 421. (Dec, 1892.) 

40. Notes on North American Umbel- 
liferiP. (Joint author with J. N. Ro.se.) 
In Bot. Gaz., XVIII, pp. 54-56. (Feb., 
1893.) 

41. Preliminary revision of North Amer- 
ican species of Cactus, Anhalonium, and 
Lophophora. In Contrib. U. S. Nat. Herb- 
arium, III, pp. 91-132. (March, 1894.) 

42. Botany of Western Texas. In 
Contrib. U. S. Nat. Herbarium, li, p. 588. 
(1891, 1892, 1894.) 

43. Formulae for life histories. In Bot. 
Gaz., XX, pp. 31-32. (Jan., 1895.) 

44. New or noteworthy Composita; 
from Guatemala. In Bot. Gaz., XX, pp. 41- 
54. (Feb., 1895.) 

45. Musineon of Rafinesque. (Joint 
author with J. N. Rose.) In Bot. Gaz., 
XX, pp. 258-200. (June, 1895.) 

46. The botanical work of the govern- 
ment. In Bot. Gaz., XX, pp. 264-268. 
(June, 1895.) 

47. The botanical outlook. Lincoln, 
1895. Pp. 28. 

48. Deanea, a new genus of Umbel- 
liferse from Mexico. (Joint author with 
J. N. Rose.) In Bot. Gaz.. XX, pp. 372- 
373. (August, 1895.) 

49. Preliminary revision of the North 
American species of Echinocactus, Cereus, 
and Opuntia. In U. S. Nat. Herbarium, III, 
IV, pp. 355-462. (Dec, 1895.) 

50. Plants in their environment. Chi- 
cago, 1896. Pp. 12. 

51. Review of 'Missouri Botanical Gar- 
den, 7th Annual report.' In Bot. Gaz., 
XXII, pp. 59-60. (July, 1896.) 

52. Review of E. Warming's 'Lehrbuch 
der okologischen Pflanzengeographie.' In Bot. 
Gaz., XXII, pp. 173-175. (August, 1896.) 

53. Review of Mitford Freeman's 'The 
bamboo garden.' In Bot. Gaz.. XXII, pp. 
177-178. (August, 1896.) 

54. Review of N. L. Britton and A. 



Brown's 'An illustrated flora of the north- 
ern United States, Canada and the British 
possessions.' In Bot. Gaz., XXII, pp. 269- 
270; XXIV, pp. 120-121; XXVI, pp. 281- 
282. (Sept., 1896; Aug., 1897; Oct., 1898.) 

55. Evolution. Chicago, 1897. Pp. 14. 

56. Notes on the fertilization and em- 
bryogeny of Conifers. In Bot. Gaz., XXIII, 
pp. 40-43. (Jan., 1897.) 

57. Review of W. P. Hieru's 'Catalogue 
of the African plants collected by Dr. F. 
Welwitsch.' In Bot. Gaz., XXIII, pp. 210- 
211. (March, 1897.) 

58. Review of W. J. Real's 'Grasses of 
North America.' In Bot. Gaz., XXIII, 
pp. 212-213. (March, 1897.) 

59. Review of J. C. Willis's 'A manual 
and dictionary of the flowering plants and 
ferns.' In Bot. Gaz., XXIII, pp. 213-214. 
(March, 1897.) 

60. Revision of Lilaeopsi-s. (Joint au- 
thor with J. N. Rose.) In Bot. Gaz., XXIV, 
pp. 47-49. (July, 1897.) 

61. Review of Asa Gray's 'Synoptical 
flora of North America.' In Bot. Gaz., 
XXIV, pp. 121-122. (August, 1897.) 

02. Review of M. Gtirke's 'Planta; Eu- 
ropaeae.' In Bot. Gaz., XXIV, p. 122. 
(August, 1897.) 

63. Review of A. W. Chapman's 'Flora 
of the southern United States.' In Bot. 
Gaz.. XXIV, p. 123. (August, 1897.) 

64. Review of M. W. Morley's 'A few 
familiar flowers.' In Bot. Gaz., XXIV, p. 
124. (August, 1897.) 

65. Review of 'Cytologische Studien aus 
dem Bonner botanischen Institut,' by E. 
Strasburger, W. J. Osterhout, and others. In 
Bot. Gaz., XXIV, pp. 216-220. (Sept., 
1897.) 

66. Review of C. C. Curtis's 'A text 
book of general botany.' In Edu. Rev. for 
1898. 

67. Review of J. R. Green's \\ manual 
of botany.' In Bot. Gaz.. XXV, pp. 62-63. 
(Jan., 1898.) 



272 



Coulter~\ 



Bibliography: Alumni 



68. Review of W. W. Bailey's 'Botan- 
ical note book.' In Bot. Gaz., XXV, pp. 
03-64. (Jan., 1898.) 

69. Notes on LiliBopsis. (Joint autlior 
with J. N. Rose.) In Bot. Gaz., XXV, pp. 
53-54. (Jan., 1898.) 

70. Contribution to the life history of 
Ranunculus. In Bot. Gaz., XXV. pp. 73-88. 
(Feb., 1898.) 

71. Review of Mrs. L. L. Wilson's 
'Nature study in elementary schools.' In 
Botanical Gazette, XXV, pp. 209-210. 
(March, 1898.) 

72. Review of H. Christ's 'Die Farn- 
kriiuter der Brde.' In Bot. Gaz., XXV, pp. 
283-284. (April, 1898.) 

73. Review of C. H. Clark's 'A labora- 
tory manual in practical botany.' In Bot. 
Gaz., XXV, pp. 367-368. (May, 1898.) 

74. The origin of Gymnosperms and the 
seed habit. In Bot. Gaz., XXVI, pp. 153- 
168. (Sept., 1898.) Also in Science, VIII, 
pp. 377-385. (Sept., 1898.) 

75. Review of C. R. Barnes's 'Plant life.' 
In Bot. Gaz., XXVI, pp. 280-281. (Oct., 
1898. ) 

76. Review of 'Missouri Botanical 
Garden, 9th annual report.' In Bot. Gaz., 
XXVI, pp. 282-283. (Oct., 1898.) 

77. Review of Th. Durand and H. 
Schinz's 'Conspectus Florae Africiie.' //* 
Bot. Gaz., XXVI, pp. 283-284. (Oct., 1898) 

78. Review of A. Schneider's 'A guide 
to the study of lichens.' In Bot. Gaz., 
XXVI, pp. 284-285. (Oct., 1898.) 

79. Review of G. F. Atkinson's 'Ele- 
mentary botany.' In Bot. Gaz., XXVI, pp. 
440-441. (Dec, 1898.) 

80. Plant relations. New York, 1899. 
Pp. vii, 266. 214 plates. 

81. Plant structures. New York, 3899. 
Pp. vii, 348. 289 plates. 

82. Review of A. Engler's 'Monograph- 
ien afrikani.scher Pflanzenfamilien und 
Gattungen.' In Bot. Gaz., XXVII. pp. 72- 
73. (Jan., 1899.) 

(19) 273 



83. Review of S. H. Vine's 'An ele- 
mentary text-book of botany.' In Bot. Gaz., 

XXVII, pp. 141-142. (Feb., 1899.) 

84. Review of D. Grecescu's 'Conspec- 
tus florei Romainei.' In Bot. Gaz., XXVII, 
pp. 142-143. (Feb., 1899.) 

85. Review of I. Urban's 'Symbolse 
Antillanse sen fundamenta florae Indise occi- 
dentalis.' In Bot. Gaz., XXVII, p. 143. 
(Feb., 1899.) 

86. Review of G. F. Atkinson's 'Ele- 
mentary botany.' In Sch. Rev., Feb., 1896, 
pp. 114-115. 

87. Review of Gibb E. Hughes's 'The 
making of a daisy.' In Bot. Gaz., XXVII, 
pp. 217-218. (March, 1899.) 

88. Review of Alice M. Davidson's 'Cal- 
ifornian plants in their homes.' /" Bot. 
Gaz., XXVII, p. 218. (March, 1899.) 

89. Review of D. H. Campbell's 'Lec- 
tures on the evolution of plants.' In Bot. 
Gaz., XXVII, p. 219. (March, 1899.) 

90. Plant societies. In Pratt Institute 
Mo., May, 1899, 172-173. 

91. Review of F. L. Parson's 'How to 
know the ferns.' In Bot. Gaz., XXVII, p. 
484. (June, 1899.) 

92. Review of J. M. Lawson's 'A text- 
book on botany.' /;; Bot. Gaz., XXVII, 
484-485. (June, 1899.) 

93. Review of Alice Lounsoerry's 'A 
guide to the wild flowers.' In Bot. Gaz., 

XXVIII, p. 72. (July, 1899.) 

94. Review of Maud Going's 'Field, 
forest, and wayside flowers.' In Bot. Gaz., 
XXVIII, p. 72. (July, 1899.) 

95. Review of Edw. Knobel's 'The 
grasses, sedges, and rushes of the northern 
United States.' In Bot. Gaz., XXVIII, p. 
72-78. (July, 1899.) 

96. The origin of the leafy sporophyte. 
In Bot. Gaz., XXVIII, pp. 46-59. (July, 
1899.) 

97. Review of Engler and Prantl's 'Die 
natiirlichen Pflanzenfamilien.' In Bot. 
Gaz., XXVIII, pp. 217-218. (Sept., 1899.) 



Indiana University 



\^Coulte 



98. The proper use of science by the 
pulpit. In Amer. Jour. Theology, III, pp. 
641-653. (Oct., 1899.) 

99. Analytical key to flowering plants. 
New York, 1900. Pp. 93. 

100. A synopsis of Mexican and Central 
American Umbelliferse. (Joint author with 
J. N. Rose.) In Proc. Wash. Acad. Sci., I, 
pp. 111-159. 10 plates. (Jan.. 1900.) 

101. Review of L. H. Bailey's 'Cyclo- 
pedia of American horticulture.' Vols. I-IV. 
In Bot. Gaz., XXIX, pp. 282-283; XXX, p. 
277 ; XXXI, p. 436 ; XXXIII, pp. 467-468. 
(April, Oct., 1900 ; June, IBOl ; June, 1902.) 

102. Review of G. F. Atkinson's 'Lessons 
in botany.' In Bot. Gaz., XXIX, p. 358. 
(May, 1900.) 

103. A pattern flower. /*) Mature and 
Art, VIII, pp. 2-7. 1 plate. (June, 1900.) 

104. Review of Harriet L. Keeler's 'Our 
native trees.' In Bot. Gaz., XXX, pp. 132- 
133. (August, 1900.) 

105. Review of Neltje Blanehan's 
'Nature's garden.' In Bot. Gaz., XXX, pp. 
132-133. (August, 1900.) 

106. Review of Alice Lounsberry's 'A 
guide to the trees.' In Bot. (laz., XXX, pp. 
132-133. (August, 1900.) 

107. Review of D. H. Scott's 'Studies in 
fossil botany.' In Bot. Gaz., XXX, pp. 352- 
354. (Nov., 1900.) 

108. Morphology of Gymnosperms. 
( Joint author with C. J. Chamberlain. ) New 
York, 1901. Pp. X, 188. 10 plates. 

109. The polity of the Y. M. C. A. Chi- 
cago, 1901. Pp. 16. 

110. The student Y. M. C. A. as it relates 
to tiie entire association movement. Chicago, 
1901. Pp. 14. 

111. Plant studies. New York, 1901. 
Pp. ix, 387. 336 plates. 

112. Review of J. Percival's 'Agricul- 
tural botany ; theoretical and practical.' In 
Bot. Gaz.. XXXI, pp. 67-68. (.Tan., 1901.) 

113. Review of L. H. Bailey's 'Botany, 



an elementary text-book for schools.' In Bot. 
Gaz., XXXI, pp. 129-1.30. (Feb., 1901.) 

114. Some problems in education. In 
Educator- Journal, I, pp. 405-407, 459-460. 
(April, May, 1901.) 

115. Review of W. L. Jepson's 'A flora 
of western middle California.' In Bot. Gaz., 
XXXI, pp. 435-436. (June, 1901.) 

116. Review of Charles Mohr's 'Plant 
life of Alabama.' In Bot. Gaz., XXII, pp. 
.371-372. (Nov., 1901.) 

117. Review of N. L. Britton's 'Manual 
of the flora of the northern states and Can- 
ada.' In Bot. Gaz., XXXII, pp. 426-427. 
(Dec, 1901.) 

118. Organic evolution as illustrated by 
plants. Chicago, 1902. Pp. 20. 

119. Review of D. H. Campbell's 'A 
university text-book of botany.' In Bot. Gaz., 
XXXIV. pp. 67-68. (July, 1902.) 

120. Review of A. Schnedier's 'Powdered 
vegetable drugs.' In Bot. Gaz., XXXV, pp. 
60-61. (.Jan., 1903.) 

121. Review of H. Kraemer's 'A course 
in botany and pharmacognosy.' In Bot. 
Gaz., XXXV, pp. 60-61. (Jan., 1902.) 

122. The embryogeny of Zamia. (Joint 
author with C. J. Chamberlain.) In Bot. 
Gaz., XXXV, pp. 184-195. (Marcii, 1903.) 

123. Morphology of Angiosperms. (Joint 
author with C. J. Chamberlain.) New York, 
1903. Pp. X, 348. 113 plates. 



Edwi:v Cook Crampton, LL.B. (1889). 
A.ssociate Editor, on editorial .staff of 
West Publishing Co. and Keefe-Davison 
Co., St. Paul, Minn. 

1. Articles on : False pretenses ; false 
personation ; fixtures ; forcible entry and de- 
tainer ; grand jury ; health ; and infants. In 
Century Edition, American Digest of Law. 
(1900-1901.) 

2. Article.s on : Li.s pendens ; licenses 



274 



Daily ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



to enter on land ; life estates ; remainders ; 
reversions ; powers ; supervision of the power 
of alienation ; poor ; religious societies ; post- 
ponement ; principal and agent ; stipula- 
tions ; subscriptions ; recording written in- 
struments ; records, registers. In Abbott's 
New York Cyclopedic Digest. (1901-1903.) 

3. Articles on : Account ; action or suit 
for cancellation of written instruments ; bill 
of review ; drainage ; discovery and inspec- 
tion ; election of officers ; equity ; eminent 
domain ; highways ; new trial ; garnishment ; 
attachment ; reformation of instruments ; in- 
toxicating liquors ; injunction ; rescission of 
contracts. In Illinois Cyclopedic Digest. 
(1902-1903.) 

4. Articles on : Accounting ; accounts 
stated and open accounts ; agency ; arbitra- 
tion and award ; attorneys and counselors ; 
appeal and review ; alteration of instru- 
ments ; writs of assistance ; arrest and bind- 
ing over ; auction and auctioneers ; appear- 
ance ; attachment ; bail in civil actions ; bail 
in criminal proceedings ; breach of marriage 
promise ; brokers ; bridges ; canals, cancel- 
lation of written instruments ; confession of 
judgment ; clerks of courts ; contracts ; con- 
flict of laws ; contempt ; continuance and 
postponement : discovery and inspection ; 
equity ; eminent domain. In Current Law 
for 1903-1904. 



Nelson Kendall Crowe, A.B. (1851), A.M. 
(1854). Clintonville, Pa. 

1. A history of the freedmen's mission 
of the Reformed Pre.sbvterian church. 



Ellwood P Cubberley, A.B. (1891), A.M. 
Associate Professor of Education, Le- 
land Stanford Jr. University. Stanford 
University. Cal. 



2. School organization. In Edu. Rev , 
XIII, pp. 163-171. (1897.) 

3. Report of the public schools of San 
Diego, Cal., with courses or study. San 
Diego, 1897. Pp. 199; illustrated. 

4. Report of the public schools of San 
Diego, Cal. San Diego, 1898. Pp. 15. 

5. Courses of study for the public 
schools of San Francisco. San Francisco, 
1900. Pp. 311. 

6. A proposed act permitting of the 
consolidation of rural schools, i-ural super- 
vision, and the transportation of pupils. In 
West. Jour. Educ, V, pp. 8-11; VIII, pp. 
180-186. (1900, 1903.) 

7. Syllabus of school management. 
Boston, 1901. Pp. 19. 

8. The school situation in San Fran- 
cisco. In Educ. Rev., XXI, pp. 364-383. 
(1901.) 

9. A state tax for high schools. In 
West. Jour. Educ, VII, pp. 604-607. 
(1902.) 

10. Our country school problem. In 
West. Jour. Educ, VIII, pp. 278-282. 
( 1903. ) 

11. Consolidation of schools and trans- 
portation of pupils. In West. Jour. Educ, 
VIII, p. 80. (June, 1903.) 

12. Syllabus of lectures on the history 
of education in Europe. New York, 1902. 
Pp. 302 ; 7 charts ; 7 maps ; 39 illustrations. 



George Adams Custer, LL.B. (1897). 
Logansport, Ind. 

1. Legal counselor and form book. 
(Joint author with Charles A. Hawkins.) 
Logansport, Ind., 1901. Pp. 645. 



1. Determinative mineralogy, 
cennes, 1895. Pp. xx, 200. 



Vin- 



WiLLiAM Mitchell Daily, A.B. (1836), 
D.D. (1851), LL.D. President of the 
University, 1853-59. Died Feb. 5, 1877, 
at New Orleans, La. 

1. Funeral discourse delivered in the 



275 



Indiana University 



iDaily 



chapel of Indiana University, Nov. 13, 1851, 
over the remains of the late Rev. Andrew 
Wylie, President of Indiana University. 
Indianapolis, 1852. Pp. 20. 

2. Inaugural address as President of 
Indiana University, August 2, 1854. Indian- 
apolis, 1854. Pp. 20. 

3. The heroic man : a baccalaureate to 
the graduating class of the Indiana Univer- 
sity at the commencement of 185.5. Bloom- 
ington, Ind., 1855. Pp. 22. 

4. Our banner : a baccalaureate to the 
graduating class of Indiana University, 
1856. Bloomington, Ind., 1856. Pp. 22. 

5. Zaph-nath Pa-a-ne-ah : a baccalau- 
reate to the graduating- class of Indiana Uni- 
versity, 1857. Bloomington, Ind., 18.57. Pp. 
24. 

6. Urim and Thummim : a baccalau- 
reate to the graduating class of Indiana Uni- 
versity, 1858. Bloomington, Ind., 1858. Pp. 
23. 



Charles Gideon Davis, A.B. (1898), Ph.D. 
Instructor in German, University of 
Illinois, Urbana, 111. 

1. Die Substautiva auf liiuj im acht- 
zehnten Jahrhundert. Stra.ssburg, 1903. Pp. 
49. 



liOUis Sherman Davis, A.B. (1891), A.M. 
(1892), Ph.D. ,S'ee Faculty list. 



Schuyler Colfax Davisson, A.B. (1890), 
A.M. (1802), Sc.D. Sec Faculty list. 



AlOxXZO AlvijV DeLarme, A.B. (1887), A.M. 
(1890). Pastor First Baptist Church, 
Paterson, N. J. 

1. History of the First Baptist Church 
of Norristown, Pa. Philadelphia, 1897. Pp. 
229. 20 plates. 



John Franklin Dillon, B.S. (1874), 
LL.B. (1876). Pierre, S. D. 

1. Pleading and practice in Dakota. 



J. B. DOLAN, Student (1896-1897). 

1. Temperature of Turkey Lake 
(Ind.). In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 
1895, pp. 235-239. 



William Columbus Draper, B.S. (1867), 
Trinidad, Col. 

1. Esmeralda, and other stories. Trin 
idad, Colo., 1902. Pp. 120 ; 3 illustrations. 



Fletcher Bascom Dresslau, A.B. (1889), 
A.M. (1892), Ph.D. Assistant Profes- 
sor of Pedagogy, University of Califor- 
nia, Berkley, Cal. 

1. A review of the genus Semotilus. 
(.Foint autlior with E. P. Bicknell.) Jn 
I'roc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. for 1885. 

2. A review of the mackerels ( Scom- 
briua*) of America and Europe. (Joint 
author with Bert Fesler.) //( Bull. U. S. 
Fish Comm. for 1887. 

3. Fatigue. In Ped. Som., 11. pp. 102- 
100. (.Tune. 1892.) 

4. A sketch of old schoolhouses. In 
Ped. Sem., II, pp. 115-125. (June, 1892.) 

5. Some influences which affect the ra- 
pidity of voluntary movement. In Am. Jour. 
Psych., IV, pp. 514-527. (August, 1892.) 

6. On facial vision and the pressure 
sense of tlie drum of the ear. In Am. Jour. 
Psych.. \, pp. 344-350. (April, 1893.) 

7. A new illusion for touch and an e.x- 
planation for the illusion of displacement of 
certain cross lines in vision. In Am. Jour. 
Psych., VI, pp. 27.5-276. 

8. A new and simple method for com 



27G 



Edwards'\ 



Bibliography : Alumni 



I)ariiig the perception of rate of movemeut iu 
the direct and indirect fields of vision. In 
Am. Jour. Psych., VI, p. 312. 

9. Psychology of touch. In Am. Jour. 
Psych., VI, pp. 50-54. 

10. Outline for a study of habit-degen- 
eration. In Teachers' Handbook for Chil- 
dren, published by Illinois Society for 
Child-Study, I, pp. 21-23. (May, 1895.) 

11. Preparation for history in the 
grades. In Normal Exponent for 1895. 

12. The new psychology and its peda- 
gogical significance. In Proc. California 
Teachers' Asso. for Dec, 1895. 

13. Experiments in psychology. In 
Overland Mo. for Aug.-Dec, 1896, and Feb.- 
June, 1897. 

14. Education in Hawaii. //( Educ. 
Rev., XV, pp. 50-54. (Jan., 1898.) 

15. Genetic psychology, hi Northwest- 
ern Mo., IX, pp. 355-358. (April, 1899.) 

16. Guessing, as influenced by number 
preferences. In Pop. Sci. Mo., LIV, pp. 
781-786. (April, 1899.) 



t^RANK Drew, A.B. (1890), A.M. (1891), 
Ph.D. Instructor in Philosophy, Indiana 
University, 1895-96. Now Professor of 
I'sychology, State Normal School, Wor- 
cester, Mass. 

1. I''ield notes on the birds of San 
.luan county. Colorado. In Bull. Nuttall 
triiifh. Club. VI. (1881.) 

2. On the vortical range of bifds in 
( (;lfiKulo. In Auk, II. (1885.) 

3. Adenoids in children. In Pcd. Sera., 
II, pp. 307-309. (March, 1893.) 

4. Love poems of college .students. In 
Ped. Sem., II, pp. 504-505. (Dec, 1893.) 

5. Attention, experimental and criti- 
cal. /(( Am. Jour. P.sych.. ^'II, pp, 533-572. 
(July, 1896.) 



John Walter Dunn, A.B. (1897). County 
Superintendent of Schools, Knox, Ind. 

1. The Starke County (Ind.) Child 
Study Association. In Child-Study Mo., V, 
No. 1. (May, 1899.) 



Charles Lincoln Edwards, B.S. (1886), 
A.M. (1887), Ph.D. Professor of 
Natural History, Trinity College, Hart- 
ford, Conn. 

1. The relation of pectoral muscles iu 
birds to the power of flight. In Am. Nat., 
XX, pp. 25-29. (Jan., 1886.) 

2. A review of the American species of 
the Tetraodontidse. (Joint author with 
David Starr Jordan.) In Pi-oc U. S. Nat. 
Mus. for 1886, p. 232. 

3. The influence of warmth upon the 
irritability of frogs' muscle and nerve. In 
Studies from Biol. Lab. Johns Hopkins Uni- 
versity. 

4. An expression of animal sympathy. 
In Am. Nat., XXI, p. 1129. (Dec, 1887.) 

5. Winter roosting colonies of crows. 
/;( Am. J our. Psych., I, pp. 436-459. (May, 
1888.) 

6. Notes on the embryology of Mulle- 
ria Agassizii. Sel., a Holthurian common at 
Green Turtle Cay, Bahamas. In Johns 
Hopkins University Circular, VIII, p. 37. 
(1889.) 

7. Folk-lore of the Bahama negroes. 
In Am. Jour. Psych., II, pp. 519-542. 
(August, 1889.) 

8. Beschreibung einiger neuen Copepo- 
den und eines neuen copepoden-ahnlichen 
Krebses, Leuckartella paradoxa. /*( Archiv 
f. Naturgeschichte, Jahrg. 57, Bd. I, p. 35. 
(1891.) 

9. Some tales from Bahama folk-lore. 
In Jour, of Am. Folk-Lore, IV, pp. 47-54. 
(1891.) 

10. Some tales fi-om Bahama folk-lore. 



277 



Indiana University 



\_Edwards 



Fairy tales. In Jour, of Am. Folk-Lore, 
IV, pp. 247-252. (1891.) 

11. Bahama songs and stories. In 
Memoirs of the Am. Folk-Lore Soc, III, p. 
111. (1895.) 

12. Notes on the biology of Phrynosoma 
cornutum Harlan. In Zool. Anzeiger, No. 
498. (1896.) 

13. Variation and regeneration in Syn- 
apta inheren.s. In Science, N. S., XI, p. 
178. 

14. Animal myths, and their origin. 
(Address as president of the American 
Folk-Lore Society.) In Jour, of Am. Folk- 
Lore Soc, XIII. (Jan.-March, 1900.) 

15. The lower temperature limits of in- 
cubation for the &gg of the common fowl. 
In Science, N. S., XII, pp. 310-311. (Au- 
gust 24, 1900.) 

16. Contributions from the biological 
laboratory of the department of Natural 
History, Trinity College, Hartford, Conn. 
Under the direction of C. L. Edwards. 

17. The physiological zero and the in- 
dex of development from the egg of the do- 
mestic fowl, Callus domesticus. A contri- 
bution to the subject of the influence of tem- 
perature on growth. In Am. Jour, of Physi- 
ology, VI, pp. 351-397. (Feb., 1902.) Ab- 
stract in Science, N. S., XV, pp. 521-522. 
(April 4, 1902.) 

18. A note on Phrynosoma. In Science, 
N. S., XVII, pp. 826-827. (May 22, 1903.) 



Rosa (Smith) Eigenmann (Mrs. Carl H 
Eigenmann.) Student, 1880-1882. 

1. *0n the occurrence of a species of 
Cremnobates at San Diego, California. In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1880, III, pp. 147- 
149. 

2. *Description of a new gobioid fish 
(Othonops eos) from San Diego, California. 



'■'Titles marked '■' appeared under the name 
Rosa Smith. 



In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1881, IV, pp. 
19-21. 

3. *Description of a new species of 
Gobiesox (Gobiesox rhessodon) from San 
Diego, California. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for 1881, IV, pp. 140-141. 

4. *Notes on a collection of fishes from 
Johnston's Island, including descriptions of 
five new species. (Joint author with Joseph 
Swain.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1882, 
V, pp. 119-143. 

5. *0n the life coloration of the young 
of Pomacentrus rubicundus. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. :Mus. for 1882, V, pp. G52-653. 

6. *Description of a new species of 
Uranidea (Uranidea rhothea) from Spokane 
River, Washington Territory. In Proc. U. 
S. Nat. Mus. for 1882, V. pp. 347-348. 

7. *The life colors of Cremnobates 
integripinnis. In Proc. U. S. Nat. INIus. for 
1883, VI pp. 216-217. 

8. *Notes on the occurrence of Gaster- 
osteus williamsoni Grd., in an artesian well 
at San Bernardino, California. In Proc. U. 
S. Nat. Mus. for 1883, VI, p. 217. 

9. *Notes on the fishes of Todos 
Santos Bay, Lower California. In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1883, VI, pp. 232-236. 

10. *Description of a new species of 
Squalius. In. Proc. California Acad. Sci. for 
1884. 

11. *Notes on fishes collected at San 
Cristobal, Lower California, by Mr. Charles 
H. Townsend, Assistant, U. S. Fish Com- 
mission. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1885, 
VII, pp. 551-553. 

12. *The fishes of San Diego, Califor- 
nia. A list in two parts. In W. Am. Sci. 
for 1885, pp. 45-47, 53-55. (July, August, 
1885.) 

13. *0n the occurrence of a new species 
of Rhinoptera (R. encenadse) in Todos 
Santos Bay, Lower California. In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1886, IX, p. 220. 

14. *On Tetraodon setosus. In Bull. 



2^8 



Eigi'nr/iannj 



Bibliography: Alumni 



California Acad. Sci., II, No. 6, pp. 155-150. 
(Nov. 13, 1886.) 

15. A chapter on sharks. In Golden 
Era for August, 1887. 

16. A chapter on sting rays. //; Golden 
Era for Sept., 1887, pp. 489-490. 

17. Charles L. McKay. In W. Am. Sci. 
for 1887, pp. 189-191. 

18. Women in science. In W. Am. Sci. 
for 1887, pp. 230-236. 

19. A list of the American Gobiidit' and 
Callionymidse, with notes on the specimens 
contained in the Museum of Comparative 
Zoology, at Cambridge, Mass. (.loint author 
v^ith Carl H. Eigenmann.) In Proc. Cali- 
fornia Acad. Sci., 2d ser., I, pp. 51-78. 
(Jan. 25, 1888.) 

20. South American Nematognathi. 
(Joint author with C. H. Eigenmann.) In 
Am. Nat., XXIII, pp. 647-649. (July, 
1888.) 

21. Preliminary notes on South Ameri- 
can Nematognathi. I. (Joint author with 
C. H. Eigenmann.) In Proc. California 
Acad. Sci. 2d ser., I, pp. 119-172. (July, 
1888.) 

22. Cyprionodon californiensis, Girard. 
(Joint author with C. H. Eigenmann.) //; 
W. Am. Sci., V, pp. 3-4. (Sept., 1888.) 

23. Description of a new species of 
Cyprinodon. (Joint author with C. H. 
Eigenmann.) In California Acad. Sci., 2d 
ser., I, p. 270. (Jan. S, 1889.) 

24. Notes on some California fishes, 
with descriptions of two new species. 
(Joint author with C. H. Eigenmann.) In 
W. Am. Sci., VI, pp. 7-8. (April, 1889.) 

25. Preliminai-y notes on South Ameri- 
can Nematognathi. II. (Joint author with 
C. H. Eigenmann.) In Proc. California 
Acad. Sci., 2d ser., II, pp. 28-56. (August 
18, 1889.) 

26. On the phosphorescent spots of 
Porichthys margaritatus. (Joint author 



with C. H. Eigenmann.) In W. Am. Sci., 
VI, pp. 32-34. (May, IbSi).) 

27. Contributions from the San Diego 
Biological Laboratory. I. (Joint author 
with C. H. Eigenmann.) In W. Am. Sci., 
VI, pp. 44-47. (June, 1889.) 

28. Notes from the San Diego Biologi- 
cal Laboratory. The fishes of Cortes 
Banks. (Joint author with C. H. Eigen- 
mann.) In W. Am. Sci., VI, pp. 123-132. 
(Oct., 1889.) 

29. Notes from the San Diego Biological 
Laboratory. II. (Joint author with C. H. 
Eigenmann.) In W. Am. Sci., VI, pp. 147- 
151. (Nov., 1889.) 

30. A review of the Erythrinina-. 
(Joint author with C. H. Eigenmann.) In 
Proc. California Acad. Sci.j 2d ser., II, pp. 
100-116. 1 plate. (Nov. 8, 1889.) 

31. A revision of the edentulous genera 
of Curimatina^. (Joint author with C. H. 
Eigenmann.) In Ann. New York Acad. 
Sci., IV, pp. 1-32. (Nov., 1889.) 

32. Description of a new species of 
Euprotomicrus. In Proc. California Acad. 
Sci., 2d ser., III. (1890.) 

33. New California fishes. In Am. Nat. 
for 1890, pp. 153-156. 

34. Additions to the fauna of San 
Diego. (Joint author with C. H. Eigen- 
mann.) In Proc. California Acad. Sci.. 2d 
ser.. Ill, pp. 1-25. (March 24, 1890.) 

35. A revision of the South American 
Nematognathi or catfishes. (Joint author 
with C. H. Eigenmann.) In Occasional pa- 
pers, Proc. California Acad. Sci., I, pp. 1- 
508, plates, map. (July, 1890.) 

36. Descriptions of new species of Se- 
bastodes. (Joint author with C. H. Eigen- 
mann.) In Proc. California Acad. Sci., 2d 
ser.. Ill, pp. 36-38. (May 28, 1890.) 

37. A catalogue of the fresh-water fishes 
of South America. (Joint author with C. H. 
Eigenmann.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
1891, XIV, pp. 1-81. 



279 



Indiana University 



\_Eigeni 



38. A catnlogue of the fishes of the Fa- 
c;ific coast of America north of Cerros island. 

(Joint author with C. H. Eigenmann. » In 
Ann. New York Acad. Sci., VI, pp. o49-358. 
(June, 1892.) 

39. Recent additions to the fauna cf 
California. (Joint author with C. H. P^igeu- 
mann.) Abstract in Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1891, pp. 159-lGl. 

40. New fishes from Western Canada. 
(Joint author with C. H. Eigenmann.) //* 
Am. Nat., XXVI. pp. 9(31-9(5-1. (Nov., 
1892.) 

41. Preliminary description of new 
fishes from the Northwest. (Joint author 
with C. H. Eigenmann.) In Am. Nat., 
XXVII, pp. 151-154. (Feb., 1893.) 



WiLLiAJi IlAinus ElsOiX, A.B. (1895). 
Superintendent of Schools. Grand 
Rapids, Michigan. 

1. Outlines of masterpieces of Ameri- 
can literature. Boston, 1893. Pp. 22. 

2. The necessity of stimulating the 
child's full mental power in kindergarten 
work. In Kindergarten Magazine, X, pp. 
357-363. (Feb., 1898.) 



Harton Warrkn Evermann. B.S. (1886). 
A.M. (1888), Ph.D. (1891). Assistant 
in charge Division of Scientific Inquiry. 
Bureau of Fisheries, Washington, D. C. 

1. California bird notes. In Ornithol- 
ogist and Oologist, VI, p. 7. (March, 1881.) 

2. Least titmouse, its nesting habits . ti 
California. //( (Ornithologist and Oiilogist, 
VI, p. 19. (May, 1881.) 

3. Large clutches of eggs. In Ornithol- 
ogist and Oologist, VI, p. 40. (July, 1881.) 

4. Unusual nesting site of the chewink. 
In Ornithologist and Oologist, VI, p. 61. 
(Oct., 1881.) 



5. Animal analysis. Chicago, 1882. 
Pp. iv, 123. 

6. The road-runner. //; Ornithologist 
and Oologist, VI, p. 85. (Jan., 1882.) 

7. American barn owl, Aluco flammeus 
americanus (Aud.) Ridgw. //( Ornitholo- 
gist and Oologist, VII, pp. 97-98, 109-110. 
(March, April, 1882.) 

8. Bluebirds' eggs. In ( )rnithologi-;t 
and Oologist, VII, p. 147. (August, 1882.) 

9. American barn owl, further notes. 
/;; Ornithologist and OiUogist. VII, pp. 166- 
167. (Oct., 1882.) 

10. The black-crested fly-catcher. In 
Ornithologist and Oologist, VII, pp. 169-170, 
177-179. (Nov., Dec, 1882.) 

11. Bird notes from Bloomington, Indi- 
ana. In Ornithologist and Oologist, VIII, 
pp. 27-28. (April, 1883.) 

12. A review of the species of Gerres 
found in American waters. (Joint author 
with Seth E. Meek.) In Proc. Acad. Nat. 
Sci. Phila. for 1883, pp. 116-124. 

13. Bird migration, /h American Field, 
XXI, pp. 544-545. (1884.) 

14. Arrivals of birds at Camden, Indi- 
ana, 1884. /() Ornithologist and Oologist, 
IX, p. 74. (June, 1884.) 

15. List of fishes collected in Harvey 
and Cowley counties, Kansas. (Joint 
author with Morton W. Fordice.) In Proc. 
Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. for 1885, p. 412 ; also 
in Bull. Washburn College Lab. Nat. Hist., 

I, pp. 184-186. (July, 1886.) 

16. A list of the birds observed in Ven- 
tura county, California. In Auk, III, pp. 
86-94, 179-186. (Jan., Feb.. 1886.) 

17. Birds observed in Ventura county, 
California. In Pacific Science Mo., I, pp. 77- 
89. (Jan., 1886.) 

18. A list of birds observed at Pensa- 
cola, Florida. In Ornithologist and Oologist, 

II, pp. 81-83, 97-98. (June, July, 1886.) 

19. Notes on a collection of fishes from 
the ^lonongahela River. (Joint author with 



280 



^n^ 



Bibliography: Alumni 



Charles H. Bollman.) In Proc. New York 
Acad. Sci. for ISSG, pp. 335-340. 

20. Descriptions of six new species of 
fishes from the Gulf of Mexico, with notes 
on other species. (Joint author with David 
Starr Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for 18SG, pp. 466-476. 

21. A list of the fishes observed in the 
vicinity of Brookville, Franklin countj', In- 
diana. In Bull. 2, Brookville Soc. Nat. Hist, 
for 1886, pp. 1-11. 

22. A revision of the American species 
of the genus Gerres. (Joint author with 
S. E. Meek.) In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 
Phila., for 1886, pp. 256-27:^. 

23. The food fishes of Indiana. (Joint 
author with D. S. Jordan.) In Rep. Indi- 
ana State Board of Agriculture for 1886, 
pp. 156-173. 

24. The yellow-billed magpie. In Am. 
Nat., XX, pp. 607-611. (July, 1886.) 

25. A day with the birds of a Hoosier 
swamp. In Ornithologist and Oologist, II. 
pp. 99-101. (July, 1886.) 

26. Some rare Indiana birds. In Am. 
Nat., XXI, pp. 200-291. (March, 1887.) 

27. Bird migration. In Pop. Sci. Mo., 
XXXI, pp. 803-810. (April, 1887.) 

28. Birds of Monroe county, Indiana. 
In Hoosier Naturalist, II, pp. 137-145. 
(May, 1887.) 

29. An addition to the list of birds of 
Monroe county, Indiana. In Hoosier Nat- 
uralist, II, p. 164. (June, 1887.) 

30. The occurrence in Indiana of the 
star-nosed mole. In Am. Nat., XXII, p. 359. 
(April, 1888.) 

31. Ornithology from a railroad train. 
(Joint author with Oliver P. Jenkins.) In 
Ornithologist and Oologist, XIII, pp. 65-69. 
(May, 1888.) 

32. Notes on Indiana fishes. (Joint 
author with O. P. Jenkins.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for 1888, pp. 43-57. 

33. Description of eighteen new species 
of fishes from the Gulf of California. (Joint 



author with O. P. Jenkins.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for 1888, pp. 137-158. 

34. Birds of Carroll county, Indiana. 
In Auk, V, pp. 344-351, 22-30. (Oct., 1888 ; 
Jan., 1889.) 

35. The wood ibis in Indiana. In Auk, 
VI, pp. 186-187. (April, 1889.) 

36. Description of the yellow-fin nod 
trout of Twin Lakes, Colorado. (Joint 
author with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for 1889, pp. 453-454. (1890.) 

37. Description of a new species of fish 
from the Tiijpecanoe river, Indiana. (Joint 
author with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for 1890, pp. 3-4. 

38. Report upon a collection of fishes 
made at Guaymas, Sonora, Mexico, with 
descriptions of new species. (Joint author 
with O. P. Jenkins.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus. for 1891, pp. 121-165 ; 2 plates. 

39. A reconnaissance of the streams and 
lakes of western JNIontana and northwestern 
Wyoming. In Bull. U. S. I'ish Comm. for 
1891 (1892), pp. 3-60; 27 plates. 

40. A report upon investigations made 
in Texas in 1891. In Bull. U. S. Fish 
Comm. for 1891 (1892), pp. 61-90, 9 plates. 

41. Two-Ocean Pass. In Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1892, pp. 29-34 ; 1 plate. 

42. The work of the U. S. Fish Com- 
mission steamer Albatross in the North 
Pacific and Bering Sea in 1892. In Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1892, pp. 56-57. 

43. The ptarmigan of the Aleutian 
Islands. //* Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 
1892. pp. 78-81. 

44. The work of the United States I'ish 
Commission and its relation to the farmer. 
In Rep. Indiana Fish Comm. for 1893-94, 
pp. 15-25. 

45. Description of a new sucker, 
Pantosteus jordani, from the upper iNIissouri 
Basin. In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1892 
(1893), pp. 51 -.56, 1 plate. 

46. The fishes of Texas and the Rio 
Grande Basin, considered chiefly with ref 



281 



Indiana University 



lEi 



erence to their geographic distribution. 
(Joint author with William C. Kendall.) In 
Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1892 (1894), pp. 
57-12G, 31 plates. 

47. The ichthyologic features of the 
Black Hills region. In Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1892, pp. 73-78. 

48. Bibliography of Indiana mammals. 
(Joint author with Amos W. Butler.) In 
Pioc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1893 (1894), 
pp. 120-124. 

49. A preliminary list of Indiana mam- 
mals. (Joint author with A. W. Butler.) 
In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1893 (1894), 
pp. 124-139. 

50. Notes on the fur-seal rookeries of 
the Pribilof Islands, July 18 to 31, 1892. 
In Proc. Tribunal of Fur Seal Arbitration 
at Paris, 1893, VII, pp. 264-273. 

51. The investigation of rivers and lakes 
with reference to the fish environment. In 
Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1893, pp. 69-73. 

52. A skeleton of Steller's sea cow. In 
Science, p. 59. (Feb., 1893.) 

53. Report upon the advisability of es- 
tablishing a fish-hatching station in the 
State of Tennessee. In Senate Mis. Doc. No. 
52, 53d Cong., 2d Sess., pp. 1-3. (Jan., 
1894.) 

54. Report upon the advisability of es- 
tablishing fish-hatchery stations at suitable 
points in Wyoming and the states of South 
Dakota, Iowa and Nebraska. Senate Mis. 
Doc. No. 53, 53d Cong., 2d Sess., pp. 1-5. 
(Jan., 1894.) 

55. The salmon fisheries of the Colum- 
bia River Basin. (.Joint author with 
Charles H. Gilbert.) Senate Mis. Doc. No. 
200, 53d Cong., 2d Sess., pp. 1-55, 13 plates. 
(August, 1894.) 

56. A report upon investigations in the 
Columbia River Basin, with descriptions of 
four new species of fishes. (Joint author 
with C. H. Gilbert.) In Bull. U. S. Fish 
Comm. for 1894, pp. 153-207 ; 13 plates. 



57. A list of the species of fishes known 
from the vicinity of Neosho, Missouri. 
(Joint author with W. C. Kendall.) In 
Bull. U. S. Fi.sh Comm. for 1894 (1895), pp. 
469-472. 

58. The fishes of the Colorado Basin. 
(Joint author with Cloudsley Rutter. ) In 
Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1894 (1895), pp. 
473-486. 

59. Recent investigations concerning the 
redfish, Oncorhynchus nerka, at its spawning 
grounds in Idaho. (Joint author with J. T. 
Scovell.) In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 
1895, pp. 131-134. 

60. The fishes of the Missouri Basin. 
(Joint author with J. T. Scovell.) In Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1895, pp. 126-138. 

61. Two-Ocean Pass. In Pop. Sci. Mo., 
XLVII, pp. 175-186; with plates. (June, 
1895.) 

62. In the Sawtooth Mountains. In 
American Angler, XXA^, p. 285. (Oct., 
1895.) 

63. The whitefishes of North America. 
(Joint author with Hugh M. Smith.) In 
Rep. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1894 (1896), 
pp. 283-324 ; 18 plates. 

64. An annotated list of the fishes 
known from the state of Vermont. (Joint 
author with W. C. Kendall.) In Rep. U. S. 
Fish Comm. for 1894 (1896), pp. 579-604. 

65. Report upon the fishes of the Mis- 
souri River Basin. (Joint author with 
Ulysses O. Cox.) In Rep. U. S. Fish Comm. 
for 1894 (1896), pp. 325-429. 

66. Description of a new species of pipe- 
fish, Siphostoma scovelli, from Texas. 
(J)int author with W. C. Kendall.) In 

Proc. U. S. Nat. Mu.s. for 1895 (1896). p. 
113. 

67. A preliminary report upon salmon 
investigations in Idaho in 1894. In Bull. 
U. S. Fish Comm. for 1895 (1896), pp. 253- 
284. 

68. The fishes of the Neuse River Basin. 



282 



r«] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



(Joint author with U. O. Cox.) lu Bull. 
U. S. Fish Comm. for 1895 (1896), pp. 303- 
310. 

69. Description of a new species of shad 
(Alosa alabamse) from Alabama. In Rep. 
U. S. Fish Comm. for 1895 (1896), pp. 203- 
205. 

70. A check-list of the fishes and fish- 
like vertebrates of North and Middle Ameri- 
ca. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) In 
Rep. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1895 (1896), 
pp. 207-584. 

71. The fishes of North and Middle 
America. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.^ 
Bull. 47, U. S. Nat. Mus., Part I, pp. Ix, 
1240 (1896) ; Part II, pp. xxx, 1241-2183 
(1898) ; Part III, pp. xxix, 2183a-3136 
(1898) ; Part IV, pp. ci, 3137-3313, 392 
plates (1900). 

72. Indian River and its fishes. (Joint 
author with Barton A. Bean.) Senate Doc. 
46, 54th Cong., 2d Sess., pp. 5-26 ; 37 plates. 
Also in Rep. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1896, pp. 
223-2(52; 36 plates. 

73. The opah (Lampris luna) in Monte- 
rey Bay. In Recreation, IV, p. 41. (Jan., 
1896.) 

74. Two-Ocean Pass. In Inland-Edu- 
cator, II, pp. 299-306; 5 plates. (July, 
1896.) 

75. Something about snipes. In Recre- 
ation, V, p. 147. (Sept., 1896.) 

76. Review of E. T. D. Chambers's 'The 
ouananiche and its Canadian environment.' 
In American Angler, XXVI, pp. 359-360. 
(Oct.-Nov., 1896.) 

77. In the Sawtooth Mountains. In 
Recreation, V, pp. 135-137, 196-197, 252- 
253. (Sept., Oct., Nov., 1896.) 

78. Idaho grouse. In Recreation, V, p. 
274. 

79. The mountain lion (Pelis concolor) . 
In Recreation, V, p. 332, 1 plate. (Dec, 
1896.) 

80. How many kinds of bears are there 



in this country? In Recreation, V, pp. 322- 
323. (Dec, 1896.) 

81. Trouting in Klamath Lakes. In 
Recreation, V, p. 336. (Dec, 1896.) 

82. Report on the fish and fisheries of 
the coastal waters of Florida. In Senate 
Doc. No. 100, 54th Cong., 2d Sess., 1897, 
pp. 1-80 ; also in Rep. U. S. Fish Comm. 
for 1896 (1897), pp. 263-342. 

83. A report upon salmon investigations 
in the headwaters of the Columbia River, in 
the state of Idaho, in 1895. In Bull. U. S. 
Fish Comm. for 1896, pp. 149-202, 6 plates. 

84. U. S. Fish Commission investiga- 
tions at Crater Lake. In Mazama, I, pp. 
230-238. (1897.) 

85. The fish fauna of Florida. In Bull. 
U. S. Fish Comm. for 1897, pp. 201-208; 
also in Recreation, XII, pp. 292-295 (April, 
1900) ; and in Southern Sportsman, II, pp. 
9-14 (Jan., 1899). 

86. A report upon salmon investigations 
in the Columbia River Basin and elsewhere 
on the Pacific coast in 1896. (Joint author 
with S. E. Meek. In Bull. U. S. Fish 
Comm. for 1897, pp. 15-84 ; S plates. 

87. Review of Florence A. Merriam's 
*A-birding on a broncho.' In Recreation, 
VI, p. 290. (April, 1897.) 

88. Review of David Starr Jordan's 
'Science Sketches.' In Recreation, VI, p. 290. 
(April. 1897.) 

89. Review of W. Furneaux's 'Life in 
pond and stream.' In Recreation, VI, p. 291. 
(April, 1897.) 

90. Review of Frank Cramer's 'The 
method of Darwin.' In Recreation, VI, p. 
291. (April, 1897.) 

91. Review of Nathaniel Lord Britton 
and Addison Brown's 'An illustrated flora of 
the northern United States, Canada and the 
British Possessions, I.' In Inland Educator, 
IV, p. 251. (June, 1897.) 

92. Lake trout from Montana. In Rec- 
reation, VII, pp. 54-55. (July, 1897.) 



283 



Indiana University 



[A' 



vermann 



\)'6. Catfish in Louisiaua. In liecrea- 
lion. VII, p. 56. (July, 1897.) 

94. Trout culture iu Montana. In Rec- 
reation, VII, pp. 140. (August, 1897.) 

95. White and yellow perch. In Recre- 
ation, VII, p. 178, 494. (Sept., Dec, 1897.) 

96. Descriptions of new or little known 
genera and species of fishes from the United 
States. (Joint author with W. C. Kendall.) 
In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1897 (1898), 
pp. 125-133 ; 4 plates. 

97. Notes on fishes collected by E. W. 
Nelson on the Tres Marias Islands and hi 
Sinaloa and Jalisco, Mexico. In Proc. Biol. 
Soc. Wash., XII, pp. 1-3. (Jan., 1898.) 

98. Crater Lake. In Recreation, VIII, 
pp. 18-20; 2 illustrations. (Jan., 1898.) 

99. Note on the Columbia sturgeon. 
In Recreation, VIII, p. 301. (April, 1898.) 

100. Crater Lake to be a national park. 
In Recreation, VIII, p. 396. (May, 1898.) 

101. Tlie teaching of biology in the pub- 
lic schools. /)( Plant World, I, pp. 119-122. 
(May, 1898.) 

102. The teaching of biology in the pub- 
lic schools. In Inland-Educator, VI, pp. 
141-143. (May, 1898.) 

103. Review of Nathaniel Lord Britton 
and Addison Brown's 'An illustrated flora of 
the northern United States, Canada and the 
British Possessions, II.' In Inland-Edu- 
cator, VI, p. 180. (May, 1898.) 

104. Note on the Loch Leven trout. /;( 
Recreation, VIII, p. 465. (June, 1898.) 

105. Key to the species of Lucius. In 
Recreation, IX, p. 207. (Sept., 1898.) 

106. Artificial key to the families of true 
fishes or Teleostei of North and INIiddle 
America. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) 
//( Bull. 47, U. S. Nat. Mus., pp. 2875-2890. 
(1898.) 

107. Report on investigations by the U. 
S. Fish Commission in Mississippi, Louisi- 
ana, and Texas in 1897. In Rep. U. S. Fish 
Comm. for 1898 (IS'.M). pp. 2^") 310 ; 29 
plates. 



108. Check-list of the fishes of Florida. 
(Joint author with W. C. Kendall.) In Rep. 
U. S. Fish Comm. for 1899, pp. 35-103. 

109. Descriptions of new genera and 
species of fishes from Puerto Rico. (Joint 
author with Millard C. Marsh.) In Rep. 
U. S. Fish Comm. for 1899, pp. 351-362. 

110. Something about Porto Rico. In 
Inland-Educator, pp. 7-10 ; 5 illustrations. 
(August, 1899.) 

111. Review of S. Reynolds Hale's 'Our 
garden.' In Recreation, XI, p. 234. (Sept., 
1899.) 

112. Review of Albert Gardner Robin- 
son's 'Porto Rico to-day.' In Recreation, 
XI, p. 322. (Oct., 1899.) 

113. Review of Sir Edward Grey's 'Fly 
fishing.' In Recreation, XI, p. 3'22. (Oct., 
] 899. ) 

114. A note on Roccus lineatus, Roccus 
chrysops, and Morone interrupta. In Recre- 
ation, XI, pp. 287-288. (Oct., 1899.) 

115. The ling and other fishes of Lake 
Chelan, Washington. In Recreation, XI, pp. 
371-372. (Nov., 1899.) 

116. Note on a specimen of the wolf-fish, 
Alepisaurus fesculapias. In Recreation, XI, 
p. 373. (Nov., 1899.) 

117. Review of Frederic A. Ober's 
'Puerto Rico and its resources.' In Recrea- 
tion, XI, p. 397. (Nov., 1899.) 

118. Review of David Starr Jordan'.s 
'Manual of vertebrates.' In Recreation, XI, 
p. 397. (Nov., 1899.) 

119. Description of two new species of 
darters from Lake Maxinkuckee, Indiana. In 
Rep. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1899 (1900), 
pp. 363-367; 1 plate. 

120. Investigations of the aquatic re 
sources and fisheries of Porto Rico by the 
United States Fish Commission steamer 
Fish Hawk in 1899. In Bull. U. S. Fish 
Comm. for 1900, pp. 1-350; 52 plates, 112 
figures. 

121. The fishes of Porto Rico. (Joint 



284 



Evermann ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



author with M. C. Marsh.) In Bull. U. S. 
Fish Comm. for 1000, pp. 51-350 : 104 plates. 

122. Some observations concerning 
species and sub-species. lu Science, N. S., 
XI, pp. 451-455. (March, 1000.) 

123. Keview of William Dinwiddie's 
'Puerto Rico.' In Recreation, XII, p. 399. 
(May, 1900.) 

124. The United States Fish Commision. 
In Current Encyclopedia, I, pp. 457-401 ; G 
illustrations. (Oct., 1901.) 

125. Investigations of the United States 
Fish Commission steamer Albatross. In 
Current Encyclopedia, I, pp. 089-693; 3 il- 
lustrations. (Dec, 1901.) 

120. Bait minnows. In Rep. New York 
Forest, Fish and Game Comm. for 1900 
(1002). pp. 307-352; 16 text-figures and 
colored plates of 12 species. 

127. Notes on the fishes and mollusks of 
Chautauqua Lake, New York. (Joint 
author with Edmund L. Goldsborough.) In 
Rep. New York Forest, Fish and Game 
Comm. for 1900 (1002), pp. 357-366; 1 
plate. 

128. Notes on the fishes of Lake On- 
tario. (Joint author with W. C. Kendall.) 
In Rep. N. Y. Forest, Fish and Game Comm. 
for 1900 (1902), pp. 479-488. 

129. Summary of the scientific results of 
the Fish Commission expedition to Porto 
Rico. In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1900 
(1902), XI-XV, First Part. 

130. General report on the investigations 
in Porto Rico of the United States Fish 
Commission steamer Fish Hawk in 1899. 
In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1900 
(1902), pp. 1-26, Part 1. 

131. List of species of fishes known to 
occur in the Great Lakes or their connecting 
waters. In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. for 
1901 (1902), pp. 95-96. 

132. A report on fishes collected in Mex- 
ico and Central America, with notes and 
descriptions of five new species. (Joint 



author with E. L. Goldsborough.) In Bull. 
U. S. Fish Comm. for 1001 (1002), pp. 137- 
159 ; 8 text-figures. 

133. Notes on the fishes and mollusks of 
Lake Chautauqua, New York. (Joint 
author with E. L. Goldsborough.) In Rep. 
U. S. Fish Comm. for 1001 (1002). pp. 169- 
175. 

134. Notes on the fishes of Lake Ontario. 
(Joint author with W. C. Kendall.) In 
Rep. IT. S. Fish Comm. for 1901 (1002), pp. 
200-216. 

135. An annotated list of the fishes 
known to occur in Lake Champlain and its 
tributary waters. (Joint author with W. C. 
Kendall.) In Rep. U. S. Fish Comm. for 
1001 (1002), pp. 217-226. 

136. An annotated list of the fishes 
known to occur in the St. Lawrence River. 
(Joint author with W. C. Kendall.) In 
Rep. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1001 (1902), pp. 
227-240. 

137. Description of a new species of shad 
(Alosa ohiensis) with notes on other food- 
fishes of the Ohio River. In Rep. U. S. Fish 
Comm. for 1901 (1902), pp. 273-288; 6 
plates. 

138. The fishes and fisheries of the Ha- 
waiian Islands. (Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) In Rep. U. S. Fish Comm. for 
1901 (1902), pp. 353-499; 7 plates. 

139. Preliminary report on the investi- 
gations of the fishes and fisheries of the Ha- 
waiian Islands. (Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan. ) /;( House Doc. No. 249, 57th 
Cong., 1st SPSS., pp. 1-33. (Jan., 1902.) 

140. Lopho, tlie quail. In Harper's Mo., 
CIV, pp. 487-492. (Feb., 1902.) 

141. Facts about the eel. In Recreation, 
XVI, p. 222. (March, 1902.) 

142. Lake Mashipacong. In Recreation, 
XVI, pp. 291-293. (April, 1902.) 

143. Nature study and nature study 
books. /« Recreation, XVI, p. 317. (April, 
1902.) 



285 



Indiana University 



IE 



vermann 



144. Porto Rico, its fishes and fisheries. 
(Joint author with M. C. Marsh.) In Cur- 
rent Encyclopedia, II, pp. 1274-1279 ; 8 text- 
illustrations. (April, 1902.) 

145. The feeding habits of the coot and 
other water birds. In Osprey, I, pp. 57-64. 
(April, 1902.) 

146. American food and game fishes : a 
popular account of all the species found in 
America north of the Equator, with keys for 
ready identification, life histories, and meth- 
ods of capture. (Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) New York, 1902. Pp. 1, 573; 
10 colored plates, 63 photographic plates, 
and 220 text-figure.s. 

147. Notes on some Mexican fishes. 
(Joint author with E. L. Goldsborough. ) 
In Science, N. S., XV, pp. 746-749. (May, 
1902.) 

148. A new species of shad from the Ohio 
River. In Forest and Stream, LVIII, pp. 
408-409; plates. (May, 1902.) 

149. Strange fishes of the deep sea. In 
The World To-day, II, pp. 1398-1406; 18 
plates. (June, 1902.) 

150. A new species of shad. In Sports 
Afield, XXIX, pp. 63-66; 3 plates. (July, 
1902.) 

151. Fishes of the Great Lakes. In 
Sports Afield, XXIX, p. 70. (July, 1902.) 

152. The mystery of the salmon. In Out- 
ing, pp. 562-568. (August, 1902.) 

153. Pike, pickerel, muscalonge. In 
Forest and Stream, LIX, p. 193. (Sept., 
1902.) 

154. The big trees of California. In 
Sports Afield, XXIX, p. 272. (Sept., 
1902.) 

155. Some strange ocean fishes. (.loiut 
author with ]\I. C. iMarsh.) In World To- 
day, III, pp. 1800-1805, 10 plates. (Sept., 
1902.) 

156. Hawaiian Island fisheries. In 
Sports Afield, XXIX, p. 273. (Sept.. 1902.) 



157. Water the birds. In Country Life 
in America, III, pp. 17-19. (Nov., 1902.) 

158. Nerka, the blueback salmon. In 
World To-day, III, pp. 2221-2228; 9 plates. 
(Dec, 1902.) 

159. Descriptions of new genera and 
species of fishes from the Hawaiian Islands. 
(Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) In Bull. 
U. S. Fish Comm. for 1902 (1903), pp. 161- 
208. 

160. Descriptions of a new genus and 
two new species of fishes from the Hawaiian 
Islands. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) 
In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., for 1902 (1903), 
pp. 209-210. 

161. The cutthroat trout and its rela- 
tives. In Country Life in America, IV, p. 
130; 1 illustration. (June, 1903.) 

102. The United States Bureau of Fish- 
eries. In Pacific Fisherman II, pp. 16-18 ; 
3 plates. (Jan., 1904.) 

163. The fishes and other aquatic re- 
sources of the Hawaiian Islands. (Joint 
author with D. S. Jordan.) //) Bull. U. S. 
Fish Comm. for 1903 (1904) ; 73 colored 
plates, 300 litnographs and text-figures. 

164. Preliminary report of the Alaska 
Salmon Commission. (Joint author with 
D. S. Jordan.) In House Doc. No. 477, 58th 
Cong., 2d Sess, pp. 1-37. (Jan., 1904.) 

165. The native fishermen of Hawaii. In 
Outing. XLIII, pp. 660-667; 7 illustrations. 

166. ^lodesty itself, the brown towhee. 
In Recreation, XX. pp. 277-279 ; 1 plate. 
(April, 1904.) 

167. Statistics of the fisheries of the 
Middle Atlantic States. In Rep. U. S. Fish 
Comm. for 1902, pp. 433-540. (1903.) 

108. Report of the Division of Statistics 
and Methods of the Fisheries. In Rep. U. 
S. Fish Comm. for 1903, pp. 101-122. 
(1904.) 

169. The Bureau of Fisheries. In Nat. 
Geog. Mag., XV, pp. 191-212; 14 illustra- 
tions. (May, 1904.) 



286 



Fesler ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



Bert Fesler, A.B. (1889). Duluth, Minn. 

1. A review of the mackerels (Scom- 
brina3) of America and Europe. (Joint 
author with Fletcher B. Dresslar.) In Bull. 
U. S. Fish Comm. for 1887. 



Frank Albert Fetter, A.B. (1891), Ph.D. 
Professor of Economics and Social 
Science, Indiana University, 1895-1898. 
Now Profe-ssor of Political Economy 
and Finance, Cornell University. 

1. Versuch einer Bevidkerungslehre, 
Jena, 1894. Pp. 105. 

2. History of the city of Peru, Indiana. 
In History of Miami county, (Chicago, 
1887), pp. 362-392. 

3. Theories of value and deferred pay- 
ments. In Ann. Am. Acad. Pol. and Soc. 
Sci., V, pp. 882-896. (May, 1895.) 

4. The gold reserve, its functions and 
its maintenance. In Pol. Sci. Quart., XI, 
pp. ^Zl-I^l. (June, 1896.) 

5. Review of Julius Lehr's 'Produktion 
und Con.sumption.' In Pol. Sci. Quart., XI, 
p. 336. (June, 1896.) 

6. Review of F. W. Taussig's 'Wages 
and capital.' In Pol. Sci. Quart., XII, p. 
146. (March, 1897.) 

7. The improvement of methods of poor 
relief in Indiana. In Bull. Indiana State 
Board of Charities. (June, 1898.) 

8. The essay of INIalthus : a centennial 
review. In Yale Rev., VII, p. 153. (August, 
1898.) 

9. Review of John Davidson's 'Bargain 
theory of wages.' In Pol. Sci. Quart., XIII, 
p. 556. (Sept., 1898.) 

10. Politics in the charitable institu- 
tions of the Pacific coast. In Proc. Nat. 
Conf. Char, and Cor. for 1899. 

11. Social progress and race degenera- 



tion. In Forum, XXVIII, p. 228. (Oct., 
1899.) 

12. Recent discussion of the capital 
concept. In Quart. Jour. Econ., XV, pp. 1- 
45. (Nov., 1900.) 

13. The next decade of economic theory. 
In Pub. Am. Econ. Asso., Third series, II, 
pp. 236-246. (Feb., 1901.) 

14. The passing of the old rent concept. 
//( Quart. Jour. Econ., XV, pp. 416-445. 
(May, 1901.) 

15. Public subsidies to private charities. 
In Proc. Nat. Couf. Char, and Cor. for 
1901, p. 118. 

16. An American economist (J. B. 
Clark). /« Internat. Mo. (July, 1901.) 

17. The maps, diagrams, data, and sta- 
tistical tables on housing conditions in Chi- 
cago (about 100 pages). In Report of the 
City Homes A.ssociation on Tenement Con- 
ditions in Chicago. Chicago, 1901. 

18. The subsidizing of private charities. 
In Am. Jour. Soc, VII, p. 359. (Nov., 
1901.) 

19. Review of A. H. Gibson's 'Natural 
economy.' In Jour. Pol. Econ., X, p. 289. 
(March, 1902.) 

20. Review of E. A. Ross's 'Social con- 
trol.' In Charities, VIII, p. 213. (March, 
1902.) 

21. Review of E. von Bohm-Bawerk's 
'Einige strittige Fragen der Capitalstheorie.' 
In Pol. Sci. Quar., XVII, p. 169. (March, 
1902.) 

22. Editor of 'Papers and proceedings of 
the 14th annual meeting of the American 
Economic Association.' New York, 1902. 
Pp. 400. (Pub. Am. Econ. Asso., 3d ser., 
HI, No. 1.) 

23. The roundabout process in the inter- 
est theory. In Quar. Jour. Econ., XVII, 
pp. 163-180. (Nov., 1902.) 

24. Review of G. B. Lockwood's 'The 
New Harmony communities.' In Jour. Pol. 
Econ.. XI. p. 175. (Dec, 1902.) 



287 



Indiana University 



iFette 



2."). Review of I. Broome, 'The Inst days 
of the Ruskin community.' /;( Jour. Fol. 
Econ., XI, p. 177. (Dec, 1902.) 

26. Editor of 'Papers and proceedings of 
the 15th annual meeting of the American 
Economic As.sociation.' New York, 1903. 
Pp. 298. (Pub. Am. Econ. As.so., 3d ser., 
IV, No. 1.) 

27. Taxation in the American States in 

1902. In Legislative Bull. New York State 
Library, No. 19, p. 785. (1903.) 

28. The relations between rent and in- 
terest. Paper read at the sixteenth annual 
meeting of the Am. Ecou. Assoc, Dec, 1903. 
/n Pub. Am. Econ. Assoc. 3d ser., V, pp. 
176-198. (Feb., 1904.) Reprint, with dis- 
cussion, 74 pp. (April, 1904.) 

29. Taxation in the American States in 

1903. In Legis. Bull. N. Y. State Library 
for May. 1904. 

30. Editor of 'Papers and proceedings 
of the 16th annual meeting of the American 
Economic Association.' Part I. New York, 

1904. Pp. 250. (Pub. Am. Econ. A.ssoc. 
3d ser., V, No. 1.) 

81. Editor of 'Papers and proceedings 
of the Kith annual meeting of the American 
Economic Association.' Part II. New 
York, 1904. Pp. 210. (Pub. Am. Ecou. 
Assoc, 3d. ser., V, No. 2.) 

32. Principles of economies, with appli- 
cations to practical problems. New York. 
1904. About 500 pp. (In press.) 



3. Avoidable causes of mortality in tu- 
berculosis in the Southwest. In Cleveland 
Med. Jour., for Nov., 1903. 



GtJY Harland Fitzgerald, A.B. (1896), 
M.D. Albuquerque, N. M. 

1. Etiology of appendicitis. In Cleve- 
land Medical Gaz. for 1901. 

2. The Southwest for pulmonary tu- 
berculosis. /;; Cleveland Med. Jour., X. 
CMarcli. 1902.) 



Arthur Lee Foley, A.B. (1890), A.M. 
(1891), Ph.D. aS'cc Faculty list. 



MoRTOxN William Fordice, B.S. (1886). 
Russellville, Ind. 

1. A review of the American Stroma):- 
eida?. //) I'roc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Pliiladelphia, 
for 1SS4, pp. 311-317. 

2. A review of the American Eleotrid 
iufe. (.Joint author with C. H. Eigenmann. ) 
In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Pliiladelphia for 
1885, pp. 66-80. 

3. A catalogue of the fishes of Bean 
Blossom Creek. Monroe county, Indiana. 
(Joint autlior with C. H. Eigenmann.) In 
Proc Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, for 1885, 
pp. 410-411. 

4. List of fishes collected in Harvey 
and Cowley counties, Kansas. (Joint au- 
thor with Barton W. Evermann. In Proc. 
Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, for 1885, p. 
412. 

5. Some Kansas fishes. (Joint author 
with B. W. Evermann.) //; Bull. Wash- 
burn College Nat. Hist, for 1885. 

6. A review of the North American 
species of Petromyzontida>. (Joint author 
with David Starr Jordan.) In Ann. Acad. 
Nat. Sci. N. Y., for 1886. 

7. A review of the American species 
of BellonidfT". (.Joint author with D. S. 
.Jordan.) In Proc U. S. Nat. Mus., IX, 
pp. 338-361. (1886.) 

8. A review of the sturgeons (Acipen- 
seridre) of North America. (Joint author 
with Philip II. Kirscli.) In Proc Acad. 
Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, for 1889, pp. 245- 
257. 



28S 



Foster ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



FiNLEY MlLLIGAN FOSTER. A.B. (1876), 

Ph.D. Clergyman, New York. 

1. The witnessing church. New York, 
3890. Pp. 233. 

2. A plea for the old church. New 
York, 1896. Pp. 44. 



John Mitchell Foster, A.B. (1871). Pas- 
tor Second Reformed Presbyterian 
Church, Bo.ston, Ma.s.s. 

1. Review of S. L. Loomis's 'Modern 
cities.' In Christian Statesman. (Sept., 
1888.) 

2. Reformation principles. Cincinnati, 
1890. Pp. 448. 

3. Review of Elisha Mulford's 'The 
nation.' In Christian Statesman. (Sept., 
1890. ) 

4. Distinctive principles of the Cove- 
nanters. Boston, 1892. Pp. 56. 

5. Our triple foe. Boston, 1892. Pp. 
48. 

6. Romanism : The evil and its rem- 
edy. Boston, 1892. Pp. 64. 

7. Principles of the covenanters. In 
Our Day (Bo.ston) for March, 1894, pp. 102- 
113. 

8. Christ the king. Boston. 1895. Pp. 
448. 

9. Secret societies and the state. In 
Arena, XIX, pp. 229-240. (Feb., 1898.) 

10. Review of James Bryce's 'The 
American commonwealth.' In Christian 
Statesman. (June, 1900.) 

11. Review of A. J. Gordon's 'The Holy 
Spirit in missions.' In Olive Tree. (1900.^ 

12. Review of R. W. Thompson's 'The 
papacy and the civil power.' In Am. Citi- 
zen. (April. 1901.) 

13. Review of James Bryce's 'The Holy 
Roman Empire of the Germans.' In Am. 
Citizen. (March, 1901.) 



14. Review of Josiali Strong's 'The 
new era.' In Christian Statesman. (June, 
1901.) 

15. Review of Stephen L. Baldwins 
'Foreign missions of the Protestant Church.' 
In Olive Tree. (Dec, 1901.) 

16. Ten lectures on Romanism. In Am. 
Citizen. (Boston.) 

17. One hundred lectures on the Chris- 
tian state. In Christian Statesman. (Pitts- 
burg, Pa.) 

IS. Twenty lectures on foreign missions. 
In Olive Tree. (New York.) 

19. Fifty addresses on the Messiah's 
kingdom. In Midland. (Chicago.) 

20. Review of Harlan P. Beach's 'The 
geography and atlas of Protestant missions.' 
In Olive Tree. (Feb., 1904.) 

21. Review of Josiah Strong's 'Twen- 
tieth century cities.' In Midland. 

22. Review of A. T. Pierson's 'Evan- 
gelistic work.' In Christian Nation. 



John Watson Foster, A.B. (1855), LL.D. 
Washington, D. C. 

1. Coffee cultivation in Mexico, Agri- 
cultural Department. (1876.) 

2. International awards and national 
honor. Washington, 1886. 

3. Visit to foreign mission lands, Pres. 
bd.. New York. 1895. 

4. Bering Sea arbitration. //; No. Am. 
Rev., CLXI, pp. 693-702. (Dec, 1895.) 

5. Biography of Matthew Watson Fos- 
ter. New York, 1896. Pp. 86. 

6. The Viceroy Li Hung Chang. In 
Century, LII, pp. 560-571. (August. 1896.) 

7. The Hawaiian Islands. In Nat. 
Geog. Mag., for Nov., 1899. 

9. Rank of ambassadors. In Columbia 
Univ. Pub., for Dec, 1899. 

10. A century of American diplomacy. 
Boston, 1900. Pp. i-xiii, 495. 



(20) 



289 



Indiana University 



\^Foster 



11. A foreign sovereign in an American 
court. /;( Yale Law Jour., May, 1900. 

12. A permanent method of arbitration. 
In Independent, LII, pp. 1420-142Z. (June 
14, 1900.) 

13. The right of missionaries to protec- 
tion. In Rev. of Revs., August, 1900. 

14. The great Chinese viceroy and dip- 
lomat. In Internat. Mo.. II. pp. 584-596. 
(Nov., 1900.) 

15. Reciprocity treaties and the Senate. 
In Independent. LII. p. 2899. 

16. La Doctrina de Monroe. In Bull. 
Am. Republics, Dec, 1900. 

17. The United States, is or are? In 
New York Sat. Rev., May 4, 1901. 

18. The Clayton-Bulwer treaty. In In- 
dependent, LIII, pp. 11G7-1171. (May, 
1901.) 

19. Latin-American constitutions and 
revolutions. //( Jour. Am. Sci., Nov., 1901. 

20. Treaty making power under the 
Constitution. In Yale Law Jour., Dec, 
1901. 

21. The New Mexico. In Nat. Geo. 
Mag., Jan., 1902. 

22. Canada and the Monroe Doctrine. 
In Independent, LIV, pp. 721-723. (March 
27, 1902.) 

23. Pan-American diplomacy. In Atl. 
Mo., LXXXIX, pp. 482-491. (April, 1902.) 

24. Gifts from foreign governments : 
Art. 1, Sec 9. CI. 8. U. S. Constitution. 
In Columbia Univ. Pub., Dec, 1902. 

25. American diplomacy in the Orient. 
Boston. 1903. Pp. i-xiv. 498. 

26. The Canadian boundary. In Nat. 
Geo. ]Mag., March, 1903. 

27. Porfirio Diaz : Soldier and states- 
man. In Internat. Quar., VIII, pp. 342-353. 
(Dec, 1903.) 

28. The Alaskan Boundary Tribunal. 
In Nat. Geo. iNIag., Jan., 1904. 

29. What the United States has done 
for international arbitration. In Green 
Bag, March, 1904. 



Addison Lutiikr Fulwider, A.B. (1895). 
Principal of High School, Jacksonville, 
111. 

1. History in the high school. In In- 
land-Educator, VI. pp. 100-104. (April. 
1898.) 

2. Relative value of history. In Proc 
Illinois State Teachers' Asso., Dec, 1899. 



Charles Henry Gilbert, M. S. (1882), 
Ph.D. (1883). Professor of Zoology, 
Indiana University, 1888-1891. Now 
Professor of Zoology, Leland Stanford 
.Tunior University. Stanford University, 
Cnl. . 

1. List of fishes of Indiana. (.Joint 
author with David Starr Jordan.) /;; Indi- 
ana Farmer, Jan. 17, 1877. 

2. On the genera of North American 
fresh-water fishes. (Joint author with D. 
S. Jordan.) //; Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil- 
adelphia, XXIX, pp. 83-104. 

3. Notes on the fishes of Beaufort Har- 
bor, North Carolina. (Joint author with 
D. S. Jordan.) //; Proc. U. S. Nat. :Mus., 
I, pp. 365-388. (1878.) 

4. Notes on a collection of fishes from 
San Diego, California. (Joint author with 
D. S. Jordan.) In Proc U. S. Nat. Mus., 
Ill, pp. 23-34. (1880.) 

5. Description of a new flounder (Xys- 
trenrys liolepis) from Santa Catalina Is- 
land, California. (Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, 
pp. 34-36. (1880.) 

6. Description of a new raj' (Platy- 
rhina triseriata) from the coast of Cali- 
fornia. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.. Ill, pp. 36-38. 
( 18S0. ) 

7. Description of a new species cf 
rock cod ( Seba.stichthys serriceps) from 
the coast of Californin. (.loint author with 



290 



Gilbert'] 



Bibliography : Alumni 



I). S. Jordan.) In I'roc. U. S. Nat. Mvis.. 
III. pp. 40-42. 

8. On the otciirrence of Ceplialo.scyl- 
liuin laticeps ' ( Domt'i-il) Gill on the coast 
of California. (..Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mu^.. Ill, 
pp. 40-42. (1880.) 

9. On the oil shark of Southern Cal- 
ifornia (Galeorhinu.s galeus). ( Joint author 
with D. S. Jordan.) /*) Proc. U. S. Nar. 
?ilus., Ill, pp. 42-43. (1880.) 

10. Description of a new flounder (Pleu- 
ronichthys verticalis) from the coast of Cal- 
ifornia, with notes on other species. (Joint 
author with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mns., III. pp. 49-51. (1880.) 

11. Notes on sharks from the coast of 
California. (Joint author with D. S. Jor- 
dan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 
51-52. (1880.) 

12. On the generic relations of Platy- 
rhina exasperata. (Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.. Ill, 
p. 53. (1880.) 

13. Description of a new species of Se- 
bastichthys ( Sebastichthys miniatu.s) from 
Monterey Bay, California. (Joint author 
with D. S. Jordan.) In I'roc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., Ill, pp. 70-73. (1880.) 

14. Description of a new species of rock- 
fish ( Sebastichthys carnatus ) from the 
coast of California. (Joint author with 
D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.. 
III. pp. 73-75. (1880.) 

15. Description of a new species of ray 
(Kaia stellulata ) from Monterey. Califor- 
nia. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) 
In I'roc. U. S. Nat. Mus., III. pp. 133-135. 
(1880.) 

IG. Descriptions of new species of Xip'i- 
ister and Apodichthys, from Monterey, Cal- 
ifornia. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. INIus., III. pp. 135-140. 
(1880.) 

17. Descriptions of two new species of 
Sebastichthys ( Sebastichthys entomelas and 



Sebastichtliys rhodochloris ) from Monterey 
Bay. California. (Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan. ) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, 
pp. 142-140. (1880.) 

18. Description of a new Agonoid fisli 
(Brachyopsis xyosternus) from Monterey 
Bay. California. (Joint author witn D. S. 
Jordan. ) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 
152-154. (1880.) 

19. Description of a new flounder ( Ilip- 
poglossoides exilis) from the coast of Cali- 
fornia. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 154-150. 
( 1880. ) 

20. Description of a new species of ray 
(Raia rhina) from the coast of California. 
(Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 2.51-2.53. (1880.) 

21. Descriptions of two new species of 
fishes (Ascelichthys rhodorus and Scytalina 
cerdale) from Neah Bay, Washington Ter- 
ritory. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) 
In I'roc. U. S. Nat. Mus., III. pp. 204-208. 
(1880.) 

22. Descriptions of two new species of 
Scopeloid fishes (Sudis ringeus and Mycto- 
phum creuulare ) from Santa Barbara Chan- 
nel, California. (Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) In I'roc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 
273-270. (1880.) 

23. Descriptions of two new species of 
flounders (Parophrys ischyrus and Hippo- 
glossoides elassodon) . from Puget Sound. 
(Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) Iri 
I'roc. U. S. Nat. Mus.. Ill, pp. 270-280. 
(1880.) 

24. Description of seven new species of 
Sebastoid fishes from the coast of California. 
(Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) /;; 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 287-298. 
(1880.) 

25. De.scription of a new Embiotocoid 
(Abeona aurora) from Monterey, California, 
with notes on a related species. (Joint 
author with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus.. III. pp. 299-301. (1880.) 



2.91: 



Indiana University 



[Gilbert 



2(!. Dest-ription of a new flounder ( I'lat- 
ysoinatichthys stomias) from the coast of 
California. (Joint author with D. S. Jor- 
dan.) In I'roo. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, \}\t. 
301-303. (ISSO.) 

27. Description of a new Embiotoc()i<l 
fish (Cymatogaster rosaceus) from the coast 
of California. (Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) In I'roc. U. S. Nat. Mu.s., Ill, 
pp. 303-305. (1880.) 

28. Description of a new species of 
deep-water fish (Icichthys lockingtoni) from 
the coast of California. (Joint author with 
D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
Ill, pp. 305-308. (1880.) 

29. Description of a new Embiotocoid 
fish (Ditrema atripes) from the coast of 
California. (Joint author with D. S. Jor- 
dan.) In Proc. V. 8. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 
320-322. (1880.) 

30. Description of a new Scorpsenoid 
fish ( Sebastichthys maliger) from the coast 
of California. (Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) /;/ Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, 
pp. 322-324. (1880.) 

31. Description of a new Scorpaenoid 
fish ( Sebastichthys proriger ) from INIonteroy 
Bay. California. (Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, 
pp. 327-329. (1880.) 

32. Description of a new Agonoid (Ago- 
nu.s vulsus) from the coast of California. 
(Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 330-332. (1880.) 

33. Description of a new species of 
Hemirhamphus (Hemirhamphus rosse) from 
the coast of California. (Joint author with 
D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
III. pp. 335-336. (1880.) 

34. Description of a new species of No- 
tidanoid shark (Hexanchus corinus) from 
the Pacific coast of the United States. 
(Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 352-355. 
(1880.) 

35. Description of a new species of 



Nemichthys ( Nemichthys avocetta ) from 
I'uget Sound. (Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) //( Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., III. 
pp. 409-410. (1881.) 

o(>. Description of a new species of 
Pnral<'i)is ( Paralei)is coruscans) from the 
Straits of Juan de Fuca. (Joint author 
with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus.. III. pp. 411-413. (1881.) 

37. List of the fishes of the Pacific 
coast of the United States, with a table 
showing the distribution of the species. 
( Joint author with D. S. Jordan. ) In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 452-4.58. (1881.) 

38. On the generic relations of Belone 
exilis. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) 
//( Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, p. 459. 
(1881.) 

39. Notes on a collection of fishes from 
Utah Lake. (Joint author with D. S. Jor- 
dan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ill, pp. 
359-4(i5. (1881.) 

40. Description of a new species of 
rock-fish ( Sebastichthys chrysomelas ) from 
the coast of California. (Joint author with 
I). S. Jordan.) In I'roc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
III. p. 405. (1881.) 

41. Observations on the salmon of the 
I'acific. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) 
In Am. Nat.. XV, pp. 177-18(3. (1881.) 

42. Notes on the fishes of the Pacific 
coast of the United States. (Joint author 
with I). S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., IV. pp. 29-70. (1881.) 

43. Description of Sebastichthys mys- 
tinus. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) 
//( Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., IV, pp. 70-72. 
(1881.) 

44. Description of a new species of Pty- 
chochilus (Ptychochilus harfordi) from Sac- 
ramento River. (Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., IV, 
pp. 72-73. (1881.) 

45. Note on Raia inornata. (Joint 
author with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. V. S. 
Nat. Mus., IV, pp. 73-74. (1881.) 



292 



Gilbert^ 



Bibliography: Alumni 



46. Notes on a collection of tishes made 
by Lieut. Henry E. Nichols, U. S. N., on 
the west coast of Mexico, with descriptions 
of new species. (.Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., IV, 
pp. 225-233. (1881.) 

47. List of fishes collected by Lieut. 
Henry E. Nichols, U. S. N., in the Gulf 
of California, and on the west coast (>t 
Lower California, with descriptions of fovu- 
new species. (Joint author with D. S. Jor- 
dan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., IV, pp. 
273-279. (1882.) 

48. Descriptions of thirty-three new 
species of fishes from Mazatlan, Mexico. //( 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., IV, pp. 338-365. 
(1882.) 

49. Descriptions of a new species of 
Pomadasys from Mazatlan, with a key to 
the species known to inhabit the Pacific 
coast of tropical America. (Joint author 
with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., IV, pp. 383-388. (1882.) 

50. Description of a new species of 
Xenichthys (Xenichthys xeuurus) from the 
west coast of Central America. (Joint au- 
thor with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., IV, p. 454. (1882.) 

51. Description of five new species of 
fishes from Mazatlan, Mexico. (Joint au- 
thor with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., IV, pp. 458-463. (1882.) 

52. Description of four new species of 
sharks from Mazatlan, Mexico. (Joint 
author with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., V, pp. 102-110. (1882.) 

53. Description of a new shark (Car- 
charias lamiella ) from San Diego, Califor- 
nia. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., V, pp. 110-111. 
(1882.) 

54. Descriptions of nineteen new species 
of fishes from the Bay of Panama. (.Joint 
author with D. S. Jordan.) In Bull. U. S. 
Fish Comm., I, pp. 306-335. (1882.) 

55. Description of a new Cyprinodout 



(Zygonectes inurus) from southern Illinois. 
(Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus., V, pp. 143-144. (1882.) 

5G. Description of a new species of 
I'ranidea (Uranidea pollicaris) from Lake 
Michigan. (Joint author with D. S. Jor- 
dan. ) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., V, pp. 222- 
223. (1882.) 

57. Notes on fishes observed about Pen- 
.sacola. Florida, and Galveston, Texa.s, with 
descriptions of new species. (Joint author 
with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus.. V, pp. 241-307. (1882.) 

.58. Description of a new species of Con- 
odon (Conodon serrifer) from Boca Soledad, 
T^ower California. (Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., V, pp. 
351-3.52. (1882.) 

59. Catalogue of the fishes collected by 
Mr. John Xantus at Cape San Lucas, which 
are now in the United States National Mu- 
seum, with descriptions of eight new species. 
(Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus., V, pp. 353-371. (1882.) 

60. List of fishes collected by Mr. John 
Xantus at Colima, Mexico. (Joint author 
with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus.. V, pp. 371-372. (1882.) 

61. List of fishes collected at Panama 
by Capt. John M. Dow. now in the United 
States National Museum. (Joint author 
with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., V, pp. 373-378. (1882.) 

62. List of a collection of fishes made by 
Mr. L. Bekling, near Cape San Lucas, Lower 
California. (Joint author with D. S. Jor- 
dan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., V, pp. 378- 
381. (1882.) 

63. List of fishes collected at Panama 
by Rev. Mr. Rowell, now preserved in the 
United States National Museum. (Joint 
author with D. S. Jordan.) //), Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., V, pp. 381-382. (1882.) 

64. Descriptions of two new species of 
fishes ( Sebastichthys umbrosus and Cithar- 
ichthys stigmseus) collected at Santa Bar- 



293 



Indiana; University 



[ Gilbert 



bara, California, by Andrea Lnvco. (Joint 
author with D. S. Jordan.) In I'loc. T". S. 
Nat. Mus., V, pp. 410-412. (1S82.) 

(>."). A review of the Siluroid fishes 
found on the Pacific coast of tropical Amer- 
ica, with descriptions of three new species. 
(Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) In Bull. 
U. B. Fish Comm., II, pp. 34-54. (1882.) 

CC. List of fishes collected at Mazatlan. 
Mexico, by Charles H. Gilbert. (Joint 
author with D. S. Jordan.) In Bull. U. S. 
Fish Comm., II. pp. 105-108. (1882.) 

G7. liist of fishes collected at Tanama 
by C. 11. Gilbert. (Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) //; Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., II. 
pp. 109-111. (1882.) 

68. Description of a new species of 
Goby (Gobiosoma ios) from Vancouver's 
Island. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) 
In Froc. U. S. Nat. Mus., \^, pp. 437-438. 
(1882.) 

69. List of fishes observed at Punta 
Arenas, on the Pacific coast of Central Amer- 
ica. In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm.. II, p. 112. 
(1882.) 

70. On certain neglected generic names 
of Lacepede. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., V, 
pp. 570-576. (1883.) 

71. On the synonymy of the genus 
Bothus Rafinesque. (Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) In Proc. IJ. S. Nat. :Mus.. V. pp. 
576-577. (1883.) 

72. Description of a new species cf 
Artedius (Artedius fenestralis) from Puget 
Sound. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., V, pp. 577-579. 
(1883.) 

73. Description of a new species of 
Urolophus (Urolophus asterias) from JNIa- 
zatlan and Panama, (Joint author with D. 
S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.. V, 
pp. 579-580. (18S3.) 

74. Notes on a collection of fishes from 
Charleston, South Carolina, ^ with descrip- 
tions of three new species. (Joint author 



with D. S. J(n-dnn.) /)) Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus.. V. p|). .580-620. (1883.) 

75. List of fishes now in the museum of 
Yale College, collected by Prof. Frank H. 
Bradley at Panama, with description of three 
new species. (Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) /;/ I'roc. U. S. Nat. Mus., V, pp. 
6o0-632. (18S3.) 

76. Descriptions of two new species of 
fishes (Myrophis vafer and Chloroscombrus 
orqueta) from Panama. (Joint author with 
D. 8. .Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
V. pp. 645-647. (1883.) 

77. Description of a new eel ( Sidera 
castanea ) from Mazatlan, Mexico. (Joint 
author with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. :\Ius.. V. pp. 647-648. (1883.) 

78. (hi the nomenclature of the genus 
Ophichthys. (Joint author with D. S. Jor- 
dan. I /;) Proc. r. S. Nat. Mus., V, pp. 648- 
(J51. (1883.1 

79. Contributions to North American 
ichthyology, based primarily on the collec- 
tions of the U. S. Nat. Mas.. IV. A synopsis 
of the fishes of North America. (Joint 
author with D. S. Jordan.) In Bull. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., XVI, 1145 p. (1883.) 

80. Notes on the nomenclature of cer- 
tain North American fishes. (Joint author 
with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
:Mus.. VI. pp. 110-111. (1883.) 

81. Description of two new species of 
fishes (Aprion ariomnus and Ophidiinn 
beani) from Pensacola, Florida. (.Joint 
author with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. JNIus., VI. pp. 142-144. (1883.) 

82. A review of the American Carangi- 
na\ (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VI, pp. 188-208. 
(1883). 

83. Note on the genera of Petromyzon- 
tida\ (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VI. p. 208. 
(1883.) 

84. Description of a new .Mura>noid eel 



20-1- 



Gilbert^ 



Bibliography: Alumni 



(Sidera chlevastes ) from the Galapagos 
Islands. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VI, pp. 208-210. 
(1883.) 

85. Description of a new species of 
Rhinobatus (Rhiuobatus glaucostigma ) from 
Mazatlau, Mexico. (.Joint author with D. 
S. Jordan. I In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VI, 
pp. 210-211. (1883.) 

86. A list of fishes collected in the east 
fork of ^V hite River, Indiana, with descrip- 
tions of two new species. //( Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., VII. pp. l;)!:)-20.">. (1884.1 

87. Notes on the fishes of Switz City 
Swamp, Gi'eene county, Indiana. In I'roc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, pp. 20G-210. (1884.) 

88. Descriptions of three new fishes 
from Kansas. In Proc. V. S. Nat. Mus., 
VII, pp. 512-514. (1884.) 

89. Notes on the fishes of Kansas. /;( 
Bull. Washburn Col. Lab. Nat. Hist., I. pp. 
10-lG. (1884.) 

90. A review of the species of the genus 
Calamus. (Joint author with D. J:?. Jordan.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. INIus.. VII, pp. 14-24. 
(1884.) 

91. Descriptions of ten new species of 
fishes from Key West. Florida. (Joint 
author with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., VII, pp. 24-32. (1884.) 

92. Note on Caranx ruber and Caranx 
bartholomsei. (Joint author with D. S. 
Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, 
pp. 32-33. (1884.) 

93. Note on Calamus proridens, a new 
species of Calamus. (Joint author with D. 
S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.. VII. 
p. 150. (1884.) 

94. Description of Scisena sclera, a 
new species of Sciipna from Mazatlan and 
Panama. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, p. 480. 
(1884.) 

95. Second series of notes on the fishes 
of Kansas. In Bull. Washburn Col. Lab. 
Nat. Hist., I, pp. 97-99. (1885.) 



!K!. The fisheries and fishery industries 
of the United States, prepared through the 
cooperation of the Commissioner of Fisher- 
ies and the Superintendent of the Tenth 
Census, by George Brown Goode, Assistant 
Director of the U. S. National Museum, 
and a staff of a.ssociates. Section I. Nat- 
ural history of useful aquatic animals, with 
an atlas of 227 plates. Washington : Gov- 
ernment Printing Oflice, 1884. (Feb., 1885.) 
Pp. 895. (Discussions of fresh-water fishes,, 
chiefly by D. S. Jordan ; of Pacific coast 
fishes, in collaboration with C. H. Gilbert.) 

97. Third series of notes on Kansas 
fishes. /(( Bull. Washburn Col. Lab. Nat. 
Hist., I, pp. 207-211. (1880.) 

98. List of fishes collected in Arkansas,. 
Indian Territory, and Texas, in September, 
1884, with notes and descriptions. (Joint 
author with I>. S. Jordan.) In I'roc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., IX, pp. 1-25. (188*;.) 

99. Descriptions of new nnd little- 
known Etheostomoids. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., X, pp. 47-64. (1887.) 

100. Description of a new species of 
Thalassophryne (Thalassophryne dowi) 
from Punta Arenas and I'anama. (.loint 
author with D. S. Jordan.) /;/ I'roc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., X, p. 388. (1887. ) 

101. Description of a new species of 
Bathymaster from Puget Sound and Alaska. 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XI, p. 554. 
(1888. 1 

102. A list of fishes from a small tribu- 
tary of the Poteau river, Scott county, 
Arkansas. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XI, 
pp. 609-610. (1888.) 

103. The fisheries and fishery interests of 
the United States, by George Brown Goode 
and a staff of associates. Section II. A 
geographical review of the fishery industries 
and fishing cftiTimllilities for the year 1880. 
Pp. 787. Washington, 1887. (Part on fish- 
eries of California, Oregon, and Washington, 
by D. S. Jordan and C. H. Gilbert.) 

104. Notes on the occurrence of Gillich- 



295 



Indiana University 



^Gilbert 



thys y-cauda at t^an Diego, California. //; 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XII, p. 363. (1889.) 

105. Report upon certain investigations 
relating to the planting of oysters in South- 
ern California. In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 
IX, pp. 95-08 ; 3 maps, 34 plates. (1889. 1 

106. lieport of explorations made in Ala- 
bama during 1889, with notes on the fishes 
of the Tennessee, Alabama, and Escambia 
rivers. In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., IX, pp. 
143-159. (1889.) 

107. Scientific results of explorations by 
the U. S. Fish Commission steamer Alba- 
tross. No. XIT. A preliminary report on 
the fishes collected by the steamer Albatross 
on the Pacific coast of North America during 
the year 1889, with descriptions of twelve 
new genera and ninety-two new species. In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.. XIII, pp. 49-126. 
(1890.) 

108. I>escrii)tion of a new species of 
Etheostoma ( E. microviterus ) from Chihua- 
hua, Mexico. //( Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
XIII, pp. 289-290. ( 1890. ) 

109. Scientific results of explorations by 
the U. S. Fi.sh Commission steamer Alba- 
tross. No. XIX. A supplementary list of 
fishes collected at the Galapagos Islands and 
Panama, with descriptions of one new genus 
and three new species. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., XIII, pp. 449-455. (1890.) 

110. Scientific results of explorations by 
the U. S. Fish Commission steamer Alba- 
tross. No. XXI. Descriptions of Apodal 
fishes from the tropical Pacific. In Proc. 
U. S. ?^at. Mus., XIV, pp. 347-352. (1891.) 

111. Scientific results of explorations by 
the U. S. Fish Commission steamer Alba- 
tross. No. XXII. Descriptions of thirty- 
four new species of fishes collected in 1888 
and 1889, principally among the Santa Bar- 
bara Islands and the Gulf of California. In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, pp. 539-566. 
(1891.) 

112. Report on the fishes of the Death 
Valley expedition collected in Southern Cal- 



ifornia and Nevada in 181)1. with descrip- 
tions of new species. //) North American 
Fauna, No. 7, pt. II, pp. 229-234. pi. v-vi. 
(1893.) 

113. Note on the wall-eyed pollack (Pol- 
lachius chalcogrammus fucensis) of Puget 
Sound. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XVI, pp. 315-316. 
(1893.) 

114. A report upon invi^stigations in the 
Cohimbia River Basin, with descriptions of 
four new species. (Joint author with 
Barton AVarren Evermann.) In Bull. U. S. 
Fish Comm., XIV, pp. 169-207, pi. xvi-xxv. 
( 1894. ) Also issued as part of Sen. Misc. 
Doc. 200, Fifty-third Congress, 2d Ses. 

115. Notes on fishes from the basin of the 
Mackenzie River in British America. In 
Bull. U. S. Fish Comm.. XIV, pp. 23-25. 
(1894.) 

116. Description of a new species of 
ribbon-fish. (Trachypterus rex-salmonorum) 
from San Francisco. ( Joint author with D. 
S. Jordan. I In I*roc. California Acad. Sci., 
2d ser.. IV, pp. 144-146. (1894). 

117. List of fi.she.s inhabiting Clear Lake, 
California. (Joint author with D. S. Jor- 
dan.) hi Bull. I'. S. Fish Comm., XIV, pp. 
139-140. (1894.) 

118. The ichthyological collections of the 
steamer Albatross during the years 1890- 
1891. In Rep. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1893, 
pp. 393-476, pi. xx-xxxv. 

119. Report on the fishes dredged in deep 
water near the Hawaiian Islands, with de- 
scriptions and figures of twenty-three new 
species. (Joint author with Frank Cramer.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.. XIX, pp. 403-435, 
pi. xxxv-xlviii. (1897.) 

120. Descriptions of twenty-two new 
species of fishes collected by the steamer 
Albatross of the United States Fish Com- 
mission. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIX, 
pp. 437-457, pi. xlix-lv. (1897.) 

121. The fishes of the Klamath Basin. In 



296 



Griggs ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., XVII, pp. 1-13. 
(1807.) 

122. Notes on a collection of fishe.s from 
the Colorado Basin iu Arizona. (Joint 
author with Norman Bi-shop Scofield.) In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XX. pp. 487-499; 
pi. xxxvi-xxxix. (1898.) 

123. The fishes of Bering Sea. In 'Re- 
port of Fur Seal Investigations, 1896-1897,' 
Part III, sec. xviii, pp. 433-492, pi. xlii- 
Ixxv. (1898.) 

124. On the occurrence of Caulolepi.s 
longidens Gill, on the coast of California. 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XII, pp. .56.j-.566. 
(1899.) 

125. Repoi-t on fishes obtained by the 
steamer Albatross in the vicinity of Santa 
Catalina Island and Monterey Bay. In Rep. 
U. S. Fish Comm. for 1898, pp. 25-29, pi. i-ii. 

126. Results of the Branner-Agassiz ex- 
pedition to Brazil. III. The fishes. In 
Proc. Washington Acad ScL, II, pp. 161-183, 
pi. ix. (1900.) 

127. The fishes of Panama Bay. (.Toint 
author with Edwin Chapiu Starks.) In 
Proc. California Acad. Sci., IV, pp. .304, 
pi. xxxiii. (1904.) 

128. Notes on fishes of the Pacific coast 
of North America. In Proc. California 
Acad. Sci., 1904. 

129. Deep-sea fi.shes of the Hawaiian 
Islands. In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm.. 1904. 



3. Motion of a particle on the helix 
surface. In I'roc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 
1903, pp. 75-79. 



Oliver Edmunds Glenn. A.B. (1902), 
A.M. (1903). Instructor in Mathemat- 
ics, Indiana University, 1902-1903. Now 
Harrison Fellow, University of Penn- 
sylvania. Philadelphia- 

1. The existence theorem ; a compari- 
son of the proofs of Gauss and Cayley. In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. foi' 1903, p. 75. 

2. Method of transvection in the ac- 
tual coefiicients. In Am. Matli. Mo.^ XL, p. 
10. (Mai-ch, 1904.) 



William Exhard Golden, A.B. (1888), 
A.M. (1889). Teacher of English in the 
Polytechnic Preparatory School, Brook- 
lyn, N. Y. 

1. A brief history of the English 
drama. New York, 1890. Pp. 227. 

2. Hearts, a one-act comedy. New 
York, 1901. 



David Kopp Goss, A.B. (1887), Principal 
of the American College, Strassburg, 
Germany. 

1. A review of the American species 
of Hemirhamphus. (Joint author with Seth 
E. Meek.) In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila- 
delphia for 1884, pp. 221-226. 

2. A review of the American species 
of the genus Trachynotus. (Joint author 
with S. E. Meek.) In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. 
Philadelphia for 1884, pp. 121-129. 

3. A review of the flounders and soles 
of America and Europe. (Joint author 
with David Starr Jordan.) In Rep. U. S. 
Fish Comm. for 1886. pp. 225-342 ; 9 plates. 



Edward Howard Griggs, A.B. (1889), 
A.M. (1890). Lecturer, Moutclair, N. J. 

1. The new humanism. Philadelphia, 
1899. Pp. 239. 

2. A book of meditations. Philadel- 
phia, 1902. 



Nathan Kirk Griggs, LL.B. (1867). 
Lincoln, Neb. 

1. The lilies. A collection of sacred 
songs. Chicago. 



2d: 



Indiana University 



[Griggs 



2. Griggs' collection. A collection of 
sacred songs. Chicago. 

3. Voices of the winds series : ( a ) 
Croonings of the winds — 12 lullabies, (b) 
Sighings of the winds — 12 love songs, (c) 
Moanings of the winds — ^12 sorrow songs. 

(d) Rumblings of the winds — 12 bass songs. 

(e) Sportings of the winds — 12 negro songs. 

(f) Windings of the winds — 12 .sundry songs. 
Chicago. 

4. Lyrics of the lariat. Volume of 
poems. Chicago. 

5. Hell's canyon. Illustrated poem. 
Chicago. 



Frank Schmidt Grimsley, A.B. (1899). 
[Milwaukee. 



1. Editor of 'The Arbutus' 
class annual, Indiana University), 
ington, Ind., 1899. Pp. 247. 



( Senior 
Bloom- 



Raymond Lawrence Hall, A.B. (1904). 
Kentlaud, Ind. 

1. Editor of 'The Arbutus' (Senior 
class annual, Indiana University). Bloom- 
iugton, Ind., 1904. Pp. 312. 



3. History of the leisure class. In 
Jour, of Ped. (March, 1900.) 

4. Review of Patten's 'History of Eng- 
lish.' In Jour, of Ped. (March, 1900.) 

5. Review of Conrad's 'American col- 
leges.' In Jour, of I'ed. (March, 1900.) 

6. The neglected principle in civic re- 
form. In Am. Jour. Soc, V, pp. 746-760. 
(May, lyOO.) 

7. Reviews of different authors in Am. 
Jour. Soc. and Jour. Pol. Econ. 

8. Educational aspects of savings. In 
Jour. Pol. Econ. 

9. The place of the service tax in mod- 
ern finance. In Jour. Pol. Econ., VIII, pp. 
303-326. 

10. Savings and savings institutions. 
New York, 1902. Pp. 436. 

11. Savings banks vs. commercial banks. 
In Ann. Am. Acad. Pol. and Soc. Sci., XI, 
pp. 44-53. 



Esther (Allerdice) Harding (Mrs. Wil- 
liam Fletcher Harding), A.B. (1892). 
Died March 12, 1902, at Indianapolis, 
Ind. 



1. Lucindy listens. 
Nicholas, XXVI, p. 551. 



Verse. In St. 
(May, 1899.) 



Claude McDonald Hamilton, A.B. (1898). 
New York City. 



1. Editor of 'The Arbutus' 
class annual, Indiana University). 
ington, Ind., 1898. Pp. 255. 



( Senior 
Bloom- 



James Henry Hamilton, A.M. (1894), 
Ph.D. Head worker, University Set- 
tlement, New York City. 

1. Syracuse water supply. In Munic- 
ipal Affairs, IV, pp. 60-70. (March, 1900.) 

2. School finance. In Jour, of Ped. 
(March, 1900.) 



Caroline Hirst (Brown) Harding (Mrs. 
Samuel Bannister Harding), A.B. 
(1890). Blooming-ton, Ind. 

1. Greek gods, heroes, and men : a 
primer of the mythology and history of the 
Greeks. (Joint author with Samuel B. 
Harding.) Chicago, 1897. Pp. vi, 195. Il- 
lustrated. 

2. The city of the seven hills : a book 
of stories from the history of ancient Rome. 
(Joint author with Samuel B. Harding.) 
Chicago, 1898. Pp. 274. (Revised edition, 
1902, pp. 268.) Illustrated. 



298 



Harwood^ 



Bibliography: Alumni 



Samuel Bannister Harding. A.B. (1890), 
Ph.D. See Faculty list. 



William Fletcher Harding, A.B. (1893), 
Ph.M. Washington, D. C. 

1. State bank of Indiana. In Jour. 
Pol. Econ., lY. pp. 1-3G. (Dec, 1895.) 



Charles Harris, A.B. (1879), Ph.D. Pro- 
fessor of German, Aclelbert College, 
Cleveland, Ohio. 



German composition. Boston, 1890. 

143. 

German lessons. Boston, 1892. Pp. 



1. 

Pp. vi, 
o 

vi, 192. 

3. German reader. New York, 1895. 
Pp. viii, 356. 

4. Wichert's 'An der Majorsecke.' New 
York, 1895. Pp. 41. 

5. Goethe's poems, selected and edited, 
Boston, 1899. Pp. xvii, 286. 

6. Lessing'.s 'Hamburgische Dramatur- 
gie,' abridged and edited. New York, 1901. 
Pp. xl, 356. 

7. Review of Gerhart Hauptmann's 
tragi-comedy, 'Der rote Hahn.' In Nation, 
LXXIII, p. 490. (Dec. 26, 1901.) 

8. Review of Ompteda's novels. In 
Nation. LXXIY, p. 128. (Feb. 13, 1902.) 

9. Review of Hermann Sudermann's 
'Es lebe das Leben.' In Nation, LXXIY, 
p. 169. (Feb. 27, 1902.) 

10. Baedeker and the modern guide- 
book. In Bookman, XYII, p. 495. (July, 
1903.) 

11. Gerhart Hauptmaun. In Mod. 
Lang. Notes, XIX, p. 33. (Feb., 1904.) 



Thomas Legrand H.a.rris, A.B. (1892), 
A.M. (1895). Sheridan, Ind. 

1. The evolution of the college curricu- 



lum in the United States. Indianapolis, 
1S92. (^Magazine article.) 

2. The Trent affair and relations with 
England at the beginning of the Civil War. 
Indianapolis, 1896. Pp. 288. 



Noble Harter, A.B. (1895), A.M. (1896). 
Superintendent of Schools, Warsaw, 
Indiana. 

1. Studies in the physiology and psy- 
chology of the telegraphic language. (Joint 
author with William Lowe Bryan.) In 
Psych. Rev., IV, pp. 27-54. 8 plates. 

2. Studies on the telegraphic lan- 
guage — the acquisition of a hierarchy of 
habits. (Joint author with W. L. Bryan.) 
In Psych. Rev., YI, pp. 345-375 ; 2 plates. 



Samuel Ernest Harwood, A.B. (1876), 
A.M. (1892). Professor of Mathemat- 
ics in Southern Illinois Normal School, 
Carbondale, 111. 

1. Harwood's writing speller. Carbon- 
dale, 111., 1879. 

2. Heredity and the school. In Pub. 
Sch. Jonr.. XIII, p. 260. (Jan., 1894.) 

3. Typical plans for teaching number 
ideas : the idea six. In Pub. Sch. Jour., 
XI Y, p. 151. (Nov., 1894.) 

4. I'lan for teaching number symbols. 
In Pub. Sch. Jour., XI Y. p. 206. (Dec, 
1894.) 

5. Conscious analysis of the learning 
process. In Pub. Sch. Jour., XIV, p. 340. 
(Feb.. 1895.) 

6. Some vital questions in education. 
In School News, 1895-1896. The introduc- 
tion (Oct., 1895). The center of the school 
course (Nov.. 1895). Adjustment of men- 
tal and manual exercises (Dec, 1895). The 
one or the many (Jan., 1896). Sex in 
education (Feb., 1896). Interest and duty 



299 



Indiana University 



\_Harwood 



(March, 1S9G). The child and the race 
(April, 1896). Religion and the school 
(June. 1S9«). The school and the home 
(July. 1890). Shall the school prepare one 
for his calling- or for living? (Sept., 1896.) 

7. Happiness and the school. In In- 
land Educator, II, p. 2.56. (June, 1806.) 

8. Homesick in heaven. In Inland Ed- 
ucator. III. p. 69. (Sept., 1896.) 

9. Closer organization of the [Illinois] 
school system. In School News, 1896. A 
state board of education (Nov.). County 
and township institutes (Dec). The town- 
ship system (Jan.). Examinations and 
certificates ( Feb. ) . 

10. Notes on method in arithmetic. 
Terre Haute, 1897. Pp. 68. 

11. Method in reading. In School 
News, XI, 1898-1899. The outline pre- 
sented (Sept., 1898). The language group 
(Oct., 1898). Purposes in reading (Nov., 
1898). Uses of definitions (Dec, 1898). 
Questionable devices (Jan., 1899). Steps in 
the process (Feb., 1899). A second-grade 
lesson (March, 1899). Classifying reading 
exercises (April, 1899). To be kept in mind 
(June, 1899). 

12. Some relations of form and number. 
In School News. (Jan., 1900.) 

1,3. The attitude of the school toward 
reforms in the English language. In Intelli- 
gence. (Jan., 1903.) 



(story). //( Youth's Companion, LXXVII, 
pp. 1-2. (New Year's number for 1903.) 

4. Bread upon the waters (story). 
Accepted by Youth's Companion. 

.5. The dog sledge mail (story). Ac- 
cepted by Youth's Companion. 

6. Articles on topics in biography and 
American history, about 150,000 words. In 
New International Encyclopaedia. 

7. Tholocco Sam's canoe fight (story). 
Accepted by the Success Co. for a new mag- 
azine, the name of which has not yet been 
announced. 

8. Frederick the Great and the revolted 
thirteen colonies. In Am. Hist. Rev., April, 
1904. 

9. Historical note continuing an ar- 
ticle on a proposed change in the method of 
electing the President, written in 1884 by 
Senator J. B. Doolittle. To appear in the 
Pol. Sci. Quart. 



Thomas J. Headlee. A.B. 1902. 
Rensselaer, Ind. 



Teacher, 



1. Discussion of botany requirements 
as outlined by the college entrance exami- 
nation board of the Middle States and Mary- 
land. In Proc. Central Asso. Math, and 
Sci. Teachers, for Nov., 1903. 

2. Ecology of the mussels of Winona 
Lake. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1904. 
2 plates. 



Paul Leland Haworth, A.B. (1899), 
A.M. (1901). Instructor in History, 
Teachers' College, Columbia University, 
New York City. 

1. The professor's scar (story)- In 
Outing, XXXVI, pp. 161-165. (May, 1900.) 

2. Negro disfranchisement in Louisi- 
ana. In Outlook, LXXI, pp. 16.3-166. 
(May 17, 1902.) 

8. The skee tournament at Ishpeming 



NoRVAL Chase Heironimus, A.B. (1895). 
Principal Central Grammar School, 
Richmond, Indiana. 

1. Type studies in American history 
for grammar grades. Missouri Compromise, 
Richmond, Ind., 1898. Pp. 39. Stamp act, 
Richmond, Ind.. 1899. Pp. .38. Louisiana 
purchase. Richmond, Ind., 1900. Pp. 36. 
Colonial life, Richmond. Ind., 1901. Pp. 60. 



300 



Hooper^ 



Bibliography: Alumni 



Robert IIessler, 
(1893), M.D. 



A.B. (1890), 
Logansport, Ind. 



A.M. 



1. Railroad migrants among Indiana 
plants. In Indiana Farmer, XXIII, No. 34, 
p. 1. (August, 1888.) 

2. Notes on a rare form of brain 
tumor, Psammoma. In Indiana Med. Jour, 
for April, 1892. 

3. The preparation of microscopical 
sections. /;) Indiana Med. Jour, for Jan.. 
1893. 

4. An extreme case of parasitism. In 
Am. Nat., XXVII, pp. 34G-352. (April, 
1893.) 

5. The adventitious plants of Fayette 
county, Ind. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 
for 1893, p. 258. 

6. A case of Norway itch. (The first 
reported American case.) In Medical News, 
Philadelphia, LXII, p. 517. 

7. The flora of lake Cicott and lake 
Maxinkuckee, Ind. In Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 189(5, pp. 116-129. 

8. Thyroid medication. In Indiana 
Med. Jour., XIV, pp. 431-435. (June, 
1896.) 

9. Epilepsy and erysipelas. (The use 
of Erysipelas antitoxin.) In Jour. Am. 
Med. Asso., XXX, p. 1157. (May, 1898.) 

10. Lymphadenoma or Hodgkin's dis- 
ease. //( Indiana Med. Jour, for July, 
1898. 

11. Blastomycetic dermatitis. (The 
fifth known case.) In Indiana Med. Jour., 
XVII, p. 48. (August, 1898.) 

12. INIosquitos and malaria. In Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1900, pp. 74-81. 

13. Featherbeds and colds. In Indiana 
Med. Jour, for August, 1901. 

14. Redreaming dreams. In Psych. 
Rev., VIII, pp. (30(>609. (Nov., 1901.) 

15. The mineral waters of Indiana. In 
Trans. Indiana State Med. Soc. for 1902. p. 
865. 

16. The medicinal properties of Indiana 



mineral waters. //) 2Gth Ann. Rep. Indiana 
State Geologist, p. 159-224. 

17. Cold and 'colds.' //; Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1903. 

18. Myxedema. Notes on two cases. 
In Indiana Med. Jour, for Juue, 1904. 

19. Dust — A neglected factor in the 
production of ill health. /;( Trans. Indiana 
State INIed. A.ssn. for 1904. 



Martin Lvtiier Hoffman, A.B. 
Auburn, Ind. 



(1885), 



1. A review of the American species of 
the genus teuthis. (Joint author with 
Seth E. Meek.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for 1884, pp. 227-231. 



Cyrus Lauron Hooper, Ph.B. (1887), 
A,M. (1888). Instructor in English in 
the North-West Division High School, 
Chicago. 

1. A Cloverdale skeleton. New York, 
1889. Pp. 170. 

2. XXth century Shakespeare. Julius 
Csesar. Edited with an introduction and 
notes. Chicago, 1901. Pp. 153. 

3. XXth century Shakespeare. Mac- 
beth. Edited with an introduction and 
notes. Chicago, 1902. Pp. 155. 

4. XXth century Shakespeare. Ham- 
let. Edited with an introduction and notes. 
Chicago, 1902. Pp. 208. 

5. Gee-boy. Chicago. 1903. Pp. 271. 

6. XXth century Shakespeare. As 
You Like It. Edited with an introduction 
and notes. Chicago, 1904. (In press.) 

7. Lamb's literary motive. Introduc- 
tion to The Village Press's edition de luxe of 
'A dissertation upon roast pig.' Chicago, 
1904. (In press.) 

8. Introduction to The Village Pre.ss's 
edition de luxe of William Morris's 'Hollow 
land.' Chicago, 1904. (In press.) 



301 



Indiana University 



\_Hornbrook 



Adelia Roberts Hornbrook. A.B. (189:!). 
A.M. (1894). Principal of the Uni- 
versity Academy, Chicago. 

1. The pedagogical valno of nnmber 
forms. In Ednc. Rev., Ill, pp. 4(;7-4S0. 
(May, 1893.) 

2. Laboratory methods of teaching 
mathematics in secondary schools. New 
York, 1895. Pp. 16. 

3. Concrete geometry for beginners. 
New York, 1896. Pp. 201. 

4. An experiment in Latin teaching. 
In Education. (Dec, 1896.) 

5. Geometry under the laboratory 
method. In Indiana Sch. Jour., XLII, pp. 
141-147. (March, 1897.) 

6. The laboratory method again. In 
Indiana Sch. Jour., XLII, pp. 512-.516. 
(August, 1897.) 

7. Hornbrook's primary arithmetic. 
New York, 1898. Pp. 252. 

8. Hornbrook's grammar school arith- 
metic. New York, 1900. Pp. 410. 

9. Key to Hornbrook's arithmetics. 
New York, 1901. Pp. 110. 



Jennie E Horning. ,S'ce Mrs. Francis 
Marion Walters. 



Walter Raleigh Houghton, A.B. .(1871), 
A.M. (1873). Principal of the Prepara- 
tory Department, Indiana University, 
1873-1884. Now Principal of High 
School, Connersville, Ind. 

1. A history of American politics. In- 
dianapolis, 1883. Pp. X, 550. 

2. Rules of etiquette and liome culture. 
Chicago, 1884. 

3. The lives of Blaine and Logan. 
Chicago, 1884. 

4. New reversible political map and 
United States map combined. (A conspec- 
tus of the history of political parties and 
the Federal government.) Chicago, 1888. 



Joseph Henry Howard, A.B. (1888), A.M. 
(1890), Ph.D. Assistant Professor of 
Latin, 1894-1901. Now Professor of 
Latin, University of South Dakota, 
Vermillion, S. D. 

1. Case usage in Petronius' satires. 
Leland Stanford Jr. University, 1902. Pp. 
95. 

2. The quantitative reading of Latin 
verse. Chicago, 1898. Pp. 30. 



George Maxwell Howe. A.B. (1894), Ph. 
D. Instructor in German, 1893-1895. 
Now Instructor in German, Cornell Uni- 
versity, Ithaca, N. Y. 

1. The artificial palate. One way of 
making it and of keeping its records. In 
•lour. Eng. and Ger. Philo., V, pp. 77-82. 
(Sept., 1903.1 

2. German prose composition based on 
Storm's 'Immensee.' New York, 1904. Pp. 
vi, 04. 



Elizabeth Green Hughes. A.B. ( 1875 i , 
M.S. (1880). Teacher. Stanford Uni- 
versity, Cal. 

1. A review of the genera and species 
of .Julidinse found in American waters. 

(.Joint author with D. S. Jordan. I In I'roc. 
U- S. Nat. Mus. for 1886, pp. .56-7(1. 

2. A review of the American species of 
the genus Prionotus. (Joint author with 
D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for 1886, pp. 327-338. 

3. A review of the genera Archosargus, 
Lagodon, and Diplodus with definitions of 
related genera. (Joint autnor with C. H. 
Eigenmann.) hi Proc. U. S. Nat. ]Mus. for 
1886. 



302 



Jenkins ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



Oliver Peebles Jenkins, M.S. (1886), 
rh.D. (1889). Professor of Physiology, 
Lelaud Stanford Junior University, 
Stanford Univer.sity, Cal, 

1. Natural science in the elementary 
schools. In Educational Weekly, Indianap- 
olis, IV, Nos. 16, 17. (1885.) 

2. Notes on the fishes of Beaufort Har- 
bor, North Carolina. In Johns Hopkins 
Circulars. V, p. 11. (1885.) 

3. List of fishes collected in Vigo coun- 
ty, Indiana, in 1885 and 1888. In Hoosier 
Naturalist, II, pp. 93-96. (1887.) 

4. Notes on Indiana fishes. (Joint au- 
thor with Barton Warren Evermann.) In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1888, pp. 43-57. 
<1888.) 

5. Ornithology from a railroad train. 
(Joint author witli B. W. Evermann.) In 
Oi-nithologist and Orilogist, XIII, pp. 6.5-70. 

(1888.) 

6. Physiology in the college curricu- 
lum. In Addresses and I*roc. Indiana Col- 
lege Asso., 14th Ann. Sess.. pp. 39-46. 
(1890.) , 

7. Description of eighteen new species 
of fishes from the Gulf of California. (Joint 
author with B. W. Evermann. ) In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mns. for 1888, pp. 137-158. 
(1889.) 

S. Report on a collection of fishes 
made at Guaymas, Souora, jNIexico, with de- 
scriptions of new species. (Joint author 
with B. W. Evermann.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for 1891, pp. 121-165, 17 plates. 
a891.) 

9. The Hopkins Seaside Laboratory. 
In Zoe, IV, No. 1 ; 26 plates. (1893.) 

10. Primai'y lessons in human physiol- 
ogy. Indianapolis, 1896. Pp. 211. 2d ed.. 
rev. 

11. Advanced lessons in human physi- 
ology. Indianapolis, 1896. Pp. 318. 2d ed., 
rev. 



12. Suggestions in nature study in the 
primary grades. Stanford l^ni versify, Cal., 
1896. Pp. 29. 

13. Nature study. In School Report cf 
Oakland. Cal., for 1896-97, pp. 1-44. 

14. The passing of Plato. Address at 
the sixth annual conamencemeut, Leland 
Stanford Junior University, May 26th. 
Stanford University, Cal., 1897. Pp. 23. 

15. Nature study. In School Report of 
Oakland, Cal.. for 1897-98, pp. 15-34. (Sup- 
plement to article in Report of 1896-97.) 

16. Plan of report of subcommittee on 
nature study. In Overland Monthly, XXXI, 
No. 183 : Educational Department, li, No. 9. 
(1898.) 

17. Le.s.'-ons in nature study. (Joint 
author with Vernon Lyman Kellogg.) In 
West. Jour, of Educ. A series of articles 
running through the years 1899-1900. 

18. Lessons in nature study. (Joint 
author with V. L. Kellogg.) San Fran- 
cisco, 1900. Pp. 196. 

19. Description of new species of fishes 
from the Hawaiian Islands belonging to the 
families of Labrid» and Scaridte. In Bull. 
U. S. Fish Comm. for 1899, pp. 45-65, 22 
plates. (August 30, 1900.) 

20. Description of fifteen new species 
of fishes from the Hawaiian Islands. In 
Bull, of the U. S. Fish Comm. for 1899, pp. 
187-404. 16 plates. (June 3, 1901.) 

21. The rate of the nervous impulse in 
certain mollusca. (Joint author with Anton 
Julius Carlson.) In Am. Jour. Physiology, 
VIII, pp. 251-268. (1903.) 

22. Report on collections of fishes made 
in the Hawaiian Islands^ With descriptions 
of new species. In Bull. U. SsFish Comm., 
for 1902, p. 417, 54 plates. (Sept. 23, 
1903.) 

23. The rate of the nervous impulse in 
the ventral cord of certain worms. (Joint 
author with A. J. Carlson.) In Jour. Comp. 
Neurology, XIII, No. 4. (Dec, 1903.) 



30J 



Indiana University 



\_Jenkins 



24. Physiological evidence of the fluid- 
ity of the conducting substance in the pedal 
nerves of the slug, Ariolimax columbianus. 
(Joint author with A. J. Carlson.) In 
Jour, of Comp. Neurology and Psychology. 
(1904.) 

25. Description of a new species cf 
Ranzania from the Hawaiian Islands. In 
Proc. California Acad. Sci., 2d ser., \, pp. 
779-784. 1 plate. 

26. Notes on the fauna of Beaufort, 
North Carolina. The fishes. In Studies 
from the Biological Laboratory, Johns Hop- 
kins Univ., IV, p. 83. 



Fred Bates Johnson, A.B. (1902), Super- 
intendent of Schools, Carlisle, Ind. 

1. Editor of 'The Arbutus' (Senior 
class annual, Indiana University). Bloom- 
ington, Ind., 1902. Pp. 283. 



Manson Ulvain Johnson, A.B. (1890), 
A.M. (1892). Anderson, Ind. 

1. The cotton-seed oil trust. In Lit. 
Rev., July, 1899. 

2. The tariff as viewed from a taxation 
standpoint. Indianapolis, 1891. Pp. 525. 



Newton Carr Johnson, A.B. (1897), A.M. 
(1898). Dean of Normal Department, 
Oakland City College. Oakland City, 
Ind. 

1. Habits of work and methods of 
study of high school pupils in some cities 
in Indiana. In School Review, V, pp. 257- 
277, 11 plates. (May, 1899.) 



Frank Leonard Jones, A.B. (1898). Ex- 
State Superintendent Public Instruc- 
tion, Indianapolis. South Bend, Ind. 

1. 20th biennial report of the Indiana 



State Superintendent of Public Instruction. 
Indianapolis, 1900. Pp. 800. 

2. The rural schools. Indianapolis, 
1900. Pp. 125. 

3. 21st biennial report of the Indiana 
State Superintendent of Public Instruction. 
Indianapolis. 1902. Pp. 870. 



Jessie ( Knight ) Jordan (Mrs. David 
Starr Jordan), A.B. (1890). Stanford 
University, Cal. 

1. Red letter days : The Canyon of the 
Colorado. In Land of Sunshine, IX, p. 12G. 
(1898.) 



Chancey Jvday, A.B. (1896), A.M. 
(3897). Acting Professor of Biology, 
University of Colorado, Boulder. Colo. 

1. Hydrographic map of Turkey Lake, 
Indiana. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 
1895. 

2. The plankton of Turkey Lake. 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1896, 
287-296: 1 map. 

3. The plankton of Winona Lake. 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1902, 
120-133 ; 2 plates. 

4. The diurnal movement of plankton 
Crustacea. In Trans. Wisconsin Acad. Sci., 
Arts, and Letters. (In press.) 

.5. The plankton of Lake Maxinkuckee 
in 1899. In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. (In 
press. ) 



In 
pp. 



In 
pp. 



William Henry Kelly, A.B. (lS94i. Win- 
amac. Ind. 

1. Editor of 'The Arbutus' (Senior 
class annual, Indiana University). Bloom- 
ington, Ind., 1894. Pp. 120. 



304 



Kindle^ 



Bibliography: Alumni 



Oscar Ltkn Kelso, B.S. (1884), A.M. 
(1890). Professor of Mathematics, In- 
diana State Normal School, Terre 
Hav;te, Ind. 

1. Arithmetic for high schools, acad- 
emies and normal schools. New York, 1903, 
Pp. X, 274. 

2. Revision of Cook-Cropsey series of 
arithmetics. (Joint author with Robert J. 
Aley.) New York, 1904. Elementary book, 
pp. xi, 276. Advanced book, pp. xiii, 327. 

3. Some contributions to geometry. In 
Add. and Proc. Indiana College Asso. for 
1900, pp. 29-3G. 

4. The relations of mathematics to 
the sciences in the High School. In Proc. 
State Sci. Teachers' Asso. for 1900, pp. 
62-69. 

5. Some errors in teaching arithmetic. 
In New York Teachers' Monographs. (To 
be published.) 



Clarence Hamilton Kennedy, A.B. 
( 1902 ) , A.M. ( 1903 ) . Scientific Assist- 
ant U. S. Bureau of Fisheries, Wash- 
ington, D. C. 

1. Unilateral coloration with a bilat- 
eral effect. (Joint author with C. H. Ei- 
genmann.) In Science, XIII, pp. 828-830. 
(May, 1901.) 

2. Tne Leptocephalus of the American 
eel and other American Leptocephali. (Joint 
author with C. H. Eigenmann.) In Bull. 
U. S. Fish Comm. for 1901, pp. 81-92. 

3. Variation notes. (Joint author 
with C. H. Eigenmann.) In Biol. Bull., 
lY, pp. 227-230. (April, 1903.) 

4. A list of the dragonflies of Winona 
Lake. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1903, 
pp. 159-164. (1903.) 

5. A new diagnostic character for the 
species of the genus Argia. In Proc. Indi- 
ana Acad. Sci. for 1902, pp. 164-169, 2 
plates. (1903.) 



6. On a collection of fishes from Par- 
aguay, with a synopsis of the American gen- 
era of Cichlids. (Joint author with O. H. 
Eigenmann.) In Proc. Acad. Sci. Phila- 
delphia for 1903, pp. 497-537. (Sept., 1903.) 



Walter McCullough Kern, A.B. (1896). 
Superintendent of Schools, Columbus, 
Neb. 

1. Editor of 'The Nebraska Teacher,' 
published at Lincoln, Neb. 



Edward Martin Kindle, A.B. (1893), 
Ph.D. Assistant Geologist, U. S. Geol. 
Survey. New Haven, Conn. 

1. Geologic literature of Indiana, strat- 
igraphic and economic. (Joint author with 
V. F. Marsters.) In Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1893, pp. 156-191. 

2. The South American cat-fishes be- 
longing to Cornell University. In Ann. N. 
Y. Acad. Sci., VI, pp. 249-256. (1893.) 

3. A note on rock flexure. In Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1894, pp. 49-50. 

4. Dip of the Keokuk rocks at Bloom- 
ington, Indiana. In Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1894, pp. 52-53. 

5. Preliminary list of the birds of 
Brown county, Indiana. Iti Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1894, pp. 68-73. 

6. The whetstone and grindstone rocks 
of Indiana. In 20th Ann. Rept. Indiana 
Dept. of Geol. and Nat. Res. for 1896, pp. 
329-368, with geologic map. 

7. The relation of the fauna of the 
Ithaca group to the faunas of the Portage 
and Chemung. In Bull. Am. Pal., II, No. 
6, pp. 1-54; 1 plate. (1896.) 

8. On some Paleozoic fossils from Baf- 
finland. In Am. Jour. Sci., LII, pp. 455- 
456. (1896.) 

9. Pleistocene fossils from BafEnland 



(21) 



505 



Indiana University 



\_ Kin die 



and Greenland. In Science, N. S., V, pp. 
91-93. (1S97.) 

10. A catalogue of the fossils of Indi- 
ana, accompanied by a bibliography of the 
literature relating to them. In 22d Ann. 
Rept. Indiana Dept. of Geol. and Nat. Res. 
for 1898, pp. 407-514. 

11. The Devonian and Lower Carbon- 
iferous faunas of southern Indiana and cen- 
tral Kentucky. In Bull. Am. Pal., No. 12, 
pp. 1-112. (1889.) 

12. The Devonian fossils and stratigra- 
phy of Indiana. In 25th Ann. Rept. Geol. 
Nat. Res. of Indiana for 1900, pp. 530- 
758 ; 31 plates. 

13. Geological maps of southern Indi- 
ana limestones (Salem sheet and Corydon 
sheet). (Joint author with G. H. Ashley.) 
In 27th Rep. Indiana Geol. Surv. for 1901 
and 1902. 

14. The Niagara rocks of Hamilton 
county, Indiana. In Am. Jour. Sci., XIV, 
pp. 221-224. (July, 1902.) 

15. The Niagara domes of northern In- 
diana. In Am. Jour. Sci., XV, 459-468 ; 4 
plates. (June, 1903.) 

16. The Niagara stratigraphy and pal- 
eontology of northern Indiana. In 28th Ann. 
Rep. Indiana Geol. Surv., 30 plates. (Not 
yet issued.) 

17. The fossil faunas of the Devonian 
and Lower Carboniferous of Virginia, West 
Virginia and Kentucky. (Joint author with 
H. S. Williams.) In Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 
1904. (Not yet published.) 

18. The folio of the Watkins Glen quad- 
rangle. (Joint author with H. S. Wil- 
liams.) In U. S. Geol. Survey. (Not yet 
published.) 



Cyrus Ambrose King, A.B. (1893), Ph.D. 
Instructor in Botany, 1900-1902. Now 
teacher of Botany in the DeWitt Clin- 
ton High School, New York City. 

1. Explosive discharge of antherozoids 



in Conocephalum. In Torreya for April, 
1903, pp. 60-61. 

2. Observations on the cytology of 
Aroiospora pulchra, Thaxter. In Trans. 
Boston Soc. Nat. Hist, for Nov., 1903, pp. 
211-245 ; 5 plates. 



Philip Henry Kirscii, A.B. (1888), A.M. 
(1889), Ph.D. (1893). Died Sept. 8, 
1900, at El Paso, Texas. 

1. Notes on a collection of fishes from 
the Rio Gila at Fort Thomas, Ariz., ob- 
tained by Lieut. W. L. Carpenter, U. S. A. 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1888. 

2. A review of the American species 
of thread-fins (Polynemidae. ) In Ann. New 
York Acad. Nat. Hist, for 1890. 

3. A review of the sturgeons (Aci- 
penseridse) of North America. (Joint au- 
thor with Morton W. Fordice.) In Proc. 
Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia for 1889, pp. 
245-257. 



Otto Paul Klopsch, A.B. (1896). Super- 
intendent of schools, Mascoutah, 111. 

1. Editor of 'The Arbutus' (Senior 
cla.ss annual, Indiana University). Bloom- 
ington, Ind., 1896. Pp. 239. 



Charles Tobias Knipp, A.B. (1894), A.M. 
(1896), Ph.D. Instructor in Physics, 
1893-1900; Assistant Professor, 1900- 
1903, Indiana University. Now Assist- 
ant Professor of Physics, University of 
Illinois, Urbana, 111. 

1. A new form of make and break. 
In Am. Jour. Sci., V, pp. 283-284. (1898.) 

2. Surface tension of water above 100° 
C. In Phys. Rev., XI, pp. 129-154. (Sept., 
1900.) 

3. The use of the bicycle wheel in illus- 
trating the principles of the gyroscope. In 
Phys. Rev., XII, pp. 43-46. (Jan., 1901.) 



306 



Loeb'\ 



Bibliography: Alumni 



4. An automatic temperature regula- 
tor. In Pliys. Rev., XII, pp. 47-49. (Jan., 
1901.) 

5. On the density and surface tension 
of liquid air. In Phys. Rev., XIV, pp. 75- 
82. (Feb., 1902.) 

6. A method for maintaining interme- 
diate temperatures. In Phys. Rev., XV, pp. 
125-126. (August, 1902.) 



Henky Higgins Lane, A.M. (1903). As- 
sistant in Zoology, University of Chi- 
cago, Chicago. 

1. The green heron (Ardea virescens). 
In Birds and Nature, May, 1902. 1 full- 
page plate in color. 

2. The solitary sandpiper (Totanus 
solitarius). In Birds and Nature, Oct., 
1902. 

3. The ovarian structures of the vivi- 
parous blind fishes, Lucifuga and Stygicola. 
In Biol. Bull., VI, pp. 38-54; 2 plates. 
(Dec, 1903.) 



Alexander Downing Lemon, B.S. (1858), 
LL.B. (1859). San Francisco, Cal. 

1. The union of the States must be 
maintained. Bedford, Indiana, 1861. Pp. 
10. 

2. Reconstruction of the States. Bed- 
ford, Indiana, 1868. Pp. VZ. 

3. An address in support of the elec- 
tion of Samuel J. Tilden for President of 
the United States. San Francisco, Cal., 
1876. Pp. 12. 

4. Fourth of July Centennial address. 
San Diego, Cal., 1876. Pp. 10. 

5. Prison reforms, and libraries for 
penal institutions. Phoenix, Ariz., 1883. 
Pp. 8. 

6. An address on the silver question 
and bi-metallism. San Francisco, Cal., 1895. 
Pp. 15. 



William Harbison Lemon, A.B. (1854), 
Ph.D. Lawrence, Kansas. 

1. Evidence of pre-glacial man, in 
Greene county, Indiana. Papers to Smith- 
sonian Inst. (1856.) 

2. The valley of the Ghor, and the 
Noachian deluge. 1859. Pp. 200. 

3. 01am Haba, or the world arrested 
at the theism of the Jews. 1882. Pp. 240. 

4. Gisdubar, the pre-Adamite man. 
1886. Pp. 180. 

5. Bichloride of gold, or the skeleton in 
the closet. 1890. Pp. 200. 

6. Ithuriel, or the legend of Eros ; a 
romance of eschatology. 1903. Pp. 450. 



Jesse Lewis, A.B. (1901). Professor of 
History and Civics, State Normal 
School, Mayville, N. D. 

1. A topical analysis of American his- 
tory and government. Chicago, 1902. Pp. 
185. 

2. The educational value of history. 
In Quar. Bull. State Normal School, May- 
ville, N. D. 



Ernest Hiram Lindley, A.B. (1893), A.M. 
(1894), Ph.D. See Faculty list. 



Clarence Guy Littell, A.B. (1.903). 

1. The birds of Winona Lake (sum- 
mer). In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1902 ; 
reprinted in Indiana Univ. Bull., I, No. 4, 
pp. 41-72; 27 figures (Nov., 1903). 



Isaac Anderson Loeb, A.B. (lS90i, I-L.B. 
Chicago, 111. 

1. The Jewess of the Apocrypha. Chi- 
cago, 1901. 



307 



Indiana University 



iLoeb 



2. Editor of 'The Independent Order 
Free Sons of Israel.' I (1903), II (1904). 
Chicago. 



Robert Edward Lyons, A.B. (1SS9), A.M. 
(1890), Ph.D. See Faculty list. 



Jefferson McAnnelly, LL.B. 
Ft. Collins, Colo. 



(1872), 



1. A guide to administrators, execu- 
tors, and guardians. Fort Collins, Colo., 
1886. Pp. 60. 



Amanda McComb, A.M. (1900). Teacher 
High School, South Bend, lud. 

1. The development of the karyokinetic 
spindle in vegetative cells of higher plants. 
In Bull. Tor. Bot. Club, XXVII, pp. 451- 
459, 2 plates. (August, 1900.) 



William Harrison Mace, A.M. (1889), 
Ph.D. Professor of History, Syracuse 
University, Syracuse, N. Y. 

1. A series of articles in Indiana Sch. 
Jour., Indianapolis, 1888-1890. 

2. A series on method in history. In 
Inter-State Sch. Rev., Danville, 111., 1891- 
1892. 

3. The organization of historical ma- 
terial. In Papers Am. Hist. Asso., V, pp. 
143-161 ; abstract in Ann. Rep. Am. Hist. 
Asso. for 1890, pp. 103-107. (1891.) 

4. Review of G. P. Fisher's 'The colo- 
nial era.' In Sch. Rev. for 1893. 

5. A series of five syllabi on American 
history. Albany, N. Y. 1892-1897. 

6. A working manual of American his- 
tory. Syracuse, 1895. 

7. Method in history for teachers and 
students. Boston, 1897, Pp. xvii, 306. 



S. Des illteru Pitt, Beziehungeu zur 
amerikauischen Revolution. Jena, 1897. 

9. The central defect of the normal 
school. In Educ. Rev., XXI, pp. 132-1.39. 
(Feb., 1901.) 

10. The method of the last course in 
history in the high school. In Jour. Ped. 
for 1901. 

11. Political history in the elementary 
school. In Elementary School Teacher for 
1904. 

12. Graduate work and a school of edu- 
cation. In Michigan Alumnus for 1904. 

13. Review of Frank McMurry's 'Spe- 
cial method in history.' In Educ. Rev., 
XXVII, pp. 203-205. (Feb., 1904.) 



Dudley Odell McGovney, A.B. (1901). 
Cambridge, Mass. 

1. Civil government in the Philippines. 
Chicago, 1904. Pp. xi, 209. 

2. The navigation acts as applied to 
European trade. In Am. Hi.st. Rev., IX, pp. 
725-734. (July, 1904.) 



Charles Leslie McKay, B.S. (1881). 
Drowned April 19, 1883, near Cape 
Constautine, Alaska. 

1. A review of the genera and species 
of the family Centrarchidse, with a descrip- 
tion of one new species. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus. for 1881, pp. 87-93. 



Adah McMahan, A.B. (1889), A.M. 
(1892), ]M.D. Lafayette, Ind. 

1. Membranous ententis. In Trans. 
Indiana State Med. Soc. for 1899, pp. 77-87. 

2. Treatment of infantile convulsions. 
In New York Med. Jour., LXXVl, p. 461. 
(March, 1903.) 



308 



Martin ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



Jerome Fee McNeil, B.S. (18SG). Teach- 
er, Richmond, Ind. 

1. Description of twelve new species 
of Myriapoda, chiefly from Indiana. In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1886. 

2. Revision of the Truxalinse of North 
America. In Proc. Davenport Acad. Sci., 
VI, pp. 179-274; 6 plates. (1897.) 

3. Hopkins-Stanford Galapagos expe- 
dition, IV, Orthoptera. In Proc. Washing- 
ton Acad. Sci., Ill, pp. 487-506. (Nov., 
1901. ) 



Geoege Washington Martin, Ph.D. 
(1892). Professor of Biology, Vander- 
bilt University, Nashville, Tenn. 

1. The organology of Aster and Solid- 
ago. In Bot. Gaz., XVII, p. 5 ; 1 plate. 

2. The embryology of Aster and Solid- 
ago. In Bot. Gaz., XVII, p. 6 ; 1 plate. 

3. The Floridese. Indianapolis, 1894. 
Pp. 3. 

4. Indiana Academy of Science. In 
Indiana Sch. Jour, for Dec, 1895, pp. 66-67. 

5. Biology in secondary schools. Roch- 
ester, 1900. Pp. iii, 8. 

6. The secondary school and prepara- 
tion for citizenship. Nashville, 1901. Pp. 
10. 



William Alexander Parsons Martin, 
A.B. (1846), A.M. (1849) , D.D., LL.D. 
President University of Wuchong, Wu- 
chong, China. 

1. Account of an overland journey 
from Peking to Shanghai made in February 
and March, 1866. In Jour. Roy. Asiat. Soc. 
North China branch, N. S. Ill, p. 26. 
(1866.) 

2. On the style of Chinese epistolary 
composition. In Jour. Roy. Asiat. Soc. 
North China branch, N. S. XI, p. 113. 
(1877.) 



3. Report on the system of public in- 
struction in China. (U. S. Education Bu- 
reau, Circulars of Information, No. 1.) 
Washington, 1877. Pp. 28. 

4. Three systems of the religions of 
China. In New Englander, XXVIII, p. 223. 
(1877.) 

5. Editor of 'The Peking Scientific 
Magazine' (Chinese). 1875-78. 

6. The Chinese : their education, phil- 
osophy and letters. New York, 1881. Pp. 
viii, 319. 

7. Mathematical phj'sics (Chinese). 
1885. 

8. Tonquin ; or the French in Annam. 
In New Englander, XLV, p. 665. (1886.) 

9. The advisability or the reverse of 
endeavoring to convey western knowledge to 
the Chinese through the medium of their 
own language. (Joint author with others.) 
In Jour. Roy. Asiat. Soc. North China 
branch, N. S. XXI, p. 1. (1887.) 

10. The Lusiad : the epic of the opening 
of the east. In New Englander, LIII, p. 
542. (1890.) 

11. Does China menace the world? In 
Forum, X, pp. 433-441. (Dec, 1890.) 

12. As the Chinese see us. In Forum, 
X, pp. 678-688. (Feb., 1891.) 

13. America's duty to China. In John 
H. Barrow's 'The World's Parliament of 
Religions' (Chicago, 1893), II, pp. 1137- 
1144. 

14. The Chinese (Hanleii papers). 1st 
ser., Shanghai, 1880 ; 2d ser., Shanghai and 
London, 1894. 

15. Editor of 'Science Monthly' (Chi- 
nese), 1897-98. 

16. A cycle of Cathay ; or China south 
and north, with personal reminiscences. 
New York, 1896. Pp. 464. 

17. The fall of Peking. In Independ- 
ent, LII, pp. 2419-2421. (Oct. 11, 1900.) 

18. The siege of Peking. In Nat. Geog. 
Mag., XII, p. 53. (Feb., 1901.) 

19. The poetry of the Chinese. In No. 



309 



Indiana University 



[Martin 



Am. Rev., CLXXII, pp. 853-862. (June, 
1901. ) 

20. Li Hung Chang. In Independent, 
LIII, pp. 268G-2GS8. (Nov. 14, 1901.) 

21. The lore of Cathay ; or, the intellect 
of China. New York, 1901. Pp. iv, 480. 

22. History of the classic ages of China. 

23. Les vestiges d'un droit international 
dans I'ancienne Chine. In Revue de Droit 
Internationale. 

24. Natural theology and evidences of 
Christianity (Chinese). Reprinted in nu- 
merous editions in China and Japan. 

25. Natural Philosophy (Chinese). 7 
vols. "This work contained the first formal 
treatise on chemistry and the first regular 
course of physics ever published in the 
Chinese language." 

26. Translations into Chinese of Whea- 
ton's 'International law,' De Marten's 
'Guide diplomatique,' Woolsey's 'Interna- 
tional law,' and Bluntschli's 'Le droit inter- 
national codifie.' 



James Raeiden Meek, A.B. (1897). Prin- 
cipal of High School, Durango, Colo. 

1. Editor of 'The Arbutus' (Senior 
class annual, Indiana University). Bloom- 
ington, Ind., 1897. Pp. 287. 



Seth Eugene Meek, B.S. (1884), M.S. 
(1886), Ph.D. (1891). Assistant Cu- 
rator of Zoology, Field Columbian Mu- 
seum, Chicago. 

1. A review of the species of Gerres 
found in American waters. (Joint author 
with Barton Warren Evermann. ) hi Proc. 
Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia for 1883, pp. 
116-124. 

2. Note on the genus Anguilla. In 
Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1883, p. 430. 

3. A review of the American species 
of Scomberomorus. (Joint author with R. 



G. Newland.) In Proc. Acad. Nat. ScL. 
Philadelphia for 1883, pp. 219-232. 

4. A review of the genus Sphyrsena. 
(Joint author with R. G. Newland.) In 
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia for 
1884, pp. 67-75. 

5. A review of the American species 
of Hemirhamphus. (Joint author with D. 
K. Goss.) In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila- 
delphia for 1884, pp. 221-235. 

6. Notes on a collection of anchovies 
from Havana and Key West, with an ac- 
count of a new species (Stolephorus eury- 
stole) from Woods Hole, Mass. (Joint au- 
thor with Joseph Swain.) In Proc. Acad. 
Nat. Sci. Philadelphia for 1884, pp. 34-46. 

7. A review of the American species 
of the genus Synodus. In Proc. Acad. Nat. 
Sci. Philadelphia for 1884, pp. 130-136. 

8. A review of the American species 
of the genus Trachynotus. (Joint author 
with D. K. Goss.) In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. 
Philadelphia for 1884, pp. 121-129. 

9. Note on the Cuban eel. In Bull. 
U. S. Fish Comm. for 1884, p. 111. 

10. List of fishes collected in the St. 
John's river at Jacksonville, Pla. (Joint 
author with David Starr Jordan.) In Bull. 
U. S. Fish Comm., 18S4, p. 233-237. 

11. Description of Zygonectes zonifer, 
a new species of Zygonectes from Nash- 
ville, Ga. (Joint author with D. S. Jor- 
dan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1884, 
pp. 526-627. 

12. Description of a new species of Hy- 
bopsis (Hybopsis montauus). In Proc. U. 
S. Nat. aius. for 1884, pp. 526-527. 

13. Description of four new species of 
Cyprinidse. (Joint author with D. S. Jor- 
dan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1884, 
pp. 474-477. 

14. Notes on the pipe fishes of Key 
West, Fla., with descriptions of two new 
species. (Joint author with Joseph Swain.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1884, pp. 237- 
239. 



310 



Meek^ 



Bibliography: Alumni 



15. List of fishes collected in Iowa and 
Missouri, in August, 1SS4, with descriptions 
of three new species. (Joint author with 
D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for 18S5, pp. 1-17. 

16. A review of the American species of 
flying fishes. (Joint author with D. S. Jor- 
dan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1SS5, 
pp. 44-67. 

17. A review of the American genera 
and species of Batrachidse. (Joint author 
with E. A. Hall.) hi Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. 
Philadelphia for 1885, pp. 52-62. 

18. A review of the American species of 
the genus Scorpsena. (Joint author with 
R. G. Newland.) In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. 
Phila. for 1885, pp. 394-403. 

19. A review of the genus Esox. (Joint 
author with R. G. Newland.) hi Proc. 
Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia for 1885, pp. 
367-375. 

20. A revision of the American species 
of the genus Gerres. (Joint author with 
B. W. Evermann.) In Proc. Acad. Nat. 
Sci. Philadelphia for 1886, pp. 256-272. 

21. A note on the lamprey of Cayuga 
Lake. In Ann. New York Acad. Sci. for 
1886, pp. 285-289. 

22. Note on Elagatis bipinnulatus. 
(Joint author with C. H. Bollman.) In 
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia for 1889, 
pp. 42-44. 

23. Report on the explorations made in 
Missouri and Arkansas during 1889, with 
an account of the fishes observed in each 
of the river basins examined. In Bull. U. 
S. Fish Comm. for 1889, pp. 113-141. 

24. Note on Ammocoetes branchialis. 
In Am. Nat., XXIII, pp. 640-642. (1890.) 

25. The native food fishes of Iowa. In 
Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. for 1890, pp. 68-76. 

26. Report on the fishes of Iowa based 
on observations and collections made during 
1889, 1890 and 1891. In Bull. U. S. Fish 
Comm. for 1890, pp. 217-248. 



27. The fishes of the Cedar river basin. 
In Iowa Acad. Sci. for 1891, pp. 1-8. 

28. A catalogue of the fishes of Arkan- 
sas. In Ann. Rept. Arkansas State Geol. 
for 1891, pp. 215-276. 

29. A description of Etheostoma pagei. 
In Am. Nat., XXVIII, p. 957. (1894.) 

30. A new Cambarus (Cambarus faxo- 
nii) from Arkansas. In Am. Nat., XXVIII, 
pp. 1042-1043, 1 plate. (1894.) 

31. Report of investigations respecting 
the fishes of Arkansas conducted during 
1891, 1892 and 1893, with a synopsis of 
previous explorations in the same State. In 
Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1894, pp. 67-94. 

32. Notes on the fishes of western Iowa 
and eastern Nebraska. In Bull. U. S. Fish 
Comm. for 1894, pp. 133-138. 

33. Description of a new species of Go- 
biesox (Gobiesox muscarum). (Joint author 
with C. J. Pierson.) In Proc. California 
Acad. Sci. for 1895, pp. 571-573. 

34. A list of fishes and mollusks col- 
lected in Arkansas and the Indian TeiTi- 
tory in 1894. In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. 
for 1895, pp. 341-349. 

35. Salmon investigations in the Co- 
lumbia river basin and elsewhere on the 
Pacific coast in 1896. (Joint author with 
B. W. Evermann.) In Bull. U. S. Fish 
Comm. for 1897, pp. 15-84. 

36. A list of fishes and reptiles obtained 
bj' the Field Columbian Museum East Af- 
rican Expedition to Somali-land in 1896. 
In Field Col. Mus. Pub., Zool. Series, I, pp. 
163-184. (1897.) 

37. Notes on a collection of cold-blooded 
vertebrates from the Olympic mountains. In 
Field Col. Mus. Pub., Zool. Series, I, pp. 
225-236. (1899.) 

38. Notes on a collection of fishes and 
amphibians from Muskoka and Gull lakes. 
In Field Col. Mus. Pub., Zool. Series, I, pp. 
307-311. (1899.) 

39. Contribution to the ichthyology of 



311 



Indiana University 



\_Meek 



Mexico. In Field Col. Mus. Pub., Zool. 
Series III, pp. 63-128, 18 plates. (1902.) 

40. The growth and variation of fishes. 
In Birds and Nature, VIII, pp. 84-89. 
(1900.) 

41. The geological succession of fishes. 
In Birds and Nature, VIII, pp. 133-139. 
(1900.) 

42. The geographical distribution of 
fishes. In Birds and Nature, VIII, pp. 161- 
164. (1900.) 

43. Notes on a collection of cold-blooded 
vertebrates from Ontario. (Joint author 
with H. W. Clark.) In Field Col. Mus. 
Pub., Zool. Series, III, pp. 131-140. (1902.) 

44. Contribution to museum technique. 
In Am. Nat., XXXVI, pp. 53-62. (Jan., 
1902.) 

45. Review of D. S. Jordan and B. W. 
Evermann's 'American game and food 
fishes.' In Am. Nat., XXXVI, pp. 557-558. 
(August, 1903.) 

46. Distribution of fresh-water fishes in 
Mexico. In Am. Nat., XXXVII, pp. 771- 
784. (Nov., 1903.) 

47. The fresh-water fishes of Mexico. 
In Field Col. Mus. Pub., Zool. Series, V, pp. 
1-300. (In press.) 



Oscar Maeion Meyncke, 
Brookville, Ind. 



A.B. (1896). 



1. The flora of Franklin county, Indi- 
ana. In Bulletins Nos. 1-2, Brookville Soc. 
Nat. Hist. 

2. The study of the bird's nest. In 
Teachers' Jour. Also hi Nature Study Mo. 



George Morey Miller, A.B. (1892), A.M. 
Assistant Professor of Rhetoric and 
English Literature, University of Cin- 
cinnati, Cincinnati, Ohio. 

1. The agitation about English. In 
Proc. Mod. Lang. Asso. of Ohio, pp. 46-57. 
(1898-1899.) 



2. The dramatic element in the popu- 
lar ballad. In Univ. Cincinnati Bull., No. 
19, Series II, Vol. II, pp. viii, 35. (1904.) 



John Anthony Miller, A.B. (1890), Ph.D. 
See Faculty list. 



Kate jNIilner. ^S'ee Mrs. Albert Rabb. 



George Elbert Mitchell, A.B. (1898). 
Teacher of Science, High School, Rens- 
selaer, lud. 

1. Note on the aberrant follicles in 
the ovary of Cymatogaster. In Proc. Indi- 
ana Acad. Sci. for 1898, pp. 229-232, 1 
plate. (1899.) 



William J Moenkhaus, A.B. (1894), 
A.M. (1895), Ph.D. See Faculty list. 



Hamilton Byron Moore, A.M. (1901). 
Instructor in English, Indiana Uni- 
versity, 1898-1901 ; Assistant Professor, 
1901-1903. Now Instructor in English, 
Manual Training High School, Indi- 
anapolis. 

1. Dickens's 'The tale of two cities.' 
Edited with introduction and notes. Bos- 
ton, 1901. 

2. Thackeray's 'Henry Esmond.' Ed- 
ited with introduction and notes. Boston, 
1904. 



Walter Piety Morgan, A.INI. (1900). As- 
sistant Professor of Mathematics, Indi- 
ana State Normal School, Teri-e Haute, 
Ind. 

1. Teachers' manual for Cook and 
Cropsey arithmetics. Terre Haute, Ind., 
1902. Pp. 302. 



512 



Newsoni ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



Sarah Pakke MoRKiso2«r, A.B. (1869), A.M. 
(1871). Adjunct Professor of English 
Literature, Indiana University, 1873-75. 
Knightstown, lud. 

1. I'm coming home, song. (Sheet 
music.) St. Louis, 1888. Pp. 5. 

2. A monody to a father's memory. 
Cambridge, Mass., 1891. Pp. 49, 1 plate. 

3. Among ourselves : to a mother's 
memory. Vol. I, Out of North Carolina. 
Pp. 170, 6 plates. Vol. II, Catherine and 
her .surroundings. Pp. 214, 5 plates. Plain- 
field, Ind., 1901 and 1902. 



William LaGbange INIorrison, A.B. 

(1888). Superintendent of Schools, 
Scottsburg, Ind. 

1. A review of the American species 
of Priacanthida? or big-eyes. In Proc. Acad. 
Nat. Sci. Philadelphia for 1889. 



Charles Alfred JNIosemiller, A.B. (1890). 
See Faculty list. 



David Myers Mottier, A.B. (1891), A.M. 
(1892), Ph.D. See Faculty list. 



Arthur LeRoy Murray, A.B. (1901). 
Teacher, Muncie, Ind. 

1. Editor of 'The Arbutus' (Senior 
class annual, Indiana University). Bloom- 
ington, Ind., 1901. Pp. 250. 



Edwin Manson Neher, A.B. (1901), S.B. 
Student, Rush Medical College, Chicago. 

1. The eye of Palaemonetes antrorum. 
In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1902. 



Robert Newland, A.B. (1887). Teacher 
in High School, Denver, Colo. 

1. A review of the American species 
of the genus Scorpsena. (Joint author with 
S. E. Meek.) In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. 
Philadelphia for 1885, pp. 294-403. 

2. A review of the species of the genus 
Esox. (Joint author with S. E. Meek.) 
In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia for 
1885, pp. 52-62. 



Adelaide (Perry) Newsom (Mrs. John 
F. Newsom), A.B. (1894). Stanford 
University, Cal. 

1. Editor of 'The Arbutus' (Senior 
class annual, Indiana University). (Joint 
editor with Clarence Arthur Zaring). Bloom- 
ington, Ind., 1895. Pp. 240. 



John Flesher Newsom, A.B. ( 1891 ) , Ph.D. 
Instructor in Geology, Indiana Univer- 
sity, 1894-96; Assistant Professor, 
1896-99. Now A.ssociate Professor of 
jNIiuing, Leland Stanford Junior Uni- 
versity, Stanford University, Cal. 

1. Syllabus of lectures on economic 
geology. (Joint author with J. C. Branuer.) 
Stanford University, 1895. Pp. 282. 

2. A relief map of Arkansas. In Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci., for 1895, p. 56. 

3. A geological section across south- 
ern Indiana from Hanover to Vincennes. 
In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci., for 1897, pp. 
250-253. 

4. The Knobstone group in the region 
of New Albany, Indiana. In Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1897, pp. 253-256. 

5. The Red River and Clinton mono- 
clines, Arkansas. (Joint author with J. C. 
Branner. ) In Am. Geol., XX, pp. 1-13, 
map, 3 plates. (1897.) 



313 



Indiana University 



W 



ewsom 



6. Notes on the distribution of the 
Knobstone group in Indiana. (Joint author 
with J. A. Price.) In Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1898, pp. 289-297. Map. 

7. The effect of sea barriers upon ulti- 
mate drainage. In Jour, of Geol., VII, pp. 
445-451, 4 figures. (1899.) 

8. Syllabus of economic geology. 
(Joint author with J. C. Branner.) Stan- 
ford University, 1900. 2d ed. Illustrated. 
Pp. viii, 368. 

9. Drainage of southern Indiana. In 
Journal of Geology, X, pp. IGG-lSl, map. 
(1902.) 

10. The phosphate rocks of Arkansas. 
(Joint author with J. C. Bi-anner.) In Bull. 
74 Arkansas Agr. Exp. Sta., 1 plate, 23 
figures. (1902.) 

11. A natural gas explosion near Wal- 
dron, Indiana. In Jour, of Geol., X, pp. 
803-814, 5 figures. (1902.) 

12. A geologic and topographic section 
across southern Indiana, from Hanover to 
Vincennes, with a discussion of the Knob- 
stone group in the State of Indiana. In 
26th Ann. Rep. Indiana Dept. Geol. and 
Nat. Hist. 

13. Review of Davies's 'A treatise on 
metalliferous minerals and mining.' In En- 
gineering and Mining Jour., June 6, 1903, 
pp. 863-864. 



4. Lists of Mollusca of Pike, Winona 
and Center Lakes, Kosciusko county, Ind. 
In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1901. 
(1902.) 



Allen Anson Nobris, A.B. (1902). Super- 
intendent of Schools, Syracuse, Indiana. 

1. Studies in the life of St. Paul. 
(Joint author with Ohas. O. Davis.) 
Blooming-ton, Ind., 1898. 

2. Sabre alguns peixes de Sao Paulo, 
Brazil. (Joint author with C. H. Eigen- 
mann.) In Revista do Museu Paulista, IV, 
pp. 349-362. (1900.) 

3. Maps of Winona, Pike, and Center 
Lakes. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 
1901. (1902.) 



Reuben Edson Nyswander, A.B. (1901). 
Magnetic Observer, U. S. Coast and 
Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C. 

1. A modified W^ehnelt interrupter. 
(Joint author with A. L. Foley.) In Elec- 
trical World and Engineer, XXXIX, pp. 
373-374. (March 1, 1902.) 

2. The lunar diurnal variation as ob- 
tained at the Cheltenham magnetic observ- 
atory from a single complete lunation during 
February, 1903. (Abstract.) (Joint au- 
thor with L. A. Bauer.) In Terrestrial 
Magnetism and Atmospheric Electricity, 
VIII, pp. 144-146. (Sept., 1903.) 



Frederic Austix Ogg, A.M. (1900). In- 
structor in History, 1902-1903. Now 
Graduate student. Harvard University, 
Cambrid;,^e, Mass. 

1. (Jeography from Homer to Colum- 
bus. In Chautauquan, XXXII, pp. 473- 
478. (Feb., 1901.) 

2. Jay's treaty and the slavery inter- 
ests of the United States. In Ann. Rep. 
Am. Hist. Assoc, for 1901, pp. 273-298. 
(1902.) 

3. On the literary decline of history. 
In Dial, XXXII, pp. 233-235. (April 1, 
1902.) 

4. Slav and Saxon. In Chautauquan, 
XXXVI-XXXVII. (Oct., 1902- June, 1903.) 

5. The proportion of city and country 
population in the United States. In World's 
Work, V, pp. 3003-3005. (Jan., 1903.) 

6. Indian money in the New England 
colonies. In New Eng. Mag., XXVII, pp. 
749-760. (Feb., 1903.) 



314 



Rabb^ 



Bibliography: Alumni 



7. German iuterests and tendencies in 
South America. In World's Work, V, pp. 
3168-3170. (March, 1903.) 

8. Coins and coinage in the New Eng- 
land colonies. In New Eng. Mag., XXVIII, 
pp. 739-752. (Aug., 1903.) 

9. The Pope and the Italian nation. 
In Chautauquan, XXXVIII, pp. 14-19. 
(Sept., 1903.) 

10. The opening of the Mississippi : a 
struggle for supremacy in the American in- 
terior. New York, 1904. Pp. viii, 656. 

31. Review of Willis Fletcher Johnson's 
'A century of expansion.' In Dial, XXXVI, 
pp. 47-48. (Jan. 16, 1904.) 

12. Paper money in the New England 
colonies. In New Eng. Mag., XXIX, pp. 
772-783. (Feb., 1904.) 

13. Newspaper satire during the Amer- 
ican Revolution. In New Eng. Mag., XXX, 
pp. 366-376. (May, 1904.) 

14. Review of William Garrott Brown's 
'The foe of compromise, and other essays.' 
In Dial, XXXVI, pp. 323-324. (May 16, 
1904.) 



Roy Hendekson Peering, A.B. (1894), 
A.M. (1896). See Faculty list. 



Edward Charles O'Donnell, A.B. (1890). 
Mitchell, Ind. 

1. The Standard Oil Trust. In States- 
man for 1890. 



Carl Wilhelm Ferdinand Osthaus, A.M. 
(1890). See Faculty list. 



Henry Allison Parsons, LL.B. (1864). 
Kansas City, Kansas. 

1. The rise and fall of nation.s. Kan- 
sas City, 1878. Pp. 28. 

2. Abridged history of Greece from the 
earliest times to the present dynasty. Kan- 
sas City, 1904. Pp. 149. 



Adelaide Perry. See Mrs. John F. New- 
som. 



Burr Harrison Polk, LL.B. (1857). Died 
May 15, 1886, at Lincoln, Neb. 

1. The big American caravan in Eu- 
rope. (Letters republished in book form.) 



James P Porter, A.B. (1898), A.M. 
( 1901 ) . Instructor in Psychology, 
Indiana University, 1900-1902. Now 
Instructor in Psychology, Clark Univer- 
sity, AVorcester, Mass. 

1. The psychology of the English spar- 
row. In Am. Jour. Psych., XV. (April, 
1904.) 



William Henry Pyle, A.B. (1898). Su- 
perintendent City Schools, Vandalia, 
111. 

1. Nature study in the country schools, 
Vandalia, 111., 1901. Pp. 22. 



Kate (Milner) Rabb (Mrs. Albert Rabb), 
A.B. (1886), A.M. (1888). Indianap- 
olis, Ind. 

1. Indiana in fiction. /;( Kate Field's 
Washington for May, 1892. 

2. A Kentucky 'Harnt.' In New York 
Ledger for March 5, 1892. 

3. The whitecaps. In Worthington's 
Mag', for Jan., 1893. 

4. To him who waits. In Interior for 
June 15. 1893. 

5. Bjornson and Ibsen. In Dominion 
Illustrated Mo. for Sept., 1893. 



315 



Indiana University 



iRabb 



6. Mikado tea. In Kate Field's Wash- 
ington for Sept. 27, 1893. 

7. Lias. Ill Worthington's INIag. for 
Nov., 1893. 

8. The things which are Caesar's. In 
Once a Week for March 3, 1894. 

9. A bit of Sevres. In Kate Field's 
Washington for August 29, 1894. 

10. The snub. In Lippincott's Mag. for 
Oct., 1894. 

11. At the institute. In N. Y. Sch. 
Joar. for July 13, 1895. 

12. Claude Matthews. In Leslie's 
Weekly for May 23, 1895. 

13. The destruction of a theory. In 
Kate Field's Washington for Jan. 12, 1895. 

14. National epics. Chicago, 1896. Pp. 
398. 

15. A municipal experiment. In Les- 
lie's Weekly for May 13, 1897. 

10. The pilgrim and the palmer. In In- 
terior for May IG, 1897. 

17. Dido. In Self Culture for April, 
1898. 

18. A club election. In Designer for 
Sept., 1898. 

19. The Boer boy. Philadelphia, 1900. 
Pp. 348. 

20. The romance of a co-ed. In Delin- 
eator for Nov., 1900. 

21. The institute at Glendeane. In De- 
lineator for May, 1901. 

22. A letter from O. W. Holmes. In 
St. Nicholas for March, 1902. 

23. JNIiss Petrie's avocation. In Atlan. 
Mo. for July, 1902. 

24. Hyacinths. In Leslie's Weekly for 
August 7, 1902. 

25. The plateau of fatigue. In Atlan. 
Mo. for Jan., 1903. 

26. By grace of Linnreus. In Delin- 
eator for June, 1903. 

27. The new hunting. In Atlan. Mo. 
for Jan., 1904. 



RoLLA Roy Ramsey, A.B. (1895), A.M. 
(1898), Ph.D. See Faculty list. 



Richard Ratiibun, M.S. (1883), D.Sc. 
Assistant Secretary of the Smithsonian 
Institution in charge of the U. S. Na- 
tional Museum. Washington, D. C. 

1. On the Devonian Brachiopoda of 
Erere, Province of Para, Brazil. I71 Bull. 
Buffalo Soc. of Nat. Sci. for 1874, I, No. 4, 
pp. 236-261, plates viii-x. 

2. Morgan expedition, 1870, Chas. 
Fred. Hartt, in charge. Preliminary report 
on the Cretaceous lamellibranchs collected 
in the vicinity of Pernambuco, Brazil. In 
Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist, for 1874, XVII, 
pp. 241-256. 

3. The geological commission of Brazil. 
Additions to the Echinoid fauna of Brazil. 
In Amer. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 3d series, XV, 
pp. S2-S4. (1878.) 

4. The Devonian Brachiopoda of the 
Province of Para, Brazil. In Proc. Boston 
Soc. Nat. Hist, for 1878, XX, pp. 14-39. 

5. Notes on the coral reefs of the 
Island of Itaparica, Bahia, and of Parahyba 
do Norte. In Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist, 
for 1878, XX, pp. 39-41. 

6. Observacoes sobre a Geologia as- 
pecto do Ilha de Itaparica, na Bahia de 
Todos OS Santos. In Archivos do Museu 
Nacional do Rio de Janeiro, III, pp. 159- 
183. (1878.) 

7. Sketch of Professor C. F. Hartt. In 
Pop. Sci. Mo., XIII, pp. 231-235, with por- 
trait as frontispiece. (June, 1878.) 

8. Sketch of the life and scientific work 
of Prof. Charles Fred. Hartt. In Proc. Bos- 
ton Soc. Nat. Hist, for 1878, XIX, pp. 338- 
364. Reprinted. New Haven, 1879. Pp. 
38. 

9. A list of the Brazilian echinoderms, 
with notes on their distribution, etc. In 



316 



Rath bun ^ 



Bibliography: Alumni 



Trans. Connecticut Acad, of Arts and 
Sciences for 1879, V, pp. 139-158. 

10. List of marine invertebrata from 
the New England coast, distributed by the 
United States Commission of Fish and Fish- 
eries. Series I. (Distributed in fifty sets, 
put up by Mr. Richard Rathbun, under the 
direction of Prof. A. E. Yerrill. 1879.) In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1879, II, pp. 227- 
232. 

11. List of the dredging stations of the 
United States Fish Commission from 1871 
to 1879, inclusive, with temperature and 
other observations. Arranged for publica- 
tion by Sanderson Smith and Richard Rath- 
bun. In Ann. Rep. Commissioner of Fish 
and Fisheries for 1879, pp. 1-43. 

12. Prof. Hartt on the Brazilian sand- 
stone reefs. In Am. Nat., XIII, pp. 347- 
858. (June, 1879.) 

13. Review of O. A. Derby's 'The geol- 
ogy of the Lower Amazonas.' In Am. Jour, 
of Sci. and Arts, 3d series, XVII, pp. 464- 
468. (June, 1879.) 

14. Brazilian corals and coral reefs. In 
Am. Nat., XIII, pp. 539-551, one text figure. 
(Sept., 1879.) 

15. Review of O. A. Derby's 'The geol- 
ogy of the Diamantiferous region of the 
Province of Parana, Brazil.' (Proc. Ameri- 
can Phil. Soc, May 16, 1879.) In Am. Jour, 
of Sci. and Arts, 3d series, XVIII, pp. 310, 
311. (Oct., 1879.) 

16. The littoral marine fauna of Pro- 
vincetown. Cape Cod, Massachusetts. In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1880, III, pp. 
116-133. 

17. List of marine invertebrates, mainly 
from the New England coast, distributed by 
the United States National Museum. Series 
II. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1881, IV, 
pp. 298-303. 

18. List of marine invertebrates from 
the New England coast, distributed by the 
United States National Museum. Series 



III. Educational Series. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for 1881, IV, pp. 304-307. 

19. The giant squid. In St. Nicholas, 
VIII, pp. 266-270, 5 plates. (Feb., 1881.) 

20. Dredging stations of the United 
States Fish Commission Steamer Fish 
Hawk, Lieut. Z. L. Tanner commanding, for 
1880, 1881, and 1882, with temperature and 
other observations. In Bull. U. S. Fish 
Comm. for 1882, II, pp. 119-131. 

21. Notes on the shrimp and prawn 
fisheries of the United States. In Bull. U. 
S. Fish Comm. for 1882, II, pp. 139-152. 

22. The American initiative in methods 
of deep-sea dredging. In Science, IV, pp. 
54-57. (1884.) 

23. American appliances for deep-sea 
investigation. In Science, IV, pp. 146-151, 
225-229, 400-404, with numerous text illus- 
trations. (1884.) 

24. Annotated list of the described 
species of parasitic Copepoda (Siphonos- 
toma) from American waters contained in 
the United States National Museum. In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1884, VII, pp. 
483-492. 

25. Collection of economic crustaceans, 
worms, Echinoderms and sponges. (Great 
international fisheries exhibition, London, 
1883; exhibit of U. S. of America.) In 
Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1884, No. 27, pp. 
107-137. 

26. Descriptive catalogue of the collec- 
tion illustrating the scientific investigation 
of the sea and fresh waters. (Great inter- 
national fisheries exhibition, London, 1883 ; 
exhibit of U. S. of America.) In Bull. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for 1884, No. 27, pp. 511-622. 

27. Notes on the decrease of lobsters. 
In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1884, IV, pp. 
421-426. 

28. Crustaceans, worms, radiates and 
sponges. In The fisheries and fishery indus- 
tries of the United States, prepared through 
the co-operation of the Commissioner of 
Fisheries and the Superintendent of the 



317 



Indiana University 



\^Rathbun 



Tenth Census by George Brown Goode, As- 
sistant Director of the U. S. National Muse- 
um, and a staff of associates. Section I. 
Natural history of aquatic animals. Part V, 
pp. 759-850, plates cclx-cclxxvii. Washing- 
ton, Government Printing Office, 1884. 

29. Reports on the Department of Ma- 
rine Invertebrates in the U. S. National 
Museum for years 1883-1892, inclusive. By 
Richard Rathbun, curator. In Annual Re- 
ports of the Board of Regents of the Smith- 
sonian Institution, showing the operations, 
expenditures and condition of the Institution 
for the several years. Washington, Govern- 
ment Printing Office, various dates. 

30. Report upon the Echini collected by 
the United States Fish Commission Steamer 
Albatross, in the Caribbean Sea and Gulf of 
Mexico, January to May, 1884. In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1885, VIII, pp. 83-89. 

31. Report upon the Echini collected by 
the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer Alba- 
tross in the Gulf of Mexico from January to 
March, 1885. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
1885, VIII, pp. 606-620. 

32. Notice of a collection of stalked 
crinoids made by the Steamer Albatross in 
the Gulf of Mexico and Caribbean Sea, 1884 
and 1885. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
1885, VIII, pp. 628-635. 

33. Catalogue of the collection of recent 
Echini in the United States National Muse- 
um (corrected to July 1, 1886). In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1886, IX, pp. 255-293. 

34. Descriptions of parasitic copepods 
belonging to the genera Pandarus and 
Chondracanthus. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for 1886, IX, pp. 310-324, plates v-xi. 

35. Notes on lobster culture. In Bull. 
U. S. Fish Comm. for 1886, VI, pp. 17-32. 

36. Catalogue of the species of corals 
belonging to the genus Madrepora, contained 
in the United States National Museum. In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1887, X, pp. 10-19. 

37. Annotated catalogue of the species 
of Porites and Svuftra^a in the United 



States National Museum, with a description 
of a new species of Porites. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for 1887, X, pp. 354-366, plates 
xv-xix. 

38. Descriptions of the species of Heli- 
aster (a genus of starfishes) represented in 
the U. S. National Museum. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for 1887, X, pp. 440-449, plates 
xxiii-xxvi. 

39. Descriptions of new species of para- 
sitic copepods, belonging to the genera Tre- 
bius, Perissopus, and Lernanthropus. In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1887, X, pp. 559- 
571, plates xxix-xxxv. 

40. The fishing grounds of North Amer- 
ica. Edited by Richard Rathbun. In The 
fisheries and fishery industries of the United 
States, prepared through the co-operation of 
the Commissioner of Fisheries and the Su- 
perintendent of the Tenth Census by George 
Brown Goode, Assistant Secretary of the 
Smithsonian Institution, and a staff of as- 
sociates. Section III, pp. vii-xviii, 5-154, 
49 charts. Washington, Government Print- 
ing Office, 1887. 

41. Ocean temperatures of the Eastern 
coast of the United States, with thirty-two 
charts. In The fisheries and fishery indus- 
tries of the United States, prepared through 
the co-operation of the Commissioner of 
Fisheries and the Superintendent of the 
Tenth Census by George Brown Goode, As- 
sistant Secretary of the Smithsonian Insti- 
tution, and a staff of associates. Section III, 
pp. 155-238, 32 plates. Washington, Gov- 
ernment Printing Office, 1887. 

42. The crab, lobster, crayfish, rock lob- 
ster, shrimp and prawn fisheries. In The 
fisheries and fishery industries of the United 
States, prepared through the co-operation of 
the Commissioner of Fisheries and the Su- 
perintendent of the Tenth Census by 
George Brown Goode, Assistant Secretary 
of the Smith.sonian Institution, and a staff 
of associates. Section V. History and 
methods of the fisheries. II. Part XXI, pp. 



318 



Reagan ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



627-841, plates ccxlvi-cclv. Washington, 
Government Printing Office, 1887. 

43. Results of investigations by the 
schooner Grampus on the Southern mack- 
erel grounds in the spring of 1887. (Joint 
author with D. E. Collins and T. H. Bean.) 
In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1887, VII, 
pp. 217-267. 

44. The transplanting of lobsters to the 
Pacific Coast of the United States. In Bull. 
U. S. Fish Comm. for 1888, VIII, pp. 453- 
472, plate Ixxi. 

45. Reports upon the inquiry respecting 
food fishes and the fishing grounds. In 
Ann. Reports TJ, S. Commission of Fish and 
Fisheries. Reports of the Commissioner for 
years 1888-1889, inclusive. Washington, 
Government Printing Office, various dates. 

46. The United States Fish Commission. 
Some of its work. In Century Mag., XLIII, 
pp. 679-697, 19 text figures. (1892.) 

47. Jerome Henry Kidder. In Bull. 
Philos. Soc. of Washington, XI, pp. 480-488. 
(1892.) 

48. Report of the joint commission of 
the United States and Great Britain relative 
to the preservation of the fisheries in waters 
contiguous to the United States and Canada, 
under agreement of December 6, 1892, by 
Richard Rathbun, representative on behalf 
of the United States, and William Wakeham, 
representative on behalf of Great Britain. 
Transmitted to the Congress of the United 
States by the President, under date of Feb- 
ruary 24, 1897. Washington, D. C. Gov- 
ernment Printing Office, 1897, pp. 178. 

49. A review of the fisheries in the con- 
tiguous waters of the State of Washington 
and British Columbia. In Report of the U. 
S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries for 
1899, pp. 251-350, plates viii-xvi. 

50. Reports upon the condition and pro- 
gress of the U. S. National Museum during 
the years ending June 30, 1899, 1900, 1901, 
and 1902, by Richard Rathbun, Assistant 



Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, in 
charge of the U. S. National Museum. In 
Annual Reports of the Board of Regents of 
the Smithsonian Institution, showing the 
operations, expenditures and condition of the 
Institution for the years ending June 30, 
1899, 1900, 1901, and 1902. Reports of the 
U. S. National Museum. Washington. Gov- 
ernment Printing Office, various dates. 



William A Rawles, A.B. (1884), A.M. 

(1895), Ph.D. S-ee Faculty list. 



Albert B Reagan, A.M. (1903). Teacher, 
Indian Service. 

1. Jamez vocabulary. In Rep. U. S. 
Bureau Ethnology. Pp. 14. 

2. Grammar treatise of the Jamez lan- 
guage. In Rep. U. S. Bureau Ethnology. 
Pp. IS. 

3. Jamez — open and secret. In Rep. 
U. S. Bureau Ethnology. Pp. 60, 22 plates. 

4. The Apache pole game. In Rep. 
U. S. Bureau Ethnology ; also in Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1902. Pp. 14; 26 
plates. 

5. The Apache Indians, their manners, 
customs, etc. In Rep. U. S. Bureau Ethnol- 
ogy, pp. 120, 40 plates. 

6. The Jamez-Albuquerque region, N. 
M. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1902 ; 
also in Am. Geol., Feb., 1903. Pp. 45, 8 
plates. 

7. The Jamez coal fields. In Proc. In- 
diana Acad. Sci. for 1902. Pp. 3. 

8. The Apache stick game. In Rep. U. 
S. Bureau Ethnology ; also in Proc. Indiana 
Acad, Sci. for 1903. 

9. Age of the lava flows of the plateau 
region. In Am. Geol., XXXII, pp. 170-177. 
(Sept., 1903.) 

10. Geology of the Fort Apache region, 



319 



Indiana University 



[Reagan 



Arizona. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 
1903 ; also in Am. Geol., XXXII, pp. 295- 
358, 5 plates. (Nov., 1903.) 

11. Age of the Aubrey limestone. In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1903. Pp. 5. 

12. The fossils of the Upper Red Wall 
of Arizona, compared with those of the Kan- 
sas coal-measures. In Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1903. Pp. 3. 

13. Some fossils from the Upper Red 
Wall of Arizona. In Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1903. Pp. 14, 1 plate. 

14. Geology of Monroe county, Indiana, 
North of Latitude of Bloomington. In Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1903. Pp. 20. 

15. The Apache medicine disk. In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1903 ; in Proc. 
A. A. A. S. for 1903. Pp. 2, 1 plate. 

16. Some paintings from one of the 
Estufas at Jamez, N. M. In Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1903 ; also in Proc. A. A. A. 
S. for 1903. Pp. 2, 6 plates. 



Herbert Gilson Reddick, A.B. (1SS7), 
A.M. (1898). Indianapolis, Ind. 

1. The snakes of Turkey Lake. In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1895, pp. 261- 
262. 



William Allan Reed, A.P>. (1898). Gov- 
ernor of Lepanto-Bontoc, P. I. 

1. The Negrito-s of Zambales. Manila, 
1904. Pp. xii, 65 ; 80 plates. 



Ernest William Rettger, A.B. (1893), 
Ph.D. Instructor in Mathematics, Indi- 
ana University, 1898-1900. Now Pro- 
fessor of Mathematics, Missouri State 
Normal School, Warrensburg, IMo. 

1. Note on the projective group. In 



Proc. Am. Acad. Sci. for 1898, XXXIII, pp. 
491-499. 

2. On Lie's theory of continuous 
groups. In Am. Jour. Math, for 1899. 



Leo Fredekick Rettger, A.B. (1896), A.M. 
(1897), Ph.D. Instructor in charge of 
Bacteriology, Yale University, New 
Haven, Conn. 

1. Septicaemia in young chickerus. In 
New York Med. Jour., May, 1900, p. 803, 
and Feb., 1901, p. 267. 

2. The liberation of volatile sulphide 
from milk on heating. In Am. Jour. 
Physiol., VI, p. 450. (1902.) 

3. The formation of film on heated 
milk. In Am. Jour. Physiol., VII, p. 325. 

(1902.) 

4. Experimental observations on pan- 
creatic digestion and the spleen. In Am. 
Jour. Physiol., VII, p. 387. (1902.) 

5. An experimental study of the chem- 
ical products of bacillus coli communis and 
bacillus lactis aerogennes. In Am. Jour. 
Physiol., VIII, p. 284. (1903.) 

6. Mucin as a bacterial product. In 
Jour. Med. Research, X, p. 101. (1903.) 

7. On the spore germination of bacil- 
lus subtilis and bacillus megatherium. In 
Centralbl. fiir Bakt. Par. und Infek., 
XXXIII. (1903.) 

8. A contribution to the study of 
pathogenic yeasts. In Centralbl. fiir Bakt. 
Par. und Infek. (1904.) (In press.) 



Bessie (Busuing) Ridgeley (Mrs. Doug- 
las Clay Ridgeley), A.B. (1893). 

1. Annelids of Turkey Lake. In Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1895, p. 241. 



320 



Ridgway ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



Douglas Clay Ridgeley, A.B. (1893). 
Professor of Geography, Illinois State 
Normal University. 

1. A preliminary report on the physical 
features of Turkey Lake, with hydrographic 
map. (Joint author with J. P. Dolan and 
Chancey Juday.) In Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1895, pp. 216-239. 

2. The school excursion and the school 
museum as aids in the teaching of geography. 
In Normal Sch. Quar., Series 2, No. 11, pp. 
1-16. 

3. Alexis Everett Frye's 'Grammar 
school geography.' In Jour, of Geography, 
I, pp. 341-342. (Sept., 1902.) 



Robert KiDGWAY, M.S. (1884). Curator of 
Birds, U. S. National Museum, Brook- 
land, D. C. 

1. Tlie belted kingfisher again. In Am. 
Nat., Ill, pp. 53-54. (March, 1869.) 

2. Notices of certain obscurely known 
species of American birds. In Proc. Acad. 
Nat. Sci. Phila. for 1869, XXI, pp. 125-135. 

3. A true story of a pet bird. In Am. 
Nat., Ill, pp. 309-312. (August, 1869.) 

4. A new classification of the North 
American Falconidse, with descriptions of 
three new species. In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. 
Phila. for 1870, XXII, pp. 138-150. 

5. Relationship of the American white- 
fronted owl. In Am. Nat.. VI, pp. 283-285. 
(May, 1872.) 

.6. New birds iu southern Illinois. In 
Am. Nat., YI, pp. 430-431. (July, 1872.) 

7. On the occurrence of a near rela- 
tion of Aegiothus flavirostris, at Waltham, 
Mass. In Am. Nat., VI, pp. 433-434. (July, 
1872.) 

8. Ou the occurrence of Setophaga 
picta in Arizona. In Am. Nat., VI, p. 436. 
(July, 1872.) 

9. Notes on the vegetation of the lower 



Wabash valley. I. The forests of the bot- 
tom lands. In Am. Nat., VI, pp. 658-665. 
(Nov., 1872.) 

10. Notes on the vegetation of the lower 
Wabash valley. II, Peculiar features of 
the bottom lands. In Am. Nat., VI, pp. 724- 
732. (Dec, 1872.) 

11. On the relation between color and 
geographical distribution in birds, as exhib- 
ited in melanism and hyperchromism. In 
Am. Jour. Sci., IV, pp. 454-460 (Dec, 
1872) ; V, pp. 39-44 (Jan., 1873). 

12. Notes on the vegetation of the lower 
Wabash valley. III. The woods and 
prairies of the upland portions. In Am. Nat., 
VII, pp. 154-157. (March, 1873.) 

13. Descriptions of the type specimen of 
Pyranga roseogularis Cabot. In Ibis, III, p. 
126; 3 plates. (April, 1873.) 

14. The prairie birds of southern Illi- 
nois. In Am. Nat., A' II, pp. 105-203. 
(April, 1873.) 

15. Description of Centronyx ochrui-eph- 
alus Aiken. In Am. Nat., Vli, p. 237. 
(April, 1873.) 

16. The relation between the color and 
geographical distribution of birds. In Am. 
Nat., VII, pp. 548-555. (Sept., 1873.) 

17. On some new forms of American 
birds. //; Am. Nat., VII, pp. 602-619. 
(Oct., 1873.) 

18. Notes on the bird fauna of the Salt 
Lake valley and the adjacent portion of the 
Wasatch Mountains. In Bull. Essex Inst, 
for Nov., 1873, V. pp. 168-173. 

19. The birds of Colorado. In Bull. 
Essex Inst, for Nov., 1873, V, pp. 174-195. 

20. On some new forms of American 
birds. In Bull. Essex Inst, for Dec, 1873, 
V, pp. 194-201. 

21. Catalogue of the ornithological col- 
lection in the Museum of the Boston So- 
ciety of Natural History. Part IL Falcon- 
idfe. In Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist, for 
Dec, 1873, XVI, pp. 43-72. 



(22) 



521 



Indiana University 



iRidgway 



22. Revision of the Falconine genera 
Micrastun, Geranospiza and Rupornis, and 
the Strigine genus Glaucidium. In Proc. 
Boston Soc. Nat. Hist, for Dec, 1873, XVI, 
pp. 7.3-106. 

2.J. The grouse and quails of North 
America, discussed in relation to their varia- 
tion with habitat. In Forest and Stream, 
I. pp. 289-200. (Dec, 1873.) 

24. A hi.'^tory of North American birds. 
(.Joint author with S. F. Baird and T. M. 
Brewer.) Boston, 1874. Vol. I, pp. i-xxvii, 
1-596 ; 6 cuts : 26 plates. Vol. II, pp. 1-590 ; 
6 cuts; 29 plates. Vol. Ill, pp. l-,560 ; 1 
cut : 7 plates. 

25. Letter to the editor of Forest and 
►Stream concerning the question, argued pro 
and con by various correspondents, as to 
whether snakes hiss. In Forest and Stream, 
I, p. 327. (Jan., 1874.) 

26. The nomenclature of American game 
birds. In Forest and Stream, III, pp. 210- 
211. 226-227. (Jan., 1874.) 

27. Catalogue of the birds ascertained Ko 
occur in Illinois. In Ann. Lye. Nat. Hist., 
New York, for January, 1874, pp. 364-394. 

28. Notes upon American water birds. 
In Am. Nat., VIII, pp. 108-111. (Feb., 
1S74.) 

29. Why and how does the ruffed grouse 
drum? In American Sportsman, III, p. 322. 
(Feb.. 1874.) 

30. The lower Wabash valley, consid- 
ered in its relation to the faunal districts of 
the eastern region of North America ; with 
a synopsis of its avian fauna. In Proc. 
Boston Soc. Nat. Hist, for 1874, XVI, pp. 
304-332. 

31. Description of Hj^drochelidon cu- 
coprera, from a specimen taken at Lake 
Koshkonong, Wisconsin. In Am. Nat., VIII, 
p. 189. (March, 1874.) 

•32. On local variations in the notes and 
nesting habits of birds. In Am. Nat., VIII, 
pp. 197-201. (April, 1874.) 



33. Two rare owls from Arizona. In 
Am. Nat., VIII, pp. 239-240. (April, 1874. j 

34. A remarkable peculiarity of Centro- 
cercus urophasianus. In Am. Nat., VIII. 
p. 240. (April, 1874.) 

35. The dodo. In Forest and Stream. 
II, p. 244. (May, 1874.) 

36. Notice of a species of tern new to 
the Atlantic coast of North America. In 
Am. Nat, VIII, p. 433. (July, 1874.) 

37. Birds now to the North American 
fauna. In Am. Nat., VIII, pp. 434-435." 
(July, 1874.) 

38. Discovery of a burrowing owl in 
Florida. In Am. Sportsman, IV, p. 216; 1 
plate. (July, 1874.) 

39. Description of a new bird from 
Colorado. In Am. Sportsman, IV, p. 241. 
(July, 1874.) 

40. Opinion (requested bj' editor) as to 
question whether the excessive abundance 
of grasshoppers in Kansas, etc., has any con- 
nection with the decrease in number of game 
birds in the same districts. In Am. Sports- 
man, IV, p. 249. (.July, 1874.) 

41. Story of a wild goose. In Am. 
Sportsman, IV, pp. 258-259. (July, 1874.) 

42. An unusually large wild goose. In 
Am. Sportsman, IV, p. 274. (August, 
1874.) 

43. Breeding ground of white pelicans 
at Pyramid Lake, Nevada. In Am. Sports- 
man, IV, p. 289. (August, 1874.) 

44. Game birds aud grasshoppers. A 
reply to Vix. In Am. Sportsman, IV, p. 
356. (Sept., 1874.) 

45. Concerning a 'strange bird'" de- 
scribed by a correspondent in a preceding 
number. In Forest and Stream, III, p. 85. 
(Sept., 1874.) 

46. The snow goose. In Am. Nat.. 
VIII, pp. 636-637. (Oct., 1874.) 

47. List of birds observed at various 
localities contiguous to the Central Pacific 
Railroad, from Sacramento, California to 



322 



Ridgway ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



Salt Lake Valley, Utah. In Bull. Essex 
Inst, for Oct., 1874, VI, pp. 1G9-174 ; Jan., 
1875. VII, pp. 10-40. 

48. A contribution to the sparrow war. 
In Am. Sportsman, III, p. 161. (Dec, 
1874.) 

49. Concerning the so-called English 
sparrow. Passer domesticus. In Forest and 
Stream, III, p. 309. (Dec., 1874.) 

50. Note on Sterna longipennis, Nord- 
mann. In Am. Nat., IX, pp. 54-55. (Jan., 
1875. ) 

51. A heronry in the Wabash bottoms. 
In Am. Sportsman, V, pp. 312-313. (Feb., 
1875. ) 

52. Big trees. In Am. Sportsman, V, 
pp. 321-322; 337; 353-354; 367-370. (Feb. 
20 to March 13, inc., 1875.) 

53. Snow birds and little owls. In Am. 
Sportsman, V, p. 393. (March, 1875.) 

54. On Nisus cooperi (Bonaparte) and 
N. gundlachi (Lawrence). In Proc. Acad. 
Nat. Sci. Phila. for 1875, pp. 78-88. 

55. On the Buteonine subgenus Craxi- 
rex Gould. In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 
for 1875, pp. 89-119. 

.56. More about the Florida burrowing 
owl. In Rod and Gim, VI, p. 7. (April, 
1875.) 

57. Notice of a very rare hawk. In 
Rod and Gun, VI, p. 65. (May, 1875.) 

58. A monograph of the genus Leucos- 
ticte. or gray-crowned purple finches. In 
Bull. U. S. Geol. and Geog. Surv. Terr, for 
May. 1875. No. 2, 2d series, pp. 51-82. 

.59. Outlines of a natural arrangement 
of the FalconidjB. (Read before the Philo- 
sophical Society of Washington, April, 
1875.) In Bull. U. S. Geol. and Geog. Surv. 
Terr, for June, 1875, No. 4, 2d serie.s, pp. 
1-17, plates xi-xviii. 

60. Nesting of the worm-eating warbler. 
In Forest and Stream, I, pp. 10-12. (July, 
1875.) 

f\l. The sparrow hawk or American 



kestril. /h Rod and Gun, V 1, p. 109. (July, 
1875.) 

62. Description of a new wren from 
Florida. In Am. Nat., IX, p. 469. 
(August, 1875.) 

63. First impressions of the bird fauna 
of California, and general remarks on west- 
ern ornithology. In Sci. Mon., I, pp. 2-13. 
(Oct., 1875.) 

64. Our native trees. The tulip tree, 
Liriodendron tulipifera. In Field and For- 
est, I, pp. 49-53. (Dec, 1875.) 

65. Studies of the American Falconidse. 
Monograph of genus Micrastur. In Proc. 
Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., for 1875, pp. 470- 
.502, figures i-ix. 

66. Second thoughts on the genus Mi- 
crastur. In Ibis, VI, pp. 1-5. (Jan., 1876.) 

67. The genus Glaucidium. In Ibis, VI, 
pp. 11-17, 1 pi. (Jan., 1876.) 

68. Studies of the American Falconidae. 
Monograph of the Polybori. In Bull. U. S. 
Geol. and Geog. Surv. Terr, for February, 
1876, No. 6, 2d series, pp. 451-473; plates 
xxii-xxvi. 

69. Studies of the American Falconidae. 
In Bull. U. S. Geol. and Geog. Surv. Terr, 
for April, 1876, II, No. 2, pp. 91-182 ; plates 
xxx-xxxi. 

70. Ornithology of Guadeloupe (lege 
Guadalupe) Island, based on notes and col- 
lections made by Dr. Edward Palmer. In 
Bull. U. S. Geol. and Geog. Surv. Terr, for 
April, 1876, II, No. 2, pp. 183-195. 

71. Notes on the genus Helminthophaga. 
In Ibis, VI, pp. 166-171. (April, 1876.) 

72. Regarding Buteo vulgaris in North 
America. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club for 
April, 1876. I, pp. 32-39. 

73. Maximum length of the black snake. 
In Forest and Stream, VI, p. 318. (June, 
1876.) 

74. Giant pear trees. In Forest and 
Stream, VI, p. 337. (June, 1876.) 

75. Notes on the catalpa. Catalpa big- 



323 



Indiana University 



\_Ridgway 



nonioides. //; Field and Forest, II, pp. 27- 
29. (August, 1876.) 

76. The black snake again. 7w Forest 
and Stream, VII, p. 20. (August, 1876.) 

77. On geographical variation in Den- 
droeca palmarum. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, 
for Sept., 1876, I pp. 81-87. 

78. Sexual, individual and geograph- 
ical variation in the genu.s Leucosticte. In 
Field and Forest, II, pp. 37-43. (Septem- 
ber, 1876.) 

79. The little cypress swamp of Indiana. 
In Field and Forest, II, pp. 93-96. (Dec, 
1876.) 

80. Ornithology. In U. S. Geol. Surv. 
w. 40th Parallel, IV, part III, pp. 303-670. 
Washington, Government Printing Office, 
1877. 

81. On geographical variation in Turdus 
migratorius. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, for 
Jan., 1877, II, pp. 8-9. 

82. Mrs. Maxwell's Colorado museum. 
In Field and Forest, II, pp. 195-198; 208-. 
214. (May and June, 1877.) 

83. Mrs. Maxwell's Colorado museum. 
Additional notes. In Field and Forest, III, 
p. 11. (July, 1877.) 

84. The bii-ds of Guadalupe Island, dis- 
cussed with reference to the present genesis 
of species. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club for 
July, 1877, II, pp. 58-66. 

85. Description of a new wren of the 
Tres Marias Islands. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. 
Club, for Jan., 1878, III, pp. 10-11. 

86. Three additions to the avifauua of 
North America. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, 
for Jan., 1878, III, pp. 37-38. 

87. Eastward range of Chondestes 
grammaca. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, for 
Jan., 1878, III, pp. 43-44. 

88. Studies of the American Herodiones. 
Part I. Synopsis of the American genera of 
Ardeidse and Ciconiidre ; including descrip- 
tions of three new genera and a monograph 
of the genus Ardea, Linnpeus. In Bull. U. 



S. Geol. and Geog. Surv. Terr., for Feb., 
1878, IV, pp. 219-251. 

89. On a new humming bird (Atthis 
ellioti), from Guatemala. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., for 1878, I, pp. 8-10. 

90. Notes on some of the birds of Cal- 
averas county, California, and adjoining 
localities. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, for 
April, 1878, III, pp. 64-68. 

91. Song birds of the West. In Har- 
per's Mag., LVI, pp. 857-880, 19 wood cuts. 
(May, 1878.) 

92. A review of the American species 
of the genus Scops, Savigny. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for August, 1878, I, sig. 1, pp. 
8.5-117. 

93. Notes on birds observed at Mount 
Carmel, southern Illinois, in the spring of 
1878. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club for Oct., 
1878, III, pp. 162-166. 

94. Editor of 'Notes on the ornithology 
of southern Texas, being a list of birds ob- 
served in the vicinity of Fort Brown, Texas, 
from February, 1876 to June, 1878.' By 
.Tames C. Merrill, Assistant Surgeon, U. S. 
Army. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for Oct., 
1878, I, pp. 118-173. 

95. Descriptions of several new species 
and geographical races of birds contained in 
the collection of the United States National 
Museum. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for Dec, 
1878, I, pp. 247-252. 

96. Description of two new species of 
birds from Costa Rica, and notes on other 
rare species from that country. In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for Dec, 1878, I, pp. 252- 
255. 

97. Editor of 'A partial list of the birds 
of central California.' By L. Belding, of 
Stockton, 'in Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
March, 1879, I, pp. 388-449. 

98. Descriptions of new species and 
races of American birds, including a synop- 
sis of the genus Tyrannus, Cuvier. In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. :Mus. for April 1879, I, 
pp. 466-486. 



324 



Ridgway ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



99. Portion of letter to Mr. Geo. B. 
Grinnell in relation to the bird afterward 
described as Seiurus nsevius notabilis. In 
Forest and Stream, XII, p. 307. (May, 
1879.) 

100. On the use of trinomials iu zoolog- 
ical nomenclature. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. 
Club for .July, 1S79. IV, pp. 129-134. 

101. On a new species of Peucsea from 
southern Illinois and central Texas. In 
Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club for Oct., 1879, IV, 
pp. 218-222. 

102. Note on Helminthophaga gunuii, 
Gibbs. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club for Oct., 
1879, IV. pp. 233-234. 

103. Henslow's bunting (Coturniculus 
henslowi) near Washington. In Bull. Nutt. 
Orn. Club for Oct., 1879, IV, p. 238. 

104. On six species of birds new to the 
fauna of Illinois, with notes on other rare 
Illinois birds. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club for 
June, 1880, V, pp. 30-32. 

105. On current objectionable names of 
North American birds. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. 
Club for Jan., 1880, V, pp. 36-38. 

106. Note on Peucaea illinoensis. In 
Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club for Jan., 1880, V, 
p. 52. 

107. Late breeding of the blue grosbeak. 
In Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club for Jan., 1880, V, 
p. 53. 

108. Description of an unusual (?) 
plumage of Buteo harlani. In Bull. Nutt. 
Orn. Club for Jan., 1880, V, pp. 58-59. 

109. Revisions of nomenclature of cer- 
tain North American birds. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for March, 1880, III, pp. 1-16. 

110. Notes on the American vultures 
( SarcorhamphidflP ) , with special reference 
to their generic nomenclature. In Bull. 
Nutt. Orn. Club for April, 1880, V, pp. 77- 
84. 

111. Description of the adult plumage of 
Hierofalco gyrfalco obsoletus. In Bull. Nvitt. 
Orn. Club for April, 1880, V, pp. 92-95. 



112. The northern waxwing (Ampelis 
garrulus) in southern Illinois. In Bull. 
Nutt. Orn. Club for April, 1880, V, p. 118. 

113. Note concerning the capture of a 
specimen of the greenfinch (Ligurinus 
chloris) at Lowville, Lewis; county. New 
York. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club for April, 
1880, V, p. 119. 

114. On the supposed identity of Ardea 
occidental is, Aud., and A. wurdemanni, 
Baird. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club for April, 
1880, V, pp. 123-124. 

115. On the moult of the bill, or parts of 
its covering in certain Alcidse. In Bull. 
Nutt. Orn. Club for April, 1880, V, pp. 126. 
127. 

116. On Rallus longirostris, Bodd., and 
its geographical races. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. 
Club for July, 1880, V, pp. 138-140. 

117. On Macrohsephus griseus (Gmel. ) 
and M. scotopaceus (Say). In Bull. Nutt. 
Orn. Club for July, 1880, V, pp. 156-160. 

118.' On a new Alaskan sandpiper. In 
Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club for July, 1880, V, pp. 
160-163. 

119. Scops flammeola in Colorado. In 
Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club for July, 1880, V, p. 
185. 

120. The little brown crane (Grus fra- 
terculus, Cassin). In Bull. Nutt. Orn. 
Club for July, 1880, V, pp. 187-188. 

121. A catalogue of the birds of North 
America. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
August, 1880, III, pp. 163-246. 

122. Description of the eggs of the Cas- 
pian tern (Sterna caspia). In Bull. Nutt. 
Orn. Club for October, 1880, V, pp. 221-223. 

123. Note on Helminthophaga cincinnati- 
ensis, Langdon. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club 
for Oct., 1880, V, pp. 237-238. 

124. Catalogue of the Trochilidse in the 
collection of the United States National Mu- 
seum. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for Oct., 
1880, III, pp. 308-320. 

125. Nomenclature of North American 



325 



Indiana University 



\_Ridgway 



birds, chiefly contained in the U. S. Nat. 
Mus. Washington, Government Printing 
OflSce. (1881.) 

126. Swainson's warbler in Texas. In 
Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, VI, pp. 54-55. 
(Jan., 18S1.) 

127. Southern range of the raven on the 
Atlantic Coast of the United States, hi 
Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, VI, p. 118. (April, 
1881.) 

128. An unaccountable migration of the 
red-headed woodpecker. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. 
Club, VI, pp. 120-122. (April, 1881.) 

129. The Caspian tern in California. In 
Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, VI, p. 124. (April, 
1881.) 

130. A hawk new to the United States. 
In Forest and Stream, XVI, p. 206. (April 
14, 1881.) 

131. On a duck new to the North Amer- 
ican fauna. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
1881, IV, pp. 22-24. 

132. On Amazilia yucatanensis (Cabot) 
and A. cerviniventris, Gould. In Proc. U. 
S. Nat. Mus. for 1881, IV, pp. 25-26. 

133. A catalogue of the birds of Illinois. 
In Bull. Illinois State Laboratory of Nat- 
ural History for May, 1881, pp. 164-208. 

134. A review of the genus Centurus, 
Swainson. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
1881, IV, pp. 93-119. 

135. List of species of Middle and South 
American birds not contained in the United 
States National Museum. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for 1881, IV, pp. 165-208. 

136. On a tropical hawk to be added Lo 
the North American fauna. In Bull. Nutt. 
Orn. Club, VI, pp. 207-214. (Oct., 1881.) 

137. List of special desiderata among 
North American birds. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus. for 1881, IV, pp. 207-223. 

1.38. On an apparently new heron from 
Florida. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, VII, 
pp. 1-6. (Jan., 1882.) 

139. Notes on some bird:, observed near 



Wheatland, Knox County, Indiana, in the 
spring of 1881. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, 
VII, pp. 15-23. (Jan., 1882.) 

140. On the generic name of Helmin- 
thophaga. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club. VII, 
pp. 53-54. (Jan., 1882.) 

141. The great black-backed gull (Larus 
marinus) from a new locality. In Bull. 
Nutt. Orn. Club, VII, p. 60. (Jan., 1882.) 

142. Correction of an eri-oneous identifi- 
cation of Milvulus tyrannus for M. forfi- 
catus. In Ornithologist and OiJlogist, VI, 
p. 93. (Feb., 1882.) 

143. Catalogue of Old World birds in the 
United States National Museum. In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1882, IV, pp. 317-333. 

144. Notes on some Costa Rican birds. 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1882, IV, pp. 
333-337. 

145. Description of the adult female ^<t 
Falco peregrinus pealei. In Ibis, VI. pp. 
294-298. (April, 1882.) 

146. Description of a new flycatcher and 
supposed new petrel from the Sandwich 
Islands. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1882, 

IV, pp. 337-338. 

147. Description of a new owl from 
Porto Rico. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
1882, IV, pp. 366-371. 

148. Descriptions of two new thru.shes 
from the United States. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus. for 1882, IV, pp. 374-379. 

149. On two recent additions to the 
North American bird fauna, by L. Belding. 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1882, IV, pp. 
414-415. 

150. Descriptions of several new races of 
American birds. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for 1882, V, pp. 9-15. 

151. On the genera Harporhynchus, 
Cabanis, and INIethriopterus, Reichenbaoh, 
with a description of a new genus of Mim- 
ina-. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1882, 

V, pp. 43-46. 

152. Notes on the native trees of the 



326 



Ridgway ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



lower Wabash aud White River valleys, 
ill Illinois and Indiana. /;; Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for 1882, V, pp. 49-88. 

153. Critical remarks on the tree creep- 
ers (Certhia) of Europe and North Amer- 
ica. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1882, V, 
pp. 111-116. 

154. Description of some new North 
American birds. In Proc. U. S. Nat. AIus. 
for 1882, V, pp. 343-346. 

155. On a collection of birds from the 
Hacienda 'La Palma,' Gulf of Nicoya, Costa 
Rica. By C. C. Nutting. With critical 
notes by R. Ridgway. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
:Mus. for 1882, V, pp. 882-409. 

156. Distribution of the fish crow 
(Corvus ossifragus). In Bull. Nutt. Orn. 
Club, VII, p. 250. (Oct., 1882.) 

157. Birds new to or rare in the Dis- 
trict of Columbia. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. 
Club, VII, p. 253. (Oct., 1882.) 

158. List of additions to the catalogue of 
North American birds. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. 
Club, VII, pp. 254-258. (Oct., 1882.) 

159. On Le Conte's bunting (Coturni- 
culus lecontei) and other birds observed in 
southeastern Illinois. In Bull. Nutt. Orn, 
Club. VIII, p. 58. (Jan., 1888.) 

160. The scissor-tail (Milvulus forfica- 
tus) at Norfolk, Va. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. 
Club. VIII, p. 59. (Jan., 1883.) 

161. On some remarkable points of re- 
lationship between the American kingfish- 
ers. In Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, VIII, p. 59. 
(Jan., 1888.) 

162. Geographical variation in size 
among certain Anatidse and Gruidse. In 
Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, VIII, p. 62. (Jan., 
1883.) 

368. Corrections. In Ornithologist and 
Or.logist, VIII, p. 13. (Feb., 1883.) 

164. Catalogue of a collection of birds 
made in the interior of Costa Rica, by Mr. 
C. C. Nutting. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for 1883, V, pp. 498-502. 

165. Description of a new warbler from 



the islands of Santa Lucia, West Indies. 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1883, V, pp. 
525-526. 

166. Description of a supposed new 
plover, from Chili. In Proc. LI. S. Nat. 
Mus. for 1883, V, pp. 526-527. 

167. Catalogue of a collection of birds 
made at various points along the western 
coast of lower California, north of Cape 
St. Eugenio. By L. Belding. Edited by 
R. Ridgway. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
1883, V, pp. 527-532. 

168. Catalogue of a collection of birds 
made near the southern extremity of tlie 
peninsula of Lower California. By L. 
Belding. Edited by R. Ridgway. In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1883, V, pp. 532-550-. 

169. On the genus Tantalus Linn., and 
its allies. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
1883, V, pp. 550-551. 

170. Catalogue of the aquatic and fish- 
eating birds exhibited by the United States 
National Museum at the Great International 
Fisheries Exhibition, London, 1883. Wash- 
ington, Government Printing Office, 1SS3. 
Pp. 1-46. 

171. Description of a new petrel from 
Alaska. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 18S3. 
V, pp. 656-658. 

172. Descriptions of some birds, sup- 
posed to be undescribed, from the Command- 
er Islands and Petropaulovski, collected by 
Dr. Leonhard Stejneger, U. S. Signal Serv- 
ice. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1883, VI, 
pp. 90-96. 

178. Notes on the black racer. In For- 
est and Stream, XXI, p. 68. (August 23. 
1888.) 

174. On the probable identity of Motac- 
illa ocularis Swinhoe and M. amurensis See- 
bohm, with remarks on a supposed species, 
M. blakistoni Seebohm. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus. for 1888, VI, pp. 144-147. 

175. Notes on some rare species of 
Neotropical birds. In Ibis, I, pp. 399-4itL 
(Oct., 1883.) 



827 



Indiana University 



\_Ridgway 



176. Letters to the editors concerning 
the U. S. National Museum exhibit of 
aquatic and fish-eating birds at the London 
International Fisheries Exhibition. In 
Ibis. I, pp. 548-580. (Oct., 1883. j 

177. Descriptions of some new birds 
from Lower California. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus. for 1883, VI, pp. 154-156. 

178. Anthus cervinus (Pallas) in Lower 
California. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 

1883, VI, pp. 156-157. 

179. Note on Merula confinis (Baird). 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1883, VI, pp. 
158-159. 

180. Additions and corrections to the list 
of native trees of the Lower Wabash. In 
Bot. Gaz., VIII, pp. 345-352. (Dec. 1883.) 

181. Keport on the department of birds, 
U. S. National Museum. In Ann. Rep. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for 1882, 1883, pp. 13-17. 

182. Note on Zenaidura yucatanensis 
Lawr. In Auk, I, p. 96. (Jan., 1884.) 

183. On a new Carpodectes from south- 
western Costa Rica. In Ibis, II, for Jan., 

1884, pp. 27-28, pi. 2. 

184. Notes on three Guatemalan birds. 
In Ibis, II, for Jan., 1884, pp. 43-45. 

185. List of birds found at Guaymas, 
Sonora, in December and April, 1883. By 
L. Belding. (Edited by R. Ridgway.) In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for Jan., 1884, VI, 
pp. 343-344. 

186. Second catalogue of a collection of 
birds made near the southern extremity of 
Lower California. Bj' L. Belding. (Edited 
by R. Ridgway.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for Jan., 1884, VI, pp. 344-352. 

187. Notes on some Japanese birds re- 
lated to North American species. In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for Jan., April, 1884, VI, 
pp. 368-371. 

188. Ortyx virginianus not in Arizona. 
In Forest and Stream, XXII, p. 124. 
(March 13, 1884.) 

189. The water birds of North America. 
(Joint author with S. F. Baird and T. M. 



Brewer.) In Memoirs of the Museum of 
Comparative Zoology at Harvard College, 
Vol. XII. (Issued in continuation of the 
publications of the geological survey of Cali- 
fornia.) Boston, 1884. Vol. I, pp. i-xi, 
1-537 ; Vol. II, pp. 1-552. 

190. Remarks concerning Phalacrocorax 
violaceus and P. v. resplendens. In Auk, I, 
p. 165. (April, 1884.) 

191. Remarks concerning two Central 
American species commonly referred to the 
genus Compsothlypis cabanis. In Auk, I, p. 
169. (April, 1884.) 

192. Descriptions of some new North 
American birds. In Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., 
II, 1885 (author's edition distributed April 
10, 1884), pp. 89-95. 

193. Description of a new American 
kingfisher. In Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., II, 
1885 (author's edition published April 10, 
1884), pp. 95-96. 

194. Note on Psaltriparus grindae, Bel- 
ding. In Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., II, 1885 
(author's edition published April 10, 1884), 
pp. 96. 

195. Note on the generic name Calodro- 
mus. In Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., II, 1885 
(author's edition published April 10, 1884), 
p. 97. 

196. Southern limit of quail and grouse. 
In Forest and Stream, XXII, p. 243. (April 
24, 1884.) 

197. On a collection of birds from Nica- 
ragua. By Charle.s C. Nutting. Edited by 
R. Ridgway. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
April, 1884, VI, pp. 24-26. 

198. On some Costa Rican birds, with 
descriptions of several siipposed new species. 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for April, 1884, 
VI, pp. 410-415. 

199. A review of the American crossbills 
(Loxia) of the L. curvirostra type. In 
Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., II, 1885 (author's 
edition published April 28, 1884), pp. 101- 
107. 

200. Note on the Anas hyperboreus, 



328 



Ridgivay ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



Pall., and Anser albatus, Cass. In Proc. 
Biol. Soc. Wash., II, 1885 (author's editiou 
published April 28, 1884), pp. 107-108. 

201. Remarks on the type specimens of 
Muscicapa fulvifrous, Girard, and Mitre- 
phorus pallescens, Coues. In Proc. Biol. 
Soc. Wasn., II, 1885 (author's edition pub- 
lished April 28, 1884), pp. 108-110. 

202. Note regarding- the earliest name for 
Carpodacus hsemorrhous (Wagler). In 
Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., II, 1885 (author's 
edition published April 28, 1884), pp. 110- 
111. 

203. Note concerning the correct specific 
name of Cypselus saxatilis Woodhouse. In 
Auk, I, p. 2.^!0, footnote. (July, 1884.) 

204. Remarks upon the close relationship 
between the white and scarlet ibises (Eudo- 
cimus albus and E. ruber). 

205. Note on Astur atricapillus striatu- 
lus. In Auk, I, pp. 252-253. (July, 1884.) 

206. On the possible specific identity of 
Buteo cooperi Cass, with B. harlani Aud. 
In Auk, I, p. 254. (July, 1884.) 

207. Probable breeding of the red cross- 
bill (Loxia curvirostra americana) in cen- 
tral Maryland. In Auk, I, p. 292. (July, 
1884.) 

208. The probable breeding place of Pas- 
serculus princeps. In Auk, 1, pp. 292-29.3. 
(July. 1884.) 

209. Note on Selasphorus torridus Sal- 
vin. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for July, 
1884. VII, p. 14. 

210. Melanetta fusca (Linn.) in Alaska. 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for July, 1884, 
VII. p. 68. 

211. Description of a new snow bunting 
from Alaska. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
July. 1884, VII, pp. 68-70. 

212. On a collection of birds made by 
Messrs. J. E. Benedict and W. Nye, of 
United States Fish Commission Steamer 
Albatro.ss. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
Sept., 1884, VII, pp. 172-180. 



213. Description of a new species of the 
field sparrow from New Mexico. In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1884, VII, p. 254. 

214. Another Kirtland's warbler from 
Michigan. In Auk, I, p. 389. (Oct., 1884.) 

215. Note concerning bird exhibit of the 
U. S. National Museum at the New Orleans 
Exposition. In Auk, I, p. 403. (Oct., 
1884.) 

216. Note relative to extent of bird col- 
lection in the U. S. National Museum. In 
Auk, I, pp. 403-404. (Oct., 1884.) 

217. On a new species of coot frOm the 
West Indies. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
Oct., 1884, VII, p. 358. 

218. The bird collection of the U. S. Na- 
tional Museum. In Science, IV, p. 497. 
(Nov. 28, 1884.) 

219. Grouse and mallard plumage. In 
Forest and Stream, XXIX, p. 463. (Jan. 
5, 1885.) 

220. Extract from letter to the editor 
concerning the name, etc., of Spizella 
wortheni. In Ornithologist and Oologist, X, 
p. 24. (Feb., 1885.) 

221. Description of some new species jf 
birds from Cozumel Island, Yucatan. In 
Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., Ill, 1886 (author's 
edition published Feb. 20, 1885), pp. 21-24. 

222. Description of a new race of the 
red-shouldered hawk from Florida. In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for Feb., 1885, VII, p. 
514. 

223. On two hitherto unnamed sparrows 
from the coast of California. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for Feb., 1885, pp. 516-578. 

224. The European sparrow. In Ameri- 
can Field, XXIII, p. 295. (March 28, 
1885.) 

225. On Buteo harlani (Aud.) and B. 
cooperi Cass. In Auk, II, pp. 165-166. 
(April, 1885.) 

226. Remarks on the California vulture 
(Pseudogryphus calif ornianus.) In Auk, 
II, pp. 167-169. (April, 1885.) 



329 



Indiana University 



[_Riiiguay 



227. Note on Sarcorhamphus aquatori- 
alis Sharpe. In Auk, II, pp. 169-171. 
(April, 1SS5.) 

228. Review of Gurney's 'List of the 
diurnal birds of prey.' In Auk, II, pp. 203- 
205. (April 1SS5.) 

229. Where did it come from? In Forest 
and Stream, XXIV, p. 204. (April 9, 
1885.) 

230. On CEstrelatafisheri and CE. defilip- 
piaua. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for May, 
1885, VIII, pp. 17-18. 

231. Icterus cucullatus, Swainson, and 
its geographical variations. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for March, 1885, VIII, pp. 18-19. 

232. Description of a new species of 
Contopus from tropical America. In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for May, 1885, VIII, p. 21. 

233. Note on the Anser leucopareius of 
Brandt. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for May, 
1885, VIII, pp. 21-22. 

234. Description of a new warbler from 
Yucatan. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
May, 1885, VIII, p. 23. 

235. Description of two new birds from 
Costa Rica. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
May, 1885, VIII, pp. 23-24. 

236. Description of three supposed new 
honey creepers from the Lesser Antilles, 
with a synopsis of the species of the genus 
Certhiola. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
May, 1885, VIII, pp. 25-30. 

237. On Cathartes burroviauus, Cassin, 
and C. urubitinga, Pelzeln. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for ]May, 1885, VIII, pp. 34-36. 

238. On Onychotes gruberi. In Proc. U. 
S. Nat. Mus. for May, 1885, VIII, pp. 36-88. 

239. Remarks on the type specimens of 
Buteo oxypterus, Cassin. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for :\Iay, 1885, VIII, pp. 75-77. 

240. Description of a new species of 
boat-billed heron from Central America. In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for June, 1885, VIII, 
pp. 93-94. 

241. Description of a new hawk from 



Cozumel. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., for 
June, 1885, VIII, pp. 94-95. 

242. On Peucsea mexicana (Lawr. i. a 
sparrow new to the United States. In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for June, 1885, VIII. pp. 
98-99. 

243. A review of the American golden 
warblers. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
Sept., 1885, VIII, pp. 348-350. 

244. Some emended names of North 
American birds. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for Sept., 1885, VIII, pp. 354-356. 

245. Description of a new cardinal gros- 
beak from Arizona. In Auk, II, pp. 34.'!- 
345. (Oct., 1885.) 

246. Helminthophila leucobronchialis. In 
Auk, II, pp. 259-363. (Oct., 1885.) 

247. On Junco cinereus (Swains.) and 
its geographical races. In Auk, II, pp. oC.;',- 
364. (Oct., 1885.) 

248. A new petrel for North America. 
In Auk, II, pp. 386-387. (Oct., 1885.) 

249. Description of an apparently new 
species of Dromococcyx from British Gui- 
ana. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for Oct., 
1885, VIII, p. 559. 

250. Catalogue of a collection of birds 
made on the islands of Cozumel. Yucatan, by 
the naturalists of the U. S. Fish Commis- 
sion Steamer Albatross, Capt. Z. L. Tanner 
commanding. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
Oct., 1885, VIII, pp. 560-.583. 

251. Report on the department of birds. 
U. S. National Museum, 1883. In Ann. 
Rep. Smithsonian Institution for 1883 
(1885), pp. 220-225. 

252. Report on the department of birds, 
U. S. National Museum, 1884. In Ann. 
Rep. Smithsonian Institution (Report of U. 
S. National Museum) for 1884 (1885), pp. 
143-155. 

253. On the proper name of the prairie 
hen. In Auk, III, pp. 132-133. (Jan., 
ISSG.) 

254. The scissor-tail flycatcher. (Milvis- 



330 



Ridgway ] 



Bibliography : Alumni 



lus forficatus) at Key West. In Auk, III, 
p. 134. (Jan., 1886.) 

255. The vernacular name of Plectrophe- 
nax hyperboreus. In Auk, III, p. 135. 
(Jan., 1886.) 

256. Arizona quail. In Forest and 
Stream. (Jan. 14, 1886.) 

257. Birds and bonnets. In Forest and 
Stream, XXVI, p. 5. (Jan. 28, 1886.) 

258. Is the dodo an extinct bird? In 
Science, VII, p. 190. (Feb. 26, 1886.) 

259. Water birds of North America. 'A 
few connections' rectified. In Auk, III, pp. 
266-268. (April, 1886.) 

260. Tringa damacensis (Horsf. ) in 
Alaska ; a sandpiper new to the North 
American fauna. In Auk, III, p. 275. 
(April, 1886.) 

261. Discovery of the breeding place of 
McKay's snowflake (Plectrophenax hyper- 
boreus.) In Auk, III, pp, 276-277. (April, 
1886.) 

262. On two abnormally colored speci- 
mens of the bluebird (Sialia sialis). In 
Auk, III, pp. 282-283. (April, 1886.) 

263. Note announcing departure of the 
Fish Commission steamer Albatross on a sci- 
entific cruise among the Bahamas and other 
islands of the West Indies. In Auk, III, p. 
286. (April, 1886.) 

264. On the glaucous gull of Bering Sea 
and contiguous waters. In Auk, III, pp. 
330-331. (July, 1886.) 

265. A nomenclature of colors for natu- 
ralists, and compendium of useful knowledge 
for ornithologists. Boston, 1886. Pp. 1- 
129 ; 17 plates. 

256. Description of new species of oys- 
ter-catcher from the Galapagos Islands. In 
Auk, III, p. .331. (July, 1886.) 

267. Preliminary descriptions of some 
new species of birds from southern Mexico, 
in the collection of the Mexican Geograph- 
ical and Exploring Commission. In Auk, 
III. (July, 1886.) 

268. Descriptions of two new species of 



birds supposed to be from the interior of 
Venezuela. In Auk, III, p. 333. (July, 
1886.) 

269. Description of a new species of elf 
owl from Socorro Island, western Mexico. 
In Auk, III, pp. 333-334. (July, 1886.) 

270. Description of a new genus of 
Oceanitidse. In Auk, III, p. 334. (July, 
1880. ) 

271. Description of four new species of 
birds from the Bahama Islands. In Auk, 

III, pp. 334-337. (July, 1886.) 

272. Description of a new genus of Ty- 
rannidiE from Santo Domingo. In Auk, III, 
p. 382. (July, 1886.) 

273. Remarks concerning certain correc- 
tions of alleged errors in 'Water birds of 
North America.'_ In Auk, III, pp. 403-404. 
(July, 1886.) 

274. Descriptions of some new species of 
birds, supposed to be from the interior of 
Venezuela. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
Sept. 17, 1886, IX, pp. 92-94. 

275. On ^Ii^strelata sandwichensis Ridgw. 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for Sept. 17, 1886, 
IX, pp. 95-96. 

276. Catalogue of the animals collected 
by the Geographical and Exploring Commis- 
sion of the Republic of Mexico. By Fer- 
nando Ferrari-Perez, Chief of the Natural 
Hi.?tory Section. II. Birds. By F. Fer- 
rari-Perez. With descriptions of five new 
species, and critical remarks on others of 
greater or less rarity or interest, by Robert 
Ridgway. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
Oct., 1886, IX, pp. 130-182. 

277. Description of the young and first 
plumage of Sterna fuliginosa. In Auk, III, 
pp. 433-434. (Oct., 1886.) 

278. Description of a new species of the 
genus Empidonax from Guatemala. In 
Ibis, IV, pp. 459-460. (Oct., 1886.) 

279. On Empidochanes fuscatus (Max.) 
and Empidonax brunneu.s, Ridgw. In Ibis, 

IV, pp. 460-461. (Oct.. 1886.) 



331 



Indiana University 



[_Ridguay 



280. On the species of the genus Empi- 
donax. In Ibis, IV, pp. 461-468. (Oct., 
1886.) 

281. Description of a melanistic speci- 
men of Buteo latissimus (Wils.). In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for Oct., 1886, IX, pp. 248- 
249. 

282. Report on the department of birds, 
U. S. National Museum, Jan. 1 to June 30, 
1885. In Ann. Rep. Smithsonian Institu- 
tion (Report of U. S. National Museum) 
for 1885 (1886), pp. 85-91. 

283. A singularly marked specimen of 
Sphyrapicus thyroideus. In Auk, IV, pp. 
75-76. (Jan., 1887.) 

284. Description of a recently new oyster- 
catcher (HflL'matopus galapagoen.sis) from 
the Galapagos Islands. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus. for Feb., 1SS7, IX, pp. 325-326. 

285. Description of a new subspecies of 
Cyclorhis from Yucatan. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for Feb., 1887, IX, p. 519. 

286. Description of a new species of My- 
iarchus, presumably from the Orinoco dis- 
trict of South America. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus. for Feb., 1887, IX, p. 520. 

287. On a probable hybrid between Dry- 
ebates nuttalli (Gamb.) and D. pubescens 
gairdnerii (And.). In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for Feb., 1887, IX, pp. 521-522. 

288. Description of an apparently new 
species of Picolaptes, from the lower Ama- 
zon. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for Feb., 
1887, IX, p. 523. 

289. Description of a new plumed part- 
ridge from Sonora. In Forest and Stream, 
XXVIII, p. 106. (March 3, 1887.) 

290. List of birds found breeding within 
the corporate limits of Mt. Carmel, Illinois. 
In Bull. Ridgway Orn. Club for April, 
1887. pp. 26-35. 

291. The imperial woodpecker (Campe- 
philus impei'ialis) in northern Sonora. In 
Auk, IV, p. 161. (April, 1887.) ' 

292. The coppery-tailed trogon (Trogon 



ambiguus) breeding in southern Arizona. 
In Auk, IV, pp. 161-162. (April, 1887.) 

293. Description of a new species of Co- 
tinga from the Pacific Coast of Costa Rica. 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for April, 1877, 
X, pp. 1-2. 

294. Description of a new form of Spin- 
dalis from the Bahamas. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. INI us. for April, 1887, X, p. 3. 

295. Description of the adult female of 
Carpodectes antonise, Zeledon, with critical 
remarks, notes on habits, etc., by .Jose C. 
Zeledon. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
April, 1877, X, p. 20. 

296. Feathered songsters. Great western 
bird center. A list of the birds found breed- 
ing within the corporate limits of Mt. Car- 
mel, Illinois. In- Mount Carmel Register, 
April 28, 1887. 

297. Description of a new species of Por- 
zana from Costa Rica. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus. for July, 1887, Vol. X, p. 111. 

298. Notes on Ardea wuerdemanni 
Baird. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for July. 
1887, X, pp. 112-115. 

299. Trogon ambiguus breeding in Ari- 
zona. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for July, 
1887, p. 147. 

300. Description of a new plumed part- 
ridge from Sonora. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus. for July, 1887, X, p. 148-150. 

301. Description of a new genus of Den- 
drocolaptine bird from the lower Amazon. 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for July, 1887, X, 
p. 151. 

302. Description of a new species of 
Phacellodomus from Venezuela. In Proc. U. 
S. Nat. Mus. for July, 1887, X, p. 152. 

303. Clarke's nutcracker (Picicorvus 
columbianus) in the Bristol Bay region, 
Alaska. In Auk, IV, p. 255. (July, 1887.) 

304. Clarke's nutcracker from the Ko- 
wak River, Alaska. In Auk, IV, p. 256. 

(July, 1887.) 

305. Yellow-headed blackbird (Xantho- 



332 



Ridgivay ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



cephalus xanthocephalus) in Maine. In 
Auk, lY, p. 256. (July, 1887.) 

306. Note on Spizella monticola ochracea 
Brewst. In Auk, IV, pp. 258-259. (July, 
1887.) 

307. Letter to the editor concerning the 
supposed breeding plumage of Podiceps occi- 
deutalis Lawrence. In Ibi.s, Y, pp. 261-362. 
(July, 1887.) 

308. Description of two new species of 
Kaup's genus Megascops. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for Aug., 1887, X, pp. 267-268. 

309. Description of two new races of 
Pyrrhuloxia sinuata Bonap. In Auk, lY, p. 
347. (Oct., 1887.) 

310. On the correct subspecific title of 
Baird's wren (No. 719b, A. O. U. check- 
list). In Auk, lY, pp. 249-250. (Oct., 
1887.) 

311. A correction. In Ornitliologist and 
Oologist, XII, p. 192. (Nov., 1887.) 

312. Description of a new Muscisaxi- 
cola, from Lake Titicaca, Peru. In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for Nov., 1887, X, p. 430. 

313. On Phrygilus gayi (Eyd. and Gerv.) 
and allied species. In Pi-oc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for Nov., 1887, X, pp. 431-435. 

314. Spencer Fullerton Baird. (In me- 
moriam. ) In Auk, Y, pp. 1-14. (Jan., 
1888.) 

315. Notes on some type-specimens of 
American Troglodytidae in the Lafresnaye 
collection. In Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist, 
for March, 1888, XXIII, pp. 383-388. 

316. Description of a new Tityra from 
western Mexico. In Auk, Y, p. 263. (July, 
1888.) 

317. A review of the genus Dendrocincla 
Gray. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1888, 
X, pp. 32, 488-497. 

318. Remarks on Catharus berlepschi 
Lawr. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for August, 
1888, p. 504. 

319. Descriptions of some new species 
and subspecies of birds from Middle America. 



In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for August, 1888, 
X, pp. 505-510. 

320. Note on the generic name Uropsila, 
Sc. and Salv. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for August 1888, X, p. 511. 

321. Descriptions of new species and ge- 
nera of birds from the lower Amazon. In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for August, 1888, X, 
pp. 529-548. 

322. A review of the genus Psittacula of 
Brisson. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for Au- 
gust, 1888, X, pp. 529-548. 

323. Catalogue of a collection of birds 
made by Mr. Chas. H. Townsend, on islands 
in the Caribbean Sea and in Honduras. In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for August, 1888, 
pp. 572-597. 

324. Charles Wickliffe Beckham : Obit- 
uary. In Auk, Y, pp. 445-446. (Oct., 
1888.) 

325. Supplementary remarks on the ge- 
nus Psittacula Brisson. In Auk, V, pp. 
460-462. (Oct., 1888.) 

320. Description of a new Psaltriparus 
from southern Arizona. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for Oct., 1888, X, p. 697. 

327. Description of a new western sub- 
species of Accipiter velox (Wilson), and 
subspecific diagnosis of A. cooperi mexi- 
canus (Swains). In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for Nov., 1888, XI, p. 92. 

328. Note on JEstrelata sandwichensis 
HidgM". In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for Nov., 
1888, XI, p. 104. 

329. Description of a new pigeon from 
Guaj'aquil, Ecviador. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus. for Nov., 1888, XI, p. 112. 

330. Description of the adult male of 
Acanthidops bairdi. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus. for March, 1889, XI, p. 196. 

331. Spring notes on migratory birds. 
In Forest and Stream, XXXII, p. 420 
(Jan. 13, 1889.) 

332. Notes on Costa Rican birds, with 
descriptions of seven new species and sub- 



333 



Indiana University 



\_Ridgway 



speeie.s and one new genus. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for Sept., 1889, XI, pp. 537-546. 

333. Report on the department of birds, 
U. S. National Museum, for 1885-1886. In 
Ann. Rep. Smithsonian Institution (Report 
of U. S. Nat. Mus.), for 1885-1886 (1889), 
pp. 153-162. 

334. The ornithology of Illinois. Part 
I, Descriptive catalogue. In Nat. Hist. 
Survey of Illinois. Springfield, 111. Vol. 
I, pp. viii, 520, 22 plates (1889) ; vol. II, 
pp. 282, 22 plates (1895), 

335. Buteo brachyurus and B. fulgino- 
sus. In Auk, VII, p. 90. (Jan., 1890.) 

336. Intergradation between Zonotrichia 
leucophrys and Z. intermedia, and between 
the latter and Z. gambeli. In Auk, VII, p. 
96. (Jan., 1890.) 

337. A chart of standard colors. In Gar- 
den and Forest, III, pp. 22-23. (Jan. S, 
1890.) 

338. A review of the genus Xiphocolap- 
tes of Lesson. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for Feb., 1890, XII, pp. 1-20. 

339. A review of the genus Sclerurus of 
Swainson. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
Feb.. 1890, XII, pp. 21-31. 

340. Scientific results of explorations by 
the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer Alba- 
tross. (Published by permission of Hon. 
Marshall McDonald, U. S. Commissioner of 
Fisheries.) No. I- — Birds collected on the 
Galapagos Islands in 1888. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for Feb., 1890, XII, p. 101-128. 

341. Scientific results of explorations by 
the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer Alba- 
tross. (Published by permission of Hon. 
Marshall McDonald, Commissioner of Fish- 
eries.) No. II — Birds collected on the Island 
of Santa Lucia, West Indies, the Abrolhos 
Islands, Brazil, and at the Straits of Ma- 
gellan, in 1887-1888. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus. for Feb., 1890, XII, pp. 129-139. 

342. A northern station for Quercus lyr- 
ata. In Garden and Forest, III, p. 129. 
(March 12, 1890.) 



343. Review of Salvin and Godman's 
'Biologia Centrali-Americana — Aves.' In 
Auk, VII, pp. 189-195. (April, 1890.) 

344. Harlan's hawk a race of the red- 
tail, and not a distinct species. In Auk, 
VII, p. 205. (April, 1890.) 

345. Further notes on the genus Xiph- 
ocolaptes of Lesson. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus. for July, 1890, XIII, pp. 47-48. 

346. Junco hyemalis shufeldti in Mary- 
land. In Auk, VII, p. 289. (July, 1S90.) 

347. A yellow-crowned Regulus calen- 
dula. In Auk, VII, p. 292. (July, 1890.) 

348. Review of Allen's 'Birds from 
Quito.' In Auk, VII, pp. 380-381. (Oct., 
1890. ) 

349. Review of Allen's 'Birds collected in 
Bolivia.' In Auk, VII, pp. 381-382. (Oct., 
1890.) 

350. Review of Allen's 'The genus Cy- 
clorhis.' In Auk, VII, pp. 382-384. (Oct., 
1890.) 

351. Review of Allen's 'Descriptions of 
new South American birds.' In Auk, VII, 
pp. 384-385. (Oct., 1890.) 

3.52. Review of Allen's 'Individual and 
seasonal variation in the genus Elainea.' In 
Auk, VII, pp. 385-386. (Oct., 1890.) 

353. Review of Allen's 'The Maximilian 
types of South American birds.' In Auk, 
VII, pp. 386-387. (Oct., 1890.) 

354. Observations on the Farallon rail 
(Porzana jamaicensis coturniculus Baird). 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for Nov., 1890, 
XIII, pp. 309-311. 

355. Report on the department of birds 
U. S. National Museum, for 1887-1888. In 
Ann. Rep. Smithsonian Institution (Report 
of U. S. Nat. Mus.) for 1888 (1890), pp. 
145-150. . 

356. Falco dominicensis Gmel. versus 
Falco sparverioides Vig. In Auk, VIII, pp. 
11.3-114. (Jan., 1891.) 

357. A new name necessary for Selas- 
phorus floresii Gould. In Auk, VIII, p. 114. 

(Jan., 1891.) 



334 



Ridgway ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



358. Note ou the alleged occurrence of 
Trochilus heloisa (Less, and DeLatt.) with- 
in the North American limits. In Auk, VIII, 
p. 115. (Jan., 1S91.) 

359. Cistothorus marianse (i. e. C. gri- 
.seu,s), Buteo lineatus alleni, and Syrnium 
nebulosum alleni, in South Carolina. 

360. Fulvous tree duck in Missouri. In 
Forest and Stream, XXXVI, p. 435. (June 
S. 1891.) 

•j»;l. List of birds collected on the Ba- 
hama Islands by the naturalists of the Fish 
Commission Steamer Albatross. In Auk, 
VIII. pp. 333-3.39. (Oct., 1891.) 

302. Description of a new species of 
wljii>poorwill from Costa Rica. In Proc. U. 
S. Nat. Mus. for Oct., 1891, pp. 465-466. 

3''>3. Notes on some birds from the in- 
terior of Honduras. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus. for Oct., 1891, XIV, pp. 467-471. 

304. Notes on some Costa Rican birds. 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for Oct., 1891, 
XIV. pp. 473-478. 

305. Note on Pachyrhamphus albinucha, 
Burmeister. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
Oct.. 1891, XIV, pp. 479-48U. 

.366. Description of two supposed new 
forms of Thamnophilus. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for Oct., 1891, XIV, p. 481. 

307. Description of a new sharp-tailed 
sparrow from California. In Proc. U. S. 
Nar. Mus. for Oct., 1891, XIV, pp. 483-484. 

308. Notes on the genus Sittasomus of 
Swainson. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
Oct.. 1891, XIV, pp. 507-510. 

.369. Directions for collecting birds. In 
Part A of Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 39, 
181*1. 

.370. Report on the department of birds, 
U. S. National Museum, for 1888-1889. In 
Ann. Rep. Smithsonian Institution (Report 
of U. S. Nat. Mus.), for 1888-1889 (1891), 
pp. 357-361. 

371. Report on the department of birds, 
U. S. National Museum, for 1889-1890. In 
Ann. Rep. Smithsonian Institution (Report 



of the U. S. National Museum) for 1889- 
1890 (1891), pp. 195-198. 

372. Zonotrichia albicollis in California. 
In Auk, IX, p. 302. (July, 1892.) 

373. Spring arrivals at Washington, D. 
C. In Auk, IX, pp. 307-308. (July, 1892.) 

374. The humming birds. In Rep. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for 1890 (published July, 1892), 
pp. 253-383, plates i-xlvi. 

375. Descriptions of two new forms of 
Basileuterus rufifrons from Mexico. In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for July, 1892, XV, 
p. 119. 

376. The systematic position of hum- 
ming-birds. Reply to Dr. Shufeldt's 'Dis- 
cussion.' In Pop. Sci. News, XXVI, pp. 
164-165. (Nov., 1892.) 

377. Shufeldt on the anatomy of the 
humming birds and swifts. In Am. Nat., 
XXVI, pp. 1040-1041. (Dec, 1892.) 

378. Nocturnal songsters, and other bird- 
notes. Science, XX, pp. 343-344. (Deo. 
16, 1892.) 

379. Report on the department of birds. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1890-1891. In Ann. 
Rep. Smithsonian Institution (Report '>f 
U. S. Nat. Mus.), for 1890-1891 (1892), 
pp. 207-211. 

380. Destruction of crows during the re- 
cent cold spell. In Science, XXI, p. 77, 
(Feb. 10, 1893.) 

381. On the local segregation of trees. 
In Garden and Forest, VI, pp. 148-149. 
(March 29, 1893.) 

382. The American plane tree. In Mee- 
han's Monthly, for May, 1893, pp. 69-70. 

383. Description of two supposed new 
species of swifts. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for June, 1893, XVI, pp. 43-44. 

384. Age of guano deposits. In Science, 
XXI, p. 360. (June, 1893.) 

385. Description of a supposed new spe- 
cies of Odontophorus from southern Mex- 
ico. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for July, 
1893. XVI, pp. 469-470. 

386. Remarks concerning the type-spec- 



o o 



Indiana University 



\_Rid^way 



imen of Malacoptila fulginosa liidgway, de- 
scribed on pp. 572-573 of the same paper by 
Charles W. Richmond. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus. for Oct., 1893, XVI, p. 513. 

387. Descriptions of some new birds col- 
lected on the islands of Aldabra and As- 
sumption, northwest of Madagascar, by Dr. 
W. L. Abbot. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for Oct., 1893, XVI, pp. 597-600. 

388. Remarks on the avian genus Myiar- 
chus, with special reference to M. yucatan- 
ensis Lawrence. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for Oct., 1893, XVI, pp. 605-608. 

389. On a small collection of birds from 
Costa Rica. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
Oct., 1893. XVI, pp. 609-614. 

390. Scientific results of explorations by 
the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer Alba- 
tross. (Published by permission of lion. 
Marshall McDonald, Commissioner of Fish- 
eries.) No. XXVII — Catalogue of a col- 
lection of birds made in Alaska by Mr. C. 
H. Townsend during the cruise of the U. S. 
Fish Commission Steamer Albatross, in the 
summer and autumn of 1888. In Proc. U. 
S. Nat. Mus. for Nov., 1893, XVI, pp. 
663-665. 

391. A revision of the genus Formicarius 
Boddaert. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
Nov., 1893, Vol. XVI, pp. 667-686. 

392. Description of a new storm petrel 
from the coast of western Mexico. In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for Nov., 1893, XVI, pp. 
687-688. 

393. Report on the department of birds, 
U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1891-1892. In Ann. 
Rep. Smithsonian Institution (Report of 
U. S. Nat. Mus.) for 1891-1892 (1893), 
pp. 147-152. 

394. Note on Rougetius aldabranus. In 
Auk, XI, p. 74. (.Jan., 1894.) 

395. Description of a new Geothlypis 
from Brownsville, Texas. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for Feb., 1894, XVI, pp. 691- 
692. 

396. On geographical variation in Sialia 



mexicana Swainson. In Auk, XI, pp. 145- 
100. (April, 1894.) 

397. Description of Pipilo orizabfe Cox. 
In Auk, XI, p. 161. (April, 1894.) 

398. Picicorvus an untenable genus. In 
Auk, XI, p. 179. (April, 1894. j 

399. Geographical versus sexual varia- 
tions in Oreortyx pictus. In Auk, XI. pp. 
193-197, 6 plates. (July, 1894.) 

400. Colinus virginianus cubanensis not 
a Florida bird. In Auk, XI, p. 324. 
(Oct., 1894.) 

401. We, also, take exceptions. In Ni- 
dologist, II, p. 29. (Oct., 1894.) 

402. Descriptions of twenty-two new spe- 
cies of birds from the Galapagos Islands. 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for Nov., 1894, 
XVII, pp. 357-370. 

403. Descriptions of some new birds 
from Aldabra, Assumption, and Gloriosa 
Islands, collected by Dr. W. L. Abbott. 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. ]Mus., for Nov., 1894, 
XVII, pp. 371-373. 

404. Additional notes of the trees of the 
lower AVaba.sh Valley^ In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus. for Jan., 1895, XVII, pp. 409-421, 5 
plates. 

405. Letter to the editor concerning 
nearly total annihilation of bluebirds in the 
District of Columbia by the "blizzard" of 
February 7-9, 1895. In Christian Register, 
for May, 1805, p. 301. 

406. On Fisher'.s petrel (.I'^strelata fish- 
eri). In Auk, XII, pp. 319-322, pi. !v. 
(October, 1895.) 

407. On the correct subspecific nam»^s of 
the Texan and Mexican screech owls. In 
Auk, XII, pp. 389-390. (Oct., 1895.1 

408. Juuco pha?onotus Wagler, nor J. 
cinoreus (Swainson). In Auk, XII, p. 
391. (Oct., 1895.) 

409. Nesting of the duck hawk in trees. 
In Nidologist, III, pp. 42-44. (Dec. 1895.) 

410. A manual of North American birds. 
Philadelphia, 1887. Pp. i-xi ; 1-631: 123 
plates. Second edition revised, with new 



Ridgway ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



preface and appendix. Philadelphia, 1S9G. 
Pp. i-xiii ; 1-G53 ; 123 plates. 

411. Description of a new species of 
ground warbler from eastern Mexico. In 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mas. for April, 1896, 
XVIII, pp. 119-120. 

412. Preliminary descriptions of some 
new birds from the Galapagos archipelago. 
In Proc. U. S, Nat. Mus. for April, 1S9G. 
XVIII, pp. 293-294. 

413. Letter to the editor and publisher of 
The Nidologist concerning his contemplated 
return to California. In Nidologist, III, p. 
99. (May, 1896.) 

414. Description of a new subspecies of 
the genus Peucedramus, Coues. In Proc. U. 
S. Nat. Mus. for May, 1896, XVIII, p. 441. 

415. Characters of a new American 
family of Passerine birds. In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus. for June, 1896, XVIII, pp. 449- 
450. 

416. On birds collected by Dr. W. L. 
Abbot in the Seychelles, Amirantes, Glori- 
osa, Assumption, Aldabra and adjacent 
islands, with notes on habits, etc., by the 
collector. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
June, 1896, XVIII, pp. 509-546. 

417. Description of Oceanodroma macro- 
dactyla (Bryant). In Cat. Birds, Brit. 
Mus. for 1896, XXV, p. 351. 

418. Description of Oceanodroma socor- 
roensis Townsend. In Cat. Birds Brit. Mus. 
for 1896, XXV, p. 352. 

419. Description of Oceanodroma tristra- 
mi Stejneger. In Cat. Birds Brit. Mus. for 
1896, XXV, pp. 354-355. 

420. Results of comparison of a speci- 
men of .^strelata affinis (BuUer) with the 
type of M. gularis (Peale) and M. fisheri 
Ridgway. In Cat. Birds Brit. Mus. for 
1896, XXV, p. 415. 

421. Comparative characters of ^Estrel- 
ata fisheri Ridgway and 2Ei. gularis 

(Peale). In Cat. Birds Brit. Mus. for 
1896, XXV, pp. 415-4-6. 

422. De.scription of .lEstrelata longiros- 

(23) 337 



tris Stejneger. In Cat. Birds Brit. Mils, for 

1896, XXV, p. 418. 

423. Letter to Dr. G. Brown Goode con- 
cerning the writer's opinion of the services 
to ornithology of the eminent ornithologist. 
Dr. P. L. Sclater. In Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
for 1896, No. 49, pp. xviii-xix. 

424. List of private collections of birds 
containing over 1,000 specimens which have 
been presented at various times to the U. S. 
Nat. Mus. In Rep. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 
1893-4, pp. 48-49. (1896.) 

425. Melopelia leucoptera in Osceola 
county, Florida. In Auk, XIV, pp. 88-89. 
(Jan., 189 ^) 

426. Note on Junco annectens Baird and 
J. ridgvvayi Mearus. In Auk, XIV, p. 94. 
(Jan., 1897.) 

427. Correct nomenclature of the Texas 
cardinal. In Auk, XIV, p. 95. (Jan., 
1897.) 

428. Dendroica cserulea vs. Dendroica 
rara. In Auk, XIV, p. 97. (Jan., 1897.) 

429. Birds of the Galapagos archipelago. 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1897, XIX, 
pp. 459-670. 

430. Where Junco roosts. /)( Bull. Wil- 
son Orn. Chapt. Agassiz Assn. for May, 

1897, pp. 25-26. 

431. Description of the nest and eggs of 
Bachman's warbler. In Auk, XIV, pp. 309- 
310. (July, 1897.) 

432. An earlier name for Ammodramus 
lecoutei. In Auk, XIV, p. 320. (July, 
1897.) 

433. On the status of Lanius robustus 
Baird as a North American bird. In Auk, 
XIV, p. 323. (July, 1897). 

434. Review of Chapman's 'Bird Life.' 
In Auk, XIV, pp. 336-338. (July, 1897.) 

435. Remarks concerning Mega scops 
pinosus Nelson and Palmer. In Biol. Cent. 
Amer. Aves., Ill, p. 17. (Nov., 1897.) 

436. An amateur's experiment. In 
Garden and Forest for 1897, pp. 504-507. 



Indiana University 



\^Ridgway 



437. Birds of the Galapagos Islands. In 
Am. Nat., XXXII, pp. 386-8S9. (May, 
1898.) 

438. Descriptions of supposed new gen- 
era, species and subspecies of American 
bird.s. I. Fringillidse. In Auk. XV, pp. 
223-230. (July, 1898.) 

439. Mew species of American birds. II. 
Fringillidse (continued). In Auk, XV, pp. 
319-324. (Oct., 1898.) 

440. Description of new species of hum- 
ming bird from Arizona. In Auk, XV, pp. 
325-326. (Oct., 1898.) 

441. Hemithraupis. A correction. In 
Auk, XV, pp. 330-331. 

442. The home of 
Osprey, III, pp. 35-36. 

443. New species 



A correction. 
(Oct., 1898.) 
the ivory-bill. 
(Nov., 1898.) 
of American bird 



In 



Fringillidse (continued). In Auk, XVI, pp. 
35-37. (Jan., 1897.) 

444. On the genu.s Astragalinu.s cabanis. 
In Auk, XVI, pp. 79-80. (Jan., 1899.) 

445. On the generic name Aimophila 
versus Peuca^a. In Auk, XVI, pp. 80-81. 
(Jan., 1899.) 

446. A fraud — look out for him. In 
Osprey, III, p. 94. (Feb., 1899.) 

447. New species of American birds. H". 
Fringillidse (concluded). In Auk, XVI, 
pp. 254-256. (July, 1899.) 

448. New species of American birds. V. 
Corvidse (concluded). In Auk, XVII, pp. 
27-29. (Jan., 1900.) 

449. New species of American birds. VI. 
Fringillidse (supplement). In Auk, XVII, 
pp. 29-30. (Jan., 1900.) 

450. Concerning the use of scientific 
names. In Condor, II, p. 41. (March, 
1900.) 

451. Song birds of Europe and Amer- 
ica. In Bird-Lore, II, pp. 69-75. (June, 
1900.) 

452. Description of Buteo borealis socor- 
roensi-s. In Biol. Cent. Amer. Aves, for 
Nov., 1900, III, p. 64. 



4.53. New birds of the families Tana- 
gridt? and Icteridse. In Proc. Wash. Acad. 
Sci. for April, 1901, III, pp. 149-155. 

454. Descriptions of three new birds of 
the families Mniotiltidso and Corvidse. In 
Auk, XIX, pp. 69-70. (Jan., 1902.) 

455. The birds of North and Middle 
America. Part I. Washington, 1901, pp. 
i-xxx, 1-715, 19 plates. Part II. Washing- 
ton, 1902, pp. i-xx, 1-834, 22 plates. 

456. The elf owl in California. In 
Condor, IV, pp. 18-19. (Jan., 1902.) 

457. Review of Pycraft's 'Classification 
of the Falcon if ormes.' In Science, N. S., 
XVII, pp. 509-511. (March, 1903.) 

458. Leophophanes vs. Bseolophus. In 
Auk, XX, p. 308. (July, 1903.; 

459. Descriptions of new genera, species 
and subspecies of American birds. In Proc. 
Biol. Soc. Wash, for Sept., 1903. Vol. XVI, 
pp. 10.5-111. 



David Andrew Rothrock, A.B. (1892), 
A.M. (1893), Ph.D. See Faculty list. 



Edward Earnest Ruby, A.B. (1897), A.M. 
Tutor in Greek, 1897-1898; Tutor in 
Frencli, 1898-1899; Instructor in 
French. 1901-1902. Now Professor of 
Latin, Whitman College, Walla Walla, 
Wash. 

1. Register of graduates of the Indi- 
ana T'niversity, including advanced and hon- 
orai-y degrees. Third edition. Blooming- 
ton, Ind., 1901. Pp. 112. 

2. The catalogue of the Phi Delta 
Theta fraternity. Seventh edition. Chicago, 
1904. Pp. xvi. 650 ; 1 plate. 



Henry Woldman 
D.C.L. 



RuoFF, A.B. (1890), 



1. Origin of the family ; ethical duties 
of the home ; the home and the state ; the 



338 



Sliinn ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



home in literature. Chapters contributed to 
'Our Home.' Springfiekl, Mass., 1S08. Pp. 
98. 

2. The century book of facts. Spring- 
field, 1899. Pp. G88 ; 8 plates. 

3. Woman during the Dark Ages ; 
woman under medieval institutions ; the 
dawn of woman's power. Chapters contrib- 
uted to 'Woman.' Springfield, 1900. Pp. 
121: 17 plates. 

4. Leaders of men. Springfield, 1901. 
Pp. 695 ; 33 plates. 

5. The capitals of the world. Spring- 
field, 1902. Vol. I, pp. 414: vol. II, pp. 
532 ; 800 plates. 

6. Universal manual of ready refer- 
ence. Springfield, 1904. Vol. I, pp. 741 : 
5 plates. 

7. One hundred immortals. New 
York. ( In press. ) 



Newell Sanders, B.S. (1873). Chatta- 
nooga, Tenn. 

1. Wendell Sanders. 1893. Pp. 112; 
37 plates. 



Thomas E Sanders, A.B. (1895). Super- 
intendent of Schools, Batesville, Ark. 
(After July 1, 1904, Editor Progressive 
Teacher.) 

1. Opening exercises for schools. 
Batesville, Ark., 1901. Pp. 150. 

2. A guide to the study of literature in 
our schools. Batesville, Ark., 1903. Pp. 56. 

3. Students' and teachers' aid to the 
study of civil government. Batesville. Ark., 
1904. Pp. 136. 



William Francis Lewis Sanders, A.B. 
(1873). Teacher in High School, Con- 
n'^rsville, Ind. 



grammar and analysis, with diagrams. Con- 
nersville, Ind., 1891. Pp. 269. 



George L Scherger. A.B. (1894), Ph.D. 
Professor of History, Armour Institute 
of Technology, Chicago. 

1. The evolution of modern liberty. 
New York, 1904. Pp. xiv, 284. 



JouN Andrew Siiafer. A.B. (1894), A.M. 
(1895). Valparaiso, Ind. 

1. Hygiene of school architecture. In 
Inland Educator, III, pp. 311-312 (Jan., 
1897) ; IV, pp. 20-'23 (Feb., 1897) ; IV, pp. 
75-78 (March, 1897). 



John Wilkes Shepherd, A.B. (1896), 
A.M. (1898). Professor of Chemistry, 
Chicago Normal School, Chicago, 111. 

1. The determination of methane, car- 
bon monoxide, and hydrogen by explosion in 
technical gas analysis. (Joint author with 
W. A. Noyes.) /;( Jour. Am. Chem. Soc, 
XX, pp. 343-348. 



Everett Shepardson, A.B. (1890), A.JNI. 
(1892.) Assistant Professor of Psychol- 
ogy and Pedagogy, Los Angeles State 
Normal, Los Angeles, Cal. 

1. Should fairy stories and folk tales 
be used in first and second grades? In Los 
Angeles State Normal Illxponent, IV, pp. 
1.50-158. (Jan., 1896.) 



Frederick Lafayette Shinn. A.B. (1901), 
A.M. (1902). Assistant in Physical 
Chemistry, University of Wisconsin, 
Madison, Wis. 



1. ''"'■e Engli.sh sentence, a treatise on 

(24) 339 



1. The quantitative determination of 
selenium in organic compounds. (.loint au- 



Indiana University 



[_S/iinri 



thor with li. K. Lyons.) //( Joiif. Am. 
Chem. Soc, XXIV, pp. 1087-1093. 

2. On double and triple thiocyanates 
of caesium, cobalt, and silver. (Joint au- 
thor with H. L. Wells.) In Am. Chem. 
Jour., XXIX, pp. 474-478. 



Claude E. Siebenthal. Student, 1890-93. 
A.s.si.stant, U. S. Geological Survey, 
Wa.shington, D. C. 

1. The geology of Dallas county, Ar- 
kansas. In Ann. Rept. Arkansas Geol. Surv. 
for 1891, II, pp. 279-318. (1894.) 

2. The Bedford oolitic limestone of In- 
diana. (Joint author with T. C. Hopkins.) 
In 21st Ann. Kept. Dept. Geol. and Nat. 
Res. of Indiana for 1896, pp. 291-413. 
(1897.) 

3. The Bedford oolitic limestone. In 
19th Ann. Rept. U. S. Geol. Surv., pt. VI 
( continued ) , pp. 292-296. ( 1898. ) 

4. The Bedford oolitic limestone. In 
Mineral Industry for 1898, vol. VIII, pp. 
479-482. (1899.) 

5. The coal deposits of Indiana. (Joint 
author with W. S. Blatchley, G. H. Ashby, 
and others. ) In 23d Ann. Rept. Dept. Geol. 
and Nat. Res. of Indiana for 1898, pp. 1- 
1741. (1899.) 

6. Review of 24th annual report of 
the Department of Geology and Natural Re- 
sources of Indiana. In Jour. Geol., VIII, 
pp. 475-477. (1900.) 

7. On the use of the term Bedford 
limestone. In Jour. Geol., IX, pp. 234-235. 
<1901.) 

8. Review of 25th annual report of the 
Department of Geology and Natural Re- 
sources of Indiana. In Jour. Geol., IV, pp. 
354-356. (1901.) 

9. Review of William Battle Phillips's 
'Texas Petroleum.' In Jour. Geol., IX, pp. 
637-638. (1901.) 

10. The Silver Greek hydraulic lime- 



stone of southeastern Indiana. In 25th Ann. 
Kept. Dept. Geol. and Nat. Res. of Indiana, 
pp. 331-389 ; pis. xiii-xiv, figs. Ixxi-lxxii. 
(1901.) 

11. The Indiana oolitic industry in 
1900. In 25th Ann. Rept. Dept. Geol. and 
Nat. Res. of Indiana, pp. 390-393. (1901.) 



Fkank Darius Simons, A.B. (1895), M.S. 
Assistant Chemist, Bureau Internal 
Revenue, U. S. Treasury Department, 
Washington, D. O. 

1. The action of certain bodies on the 
digestive ferments. In Jour. Am. Chem. 
Soc, XIX, pp. 744-754. 

2. Detection of caramel in spirits and 
vinegar. (Joint author with C. A. Cramp- 
ton.) In Jour. Am. Chem. Soc, XXI, pp. 
355-358. 

3. Detection of foreign coloring matter 
in spirits. (Joint author with C. S. Cramp- 
ton.) Ill .Jour. Am. Chem. Soc, XXII, pp. 
810-813. 1 plate. 

4. Synthetic chemicals linder the War 
Revenue Act. (.Joint author with C. A. 
Crampton.) In Am. Jour. Phar., LXXII, 
p. 107. 



Vesto Malvin Slipher, A.B. (1901), A.M. 
(1902). Assistant in charge of Lowell 
Observatory, Flagstaff, Ariz. 

1. Spectrograms of Jupiter. In Pop. 
Ast., No. 101, pp. 1-4; 2 plates. (Jan., 
1903.) 

2. The spectroscopic binary /3 Scorpii. 
In Lowell Observatory Bull., No. 1, p. 4. 
(June, 1903.) 

3. A spectrographic investigation of 
the rotation velocity of Venus. In Ast. 
Nach., Nos. 3891-3892, pp. 35-52. (August, 
1903.) 

4. On the efficiency of the spectro- 
graph for investigating planetary rotations 



340 



Sparling ] 



Bibliography : Alumni 



and on the accuracy of the inclination 
method of measurement. Tests on the rota- 
tion of the planet Mars. In Lowell Observ- 
atory Bull., No. 4, pp. 19-2y. (August, 
1903.) 

5. Variable velocity of 7 Scorpii in 
the line of sight. In Lowell Observatory 
Bull., No. 4, p. 23. (August, 1903.) 



Frederick Miller Smith, A.B. (1899). 
Associate Editor Woman's Home Com- 
panion, New York City. 

1. Thoreau. In Critic, XXXVII, pp. 
60-67. (July, 1900.) 

2. The literary aspirant again. In 
Critic, XXXIX, pp. 270-272. (Sept., 1901.) 

3. Christine : a serial novelette. In 
Ladies' Home Journal. (Nov., 1901-Feb., 
1902.) Illustrated. 

4. Review of Robert Louis Stevenson's 
'Essays.' In Poet-Lore, XIV. pp. 70-83. 
(Oct., 1902.) 

5. The trilemma of Albertine. In 
Woman's Home Companion, 1903-1904. 



Rosa Smith. 
mann. 



»Sfce Mrs. Carl H. Eigen- 



WiLLiAM Wesley Spangler, A.B. (1880), 
B.S. (1880), A.M. (1886.) Librarian, 
1881-1893. Auburn Junction, Ind. 

1. Genealogy of the Weyer family in 
Germany. Bloomington, Ind., 1886. 



Samuel Edwin Sparling, A.B. (1892), 
Ph.D. Assistant Professor of Political 
Science, University of Wisconsin, Mad- 
ison, Wis. 

1. Municipal history and present or- 
ganization of Chicago. In Bull. Univ. of 
Wisconsin, Madison, 1898. Pp. 188. 



2. The small city and the model 
charter. In Proc. Nat. Municipal League 
for 1899, pp. 15. 

3. Uniform accounting for cities. In 
Proc. Nat. Municipal League for 1899, pp. 
15. 

4. Uniform accounting for Wisconsin 
cities. In Bull. League of Wisconsin Mu- 
nicipalities, No. 3, 1899. 

5. Notes on municipal government. 
(League of Wisconsin Municipalities.) In 
Ann. Am. Acad. Pol. and Soc. Sci., XIII, 
pp. 269-270. (1899.) 

6. Review of Frank Parson's 'The City 
for the people.' In Municipal Affairs, IV, 
pp. 405-406. (1900.) 

7. Notes on municipal government. In 
Ann. Am. Acad. Pol. and Soc. Sci., XIV, pp. 
116-117. (1901.) 

8. Responsible county government. In 
Pol. Sci. Quart., XVI, pp. 437-449. (1901.) 

9. State boards of control. In Ann. 
Am. Acad. Pol. and Soc. Sci., XVII, pp. 
74-91. (1901.) 

10. Syllabus on municipal government. 
In Pub. Nat. Municipal League. Second 
Report of Committee on Instruction in Mu- 
nicipal Government in American Educa- 
tional Institutions, June, 1902. 

11. Chicago's voters' league. In Out- 
look. LXXI, pp. 495-498. (June, 1902.) 

12. Municipal history and organization 
of Chicago. In Bull. No. 29. Pol. Sci. 
Series. University of Wisconsin. 

13. Municipal conditions in Wisconsin. 
In Ann. Am. Acad. Pol. and Soc. Sci. (Feb.. 
1904.) 

14. An American Political Science As- 
sociation. In Review of Reviews, XXIX, 
pp. 212-213. (Feb., 1904.) 

15. The work of the league of Wiscon- 
sin municipalities. In Proc. Mich. Pol. Sci. 
Asso., Feb., 1904. 

16. History of the league of Wisconsin 
municipalities. In Iowa Hist. Rev., April, 
1904. 



341 



Indiana University 



{_Spar/ing 



17. Editor of 'The Municipality,' a 
monthly journal devoted to the discussion of 
municipal questions. In its fourth year. 



William McKendree Springer, A.B. 
( 1858 ) , A.M. ( 18G1 ) , LL.D. Washing- 
ton, D. C. 

1. The telegraph monopoly. /// No. 
Am. Rev., CXXXII, pp. 369-382. (April, 
1881.) 

2. Gold and silver : what shall the 
ratio be? In No. Am. Rev., CLV, pp. 4-6. 
(July, 1892.) 

3. Why the Democrats should elect the 
next President. In Arena, VI, pp. 198-201. 
(July, 1892.) 

4. How to revise the tariff. //( No. 
Am. Rev.. CLVI, pp. 127-135. (Feb., 1893.) 

5. The financial muddle. (Joint author 
witli J. Sterling ^Nfortou and Henry W. Can- 
non.) In No. Am. Rev., CLX, pp. 129-156. 
(Feb.. 1895.) 



Edwin Diller Starbuck, A.B. (1890), 
Ph.D. Assistant Professor of Educa- 
tion. Leland Stanford Jr. University, 
Stanford T'niversity. Cal. 

1. A study of conversion. In Am. 
Jour. Psych., VIII, pp. 268-308. (Jan., 
1897. ) 

2. Some aspects of religious growth. 
In Am. Jour. Psych., IX, pp. 70-124. (Oct., 
1897.) 

3. Child study and its possibilities as 
a science. In Northwestern Mo., IX. pp. 
358-362. (March-April, 1899.) 

4. The psychology of religion. With 
an introduction by Professor William .lames. 
London, 1899. Pp. xx, 423. 



Wahdku W Stevens, LL.B. (1867). Salem, 
Ind. 

1. Swine husbandry. Indianapolis, 
1899. Pp. 200. 

2. History of Washington county, Ind. 
1904. Pp. 600. (In press.) 



Klmer Bryan Stewart. A.B. Pastor 
Tliird United Presbyterian Church, Chi- 
cago. 

1. The tithe. Chicago, 1903. Pp. 
xxii. 82. 

2. The tithe covenant plan for financ- 
ing the Kingdom of Christ. Chicago. 1903. 
Pp. 15. 



John Charles Stone, A.B. (1897), A.M. 
(1897). Associate Professor of Mathe- 
matics, State Normal School, Ypsilanti, 
Mich. 

1. Algebra by correspondence. (Joint 
author with E. A. Lyman.) Chicago, 1902. 
Pp. 100. 

2. Geometry by correspondence. (Joint 
author with E. A. Lyman.) Chicago. 1902. 
Pp. 100. 

3. ^Monograph on teaching arithmetic. 
Boston. 1903. Pp. 25. 

4. Sonthworth-Stone arithmetic. (Joint 
author with G. S. Southworth.) Boston, 
1904. Book I. pp. 184: book II. pp. 237; 
book III, pp. 287. 

5. Alonograph on method in geometry. 
Boston, 1904. Pp. 36. 



Edgar Howard Sturtevant, A.B. (1898), 
Ph.D. Tutor in Latin, 1895-1898, In- 
structor in Latin, 1901-1902. Now 
Acting Assistant Professor of Latin, 
University of Missonri, Columbia, ^NIo. 

1. Contraction in the case forms of the 



342 



Swain ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



Lotin io nnd w stems, and of dcus, is, aud 
idem. Chicago, 1902. Pp. 36. 

2. Latin r.s- from /-.s-.s-. In Clas. Rev., 
XVIII. 1904. 



Joseph Swain, B.L. (1883), M.S. (1895), 
LL.I). Instructor in INIatliematics and 
Zoology, Indiana University, 1883-1885 ; 
Professor of Mathematics, 1886-1891; 
President of the University, 1893-1902. 
Now President of Swarthmore College, 
Swarthmore, Pa. 

1. Notes on a collection of fishes from 
Johnston's Island, including descriptions of 
five new species. (Joint author with Rosa 
Smith.) In Proc. Nat. Mns., V, pp. 119-143. 
(1882.) 

2. A review of the Syugnathinse of 
the I'uited States, with «i description of 
one new species. In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 
V, pp. 307-315. (Aug. 15, 1882.) 

3. A review of the species of Stole- 
jihorus. found on the Atlantic coast of the 
United States. In Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. 
for 1882, II, pp. 55-57. (Oct. 6, 1882.) 

4. A review of Swaiusou's genera of 
fishes. In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadel- 
phia for 1882, pp. 272-284. 

5. An identification of the species of 
fishe.s described in Shaw's General Zoology. 
In Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia for 
1882. Pp. 303-309. 

6. A review of the genus Noturus. with 
a description of one new species. (Joint 
author with George B. -Kalb.) In Proc. 
U. S. Nat. Mus., V, pp. 638-644. (May 23, 
1883. ) 

7. Ijist of fishes collected in the Clear 
Pork of the Cumberland, Whitley county, 
Kentucky, with description of three new 
species. ( .Toint author with David Starr 
Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VI, 
pp. 248-251. (Nov. 27, 1883.) 



8. Description of a new si)ecies of 
Hadropterus (Iladropterus scierus) from 
southern Indiana. In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus.. VI, p. 252. (Nov. 27, 1883.) 

9. Descriptions of Scaroid fishes from 
Havana and Key West, Pla., including five 
new species. (Joint author with D. S. Jor- 
dan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, pp. 
81-102. (July 1, 1884.) 

10. Notes on fishes collected by D. S. 
Jordan, Cedar Keys, Fla. (Joint author 
with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., VII, pp. 230-234. (August 5, 1884.) 

11. Notes on the pipe-fishes of Key 
West, Fla., with description of Siphostoma 
McKayi, a new species. (Joint author with 
Seth E. Meek.) In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
VII, pp. -37-239. (August 5, 1884.) 

12. A review of the American species 
of marine Mugilidse. (Joint author with 
D. S. .lordan. ) Jn Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
VII, pp. 261-275. (August 22, 1884.) 

13. A review of the species of the genus 
Hspuiulon. (Joint author with D. S. Jor- 
dan.) Ill Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, pp. 
281-317. (August 28, 1884.) 

14. A review of the American species of 
Epiuephalus and related genera. (Joint au- 
thor with D. S. Jordan.) In Proc. U. S. 
Nat. Mus., VII, pp. 358-410. (1884.) 

15. A review of the species of Lutjan- 
injv and Hoplopagrinse found in American 
waters. (Joint author with D. S. Jordan.) 
In Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VII, pp. 427-474. 
(Sept. 19, 1884.) 

16. Inaugural address at Indiana Uni- 
versity, 1893. Published by Indiana Uni- 
versity, July, 1893. 

17. The State University. In 17th 
Bien. Rep. Sup. Pub. Inst., Dec. 27, 1893, 
p. 111. 

18. What should the high school do for 
the graduate of the elementary schools? In 
Proc. Nat. Educ. Asso. for 1896, pp. 362- 
363. 



343 



Indiana University 



I Si 



19. University ideals at Stanford. In 
Proc. Nat. Educ. Asso. for 1897, pp. 3G6- 
373. 

20. College entrance requirements. In 
Proc. Nat. Educ. Asso. for 1S99, pp. G30, 
827. 

21. The State University. In Proc. 
Nat. Educ. Asso. for 1900, p.' 10(3. 

22. State aid to higher education in 
Europe and America. In Proc. Nat. Educ. 
Asso. for 1900, p. 4.57. 

23. Inaugural address at Swarthmore 
College. Published by Swarthmore College, 
Dec, 1902, pp. 457-463. 

24. Address to Alumni of Swarthmore 
College, 1903. Published by Swarthmore 
College, July, 1903, pp. 1-8. 

Numerous other short papers and ad- 
dresses published in various years. 



10. Articles on pedagogy. In Indiana 
Sch. Jour, monthly from 1890-1899 ; articles 
in school journals, at various times, on 
pedagogical subjects. 



Arnold Tompkins, A.B. (1889), A.M. 
(1892), Ph.D. Priucipal of the Chi- 
cago Normal School, Chicago. 

1. A graded course of study. Frank- 
lin, Ind., 1883. Pp. iii, 242. 

2. The philosophy of teaching. Bos- 
ton, 1895. Pp. xii, 280. 

3. The philosophy of school manage- 
ment. Boston. 1895. Pp. xiv. 222. 

4. The relation of sociology and peda- 
gogy. In Am. Jour. Soc. for Nov., 1895. 

5. Literary interpretations. Boston, 

1896. Pp. vi, 204. 

6. The science of discourse. Boston, 

1897. Pp. xiv, 252. 

7. Review of Vincent's 'The social 
mind and education.' In Am. Jour. Soc. 
(1897.) 

8. Herbart's philosophy and hi.s edu- 
cational theory. In Educ. Rev., XVI, pp. 
233-243. (Oct., 1898.) 

9. Review of J. O. Quantz's 'Problems 
in the psychology of reading.' In Educ. 
Rev., XVI, pp. 513-517. (Dec, 1898). 



Frederick Wilson Truscott, A.B. (1891), 
A.M. (1892), Ph.D. Instructor in 
German, 1891-1893. Now Professor of 
Germanic Languages and Literature, 
AVest Virginia University, Morgantown, 
W. Va. 

1. Laplace's essay on probabilities. 
(Joint translator with F. L. Emory.) New 
York. 1902. Pp. iv, 196. 

2. Wildenbruch's Kinderthriinen. New 
York, 1904. Pp. iii, 90. 2 plates. (In 
press. ) 



Albert Brennus Ulrey, A.B. (1892), 
A.M. (1893). Instructor in Zoiilogy, 
1892-1894. Now Professor of Biology 
Liniversity of Southern California, Los 
Angeles, Cal. 

1. A review of the EmbiotocidiB. 
(Joint author with Carl H. Eigenmann.) 
In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1891, p. 
176 (abstract) ; in Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. 
for 1892, pp. 381-400. 

2. Notes on the American bittern 
(Botaurus lentiginosus). In Ornithologist 

and Oologist, XVII. pp. 76-77. (May, 
1892.) 

3. The fishes of Wabash county. In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1893, pp. 229- 
231. 

4. Preliminary descriptions of some 
South American Characinidse. In Am. 
Nat., XXVIII, pp. 610-611. (July, 1894.') 

5. On some South American Characin- 
idse. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1893, 
p. 226. (Abstract.) 



344 



M^arthin ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



6. On the occurrence of Kirtland's 
warbler in Indiana. In Proc. Indiana Acad. 
Sci. for 1894, p. 224. 

7. Contributions to tlie biological sur- 
vey of Wabash county. In Proc. Indiana 
Acad. Sci. for 1895, pp. 147-148. 

8. Birds of Wabash county. In Proc. 
Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1895, pp. 148-159. 

9. On the increasing abundance of the 
opossum (Didelphis virginiana) in North- 
ern Indiana. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 
for 1896, p. 279. 

10. The South American Characinidaj 
collected by Charles F. Hartt. In Ann. 
New York Acad. Sci., VIII, pp. 257-300. 
(Jan., 1895.) 

11. On the occurrence of the Russian 
thistle (Salsola kali tragus) in Wabash 
county. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 
1896, p. 224. 

12. Notes on the embryology of Para- 
gordius ( Gordinus ) variu.s ( Leidy ) . In 
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1897, pp. 232- 
233. 



Benjamin Vail, Jr., A.B. (1878). Wash- 
ington, D. C. 

1. The poet's tribute to Garfield. Cam- 
bridge, Mass. 



James M. Van Hook, A.B. (1899), A.M. 
(1900). Plant Pathologist, Ohio Agri- 
cultural Experiment Station, Wooster, 
Ohio. 

1. Notes on the division of the cell 
and nucleus in liverworts. In Bot. Gaz., 
XXX, pp. 394-399; 1 plate. (Dec, 1900.) 

2. Pink rot, an attendant of apple 
scab. (Joint author with J. Craig.) In 
Cornell Univ. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull., No. 207, 
pp. 161-171 ; 5 figures, 2 plates. 

3. Diseases of ginseng. In Cornell 
Univ. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull., 25 figures. 
(1904.) 



Joseph H Vobis, A.B. (1896). Teacher of 
Biology, High School, Evansville, Ind. 

1. Material for the study of the vari- 
ation of Pimephales notatus (Rafinesque), 
in Turkey Lake and in Shoe and Tippecanoe 
lakes. In Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1898, 
pp. 233-2.39. 



Francis Marion Walters, A.B. (1887), 

A.M. (1891). Professor of Chemistry, 

Missouri State Normal School, War- 
rensburg. Mo. 

1. The elements of physiology. Co- 
lumbia, Mo., 1902. Pp. 198. 



Jennie E. (Horning) Walters (Mrs. 
Francis Marion Walters). Student, 
1886-1888. Warrensburg, Mo. 

1. A review of the American genera 
and species of Chsetodontidse. (Joint 
author with C. H. Eigenmann. ) In Ann. 
Acad. Nat. Sci., New York, for 1887, pp. 
1-18. 



Aldked Scott Warthin, A.B. (1888), 
M.D., Ph.D. Professor of Pathology 
and Director of the Pathological Lab- 
oratory, University of Michigan, Ann 
Arbor. 

1. Scheme for the systematic study of 
medical cases. Ann Arbor, 1892. Pp. 16. 

2. Additional notes on the diazo-reac- 
tion. In Med. News, 1893. Pp. 12. 

3. Some physiologic effects of music 
in hypnotized subjects. In Med. News, 1894. 
Pp. 13. 

4. Accentuation of the pulmonary 
second sound an important sign in the di- 
agnosis of pericarditis. In Med. News, 
1895. Pp. 15. 

5. Report of a case of ectopic gesta- 
tion associated with tuberculosis of the 



345 



Indiana University 



[// arthin 



tubes, placenta, and fetus. In Med. News, 

1896. Pp. 16. 2 plates. 

6. Ilypoleucocytosis in acute tubercu- 
losis. In Med. News, 1890. I'p. 8. 

7. Fibrolipoma of the kidney. In 
Jour. Path, and Bact.. 1S97, pp. 404-411. 
2 plates. 

8. The diagnosis of primary sarcoma 
of the pleura from the cells found in the 
pleuritic exudate. In Med. News, 1897. Pp. 
16, 5 plates. 

9. Some exi)erimental investigations 
as to the effects of the administration of 
yeast nuclein upon the leucocytes. In New 
York Med. Jour, for 1897. Pp. 45. 

10. Practical pathology. Ann Arbor, 

1897. I'p. 150. 

11. The minute pathology of acute 
hsemorrhagic pancreatitis associated with 
multiple fat-necrosis. /)(, Pliila. Med. Jour, 
for 1898. Pp. 19. 1 plate. 

12. A primary polymorphous-cell sar- 
coma of the nose. In New York Med. Jour, 
for 1899. I'p. IS. 

13. The statistics of fifty autopsies on 
tuberculosis subjects. Usual localizations 
of tuberculosis. In Med. News, 1899. Pp. 
16. 

14. The pathology of the Pacinian cor- 
puscle. (Prize e.s.say. ) In Phila. Med. 
Jour, for 1899. Pp. 20, 9 plates. 

15. JMultiple primary carcinoma. In 
Jour. Am. :Med. Assoc, for 1899. Pp. 20. 

16. The coexistence of carcinoma and 
tuberculosis of the mammary gland. /;/ Am. 
Jour. Med. Sci. for 1899. Pp. 11, 1 plate. 

17. A case of primary adenocarcinoma 
of the gallbladder with secondaries in both 
adrenals, melanosis of skin (Addison's dis- 
ease?), vitiligo, and hypertrophy of the pan- 
creas. In Phila. INIed. Jour, for 1900. Pp. 
28. 

18. Multiple traumatic hemorrhage of 
the liver associated with multiple pulmo- 
nary emboli of liver-cells and giant cells re- 



sembling bone-marrow cells. In Med. News 
for 1900. Pp. 31 ; 1 plate. 

19. Accessory adrenal body in the broad 
ligament. In Am. Jour. Obstet., 1900. Pp. 
9, 2 plates. 

20. Adenoma of both adrenals in the 
new-born, associated with retrogressive 
changes in the adrenal.s of Marchand. In 
Archives of Pediatrics. 1901. Pp. 16; 2 
plates. 

21. A case of endothelioma of the lach- 
rymal gland (myxo-chondro-endothelioma 
cylindromatodes), with an analysis of previ- 
ously reported cases of lachrymal gland 
tumors. /() Archives of Ophthalmology, 
1901. Pp. 20 ; 2 plates. 

22. [Multiple primary neoplasms in one 
individual. //; Phila. Med. Jour, for 1901. 
Pp. 7. 

23. Disappearing tumors. (Joint author 
with W. A. Spitzler.) //; Med. News for 
1901. Pp. 14. 

24. A contribution to the normal his- 
tology and pathology of the hemolymph 
glands. In Jour. Boston Soc. of Med. Sci. 
for 1901. Pp. 22. In Jour. Med. Research, 
1901, pp. 3-25. 

25. The normal histologj' of the human 
hemolymph glands. In Am. Jour. Anat., I, 
pp. 03-79. 

20. Section on 'The voluntary muscles, 
tendons, tendon-sheaths and bursse.' In 
Am. Textbook of Path. Philadelphia, 1901. 
Pp. 724-745. 

27. The changes prodiiced in the hemo- 
lymph glands of the sheep and goat by 
splenectomy, hemolytic poisons and hemor- 
rhage. In Jour. ^led. Research, for 1902. 
In Yaughan Festschrift, 1903, pp. 21 : 15 
plates. 

28. Are the hemolymph nodes organs 
sui generis? In Trans. Chicago Pathol. Soc. 
for 1902, pp. 151-174. 

29. The pathology of pei-nicious anae- 
mia, with si:)ecial reference to the changes 



340 



IVissler ] 



Bibliography: Alumni 



occurring in the hemolymph nodes. In Am. 
Jour. Med. Sci. for 1902, pp. 45, 7 plates. 

30. Translator and editor of Ziegler's 
'German pathology.' New York, 1903. Pp. 
760 ; 586 figures. 

31. A contribution to the casuistry of 
placental and congenital tuberculosis. (Joint 
author with D. M. Cowie.) In Jour, of In- 
fectious Diseases, 1904, pp. 140-169. 

32. A clinical and pathological study of 
two cases of splenic ansemia, with early and 
late stages of cirrhosis. (Joint author with 
G. Dock.) In Am. Jour. Med. Sci. for 1904. 
Pp. .32, 10 plate.s. 

33. The development of hemolympy 
nodes in adipose tissue. In Trans. Phila- 
delphian Pathol. Soc. for 1904. 

34. Editor department of pathology. 
Reference Handbook of Medical Sciences, 2d 
edition, New York. 1900-1904. Author of 
numerous articles for same. 



Joshua Howe Watts, A.B. (1857), Santa 
Cruz de Vojoa, Honduras. 

1. Banana culture in Central America. 
In Self-Culture Mag., for May, 1900. 



Lydia Whitaker, A.B. (1900). Teacher 
of Latin, Terre Haute, Ind. 

1. The prophet of St. Pierre. New 
York, 1904. Pp. 200. 6 plates. 



John Edwakd Wiley, A.B. (1885), A.M. 
(1889), LL.B. (1891). Anderson, Ind. 

1. The tornado (a story). 

2. Books and reading for pvipil-s. 



Howard Lafayette Wilson. A.B. (1889), 
A.]\L (1S91). Teacher of Literature 
and General History. State Normal 
School. River Falls, Wis. 

1. I'resident Buchanan's proposed in- 
tervention in Mexico. In Am. Hist. Rev., 
V. pp. 687-701. (.July, 1900.) 



2. The function of the high school. In 
South Dakota Educator, XV, pp. 43-47. 
(March, 1902.) 

3. Intervention in Mexico. (1904.) 
Pp. xii, 2.50. (In press.) 



John Benjamin Wisely, A.B. (1890). 
A.M. (1891). Head of Department of 
Grammar and Composition, Indiana 
State Normal School, Terre Haute, Ind. 

1. Studies in the science of English 
grammar. Terre Haute, Ind., 1895. Pp. 
185. 

2. A new English grammar. Terre 
Haute, Ind., 1896. Pp. 227. 

3. Language for the grades. Terre 
Haute, Ind., 1896-1903. Pp. 237. 



Clark Wissler, A.B. (1897), A.M. 
(1899), Ph.D. Assistant Curator in 
Department of Ethnology, American 
Museum of Natural History. Assistant 
in Anthropology, Columbia University, 
New York City. 

1. Interest of children in the reading 
work of the elementary schools. In Ped. 
Sem.. V, pp. .523-541. (April, 1898.) 

2. The diffusion of the motor impulse. 
(Joint author with N. R. Richardson.) In 
Rsych. Rev., VII, pp. 29-38. (Jan., 1900.) 

3. The correlation of mental and physi- 
cal tests. Monograph supplement to the 
Psych. Rev., No. 16, New York, 1901. Pp. 
62. 

4. The growth of boys : correlation for 
the annual increments. In Am. Anthropol- 
ogist, V, pp. 81-88. 

5. Decorative and symbolic art of the 
Dakotas. In Proc. International Cong. 
Americanists, for 1902. New York. Pp. 
10. 2 plates. (Inpre.s.s. ) 



347 



Indiana University 



[ Wissler 



0. Development of the decorative and 
symbolic art of the Sioux. In Bull. Am. 
Mus. Nat. Hist, for 1904, pp. 250, 40 plates. 
(In press.) 



John Anderson Wood, A.B. (1897), A.M. 
(1901). Superintendent of Schools, La 
Porte, Ind. 

1. High school .statistics. (Joint au- 
thor with W. H. Sanders.) In Kep. Sub- 
committee to Indiana Town and City Su- 
perintendents' Assoc, for 1899, pp. 28-62. 

2. Relations of the schools to growing 
•disregard of authority. In Indiana Sch. 
Jour., XLIV, pp. 189-198. (April, 1899.) 

3. Use of pictures in teaching geog- 
raphy. In Bull. Am. Bureau of Geography, 
for Dec, 1900, p. 309; in Educ. Jour, for 
Oct. and Nov., 1901, pp. 71 and 118; in 
N. Y. Teachers' Monographs, for June, 1903. 

4. Work books. In Teachers' Jour., 
II, p. 554. (June, 1903.) 

5. Heating, ventilating and fuel for 
school buildings. La Porte, Ind., 1903. Pj). 
40. 



James Albert Woodburn, A.B. (1876), 
A.M. (1885), Ph.D. See Faculty list. 



William Theodore Wylie, A.B. (1848). 
Sparta, 111. 

1. Lessons and papers for the school 
and family. 

2. Editor of 'The Christian Giver.' 



Albert Henry Yoder, A.B. (1893). Pro- 
fessor of Pedagogy University of Wash- 
ington, Seattle, Wash. 

1. The study of the boyhood of great 
men. In Ped. Sem., Ill, pp. 134-156. (Oct., 
1894. ) 

2. Investigations in pubescence. In 



Trans. Illinois Soc. for Child-Study, II, pp. 
81-84. 

3. Pubescence. In North Western 
Mo., VIII, pp. 592-600. 

4. Editor of Journal of Childhood and 
Adolescence, 3 volumes, 114 issues. 

5. Incorrigibles. In Jour. Childhood 
and Adolescence, II, pp. 22-54. 

6. Mouth-breathing. In Jour. Child- 
hood and Adolescence, II, pp. 255-263. 

7. Discussion on psychology of puberty 
and adolescence by Dr. Colin Scott. In 
Proc. Nat. Educ. Assoc, for 1897, p. 951. 

8. Sex defferentiation in relation to 
secondary education. In Proc. Nat. Educ. 
Assoc, for 1903. pp. 785-790. 

9. Numerous short reviews of peda- 
gogical literature. In Jour, of Childhood 
and Adolescence. 



Peter A. Yoder, A.B. (1894), A.M. (1896), 
Ph.D. Associate Professor of Chemis- 
try, University of Utah. 

1. Ueber Dehydroschleimsiiure : eine 
neue Darstellungsmethode, sowie verschie- 
dene Salze und Ester derselben. Disserta- 
tion. Gottingen, 1901. Pp. 63 ; 1 plate. 

2. A new centrifugal soil elutriator. 
(Preliminary report.) In Proc. Fifth Inter- 
national Congress of Applied Chemistry, 
Sec. VII, pp. 9-21, 4 plates. 

3. A new centrifugal soil elutriator. 
In Bull. Utah Agri. Exp. Sta. (1901). 13 
plates. (In press.) 

4. Some observation.s on farming in 
Germany. In 5th An. Rep. Utah Farmers' 
Institutes, for 1901, pp. 82-92. 



Clarence Arthur Zaking, A.B. 
LL.B. (1896). 



(1895), 



1. 'The Arbutus' (Senior cla.ss annual, 
Indiana University). (Joint editor with 
Adelaide Perry Newsom). Bloomington, 
Ind., 1895. Pp. 240. 



348 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS ^ 

028 342 303 7 



y 



•"^^ 



